Manual of Military Training - Second, Revised Edition

By Author	[ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z \| Other Symbols ]
By Title	[ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z \| Other Symbols ]
By Language

Download this book: [ ASCII | HTML | PDF ]

Look for this book on Amazon

We have new books nearly every day.
If you would like a news letter once a week or once a month fill out this form and we will give you a summary of the books for that week or month by email.

Title: Manual of Military Training - Second, Revised Edition
Author: Moss, James A. (James Alfred), 1872-1941
Language: English
As this book started as an ASCII text book there are no pictures available.

*** Start of this LibraryBlog Digital Book "Manual of Military Training - Second, Revised Edition" ***

Manual of Military Training

(SECOND, REVISED EDITION)

COLONEL JAMES A. MOSS

UNITED STATES ARMY

(Officially adopted by ONE HUNDRED AND FIVE [105] of our military
schools and colleges.)

Intended, primarily, for use in connection with the instruction and
training of Cadets in our military schools and colleges and of COMPANY
officers of the National Army, National Guard, and Officers' Reserve
Corps; and secondarily, as a guide for COMPANY officers of the Regular
Army, the aim being to make efficient fighting COMPANIES and to
qualify our Cadets and our National Army, National Guard and Reserve
Corps officers for the duties and responsibilities of COMPANY officers
in time of war.

[Illustration]

Price $2.25

GENERAL AGENTS

GEORGE BANTA PUBLISHING COMPANY
Army and College Printers
MENASHA--WISCONSIN

_By_

JAS. A. MOSS

FIRST EDITION

First impression (October, 1914) 10,000
Second impression (September, 1915) 10,000
Third impression (March, 1916) 10,000
Fourth impression (July, 1916) 10,000
Fifth impression (February, 1917) 3,000
Sixth impression (April, 1917) 4,000

SECOND EDITION

First impression (May, 1917) 40,000
Second impression (August, 1917) 30,000
Third impression (November, 1917) 50,000
-------
Total 167,000

Publishers and General Distributers
GEORGE BANTA PUBLISHING CO., MENASHA, WIS.

OTHER DISTRIBUTERS
(Order from nearest one)

=Boston, Mass.= The Harding Uniform and Regalia Co., 22 School St.
=Chicago, Ill.= A. C. McClurg & Co.
=Columbus, Ohio.= The M. C. Lilley & Co.
=Fort Leavenworth, Kan.=
U. S. Cavalry Association.
Book Dept., Army Service Schools.
=Fort Monroe, Va.= Journal U. S. Artillery.
=Kalamazoo, Mich.= Henderson-Ames Co.
=New York.=
Baker & Taylor Co., 4th Ave.
Army and Navy Coöperative Co., 16 East 42nd St.
Ridabock & Co., 140 West 36th St.
Warnock Uniform Co., 16 West 46th St.
=Philadelphia, Pa.= Jacob Reed's Sons, 1424 Chestnut.
=Portland, Ore.= J. K. Gill Co.
=San Antonio, Tex.= Frank Brothers Alamo Plaza.
=San Francisco, Cal.= B. Pasquale Co., 115-117 Post St.
=Washington, D. C.=
Army and Navy Register, 511 Eleventh St. N. W.
Meyer's Military Shops, 1331 F. St. N. W.
U. S. Infantry Association, Union Trust Bldg.
PHILIPPINE ISLANDS: Philippine Education Co., Manila, P. I.
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS: Hawaiian News Co., Honolulu, H. T.
CANAL ZONE: Post Exchange, Empire, C. Z.

NOTE

In order to learn thoroughly the contents of this manual it is
suggested that you use in connection with your study of the book the
pamphlet, "QUESTIONS ON MANUAL OF MILITARY TRAINING," which, by means
of questions, brings out and emphasizes every point mentioned in the
manual.

"QUESTIONS ON MANUAL OF MILITARY TRAINING" is especially useful to
students of schools and colleges using the manual, as it enables them,
as nothing else will, to prepare for recitations and examinations.

The pamphlet can be gotten from the publishers, Geo. Banta Publishing
Co., Menasha, Wis., or from any of the distributers of "MANUAL OF
MILITARY TRAINING." Price 50 cts., postpaid.

PREFATORY

Not only does this manual cover all the subjects prescribed by War
Department orders for the Junior Division, and the Basic Course,
Senior Division, of the Reserve Officers' Training Corps, but it also
contains considerable additional material which broadens its scope,
rounding it out and making it answer the purpose of a general,
all-around book, complete in itself, for training and instruction in
the fundamentals of the art of war.

The Company is the _basic fighting tactical unit_--it is the
foundation rock upon which an army is built--and the fighting
efficiency of a COMPANY is based on systematic and thorough training.

This manual is a presentation of MILITARY TRAINING as manifested in
the training and instruction of a COMPANY. The book contains all the
essentials pertaining to the training and instruction of COMPANY
officers, noncommissioned officers and privates, and the officer who
masters its contents and who makes his COMPANY proficient in the
subjects embodied herein, will be in every way qualified, _without the
assistance of a single other book_, to command with credit and
satisfaction, in peace and in war, a COMPANY that will be an
_efficient fighting weapon_.

This manual, as indicated below, is divided into a Prelude and nine
Parts, subjects of a similar or correlative nature being thus grouped
together.

PRELUDE. THE OBJECT AND ADVANTAGES OF MILITARY TRAINING.
PART I. DRILLS, EXERCISES, CEREMONIES, AND INSPECTIONS.
PART II. COMPANY COMMAND.
PART III. MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS PERTAINING TO COMPANY TRAINING
AND INSTRUCTION.
PART IV. RIFLE TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION.
PART V. HEALTH AND KINDRED SUBJECTS.
PART VI. MILITARY COURTESY AND KINDRED SUBJECTS.
PART VII. GUARD DUTY.
PART VIII. MILITARY ORGANIZATION.
PART IX. MAP READING AND SKETCHING.

A schedule of training and instruction covering a given period and
suitable to the local conditions that obtain in any given school or
command, can be readily arranged by looking over the TABLE OF
CONTENTS, and selecting therefrom such subjects as it is desired to
use, the number and kind, and the time to be devoted to each,
depending upon the time available, and climatic and other conditions.

It is suggested that, for the sake of variety, in drawing up a program
of instruction and training, when practicable a part of each day or a
part of each drill time, be devoted to theoretical work and a part to
practical work, theoretical work, when possible, being followed by
corresponding practical work, the practice (the _doing_ of a thing)
thus putting a clincher, as it were, on the theory (the explaining of
a thing). The theoretical work, for example, could be carried on in
the forenoon and the practical work in the afternoon, or the
theoretical work could be carried on from, say, 8 to 9:30 a. m., and
the practical work from 9:30 to 10:30 or 11 a. m.

Attention is invited to the completeness of the Index, whereby one is
enabled to locate at once any point covered in the book.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

The author wishes to acknowledge the assistance received in the
revision of this Manual in the form of suggestions from a large number
of officers on duty at our military schools and colleges, suggestions
that enabled him not only to improve the Manual in subject-matter as
well as in arrangement, but that have also enabled him to give our
military schools and colleges a textbook which, in a way, may be said
to represent the consensus of opinion of our Professors of Military
Science and Tactics as to what such a book should embody in both
subject-matter and arrangement.

Suggestions received from a number of Professors of Military Science
and Tactics show conclusively that local conditions as to average age
and aptitude of students, interest taken in military training by the
student body, support given by the school authorities, etc., are so
different in different schools that it would be impossible to write a
book for general use that would, in amount of material, arrangement
and otherwise, just exactly fit, in toto, the conditions, and meet the
requirements of each particular school.

Therefore, the only practical, satisfactory solution of the problem is
to produce a book that meets _all_ the requirements of the strictly
military schools, where the conditions for military training and
instruction are the most favorable, and the requirements the greatest,
and then let other schools take only such parts of the book as are
necessary to meet their own particular local needs and requirements.

"MANUAL OF MILITARY TRAINING" is such a book.

[Illustration: (Signature) Jas. A. Moss]

Camp Gaillard, C. Z.,
March 4, 1917.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PRELUDE

OBJECT AND ADVANTAGES OF MILITARY TRAINING

Par. No.

=Object of:= Setting-Up Exercises, Calisthenics, Facings 1-23
and Marchings, Saluting, Manual of Arms, School of the
Squad, Company Drill, Close Order, Extended Order,
Ceremonies, Discipline--=Advantages:= Handiness,
Self-Control, Loyalty, Orderliness, Self-Confidence,
Self-Respect, Training Eyes, Teamwork, Heeding Law and
Order, Sound Body.

PART I

CHAPTER I. =INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS=--Definitions-- 24-710
General Remarks--General Rules for Drills and Formations--
Orders, Commands, and Signals--School of the Soldier--
School of the Squad--School of the Company--School of the
Battalion--Combat--Leadership--Combat Reconnaissance--Fire
Superiority--Fire Direction and Control--Deployment--
Attack--Defense--Meeting Engagements--Machine Guns--
Ammunition Supply--Mounted Scouts--Night Operations--
Infantry Against Cavalry--Infantry Against Artillery--
Artillery Supports--Minor Warfare--Ceremonies--Inspections--
Muster--The Color--Manual of the Saber--Manual of Tent
Pitching--Appendices A and B.

CHAPTER II. =MANUAL OF THE BAYONET=--Nomenclature and 711-824
Description of the Bayonet--Instruction without the
Rifle--Instruction with the Rifle--Instruction without
the Bayonet--Combined Movements--Fencing Exercises--Fencing
at Will--Lessons of the European War--The "Short point"--
The "Jab."

CHAPTER III. =MANUAL OF PHYSICAL TRAINING=--Methods-- 825-860
Commands--Setting-Up Exercises--Rifle Exercises.

CHAPTER IV. =SIGNALING=--General Service Code--Wigwag-- 861-866
The Two-Arm Semaphore Code--Signaling with Heliograph,
Flash Lanterns, and Searchlight--Sound Signals--Morse Code.

PART II

COMPANY COMMAND

CHAPTER I. =GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION OF A 867-909
COMPANY=--Duties and Responsibilities of the Captain and
the Lieutenants--Devolution of Work and
Responsibility--Duties and Responsibilities of the First
Sergeant and other Noncommissioned Officers--Contentment
and Harmony--Efficacious Forms of Company
Punishment--Property Responsibility--Books and Records.

CHAPTER II. =DISCIPLINE=--Definition--Methods of 910-916
Attaining Good Discipline--Importance--Sound Discipline--
Punishment--General Principles.

PART III

MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS PERTAINING TO COMPANY
TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION

CHAPTER I. =GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF COMPANY TRAINING AND 917-941
INSTRUCTION=--Object of Training and Instruction--Method
and Progression--Individual Initiative--The Human Element--
Art of Instruction on the Ground--Ocular Demonstration.

CHAPTER II. =GENERAL COMMON SENSE PRINCIPLES OF APPLIED 942-953
MINOR TACTICS=--Art of War Defined--Responsibilities of
Officers and Noncommissioned Officers in War--General
Rules and Principles of Map Problems, Terrain Exercises,
the War Game, and Maneuvers--Estimating the Situation--
Mission.

CHAPTER III. =GENERAL PLAN OF INSTRUCTION IN MAP PROBLEMS 954-958
FOR NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS AND PRIVATES--INSTRUCTION
IN DELIVERING MESSAGES.=

CHAPTER IV. =THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION=--General 959-1019
Principles of Patrolling--Sizes of Patrols--Patrol
Leaders--Patrol Formations--Messages and Reports--
Suggestions for Gaining Information about the Enemy--
Suggestions for the Reconnaissance of Various Positions
and Localities--Demolitions--Problems in Patrolling.

CHAPTER V. =THE SERVICE OF SECURITY=--General 1020-1079
principles--Advance Guard--Advance Guard Problems--
Flank Guards--Rear Guard--Outposts--Formation of
Outposts--Outguards--Flags of Truce--Detached Posts--
Examining Posts--Establishing the Outpost--Outpost
Order--Intercommunication--Outpost Problems.

CHAPTER VI. =THE COMPANY ON OUTPOST=--Establishing 1080
the Outpost.

CHAPTER VII. =THE COMPANY IN SCOUTING AND PATROLLING= 1081-1090
--Requisites of a Good Scout--Eyesight and hearing--
Finding Way in Strange Country--What to do when Lost--
Landmarks--Concealment and Dodging--Tracking--The Mouse
and Cat Contest--Flag Stealing Contest.

CHAPTER VIII. =NIGHT OPERATIONS=--Importance--Training 1091-1108
of the Company--Individual Training--Collective
Training--Outposts.

CHAPTER IX. =FIELD ENGINEERING=--Bridges--Corduroying-- 1109-1139
Tascines--Hurdles--Brush Revetment--Gabions--Other
Revetments--Knots--Lashings.

CHAPTER X. =FIELD FORTIFICATIONS=--Object-- 1140-1172
Classification--Hasty Intrenchments--Lying Trench--
Kneeling Trench--Standing Trench--Deliberate
Intrenchments--Fire Trenches--Traverses--Trench
recesses; sortie steps--Parados--Head Cover--Notches
and Loopholes--Cover Trenches--Dugouts--Communicating
Trenches--Lookouts--Supporting Points--Example of Trench
System--Location of Trenches--Concealment of Trenches--
Dummy Trenches--Length of Trench--Preparation of
Foreground--Revetments--Drainage--Water Supply--
Latrines--Illumination of the foreground--Telephones--
Siege Works.

CHAPTER XI. =OBSTACLES=--Object--Necessity for 1173-1193
Obstacles--Location--Abatis--Palisades--Fraises--
Cheveaux de Frise--Obstacles against Cavalry--Wire
Entanglements--Time and Materials--Wire Fence--Military
Pits or Trous de Loup--Miscellaneous Barricades--
Inundations--Obstacles in Front of Outguards--Lessons
from the European War--Wire Cheveaux de Frise--Guarding
Obstacles--Listening Posts--Automatic Alarms--Search
Lights.

CHAPTER XII. =TRENCH AND MINE WARFARE=--Asphyxiating 1194-1211
Gases--Protection against Gases--Liquid Fire--
Grenades--Bombs--Aerial Mines--Winged Torpedoes--Bombs
from Air-Craft--Protection against Hand Grenades--
Tanks--Helmets--Masks--Periscopes--Sniperscopes--Aids
to Firing--Mining--Countermining.

CHAPTER XIII. =MARCHES=--Marching Principal Occupation 1212-1229
of Troops in Campaign-Physical Training Hardening New
Troops--Long Marches Not to Be Made with Untrained
Troops--A Successful March--Preparation--Starting--
Conduct of March--Rate--Marching Capacity--Halts--
Crossing Bridges and Fords--Straggling and Elongation
of Column--Forced Marches--Night Marches--No Compliments
Paid on March--Protection on March--Fitting of Shoes and
Care of Feet.

CHAPTER XIV. =CAMPS=--Selection of Camp Sites-- 1230-1240
Desirable Camp Sites--Undesirable Camp Sites--Form and
Dimensions of Camps--Making Camp--Retreat in Camp--
Parade Ground--Windstorms--Making Tent Poles and Pegs
Fast in Loose Soil--Trees.

CHAPTER XV. =CAMP SANITATION=--Definition--Camp 1241-1255
Expedients--Latrines--Urinal Tubs--Kitchens--Kitchen
Pits--Incinerators--Drainage--Avoiding Old Camp Sites--
Changing Camp Sites--Bunks--Wood--Water--Rules of
Sanitation--Your Camp, Your Home.

CHAPTER XVI. =INDIVIDUAL COOKING=--Making Fire-- 1256-1275
Recipes--Meats--Vegetables--Drinks--Hot Breads--
Emergency Ration.

CHAPTER XVII. =CARE AND PRESERVATION OF CLOTHING AND 1276-1320
EQUIPMENT=--Clothing--Pressing--Removing Stains--
Shoes--Cloth Equipment--Washing--Shelter Tent--Mess
Outfit--Leather Equipment--Points to Be Remembered.

CHAPTER XVIII. =CARE AND DESCRIPTION OF THE RIFLE= 1321-1343
--Importance--Care of Bore--How to Remove Fouling--Care
of Mechanism and Various Parts--How to Apply Oil--Army
Regulation Paragraphs About Rifle--Nomenclature of Rifle.

PART IV

RIFLE TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION

Object and Explanation of Our System of Instruction-- 1344-1450
Individual Instruction--Theory of Sighting--Kinds of
Sights--Preliminary Drills--Position and Aiming Drills--
Deflection and Elevation Correction Drills--Gallery
Practice--Range Practice--Use of Sling--Designation of
Winds--Zero of Rifle--Estimating Distances--Wind--
Temperature--Light--Mirage--Combat Practice--Fire
Discipline--Technical Principles of Firing--Ballistic
Qualities of the Rifle--Cone of Fire--Shot Group--Center
of Impact--Beaten Zone--Zone of Effective Fire--
Effectiveness of Fire--Influence of Ground--Grazing
Fire--Ricochet Shots--Occupation of Ground--Adjustment
of Fire--Determination of Range--Combined Sights--
Auxiliary Aiming Points--Firing at Moving Targets--
Night Firing--Fire Direction and Control--Distribution
of Fire--Individual Instruction in Fire Distribution--
Designation of Targets--Exercises in Ranging, Target
Designation Communication, etc.

PART V

CARE OF HEALTH AND KINDRED SUBJECTS

CHAPTER I. =CARE OF THE HEALTH=--Importance of Good 1451-1469
Health--Germs--The Five Ways of Catching Disease--
Diseases Caught by Breathing in Germs--Diseases Caught
by Swallowing Germs--Disease Caught by Touching Germs--
Diseases Caught from Biting Insects.

CHAPTER II. =PERSONAL HYGIENE=--Keep the Skin Clean-- 1470-1477
Keep the Body Properly Protected against the Weather--
Keep the Body Properly Fed--Keep the Body Supplied with
Fresh Air--Keep the Body well Exercised--Keep the Body
Rested by Sufficient Sleep--Keep the Body Free of Wastes.

CHAPTER III. =FIRST AID TO THE SICK AND INJURED= 1478-1522
--Objectof Teaching First Aid--Asphyxiation by Gas--
Bite of Dog--Bite of Snake--Bleeding--Broken Bones
(Fractures)--Burns--Bruises--Cuts--Dislocations--
Drowning--Electric Shock--Fainting--Foreign Body in Eye,
in Ear--Freezing--Frost Bite--Headache--Heat Exhaustion--
Poison--Sprains--Sunburn--Sunstroke--Wounds--Improvised
Litters.

PART VI

MILITARY COURTESY AND KINDRED SUBJECTS

CHAPTER I. =MILITARY DEPORTMENT AND APPEARANCE-- 1523-1531
PERSONAL CLEANLINESS--FORMS OF SPEECH--DELIVERY OF
MESSAGES.=

CHAPTER II. =MILITARY COURTESY=--Its Importance--Nature 1532-1575
of Salutes and Their Origin--Whom to Salute--When and
How to Salute--Usual Mistakes in Saluting--Respect to
Be Paid the National Anthem, the Colors and Standards.

PART VII

GUARD DUTY

Importance--Respect for Sentinels--Classification of 1576-1857
Guards--General Rules--The Commanding Officer--The
Officer of the Day--The Commander of the Guard--Sergeant
of the Guard--Corporal of the Guard--Musicians of the
Guard--Orderlies and Color Sentinels--Privates of the
Guard--Countersigns and Paroles--Guard Patrols--
Compliments from Guards--General Rules Concerning Guard
Duty--Stable Guards--Troop Stable Guards--Reveille and
Retreat Gun--Formal Guard Mounting--Informal Guard
Mounting.

PART VIII

MILITARY ORGANIZATION

Composition of Infantry, Cavalry and Field Artillery 1858
Units up to and Including the Regiment.

PART IX

MAP READING AND SKETCHING

CHAPTER I. =MAP READING=--Definition of Map--Ability to 1859-1877
Read a Map--Scales--Methods of Representing Scales--
Construction of Scales--Scale Problems--Scaling
Distances from a Map--Contours--Map Distances--Slopes--
Meridians--Determination of Positions of Points on Map--
Orientation--Conventional Signs--Visibility.

CHAPTER II. =MILITARY SKETCHING=--The Different Methods 1878-1893
of Sketching--Location of Points by Intersection--
Location of points by Resection--Location of Points by
Traversing--Contours--Form Lines--Scales--Position
Sketching--Outpost Sketching--Road Sketching--Combined
Sketching--Points for Beginners to Remember.

PRELUDE

THE OBJECT AND ADVANTAGES OF MILITARY TRAINING

=1. Prelude.= We will first consider the object and advantages of
military training, as they are the natural and logical prelude to the
subject of military training and instruction.

Object

=2. The object of all military training is to win battles.=

Everything that you do in military training is done with some
immediate object in view, which, in turn, has in view the _final_
object of winning battles. For example:

=3. Setting-up exercises.= The object of the setting-up exercises, as
the name indicates, is to give the new men the _set-up_,--the bearing
and carriage,--of the military man.

In addition these exercises serve to loosen up his muscles and prepare
them for his later experiences and development.

=4. Calisthenics.= Calisthenics may be called the big brother, the
grown-up form, of the setting-up exercise.

The object of calisthenics is to develop and strengthen all parts and
muscles of the human body,--the back, the legs, the arms, the lungs,
the heart and all other parts of the body.

First and foremost a fighting man's work depends upon his physical
fitness.

To begin with, a soldier's mind must always be on the alert and equal
to any strain, and no man's mind can be at its best when he is
handicapped by a weak or ailing body.

The work of the fighting man makes harsh demands on his body. It must
be strong enough to undergo the strain of marching when every muscle
cries out for rest; strong enough to hold a rifle steady under fatigue
and excitement; strong enough to withstand all sorts of weather, and
the terrible nervous and physical strain of modern battle; and more,
it must be strong enough to resist those diseases of campaign which
kill more men than do the bullets of the enemy.

Hence the necessity of developing and strengthening every part and
muscle of the body.

=5. Facings and Marchings.= The object of the facings and marchings is
to give the soldier complete control of his body in drills, so that he
can get around with ease and promptness at every command.

The marchings,--the military walk and run,--also teach the soldier how
to get from one place to another in campaign with the least amount of
physical exertion.

Every man knows how to walk and run, but few of them how to do so
without making extra work of it. One of the first principles in
training the body of the soldier is to make each set of muscles do its
own work and save the strength of the other muscles for their work.
Thus the soldier marches in quick time,--walks,--with his legs,
keeping the rest of his body as free from motion as possible. He
marches in double time,--runs,--with an easy swinging stride which
requires no effort on the part of the muscles of the body.

The marchings also teach the soldier to walk and run at a steady gait.
For example, in marching in quick time, he takes 120 steps each
minute; in double time, he takes 180 per minute.

Furthermore, the marchings teach the soldier to walk and run with
others,--that is, in a body.

=6. Saluting.= The form of salutation and greeting for the civilian
consists in raising the hat.

The form of salutation and greeting for the military man consists in
rendering the military salute,--a form of salutation which marks you
as a member of the Fraternity of Men-at-arms, men banded together for
national defense, bound to each other by love of country and pledged
to the loyal support of its symbol, the Flag. For the full
significance of the military salute see paragraph 1534.

=7. Manual of Arms.= The rifle is the soldier's fighting weapon and he
must become so accustomed to the _feel_ of it that he handles it
without a thought,--just as he handles his arms or legs without a
thought,--and this is what the manual of arms accomplishes.

The different movements and positions of the rifle are the ones that
experience has taught are the best and the easiest to accomplish the
object in view.

=8. School of the Squad.= The object of squad drill is to teach the
soldier his first lesson in _team-work_,--and team-work is the thing
that wins battles.

In the squad the soldier is associated with seven other men with whom
he drills, eats, sleeps, marches, and fights.

The squad is the unit upon which all of the work of the company
depends. Unless the men of each squad work together as a single
man,--unless there is _team-work_,--the work of the company is almost
impossible.

=9. Company Drill.= Several squads are banded together into a
company,--the basic fighting unit. In order for a company to be able
to comply promptly with the will of its commander, it must be like a
pliable, easily managed instrument. And in order to win battles a
company on the firing line must be able to comply promptly with the
will of its commander.

The object of company drill is to get such team-work amongst the
squads that the company will at all times move and act like a pliable,
easily managed whole.

=10. Close Order.= In close order drill the strictest attention is
paid to all the little details, all movements being executed with the
greatest precision. The soldiers being close together,--in _close
order_,--they form a compact body that is easily managed, and
consequently that lends itself well to teaching the soldier habits of
attention, precision, team-work and instant obedience to the voice of
his commander.

In order to control and handle bodies of men quickly and without
confusion, they must be taught to group themselves in an orderly
arrangement and to move in an orderly manner. For example, soldiers
are grouped or formed in line, in column of squads, column of files,
etc.

In close order drill soldiers are taught to move in an orderly manner
from one group or formation to another; how to stand, step off, march,
halt and handle their rifles all together.

This practice makes the soldier feel perfectly at home and at ease in
the squad and company. He becomes accustomed to working side by side
with the man next to him, and, unconsciously, both get into the habit
of working together, thus learning the first principles of
_team-work_.

=11. Extended Order.= This is the fighting drill.

Modern fire arms have such great penetration that if the soldiers were
all bunched together a single bullet might kill or disable several men
and the explosion of a single shell might kill or disable a whole
company. Consequently, soldiers must be scattered,--_extended
out_,--to fight.

In extended order not only do the soldiers furnish a smaller target
for the enemy to shoot at, but they also get room in which to fight
with greater ease and freedom.

The object of extended order drill is to practice the squads in
team-work by which they are welded into a single fighting machine that
can be readily controlled by its commander.

=12. Parades, reviews, and other ceremonies.= Parades, reviews and
other ceremonies, with their martial music, the presence of
spectators, etc., are intended to stimulate the interest and excite
the military spirit of the command. Also, being occasions for which
the soldiers dress up and appear spruce and trim, they inculcate
habits of tidiness,--they teach a lesson in cleanliness of body and
clothes.

While it is true it may be said that parades, reviews and other
ceremonies form no practical part of the fighting man's training for
battle, they nevertheless serve a very useful purpose in his general
training. In these ceremonies in which soldiers march to martial music
with flags flying, moving and going through the manual of arms with
perfect precision and unison, there results a concerted movement that
produces a feeling such as we have when we dance or when we sing in
chorus. In other words, ceremonies are a sort of "get-together"
exercise which pulls men together in spite of themselves, giving them
a shoulder-to-shoulder feeling of solidity and power that helps to
build up that confidence and spirit which wins battles.

=13. Discipline.= By discipline we mean the _habit_ of observing all
rules and regulations and of obeying promptly all orders. By observing
day after day all rules and regulations and obeying promptly all
orders, it becomes second nature,--a fixed habit,--to do these things.

Of course, in the Army, like in any other walk of life, there must be
law and order, which is impossible unless everyone obeys the rules and
regulations gotten up by those in authority.

When a man has cultivated the habit of obeying,--when obedience has
become second nature with him,--he obeys the orders of his leaders
instinctively, even when under the stress of great excitement, such as
when in battle, his own reasoning is confused and his mind is not
working.

In order to win a battle the _will_ of the commander as expressed
through his subordinates down the line from the second in command to
the squad leaders, must be carried out by everyone. Hence the vital
importance of prompt, instinctive obedience on the part of everybody,
and of discipline, which is the mainspring of obedience and also the
foundation rock of law and order.

And so could we go on indefinitely pointing out the object of each and
every requirement of military training, for there is none that has no
object and that answers no useful purpose, although the object and
purpose may not always be apparent to the young soldier.

_And remember that the final object of all military training is to win
battles._

Advantages of Military Training

The following are the principal advantages of military training:

=14. Handiness.= The average man does one thing well. He is more or
less apt to be clumsy about doing other things. The soldier is
constantly called upon to do all sorts of things, and he has to do all
of them well. His hands thus become trained and useful to him, and his
mind gets into the habit of making his hands do what is required of
them,--that is to say, the soldier becomes handy.

Handy arms are a valuable asset.

=15. Self-control.= In the work of the soldier, control does not stop
with the hands.

The mind reaches out,--control of the body becomes a habit. The feet,
legs, arms and body gradually come under the sway of the mind. In the
position of the soldier, for instance, the mind holds the body
motionless. In marching, the mind drives the legs to machine-like
regularity. In shooting, the mind assumes command of the arms, hands,
fingers and eye, linking them up and making them work in harmony.

Control of the body, together with the habit of discipline that the
soldier acquires, leads to control of the mind,--that is, to
_self-control_.

Self-control is an important factor in success in any walk of life.

=16. Loyalty.= Loyalty to his comrades, to his company, to his
battalion, to his regiment becomes a religion with the soldier. They
are a part of his life. Their reputation is his; their good name, his
good name; their interests, his interests,--so, loyalty to them is but
natural, and this loyalty soon extends to loyalty in general.

When you say a man is loyal the world considers that you have paid him
a high tribute.

=17. Orderliness.= In the military service order and system are
watchwords. The smooth running of the military machine depends on
them.

The care and attention that the soldier is required to give at all
times to his clothes, accouterments, equipment and other belongings,
instill in him habits of orderliness.

Orderliness increases the value of a man.

=18. Self-confidence and self-respect.= Self-confidence is founded on
one's ability to do things. The soldier is taught to defend himself
with his rifle, and to take care of himself and to do things in almost
any sort of a situation, all of which gives him confidence in
himself,--_self-confidence_.

Respect for constituted authority, which is a part of the soldier's
creed, teaches him respect for himself,--_self-respect_.

Self-confidence and self-respect are a credit to any man.

=19. Eyes trained to observe.= Guard duty, outpost duty, patrolling,
scouting and target practice, train both the eye and the mind to
observe.

Power of observation is a valuable faculty for a man to possess.

=20. Teamwork.= In drilling, patrolling, marching, maneuvers and in
other phases of his training and instruction, the soldier is taught
the principles of team-work,--coöperation,--whose soul is _loyalty_, a
trait of every good soldier.

Teamwork,--coöperation,--leads to success in life.

=21. Heeding law and order.= The cardinal habit of the soldier is
obedience. To obey orders and regulations is a habit with the soldier.
And this habit of obeying orders and regulations teaches him to heed
law and order.

The man who heeds law and order is a welcome member of any community.

=22. Sound body.= Military training, with its drills, marches, and
other forms of physical exercise, together with its regular habits and
outdoor work, keeps a man physically fit, giving him a sound body.

A sound body, with the physical exercise and outdoor life of the
soldier, means good digestion, strength, hardiness and endurance.

A sound body is, indeed, one of the greatest blessings of life.

The Trained Soldier

=23.= Look at the trained soldier on the following page; study him
carefully from top to bottom, and see what military training does for
a man.

[Illustration: THE TRAINED SOLDIER

WHAT DO YOU THINK OF HIM, EH?]

PART I

DRILLS, EXERCISES, CEREMONIES AND INSPECTIONS

CHAPTER I

INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS

(To include Changes No. 20, Aug. 18, 1917.)

DEFINITIONS

(The numbers following the paragraphs are those of the Drill
Regulations, and references in the text to certain paragraph
numbers refer to these numbers and not to the numbers preceding
the paragraphs.)

(NOTE.--Company drills naturally become monotonous. The monotony,
however, can be greatly reduced by repeating the drills under
varying circumstances. In the manual of arms, for instance, the
company may be brought to open ranks and the officers and
sergeants directed to superintend the drill in the front and rear
ranks. As the men make mistakes they are fallen out and drilled
nearby by an officer or noncommissioned officer. Or, the company
may be divided into squads, each squad leader drilling his squad,
falling out the men as they make mistakes, the men thus fallen out
reporting to a designated officer or noncommissioned officer for
drill. The men who have drilled the longest in the different
squads are then formed into one squad and drilled and fallen out
in like manner. The variety thus introduced stimulates a spirit of
interest and rivalry that robs the drill of much of its monotony.

It is thought the instruction of a company in drill is best
attained by placing special stress on squad drill. The
noncommissioned officers should be thoroughly instructed,
practically and theoretically, by one of the company officers and
then be required to instruct their squads. The squads are then
united and drilled in the school of the company.--Author.)

DEFINITIONS

=24. Alignment:= A straight line upon which several elements are
formed, or are to be formed; or the dressing of several elements upon
a straight line.

[Illustration: Fig. 1

NOTE.--The line A-B, on which a body of troops is formed or is to be
formed, or the act of dressing a body of troops on the line, is called
an alignment.--Author.]

=25. Base:= The element on which a movement is regulated.

=26. Battle sight:= The position of the rear sight when the leaf is
laid down.

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

=27. Center:= The middle point or element of a command. (See Figs. 2,
3 and 5.) (The designation "center company," indicates the right
center or the actual center company, according as the number of
companies is even or odd.--Par. 298.)

=28. Column:= A formation in which the elements are placed one behind
another. (See Figs. 4, 5, 6.)

=29. Deploy:= To extend the front. In general to change from column to
line, or from close order to extended order.

=30. Depth:= The space from head to rear of any formation, including
the leading and rear elements. The depth of a man is assumed to be 12
inches. (See Figs. 4, 5, 6.)

=31. Distance:= Space between elements in the direction of depth.
Distance is measured from the back of the man in front to the breast
of the man in rear. The distance between ranks is 40 inches in both
line and column. (See Figs. 4, 5, 6.)

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

[Illustration: Fig. 6]

=32. Element:= A file, squad, platoon, company, or larger body,
forming part of a still larger body.

=33. File:= Two men, the front-rank man and the corresponding man of
the rear rank. The front-rank man is the file leader. A file which has
no rear-rank man is a blank file. The term file applies also to a
single man in a single-rank formation.

=34. File closers:= Such officers and noncommissioned officers of a
company as are posted in rear of the line. For convenience, all men
posted in the line of file closers.

=35. Flank:= The right or left of a command in line or in column; also
the element on the right or left of the line. (See Figs. 2, 3 and 4.)

=36. Formation:= Arrangement of the elements of a command. The placing
of all fractions in their order in line, in column, or for battle.

=37. Front:= The space, in width, occupied by an element, either in
line or in column. The front of a man is assumed to be 22 inches.
Front also denotes the direction of the enemy. (See Figs. 2, 3 and 5).

=38. Guide:= An officer, noncommissioned officer, or private upon whom
the command or elements thereof regulates its march.

=39. Head:= The leading element of a column. (See Figs. 4, 5 and 6.)

=40. Interval:= Space between elements of the same line. The interval
between men in ranks is 4 inches and is measured from elbow to elbow.
Between companies, squads, etc., it is measured from the left elbow of
the left man or guide of the group on the right, to the right elbow of
the right man or guide of the group on the left. (See Fig. 3.)

=41. Left:= The left extremity or element of a body of troops.

=42. Line:= A formation in which the different elements are abreast of
each other. (See Figs. 2 and 3.)

=43. Order, close:= The formation in which the units, in double rank,
are arranged in line or in column with normal intervals and distances.

=44. Order, extended:= The formation in which the units are separated
by intervals greater than in close order.

=45. Pace:= Thirty inches; the length of the full step in quick time.

=46. Point of rest:= The point at which a formation begins.
Specifically, the point toward which units are aligned in successive
movements.

=47. Rank:= A line of men placed side by side.

=48. Right:= The right extremity or element of a body of troops.

=49.= NOTE. In view of the fact that the word "Echelon" is a term of
such common usage, the following definition is given: By echelon we
mean a formation in which the subdivisions are placed one behind
another, extending beyond and unmasking one another either wholly or
in part.--Author.

[Illustration: BATTALION IN ECHELON: COMPANIES UNMASKING WHOLLY]

[Illustration: BATTALION IN ECHELON: COMPANIES UNMASKING IN PART]

INTRODUCTION

=50. Object of military training.= Success in battle is the ultimate
object of all military training; success may be looked for only when
the training is intelligent and thorough. (1)

=51. Commanding officers accountable for proper training of
organizations; field efficiency; team-work.= Commanding officers are
accountable for the proper training of their respective organizations
within the limits prescribed by regulations and orders. (2)

The excellence of an organization is judged by its field efficiency.
The field efficiency of an organization depends primarily upon its
effectiveness as a whole. Thoroughness and uniformity in the training
of the units of an organization are indispensable to the efficiency of
the whole; it is by such means alone that the requisite team-work may
be developed.

=52. Simple movements and elastic formations.= Simple movements and
elastic formations are essential to correct training for battle. (3)

=53. Drill Regulations a Guide; their interpretation.= The Drill
Regulations are furnished as a guide. They provide the principles for
training and for increasing the probability of success in battle. (4)

In the interpretation of the regulations, the spirit must be sought.
Quibbling over the minutiae of form is indicative of failure to grasp
the spirit.

=54. Combat principles.= The principles of combat are considered in
Pars. 50-363. They are treated in the various schools included in Part
I of the Drill Regulations only to the extent necessary to indicate
the functions of the various commanders and the division of
responsibility between them. The amplification necessary to a proper
understanding of their application is to be sought in Pars. 364-613.
(5)

=55. Drills at attention, ceremonies, extended order, field exercises
and combat exercises.= The following important distinctions must be
observed:

(a) Drills executed at =attention= and the ceremonies are
=disciplinary exercises= designed to teach precise and soldierly
movement, and to inculcate that prompt and subconscious obedience
which is essential to proper military control. To this end, smartness
and precision should be exacted in the execution of every detail. Such
drills should be frequent, but short.

(b) The purpose of =extended order drill= is to teach the =mechanism=
of deployment of the firing, and, in general, of the employment of
troops in combat. Such drills are in the nature of disciplinary
exercises and should be frequent, thorough, and exact, in order to
habituate men to the firm control of their leaders. Extended order
drill is executed =at ease=. The company is the largest unit which
executes extended order drill.

(c) =Field exercises= are for instruction in the duties incident to
campaign. Assumed situations are employed. Each exercise should
conclude with a discussion, on the ground, of the exercise and
principles involved.

(d) The =combat exercise, a form of field exercise= of the company,
battalion, and larger units, consists of the =application of tactical
principles= to assumed situations, employing in the execution the
appropriate formations and movements of close and extended order.

Combat exercises must simulate, as far as possible, the battle
conditions assumed. In order to familiarize both officers and men with
such conditions, companies and battalions will frequently be
consolidated to provide war-strength organizations. Officers and
noncommissioned officers not required to complete the full quota of
the units participating are assigned as observers or umpires.

The firing line can rarely be controlled by the voice alone; thorough
training to insure the proper use of prescribed signals is necessary.

The exercise should be followed by a brief drill at attention in order
to restore smartness and control. (6)

=56. Imaginary, outlined and represented enemy.= In field exercises
the enemy is said to be =imaginary= when his position and force are
merely assumed; =outlined= when his position and force are indicated
by a few men; =represented= when a body of troops acts as such. (7)

General Rules for Drills and Formations

=57. Arrangement of elements of preparatory command.= When the
=preparatory= command consists of more than one part, its elements are
arranged as follows:

(1) For movements to be executed successively by the subdivisions or
elements of an organization: (a) Description of the movement; (b) how
executed, or on what element executed.

(For example: =1. Column of Companies, first company, squads right. 2.
March.=--Author.)

(2) For movements to be executed simultaneously by the subdivisions of
an organization: (a) The designation of the subdivisions; (b) The
movement to be executed. (For example: =1. Squads right. 2.
March.=--Author.) (8)

=58. Movements executed toward either flank explained toward but one
flank.= Movements that may be executed toward either flank are
explained as toward but one flank, it being necessary to substitute
the word "left" for "right," and the reverse, to have the explanation
of the corresponding movement toward the other flank. The commands are
given for the execution of the movements toward either flank. The
substitute word of the command is placed within parentheses. (9)

=59. Any movement may be executed from halt or when marching unless
otherwise prescribed.= Any movement may be executed either from the
halt or when marching, unless otherwise prescribed. If at a halt, the
command for movements involving marching need not be prefaced by
=forward=, as =1. Column right (left), 2. MARCH=. (10)

=60. Any movement may be executed in double time unless specially
excepted.= Any movement not specially excepted may be executed in
double time.

If at a halt, or if marching in quick time, the command =double time=
precedes the command of execution. (11)

=61. Successive movements executed in double time.= In successive
movements executed in double time the leading or =base= unit marches
in =quick time= when not otherwise prescribed; the other units march
in =double time= to their places in the formation ordered and then
conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. If marching in double
time, the command =double time= is omitted. The leading or base unit
marches in =quick time=; the other units continue at double time to
their places in the formation ordered and then conform to the gait of
the leading or base unit. (12)

=62. To hasten execution of movement begun in quick time.= To hasten
the execution of a movement begun in quick time, the command: =1.
Double time, 2. MARCH=, is given. The leading or base unit continues
to march in quick time, or remains at halt, if already halted; the
other units complete the execution of the movement in double time and
then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. (13)

=63. To stay execution of movement when marching, for correction of
errors.= To stay the execution of a movement when marching, for the
correction of errors, the command: =1. In place, 2. HALT=, is given.
All halt and stand fast without changing the position of the pieces.
To resume the movement the command: =1. Resume, 2. MARCH=, is given.
(14)

=64. To revoke preparatory command or begin anew movement improperly
begun.= To revoke a preparatory command, or, being at a halt, to begin
anew a movement improperly begun, the command, =AS YOU WERE=, is
given, at which the movement ceases and the former position is
resumed. (15)

=65. Guide.= Unless otherwise announced, the guide of a company or
subdivision of a company in line is =right=; of a battalion in line or
line of subdivisions or of a deployed line, =center=; of a rank in
column of squads, toward the side of the guide of the company.

To march with guide other than as prescribed above, or to change the
guide: =Guide (right, left, or center).=

In successive formations into line, the guide is toward the point of
rest; in platoons or larger subdivisions it is so announced.

The announcement of the guide, when given in connection with a
movement follows the command of execution for that. Exception: =1. As
skirmishers, guide right (left or center), 2. MARCH.= (16)

=66. Turn on fixed and moving pivots.= The turn on the fixed pivot by
subdivisions is used in all formations from line into column and the
reverse.

The turn on the =moving pivot= is used by subdivisions of a column in
executing changes of direction. (17)

=67. Partial changes of direction.= Partial changes of direction may
be executed:

By interpolating in the preparatory command the word =half, as Column
half right (left), or Right (left) half turn=. A change of direction
of 45° is executed.

By the command: =INCLINE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT).= The guide, or guiding
element, moves in the indicated direction and the remainder of the
command conforms. This movement effects slight changes of direction.
(18)

=68. Line of platoons, companies, etc.= The =designations line of
platoons, line of companies, line of battalions=, etc., refer to the
formations in which the platoons, companies, battalions, etc., each in
column of squads, are in line. (19)

=69. Full distance in column of subdivisions; guide of leading
subdivision charged with step and direction.= Full distance in column
of subdivisions is such that in forming line to the right or left the
subdivisions will have their proper intervals.

In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision is
charged with the step and direction; the guides in rear preserve the
trace, step, and distance. (20)

=70. Double rank, habitual close order formation; uniformity of
interval between files obtained by placing hand on hip.= In close
order, all details, detachments, and other bodies of troops are
habitually formed in double rank.

To insure uniformity of interval between files when falling in, and in
alignments, each man places the palm of the left hand upon the hip,
fingers pointing downward. In the first case, the hand is dropped by
the side when the next man on the left has his interval; in the second
case, at the command front. (21)

=71. Posts of officers, noncommissioned officers, and special units;
duties of file closers.= The posts of officers, noncommissioned
officers, special units (such as band or machine-gun company), etc.,
in the various formations of the company, battalion, or regiment, are
shown in plates.

In all changes from one formation to another involving a change of
post on the part of any of these, posts are promptly taken by the most
convenient route as soon as practicable after the command of execution
for the movement; officers and noncommissioned officers who have
prescribed duties in connection with the movement ordered, take their
new posts when such duties are completed.

As instructors, officers and noncommissioned officers go wherever
their presence is necessary. As file closers it is their duty to
rectify mistakes and insure steadiness and promptness in the ranks.
(22)

=72. Special units have no fixed posts except at ceremonies.=

Except at ceremonies, the special units have no fixed places. They
take places as directed; in the absence of directions, they conform as
nearly as practicable to the plates, and in subsequent movements
maintain their relative positions with respect to the flank or end of
the command on which they were originally posted. (23)

[Illustration]

=73. General, field and staff officers habitually mounted; formation
of staff; drawing and returning saber.= General, field, and staff
officers are habitually mounted. The staff of any officer forms in
single rank, 3 paces in rear of him, the right of the rank extending 1
pace to the right of a point directly in rear of him. Members of the
staff are arranged in order from right to left as follows: General
staff officers, adjutant, aids, other staff officers, arranged in each
classification in order of rank, the senior on the right. The flag of
the general officer and the orderlies are 3 paces in rear of the
staff, the flag on the right. When necessary to reduce the front of
the staff and orderlies, each line executes =twos right or fours
right=, as explained in the Cavalry Drill Regulations, and follows the
commander.

When not otherwise prescribed, staff officers draw and return saber
with their chief. (24)

=74. Mounted officer turns to left in executing about; when commander
faces about to give commands, staff and others stand fast.= In making
the about, an officer, mounted, habitually turns to the left.

When the commander faces to give commands, the staff, flag, and
orderlies do not change position. (25)

=75. Saluting when making and receiving reports; saluting on meeting.=
When making or receiving official reports, or on meeting out of doors,
all officers will salute.

Military courtesy requires the junior to salute first, but when the
salute is introductory to a report made at a military ceremony or
formation, to the representative of a common superior (as, for
example, to the adjutant, officer of the day, etc.), the officer
making the report, whatever his rank, will salute first; the officer
to whom the report is made will acknowledge by saluting that he has
received and understood the report. (26)

=76. Formation of mounted enlisted men for ceremonies.= For
ceremonies, all mounted enlisted men of a regiment or smaller unit,
except those belonging to the machine-gun organizations, are
consolidated into a detachment; the senior present commands if no
officer is in charge. The detachment is formed as a platoon or squad
of cavalry in line or column of fours; noncommissioned staff officers
are on the right or in the leading ranks. (27)

=77. Post of dismounted noncommissioned staff officers for
ceremonies.= For ceremonies, such of the noncommissioned staff
officers as are dismounted are formed 5 paces in rear of the color, in
order of rank from right to left. In column of squads they march as
file closers. (28)

=78. Post of noncommissioned staff officers and orderlies other than
for ceremonies.= Other than for ceremonies, noncommissioned staff
officers and orderlies accompany their immediate chiefs unless
otherwise directed. If mounted, the noncommissioned staff officers are
ordinarily posted on the right or at the head of the orderlies. (29)

=79. Noncommissioned officer commanding platoon or company, carrying
of piece and taking of post.= In all formations and movements a
noncommissioned officer commanding a platoon or company carries his
piece as the men do, if he is so armed, and takes the same post as an
officer in like situation. When the command is formed in line for
ceremonies, a noncommissioned officer commanding a company takes post
on the right of the right guide after the company has been aligned.
(30)

ORDERS, COMMANDS, AND SIGNALS

=80. When commands, signals, and orders are used.= =Commands= only are
employed in drill at attention. Otherwise either a =command, signal,
or order= is employed, as best suits the occasion, or one may be used
in conjunction with another. (31)

=81. Instruction in use of signals; use of headdress, etc., in making
signals.= =Signals= should be freely used in instruction, in order
that officers and men may readily know them. In making arm signals,
the saber, rifle, or headdress may be held in the hand. (32)

=82. Fixing of attention; a signal includes command of preparation and
of execution.= Officers and men fix their attention at the first word
of command, the first note of the bugle or whistle, or the first
motion of the signal. A signal includes both the preparatory command
and the command of execution; the movement commences as soon as the
signal is understood, unless otherwise prescribed. (33)

=83. Repeating orders, commands and signals; officers, platoon
leaders, guides and musicians equipped with whistles; whistles with
different tones.= Except in movements executed at =attention=,
commanders or leaders of subdivisions repeat orders, commands, or
signals whenever such repetition is deemed necessary to insure
=prompt= and correct execution.

Officers, battalion noncommissioned staff officers, platoon leaders,
guides, and musicians are equipped with whistles.

The Major and his staff will use a whistle of distinctive tone; the
captain and company musicians a second and distinctive whistle; the
platoon leaders and guides a third distinctive whistle. (34)

=84. Limitation of prescribed signals; special prearranged signals.=
Prescribed signals are limited to such as are essential as a
substitute for the voice under conditions which render the voice
inadequate.

Before or during an engagement special signals may be agreed upon to
facilitate the solution of such special difficulties as the particular
situation is likely to develop, but it must be remembered that
simplicity and certainty are indispensable qualities of a signal. (35)

Orders

=85. Orders defined; when employed.= In these regulations an =order=
embraces instructions or directions given orally or in writing in
terms suited to the particular occasion and not prescribed herein.

=Orders= are employed only when the =commands= prescribed herein do
not sufficiently indicate the will of the commander.

Orders are more fully described in paragraphs 378 to 383, inclusive.
(36)

Commands

=86. Command defined.= In these regulations a =command= is the will of
the commander expressed in the phraseology prescribed herein. (37)

=87. Kinds of commands; how given.= There are two kinds of commands:

The =preparatory= command, such as =forward=, indicates the movement
that is to be executed.

The command of =execution=, such as =MARCH=, =HALT=, or =ARMS=, causes
the execution.

=Preparatory= commands are distinguished by =italics=; those of
execution by =CAPITALS=.

Where it is not mentioned in the text who gives the commands
prescribed, they are to be given by the commander of the unit
concerned.

The =preparatory= command should be given at such an interval of time
before the command of =execution= as to admit of being properly
understood; the command of =execution= should be given at the instant
the movement is to commence.

The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a loudness
proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended.

Each =preparatory= command is enunciated distinctly, with a rising
inflection at the end, and in such manner that the command of
=execution= may be more energetic.

The command of =execution= is firm in tone and brief. (38)

=88. Battalion and higher commanders repeat commands of superiors;
battalion largest unit executing movement at command of its
commander.= Majors and commanders of units larger than a battalion
repeat such commands of their superiors as are to be executed by their
units, facing their units for that purpose. The battalion is the
largest unit that executes a movement at the command of execution of
its commander. (39)

=89. Facing troops and avoiding indifference when giving commands.=
When giving commands to troops it is usually best to face toward them.

Indifference in giving commands must be avoided as it leads to laxity
in execution. Commands should be given with spirit at all times. (40)

Bugle Signals

=90. Bugle signals that may be used on and off the field of battle.=
The authorized bugle signals are published in Part V of these
regulations.

The following bugle signals may be used off the battlefield, when not
likely to convey information to the enemy:

=Attention:= Troops are brought to attention.
=Attention to orders:= Troops to fix their attention.
=Forward, march:= Used also to execute quick time from double time.
=Double time, march.=
=To the rear, march:= In close order, execute =squads right about=.
=Halt.=
=Assemble, march.=

The following bugle signals may be used on the battlefield:

=Fix bayonets.=
=Charge.=
=Assemble, march.=

These signals are used only when intended for the entire firing line;
hence they can be authorized only by the commander of a unit (for
example, a regiment or brigade) which occupies a distinct section of
the battlefield. Exception: =Fix bayonet.= (See par. 355.)

The following bugle signals are used in exceptional cases on the
battlefield. Their principal uses are in field exercises and practice
firing.

=Commence firing:= Officers charged with fire direction and control
open fire as soon as practicable. When given to a firing line, the
signal is equivalent to =fire at will=.

=Cease firing:= All parts of the line execute =cease firing= at once.

These signals are not used by units smaller than a regiment, except
when such unit is independent or detached from its regiment. (41)

Whistle Signals

=91. Attention to orders.= A =short blast= of the whistle. This signal
is used on the march or in combat when necessary to fix the attention
of troops, or of their commanders or leaders, preparatory to giving
commands, orders, or signals.

When the firing line is firing, each squad leader suspends firing and
fixes his attention at a =short blast= of his platoon leader's
whistle. The platoon leader's subsequent commands or signals are
repeated and enforced by the squad leader. If a squad leader's
attention is attracted by a whistle other than that of his platoon
leader, or if there are no orders or commands to convey to his squad,
he resumes firing at once.

=Suspend firing.= A =long blast= of the whistle. All other whistle
signals are prohibited. (42)

Arm Signals

=92.= The following arm signals are prescribed. In making signals
either arm may be used. Officers who receive signals on the firing
line "repeat back" at once to prevent misunderstanding.

[Illustration]

=Forward, MARCH.= Carry the hand to the shoulder; straighten and hold
the arm horizontally, thrusting it in the direction of march.

This signal is also used to execute quick time from double time.

[Illustration]

=Halt.= Carry the hand to the shoulder; thrust the hand upward and
hold the arm vertically.

=Double time, MARCH.= Carry the hand to the shoulder; rapidly thrust
the hand upward the full extent of the arm several times.

[Illustration]

=Squads right, MARCH.= Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
it to a vertical position above the head and swing it several times
between the vertical and horizontal positions.

[Illustration]

=Squads left, MARCH.= Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry
it downward to the side and swing it several times between the
downward and horizontal positions.

[Illustration]

=Squads right about, MARCH= (if in close order) or, =To the rear,
MARCH= (if in skirmish line). Extend the arm vertically above the
head; carry it laterally downward to the side and swing it several
times between the vertical and downward positions.

[Illustration]

=Change direction or Column right (left), MARCH.= The hand on the side
toward which the change of direction is to be made is carried across
the body to the opposite shoulder, forearm horizontal; then swing in a
horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing in the new direction.

[Illustration]

=As skirmishers, MARCH.= Raise both arms laterally until horizontal.

[Illustration]

=As skirmishers, guide center, MARCH.= Raise both arms laterally until
horizontal; swing both simultaneously upward until vertical and return
to the horizontal; repeat several times.

[Illustration]

=As skirmishers, guide right (left), MARCH.= Raise both arms laterally
until horizontal; hold the arm on the side of the guide steadily in
the horizontal position: swing the other upward until vertical and
return it to the horizontal; repeat several times.

[Illustration]

=Assemble, March.= Raise the arm vertically to full extent and
describe horizontal circles.

[Illustration]

=Range or Change elevation.= To announce range, extend the arm toward
the leaders or men for whom the signal is intended, fist closed; by
keeping the fist closed battle sight is indicated;

[Illustration]

by opening and closing the fist, expose thumb and fingers to a number
equal to the hundreds of yards;

[Illustration]

to add yards describe a short horizontal line with forefinger.

[Illustration]

=To change elevation=, indicate the =amount of increase or decrease=
by fingers as above; point upward to indicate increase and downward to
indicate decrease.

[Illustration]

=What range are you using?= or =What is the range?= Extend the arms
toward the person addressed, one hand open, palm to the front, resting
on the other hand, fist closed.

[Illustration]

=Are you ready?= or =I am ready.= Raise the hand, fingers extended and
joined, palm toward the person addressed.

[Illustration]

=Commence firing.= Move the arm extended in full length, hand palm
down, several times through a horizontal arc in front of the body.

=Fire faster.= Execute rapidly the signal, "Commence Firing."

=Fire slower.= Execute slowly the signal, "Commence Firing."

[Illustration]

=Swing the cone of fire to the right, or left.= Extend the arm in full
length to the front, palm to the right (left); swing the arm to right
(left), and point in the direction of the new target.

[Illustration]

=Fix Bayonet.= Simulate the movement of the right hand in "Fix
bayonet." (See par. 142.)

[Illustration]

=Suspend firing.= Raise and hold the forearm steadily in a horizontal
position in front of the forehead, palm of the hand to the front.

=Cease firing.= Raise the forearm as in =suspend firing= and swing it
up and down several times in front of the face.

[Illustration]

=Platoon.= Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader;
describe small circles with the hand. (See par. 93.)

[Illustration]

=Squad.= Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; swing
the hand up and down from the wrist. (See par. 93.)

=Rush.= Same as =double time=. (43)

=93. Use of signals "platoon" and "squad."= The signals =platoon= and
=squad= are intended primarily for communication between the captain
and his platoon leaders. The signal platoon or squad indicates that
the platoon commander is to cause the signal which follows to be
executed by platoon or squad.

=Note.=--The following signals, while not prescribed, are very
convenient:

=Combined Sights.= Extend the arm toward the leaders for whom the
signal is intended, hand open and turn hand rapidly from right to left
a number of times. Then indicate ranges in the manner prescribed,
giving the mean of the two ranges. (For example: If the combined
sights are 1050 and 1150, indicate a range of 1100 yards. The leaders
who give the oral commands, give the command, "Range 1050 and 1150,"
whereupon every man in the front rank, before deployment, fixes his
sight at 1150, and every man in the rear rank, before deployment,
fixes his sight at 1050.)

=Company.= Bring the hand up near the shoulder and then thrust to the
front, snapping fingers in usual way; repeat several times.

=Contract fire.= Extend both arms horizontally, fingers extended, arms
parallel, palms facing each other; bring hands together =once=, and
hold them so and look at the leader concerned.

=Disperse fire.= Bring hands together, fingers extended, pointing in
direction of leader concerned, arms extended horizontally; swing arms
outward once, and hold them so and look at the leader concerned.

=Platoon column.= Raise both arms vertically, full length, arms
parallel, fingers joined and extended, palms to the front.

=Prepare to rush.= Cross the arms horizontally several times.

=Squad Column.= Raise both arms vertically from elbows, elbows at side
of body, fingers joined and extended, palms to the front.--Author.
(44)

Flag Signals

=94. Signal flags carried by company musicians; description of flags.=
The signal Hags described below are carried by the company musicians
in the field.

In a regiment in which it is impracticable to make the permanent
battalion division alphabetically, the flags of a battalion are as
shown; flags are assigned to the companies alphabetically, within
their respective battalions, in the order given below.

First battalion:

Company A. Red field, white square.
Company B. Red field, blue square.
Company C. Red field, white diagonals.
Company D. Red field, blue diagonals.

Second battalion:

Company E. White field, red square.
Company F. White field, blue square.
Company G. White field, red diagonals.
Company H. White field, blue diagonals.

Third battalion:

Company I. Blue field, red square.
Company K. Blue field, white square.
Company L. Blue field, red diagonals.
Company M. Blue field, white diagonals.

=Note.=--An analysis of the above system of signal flags will
show: 1. The color of the field indicates the battalion and the
colors run in the order that is so natural to us all, viz: =Red=,
=White= and =Blue=. Hence =red= field indicates the =first=
battalion; =white= field, the =second=; =blue= field, the =third=.

2. The =squares= indicate the first two companies of each
battalion, and the =diagonals=, the second two. Hence,

+-----------+----------------+
| Companies | Indicated by |
|-----------+----------------+
| A | E | I | Squares |
| B | F | K | |
|-----------+----------------+
| C | G | L | Diagonals |
| D | H | M | |
+-----------+----------------+

3. The colors of the squares and diagonals in combination with
those of the fields, run in the order that is so natural to us
all, viz.: =Red=, =White= and =Blue=, the color of any given field
being, of course, omitted from the squares and diagonals, as a
white square for instance, would not show on a white field, nor
would a blue diagonal show on a blue field. For example, with a
=red= field we would have =white= and =blue= for the square and
diagonal colors; with a =white= field, =red= and =blue= for the
square and diagonal colors; with a =blue= field, =red= and =white=
for the square and diagonal colors.

4. From what has been said, the following table explains itself:

+-----------+-------+-----+---------+-----------+
| Battalion | Field | Co. | Squares | Diagonals |
+-----------+-------+-----+---------+-----------+
| First | Red | A | White | |
| | | B | Blue | |
| | | C | | White |
| | | D | | Blue |
+-----------+-------+-----+---------+-----------+
| Second | White | E | Red | |
| | | F | Blue | |
| | | G | | Red |
| | | H | | Blue |
+-----------+-------+-----+---------+-----------+
| Third | Blue | I | Red | |
| | | K | White | |
| | | L | | Red |
| | | M | | White |
+-----------+-------+-----+---------+-----------+

Note how the square and diagonal colors always follow in the
natural order of =red=, =white=, and =blue=, with the color of the
field omitted.--Author. (45)

=95. Signal flags used to mark assembly point of company, etc.= In
addition to their use in visual signaling, these flags serve to mark
the assembly point of the company when disorganized by combat, and to
mark the location of the company in bivouac and elsewhere, when such
use is desirable. (46)

=96. Signals used between firing line and reserve or commander in
rear.= (1) For communication between the firing line and the reserve
or commander in the rear, the subjoined signals (Signal Corps codes)
are prescribed and should be memorized. In transmission, their
concealment from the enemy's view should be insured. In the absence of
signal flags, the headdress or other substitute may be used. (See par.
863 for the semaphore code and par. 861 for the General Service, or
International Morse Code.) (47)

---------------+---------------------------+----------------------------
Letter of | If signaled from the rear | If signaled from the firing
alphabet | to the firing line | line to the rear
---------------+---------------------------+----------------------------
A M | Ammunition going forward. | Ammunition required.
| |
C C C | Charge (mandatory at all | Am about to charge if no
| times). | instructions to the
| | contrary.
| |
C F | Cease firing. | Cease firing.
| |
D T | Double time or "rush." | Double time or "rush."
| |
F | Commence firing. | Commence firing.
| |
F B | Fix bayonets. | Fix bayonets.
| |
F L | Artillery fire is causing | Artillery fire is causing
| us losses. | us losses.
| |
G | Move forward. | Preparing to move forward.
| |
H H H | Halt. | Halt.
| |
K | Negative. | Negative.
| |
L T | Left. | Left.
| |
O | What is the (R. N. etc.)? | What is the (R. N. etc.)?
(Ardois and | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory.
semaphore | |
only.) | |
---------------| |
(All methods | What is the (R. N. etc.)? | What is the (R. N. etc.)?
but ardois | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory.
and semaphore.)| |
| |
P | Affirmative. | Affirmative.
| |
R | Acknowledgment. | Acknowledgment.
| |
R N | Range. | Range.
| |
R T | Right. | Right.
| |
S S S | Support going forward. | Support needed.
| |
S U F | Suspend firing. | Suspend firing.
| |
T | Target. | Target.
---------------+---------------------------+----------------------------

For the semaphore signals, see par. 863.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER

=97. Duties of instructor.= The instructor explains briefly each
movement, first executing it himself if practicable. He requires the
recruits to take the proper positions unassisted and does not touch
them for the purpose of correcting them, except when they are unable
to correct themselves. He avoids keeping them too long at the same
movement, although each should be understood before passing to
another. He exacts by degrees the desired precision and uniformity.
(48)

=98. Grouping of recruits according to proficiency.= In order that all
may advance as rapidly as their abilities permit, the recruits are
grouped according to proficiency as instruction progresses. Those who
lack aptitude and quickness are separated from the others and placed
under experienced drill masters. (49)

Instruction Without Arms

=98a. Formation of squad for preliminary instruction.= For preliminary
instruction a number of recruits, usually not exceeding three or four,
are formed as a squad in single rank. (50)

Position of the Soldier, or Attention

=99.= Heels on the same line and as near each other as the
conformation of the man permits.

Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45°.

=Knees straight without stiffness.=

Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting equally on
hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and falling equally.

Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumb along the seam of the
trousers.

Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that the axis
of the head and neck is vertical; eyes straight to the front.

Weight of the body resting equally upon the heels and balls of the
feet. (51)

The Rests

=100.= Being at a halt, the commands are: =FALL OUT; REST; AT EASE=;
and, =1. Parade, 2. REST=.

At the command =fall out=, the men may leave the ranks, but are
required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume their former
places, at attention, at the command =fall in=.

At the command =rest= each man keeps one foot in place, but is not
required to preserve silence or immobility.

At the command =at ease= each man keeps one foot in place and is
required to preserve silence but =not= immobility. (52)

[Illustration]

=101. 1. Parade, 2. REST.= Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to
the rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the hands, without
constraint, in front of the center of the body, fingers joined, left
hand uppermost, left thumb clasped by the thumb and forefinger of the
right hand; preserve silence and steadiness of position. (53)

=102.= To resume the attention: =1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.=

The men take the position of the soldier. (54)

Eyes Right or Left

=103. 1. Eyes, 2. RIGHT (LEFT), 3. FRONT.=

[Illustration]

At the command =right=, turn the head to the right oblique, eyes fixed
on the line of eyes of the men in, or supposed to be in, the same
rank. At the command =front=, turn the head and eyes to the front.
(55)

Facings

=104. To the flank: 1. Right (left), 2. FACE.=

Raise slightly the left heel and right toe; face to the right, turning
on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the
left foot; place the left foot by the side of the right. Left face is
executed on the left heel in the corresponding manner.

=Right (left) half face= is executed similarly, facing 45°.

"To face in marching" and advance, turn on the ball of either foot and
step off with the other foot in the new line of direction; to face in
marching without gaining ground in the new direction, turn on the ball
of either foot and mark time. (56)

=105.= To the rear: =1. About, 2. FACE.=

Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot-length to the rear
and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing the
position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the right on
the left heel and right toe; place the right heel by the side of the
left. (57)

Salute with the Hand

=106. 1. Hand, 2. SALUTE.=

[Illustration]

Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches
the lower part of the headdress or forehead above the right eye, thumb
and fingers extended and joined palm to the left, forearm inclined at
about 45°, hand and wrist straight; =at the same time look toward the
person saluted=. (=TWO=) Drop the arm smartly by the side. (58)

(For rules governing salutes, see "Military Courtesy," Chapter XI,
Part II.)

Steps and Marchings

=107. Steps and marchings begin with left foot.= All steps and
marchings executed from a halt, except right step, begin with the left
foot. (59)

=108. Length and cadence of full step; indicating cadence.= The length
of the full step in quick time is 30 inches, measured from heel to
heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120 steps per minute.

The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches; the cadence
is at the rate of 180 steps per minute.

The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of the step by
calling =one, two, three, four=, or =left, right=, the instant the
left and right foot, respectively, should be planted. (60)

=109. Steps and marchings and movements involving marchings habitually
executed in quick time.= All steps and marchings and movements
involving march are executed in =quick time= unless the squad be
marching in =double time=, or =double time= be added to the command;
in the latter case double time is added to the preparatory command.
Example: =1. Squad right, double time, 2. MARCH= (School of the
Squad). (61)

Quick Time

=110.= Being at a halt, to march forward in quick time: =1. Forward,
2. MARCH.=

At the command =forward=, shift the weight of the body to the right
leg, left knee straight.

At the command =march=, move the left foot smartly straight forward 30
inches from the right, sole near the ground, and plant it without
shock; next in like manner, advance the right foot and plant it as
above; continue the march. The arms swing naturally. (62)

=111.= Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march in double
time: =1. Double time, 2. MARCH.=

If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of the body to the
right leg. At the command =march=, raise the forearms, fingers closed,
to a horizontal position along the waist line; take up an easy run
with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural swinging
motion to the arms.

If marching in quick time, at the command march, given as either foot
strikes the ground, take one step in quick time, and then step off in
double time. (63)

To resume the quick time: =1. Quick time, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march=, given as either foot strikes the ground,
advance and plant the other foot in double time; resume the quick
time, dropping the hands by the sides. (64)

To Mark Time

=112.= Being in march: =1. Mark time, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march=, given as either foot strikes the ground,
advance and plant the other foot; bring up the foot in rear and
continue the cadence by alternately raising each foot about 2 inches
and planting it on line with the other.

Being at a halt, at the command march, raise and plant the feet as
described above. (65)

The Half Step

=113. 1. Half step, 2. MARCH.=

Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in double time. (66)

=Forward=, =half step=, =halt=, and =mark time= may be executed one
from the other in quick or double time.

To resume the full step from half step or mark time: =1. Forward, 2.
MARCH.= (67)

Side Step

=114.= Being at a halt or mark time: =1. Right (left) step, 2. MARCH.=

Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring the left
foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence of quick time.

The side step is used for short distances only and is not executed in
double time.

If at order arms, the side step is executed at trail without command.
(68)

Back Step

=115.= Being at a halt or mark time: =1. Backward, 2. MARCH.=

Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear.

The back step is used for short distances only and is not executed in
double time.

If at order arms, the back step is executed at trail without command.
(69)

To Halt

=116.= To arrest the march in quick or double time: =1. Squad, 2.
HALT.=

At the command =halt=, given as either foot strikes the ground, plant
the other foot as in marching; raise and place the first foot by the
side of the other. If in double time, drop the hands by the sides.
(70)

To March by the Flank

=117.= Being in march: =1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march=, given as the right foot strikes the ground,
advance and plant the left foot; then face to the right in marching
and step off in the new direction with the right foot. (71)

To March to the Rear

=118.= Being in march: =1. To the rear, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march= given as the right foot strikes the ground
advance and plant the left foot; turn to the right about on the balls
of both feet and immediately step off with the left foot.

If marching in double time, turn to the right about, taking four steps
in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the left foot.
(72)

Change Step

=119.= Being in march: =1. Change step, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march=, given as the right foot strikes the ground,
advance and plant the left foot; plant the toe of the right foot near
the heel of the left and step off with the left foot.

The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the command march
being given as the left foot strikes the ground. (73)

MANUAL OF ARMS

=120. Instruction of recruit in use of rifle, manual of arms, etc.= As
soon as practicable the recruit is taught the use, nomenclature, and
care of his rifle. (See "The Care, Description, and Management of the
Rifle," Chapter XIV, Part II.); when fair progress has been made in
the instruction without arms, he is taught the manual of arms;
instruction without arms and that with arms alternate. (74)

=121. Rules governing carrying of piece.= The following rules
governing the carrying of the piece:

First. =Piece habitually carried without cartridges in chamber or
magazine.= The piece is not carried with cartridges in either the
chamber or the magazine except when specifically ordered. When so
loaded, or supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked;
that is, with the =safety lock= turned to the "safe." At all other
times it is carried unlocked, with the trigger pulled.

Second. =Inspection of pieces when troops are formed and when
dismissed.= Whenever troops are formed under arms, pieces are
immediately inspected at the commands: =1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3.
Order (Right shoulder port), 4. ARMS=, which are executed as explained
in pars. 145-146.

A similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal.

If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine they are removed
and placed in the belt.

Third. =Cut-off habitually turned "off."= The cut-off is kept turned
"off" except when cartridges are actually used.

Fourth. =Bayonet habitually not carried fixed.= The bayonet is not
fixed (See par. 142), except in bayonet exercise, on guard, or for
combat.

Fifth. ="Fall in" executed at order; "attention" resumed at order.=
Fall in is executed with the piece at the order arms. =Fall out=,
=rest=, and =at ease= are executed as without arms, as explained in
par. 100. On resuming =attention= the position of order arms is taken.

Sixth. =If at order, pieces brought to right shoulder at command
"march"; execution of movements at trail; piece brought to trail in
certain movements executed from order.= If at the order, unless
otherwise prescribed, the piece is brought to the right shoulder at
the command march, the three motions corresponding with the first
three steps. Movements may be executed at the trail by prefacing the
preparatory command with the words =at trail=; as, =1. At trail,
forward, 2. MARCH=; the trail is taken at the command =march=.

When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking interval or
distance, and assemblings are executed from the order, raise the piece
to the trail while in motion and resume the order on halting.

Seventh. =Piece brought to order on halting.= The piece is brought to
the order on halting. The execution of the order begins when the halt
is completed.

Eighth. =Holding disengaged hand in double time.= A disengaged hand in
double time is held as when without arms. (75)

=122. Rules governing manual of arms.= The following rules govern the
execution of the manual of arms:

First. =Position of left hand at balance.= In all positions of the
left hand at the balance (center of gravity, bayonet unfixed) the
thumb clasps the piece; the sling is included in the grasp of the
hand.

Second. =Positions of piece "diagonally across the body."= In all
positions of the piece "diagonally across the body" the position of
the piece, left arm and hand are the same as in port arms. (See par.
125.)

[Illustration]

Third. =Next to last motion in resuming order from any position; piece
to strike ground gently.= In resuming the order from any position in
the manual, the motion next to the last concludes with the butt of the
piece about 3 inches from the ground, barrel to the rear, the left
hand above and near the right, steadying the piece, fingers extended
and joined, forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, all
fingers of the right hand grasping the piece. To complete the order,
lower the piece gently to the ground with the right hand, drop the
left quickly by the side, and take the position of order arms.

Allowing the piece to drop through the right hand to the ground, or
other similar abuse of the rifle to produce effect in executing the
manual is prohibited.

Fourth. =Cadence of motions; at first attention to be paid to details
of motion.= The cadence of the motions is that of quick time; the
recruits are first required to give their whole attention to the
details of the motions, the cadence being gradually acquired as they
become accustomed to handling their pieces. The instructor may require
them to count aloud in cadence with the motions.

Fifth. =Execution of manual "by the numbers."= The manual is taught at
a halt and the movements are for the purpose of instruction, divided
into motions and executed in detail; in this case the command of
=execution= determines the prompt execution of the first motion, and
the commands, =two, three, four=, that of the other motions.

To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: =By
the numbers=; all movements divided into motions are then executed as
above explained until he cautions: =Without the numbers=; or commands
movements other than those in the manual of arms.

Sixth. =Regular positions assumed without regard to previous
positions; carrying rifle in any position.= Whenever circumstances
require, the regular positions of the manual of arms and the firings
may be ordered without regard to the previous position of the piece.

Under the exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the rifle may
be carried in any manner directed. (76)

[Illustration]

=123. Position of order arms standing:= The butt rests evenly on the
ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on a line with toe of, and
touching, the right shoe, arms and hands hanging naturally, right hand
holding the piece between the thumb and fingers. (77)

=124.= Being at order arms: =1. Present, 2. ARMS.=

[Illustration]

With the right hand carry the piece in front of the center of the
body, barrel to the rear and vertical, grasp it with the left hand at
the balance, forearm horizontal and resting against the body. (=TWO=)
Grasp the small of the stock with the right hand. (78)

=125.= Being at order arms: =1. Port, 2. ARMS.=

[Illustration]

With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across the
body, grasp it smartly with both hands; the right, palm down, at the
small of the stock: the left, palm up, at the balance; barrel up,
sloping to the left and crossing opposite the junction of the neck
with the left shoulder; right forearm horizontal; left forearm resting
against the body; the piece in a vertical plane parallel to the front.
(79)

=126.= Being at present arms: =1. Port, 2. ARMS.=

Carry the piece =diagonally across= the body and take the position of
port arms. (80)

=127.= Being at port arms: =1. Present, 2. ARMS.=

Carry the piece to a vertical position in front of the center of the
body and take the position of present arms. (81)

=128.= Being at present or port arms: =1. Order, 2. ARMS.=

Let go with the right hand; lower and carry the piece to the right
with the left hand: regrasp it with the right hand just above the
lower band; let go with the left hand, and take the next to the last
position in coming to the order. (=TWO=) Complete the order. (82)

=129.= Being at order arms: =1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS.=

[Illustration]

With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across the
body; carry the right hand quickly to the butt, embracing it, the heel
between the first two fingers. (=TWO=) Without changing the grasp of
the right hand, place the piece on the right shoulder, barrel up and
inclined at an angle of about 45° from the horizontal, trigger guard
in the hollow of the shoulder, right elbow near the side, the piece in
a vertical plane perpendicular to the front; carry the left hand,
thumb and fingers extended and joined, to the small of the stock, tip
of the forefinger touching the cocking piece, wrist straight and elbow
down. (=THREE=) Drop the left hand by the side. (83)

=130.= Being at right shoulder arms: =1. Order, 2. ARMS.=

Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across the
body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt. (=TWO=),
(=THREE=) Execute order arms as described from port arms. (84)

=131.= Being at port arms: =1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS.=

Change the right hand to the butt. (=TWO=), (=THREE=) As in right
shoulder arms from order arms. (85)

=132.= Being at right shoulder arms: =1. Port, 2. ARMS.=

Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across the
body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. (=TWO=) Change
the right hand to the small of the stock. (86)

=133.= Being at right shoulder arms: =1. Present, 2. ARMS.=

Execute port arms. (=THREE=) execute present arms. (87)

=134.= Being at present arms: =1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS.=

Execute port arms. (=TWO=), (=THREE=), (=FOUR=) Execute right shoulder
arms as from port arms. (88)

=135.= Being at port arms: =1. Left shoulder, 2. ARMS.=

[Illustration]

Carry the piece with the right hand and place it on the left shoulder,
barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder; at the same
time grasp the butt with the left hand, heel between first and second
fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock. (=TWO=) Drop the right
hand by the side.

=136.= Being at left shoulder arms: =1. Port, 2. ARMS.=

Grasp the piece with the right hand at the small of the stock. (=TWO=)
Carry the piece to the right with the right hand, =regrasp= it with
the left, and take the position of port arms.

=Left shoulder arms= may be ordered directly from the order, right
shoulder or present, or the reverse. At the command =arms= execute
port arms and continue in cadence to the position ordered. (89)

=137.= Being at order arms: =1. Parade, 2. REST.=

[Illustration]

Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly
bent; carry the muzzle in front of the center of the body, barrel to
the left; grasp the piece with the left hand just below the stacking
swivel, and with the right hand below and against the left.

=138.= Being at parade rest: =1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.=

Resume the order, the left hand quitting the piece opposite the right
hip. (90)

=139.= Being at order arms: =1. Trail, 2. ARMS.=

[Illustration]

Raise the piece, right arm slightly bent, and incline the muzzle
forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 30° with the
vertical.

When it can be done without danger or inconvenience to others, the
piece may be grasped at the balance and the muzzle lowered until the
piece is horizontal; a similar position in the left hand may be used.
(91)

=140.= Being at trail arms: =1. Order, 2. ARMS.=

Lower the piece with the right hand and resume the order. (92)

Rifle Salute

=141.= Being at right shoulder arms: =1. Rifle, 2. SALUTE.=

[Illustration]

Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm
horizontal, palm of hand down, thumb and fingers extended and joined,
forefinger touching end of cocking piece; look toward the person
saluted. (=TWO=) Drop left hand by the side; turn head and eyes to the
front. (93)

Being at order or trail arms: =1. Rifle, 2. SALUTE.=

[Illustration]

Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm of the hand down,
thumb and fingers extended and joined, forefinger against piece near
the muzzle; look toward the person saluted. (=TWO=) Drop the left hand
by the side; turn the head and eyes to the front.

For rules governing salutes, see "Military Courtesy," Chapter XI, Part
II.

The Bayonet

=142.= Being at order arms: =1. Fix, 2. BAYONET.=

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest;
grasp the bayonet with the right hand, back of hand toward the body;
draw the bayonet from the scabbard and fix it on the barrel, glancing
at the muzzle; resume the order.

If the bayonet is carried on the haversack: Draw the bayonet with the
left hand and fix it in the most convenient manner. (95)

=143.= Being at our arms: =1. Unfix, 2. BAYONET.=

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest;
grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right hand, pressing
the spring with the forefinger of the right hand; raise the bayonet
until the handle is about 12 inches above the muzzle of the piece;
drop the point to the left, back of the hand toward the body, and,
glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing
between the left arm and the body; regrasp the piece with the right
hand and resume the order.

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet
from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the
most convenient manner.

If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the
most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the
original position.

=Fix= and =unfix= bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity
but not in cadence. (For unfixing bayonet with Krag rifle, see Par.
697.) (96)

=144. CHARGE BAYONET.= Whether executed at halt or in motion, the
bayonet is held toward the opponent as in the position of =guard= in
the Manual for Bayonet Exercise.

Exercises for instruction in bayonet combat are prescribed in the
Manual for Bayonet Exercise. (97)

The Inspection

[Illustration]

=145.= Being at order arms: =1. Inspection, 2. ARMS.=

At the second command take the position of port arms. (=TWO=) Seize
the bolt handle with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, turn
the handle up, draw the bolt back, and glance at the chamber. Having
found the chamber empty, or having emptied it, raise the head and eyes
to the front. (For inspection of arms with Krag rifle see par. 698.)
(98)

=146.= Being at inspection arms: =1. Order (Right shoulder, port), 2.
ARMS.=

At the preparatory command push the bolt forward, turn the handle
down, pull the trigger, and resume =port arms=. At the command =arms=,
complete the movement ordered. (To execute with Krag rifle see par.
699.) (99)

To Dismiss the Squad

=147.= Being at halt: =1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Port, 4. ARMS, 5.
DISMISSED.= (100)

SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD

=148. Grouping into Squads.= Soldiers are grouped into squads for
purposes of instruction, discipline, control, and order. (101)

=149. Composition of squad; object of squad movements.= The squad
proper consists of a corporal and seven privates.

The movements in the School of the Squad are designed to make the
squad a fixed unit and to facilitate the control and movement of the
company. If the number of men grouped is more than 3 and less than 12,
they are formed as a squad of 4 files, the excess above 8 being posted
as file closers. If the number grouped is greater than 11, 2 or more
squads are formed and the group is termed a platoon.

For the instruction of recruits, these rules may be modified. (102)

=150. Squad leader; his post.= The corporal is the squad leader, and
when absent is replaced by a designated private. If no private is
designated, the senior in length of service acts as leader.

The corporal, when in ranks, is posted as the left man in the front
rank of the squad.

When the corporal leaves the ranks to lead his squad, his rear rank
man steps into the front rank, and the file remains blank until the
corporal returns to his place in ranks, when his rear rank man steps
back into the rear rank. (103)

=151. Preservation of integrity of squads in battle.= In battle
officers and sergeants endeavor to preserve the integrity of squads;
they designate new leaders to replace those disabled, organize new
squads when necessary, and see that every man is placed in a squad.

Men are taught the necessity of remaining with the squad to which they
belong and, in case it be broken up or they become separated
therefrom, to attach themselves to the nearest squad and platoon
leaders, whether these be of their own or of another organization.
(104)

=152. Certain movements executed by squad as in School of the
Soldier.= The squad executes the =halt= (See par. 116), =rests= (See
par. 100-101), =facings= (See pars. 104-105), =steps and marchings=
(See pars. 107-119), and the =manual of arms= (See pars. 120-147), as
explained in the School of the Soldier. (105)

To Form the Squad

=153.= To form the squad the instructor places himself 3 paces in
front of where the center is to be and commands: =FALL IN.=

The men assemble at attention, pieces at the order, and are arranged
by the corporal in double rank, as nearly as practicable in order of
height from right to left, each man dropping his left hand as soon as
the man in his left has his interval. The rear rank forms with
distance of 40 inches.

The instructor then commands: =COUNT OFF.=

At this command all except the right file execute eyes right, and
beginning on the right, the men in each rank count =one, two, three,
four=; each man turns his head and eyes to the front as he counts.

Pieces are then inspected. (106)

Alignments

=154.= To align the squad, the base file or files having been
established: =1. Right (Left), 2. DRESS, 3. FRONT.=

At the command front, given when the ranks are aligned, each hip
(whether dressing to the right or left); each man, except the base
file, when on or near the new line executes =eyes right=, and taking
steps of 2 or 3 inches, places himself so that his right arm rests
lightly against the arm of the man on his right, and so that his eyes
and shoulders are in line with those of the men on his right; the rear
rank men cover in file.

The instructor verifies the alignment of both ranks from the right
flank and orders up or back such men as may be in rear, or in advance,
of the line; only the men designated move.

At the command =dress= all men place the left hand upon the man turns
his head and eyes to the front and drops his left hand by his side.

In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established on, or
parallel to, the front of the squad; afterwards, in oblique
directions.

Whenever the position of the base file or files necessitates a
considerable movement by the squad, such movement will be executed by
marching to the front or oblique, to the flank or backward, as the
case may be, without other command, and at the trail. (107)

=155.= To preserve the alignment when marching: =GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT).=

The men preserve their intervals from the side of the guide, yielding
to pressure from that side and resisting pressure from the opposite
direction; they recover intervals, if lost, by gradually opening out
or closing in; they recover alignment by slightly lengthening or
shortening the step; the rear-rank men cover their file leaders at 40
inches.

In double rank, the front-rank man on the right, or designated flank,
conducts the march; when marching faced to the flank, the leading man
of the front rank is the guide. (108)

To Take Intervals and Distances

=156.= Being in line at a halt: =1. Take interval, 2. To the right
(left), 3. MARCH, 4. Squad, 5. HALT.=

[Illustration]

Being in line at a halt.

=1. Take interval, 2. To the right (left)=

[Illustration]

At the second command the rear-rank men march backward 4 steps and
halt;

=3. MARCH=

[Illustration]

At the command =march= all face to the right and the leading man of
each rank steps off; the other men step off in succession, each
following the preceding man at 4 paces, rear-rank men marching abreast
of their file leaders.

=4. Squad, 5. HALT=

[Illustration]

At the command =halt=, given when all have their intervals, all halt
and face to the front. (109)

[Illustration: (AT INTERVALS)]

=157. Being at intervals, to assemble the squad:=

=1. Assemble, to the right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration: (ASSEMBLE)]

The front-rank man on the right stands fast, the rear rank man on the
right closes to 40 inches. The other men face to the right, close by
the shortest line, and face to the front. (110)

[Illustration: (ASSEMBLED)]

=158.= Being in line at a halt and having counted off: =1. Take
distance, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.=

[Illustration]

At the command =March= No. 1 of the front rank moves straight to the
front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of the front rank and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 of
the rear rank, in the order named, move straight to the front, each
stepping off so as to follow the preceding man at 4 paces. The command
=halt= is given when all have their distances.

In case more than one squad is in line, each squad executes the
movement as above. The guide of each rank of numbers is right. (111)

=159.= Being at distances, to assemble the squad: =1. Assemble, 2.
MARCH.=

[Illustration]

No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the other numbers move forward to
their proper places in line. (112)

To Stack and Take Arms

[Illustration]

=160.= Being in line at a halt: =STACK ARMS.= Each =even= number of
the =front= rank grasps his piece with the left hand at the upper
band

[Illustration]

and rests the butt between his feet, barrel to the front, muzzle
inclined slightly to the front and opposite the center of the interval
on his right, the thumb and forefinger raising the stacking swivel;
each =even= number of the =rear= rank then passes his piece, barrel to
the rear, to his file leader, who grasps it between the bands with his
right hand

[Illustration]

and throws the butt about 2 feet in advance of that of his own piece
and opposite the right of the interval, the right hand slipping to the
upper band, the thumb and forefinger raising the stacking swivel,
which he engages with that of his own piece;

[Illustration]

each =odd= number of the =front= rank raises his piece with the right
hand, carries it well forward, barrel to the front; the left hand,
guiding the stacking swivel,

[Illustration]

engages the lower hook of the swivel of his own piece with the free
hook of that of the even number of the rear rank; he then turns the
barrel outward into the angle formed by the other two pieces and
lowers the butt to the ground, =to the right= and =against the toe= of
his right shoe.

The stacks made, the loose pieces are laid on them by the =even=
numbers of the front rank. When each man has finished handling pieces,
he takes the position of the soldier. (113)

=161.= Being in line behind the stacks: =TAKE ARMS.=

(See preceding illustration.)

The loose pieces are returned by the =even= numbers of the =front=
rank; each even number of the front rank grasps his own piece with the
left hand, the piece of his rear rank man with his right hand,
grasping both between the bands; each =odd= number of the =front= rank
grasps his piece in the same way with the right hand; disengages it by
raising the butt from the ground and then turning the piece to the
right, detaches it from the stack; each =even= number of the front
rank disengages and detaches his piece by turning it to the left,

[Illustration]

and, then passes the piece of his rear-rank man to him, and all resume
the order. (114)

Should any squad have Nos. 2 and 3 blank files, No. 1 rear rank takes
the place of No. 2 rear rank in making and breaking the stack; the
stacks made or broken, he resumes his post.

Pieces not used in making the stacks are termed =loose pieces=.

Pieces are never stacked with the bayonet fixed. (115)

The Oblique March

=162.= For the instruction of recruits, the squad being in column or
correctly aligned, the instructor causes the squad to face half right
or half left, points out to the men their relative positions, and
explains that these are to be maintained in the oblique march. (116)

=163. Right (Left) oblique, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

Each man steps off in a direction 45° to the right of his original
front. He preserves his relative position, keeping his shoulders
parallel to those of the guide (the man on the right front of the line
or column), and so regulates his steps that the ranks remain parallel
to their original front.

At the command =halt= the men halt faced to front.

To resume the original direction: =1. Forward 2. MARCH.=

The men half face to the left in marching and then move straight to
the front.

If at =halfstep= or =mark time= while obliquing, the oblique march is
resumed by the commands: =1. Oblique, 2. MARCH.= (117)

To Turn on Moving Pivot

=164.= Being in line: =1. Right (Left) turn, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

The movement is executed by each rank successively and on the same
ground. At the second command, the pivot man of the front rank faces
to the right in marching and takes the half step; the other men of the
rank oblique to the right until opposite their places in line, then
execute a second right oblique and take the half step on arriving
abreast of the pivot man. All glance toward the marching flank while
at half step and take the full step without command as the last man
arrives on the line.

=Right (Left) half turn= is executed in a similar manner. The pivot
man makes a half change of direction to the right and the other men
make quarter changes in obliquing. (118)

To Turn on Fixed Pivot

=165.= Being in line, to turn and march: =1. Squad right (left), 2.
MARCH.=

[Illustration]

At the second command, the right flank man in the front rank faces to
the right in marching and marks time; the other front rank men oblique
to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, and mark time. In
the rear rank the third man from the right, followed in column by the
second and first, move straight to the front

[Illustration]

until in rear of his front-rank man,

[Illustration]

when all face to the right in marching and mark time; the other number
of the rear rank moves straight to the front four paces and places
himself abreast of the man on his right. Men on the new line glance
toward the marching flank while marking time and, as the last man
arrives on the line, both ranks execute =forward, MARCH=, without
command. (119)

=166.= Being in line, to turn and halt: =1. Squad right (left), 2.
MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.=

The third command is given immediately after the second. The turn is
executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except that all men,
on arriving on the new line, mark time until the fourth command is
given, when all halt. The fourth command should be given as the last
man arrives on the line. (120)

=167.= Being in line, to turn about and march: =1. Squad right (left)
about, 2. MARCH.=

At the second command, the front rank twice executes squad right
initiating the second squad right when the man on the marching flank
has arrived abreast of the rank. In the rear rank the third man from
the right, followed by the second and first in column, moves straight
to the front until on the prolongation of the line to be occupied by
the rear rank; changes direction to the right; moves in the new
direction until in rear of his front-rank man, when all face to the
right in marching, mark time, and glance toward the marching flank.
The fourth man marches on the left of the third to his new position;
as he arrives on the line, both ranks execute =forward, MARCH=,
without command. (121)

=168.= Being in line, to turn about and halt: =1. Squad right (left)
about, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.=

To Follow the Corporal

[Illustration: (IN LINE)]

=169.= Being assembled or deployed, to march the squad without
unnecessary commands, the corporal places himself in front of it and
commands: =FOLLOW ME.=

[Illustration: (AS SKIRMISHERS)]

If in line or skirmish line, No. 2 of the front rank follows in the
trace of the corporal at about 3 paces; the other men conform to the
movements of No. 2, guiding on him and maintaining their relative
positions.

[Illustration: (IN COLUMN)]

If in column, the head of the column follows the corporal. (123)

To Deploy as Skirmishers

[Illustration]

=170.= Being in any formation, assembled: =1. As skirmishers, 2.
MARCH.=

The corporal places himself in front of the squad, if not already
there. Moving at a run, the men place themselves abreast of the
corporal at half-pace intervals, Nos. 1 and 2 on his right, Nos. 3
and 4 on his left, rear rank men on the right of their file leaders,
extra men on the left of No. 4; all then conform to the corporal's
gait.

[Illustration]

When the squad is acting alone, skirmish line is similarly formed on
No. 2 of the front rank, who stands fast or continues the march, as
the case may be; the corporal places himself in front of the squad
when advancing and in rear when halted.

[Illustration]

When deployed as skirmishers, the men march at ease, pieces at the
trail unless otherwise ordered.

The corporal is the guide when in the line; otherwise No. 2 front rank
is the guide. (124)

=171.= The normal interval between skirmishers is one-half pace,
resulting practically in one man per yard of front. The front of a
squad thus deployed as skirmishers is about 10 paces. (125)

To Increase or Diminish Intervals

=172.= If assembled, and it is desired to deploy at greater than the
normal interval; or if deployed, and it is desired to increase or
decrease the internal: =1. As skirmishers, (so many) paces, 2. MARCH.=

Intervals are taken at the indicated number of paces. If already
deployed, the men move by the flank toward or away from the guide.
(126)

The Assembly

=173.= Being deployed: =1. Assemble. 2. MARCH.=

The men move toward the corporal and form in their proper places.

If the corporal continues to advance, the men move in double time,
form, and follow him.

The assembly while marching to the rear is not executed. (127)

Kneeling and Lying Down

=174.= If standing: =KNEEL.=

Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the left
rear of the left heel; kneel on right knee, sitting as nearly as
possible on the right heel; left forearm across left thigh; piece
remains in position of order arms, right hand grasping it above lower
band. (128)

[Illustration]

=175.= If standing or kneeling: =LIE DOWN.=

[Illustration]

Kneel, but with right knee against left heel:

[Illustration]

carry back the left foot and lie flat on the belly, inclining body
about 35° to the right

[Illustration]

piece horizontal, barrel up, muzzle off the ground and pointed to the
front; elbows on the ground; left hand at the balance, right hand
grasping the small of the stock opposite the neck. This is the
position of order arms, lying down. (129)

=176.= If kneeling or lying down: =RISE.=

If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked by the
left heel.

If lying down, raise body on both knees; stand up, faced to the front,
on the ground marked by the knees. (130)

=177.= If lying down: =KNEEL.=

Raise the body on both knees; take the position of kneel. (131)

=178.= In double rank, the positions of kneeling and lying down are
ordinarily used only for the better utilization of cover.

When deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position may be taken in lieu
of the position kneeling. (132)

Loadings and Firings

=179.= The commands for loading and firing are the same whether
standing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are always executed at
a halt.

When kneeling or lying down in double rank, the rear rank does not
load, aim, or fire.

The instruction in firing will be preceded by a command for loading.

Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only. (133)

=180.= Pieces having been ordered loaded are kept loaded without
command until the command =unload=, or =inspection arms=, fresh clips
being inserted when the magazine is exhausted. (To execute with Krag
rifle see par. 700.) (134)

=181.= The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. This may
be done before or after announcing the sight setting. Both are
indicated before giving the command for firing, but may be omitted
when the target appears suddenly and is unmistakable; in such case
battle sight is used if no sight setting is announced. (135)

=182.= The target or aiming point having been designated and the sight
setting announced, such designation or announcement need not be
repeated until a change of either or both is necessary.

Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming point or
target designated, and at the sight setting announced, until a change
is ordered. (136)

=183.= If the men are not already in the position of load, that
position is taken at the announcement of the sight setting; if the
announcement is omitted, the position is taken at the first command
for firing. (137)

=184.= When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to accurate
firing is discretionary with each man. (138)

To Load

=185.= Being in line or skirmish line at halt:

=1. With dummy (blank or ball) cartridges, 2. LOAD.=

[Illustration]

At the command load each front-rank man or skirmisher faces half right
and carries the right foot to the right, about 1 foot, to such
position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the
body; raises, or lowers, the piece and drops it into the left hand at
the balance, the left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the
height of the breast, and turns the cut-off up.

[Illustration]

With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt back,

[Illustration]

takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in the clip slots, places the
thumb on the powder space of the top cartridge, the fingers extending
around the piece and tips resting on the magazine floor plate; forces
the cartridges into the magazine by pressing down with the thumb;
without removing the clip, thrusts the bolt home, turning down the
handle; turns the safety lock to the "=safe=,"

[Illustration]

and carries the hand to the small of the stock.

[Illustration]

Each rear rank man moves to the right front, takes a similar position
opposite the interval to the right of his front rank man, muzzle of
the piece extending beyond the front rank and loads.

A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly
as practicable in the position of =load=.

[Illustration]

If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if
kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh;

[Illustration]

if sitting the elbows are supported by the knees.

[Illustration]

If lying down, the left hand steadies and supports the piece at the
balance, the toe of the butt resting on the ground, the muzzle off the
ground.

For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down)
are designated as that of =load=. (For Krag rifle as prescribed in
701.) (139)

=186.= For instruction in loading: =1. Simulate, 2. LOAD.=

Executed as above described except that the cut-off remains "off" and
the handling of cartridges is simulated.

The recruits are first taught to =simulate= loading and firing; after
a few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Later, blank cartridges
may be used. (140)

The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning the magazine
"off." The magazine may be filled in whole or in part while "off" or
"on" by pressing cartridges singly down and back until they are in the
proper place. The use of the rifle as a single loader is, however, to
be regarded as exceptional. (Explained for Krag rifle in par. 702.)
(141)

To Unload

=187. UNLOAD.=

Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and move bolt
alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are ejected.
After the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed by first
thrusting the bolt slightly forward to free it from the stud holding
it in place when the chamber is open, pressing the follower down and
back to engage it under the bolt and then thrusting the bolt home; the
trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and
returned to the belt and the piece is brought to the order. (Explained
in par. 703 for Krag rifle.) (142)

To Set the Sight

=188. RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED (EIGHT-FIFTY, etc.)=, or =BATTLE SIGHT=.

The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The instructor explains
and verifies sight settings. (143)

To Fire by Volley

=189. 1. Ready, 2. AIM, 3. Squad, 4. FIRE.=

[Illustration]

At the command =ready= turn the safety lock to the "ready";

[Illustration]

at the command =aim= raise the piece with both hands and support the
butt firmly against the hollow of the right shoulder, right thumb
clasping the stock, barrel horizontal, left elbow well under the
piece, right elbow as high as the shoulder; incline the head slightly
forward and a little to the right, cheek against the stock,

[Illustration]

left eye closed, right eye looking through the notch of the rear sight
so as to perceive the object aimed at, second joint of the forefinger
resting lightly against the front of the trigger and taking up the
slack; top of front sight is carefully raised into, and held in, the
line of sight.

[Illustration]

Each rear-rank man aims through the interval to the right of his file
leader and leans slightly forward to advance the muzzle of his piece
beyond the front rank.

[Illustration]

In aiming kneeling, the left elbow rests on the left knee, point of
elbow in front of kneecap.

[Illustration]

In aiming sitting, the elbows are supported by the knees.

[Illustration]

In aiming, lying down, raise the piece with both hands; rest on both
elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder.

At the command =fire= press the finger against the trigger; fire
without deranging the aim and without lowering or turning the piece;
lower the piece in the position of =load= and load. (144)

To continue the firing: =1. AIM, 2. Squad, 3. FIRE.=

Each command is executed as previously explained. =Load= (from
magazine) is executed by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt with
the right hand, leaving the safety lock at the "ready." (145)

To Fire at Will

=190. FIRE AT WILL.=

Each man, independently of the others, comes to the =ready=, aims
carefully and deliberately at the aiming point or target, =fires=,
=loads=, and continues the firing until ordered to =suspend= or =cease
firing=. (146)

=191.= To increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress the
instructor shouts: =FASTER (SLOWER).=

Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots per minute at
effective ranges and five or six at close ranges, devoting the minimum
of time to loading and the maximum to deliberate aiming. To illustrate
the necessity for deliberation, and to habituate men to combat
conditions, small and comparatively indistinct targets are designated.
(147)

To Fire by Clip

=192. CLIP FIRE.=

Executed in the same manner as =fire at will=, except that each man,
after having exhausted the cartridges then in the piece, =suspends
firing=. (For Krag rifle see par. 704.) (148)

To Suspend Firing

=193.= The instructor blows a =long blast= of the whistle and repeats
same, if necessary, or commands: =SUSPEND FIRING.=

Firing stops; pieces are held, loaded and locked, in a position of
readiness for instant resumption of firing, rear sights unchanged. The
men continue to observe the target or aiming point, or the place at
which the target disappeared, or at which it is expected to reappear.

This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to =cease firing=.
(149)

To Cease Firing

=194. CEASE FIRING.=

Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
load; those not loaded, are loaded; sights are laid, pieces are locked
and brought to the order.

=Cease firing= is used for long pauses, to prepare for changes of
position, or to steady the men. (For Krag rifle see par. 705.) (150)

Commands for suspending or ceasing fire may be given at any time after
the preparatory command for firing whether the firing has actually
commenced or not. (151)

The Use of Cover

=195. Individual instruction; things to be impressed upon the
recruit.= The recruit should be given careful instruction in the
individual use of cover. (152)

It should be impressed upon him that, in taking advantage of natural
cover, he must be able to fire easily and effectively upon the enemy;
if advancing on an enemy, he must do so steadily and as rapidly as
possible; he must conceal himself as much as possible while firing and
while advancing. While setting his sight he should be under cover or
lying prone.

=196. Practice in simulated firing from behind hillocks, trees, etc.;
firing around right side of concealment.= To teach him to fire easily
and effectively, at the same time concealing himself from the view of
the enemy, he is practiced in simulated firing in the prone, sitting,
kneeling, and crouching positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps
of earth or rocks, from depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways, or
windows. He is taught to fire around the right side of his concealment
whenever possible, or, when this is not possible, to rise enough to
fire over the top of his concealment.

When these details are understood, he is required to select cover with
reference to an assumed enemy and to place himself behind it in proper
position for firing. (153)

=197. Evil of remaining too long in one place; advancing from cover to
cover by running, crawling, etc.= The evil of remaining too long in
one place, however good the concealment, should be explained. He
should be taught to advance from cover to cover, selecting cover in
advance before leaving his concealment.

It should be impressed upon him that a man running rapidly toward an
enemy furnishes a poor target. He should be trained in springing from
a prone position behind concealment, running at top speed to cover and
throwing himself behind it. He should also be practiced in advancing
from cover to cover by crawling, or by lying on the left side, rifle
grasped in the right hand, and pushing himself forward with the right
leg. (154)

=198. Action when fired on while acting independently.= He should be
taught that, when fired on while acting independently, he should drop
to the ground, seek cover, and then endeavor to locate his enemy.
(155)

=199. Proper advance and effectiveness of fire of greater importance
than cover.= The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is
continued in the combat exercises of the company, but he must then be
taught that the proper advance of the platoon or company and the
effectiveness of its fire is of greater importance than the question
of cover for individuals. He should also be taught that he may not
move about or shift his position in the firing line except the better
to see the target. (156)

Observation

=200. Importance of observation; training of recruit.= The ability to
use his eyes accurately is of great importance to the soldier. The
recruit should be trained in observing his surroundings from positions
and when on the march.

He should be practiced in pointing out and naming military features of
the ground; in distinguishing between living beings; in counting
distant groups of objects or beings; in recognizing colors and forms.
(157)

=201. Training in mechanism of firing line and estimating distance.=
In the training of men in the mechanism of the firing line, they
should be practiced in repeating to one another target and aiming
point designations and in quickly locating and pointing out a
designated target. They should be taught to distinguish, from a prone
position, distant objects, particularly troops, both with the naked
eye and with field glasses. Similarly, they should be trained in
estimating distances. (158)

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY

=202. Captain responsible for instruction of officers and
noncommissioned officers.= The captain is responsible for the
theoretical and practical instruction of his officers and
noncommissioned officers, not only in the duties of their respective
grades, but in those of the next higher grades. (159)

=203. Formation of company in double rank, according to height;
division into squads.= The company in line is formed in double rank
with the men arranged, as far as practicable, according to height from
right to left, the tallest on the right.

The original division into squads is effected by the command: =COUNT
OFF=. The squads, successively, from the right, count off as in the
School of the Squad, as explained in par. 153, corporals placing
themselves as Nos. 4 of the front rank. If the left squad contains
less than six men, it is either increased to that number by transfers
from other squads or is broken up and its members assigned to other
squads and posted in the line of file closers. These squad
organizations are maintained, by transfers if necessary, until the
company becomes so reduced in numbers as to necessitate a new division
into squads. No squad will contain less than six men. (160)

=204. Division of company into platoons.= The company is further
divided into two, three or four platoons, each consisting of not less
than two, nor more than four squads. In garrison or ceremonies the
strength of platoons may exceed four squads. (161)

=205. Designation of squads and platoons.= At the formation of the
company the platoons or squads are numbered consecutively from right
to left and these designations do not change.

For convenience in giving commands and for reference, the
designations, =right, center, left=, when in line, and =leading,
center, rear=, when in column, are applied to platoons or squads.
These designations apply to the actual right, left, center, head, or
rear, in whatever direction the company may be facing. The =center
squad= is the middle or right middle squad of the company.

The designation "So-and-so's" squad or platoon may also be used.
(162)

=206. Assignment of platoons; assignment of guides.= Platoons are
assigned to the lieutenants and noncommissioned officers, in order of
rank, as follows: 1, right; 2, left; 3, center (right center); 4, left
center.

[Illustration: Plate II]

The noncommissioned officers next in rank are assigned as guides, one
to each platoon. If sergeants still remain, they are assigned to
platoons as additional guides. When the platoon is deployed, its
guide, or guides, accompany the platoon leader.

During battle, these assignments are not changed; vacancies are filled
by noncommissioned officers of the platoon, or by the nearest
available officers or noncommissioned officers arriving with
reënforcing troops. (163)

=207. Post of first sergeant, quartermaster sergeant and musicians.=
The first sergeant is never assigned as a guide. When not commanding a
platoon, he is posted as a file closer opposite the third file from
the outer flank of the first platoon; and when the company is deployed
he accompanies the captain.

The quartermaster sergeant, when present, is assigned according to his
rank as a sergeant.

Enlisted men below the grade of sergeant, armed with the rifle are in
ranks unless serving as guides; when not so armed they are posted in
the line of file closers.

Musicians, when required to play, are at the head of the column. When
the company is deployed, they accompany the captain, and perform the
duties laid down in par. 272. (164)

=208. Certain movements executed by company and by platoon as
prescribed in Schools of the Soldier and the Squad.= The company
executes the =halt=, =rests=, =facings=, =steps=, and =marchings=,
=manual of arms=, =loadings=, and =firings=, takes =intervals= and
=distances= and =assembles=, =increases= and =diminishes intervals=,
resumes =attention=, =obliques=, resumes the direct march, preserves
alignments, =kneels=, =lies down=, =rises=, =stacks=, and =takes
arms=, as explained in the Schools of the Soldier and the Squad,
substituting in the commands =company= for =squad=.

The same rule applies to platoons, detachments, details, etc.,
substituting their designation for =squad= in the commands. In the
same manner these execute the movements prescribed for the company,
whenever possible, substituting their designation for =company= in the
commands. (165)

=209. Depleted company led as platoon.= A company so depleted as to
make division into platoons impracticable is led by the captain as a
single platoon, but retains the designation of company. The
lieutenants and first sergeant assist in fire control; the other
sergeants place themselves in the firing line as skirmishers. (166)

CLOSE ORDER

Rules

=210. Platoon guides.= The guides of the right and left, or leading
and rear, platoons, are the right and left, or leading and rear,
guides, respectively, of the company when it is in line or in column
of squads. Other guides are in the line of =file closers=.

In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide is at the head of
the platoon, if the platoon is in column, and on the guiding flank if
in line. When a platoon has two guides their original assignment to
flanks of the platoon does not change. (167)

=211. Guides of a column of squads; changing guides and file closers
to opposite flank.= The guides of a column of squads place themselves
on the flank opposite the file closers. To change the guides and file
closers to the other flank, the captain commands: =1. File closers on
left (right) flank; 2. MARCH.= The file closers dart through the
column; the captain and guides change.

In the column of squads, each rank preserves the alignment toward the
side of the guide. (168)

=212. File closers do not execute loadings or firings; execution of
manual of arms and other movements.= Men in the line of file closers
do not execute the loadings or firings.

Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute the manual
of arms during the drill unless specially excused, when they remain at
the order. During ceremonies they execute all movements. (169)

=213. Action of guides in taking intervals and distances.= In taking
intervals and distances, unless otherwise directed, the right and left
guides, at the first command, place themselves in the line of file
closers, and, with them, take a distance of 4 paces from the rear
rank. In taking intervals, at the command =march=, the file closers
face to the flank and each steps off with the file nearest him. In
assembling the guides and file closers resume their position in line.
(170)

=214. Repetition of commands by platoon leaders in platoon drill.= In
movements executed simultaneously by platoons (=as platoons right or
platoons, column right=), platoon leaders repeat the preparatory
command (=platoon right=, etc.), applicable to their respective
platoons. The command of execution is given by the captain only. (171)

To Form the Company

=215.= At the sounding of the assembly the first sergeant takes
position 6 paces in front of where the center of the company is to be,
faces it, draws saber, and commands: =FALL IN.=

The right guide of the company places himself, facing to the front,
where the right of the company is to rest, and at such point that the
center of the company will be 6 paces from and opposite the first
sergeant; the squads form in their proper places on the left of the
right guide, superintended by the other sergeants, who then take their
posts.

The first sergeant commands: =REPORT.= Remaining in position at the
order, the squad leaders, in succession from right, salute and report:
=All present=; or, =Private(s) ---- absent.= The first sergeant does
not return the salutes of the squad leaders; he then commands: =1.
Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Order, 4. ARMS=, faces about, salutes the
captain, reports: =Sir, all present or accounted for=, or the names of
the unauthorized absentees, and, without command, takes his post.

If the company can not be formed by squads, the first sergeant
commands: =1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Right shoulder, 4. ARMS=, and
calls the roll. Each man, as his name is called, answers here and
executes order arms. The sergeant then effects the division into
squads and reports the company as prescribed above.

The captain places himself 12 paces in front of the center of, and
facing, the company in time to receive the report of the first
sergeant, whose salute he returns, and then draws saber.

The lieutenants take their posts when the first sergeant has reported
and draw saber with the captain. The company, if not under arms, is
formed in like manner omitting reference to arms. (172)

=216.= For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the company,
when small, may be formed in single rank. In this formation close
order movements only are executed. The single rank executes all
movements as explained for the front rank of a company. (173)

To Dismiss the Company

=217.= Being in line at a halt, the captain directs the first
sergeant: =Dismiss the company.= The officers fall out; the first
sergeant places himself faced to the front, 3 paces to the front and 2
paces from the nearest flank of the company, salutes, faces toward
opposite flank of the company and commands: =1. Inspection, 2. ARMS,
3. Port, 4. ARMS, 5. DISMISSED.= (174)

Alignments

=218.= The alignments are executed as prescribed in the School of the
Squad, the guide being established instead of the flank file. The
rear-rank man of the flank file keeps his head and eyes to the front
and covers his file leader.

At each alignment the captain places himself in prolongation of the
line, 2 paces from and facing the flank toward which the dress is
made, verifies the alignment, and commands: =FRONT.=

Platoon leaders take a like position when required to verify
alignments. (175)

Movements on the Fixed Pivot

=219.= Being in line, to turn the company: =1. Company right (left),
2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT;= or, =3. Forward, 4. MARCH.=

At the second command the right-flank man[1] in the front rank faces
to the right in marching and marks time; the other front-rank men
oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, and mark
time; in the rear rank the third man from the right, followed in
column by the second and first, moves straight to the front until in
rear of his front-rank man, when all face to the right in marching and
mark time; the remaining men of the rear rank move straight to the
front 4 paces, oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the
third man, cover their file leaders, and mark time, the right guide
steps back, takes post on the flank, and marks time.

[Illustration]

The fourth command is given when the last man is 1 pace in rear of the
new line.

The command =halt= may be given at any time after the movement begins;
only those halt who are in the new position. Each of the others halts
upon arriving on the line, aligns himself to the right, and executes
=front= without command. (176)

=220.= Being in line, to form column of platoons, or the reverse: =1.
Platoons right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT=; or, =3.
Forward, 4. MARCH.=

[Illustration: FROM LINE TO COLUMN OF PLATOONS.]

Executed by each platoon as described for the company.

Before forming line the captain sees that the guides on the flank
toward which the movement is to be executed are covering. This is
effected by previously announcing the guide to that flank. (177)

=221.= Being in line, to form column of squads, or the reverse; or,
being in line of platoons, to form column of platoons, or the reverse:
=1. Squads right (left), 2. MARCH=; or, =1. Squads right (left), 2.
MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT=.

[Illustration: FROM LINE TO COLUMN OF SQUADS.]

[Illustration: FROM LINE OF PLATOONS TO COLUMN OF PLATOONS.]

Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad.

If the company or platoons be formed in line toward the side of the
file closers, they dart through the column and take posts in rear of
the company at the second command. If the column of squads be formed
from line, the file closers take posts on the pivot flank, abreast of
and 4 inches from the nearest rank. (178)

Movements on the Moving Pivot

=222.= Being in line, to change direction: =1. Right (Left) turn, 2.
MARCH, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

Executed as described in the School of the Squad, except that the men
do not glance toward the marching flank and that all take the full
step at the fourth command. The right guide is the pivot of the front
rank. Each rear-rank man obliques on the same ground as his file
leader. (179)

=223.= Being in column of platoons, to change direction: =1. Column
right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

At the first command the leader of the leading platoon commands:
=Right turn.= At the command =march= the leading platoon turns to the
right on moving pivot; its leader commands: =1. Forward, 2. MARCH=, on
completion of the turn. Rear =platoons= march squarely up to the
turning point of the leading platoons =and turn= at command of their
leaders. (180)

=224.= Being in column of squads, to change direction: =1. Column
right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

At the second command the front rank of the leading squad turns to the
right on moving pivot as in the School of the Squad; the other ranks,
without command turn successively on the same ground and in a similar
manner. (181)

=225.= Being in column of squads, to form line of platoons or the
reverse: =1. Platoons, column right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS TO LINE OF PLATOONS.]

Executed by each platoon as described for the company. (182)

=226.= Being in line, to form column of squads and change direction:
=1. Squads right (left), column right (left), 2. MARCH=; or, =1. Right
(Left) by squads, 2. MARCH.=

In the first case the right squad initiates the =column right= as soon
as it has completed the =squad right=.

[Illustration: SQUADS RIGHT COLUMN RIGHT.]

In the second case, at the command =march=, the right squad marches
=forward=; the remainder of the company executes =squads right=,
=column left=, and follows the right squad. The right guide, when he
has posted himself in front of the squad, takes four short steps, then
resumes the full step; the right quad conforms. (183)

[Illustration: RIGHT BY SQUADS.]

=227.= Being in line, to form line of platoons: =1. Squads right
(left), platoons, column right (left), 2. MARCH=; or, =1. Platoons,
right (left) by squads, 2. MARCH=.

[Illustration: FROM LINE TO LINE OF PLATOONS.]

Executed by each platoon as described for the company in the preceding
paragraph. (184)

Facing or Marching to the Rear

=228.= Being in line, line of platoons, or in column of platoons or
squads, to face or march to the rear: =1. Squads right (left) about,
2. MARCH=; or, =1. Squad right (left) about, 2. MARCH; 3. Company, 4.
HALT.=

Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad.

If the company or platoons be in column of squads, the file closers
turn about toward the column, and take their posts; if in line, each
darts through the nearest interval between squads. (185).

=229.= To march to the rear for a few paces: =1. About, 2. FACE, 3.
Forward, 4. MARCH.=

If in line, the guides place themselves in the rear rank, now the
front rank; the file closers, on facing about, maintain their relative
positions. No other movement is executed until the line is faced to
the original front. (186)

On Right (Left) Into Line

=230.= Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line on right or
left: =1. On right (left) into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT, 5.
FRONT.=

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF PLATOONS TO LINE ON RIGHT.]

At the first command the leader of the leading unit commands: =Right
turn.= The leaders of the other units command: =Forward=, if at a
halt. At the second command the leading unit turns to the right on
moving pivot. The command halt is given when the leading unit has
advanced the desired distance in the new direction; it halts; its
leader then commands: =Right dress.=

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS TO LINE ON RIGHT.]

The units in rear continue to march straight to the front; each, when
opposite the right of its place in line, executes right turn at the
command of its leader; each is halted on the line at the command of
its leader, who then commands: =Right dress.= All dress on the first
unit in line.

If executed in double time, the leading squad marches in double time
until halted. (187)

Front Into Line

=231.= Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line to the
front: =1. Right (Left) front into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4.
HALT, 5. FRONT.=

At the first command the leaders of the units in rear of the leading
one command: =Right oblique.= If at a halt, the leader of the leading
unit commands: =Forward.= At the second command the leading unit moves
straight forward; the rear units oblique as indicated. The command
=halt= is given when the leading unit has advanced the desired
distance; it halts; its leader then commands: =Left dress.= Each of
the rear units, when opposite its place in line, resumes the original
direction at the command of its leader; each is halted on the line at
the command of its leader, who then commands: =Left dress.= All dress
on the first unit in line. (188)

=232.= Being in column of squads to form column of platoons, or being
line of platoons, to form the company in line: =1. Platoons, right
(left) front into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT, 5. FRONT.=

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS TO LINE TO THE FRONT.]

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF PLATOONS TO LINE TO THE FRONT.]

Executed by each platoon as described for the company. In forming the
company in line, the dress is on the left squad of the left platoon.
If forming column of platoons, platoon leaders verify the alignment
before taking their posts; the captain commands =front= when the
alignments have been verified.

When =front into line= is executed in double time the commands for
halting and aligning are omitted and the guide is toward the side of
the first unit in line. (189)

At Ease and Route Step

=233.= The column of squads is the habitual column of route, but
=route step= and =at ease= are applicable to any marching formation.
(190)

To march at route step: =1. Route step, 2. MARCH.=

Sabers are carried at will or in the scabbard; the men carry their
pieces at will, keeping the muzzles elevated; they are not required to
preserve silence, nor to keep the step. The ranks cover and preserve
their distance. If halted from route step, the men stand =at rest=.
(191)

To march at ease: =1. At ease, 2. MARCH.=

The company marches as in route step, except that silence is
preserved; when halted, the men remain =at ease=. (192)

Marching at route step or at ease: =1. Company, 2. ATTENTION.=

At the command =attention= the pieces are brought to the right
shoulder and the cadenced step in quick time is resumed. (193)

To Diminish The Front of A Column of Squads

=234.= Being in column of squads: =1. Right (left) by twos, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

At the command =march= all files except the two right files of the
leading squad execute =in place halt=; the two left files of the
leading squad oblique to the right when disengaged and follow the
right files at the shortest practicable distance. The remaining squads
follow successively in like manner. (194)

=235.= Being in column of squads or twos: =1. Right (Left) by file, 2.
MARCH.=

[Illustration]

At the command =march=, all files execute =in place halt= except the
right file of the leading two or squad. The left file or files of the
leading two or squad oblique successively to the right when disengaged
and each follows the file on its right at the shortest practicable
distance. The remaining twos or squads follow successively in like
manner. (195)

Being in column of files or twos, to form column of squads; or, being
in column of files, to form column of twos: =1. Squads (Twos), right
(left) front into line, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march=, the leading file or files halt. The remainder
of the squad, or two, obliques to the right and halts on line with the
leading file or files. The remaining squads or twos close up and
successively form in rear of the first in like manner.

[Illustration]

This diagram illustrates a squad executing =LEFT= front into line.

The movement described in this paragraph will be ordered =right= or
=left=, so as to restore the files to their normal relative positions
in the two or squad. (196)

The movements prescribed in the three preceding paragraphs are
difficult of execution at attention and have no value as disciplinary
exercises. (197)

EXTENDED ORDER

Rules for Deployment

=236. Designation of base squads.= The command =guide right= (=left=
or =center=) indicates the base squad for the deployment; if in line
it designates the actual =right= (=left= or =center=) squad; if in
column the command =guide right (left)= designates the =leading=
squad, and the command =guide center= designates the =center= squad,
as laid down in par. 205. After the deployment is completed, the guide
is =center= without command, unless otherwise ordered. (199)

=237. Action of squad leaders at preparatory command for forming
skirmish line.= At the preparatory command for forming skirmish line,
from either column of squads or line, each squad leader (except the
leader of the base squad, when his squad does not advance) cautions
his squad, =follow me= or =by the right (left) flank=, as the case may
be; at the command march, he steps in front of his squad and leads it
to its place in line, as explained in par. 169. (200)

=238. Point on which base squad marches.= Having given the command for
forming skirmish line, the captain, if necessary, indicates to the
corporal of the base squad the point on which the squad is to march;
the corporal habitually looks to the captain for such directions.
(201)

=239. Deployment of the squads.= The base squad (par. 199) is deployed
as soon as it has sufficient interval. The other squads are deployed
as they arrive on the general line; each corporal halts in his place
in line and commands or signals, as =skirmishers= (executed as
prescribed in par. 170); the squad deploys and halts abreast of him.

If tactical considerations demand it, the squad is deployed before
arriving on the line. (202)

=240. Alignment of deployed lines; deployed line faces to front on
halting.= Deployed lines preserve a general alignment toward the
guide, as prescribed in par. 65. Within their respective fronts,
individuals or units march so as best to secure cover or to facilitate
the advance, but the general and orderly progress of the whole is
paramount.

On halting, a deployed line faces to the front (direction of the
enemy) in all cases and takes advantage of cover, the men lying down
if necessary. (203)

=241. Certain movements in extended order executed by same commands as
in close order.= The company in skirmish line =advances, halts=, moves
=by the flank=, or =to the rear, obliques=, resumes =the direct
march=, passes from =quick to double time= and the reverse by the same
commands and in a similar manner as in close order; if at a halt, the
movement by =the flank= or =to the rear= is executed by the same
commands as when marching. =Company right (left, half right, half
left)= is executed as explained for the front rank (in par. 165)
skirmish intervals being maintained. (See par. 171.) (204)

=242. Deployment of platoons and detachments.= A platoon or other part
of the company is deployed and marched in the same manner as the
company, substituting in the commands, =platoon= (=detachments=,
etc.), for =company=. (205)

Deployments (See pars. 170-172.)

=243.= Being in line, to form skirmish line to the front: =1. As
skirmishers, guide right (left or center), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

If marching, the corporal of the base squad moves straight to the
front; when that squad has advanced the desired distance, the captain
commands: =1. Company, 2. HALT.= If the guide be =right (left)=, the
other corporals move to the =left (right)= front, and, in succession
from the base, place their squads on the line; if the guide be center,
the other corporals move to the right or left front, according as they
are on the right or left of the center squad, and in succession from
the center squad place their squads on the line.

If at a halt, the base squad is deployed without advancing; the other
squads may be conducted to their proper places by the flank; interior
squads may be moved when squads more distant from the base have gained
comfortable marching distance. (206)

=244.= Being in column of squads, to form skirmish line to the front:
=1. As skirmishers, guide right (left or center), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration: GUIDE RIGHT.]

[Illustration: GUIDE CENTER (MARCHING).]

[Illustration: GUIDE CENTER (AT A HALT).]

If marching, the corporal of the base squad deploys it and moves
straight to the front; if at a halt, he deploys his squad without
advancing. If the guide be =right (left)=, the other corporals move to
the =left (right) front=, and, in succession from the base, place
their squads on the line; if the guide be =center=, the corporals in
front of the center squad move to the right (if at a halt, to the
right rear), the corporals in rear of the center squad move to the
left front, and each, in succession from the base, places his squad on
the line.

The column of twos or files is deployed by the same commands and in
like manner. (207)

=245. Deployment in an oblique direction.= The company in line or in
column of squads may be deployed in an oblique direction by the same
commands. The captain points out the desire direction; the corporal of
the base squad moves in the direction indicated; the other corporals
conform. (208)

=246. Deployment to flank or rear.= To form skirmish line to the flank
or rear the line or the column of squads is turned by squads to the
flank or rear and then deployed as described. (209)

=247. Increasing or decreasing intervals.= The intervals between men
are increased or decreased as described in the School of the Squad, as
explained in par. 172, adding to the preparatory command, =guide right
(left or center)= if necessary, as explained in par. 236. (210)

The Assembly

=248.= The captain takes his post in front of, or designates, the
element on which the company is to assemble and commands: =1.
Assemble, 2. MARCH.=

If in skirmish line the men move promptly toward the designated point
and the company is reformed in line. If assembled by platoons, these
are conducted to the designated point by platoon leaders, and the
company is reformed in line.

Platoons may be assembled by the command: =1. Platoons, assemble, 2.
MARCH.=

Executed by each platoon as described for the company.

One or more platoons may be assembled by the command: =1. Such platoon
(s), assemble, 2. MARCH.=

Executed by the designated platoon or platoons as described for the
company. (211)

The Advance

=249. Methods of advancing.= The advance of a company into an
engagement (whether for attack or defense) is conducted in close
order, preferably column of squads, until the probability of
encountering hostile fire makes it advisable to deploy. After
deployment, and before opening fire, the advance of the company may be
continued in skirmish line or other suitable formation, depending upon
circumstances. The advance may often be facilitated, or better
advantage taken of cover, or losses reduced by the employment of the
=platoon= or =squad columns=, as laid down in pars. 250-251, or by the
use of a =succession of thin lines=, as explained in par. 255. The
selection of the method to be used is made by the captain or major,
the choice depending upon conditions arising during the progress of
the advance. If the deployment is found to be premature, it will
generally be best to assemble the company and proceed in close order.

Patrols are used to provide the necessary security against surprise.
(212)

=250.= Being in skirmish line: =1. Platoon columns, 2 MARCH.=

[Illustration]

The platoon leaders move forward through the center of their
respective platoons; men to the right of the platoon leader march to
the left and follow him in file; those to the left march in like
manner to the right; each platoon leader thus conducts the march of
his platoon in double column of files; platoon guides follow in rear
of their respective platoons to insure prompt and orderly execution of
the advance. (213)

=251.= Being in skirmish line: =1. Squad columns, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

Each squad leader moves to the front; the members of each squad
oblique toward and follow their squad leader in single file at easy
marching distances. (214)

=252.= Platoon columns are profitably used where the ground is so
difficult or cover so limited as to make it desirable to take
advantage of the few favorable routes; no two platoons should march
within the area of burst of a single shrapnel[2]. =Squad columns= are
of value principally in facilitating the advance over rough or
brush-grown ground; they afford no material advantage in securing
cover. (215)

=253.= To deploy platoon or squad columns: =1. As skirmishers, 2.
MARCH.=

Skirmishers move to the right or left front and successively place
themselves in their original positions on the line. (216)

[Illustration]

=254.= Being in platoon or squad columns: =1. Assemble, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration: ASSEMBLY MADE ON RIGHT PLATOON.]

[Illustration: ASSEMBLY MADE ON RIGHT SQUAD.]

The platoon or squad leaders signal =assemble=. The men of each
platoon or squad, as the case may be, advance and, moving to the right
and left, take their proper places in line, each unit assembling on
the leading element of the column and re-forming in line. The platoon
or squad leaders conduct their units toward the element or point
indicated by the captain, and to their places in line; the company is
reformed in line. (217)

=255.= Being in skirmish line, to advance by a succession of =thin
lines=: =1. (Such numbers), forward, 2. MARCH.=

The captain points out in advance the selected position in front of
the line occupied. The designated number of each squad moves to the
front; the line thus formed preserves the original intervals as nearly
as practicable; when this line has advanced a suitable distance
(generally from 100 to 250 yards, depending upon the terrain and the
character of the hostile fire), a second is sent forward by similar
commands, and so on at irregular distances until the whole line has
advanced. Upon arriving at the indicated position, the first line is
halted. Successive lines, upon arriving, halt on line with the first
and the men take their proper places in the skirmish line.

Ordinarily each line is made up of one man per squad and the men of a
squad are sent forward in order from right to left as deployed. The
first line is led by the platoon leader of the right platoon, the
second by the guide of the right platoon, and so on in order from
right to left.

The advance is conducted in quick time unless conditions demand a
faster gait.

The company having arrived at the indicated position, a further
advance by the same means may be advisable. (218)

=256. Use and purpose of advance in succession of thin lines.= The
advance in a succession of thin lines is used to cross a wide stretch
swept, or likely to be swept, by artillery fire or heavy, long-range
rifle fire which cannot profitably be returned. Its purpose is the
building up of a strong skirmish line preparatory to engaging in a
fire fight. This method of advancing results in serious (though
temporary) loss of control over the company. Its advantage lies in the
fact that it offers a less definite target, hence is less likely to
draw fire. (219)

=257. Improvised formations.= The above are suggestions. Other and
better formations may be devised to fit particular cases. The best
formation is the one which advances the line farthest with the least
loss of men, time, and control. (220)

The Fire Attack

=258. Advance of firing line; advance by rushes.= The principles
governing the advance of the firing line in attack are considered in
the School of the Battalion. (See par. 342-356.)

When it becomes impracticable for the company to advance as whole by
ordinary means, it advances by rushes. (221)

=259. Advancing by rushes.= Being in skirmish line: =1. By platoon
(two platoons, squad, four men, etc.), from the right (left), 2.
RUSH.=

The platoon leader on the indicated flank carefully arranges the
details for a prompt and vigorous execution of the rush and puts it
into effect as soon as practicable. If necessary, he designates the
leader for the indicated fraction. When about to rush, he causes the
men of the fraction to cease firing and to hold themselves flat, but
in readiness to spring forward instantly. The leader of the rush (at
the signal of the platoon leader, if the latter be not the leader of
the rush) commands: Follow me, and running at top speed, leads the
fraction to the new line, where he halts it and causes it to open
fire. The leader of the rush selects the new line if it has not been
previously designated.

The first fraction having established itself on the new line, the next
like fraction is sent forward by its platoon leader, without further
command of the captain, and so on successively, until the entire
company is on the line established by the first rush.

If more than one platoon is to join in one rush, the junior platoon
leader conforms to the action of the senior.

A part of the line having advanced, the captain may increase or
decrease the size of the fractions to complete the movement. (222)

=260. Rush of company as whole led by captain.= When the company forms
a part of the firing line, the rush of the company as a whole is
conducted by the captain, as described for a platoon in the preceding
paragraph. The captain leads the rush; platoon leaders lead their
respective platoons; platoon guides follow the line to insure prompt
and orderly execution of the advance. (223)

=261. Advance by crawling or otherwise.= When the foregoing method of
rushing, by running, becomes impracticable, any method of advance that
=brings the attack closer to the enemy=, such as crawling, should be
employed.

For regulations governing the charge, see paragraphs 355 and 356.
(224)

(All rushes should be made with life and ginger, and all the men
should start together. All rushes should be made under covering
fire, and when a unit rushes forward the adjoining unit or units
make up for the loss of fire thus caused by increasing the rate of
their fire.

A unit commander about to rush forward, will not do so until he
sees that the adjoining unit or units have started to give him the
protection of their covering fire and, if necessary, he will call
to them to do so. Each unit must be careful not to advance until
the last unit that rushed forward has had time to take up an
effective fire. When sights have to be adjusted at the conclusion
of a rush, the men should do so in the prone position even though
it be necessary for the men to kneel for firing. The same as the
men who rush should start simultaneously from the prone position,
so should they stop simultaneously, all men dropping down to the
ground together, wherever they may be, at the command "Down,"
given by the unit commander when the leading men have reached the
new position. The slower members who drop down in rear will crawl
up to the line after the halt. So that the slower members may not
be crowded out of the line, and also to prevent bunching, the
faster men should leave room for them on the line.--Author.)

The Company in Support

(Being part of a battalion)

=262. Formations adopted by support.= To enable it to follow or reach
the firing line, the support adopts suitable formations, following the
principles explained in paragraphs 249-255.

The support should be kept assembled as long as practicable. If after
deploying a favorable opportunity arises to hold it for some time in
close formation, it should be reassembled. It is redeployed when
necessary. (225)

=263. Support controlled by major: size of reënforcement; captain on
look out for major's signals.= The movements of the support as a whole
and the dispatch of reënforcements from it to the firing line are
controlled by the major.

A reënforcement of less than one platoon has little influence and will
be avoided whenever practicable. (See par. 353.)

The captain of a company in support is constantly on the alert for the
major's signals or commands. (226)

=264. Reënforcement to join firing line deployed as skirmishers and
occupy existing intervals.= A reënforcement sent to the firing line
joins it deployed as skirmishers. The leader of the reënforcement
places it in an interval in the line, if one exists, and commands it
thereafter as a unit. If no such suitable interval exists, the
reënforcement is advanced with increased intervals between
skirmishers; each man occupies the nearest interval in the firing
line, and each then obeys the orders of the nearest squad leader and
platoon leader. (227)

=265. Promptness in reënforcing firing line.= A reënforcement joins
the firing line as quickly as possible without exhausting the men.
(228)

=266. Original platoon divisions to be maintained; duties of officers
and sergeants upon joining firing line.= The original platoon division
of the companies in the firing line should be maintained and should
not be broken up by the mingling of reënforcements.

Upon joining the firing line, officers and sergeants accompanying a
reënforcement take over the duties of others of like grade who have
been disabled, or distribute themselves so as best to exercise their
normal functions. Conditions will vary and no rules can be prescribed.
It is essential that all assist in mastering the increasing
difficulties of control. (229)

The Company Acting Alone

=267. Employed according to principles of battalion acting alone.= In
general, the company, when acting alone, is employed according to the
principles applicable to the battalion acting alone as laid down in
pars. 327-363; the captain employs platoons as the major employs
companies, making due allowance for the difference in strength.

The support may be smaller in proportion or may be dispensed with.
(230)

=268. Protection against surprise.= The company must be well protected
against surprise. Combat patrols on the flanks are especially
important as explained in par. 410. Each leader of a flank platoon
details a man to watch for the signals of the patrol or patrols on his
flank. (231)

FIRE

=269. Issuing of ammunition and loading of pieces before deployment;
firings in close order.= Ordinarily pieces are loaded and extra
ammunition is issued before the company deploys for combat.

In close order the company executes the firings, as prescribed in
pars. 179-194, at the command of the captain, who posts himself in
rear of the center of the company.

Usually the firings in close order consist of saluting volleys only.
(See par. 189 for volley firing.) (232)

=270. Firing controlled by platoon leaders.= When the company is
deployed, the men execute the firings at the command of their platoon
leaders; the latter give such commands as are necessary to carry out
the captain's directions, and, from time to time, add such further
commands as are necessary to continue, correct, and control, the fire
ordered. (233)

=271. Use of signals during firing.= The voice is generally inadequate
for giving commands during fire and must be replaced by signals of
such character that proper fire direction and control is assured. (See
par. 92 for signals; pars. 285-286 for fire direction and pars.
287-290 for fire control.) To attract attention, signals must usually
be preceded by the whistle signal (short blast). A fraction of the
firing line about to rush should, if practicable, avoid using the long
blast signal as an aid to cease firing. (See par. 91.) Officers and
men behind the firing line can not ordinarily move freely along the
line, but must depend on mutual watchfulness and the proper use of the
prescribed signals. All should post themselves so as to see their
immediate superiors and subordinates. (234)

=272. Duties of musicians.= The musicians assist the captain by
observing the enemy, the target, and the fire-effect, by transmitting
commands or signals, and by watching for signals. (For posts of
musicians see par. 207.) (235)

=273. Blank Cartridges.= Firing with blank cartridges at an outlined
or represented enemy (par. 7) at distances less than 100 yards is
prohibited. (236)

=274. Effect of fire and influence of ground.= The effect of fire and
the influence of the ground in relation thereto, and the individual
and collective instruction in marksmanship, are treated in the
Small-Arms Firing Manual. (237)

Ranges

=275. Classification.= For convenience of reference, ranges are
classified as follows:

0 to 600 yards, close range.
600 to 1,200 yards, effective range.
1,200 to 2,000 yards, long range.
2,000 yards and over, distant range. (238)

=276. Determination of distance to target.= The distance to the target
must be determined as accurately as possible and the sights set
accordingly. Aside from training and morale, this is the most
important single factor in securing effective fire at the longer
ranges. (239)

=277. Method of determining the range; estimators.=

Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, the most
accurate and only practicable method of determining the range will
generally be to take the mean of several estimates.

Five or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate
estimators in the company, are designated as _range estimators_ and
are specially trained in estimating distances.

Whenever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles the range
estimators, points out the target to them, and adopts the mean of
their estimates. The range estimators then take their customary posts.
(240)

Classes of Firing

=278. Volley firing=, as explained in par. 189, has limited
application. In defense it may be used in the early stages of the
action if the enemy presents a large compact target. It may be used by
troops executing =fire of position=, as set forth in par. 438. When
the ground near the target is such that the strike of bullets can be
seen from the firing line, =ranging volleys= may be used to correct
the sight setting.

In combat, volley firing is executed habitually by platoon. (241)

=279. Fire at will=, as explained in par. 190, is the class of fire
normally employed in attack or defense. (242)

=280. Clip fire= (see par. 192.) has limited application. It is
principally used: 1. In the early stages of combat, to steady the men
by habituating them to brief pauses in firing. 2. To produce a short
burst of fire. (243)

The Target

=281. Assignment of target by major; change of target to be avoided;
hostile firing line usual target.= Ordinarily the major will assign to
the company an objective in attack or sector in defense; the company's
target will lie within the limits so assigned. In the choice of
target, tactical considerations are paramount; the nearest hostile
troops within the objective or sector will thus be the usual target.
This will ordinarily be the hostile firing line; troops in rear are
ordinarily proper targets for artillery, machine guns, or, at times,
infantry employing fire of position, as set forth in par. 438.

Change of target should not be made without excellent reasons
therefor, such as the sudden appearance of hostile troops under
conditions which make them more to be feared than the troops
comprising the former target. (244)

=282. Distribution of fire; allotment of target to platoon leaders.=
The distribution of fire over the entire target is of special
importance.

The captain allots a part of the target to each platoon, or each
platoon leader takes as his target that part which corresponds to his
position in the company. Men are so instructed that each fires on
that part of the target which is directly opposite him. (245)

=283. All Parts of target equally important.= All parts of the target
are equally important. Care must be exercised that the men do not
slight its less visible parts. A section of the target not covered by
fire represents a number of the enemy permitted to fire coolly and
effectively. (246)

=284. Use of aiming points in case of invisible targets.=

If the target can not be seen with the naked eye, platoon leaders
select an object in front of or behind it, designate this as the
_aiming target_, and direct a sight setting which will carry the cone
of fire into the target. (247)

Fire Direction[3]

=285. Impracticability in combat of commanding company directly.= When
the company is large enough to be divided into platoons, it is
impracticable for the captain to command it directly in combat. His
efficiency in managing the firing line is measured by his ability to
enforce his will through the platoon leaders. Having indicated clearly
what he desires them to do, he avoids interfering except to correct
serious errors or omissions. (248)

=286. Captain directs the fire.= The captain =directs= the fire of the
company or of designated platoons. He designates the target, and, when
practicable, allots a part of the target to each platoon, as
prescribed in par. 340. Before beginning the fire action he determines
the range, as explained in par. 277, announces the sight setting, as
prescribed in par. 188, and indicates the class of fire to be employed
(See par. 278) and the time to open fire. Thereafter, he observes the
fire effect (See pars. 428-429), corrects material errors in sight
setting, prevents exhaustion of the ammunition supply, as explained in
par. 432-433, and causes the distribution of such extra ammunition as
may be received from the rear. (249)

Fire Control

=287. Platoon the fire unit.= In combat, the platoon is the fire unit.
From 20 to 35 rifles are as many as one leader can control
effectively. (250)

=288. Special duties of platoon leaders.= Each platoon leader puts
into execution the commands or directions of the captain, having first
taken such precautions to insure correct sight setting and clear
description of the target or aiming target as the situation permits or
requires; thereafter, he gives such additional commands or directions
as are necessary to exact compliance with the captain's will. He
corrects the sight setting when necessary. He designates an aiming
target when the target can not be seen with the naked eye. (251)

=289. General duties of platoon leaders; duties of platoon guides and
squad leaders.= In general, =platoon leaders= observe the target and
the effect of their fire and are on the alert for the captain's
commands or signals; they observe and regulate the rate of fire, as
laid down in par. 191. The =platoon guides= watch the firing line and
check every breach of fire discipline. (See pars. 291-294.) =Squad
leaders= transmit commands and signals when necessary, observe the
conduct of their squads and abate excitement, assist in enforcing fire
discipline and participate in the firing. (252)

=290. Importance of fire control.= The best troops are those that
submit longest to fire control. Loss of control is an evil which robs
success of its greatest results. To avoid or delay such loss should be
the constant aim of all.

Fire control implies the ability to stop firing, change the sight
setting and target, and resume a well directed fire. (253)

Fire Discipline

=291. What fire discipline implies.= "Fire discipline implies, besides
a habit of obedience, a control of the rifle by the soldier, the
result of training, which will enable him in action to make hits
instead of misses. It embraces taking advantage of the ground; care in
setting the sight and delivery of fire; constant attention to the
orders of the leaders, and careful observation of the enemy; an
increase of fire when the target is favorable, and a cessation of fire
when the enemy disappears; economy of ammunition." (See pars.
432-433.) (Small-Arms Firing Manual.)

In combat, shots which graze the enemy's trench or position and thus
reduce the effectiveness of his fire have the approximate value of
hits; such shots only, or actual hits, contribute toward fire
superiority.

Fire discipline implies that, in a firing line without leaders, each
man retains his presence of mind and directs effective fire upon the
proper target. (254)

=292. Rate of fire.= To create a correct appreciation of the
requirements of fire discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire,
as prescribed in par. 191, should be as rapid as is consistent with
accurate aiming; that the rate will depend upon the visibility,
proximity, and size of the target; and that the proper rate will
ordinarily suggest itself to each trained man, usually rendering
cautions or commands unnecessary.

In attack the highest rate of fire is employed at the halt preceding
the assault, and in pursuing fire. (See pars. 490-494.) (255)

=293. Position fire in advance by rushes.= In an advance by rushes, as
explained in par. 259, leaders of troops in firing positions are
responsible for the delivery of heavy fire to cover the advance of
each rushing fraction. Troops are trained to change slightly the
direction of fire so as not to endanger the flanks of advanced
portions of the firing line. (256)

=294. Action in defense, when target disappears.= In defense, when the
target disappears behind cover, platoon leaders suspend fire, as
prescribed in par. 193, prepare their platoons to fire upon the point
where it is expected to reappear, and greet its reappearance instantly
with vigorous fire. (257)

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION

=295. Battalion a tactical unit; duties and responsibilities of
major.= The battalion being purely a tactical unit, the major's duties
are primarily those of an instructor in drill and tactics and of a
tactical commander. He is responsible for the theoretical and
practical training of the battalion. He supervises the training of
the companies of the battalion with a view to insuring the
thoroughness and uniformity of their instruction.

In the instruction of the battalion as a whole, his efforts will be
directed chiefly to the development of tactical efficiency, devoting
only such time to the mechanism of drill and to the ceremonies as may
be necessary in order to insure precision, smartness, and proper
control. (258)

=296. Movements explained for battalion of four companies.= The
movements explained herein are on the basis of a battalion of four
companies; they may be executed by a battalion of two or more
companies, not exceeding six. (259)

=297. Arrangement of companies in formations.= The companies are
generally arranged from right to left according to the rank of the
captains present at the formation. The arrangement of the companies
may be varied by the major or higher commander.

After the battalion is formed, no cognizance is taken of the relative
order of the companies. (260)

=298. Designation of companies.= In whatever direction the battalion
faces, the companies are designated numerically from right to left in
line, and from head to rear in column, =first company=, =second
company=, etc.

The terms =right= and =left= apply to actual right and left as the
line faces; if the about by squads be executed when in line, the right
company becomes the left company and the right center becomes the left
center company.

The designation center company indicates the right center or the
actual center company according as the number of companies is even or
odd. (261)

=299. Post of special units.= The band and other special units, when
attached to the battalion, take the same post with respect to it as if
it were the nearest battalion. (262)

CLOSE ORDER

Rules

=300. Repetition of commands by captains.= Captains repeat such
preparatory commands as are to be immediately executed by their
companies, as =forward=, =squads right=, etc.; the men execute the
commands =march=, =halt=, etc., if applying to their companies, when
given by the major. In movements executed in route step or at ease the
captains repeat the command of execution, if necessary. Captains do
not repeat the major's commands in executing the manual of arms, nor
those commands which are not essential to the execution of a movement
by their companies, as =column of squads=, =first company=, =squads
right=, etc.

In giving commands or cautions captains may prefix the proper letter
designations of their companies, as =A Company, HALT=; =B Company,
squads right=, etc. (263)

=301. Captains repeating command for guide.= At the command =guide
center (right or left)=, captains command: =Guide right or left=,
according to the positions of their companies. =Guide center=
designates the left guide of the center company, as explained in 3d
Sec. par. 298. (264)

[Illustration: Plate III]

=302. Position of captains in dressing companies; action of guides in
dressing.= When the companies are to be dressed, captains place
themselves on that flank toward which the dress is to be made, as
follows:

The battalion in line: Besides the guide (or the flank file of the
front rank, if the guide is not in line) and facing to the front.

The battalion in column of companies: Two paces from the guide, in
prolongation of and facing down the line.

Each captain, after dressing his company, commands: =FRONT=, and takes
his post.

The battalion being in line and unless otherwise prescribed, at the
captain's command =dress= or at the command =halt=, when it is
prescribed that the company shall dress, the guide on the flank away
from the point of rest with his piece at right shoulder, dresses
promptly on the captain and the companies beyond. During the dress he
moves, if necessary, to the right and left only; the captain dresses
the company on the line thus established. The guide takes the position
of order arms at the command =front=. (265)

=303. Certain movements executed as in Schools of the Soldier, Squad
and Company.= =The battalion executes the halt= (See par. 116),
=rests= (See pars. 100-101), =facings= (See par. 104), =steps= and
=marchings= (See pars. 107-109), =manual of arms= (See pars. 120-147),
resumes =attention= (See par. 102), =kneels= (See pars. 174-177),
=lies down= (See par. 175), =rises= (See par. 176), =stacks= and
=takes arms= (See pars. 160-161), as explained in the Schools of the
Soldier and Squad, substituting in the commands =battalion= for
=squad=.

The battalion executes =squads right (left)= (See par. 221), =squads
right (left) about= (See par. 228), =route step= and =at ease= (See
par. 233), and =obliques= and resumes the =direct march= (See pars.
162-163), as explained in the School of the Company. (266)

=304. Certain movements executed as in School of the Company.= The
battalion in column of platoons, squads, twos, or files changes
direction. (See pars. 223-224); in column of squads, forms column of
twos or files and re-forms columns of twos or squads, as explained in
the School of the Company. (See pars. 234-235.) (267)

=305. Simultaneous execution by companies or platoons of movements in
School of the Company.= When the formation admits of the simultaneous
execution by companies or platoons of movements in the School of the
Company the major may cause such movement to be executed by prefixing,
when necessary, =companies (platoons)= to the commands prescribed
therein: As =1. Companies, right front into line, 2. MARCH.= To
complete such simultaneous movements, the commands =halt= or =march=,
if prescribed, are given by the major. The command =front=, when
prescribed, is given by the captains. (See par. 302.) (268)

=306. Execution of loadings and firings by battalion.= The battalion
as a unit executes the loadings and firings only in firing saluting
volleys. The commands are as for the company, substituting =battalion=
for =company=. At the first command for loading, captains take post in
rear of the center of their respective companies. At the conclusion of
the firing, the captains resume their posts in line.

On other occasions, when firing in close order is necessary, it is
executed by company or other subdivision, under instructions from the
major, as prescribed in pars. 179-194. (269)

To Form the Battalion

=307. For purposes other than ceremonies:= The battalion is formed in
column of squads. The companies having been formed, the adjutant posts
himself so as to be facing the column, when formed, and 6 paces in
front of the place to be occupied by the leading guide of the
battalion; he draws saber; =adjutant's call= is sounded or the
adjutant signals =assemble=.

The companies are formed, at attention, in column of squads in their
proper order. Each captain, after halting his company, salutes the
adjutant; the adjutant returns the salute and, when the last captain
has saluted, faces the major and reports: =Sir, the battalion is
formed.= He then joins the major. (270)

=308. For ceremonies or when directed:= The battalion is formed in
line.

The companies having been formed, the adjutant posts himself so as to
be 6 paces to the right of the right company when line is formed, and
faces in the direction in which the line is to extend. He draws saber;
=adjutant's call= is sounded; the band plays if present.

The right company is conducted by its captain so as to arrive from the
rear, parallel to the line; its right and left guides precede it on
the line by about 20 paces, taking post facing to the right at order
arms, so that their elbows will be against the breasts of the right
and left files of their company when it is dressed. The guides of the
other companies successively prolong the line to the left in like
manner and the companies approach their respective places in line as
explained for the right company. The adjutant, from his post, causes
the guides to cover.

When about 1 pace in rear of the line, each company is halted and
dressed to the right against the arms of the guides. (See par. 302.)

The band, arriving from the rear, takes its place in line when the
right company is halted; it ceases playing when the left company has
halted.

When the guides of the left company have been posted, the adjutant,
moving by the shortest route, takes post facing the battalion midway
between the post of the major and the center of the battalion.

The major, staff, noncommissioned staff, and orderlies take their
posts, as prescribed in pars. 73; 76-78.

When all parts of the line have been dressed, and officers and others
have reached their posts, the adjutant commands: =1. Guides, 2. POSTS,
3. Present, 4. ARMS.= At the second command guides take their places
in the line. (Plate II, page 69.) The adjutant then turns about as
explained in par. 74, and reports to the major: =Sir, the battalion is
formed=, as prescribed in par. 75; the major directs the adjutant:
=Take your post, Sir=; draws saber and brings the battalion to the
=order=. The adjutant takes his post, passing to the right of the
major. (271)

To Dismiss the Battalion

=309. Dismiss your companies.=

Staff and noncommissioned staff officers fall out; each captain
marches his company off and dismisses it, as laid down in par. 217.
(272)

To Rectify the Alignment

=310.= Being in line at a halt, to align the battalion: =1. Center
(right or left), 2. DRESS.=

The captains dress their companies successively toward the center
(right or left) guide of the battalion, each as soon as the captain
next toward the indicated guide commands: =FRONT.= The captains of the
center companies (if the dress is =center=) dress them without waiting
for each other. (273)

=311.= To give the battalion a new alignment: =1. Guides center (right
or left) company on the line, 2. Guides on the line, 3. Center (right
or left), 4. DRESS, 5. Guides, 6. POSTS.=

At the first command, the designated guides place themselves on the
line, as prescribed in par. 308, facing the center (right or left).
The major establishes them in the direction he wishes to give the
battalion.

At the second command, the guides of the other companies take posts,
facing the center (right or left), so as to prolong the line.

At the command =dress=, each captain dresses his company to the flank
toward which the guides of his company face, taking the positions
prescribed in par. 302.

At the command =posts=, given when all companies have completed the
dress, the guides return to their posts. (Plate II, page 69.) (274)

To Rectify the Column

=312.= Being in column of companies, or in close column, at a halt, if
the guides do not cover or have not their proper distances, and it is
desired to correct them, the major commands: =1. Right (left), 2.
DRESS.=

Captains of companies in rear of the first place their right guides so
as to cover at the proper distance; each captain aligns his company to
the right and commands: =FRONT.= (See par. 302.) (275)

On Right (Left) Into Line

=313.= Being in column of squads or companies: =1. On right (left)
into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Battalion, 4. HALT.=

Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain of the
leading company commands; =Squads right.= If at a halt each captain in
rear commands: =Forward.= At the second command, the leading company
marches in line to the right; the companies in rear continue to march
to the front and form successively on the left, each, when opposite
its place, being marched in line to the right.

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS TO LINE ON RIGHT.]

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF COMPANIES TO LINE ON RIGHT.]

The fourth command is given when the first company has advanced the
desired distance in the new direction; it halts and is dressed to the
right by its captain (par. 265); the others complete the movement,
each being halted 1 pace in rear of the line established by the first
company, and then dressed to the right.

Being in column of companies: At the first command, the captain of the
first company commands: =Right turn.= If at a halt, each captain in
rear commands: =Forward.= Each of the captains in rear of the leading
company gives the command: =1. Right turn=, in time to add, =2.
MARCH=, when his company arrives opposite the right of its place in
line.

The fourth command is given and the movement completed as explained
above.

Whether executed from column of squads or column of companies, each
captain places himself so as to march beside the right guide after his
company forms line or changes direction to the right.

If executed in double time, the leading company marches in double time
until halted. (276)

Front into Line

=314.= Being in column of squads or companies: =1. Right (left) front
into line, 2. MARCH.=

Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain of the
leading company commands: =Column right=; the captain of the companies
in rear: =column half right.= At the second command the leading
company executes =column right=, and, as the last squad completes the
change of direction, is formed in line to the left, as prescribed in
par. 221, halted and dressed to the left. (See par. 302.) Each of the
companies in rear is conducted by the most convenient route to the
rear of the right of the preceding company, thence to the right,
parallel to and 1 pace in rear of the new line; when opposite its
place, it is formed in line to the left, halted, and dressed to the
left.

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS TO LINE TO THE FRONT.]

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF COMPANIES TO LINE TO THE FRONT.]

Being in column of companies: If marching, the captain of the leading
company gives the necessary commands to halt his company at the second
command; if at a halt the leading company stands fast. At the first
command, the captain of each company in rear commands: =Squads right=,
or =Right by squads=, and after the second command conducts his
company by the most convenient route to its place in line, as
described above.

Whether executed from column of squads or column of companies, each
captain halts when opposite, or at the point, where the left of his
company is to rest. (277)

To Form Column of Companies Successively to the Right or Left

=315.= Being in column of squads: =1. Column of companies, first
company, squads right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

The leading company executes =squads right= and moves forward. The
other companies move forward in column of squads and successively
march in line the right on the same ground as the leading company and
in such manner that the guide covers the guide of the preceding
company. (278)

To Form Column of Squads Successively to the Right or Left

=316.= Being in column of companies (Plate III, page 90): =1. Column
of squads, first company, squads right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

The leading company executes =squads right= and moves forward. The
other companies move forward in column of companies and successively
march in column of squads to the right on the same ground as the
leading company. (279)

To Change Direction

=317.= Being in column of companies or close column. (Plate III, page
90); =1. Column right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

The captain of the first company commands: =Right turn.=

The leading company turns to the right on moving pivot, the captain
adding: =1. Forward, 2. MARCH=, upon its completion.

The other companies march squarely up to the turning point; each
changes direction by the same commands and means as the first and in
such manner that the guide covers the guide of the preceding company.
(280)

=318.= Being in line of companies or close line. (Plate III, page 90):
=1. Battalion right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Battalion, 4. HALT.=

[Illustration]

The right company changes direction to the right, as prescribed in
par. 224; the other companies are conducted by the shortest line to
their places abreast of the first.

The fourth command is given when the right company has advanced the
desired distance in the new direction; that company halts; the others
halt successively upon arriving on the line. (281)

=319.= Being in column of squads, the battalion changes direction by
the same commands and in the manner prescribed for the company, as
explained in par. 224. (282)

Mass Formations

[Illustration: FROM LINE.]

=319a.= Being in column of squads, to form a line of columns of
companies or company subdivisions, facing in any desired direction, at
any desired interval, on the right or left of the leading element of
the battalion: =1. Line of companies (half companies, platoons), at
(so many) paces, guide right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Battalion, 4. HALT.=

[Illustration: FROM LINE OF COMPANIES.]

The leading company (or subdivision) marches in the direction
previously indicated by the major until the command halt is given and
then halts. Each succeeding company (or subdivision) marches by the
most direct route to its place at the prescribed intervals on the left
(right) of the next preceding company (or subdivision), halting when
it is abreast of the leading element of the battalion.

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS.]

If the battalion be in any formation other than column of squads, the
major indicates the desired direction to the leading element. The
entire command forms column of squads and executes a movement in
conformity with the principles indicated above. (282-1/2)

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF COMPANIES.]

=320.= Being in line, line of companies, or column of companies.
(Plate III, page 90): =1. Close on first (fourth) company, 2. MARCH.=

If at a halt, the indicated company stands fast; if marching, it is
halted; each of the other companies is conducted toward it and is
halted in proper order in close column.

If the battalion is in line, companies form successively in rear of
the indicated company; if in column of squads, companies in rear of
the leading company form on the left of it.

In close column formed line on the first company, the left guides
cover; formed on the fourth company, right guides cover. If formed on
the leading company, the guide remains as before the formation. In
close line, the guides are halted abreast of the guide of the leading
company.

The battalion in column closes on the leading company only. (283)

(In closing from line of companies and in extending from close
line, the companies other than the base one, may be moved either
by the commands, (a) =1. Squads, right (left), 2. MARCH=; (b) =1.
Right (left) oblique, 2. MARCH=; (c) =1. Forward, 2. MARCH=; (d)
=1. Squads left (right) 2. MARCH=; (e) =1. Company, 2. HALT=; or,
(a) =1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH=; (b) =1. Company, 2.
HALT=; (c) =1. Left (right), 2. FACE=; or if at a halt by the
commands, (a) =1. Right (left), 2. FACE=; (b) =1. At Trail, 2.
Forward, 3. MARCH=; (c) =1. Company, 2. HALT=; (d) =1. Left
(right), 2. FACE.= In some commands it is customary to use one
method while in other commands another is used. For the sake of
uniformity all companies of a given command should use the same
method.--Author.)

To Extend the Mass

=321.= Being in close column or in close line; =1. Extend on first
(fourth) company, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration: FROM CLOSE COLUMN.]

Being in close line: if at a halt, the indicated company stands fast;
if marching, it halts; each of the other companies is conducted away
from the indicated company and is halted in its proper order in line
of companies.

Being in close column, the extension is made on the fourth company
only. If marching, the leading company continues to march; companies
in rear are halted and successively resume the march in time to follow
at full distance. If at halt, the leading company marches; companies
in rear successively march in time to follow at full distance.

Close column is not extended in double time. (See author's note, par.
320.) (284)

=322.= Being in close column: =1. Right (left) front into line, 2.
MARCH.= Executed as from column of companies, as explained in par.
314. (285)

=323.= Being in close column: =1. Column of squads, first (fourth)
company, squads right (left), 2. MARCH.=

The designated company marches in column of squads to the right. Each
of the other companies executes the same movement in time to follow
the preceding company in column. (286)

=324.= Being in close line: =1. Column of squads, first (fourth)
company, forward, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration: FROM CLOSE LINE.]

The designated company moves forward. The other companies (halting if
in march) successively take up the march and follow in column. (287)

Route Step and at Ease

=325.= The battalion marches in =route step= and =at ease= as
prescribed in the School of the Company. (See par. 233.) When marching
in column of companies or platoons, the guides maintain the trace and
distance.

In route marches the major marches at the head of the column; when
necessary, the file closers may be directed to march at the head and
rear of their companies. (288)

Assembly

=326.= The battalion being wholly or partially deployed, or the
companies being separated: =1. Assemble, 2. MARCH.=

The major places himself opposite to or designates the element or
point on which the battalion is to assemble. Companies are assembled,
as explained in par. 248, and marched to the indicated point. As the
companies arrive the major or adjutant indicates the formation to be
taken. (289)

COMBAT PRINCIPLES

Orders

=327.= The following references to orders are applicable to attack or
defense: (290)

=328. Use of prescribed commands; "tactical orders," "orders" and
"commands."= In extended order, the company is the largest unit to
execute movements by prescribed commands or means. The major,
assembling his captains if practicable, directs the disposition of the
battalion by means of =tactical orders=. He controls its subsequent
movements by such =orders= or =commands= as are suitable to the
occasion. (291)

=329. Major's order making disposition of battalion for combat; base
company in attack.= In every disposition of the battalion for combat
the major's order should give subordinates sufficient information of
the enemy, of the position of supporting and neighboring troops, and
of the object sought to enable them to conform intelligently to the
general plan.

The order should then designate the companies which are to constitute
the =firing line= and those which are to constitute the =support=. In
attack, it should designate the direction or the objective, the order
and front of the companies on the firing line, and should designate
the right or left company as base company. In defense, it should
describe the front of each company and, if necessary, the sector to be
observed by each, as prescribed in 281-284. (292)

=330. Reconnaissance and protection of flanks.= When the battalion is
operating alone, the major provides for the reconnaissance and
protection of his flanks; if part of a larger force, the major makes
similar provisions, when necessary, without orders from higher
authority, unless such authority has specifically directed other
suitable reconnaissance and protection. (293)

=331. Issue of extra ammunition when battalion is deployed.= When the
battalion is deployed upon the initiative of the major, he will
indicate whether extra ammunition shall be issued; if deployed in
pursuance of orders of higher authority, the major will cause the
issue of extra ammunition, unless such authority has given directions
to the contrary. (For ammunition supply see pars. 569-575.) (294)

Deployment

(See pars. 456-462; 463-466.)

=332.= The following principles of deployment are applicable to attack
or defense. (295)

=333. Avoiding premature deployment.= A premature deployment involves
a long, disorganizing and fatiguing advance of the skirmish line, and
should be avoided. A greater evil is to be caught by heavy fire when
in dense column or other close order formation; hence advantage should
be taken of cover in order to retain the battalion in close order
formation until exposure to heavy hostile fire may reasonably be
anticipated. (296)

=334. Depth of deployment and density of firing line; companies and
detachments conducted to their places by their commanders.= The major
regulates the depth of the deployment and the extent and density of
the firing line, subject to such restrictions as a senior may have
imposed.

Companies or designated subdivisions and detachments are conducted by
their commanders in such manner as best to accomplish the mission
assigned to them under the major's orders. Companies designated for
the firing line march independently to the place of deployment, form
skirmish line, and take up the advance. They conform, in general, to
the base company, as prescribed in Par. 329. (297)

=335. Division of battalion into firing line and support.= The
commander of a battalion, whether it is operating alone or as part of
a larger force, should hold a part of his command out of the =firing
line=. By the judicious use of this force, the major can exert an
influence not otherwise possible over his firing line and can control,
within reasonable limits, an action once begun. So, if his battalion
be assigned to the =firing line=, the major will cause one, two, or
three companies to be deployed on the firing line, retaining the
remaining companies or company as a support for that firing line. The
division of the battalion into firing line and support will depend
upon the front to be covered and the nature and anticipated severity
of the action. (298)

=336. Size of support.= If the battalion be part of a larger command,
the number of companies in the firing line will generally be
determinable from the regimental commander's order; the remainder
constitutes the support, as prescribed in par. 335. If the battalion
is acting alone, the support must be strong enough to maintain the
original fire power of the firing line, to protect the flanks, and to
perform the functions of a reserve, whatever be the issue of the
action, as explained in par. 445. (299)

=337. Position of support.= If the battalion is operating alone, the
support may, according to circumstances, be held in one or two bodies
and placed behind the center, or one or both flanks of the firing
line, or echeloned beyond a flank. If the battalion is part of a
larger force, the support is generally held in one body. (300)

=338. Distance between firing line and support.= The distance between
the firing line and the supporting group or groups will vary between
wide limits; it should be as short as the necessity for protection
from heavy losses will permit. When cover is available, the support
should be as close as 50 to 100 yards; when such cover is not
available, it should not be closer than 300 yards. It may be as far as
500 yards in rear if good cover is there obtainable and is not
obtainable at a lesser distance. (301)

=339. Placing entire battalion or regiment in firing line at
beginning.= In exceptional cases, as in a meeting engagement, it may
be necessary to place an entire battalion or regiment in the firing
line at the initial deployment, the support being furnished by other
troops. Such deployment causes the early mingling of the larger units,
thus rendering leadership and control extremely difficult. The
necessity for such deployment will increase with the inefficiency of
the commander and of the service of information. (302)

Fire

=340. Major apportions target.= Fire direction and fire control are
functions of company and platoon commanders, as laid down in pars.
285-290. The major makes the primary apportionment of the target--in
defense, by assigning sectors of fire, in attack, by assigning the
objective. In the latter case each company in the firing line takes as
its target that part of the general objective which lies in its front.
(303)

=341. Major indicates where or when fire fight begins.= The major
should indicate the point or time at which the fire fight is to open.
He may do this in his order for deployment or he may follow the firing
line close enough to do so at the proper time. If it be impracticable
for him to do either, the senior officer with the firing line, in each
battalion, selects the time for opening fire. (304)

Attack

(See pars. 456-502.)

=342. Battalion the attack unit.= The battalion is the =attack unit=,
whether operating alone or as part of a larger unit. (305)

=343. Advance of battalion acting as one of several in firing line.=
If his battalion be one of several in the firing line, the major, in
executing his part of the attack, pushes his battalion forward as
vigorously as possible within the front, or section, assigned to it.
The great degree of independence allowed to him as to details demands,
in turn, the exercise of good judgment on his part. Better leadership,
better troops, and more favorable terrain enable one battalion to
advance more rapidly in attack than another less fortunate, and such a
battalion will insure the further advance of the others. The leading
battalion should not, however, become isolated; isolation may lead to
its destruction. (306)

=344. Close in on enemy as much as possible before opening fire.= The
deployment having been made, the firing line advances without firing.
The predominant idea must be to close with the enemy as soon as
possible without ruinous losses. The limited supply of ammunition and
the uncertainty of resupply, the necessity for securing fire
superiority in order to advance within the shorter ranges, and the
impossibility of accomplishing this at ineffective ranges, make it
imperative that fire be not opened as long as the advance can be
continued without demoralizing losses. The attack which halts to open
fire at extreme range (over 1,200 yards) is not likely ever to reach
its destination. Every effort should be made, by using cover or
inconspicuous formations, or by advancing the firing line as a whole,
to arrive within 800 yards of the enemy before opening fire. (For
expenditure of ammunition see pars. 432-433; for advancing the attack
see par. 467.) (307)

=345. Fire to be directed against the hostile infantry.= Except when
the enemy's artillery is able to effect an unusual concentration of
fire, its fire upon deployed infantry causes losses which are
unimportant when compared with those inflicted by his infantry; hence
the attacking infantry should proceed to a position as described
above, and from which an effective fire can be directed against the
hostile infantry with a view to obtaining fire superiority. The
effectiveness of the enemy's fire must be reduced so as to permit
further advance. The more effective the fire to which the enemy is
subjected the less effective will be his fire. (308)

=346. The further advance of the firing line; size of rushing units.=
Occasionally the fire of adjacent battalions, or of infantry employing
fire of position, as explained in par. 438, or of supporting
artillery, as explained in pars. 434-438, will permit the further
advance of the entire firing line from this point, but it will
generally be necessary to advance by rushes, as laid down in par. 259,
of fractions of the line.

The fraction making the rush should be as large as the hostile fire
and the necessity for maintaining fire superiority will permit.
Depending upon circumstances, the strength of the fraction may vary
from a company to a few men.

The advance is made as rapidly as possible without losing fire
superiority. The smaller the fraction which rushes, the greater the
number of rifles which continue to fire upon the enemy. On the other
hand, the smaller the fraction which rushes the slower will be the
progress of the attack. (309)

=347. Size of rushing units.= Enough rifles must continue in action to
insure the success of each rush. Frequently the successive advances of
the firing line must be effected by rushes of fractions of decreased
size; that is, advances by rushes may first be made by company, later
by half company or platoon, and finally by squads or files; but no
=subsequent opportunity= to =increase= the rate of advance, such as
better cover or a decrease of the hostile fire, should be overlooked.
(310)

=348. The rush begun by a flank unit.= Whenever possible, the rush is
begun by a flank fraction of the firing line. In the absence of
express directions from the major, each captain of a flank company
determines when an advance by rushes (par. 222) shall be attempted. A
flank company which inaugurates an advance by rushes becomes the base
company, if not already the base. An advance by rushes having been
inaugurated on one flank, the remainder of the firing line conforms;
fractions rush successively from that flank and halt on the line
established by the initial rush.

The fractions need not be uniform in size; each captain indicates how
his company shall rush, having due regard to the ground and the state
of the fire fight. (311)

=349. Fractions to advance under covering fire.= A fraction about to
rush is sent forward when the remainder of the line is firing
vigorously; otherwise the chief advantage of this method of advancing
is lost.

The length of the rush will vary from 30 to 80 yards, depending upon
the existence of cover, positions for firing, and the hostile fire.
(312)

=350. Subsequent advances.= When the entire firing line of the
battalion has advanced to the new line, fresh opportunities to advance
are sought as before. (313)

=351. Prearranged methods of advancing by rushes prohibited.= Two
identical situations will never confront the battalion; hence at drill
it is prohibited to arrange the details of an advance before the
preceding one has been concluded, or to employ a fixed or prearranged
method of advancing by rushes. (314)

=352. Post of the major.= The major posts himself so as best to direct
the reënforcing of the firing line from the support. When all or
nearly all of the support has been absorbed by the firing line, he
joins, and takes full charge of, the latter. (315)

=353. Size of reënforcements.= The reënforcing of the firing line by
driblets of a squad or a few men has no appreciable effect. The firing
line requires either reënforcement or a strong one. Generally one or
two platoons will be sent forward under cover of a heavy fire of the
firing line. (316)

=354. Two methods of reënforcing the firing line.= To facilitate
control and to provide intervals in which reënforcements may be
placed, the companies in the firing line should be kept closed in on
their centers as they become depleted by casualties during the
advance.

When this is impracticable reënforcements must mingle with and thicken
the firing line. In battle the latter method will be the rule rather
than the exception, and to familiarize the men with such conditions
the combat exercises of the battalion should include both methods of
reënforcing. Occasionally, to provide the necessary intervals for
reënforcing by either of these methods, the firing line should be
thinned by causing men to drop out and simulate losses during the
various advances. Under ordinary conditions the depletion of the
firing line for this purpose will be from one-fifth to one-half of its
strength. (317)

=355. Fixing bayonets.= The major or senior officer in the firing line
determines when bayonets shall be fixed and gives the proper command
or signal. It is repeated by all parts of the firing line. Each man
who was in the front rank prior to deployment, as soon as he
recognizes the command or signal, suspends firing, quickly fixes his
bayonet, and immediately resumes firing; after which the other men
suspend firing, fix bayonets, and immediately resume firing. The
support also fixes bayonets. The concerted fixing of the bayonet by
the firing line at drill does not simulate battle conditions and
should not be required. It is essential that there be no marked pause
in the firing. Bayonets will be fixed generally before or during the
last, or second last, advance preceding the charge. (318)

=356. The charge.= Subject to orders from higher authority, the major
determines the point from which the charge is to be made. (See Pars.
478-489 regarding the charge.) The firing line having arrived at that
point and being in readiness, the major causes the =charge= to be
sounded. The signal is repeated by the musicians of all parts of the
line. The company officers lead the charge. The skirmishers spring
forward shouting, run with bayonets at charge, and close with the
enemy.

The further conduct of the charging troops will depend upon
circumstances; they may halt and engage in bayonet combat or in
pursuing fire, as explained in par. 486; they may advance a short
distance to obtain a field of fire or to drive the enemy from the
vicinity; they may assemble or reorganize, etc. If the enemy vacates
his position every effort should be made to open fire at once on the
retreating mass, reorganization of the attacking troops being of
secondary importance to the infliction of further losses upon the
enemy and to the increase of his confusion, as set forth in pars.
490-494. In combat exercises the major will assume a situation and
terminate the assault accordingly. (319)

Defense

=357. Tactical unit best suited to defensive action.= In defense, as
in attack, the battalion is the tactical unit best suited to
independent assignment. Defensive positions are usually divided into
sections and a battalion assigned to each. (320)

=358. Trenches.= The major locates such fire, communicating, and cover
trenches and obstacles as are to be constructed. He assigns companies
to construct them and details the troops to occupy them. (See "Field
Fortifications," Chapter XVI, Part III.) (321)

=359. Reënforcement of firing line.= The major reënforces the firing
line in accordance with the principles applicable to and explained in
connection with, the attack, in pars. 352-354, maintaining no more
rifles in the firing line than are necessary to prevent the enemy's
advance. (322)

=360. Opening fire.= The supply of ammunition being usually ample,
fire is opened as soon as it is possible to break up the enemy's
formation, stop his advance or inflict material loss, but this rule
must be modified to suit the ammunition supply. (323)

=361. Fixing bayonets.= The major causes the firing line and support
to fix bayonets when an assault by the enemy is imminent. Captains
direct this to be done if they are not in communication with the major
and the measure is deemed advisable.

Fire alone will not stop a determined, skillfully conducted attack.
The defender must have equal tenacity; if he can stay in his trench or
position and cross bayonets, he will at least have neutralized the
hostile first line, and the combat will be decided by reserves. (324)

=362. Support to cover withdrawal.= If ordered or compelled to
withdraw under hostile infantry fire or in the presence of hostile
infantry, the support will be posted so as to cover the retirement of
the firing line (325)

=363. Support in case of battalion acting alone.= When the battalion
is operating alone, the support must be strong and must be fed
sparingly into the firing line, especially if a counter-attack is
planned. Opportunities for counter-attack should be sought at all
times, as explained in pars. 525-530. (326)

COMBAT

INTRODUCTION

=364. Scope of subject of combat tactics in this book.= Part II of
these regulations treats only of the basic principles of combat
tactics as applied to infantry and to the special units, such as
machine guns and mounted scouts, which form a part of infantry
regiments and battalions.

The combat tactics of the arms combined are considered in Field
Service Regulations. (350)

=365. Demands of modern combat upon infantry; complicated maneuvers
impracticable; success dependent upon leadership, etc.= Modern combat
demands the highest order of training, discipline, leadership, and
morale on the part of the infantry. Complicated maneuvers are
impracticable; efficient leadership and a determination to win by
simple and direct methods must be depended upon for success. (351)

=366. Duties and quality of infantry.= The duties of infantry are many
and difficult. All infantry must be fit to cope with all conditions
that may arise. Modern war requires but one kind of infantry--good
infantry. (352)

=367. Offensive necessary for decisive results; use of ground, fire
efficiency, etc.; local success.= The infantry must take the offensive
to gain decisive results. Both sides are therefore likely to attempt
it, though not necessary at the same time or in the same part of a
long battle line.

In the local combats which make up the general battle the better
endurance, use of ground, fire efficiency, discipline, and training
will win. It is the duty of the infantry to win the local successes
which enable the commanding general to win the battle. (356)

=368. Requisites of infantry; trained to bear heaviest burdens; good
infantry can defeat vastly superior infantry of poor quality.= The
infantry must have the tenacity to hold every advantage gained, the
individual and collective discipline and skill needed to master the
enemy's fire, the determination to close with the enemy in attack, and
to meet him with the bayonet in defense. Infantry must be trained to
bear the heaviest burdens and losses, both of combat and march.

Good infantry can defeat an enemy greatly superior in numbers, but
lacking in training, discipline, leadership, and morale. (354)

=369. Fixed forms and instructions covering all cases impossible;
study and practice necessary; purposes of practical and theoretical
instruction.= It is impossible to establish fixed forms or to give
general instructions that will cover all cases. Officers and
noncommissioned officers must be so trained that they can apply
suitable means and methods to each case as it arises. Study and
practice are necessary to acquire proper facility in this respect.
Theoretical instruction can not replace practical instruction; the
former supplies correct ideas and gives to practical work an interest,
purpose, and definiteness not otherwise obtainable. (355)

=370. Exercises in extended order to be in nature of combat exercises;
all combat exercises to be conducted under assumed tactical
situations.= After the mechanism of extended order drill has been
learned with precision in the company, every exercise should be, as
far as practicable, in the nature of a maneuver (combat exercise)
against an =imaginary=, =outlined=, or =represented= enemy.

Company extended order drill may be conducted without reference to a
tactical situation, but a combat exercise, whatever may be the size of
the unit employed, should be conducted under an assumed tactical
situation. (356)

=371. Effective method of conducting combat exercises.= An effective
method of conducting a combat exercise is to outline the enemy with a
few men equipped with flags. The umpire or inspector states the
situation, and the commander leads his troops with due regard to the
assumptions made.

Changes in situation, the results of reconnaissance, the character of
artillery fire, etc., are made known to the commander when necessary
by the umpire or inspector, who, in order to observe and influence the
conduct of the exercise, remains in rear of the firing line. From this
position he indicates, with the aid of prearranged signals, the
character of the fire and movements of the hostile infantry. These
signals are intended for the men outlining the enemy. These men repeat
the signals; all officers and men engaged in the exercise and in sight
of the outlined enemy are thus informed of the enemy's action, and the
exercise is conducted accordingly.

Assistant umpires, about one for each company in the firing line, may
assist in indicating hostile fire and movements and in observing the
conduct of the exercise.

An outlined enemy may be made to attack or defend.

Situations should be simple and natural. During or after the exercise
the umpire or inspector should call attention to any improper
movements or incorrect methods of execution. He will prohibit all
movements of troops or individuals that would be impossible if the
enemy were real. The slow progress of events to be expected on the
battlefield can hardly be simulated, but the umpire or inspector will
prevent undue haste and will attempt to enforce a reasonably slow rate
of progress.

The same exercise should not be repeated over the same ground and
under the same situation. Such repetitions lead to the adoption of a
fixed mode of attack or defense and develop mere drill masters. Fixed
or prearranged systems are prohibited. (357)

LEADERSHIP

General Considerations

=372. What constitutes art of leadership.= The art of leadership
consists of applying sound tactical principles to concrete cases on
the battlefield.

Self-reliance, initiative, aggressiveness, and a conception of
team-work are the fundamental characteristics of successful
leadership. (358)

=373. Basis of success; adherence to original plan.= A correct grasp
of the situation and a definite plan of action form the soundest basis
for a successful combat.

A good plan once adopted and put into execution should not be
abandoned unless it becomes clear that it can not succeed.
Afterthoughts are dangerous, except as they aid in the execution of
details in the original plans. (359)

=374. Avoid combats offering no chance of valuable results.= Combats
that do not promise success or some real advantage to the general
issue should be avoided; they cause unnecessary losses, impair the
morale of one's own troops, and raise that of the enemy. (360)

=375. Avoid complicated maneuvers.= Complicated maneuvers are not
likely to succeed in war. All plans and the methods adopted for
carrying them into effect must be simple and direct. (361)

=376. Order and cohesion necessary.= Order and cohesion must be
maintained within the units if success is to be expected. (362)

=377. Officers to be true leaders.= Officers must show themselves to
be true leaders. They must act in accordance with the spirit of their
orders and must require of their troops the strictest discipline on
the field of battle. (363)

=378. Units not to be broken up.= The best results are obtained when
leaders know the capacity and traits of those whom they command; hence
in making detachments units should not be broken up, and a deployment
that would cause an intermingling of the larger units in the firing
line should be avoided. (364)

=379. Leading deployed troops difficult; necessity for training,
discipline and close order.= Leading is difficult when troops are
deployed. A high degree of training and discipline and the use of
close order formations to the fullest extent possible are therefore
required. (365)

=380. Avoidance of unnecessary hardship; limit of endurance exacted
when necessary.= In order to lighten the severe physical strain
inseparable from infantry service in campaign, constant efforts must
be made to spare the troops unnecessary hardship and fatigue; but when
necessity arises, the limit of endurance must be exacted. (366)

=381. Fighting troops not to carry back wounded.= When officers or men
belonging to fighting troops leave their proper places to carry back,
or to care for, wounded during the progress of the action, they are
guilty of skulking. This offense must be repressed with the utmost
vigor. (367)

=382. Complete equipment usually carried into action.= The complete
equipment of the soldier is carried into action unless the weather or
the physical condition of the men renders such measure a severe
hardship. In any event, =only the pack[4] will be laid aside=. The
determination of this question rests with the regimental commander.
The complete equipment affords to men lying prone considerable
protection against shrapnel. (368)

=383. Post of commander; use of reserve in case of victory; when
firing line is controlled by commander.= The post of the commander
must be such as will enable him to observe the progress of events and
to communicate his orders. Subordinate commanders, in addition, must
be in position to transmit the orders of superiors.

Before entering an action, the commander should be as far to the front
as possible in order that he personally may see the situation, order
the deployment, and begin the action strictly in accordance with his
own wishes.

During the action, he must, as a rule, leave to the local leaders the
detailed conduct of the firing line, posting himself either with his
own reserve or in such a position that he is in constant, direct, and
easy communication with it.

A commander takes full and direct charge of his firing line only when
the line has absorbed his whole command.

When their troops are victorious, all commanders should press forward
in order to clinch the advantage gained and to use their reserves to
the best advantage. (369)

=384. Latitude allowed subordinates.= The latitude allowed to officers
is in direct proportion to the size of their commands. Each should see
to the general execution of his task, leaving to the proper
subordinates the supervision of details, and interfering only when
mistakes are made that threaten to seriously prejudice the general
plan. (370)

Teamwork

=385. Latitude allowed subordinates; success depends on coördination
of subordinates.= The comparatively wide fronts of deployed units
increase the difficulties of control. Subordinates must therefore be
given great latitude in the execution of their tasks. The success of
the whole depends largely upon how well each subordinate coördinates
his work with the general plan.

A great responsibility is necessarily thrown upon subordinates, but
responsibility stimulates the right kind of an officer. (371)

=386. Initiative of subordinates; general plan to be furthered.= In a
given situation it is far better =to do any intelligent thing=
consistent with the aggressive execution of the general plan, than to
search hesitatingly for the ideal. This is the true rule of conduct
for subordinates who are required to act upon their own initiative.

A subordinate who is reasonably sure that his intended action is such
as would be ordered by the commander, were the latter present and in
possession of the facts, has enough encouragement to go ahead
confidently. He must possess the loyalty to carry out the plans of his
superior and the keenness to recognize and to seize opportunities to
further the general plan. (372)

=387. But one supreme will in a battle; subordinates to coöperate.=
Independence must not become license. Regardless of the number of
subordinates who are apparently supreme in their own restricted
spheres, there is but one battle and but one supreme will to which all
must conform.

Every subordinate must therefore work for the general result. He does
all in his power to insure coöperation between the subdivisions under
his command. He transmits important information to adjoining units or
to superiors in rear and, with the assistance of information received,
keeps himself and his subordinates duly posted as to the situation.
(373)

=388. Deviation from orders.= When circumstances render it
impracticable to consult the authority issuing an order, officers
should not hesitate to vary from such order when it is clearly based
upon an incorrect view of the situation, is impossible of execution,
or has been rendered impracticable on account of changes which have
occurred since its promulgation. In the application of this rule the
responsibility for mistakes rests upon the subordinate, but
unwillingness to assume responsibility on proper occasions is
indicative of weakness.

Superiors should be careful not to censure an apparent disobedience
where the act was done in the proper spirit and to advance the general
plan. (374)

=389. Intermingling of units; duties of officers and guides.= When the
men of two or more units intermingle in the firing line, all officers
and men submit at once to the senior. Officers and platoon guides seek
to fill vacancies caused by casualties. Each seizes any opportunity to
exercise the functions consistent with his grade, and all assist in
the maintenance of order and control.

Every lull in the action should be utilized for as complete
restoration of order in the firing line as the ground or other
conditions permit. (375)

=390. Separated officers and noncommissioned officers placing
themselves under nearest higher commander.= Any officer or
noncommissioned officer who becomes separated from his proper unit and
can not rejoin must at once place himself and his command at the
disposal of the nearest higher commander. (376)

Anyone having completed an assigned task must seek to rejoin his
proper command. Failing in this, he should join the nearest troops
engaged with the enemy.

=391. Duty of separated soldiers.= Soldiers are taught the necessity
of remaining with their companies, but those who become detached must
join the nearest company and serve with it until the battle is over or
reorganization is ordered. (377)

Orders

=392. Orders for deployment; combat orders of divisions and brigades
usually written.= Commands are deployed and enter the combat by the
orders of the commander to the subordinate commanders.

The initial combat orders of the division are almost invariably
written; those of the brigade are generally so. The written order is
preferable and is used whenever time permits.

If time permits, subsequent orders are likewise written, either as
field orders or messages. (378)

=393. Combat orders of regiments and smaller units; verbal messages.=
The initial combat orders of regiments and smaller units are given
verbally. For this purpose the subordinates for whom the orders are
intended are assembled, if practicable, at a place from which the
situation and plan can be explained.

Subsequent orders are verbal or in the form of verbal or written
messages. Verbal messages should not be used unless they are short and
unmistakable. (379)

=394. Initial combat orders; personal reconnaissance.= The initial
combat order of any commander or subordinate is based upon his
definite plan for executing the task confronting him.

Whenever possible the formation of the plan is preceded by a personal
reconnaissance of the terrain and a careful consideration of all
information of the enemy. (380)

=395. Composition of combat orders.= The combat order gives such
information of the enemy and of neighboring or supporting friendly
troops as will enable subordinates to understand the situation.

The general plan of action is stated in brief terms, but enough of the
commander's intentions is divulged to guide the subsequent actions of
the subordinates.

Clear and concise instructions are given as to the action to be taken
in the combat by each part of the command. In this way the commander
assigns tasks, fronts, objectives, sectors or areas, etc., in
accordance with his plan. If the terms employed convey definite ideas
and leave no loopholes, the conduct of subordinates will generally be
correspondingly satisfactory.

Such miscellaneous matter relating to special troops, trains,
ammunition, and future movements of the commander is added as concerns
the combat itself.

Combat orders should prescribe communication, reconnaissance, flank
protection, etc., when some special disposition is desired or when an
omission on the part of a subordinate may reasonably be feared. (381)

=396. Encroaching upon functions of subordinates prohibited; orders to
be definite.= When issuing orders, a commander should indicate clearly
=what= is to be done by each subordinate, but not =how= it is to be
done. He should not encroach upon the functions of a subordinate by
prescribing details of execution unless he has good reason to doubt
the ability or judgment of the subordinate, and cannot substitute
another.

Although general in its terms, an order must be definite and must be
the expression of a fixed decision. Ambiguity or vagueness indicates
either a vacillation or the inability to formulate orders. (382)

=397. Orders generally given subordinates through their immediate
superiors.= Usually the orders of a commander are intended for, and
are given to, the commanders of the next lower units, but in an
emergency commander should not hesitate to give orders directly to
any subordinate. In such case he should promptly inform the
intermediate commander concerned. (383)

Communication

=398. Communication, how maintained.= Communication is maintained by
means of staff officers, messengers, relay systems, connecting files,
visual signals, telegraph, or telephone. (384)

=399. Lines of communication established by signal corps.= The signal
corps troops of the division establish lines of information from
division to brigade headquarters. The further extension of lines of
information in combat by signal troops is exceptional. (385)

=400. Lines of communication established by regiment; orderlies carry
signal flags.= Each regiment, employing its own personnel, is
responsible for the maintenance of communication from the colonel back
to the brigade and forward to the battalions. For this purpose the
regiment uses the various means which may be furnished it. The staff
and orderlies, regimental and battalion, are practiced in the use of
these means and in messenger service. Orderlies carry signal flags.
(386)

=401. Communication between firing line and major or colonel; company
musicians carry signal flags.= Connection between the firing line and
the major or colonel is practically limited to the prescribed flag,
arm, and bugle signals. Other means can only be supplemental. Company
musicians carry company flags and are practiced in signaling. (387)

=402. Communication by artillery with firing line by means of staff
officers or through agents.= The artillery generally communicates with
the firing line by means of its own staff officers or through an agent
who accompanies some unit in or near the front. The infantry keeps him
informed as to the situation and affords any reasonable assistance.
When the infantry is dependent upon the artillery for fire support,
perfect coördination through this representative is of great
importance. (388)

COMBAT RECONNAISSANCE

=403. Importance of combat reconnaissance; avoidance of deployment on
wrong lines.= Combat reconnaissance is of vital importance and must
not be neglected. By proper preliminary reconnaissance, deployments on
wrong lines, or in a wrong direction, and surprises may generally be
prevented. (389)

=404. Protection of troops by proper reconnaissance.= Troops deployed
and under fire can not change front, and thus they suffer greatly when
enfiladed. Troops in close order formation may suffer heavy losses in
a short time if subjected to hostile fire. In both formations troops
must be protected by proper reconnaissance and warning. (390)

=405. Difficulty of reconnaissance depends on extent of enemy's
screen; strength of reconnoitering parties.= The difficulty of
reconnaissance increases in proportion to the measures adopted by the
enemy to screen himself.

The strength of the reconnoitering party is determined by the
character of the information desired and the nature of the hostile
screen. In exceptional cases as much as a battalion may be necessary
in order to break through the hostile screen and enable the commander
or officer in charge to reconnoiter in person.

A large reconnoitering party is conducted so as to open the way for
small patrols, to serve as a supporting force or rallying point for
them, and to receive and transmit information. Such parties maintain
signal communication with the main body if practicable. (391)

=406. Each separate column to protect itself by reconnaissance.= Each
separate column moving forward to deploy must reconnoiter to its front
and flank and keep in touch with adjoining columns. The extent of the
reconnaissance to the flank depends upon the isolation of the columns.
(392)

=407. Reconnaissance before attacking.= Before an attack a
reconnaissance must be made to determine the enemy's position, the
location of his flanks, the character of the terrain, the nature of
the hostile field works, etc., in order to prevent premature
deployment and the resulting fatigue and loss of time.

It will frequently be necessary to send forward a thin skirmish line
in order to induce the enemy to open fire and reveal his position.
(393)

=408. Extent of reconnaissance.= It will frequently be impossible to
obtain satisfactory information until after the action has begun. The
delay that may be warranted for the purpose of reconnaissance depends
upon the nature of the attack and the necessity for promptness. For
example, in a meeting engagement, and sometimes in a holding attack,
the reconnaissance may have to be hasty and superficial, whereas in an
attack against an enemy carefully prepared for defense there will
generally be both time and necessity for thorough reconnaissance.
(394)

=409. Reconnaissance in defense.= In defense, reconnaissance must be
kept up to determine the enemy's line of advance, to ascertain his
dispositions, to prevent his reconnaissance, etc.

Patrols or parties posted to prevent hostile reconnaissance should
relieve the main body of the necessity of betraying its position by
firing on small bodies of the enemy. (395)

=410. Duration of reconnaissance; protection of flanks.=
Reconnaissance continues throughout the action.

A firing or skirmish line can take care of its front, but its flanks
are especially vulnerable to modern firearms. The moral effect of
flanking fire is as great as the physical effect. Hence, combat
patrols to give warning or covering detachments to give security are
indispensable on exposed flanks. This is equally true in attack or
defense. (396)

=411. Responsibility of infantry commanders for reconnaissance;
surprise unpardonable.= The fact that cavalry patrols are known to be
posted in a certain direction does not relieve infantry commanders of
the responsibility for reconnaissance and security.

To be surprised by an enemy at short range is an unpardonable offense.
(397)

=412. Commander of flank battalion responsible for security of his
flank.= The commander of a battalion on a flank of a general line
invariably provides for the necessary reconnaissance and security on
that flank unless higher authority has specifically ordered it. In
any event, he sends out combat patrols as needed.

Where his battalion is on a flank of one section of the line and a
considerable interval lies between his battalion and the next section,
he makes similar provision. (398)

=413. Patrols established by battalion commanders.= Battalion
commanders in the first line establish patrols to observe and report
the progress or conduct of adjoining troops when these can not be
seen. (399)

FIRE SUPERIORITY

PURPOSE AND NATURE

(See par. 427)

=414. Success in battle dependent upon fire superiority.= In a
decisive battle success depends on gaining and maintaining fire
superiority. Every effort must be made to gain it early and then to
keep it.

Attacking troops must first gain fire superiority in order to reach
the hostile position. Over open ground attack is possible only when
the attacking force has a decided fire superiority. With such
superiority the attack is not only possible, but success is probable
and without ruinous losses.

Defending troops can prevent a charge only when they can master the
enemy's fire and inflict heavy losses upon him. (400)

=415. Volume and accuracy necessary to obtain fire superiority.= To
obtain fire superiority it is necessary to produce a heavy volume of
accurate fire. Every increase in the effectiveness of the fire means a
corresponding decrease in the effectiveness of the enemy's fire.

The volume and accuracy of fire will depend upon several
considerations:

=(a) The number of rifles employed.= On a given front the greatest
volume of fire is produced by a firing line having only sufficient
intervals between men to permit the free use of their rifles. The
maximum density of a firing line is therefore about one man per yard
of front.

=(b)= The =rate= of fire affects its volume; an excessive rate reduces
its accuracy.

=(c) The character of the target influences both volume and accuracy.=
Larger dimensions, greater visibility, and shorter range increase the
rate of fire; greater density increases =the effect=.

=(d) Training and discipline= have an important bearing on the rate or
volume of fire, but their greatest influence is upon accuracy.

The firing efficiency of troops is reduced by fatigue and adverse
psychological influences.

=(e) Fire direction and control improve collective accuracy.= The
importance of fire direction increases rapidly with the range. Control
exerts a powerful influence at all ranges. (401)

FIRE DIRECTION AND CONTROL

Opening Fire

=416. Long range fire, when effective.= Beyond effective ranges
important results can be expected only when the target is large and
distinct and much ammunition is used.

Long range fire is permissible in pursuit on account of the moral
effect of any fire under the circumstances. At other times such fire
is of doubtful value. (402)

=417. Opening fire in attack.= In attack, the desire to open fire when
losses are first felt must be repressed. Considerations of time,
target, ammunition, and morale make it imperative that the attack
withhold its fire and press forward to a first firing position close
to the enemy. The attacker's target will be smaller and fainter than
the one he presents to the enemy. (403)

=418. Opening fire in defense.= In defense, more ammunition is
available, ranges are more easily determined, and the enemy usually
presents a larger target. The defender may therefore open fire and
expect results at longer ranges than the attacker, and particularly if
the defenders intend a delaying action only.

If the enemy has a powerful artillery, it will often be best for the
defending infantry to withhold its fire until the enemy offers a
specially favorable target. Vigorous and well-directed bursts of fire
are then employed. The troops should therefore be given as much
artificial protection as time and means permit, and at an agreed
signal expose themselves as much as necessary and open fire. (404)

=419. Opening fire in unexpected, close encounters.= In unexpected,
close encounters a great advantage accrues to the side which first
opens rapid and accurate fire with battle sight. (405)

Use of Ground

=420. Requisites of ground for cover.= The position of the firers must
afford a suitable field of fire.

The ground should permit constant observation of the enemy, and yet
enable the men to secure some cover when not actually firing.

Troops whose target is for the moment hidden by unfavorable ground,
either move forward to better ground or seek to execute cross fire on
another target. (406)

=421. Skillful use of ground reduces visibility.= The likelihood of a
target being hit depends to a great extent upon its visibility. By
skillful use of ground, a firing line may reduce its visibility
without loss of fire power. Sky lines are particularly to be avoided.
(407)

Choice of Target

=422. Target to be chosen.= The target chosen should be the hostile
troops most dangerous to the firers. These will usually be the nearest
hostile infantry. When no target is specially dangerous, that one
should be chosen which promises the most hits. (408)

=423. Target not to be changed except for good reason.= Frequent
changes of target impair the fire effect. Random changes to small,
unimportant targets impair fire discipline and accomplish nothing.
Attention should be confined to the main target until substantial
reason for change is apparent. (409)

=424. Flanking fire to be delivered when opportunity offers.= An
opportunity to deliver flanking fire, especially against artillery
protected in front by shields, is an example warranting change of
target and should never be overlooked. Such fire demoralizes the
troops subjected to it, even if the losses inflicted are small. In
this manner a relatively small number of rifles can produce important
results. (410)

The Range

=425. Importance of correct sight setting.= Beyond close range, the
correct setting of the rear sight is of primary importance, provided
the troops are trained and well in hand. The necessity for correct
sight setting increases rapidly with the range. Its importance
decreases as the quality of the troops decrease, for the error in
sight setting, except possibly at very long ranges, becomes
unimportant when compared with the error in holding and aiming. (411)

=426. Determination of ranges.= In attack, distances must usually be
estimated and corrections made as errors are observed. Mechanical
range finders and ranging volleys are practicable at times.

In defense, it is generally practicable to measure more accurately the
distances to visible objects and to keep a record of them for future
use. (412)

Distribution of Fire and Target

=427. Purpose of fire superiority; distribution of fire and target.=
The purpose of fire superiority is to get hits whenever possible, but
at all events to keep down the enemy's fire and render it harmless. To
accomplish this the target must be covered with fire throughout its
whole extent. Troops who are not fired upon will fire with nearly
peacetime accuracy.

The target is roughly divided and a part is assigned to each unit. No
part of the target is neglected. In attack, by a system of overlapping
in assigning targets to platoons, the entire hostile line can be kept
under fire even during a rush. (Pars. 400-401.) (413)

Observation

=428. Observation of target.= The correctness of the sight setting and
the distribution of fire over the target can be verified only by
careful observation of the target, the adjacent ground, and the effect
upon the enemy. (414)

=429. Observation determines whether fire fight is being properly
conducted.= Observation only can determine whether the fire fight is
being properly conducted. If the enemy's fire is losing in accuracy
and effect, the observer realizes that his side is gaining
superiority. If the enemy's fire remains or becomes effective and
persistent, he realizes that corrective measures are necessary to
increase either volume or accuracy, or both. (415)

Discipline

=430. What discipline accomplishes.= Discipline makes good direction
and control possible and is the distinguishing mark of trained troops.
(416)

=431. Communication on firing line by means of signals.= The
discipline necessary in the firing line will be absent unless officers
and noncommissioned officers can make their will known to the men. In
the company, therefore, communication must be by simple signals which,
in the roar of musketry, will attract the attention and convey the
correct meaning. (417)

Expenditure of Ammunition

=432. Use of ammunition in attack.= In attack the supply is more
limited than in defense. Better judgment must be exercised in
expenditure. Ordinarily, troops in the firing line of an attack can
not expect to have that day more ammunition than they carry into the
combat, except such additions as come from the distribution of
ammunition of dead and wounded and the surplus brought by
reënforcements. (418)

=433. True economy in expenditure of ammunition.= When a certain fire
effect is required, the necessary ammunition must be expended without
hesitation. Several hours of firing may be necessary to gain fire
superiority. True economy can be practiced only by closing on the
enemy, as explained in par. 344, before first opening fire, and
thereafter suspending fire when there is nothing to shoot at. (419)

Supporting Artillery

=434. Artillery fire principal aid of infantry.= Artillery fire is the
principal aid to the infantry in gaining and keeping fire superiority,
not only by its hits, but by the moral effect it produces on the
enemy. (420)

=435. Functions of artillery fire in attack and defense.= In attack,
artillery assists the forward movement of the infantry. It keeps down
the fire of the hostile artillery and seeks to neutralize the hostile
infantry by inflicting losses upon it, destroying its morale, driving
it to cover, and preventing it from using its weapons effectively.

In defense, it ignores the hostile artillery when the enemy's attack
reaches a decisive stage and assists in checking the attack, joining
its fire power to that of the defending infantry. (421)

=436. Fire of artillery over friendly troops.= Troops should be
accustomed to being fired over by friendly artillery and impressed
with the fact that the artillery should continue firing upon the enemy
until the last possible moment. The few casualties resulting from
shrapnel bursting short are trifling compared with those that would
result from the increased effectiveness of the enemy's infantry fire
were the friendly artillery to cease firing.

Casualties inflicted by supporting artillery are not probable until
the opposing infantry lines are less than 200 yards apart. (422)

=437. When no longer safe for artillery to fire over friendly troops.=
When the distance between the hostile infantry lines becomes so short
as to render further use of friendly artillery inadvisable, the
commander of the infantry firing line, using a preconcerted
signal,[5] informs the artillery commander. The latter usually
increases the range in order to impede the strengthening of the
enemy's foremost line, as explained in pars. 345-346. (423)

Fire of Position

=438. Fire of position, when used.= Infantry is said to execute fire
of position when it is posted so as to assist an attack by firing over
the heads, or off the flank, of the attacking troops and is not itself
to engage in the advance; or when, in defense, it is similarly posted
to augment the fire of the main firing line.

Machine guns serve a like purpose, as set forth in par. 555.

In a decisive action, fire of position should be employed whenever the
terrain permits and reserve infantry is available. (424)

DEPLOYMENT

=439. Formation of troops before and during deployment.= Troops are
massed preparatory to deployment when the nature of their deployment
can not be foreseen or it is desirable to shorten the column or to
clear the road. Otherwise, in the deployment of large commands,
whether in march column, in bivouac, or massed, and whether forming,
for attack or for defense, they are ordinarily first formed into a
line of columns to facilitate the extension of the front prior to
deploying.

The rough line or lines of columns thus formed enable troops to take
advantage of the terrain in advancing and shorten the time occupied in
forming the firing line. (425)

=440. Action of brigade and regimental commanders in deployment of
division.= In deploying the division, each brigade is assigned a
definite task or objective. On receipt of his orders, the brigade
commander conducts his brigade in column or in line of regiments,
until it is advisable that it be broken into smaller columns. He then
issues his order, assigning to each regiment its task, if practicable.
In a similar manner the regimental commanders lead their regiments
forward in column, or in line of columns, until the time arrives for
issuing the regimental order. It is seldom advisable to break up the
battalion before issuing orders for its deployment. (426)

=441. Personal reconnaissance before deployment.= Each subordinate
commander, after receiving his order for the action, should precede
his command as far as possible, in order to reconnoiter the ground
personally, and should prepare to issue his orders promptly. (427)

=442. Each commander to guard his command against surprise.= Each
commander of a column directs the necessary reconnaissance to front
and flanks; by this means and by a judicious choice of ground he
guards against surprise. (428)

=443. Premature formation of firing line to be avoided.= The premature
formation of the firing line causes unnecessary fatigue and loss of
time, and may result in a faulty direction being taken. Troops once
deployed make even minor changes of direction with difficulty, and
this difficulty increases with the length of the firing line. (429)

=444. Rectification of deployment in wrong direction.= In the larger
units, when the original deployment is found to be in the wrong
direction, it will usually be necessary to deploy the reserve on the
correct front and withdraw and assemble the first line. (430)

=445. Number of troops to be deployed in beginning.= To gain decisive
results, it will generally be necessary to use all the troops at some
stage of the combat. But in the beginning, while the situation is
uncertain, care should be taken not to engage too large a proportion
of the command. On the other hand, there is no greater error than to
employ too few and to sacrifice them by driblets. (For division of the
battalion in attack see 335-339.) (431)

=446. Dense, well-directed, and controlled line of heavy fire gives
fire superiority.= When it is intended to fight to a decision, fire
superiority is essential. To gain this, two things are necessary: A
heavy fire and a fire well-directed and controlled. Both of these are
best obtained when the firing line is as dense as practicable, while
leaving the men room for the free use of their rifles.

If the men are too widely separated, direction and control are very
difficult, often impossible, and the intensity of fire is slight in
proportion to the front occupied. (432)

=447. Density of 1 man per yard; occupation of only sections of long
lines.= In an attack or stubborn defense the firing line should have a
density of one man per yard of front occupied.

Where the tactical situation demands the holding of a line too long to
be occupied throughout at this density, it is generally better to
deploy companies or platoons at one man per yard, leaving gaps in the
line between them, than to distribute the men uniformly at increased
intervals. (433)

=448. Use of thin firing line.= A relatively thin firing line may be
employed when merely covering the movements of other forces; when on
the defensive against poor troops; when the final action to be taken
has not yet been determined; and, in general, when fire superiority is
not necessary. (434)

=449. Length of firing line employed by whole force; strength of
supports and reserves; density of charging line.= The length of the
firing line that the whole force may employ depends upon the density
of the line and the strength in rear required by the situation.

Supports and reserves constitute the strength in rear.

In a decisive attack they should be at least strong enough to replace
a heavy loss in the original firing line and to increase the charging
line to a density of at least one and one-half men per yard and still
have troops in rear for protection and for the other purposes
mentioned above. (435)

=450. Strength of reserve; troops deployed varying from 1 to 10 men
per yard.= In the original deployment the strength of the reserve held
out by each commander comprises from one-sixth to two-thirds of his
unit, depending upon the nature of the service expected of the
reserve.

A small force in a covering or delaying action requires very little
strength in rear, while a large force fighting a decisive battle
requires much. Therefore, depending upon circumstances, the original
deployment, including the strength in rear, may vary from 1 to 10 men
per yard. Against an enemy poorly disciplined and trained, or lacking
in morale, a thinner deployment is permissible. (436)

=451. Density of whole deployment varies with size of command.= The
density of the whole deployment increases with the size of the
command, because the larger the command the greater the necessity for
reserves. Thus, battalion acting alone may attack two men per yard of
front, but a regiment, with three battalions, may only double the
front of the one battalion. (437)

=452. Division of battle line into battle districts and density of
deployment therein.= By the assignment of divisions or larger units to
parts of a line of battle several miles long, a series of
semi-independent battle, or local combat, districts are created.

The general deployment for a long line of battle comprising several
battle districts is not directly considered in these regulations. The
deployments treated of herein are those of the infantry within such
districts.

The density of deployment in these districts may vary greatly,
depending upon the activity expected in each. Within these battle
districts, as well as in smaller forces acting alone, parts of the
line temporarily of less importance may be held weakly, in order to
economize troops and to have more at the decisive point. (438)

=453. Extent of front occupied by a unit depends upon security of
flanks.= The front that a unit may occupy when deployed depends also
upon whether its flanks are secured. If both flanks are secured by
other troops, the unit may increase its front materially by reducing
its reserve or supports. If only one flank is so secured, the front
may still be somewhat increased, but the exposed flank must be guarded
by posting the supports or reserve toward that flank.

Natural obstacles that secure the flanks have practically the same
effect upon deployment. (439)

=454. Regiments, battalions, and companies deployed side by side.=
Except when assigned as supports or reserve, regiments in the brigade,
battalions in the regiment, and companies in the battalion are, when
practicable, deployed side by side. (440)

=455. Battalions furnish firing line and supports; larger units
furnish reserves; employment of reserve.= In the deployment,
battalions establish the firing line, each furnishing its own support.

In each unit larger than the battalion a reserve is held out, its
strength depending upon circumstances. In general, the reserve is
employed by the commander to meet or improve conditions brought about
by the action of the firing line. It must not be too weak or too split
up. It must be posted where the commander believes it will be needed
for decisive action, or where he desires to bring about such action.
When necessary, parts of it reënforce or prolong the firing line.
(441)

ATTACK

(For the battalion in Attack, see pars. 342-346)

=456. Fire superiority means success; how to obtain fire superiority.=
An attack is bound to succeed if fire superiority is gained and
properly used.

To gain this superiority generally requires that the attack employ
more rifles than the defense; this in turn means a longer line, as
both sides will probably hold a strong firing line. (442)

=457. When frontal attack may be successful.= With large forces, a
direct frontal attack gives the attacker little opportunity to bring
more rifles to bear. However, if the enemy is unduly extended, a
frontal attack may give very decisive results. (443)

=458. When turning movements are allowable.= Owing to the difficulty
of control and the danger of the parts being defeated in detail, wide
turning movements are seldom allowable except in large forces. (444)

=459. Advantages of enveloping attack.= If the attack can be so
directed that, while the front is covered, another fraction of the
command strikes a flank more or less obliquely (an enveloping attack),
the advantages gained are a longer line and more rifles in action;
also a converging fire opposed to the enemy's diverging fire. (445)

=460. Envelopment of both flanks.= An envelopment of both flanks
should never be attempted without a very decided superiority in
numbers. (446)

=461. Enveloping attacks result in local frontal attacks; advantage of
envelopment.= The enveloping attack will nearly always result locally
in a frontal attack, for it will be met by the enemy's reserve. The
advantage of envelopment lies in the longer concentric line, with its
preponderance of rifles and its converging fire. (447)

=462. Coöperation between frontal and enveloping attacks; the two
attacks to be deployed considerable distance from hostile positions.=
Coöperation between the frontal and enveloping attacks is essential to
success. Both should be pushed vigorously and simultaneously, and
ordinarily both should move simultaneously to the charge; but at the
final stage of the attack conditions may sometimes warrant one in
charging while the other supports it with fire.

The envelopment of a flank is brought about with difficulty when made
by troops already deployed in another direction or by their reserves.
The two attacks should be deployed at a suitable distance apart, with
the lines of attack converging in rear of the hostile position. The
troops that are to make the enveloping attack should deploy in the
proper direction at the start and should be given orders which enable
them to gain their point of deployment in the most direct and
practical manner.

The enveloping attack is generally made the stronger, especially in
small forces. (448)

DEPLOYMENT FOR ATTACK

=463. Distance from hostile position at which deployment is made;
foreground to be cleared of hostile detachments before deployment.=
Where open terrain exposes troops to hostile artillery fire it may be
necessary to make the deployment 2 miles or more from the hostile
position.

The foreground should be temporarily occupied by covering troops. If
the enemy occupies the foreground with detachments, the covering
troops must drive them back. (449)

=464. Moving well forward and deploying at night.= To enable large
forces to gain ground toward the enemy, it may sometimes be cheaper
and quicker in the end to move well forward and to deploy at night. In
such case the area in which the deployment is to be made should, if
practicable, be occupied by covering troops before dark.

The deployment will be made with great difficulty unless the ground
has been studied by daylight. The deployment gains little unless it
establishes the firing line well within effective range of the enemy's
main position. (See Night Operations, par. 580-590.) (450)

=465. Each unit deploys on its direction line; intervals between
battalions on firing line.= Each unit assigned a task deploys when on
its direction line, or opposite its objective, and when it has no
longer sufficient cover for advancing in close order. In the firing
line, intervals of 25 to 50 yards should be maintained as long as
possible between battalions. In the larger units it may be necessary
to indicate on the map the direction or objective, but to battalion
commanders it should be pointed out on the ground. (451)

=466. Post of reserve; reserve charged with flank protection.= The
reserve is kept near enough to the firing line to be on hand at the
decisive stage. It is posted with reference to the attack, or to that
part of the attacking line, from which the greater results are
expected; it is also charged with flank protection, but should be kept
intact.

Supports are considered in paragraphs 262 to 265, inclusive, and 335
to 339, inclusive. (452)

ADVANCING THE ATTACK

=467. Firing line to advance as far as possible before opening fire.=
The firing line must ordinarily advance a long distance before it is
justified in opening fire. It can not combat the enemy's artillery,
and it is at a disadvantage if it combats the defender's long-range
rifle fire. Hence it ignores both and, by taking full advantage of
cover and of the discipline of the troops, advances to a first firing
position at the shortest range possible, as explained in par. 344.

Formations for crossing this zone with the minimum loss are considered
in paragraphs 249 to 257, inclusive. These and other methods of
crossing such zones should be studied and practiced. (453)

=468. Invisibility best protection while advancing.= The best
protection against loss while advancing is to escape the enemy's view.
(454)

=469. Advance of battalions.= Each battalion finds its own firing
position, conforming to the general advance as long as practicable
and taking advantage of the more advanced position of an adjacent
battalion in order to gain ground.

The position from which the attack opens fire is further considered in
paragraphs 343-345, inclusive. (455)

=470. Infantry moving to the attack passing through deployed
artillery.= It will frequently become necessary for infantry moving to
the attack to pass through deployed artillery. This should be done so
as to interfere as little as possible with the latter's fire, and
never so as to cause that fire to cease entirely. As far as
practicable, advantage should be taken of intervals in the line, if
any. An understanding between artillery and infantry commanders should
be had, so as to effect the movement to the best advantage. (456)

=471. Advanced elements of firing line not to open fire on main
hostile position.= In advancing the attack, advanced elements of the
firing line or detachments in front of it should not open fire except
in defense or to clear the foreground of the enemy. Fire on the
hostile main position should not be opened until all or nearly all of
the firing line can join in the fire. (457)

THE FIRE ATTACK

(See pars. 414-438.)

=472. Fire superiority sought at first firing position, and to be
maintained until charging point is reached; size of rushing units.= At
the first firing position the attack seeks to gain fire superiority.
This may necessitate a steady, accurate fire a long time. The object
is to subdue the enemy's fire and keep it subdued so that the
attacking troops may advance from this point to a favorable place near
the enemy from which the charge may be made. Hence, in the advance by
rushes, sufficient rifles must be kept constantly in action to keep
down the enemy's fire; this determines the size of the fraction
rushing. (458)

=473. Futility of advancing without fire superiority.= To advance
without fire superiority against a determined defense would result in
such losses as to bring the attack to a standstill or to make the
apparent success barren of results. (459)

=474. Signs that fire superiority has been gained.= Diminution of the
enemy's fire and a pronounced loss in effectiveness are the surest
signs that fire superiority has been gained and that a part of the
firing line can advance. (460)

=475. Retiring under fire in daylight suicidal; intrenching.= The men
must be impressed with the fact that, having made a considerable
advance under fire and having been checked, it is suicidal to turn
back in daylight.

If they can advance no farther, they must intrench and hold on until
the fall of darkness or a favorable turn in the situation develops.

Intrenching is resorted to only when necessary. Troops who have
intrenched themselves under fire are moved forward again with
difficulty. (461)

=476. Supports and reserves occupying trenches vacated by firing line,
to improve same.= Supports and reserves occupying intrenchments
vacated by the firing line should improve them, but they must not be
held back or diverted from their true missions on this account. (462)

=477. Greater detail of conduct of fire attack.= Paragraphs 346 to
354, inclusive, deal more in detail with the conduct of the fire
attack. (463)

THE CHARGE

(See pars. 355-356)

=478. What fire superiority accomplishes; psychological moment for
charge determined by tactical instinct.= Fire superiority beats down
the enemy's fire, destroys his resistance and morale, and enables the
attacking troops to close on him, but an actual or threatened
occupation of his position is needed to drive him out and defeat him.

The psychological moment for the charge can not be determined far in
advance. The tactical instinct of the responsible officer must decide.
(464)

=479. When, and distance over which charge should be made.=

The defenders, if subjugated by the fire attack, will frequently leave
before the charge begins. On the other hand, it may be necessary to
carry the fire attack close to the position and follow it up with a
short dash and a bayonet combat. Hence the distance over which the
charge may be made will vary between wide limits. It may be from 25 to
400 yards.

The charge should be made at the earliest moment that promises
success; otherwise the full advance of victory will be lost. (465)

=480. Charge to be made with approval of commander of attacking line;
battalion commanders signal commander of line when ready to charge;
charge to be made simultaneously.= The commander of the attacking line
should indicate his approval, or give the order, before the charge is
made. Subordinate commanders, usually battalion commanders, whose
troops are ready to charge, signal that fact to the commander. It may
be necessary for them to wait until other battalions or other parts of
the line are ready or until the necessary reserves arrive.

At the signal for the charge the firing line and nearby supports and
reserves rush forward. (See pars. 355 and 356.)

The charge is made simultaneously, if possible, by all the units
participating therein, but once committed to the assault, battalions
should be pushed with the utmost vigor and no restraint placed on the
ardor of charging troops by an attempt to maintain alignment. (466)

=481. Charge not to be made without sufficient troops; reserves give
impetus; avoiding too dense a mass.= Before ordering the charge the
commander should see that enough troops are on hand to make it a
success. Local reserves joining the firing line in time to participate
in the charge give it a strong impetus. Too dense a mass should be
avoided. (467)

=482. Line to be strengthened by prolongation.= The line should be
strengthened by prolongation, if practicable, and remaining troops
kept in formation for future use; but rather than that the attack
should fail, the last formed body will be sent in, unless it is very
apparent that it can do no good. (468)

=483. Additional force for pursuit.= To arrive in the hostile position
with a very compact firing line and a few formed supports is
sufficient for a victory, but an additional force kept well in hand
for pursuit is of inestimable value. (469)

=484. Premature charge to be avoided; charging without authority from
the rear.= A premature charge by a part of the line should be avoided,
but if begun, the other parts of the line should join at once if there
is any prospect of success. Under exceptional conditions a part of the
line may be compelled to charge without authority from the rear. The
intention to do so should be signaled to the rear. (470)

=485. Confidence in ability to use bayonet.= Confidence in their
ability to use the bayonet gives the assaulting troops the promise of
success. (471)

=486. Pursuing fire; disordered units not to pursue.= If the enemy has
left the position when the charging troops reach it, the latter should
open a rapid fire upon the retreating enemy, if he is in sight. It is
not advisable for the mixed and disordered units to follow him, except
to advance to a favorable firing position or to cover the
reorganization of others. (472)

=487. Pursuing troops; reorganization of charging line; preparations
to meet counter-attack.= The nearest formed bodies accompanying or
following the charge are sent instantly in pursuit. Under cover of
these troops order is restored in the charging line. If the captured
position is a part of a general line or is an advanced post, it should
be intrenched and occupied at once.

The exhaustion of officers and men must not cause the neglect of
measures to meet a counter-attack. (473)

=488. Steps to be taken when attack receives temporary setback.= If
the attack receives a temporary setback and it is intended to
strengthen and continue it, officers will make every effort to stop
the rearward movement and will reëstablish the firing line in a
covered position as close as possible to the enemy. (474)

=489. Steps to be taken if attack is abandoned.= If the attack must be
abandoned, the rearward movement should continue with promptness until
the troops reach a feature of the terrain that facilitates the task of
checking and reorganizing them. The point selected should be so far to
the rear as to prevent interference by the enemy before the troops are
ready to resist. The withdrawal of the attacking troops should be
covered by the artillery and by reserves, if any are available.

(See Night Operations, pars. 580-590.) (475)

PURSUIT

=490. Full fruits of victory reaped by pursuit.= To reap the full
fruits of victory a vigorous pursuit must be made. The natural
inclination to be satisfied with a successful charge must be overcome.
The enemy must be allowed no more time to reorganize than is
positively unavoidable. (476)

=491. Parts played in pursuit by reserve, artillery, and charging
troops.= The part of the reserve that is still formed or is best under
control is sent forward in pursuit and vigorously attacks the enemy's
main body or covering detachments wherever found.

The artillery delivers a heavy fire upon the retreating enemy; the
disordered attacking troops secure the position, promptly reform and
become a new reserve. (477)

=492. Strengthening of position captured, if section of general line.=
If the captured position is a section of the general line, the breach
should be heavily occupied, made wider, and strongly secured by
drawing on all reserves in the vicinity. (478)

=493. Pursuit by parallel roads.= After the pursuit from the immediate
battlefield, pursuit by parallel roads is especially effective where
large commands are concerned. (479)

=494. Artillery and cavalry in pursuit.= Artillery and cavalry are
very effective in pursuit. (480)

ATTACK OF FORTIFICATIONS

=495. Modifications of attack in case of fortifications.= Few
modifications enter into the problem of attacking fortifications. Such
as are to be considered relate chiefly to the greater time and labor
of advancing, the more frequent use of darkness and the use of hand
grenades to augment the fire. (481)

=496. Approaching charging point under cover of darkness.= If the
enemy is strongly fortified and time permits, it may be advisable to
wait and approach the charging point under cover of darkness. The
necessary reconnaissance and arrangements should be made before dark.
If the charge is not to be made at once, the troops intrench the
advanced position, using sand bags if necessary. Before daylight the
foreground should be cleared of obstacles. (482)

=497. Charging without fire preparation.= If the distance is short and
other conditions are favorable, the charge may be made without fire
preparation. If made, it should be launched with spirit and suddenness
at the break of day. (See Night Operations pars. 580-590.) (483)

=498. Advancing to charging point by sapping.= In siege operations
troops are usually advanced to the charging point by sapping. This
method, however, presupposes that an early victory is not necessary,
or that it is clearly inadvisable to attempt more direct methods.
(484)

HOLDING ATTACK

=499. Requisites of the holding attack.= The holding attack must be
vigorous enough to hold the enemy in position and must present a front
strong enough to conceal the secondary nature of the attack.

The holding attack need have comparatively little strength in rear,
but conceals the fact by a firing line not distinguishable from that
of a decisive attack. (485)

=500. Post and strength of supports and reserves.= Supports and
reserves are kept at short distances. Their strength is less if the
object is merely to hold the enemy fast than if the object is, in
addition, to compel him to use up reserves. (486)

=501. Holding attacks developing into decisive attacks.= Holding
attacks which may later develop into decisive attacks should be
correspondingly strong in rear. (487)

=502. Feint attacks.= All feint attacks should employ dense firing
lines. Their weakness is in rear and is concealed. (488)

DEFENSE

POSITIONS AND INTRENCHMENTS

=503. Requirements of a good defensive position.= The first
requirement of a good position is a clear field of fire and view to
the front and exposed flanks to a distance of 600 to 800 yards or
more. The length of front should be suitable to the size of the
command and the flanks should be secure. The position should have
lateral communication and cover for supports and reserves. It should
be one which the enemy can not avoid, but must attack or give up his
mission.

A position having all these advantages will rarely, if ever, be found.
The one should be taken which conforms closest to the description.
(489)

=504. Utilization of natural cover; construction of fieldworks and
obstacles.= The natural cover of the position should be fully
utilized. In addition, it should be strengthened by fieldworks and
obstacles.

The best protection is afforded by deep, narrow, inconspicuous
trenches. If little time is available, as much as practicable must be
done. That the fieldworks may not be needed should not cause their
construction to be omitted, and the fact that they have been
constructed should not influence the action of a commander, if
conditions are found to be other than expected. (490)

=505. Construction of communicating and cover trenches, head cover,
etc.= When time and troops are available the preparations include the
necessary communicating and cover trenches, head cover, bombproofs,
etc. The fire trenches should be well supplied with ammunition.

The supports are placed close at hand in cover trenches when natural
cover is not available. (491)

=506. Dummy trenches.= Dummy trenches frequently cause the hostile
artillery to waste time and ammunition and to divert its fire. (492)

=507. Location, extent, garrison, etc., of fieldworks.= The location,
extent, profile, garrison, etc., of fieldworks are matters to be
decided by the infantry commanders. Officers must be able to choose
ground and properly intrench it. (See "Field Fortifications," Chapter
XVI, Part III.) (493)

=508. Outlining trace of trenches in combat exercises.= In combat
exercises, when it is impracticable to construct the trenches
appropriate to the exercise, their trace may be outlined by bayonets,
sticks, or other markers, and the responsible officers required to
indicate the profile selected, method and time of construction,
garrisons, etc. (494)

DEPLOYMENT FOR DEFENSE

=509. Density of whole deployment.= The density of the whole
deployment depends upon the expected severity of the action, the
character of the enemy, the condition of the flanks, the field of
fire, the terrain, and the available artificial or natural protection
for the troops. (495)

=510. Density of firing line.= If exposed, the firing line should be
as dense in defense as in attack. If the firing line is well
intrenched and has a good field of fire, it may be made thinner.

Weaker supports are permissible. For the same number of troops the
front occupied on the defensive may therefore be longer than on the
offensive, the battalions placing more companies in the firing line.
(496)

=511. Strength in rear to be increased when change from defensive to
offensive is contemplated.= If it is intended only to delay the enemy,
a fairly strong deployment is sufficient, but if decisive results are
desired, a change to the offensive must be contemplated and the
corresponding strength in rear provided. This strength is in the
reserve, which should be as large as the demands of the firing line
and supports permit. Even in a passive defense the reserve should be
as strong as in the attack; unless the flanks are protected by other
means. (497)

=512. Post of supports; cover for supports.= Supports are posted as
close to the firing line as practicable and reinforce the latter
according to the principles explained in the attack. When natural
cover is not sufficient for the purpose, communicating and cover
trenches are constructed. If time does not permit their construction,
it is better to begin the action with a very dense firing line and no
immediate supports than to have supports greatly exposed in rear.
(498)

=513. Post of reserve.= The reserve should be posted so as to be
entirely free to act as a whole, according to the developments. The
distance from firing line to reserve is generally greater than in the
attack. By reason of such a location the reserve is best able to meet
a hostile enveloping attack; it has a better position from which to
make a counter attack; it is in a better position to cover a
withdrawal and permit an orderly retreat.

The distance from firing line to reserve increases with the size of
the reserve. (499)

=514. Post of reserve when situation is no longer in doubt.= When the
situation is no longer in doubt, the reserve should be held in rear of
the flank which is most in danger or offers the best opportunity for
counter attack. Usually the same flank best suits both purposes. (500)

=515. Detaching part of reserve to protect opposite flank.= In
exceptional cases, on broad fronts, it may be necessary to detach a
part of the reserve to protect the opposite flank. This detachment
should be the smallest consistent with its purely protective mission.
(501)

=516. Assignment of front to units.= The commander assigns to
subordinates the front to be occupied by them. These, in turn,
subdivide the front among their next lower units in the firing line.
(502)

=517. Division of extended position into sections.= An extended
position is so divided into sections that each has, if practicable, a
field of fire naturally made distinct by the terrain.

Unfavorable and unimportant ground will ordinarily cause gaps to exist
in the line. (503)

=518. Size of units occupying sections; battalions to be kept intact.=
The size of the unit occupying each section depends upon the latter's
natural strength, front, and importance. If practicable, battalions
should be kept intact and assigned as units to sections or parts of
sections. (504)

=519. Adjoining sections or machine guns to cover dead space.= Where
important dead space lies in front of one section, an adjoining
section should be instructed to cover it with fire when necessary, or
machine guns should be concealed for the like purpose. (505)

=520. Advanced posts and other dispersion to be avoided.= Advanced
posts, or any other form of unnecessary dispersion, should be avoided.
(506)

=521. Position itself not fully occupied until infantry attack
begins.= Unless the difficulty of moving the troops into the position
be great, most of the troops of the firing line are held in rear of it
until the infantry attack begins. The position itself is occupied by a
small garrison only, with the necessary outguards or patrols in front.
(507)

=522. Fire alone unable to stop attack.= Fire alone can not be
depended upon to stop the attack. The troops must be determined to
resort to the bayonet, if necessary. (508)

=523. Steps to be taken if night attack is expected.= If a night
attack or close approach by the enemy is expected, troops in a
prepared position should strengthen the outguards and firing line and
construct as numerous and effective obstacles as possible. Supports
and local reserves should move close to the firing line and should,
with the firing line, keep bayonets fixed. If practicable, the front
should be illuminated, preferably from the flanks of the section.
(509)

=524. Short range fire and bayonet in night attack.= Only short range
fire is of any value in resisting night attacks. The bayonet is the
chief reliance. (See Night Operations pars. 580-590.) (510)

COUNTER ATTACK

=525. Passive defense; only offensive wins.= The passive defense
should be assumed only when circumstances force it. Only the offensive
wins. (511)

=526. Active defense seeks favorable decision; counter attack
necessary.= An active defense seeks a favorable decision. A favorable
decision can not be expected without counter attack. (512)

=527. Protection of flanks by natural obstacles necessary in passive
defense position.= A passive defense in a position whose flanks are
not protected by natural obstacles is generally out of the question.
(513)

=528. Post of troops for counter attack.= Where the defense is assumed
with a view to making a counter attack, the troops for the counter
attack should be held in reserve until the time arrives for such
attack. The defensive line should be held by as few troops as possible
in order that the force for the offensive may be as large as possible.

The force for the counter attack should be held echeloned in rear of
the flank which offers it the greatest advantage for the proposed
attack. (514)

=529. Manner of making counter attack.= The counter attack should be
made vigorously and at the proper time. It will usually be made:

By launching the reserve against the enemy's flank when his attack is
in full progress. This is the most effective form of counter attack.

Straight to the front by the firing line and supports after repulsing
the enemy's attack and demoralizing him with pursuing fire.

Or, by the troops in rear of the firing line when the enemy has
reached the defensive position and is in disorder. (515)

=530. Minor counter attacks.= Minor counter attacks are sometimes
necessary in order to drive the enemy from important positions gained
by him. (516)

DELAYING ACTION

=531. The important considerations in a delaying action.= When a
position is taken merely to delay the enemy and to withdraw before
becoming closely engaged, the important considerations are:

The enemy should be forced to deploy early. The field of fire should
therefore be good at distances from 500 to 1,200 yards or more; a good
field of fire at close range is not necessary.

The ground in rear of the position should favor the withdrawal of the
firing line by screening the troops from the enemy's view and fire as
soon as the position is vacated. (517)

=532. Thin firing line answers purpose; purposes of supports and
reserve.= A thin firing line using much ammunition will generally
answer the purpose. Supports are needed chiefly to protect the flanks.

The reserve should be posted well in rear to assist in the withdrawal
of the firing line. (518)

=533. Value of artillery.= Artillery is especially valuable to a
delaying force. (519)

MEETING ENGAGEMENTS

=534. Characteristics of meeting engagements.= Meeting engagements are
characterized by the necessity for hasty reconnaissance, or the almost
total absence of reconnaissance; by the necessity for rapid
deployment, frequently under fire; and usually by the absence of
trenches or other artificial cover. These conditions give further
advantages to the offensive. (520)

=535. General action on meeting enemy.= The whole situation will
usually indicate beforehand the proper general action to be taken on
meeting the enemy. (521)

=536. Meagerness of information; qualities of commander to be relied
upon.= Little fresh information can be expected. The boldness,
initiative, and determination of the commander must be relied upon.
(522)

=537. Meeting engagement affords ideal opportunity to certain
commanders.= A meeting engagement affords an ideal opportunity to the
commander who has intuition and quick decision and who is willing to
take long chances. His opponent is likely to be overcautious. (523)

=538. The mission determines method of attack.= The amount of
information that the commander is warranted in awaiting before taking
final action depends entirely upon his mission. One situation may
demand a blind attack; another may demand rapid, partial deployment
for attack, but careful and time-consuming reconnaissance before the
attack is launched. (524)

=539. Advantage accrues to side deploying the faster.= A great
advantage accrues to the side which can deploy the faster. The
advantage of a close-order formation, favoring rapid deployment,
becomes more pronounced with the size of the force. (525)

=540. Advantages of first troops to deploy.= The first troops to
deploy will be able to attack with longer firing lines and weaker
supports than are required in the ordinary case. But if the enemy
succeeds in deploying a strong defensive line, the attack must be
strengthened accordingly before it is wasted. (526)

=541. Things to be done by the leading troops.= If the situation
warrants the advance, the leading troops seek to deploy faster than
the enemy, to reach his flanks, check his deployment, and get
information. In any event, they seek to cover the deployment of their
own troops in rear--especially the artillery--and to seize important
ground. (527)

=542. Post of commander of long column meeting enemy; function of
advance guard; action of column.= The commander of a long column which
meets the enemy should be with the advance guard to receive
information promptly and to reconnoiter. If he decides to fight, the
advance guard must hold the enemy while the commander formulates a
plan of action, issues the necessary orders, and deploys the main
body. Meantime, the column should be closing up, either in mass or to
form line of columns, so that the deployment, when determined upon,
may be made more promptly. (528)

=543. Action of advance guard prior to receipt of orders.= The action
of the advance guard, prior to the receipt of orders, depends upon the
situation. Whether to attack determinedly or only as a feint, or to
assume the defensive, depends upon the strength of the advance guard,
the terrain, the character of the hostile force encountered, and the
mission and intentions of the commander of the whole. (529)

=544. Main body should be used as a whole and not put into action
piecemeal.= If the enemy is beforehand or more aggressive, or if the
advance guard is too weak, it may be necessary to put elements of the
main body into action as fast as they arrive, in order to check him.
This method should be avoided; it prevents the formation and execution
of a definite plan and compels piecemeal action. The best results are
obtained when the main body is used as a whole. (530)

WITHDRAWAL FROM ACTION

=545. Withdrawal generally effected at heavy cost; rear guard and
distance to be placed between enemy and defeated troops.= The
withdrawal of a defeated force can generally be effected only at a
heavy cost. When it is no longer possible to give the action a
favorable turn and the necessity for withdrawal arises, every effort
must be made to place distance and a rear guard between the enemy and
the defeated troops. (531)

=546. Use of artillery, machine guns, and cavalry.= Artillery gives
especially valuable assistance in the withdrawal. The long-range fire
of machine guns should also be employed. Cavalry assists the
withdrawal by charging the pursuing troops or by taking flank
positions and using fire action. (532)

=547. Use of reserve to check the pursuit.= If an intact reserve
remains, it should be placed in a covering position, preferably on a
flank, to check the pursuit and thus enable the defeated troops to
withdraw beyond reach of hostile fire.

The covering position of the reserve should be at some distance from
the main action, but close enough to bring the withdrawing troops
quickly under the protection of its fire. It should have a good field
of fire at effective and long ranges and should facilitate its own
safe and timely withdrawal. (533)

=548. Part of line to be withdrawn first; retreating troops to be
gotten under control as soon as possible.= If the general line is
divided, by terrain or by organization, into two or more parts, the
firing line of the part in the least danger from pursuit should be
withdrawn first. A continuous firing line, whose parts are dependent
upon one another for fire support, should be withdrawn as a whole,
retiring by echelon at the beginning of the withdrawal. Every effort
must be made to restore the organizations, regain control, and form
column of march as soon as the troops are beyond the reach of hostile
fire.

As fast as possible without delaying the march, companies, and the
larger units should be reformed, so that the command will again be
well in hand. (534)

=549. Action taken by commander; selection of rendezvous point.= The
commander of the whole, having given orders for withdrawal, should go
to the rear, select a rendezvous point, and devote himself to the
reorganization of his command.

The rendezvous point is selected with regard to the natural channels
of movement approximately straight to the rear. It should be distant
from the battlefield and should facilitate the gathering and
protection of the command. (535)

SUMMARY

=550.= 1. Avoid combats that offer no chance of victory or other
valuable results.

2. Make every effort for the success of the general plan and avoid
spectacular plays that have no bearing on the general result.

3. Have a definite plan and carry it out vigorously. Do not vacillate.

4. Do not attempt complicated maneuvers.

5. Keep the command in hand; avoid undue extension and dispersion.

6. Study the ground and direct the advance in such a way as to take
advantage of all available cover and thereby diminish losses.

7. Never deploy until the purpose and the proper direction are known.

8. Deploy enough men for the immediate task in hand; hold out the rest
and avoid undue haste in committing them to the action.

9. Flanks must be protected either by reserves, fortifications, or the
terrain.

10. In a decisive action, gain and keep fire superiority.

11. Keep up reconnaissance.

12. Use the reserve, but not until needed or a very favorable
opportunity for its use presents itself. Keep some reserve as long as
practicable.

13. Do not hesitate to sacrifice the command if the result is worth
the cost.

14. Spare the command all unnecessary hardship and exertion. (536)

MACHINE GUNS

=551. Machine guns are weapons of emergency.= Machine guns must be
considered as weapons of emergency. Their effectiveness combined with
their mobility renders them of great value at critical, though
infrequent, periods of an engagement. (537)

=552. Machine guns to be used for short periods, when opportunities
present themselves.= When operating against infantry only, they can be
used to a great extent throughout the combat as circumstances may
indicate, but they are quickly rendered powerless by efficient field
artillery and will promptly draw artillery fire whenever they open.
Hence their use in engagements between large commands must be for
short periods and at times when their great effectiveness will be most
valuable. (538)

=553. Machine guns attached to advance guard; use in meeting
engagements.= Machine guns should be attached to the advance guard. In
meeting engagements they will be of great value in assisting their own
advance, or in checking the advance of the enemy, and will have
considerable time to operate before hostile artillery fire can silence
them.

Care must be taken not to leave them too long in action. (539)

=554. Use of machine guns with rear guard.= They are valuable to a
rear guard which seeks to check a vigorous pursuit or to gain time.
(540)

=555. Machine guns in attack; fire of position.= In attack, if fire of
position is practicable, they are of great value. In this case fire
should not be opened by the machine guns until the attack is well
advanced. At a critical period in the attack, such fire, if suddenly
and unexpectedly opened, will greatly assist the advancing line. The
fire must be as heavy as possible and must be continued until masked
by friendly troops or until the hostile artillery finds the machine
guns. (541)

=556. Machine guns in defense.= In the defense, machine guns should be
used in the same general manner as described above for the attack.
Concealment and patient waiting for critical moments and exceptional
opportunities are the special characteristics of the machine-gun
service in decisive actions. (542)

=557. Machine guns as part of reserve; use in covering withdrawal.= As
part of the reserve, machine guns have special importance. If they are
with the troops told off to protect the flanks, and if they are well
placed, they will often produce decisive results against a hostile
turning movement. They are especially qualified to cover a withdrawal
or make a captured position secure. (543)

=558. Machine guns not to form part of firing line of attack.= Machine
guns should not be assigned to the firing line of an attack. They
should be so placed that fire directed upon them is not likely to fall
upon the firing line. (544)

=559. Effectiveness of machine guns against skirmish line, except when
lying down or crawling.= A skirmish line can not advance by walking or
running when hostile machine guns have the correct range and are ready
to fire. Machine-gun fire is not specially effective against troops
lying on the ground or crawling. (545)

=560. Silencing of machine guns by infantry.= When opposed by machine
guns without artillery to destroy them, infantry itself must silence
them before it can advance.

An infantry command that must depend upon itself for protection
against machine guns should concentrate a large number of rifles on
each gun in turn and until it has silenced it. (546)

_In addition to the above, which the Infantry Drill Regulations gives
on the subject of machine guns, the following, based on the use of
machine guns in the European War, is given:_

=561. Machine guns essentially automatic rifles.= They are essentially
automatic rifles, designed to fire the ordinary rifle cartridge and
capable of delivering a stream of small bullets at a rate of as high
as 600 per minute. Experience in the European war has determined that
the rate of 400 shots per minute is the desirable maximum. Their
ranges are the same as for the rifle. The fire of a machine gun has
been estimated as equal to that of 30 men.

=562. Mounts.= Machine guns are usually mounted on tripods or wheels.
The weight of certain types is such that they can readily be carried
by the soldier from one point to another.

=563. Methods of transportation.= While machine guns are usually
designed to be carried or packed, they are easily adapted to various
methods of transportation. In the European war we find them mounted on
sleds during the winter campaign; on specially designed motor cycles
with side cars and accompanied by other motor cycles carrying
ammunition; on wheels; on wagons; on armored automobiles; aeroplanes;
and finally in the powerful "tanks" of the English.

=564. Concealment.= Machine guns while usually considered as _weapons
of emergency_ have been used in attack and defense in the European war
in all stages. Their mobility and deadly effect have made them of
great value. Once their position is discovered they are quickly put
out of action by artillery. Owing to this fact the armies in Europe
have used alternative positions and have used every means to conceal
the guns. Hedges, walls, and pits are used and every effort is used to
conceal the flame of discharge. This is usually accomplished by
keeping the muzzle well in rear of its cover or loop hole. Machine
guns almost invariably betray their positions as soon as they enter
into action. The present tendency seems to be to hold them concealed
and place them into position in the trenches or emplacements at the
moment of combat.

Extraordinary means have been resorted to in hiding the guns until
they are needed. In the German line, dugouts underground were
constructed to conceal the machine guns and crews. Often they
permitted the first line of the attack to pass over them and then
appeared in rear and opened a deadly fire on the backs of the troops.

=565. Use in villages.= In villages, machine guns were used with
terrible effect, firing from cellars or windows. The only successful
method of destroying them was with hand grenades and even this was
costly.

=566. Location on the defense.= On the _defense_ machine guns should
be mounted in salients and at points where cross fire can be obtained.
This makes it more difficult for the enemy to locate the guns. Frontal
fire is not so often successful.

=567. Location in attack.= In the _attack_ it is accepted that machine
guns must cover the Infantry at short and long ranges while other
machine guns must accompany the attacking troops to hold the positions
or trenches gained.

The second or third line would seem to be the best position for
machine guns when accompanying troops.

[Illustration: Machine Gun Emplacement: Section aa]

[Illustration: Machine Gun Emplacement: Plan with Cover Removed]

=568. Economy of men.= Owing to its rapid and effective fire, and the
comparative ease with which it can be concealed, the machine gun
permits a great economy of men on a front and the concentrating of the
forces thus freed for use in other parts of the field. This was done
on a large scale on the Russian front by the Germans in 1915. They
constructed miles of wire entanglements in front of positions occupied
with an enormous number of machine guns and comparatively few men. The
main forces were thus free to be transported wherever danger
threatened. In this manner the Germans replaced men by machine guns
and wire and were able to cope successfully with the immense Russian
Armies. The above plate shows a typical machine gun emplacement,
constructed in the field. Many elaborate emplacements have been
constructed in the European war, using steel and concrete, but for a
hasty cover in the field the simple emplacement shown in the figure is
recommended.

(NOTE.--For a more detailed study of machine guns, see Subject XI,
Machine Guns in Action, School of Musketry, Fort Sill, Oklahoma,
and Combined Cavalry and Infantry Drill Regulations for Automatic
Machine Rifle, cal. 30, 1909, War Department, 1915.)

AMMUNITION SUPPLY

=569. Method of supplying ammunition to combat train.= The method of
supply of ammunition to the combat trains is explained in Field
Service Regulations. (547)

=570. Combat train and the major's responsibility for its proper use;
a rendezvous for each brigade.= The combat train is the immediate
reserve supply of the battalion, and the major is responsible for its
proper use. He will take measures to insure the maintenance of the
prescribed allowance at all times.

In the absence of instructions, he will cause the train to march
immediately in rear of his battalion, and, upon separating from it to
enter an engagement, will cause the ammunition therein to be issued.
When emptied, he will direct that the wagons proceed to the proper
rendezvous to be refilled. Ordinarily a rendezvous is appointed for
each brigade and the necessary number of wagons sent forward to it
from the ammunition column. (548)

=571. Destination of combat wagons when refilled.= When refilled, the
combat wagons will rejoin their battalions, or, if the latter be
engaged, will join or establish communication with the regimental
reserve. (549)

=572. Company commanders' responsibility for ammunition in belts;
ammunition of dead and wounded.= Company commanders are responsible
that the belts of the men in their companies are kept filled at all
times, except when the ammunition is being expended in action. In the
firing line the ammunition of the dead and wounded should be secured
whenever practicable. (550)

=573. Ammunition in bandoleers and 30 rounds in right pocket section.=
Ammunition in the bandoleers will ordinarily be expended first. Thirty
rounds in the right pocket section of the belt will be held as a
reserve, to be expended only when ordered by an officer. (551)

=574. Ammunition sent forward with reënforcements; men not to be sent
back from firing line for ammunition.= When necessary to resupply the
firing line, ammunition will be sent forward with reënforcements,
generally from the regimental reserve. (552)

Men will never be sent back from the firing line for ammunition. Men
sent forward with ammunition remain with the firing line.

=575. Replenishment of ammunition after engagement.= As soon as
possible after an engagement the belts of the men and the combat
wagons are resupplied to their normal capacities. Ammunition which can
not be reloaded on combat wagons will be piled up in a convenient
place and left under guard. (553)

MOUNTED SCOUTS

=576. Scouts to be trained in patrolling and reconnaissance; their
use.= The mounted scouts should be thoroughly trained in patrolling
and reconnaissance. They are used for communication with neighboring
troops, for patrolling off the route of march, for march outposts,
outpost patrols, combat patrols, reconnaissance ahead of columns, etc.
Their further use is, in general, confined to escort and messenger
duty. They should be freely used for all these purposes, but for these
purposes only. (554)

=577. Use of mounted scouts for reconnoitering.= When infantry is
acting alone, or when the cavalry of a mixed command has been sent to
a distance, the mounted scouts are of special importance to covering
detachments and should be used to make the reconnaissance which would
otherwise fall to cavalry. (555)

=578. Scouts to be used in reconnaissance in preference to other
troops; use for dismounted patrolling.= In reconnaissance, scouts
should be used in preference to other troops as much as possible. When
not needed for mounted duty, they should be employed for necessary
dismounted patrolling. (556)

=579. Training of battalion staff officers in patrolling.= Battalion
staff officers should be specially trained in patrolling and
reconnaissance work in order that they may be available when a mounted
officer's patrol is required. (557)

NIGHT OPERATIONS

=580. Purposes of night operations.= By employing night operations
troops make use of the cover of darkness to minimize losses from
hostile fire or to escape observation. Night operations may also be
necessary for the purpose of gaining time. Control is difficult and
confusion is frequently unavoidable.

It may be necessary to take advantage of darkness in order to assault
from a point gained during the day, or to approach a point from which
a daylight assault is to be made, or to effect both the approach and
the assault. (558)

=581. Practice in offensive and defensive operations; simple
formations.= Offensive and defensive night operations should be
practiced frequently in order that troops may learn to cover ground in
the dark and arrive at a destination quietly and in good order, and
in order to train officers in the necessary preparation and
reconnaissance.

Only simple and well-appointed formations should be employed.

Troops should be thoroughly trained in the necessary details--e. g.,
night patrolling, night marching, and communication at night. (559)

=582. Ground to be studied by day and night, cleared of hostile
detachments, etc.; preparation of orders; distinctive badges.= The
ground to be traversed should be studied by daylight and, if
practicable, at night. It should be cleared of hostile detachments
before dark, and, if practicable, should be occupied by covering
troops.

Orders must be formulated with great care and clearness. Each unit
must be given a definite objective and direction, and care must be
exercised to avoid collision between units.

Whenever contact with the enemy is anticipated, a distinctive badge
should be worn by all. (560)

=583. Secrecy of preparations; unfriendly guides; fire action to be
avoided, relying upon bayonet.= Preparations must be made with
secrecy. When the movement is started, and not until then, the
officers and men should be acquainted with the general design, the
composition of the whole force, and should be given such additional
information as will insure coöperation and eliminate mistakes.

During the movement every precaution must be taken to keep secret the
fact that troops are abroad.

Unfriendly guides must frequently be impressed. These should be
secured against escape, outcry, or deception.

Fire action should be avoided in offensive operations. In general,
pieces should not be loaded. Men must be trained to rely upon the
bayonet and to use it aggressively. (561)

=584. Night marches; advance and rear guards.= Long night marches
should be made only over well-defined routes. March discipline must be
rigidly enforced. The troops should be marched in as compact a
formation as practicable, with the usual covering detachments. Advance
and rear guard distances should be greatly reduced. They are shortest
when the mission is an offensive one. The connecting files are
numerous. (562)

=585. Night advance followed by attack by day.= A night advance made
with a view to making an attack by day usually terminates with the
hasty construction of intrenchments in the dark. Such an advance
should be timed so as to allow an hour or more of darkness for
intrenching.

An advance that is to terminate in an assault at the break of day
should be timed so that the troops will not arrive long before the
assault is to be made; otherwise, the advantage of partial surprise
will be lost, and the enemy will be allowed to reënforce the
threatened point. (563)

=586. Night attacks, when employed; they require trained troops;
compact formations; value of bayonet.= The night attack is ordinarily
confined to small forces, or to minor engagements in a general battle,
or to seizure of positions occupied by covering or advanced
detachments. Decisive results are not often obtained.

Poorly disciplined and untrained troops are unfit for night attacks or
for night operations demanding the exercise of skill and care.

Troops attacking at night can advance close to the enemy in compact
formations and without suffering loss from hostile artillery or
infantry fire. The defender is ignorant of the strength or direction
of the attack.

A force which makes a vigorous bayonet charge in the dark will often
throw a much larger force into disorder. (564)

=587. Reconnaissance; attack to be a surprise.= Reconnaissance should
be made to ascertain the position and strength of the enemy and to
study the terrain to be traversed. Officers who are to participate in
the attack should conduct this reconnaissance. Reconnaissance at night
is especially valuable. Features that are distinguishable at night
should be carefully noted, and their distances from the enemy, from
the starting point of the troops, and from other important points
should be made known.

Preparations should have in view as complete a surprise as possible.
An attack once begun must be carried to its conclusion, even if the
surprise is not as complete as was planned or anticipated. (565)

=588. Time of making attack depends upon object sought.= The time of
night at which the attack should be made depends upon the object
sought. If a decisive attack is intended, it will generally yield the
best results if made just before daylight. If the object is merely to
gain an intrenched position for further operations, an earlier hour is
necessary in order that the position gained may be intrenched under
cover of darkness. (566)

=589. Formation; use of bayonet; preparations to repel counter
attack.= The formation for attack must be simple. It should be
carefully effected and the troops verified at a safe distance from the
enemy. The attacking troops should be formed in compact lines and with
strong supports at short distances. The reserve should be far enough
in rear to avoid being drawn into the action until the commander so
desires. Bayonets are fixed, pieces are not loaded.

Darkness causes fire to be wild and ineffective. The attacking troops
should march steadily on the enemy without firing, but should be
prepared and determined to fight vigorously with the bayonet.

In advancing to the attack the aim should be to get as close as
possible to the enemy before being discovered, then trust to the
bayonet.

If the assault is successful, preparations must be made at once to
repel a counter attack. (567)

=590. Measures taken by defense to resist night attacks.= On the
defense, preparations to resist night attacks should be made by
daylight whenever such attacks are to be feared.

Obstacles placed in front of a defensive position are especially
valuable to the defense at night. Many forms of obstacles which would
give an attacker little concern in the daytime become serious
hindrances at night.

After dark the foreground should be illuminated whenever practicable
and strong patrols should be pushed to the front.

When it is learned that the enemy is approaching, the trenches are
filled and the supports moved close to the firing line.

Supports fix bayonets, but do not load. Whenever practicable and
necessary, they should be used for counter attacks, preferably against
a hostile flank.

The defender should open fire as soon as results may be expected. This
fire may avert or postpone the bayonet combat, and it warns all
supporting troops. It is not likely that fire alone can stop the
attack. The defender must be resolved to fight with the bayonet.

Ordinarily fire will not be effective at ranges exceeding 50 yards.

A white rag around the muzzle of the rifle will assist in sighting the
piece when the front sight is not visible.

See pars. 464, 496, 497, 523, 524. (568)

INFANTRY AGAINST CAVALRY

=591. Cavalry charge against infantry usually futile.= A cavalry
charge can accomplish little against infantry, even in inferior
numbers, unless the latter are surprised, become panic-stricken, run
away, or can not use their rifles. (569)

=592. Measures to check charges from front and flank.= A charge from
the front is easily checked by a well directed and sustained fire.

If the charge is directed against the flank of the firing line, the
supports, reserves, or machine guns should stop it. If this
disposition is impracticable, part of the line must meet the charge by
a timely change of front. If the flank company, or companies, in the
firing line execute =platoons right=, the successive firing lines can
ordinarily break a charge against the flank. If the cavalry line
passes through the firing line, the latter will be little damaged if
the men retain their presence of mind. They should be on the watch for
succeeding cavalry lines and leave those that have passed through to
friendly troops in rear. (570)

=593. Standing position best to meet charge.= Men standing are in the
best position to meet a charge, but other considerations may compel
them to meet it lying prone. (571)

=594. Rifle fire main dependence of infantry.= In a mêlée, the
infantryman with his bayonet has at least an even chance with the
cavalryman, but the main dependence of infantry is rifle fire. Any
formation is suitable that permits the free use of the necessary
number of rifles.

Ordinarily there will be no time to change or set sights. Fire at will
at battle sight should be used, whatever the range may be. It will
usually be unwise to open fire at long ranges. (572)

=595. Meeting of cavalry charge by infantry in column.= An infantry
column that encounters cavalry should deploy at once. If attacked from
the head or rear of the column, and if time is pressing, it may form a
succession of skirmish lines. Infantry, by deploying 50 or 100 yards
in rear of an obstacle, may check cavalry and hold it under fire
beyond effective pistol range.

In any situation, to try to escape the issue by running is the worst
and most dangerous course the infantry can adopt. (573)

=596. Infantry attacking dismounted cavalry.= In attacking dismounted
cavalry, infantry should close rapidly and endeavor to prevent
remounting. Infantry which adopts this course will not be seriously
checked by delaying cavalry.

Every effort should be made to locate and open fire on the led horses.
(574)

INFANTRY AGAINST ARTILLERY

=597. Frontal attack against artillery usually futile; use of machine
guns.= A frontal attack against artillery has little chance of
succeeding unless it can be started from cover at comparatively short
range. Beyond short range, the frontal fire of infantry has little
effect against the artillery personnel because of their protective
shields.

Machine guns, because their cone of fire is more compact, will have
greater effect, but on the other hand they will have fewer
opportunities, and they are limited to fire attack only.

As a rule, one's own artillery is the best weapon against hostile
artillery. (575)

=598. Flank attack against artillery effective.= Artillery attacked in
flank by infantry can be severely damaged. Oblique or flank fire will
begin to have decisive effect when delivered at effective range from a
point to one side of the artillery's line of fire and distant from it
by about half the range. Artillery is better protected on the side of
the caisson. (576)

=599. Action against guns out of ammunition.= Guns out of ammunition,
but otherwise secure against infantry attack, may be immobilized by
fire which will prevent their withdrawal, or by locating and driving
off their limbers. Or they may be kept out of action by fire which
will prevent the receipt of ammunition. (577)

=600. Action against artillery limbering or coming into action; wheel
horses best targets.= Artillery when limbered is helpless against
infantry fire. If caught at effective range while coming into action
or while limbering, artillery can be severely punished by infantry
fire.

In attacking artillery that is trying to escape, the wheel horses are
the best targets. (578)

ARTILLERY SUPPORTS

=601. Purpose of artillery support, usually consisting of infantry.=
The purpose of the artillery support is to guard the artillery against
surprise or attack.

Artillery on the march or in action is ordinarily so placed as to be
amply protected by the infantry. Infantry always protects artillery in
its neighborhood. (579)

=602. Detailing of supports.= The detail of a support is not necessary
except when the artillery is separated from the main body or occupies
a position in which its flanks are not protected.

The detail of a special support will be avoided whenever possible.
(580.)

=603. Formation of support on march.= The formation of an artillery
support depends upon circumstances. On the march it may often be
necessary to provide advance, flank, and rear protection. The country
must be thoroughly reconnoitered by patrols within long rifle range.
(581)

=604. Formation and location of support in action.= In action, the
formation and location of the support must be such as to gain and give
timely information of the enemy's approach and to offer actual
resistance to the enemy beyond effective rifle range of the
artillery's flanks. It should not be close enough to the artillery to
suffer from fire directed at the artillery. In most cases a position
somewhat to the flank and rear best fulfills these conditions. (582)

=605. Support charged only with protection of artillery.= The support
commander is charged only with the protection of the artillery. The
tactical employment of each arm rests with its commander. The two
should coöperate. (583)

MINOR WARFARE

=606. What minor warfare embraces; regular operations.= Minor warfare
embraces both regular and irregular operations.

Regular operations consist of minor actions involving small bodies of
trained and organized troops on both sides.

The tactics employed are in general those prescribed for the smaller
units. (596)

=607. Irregular operations.= Irregular operations consist of actions
against unorganized or partially organized forces, acting independent
or semi independent bodies. Such bodies have little or only crude
training and are under nominal and loose leadership and control. They
assemble, roam about, and disperse at will. They endeavor to win by
stealth or by force of superior numbers, employing ambuscades, sudden
dashes or rushes, and hand-to-hand fighting. (597)

Troops operating against such an enemy usually do so in small units,
such as platoons, detachments, or companies, and the tactics employed
must be adapted to meet the requirements of the situation. Frequently
the enemy's own methods may be employed to advantage.

In general, such operations should not be undertaken hastily; every
preparation should be made to strike suddenly and to inflict the
maximum punishment.

=608. March and bivouac formations to admit of rapid action in any
direction.= In general, the service of information will be
insufficient; adequate reconnaissance will rarely be practicable.
March and bivouac formations must be such as to admit of rapid
deployment and fire action in any direction. (598)

=609. Formation in open country.= In the open country, where surprise
is not probable, troops may be marched in column of squads preceded,
within sight, by a squad as an advance party. (599)

=610. Formation in close country.= In close country, where surprise is
possible, the troops must be held in a close formation. The use of
flank patrols becomes difficult. Occasionally, an advance party--never
less than a squad--may be sent out. In general, however, such a party
accomplishes little, since an enemy intent on surprise will permit it
to pass unmolested and will fall upon the main body.

Under such conditions, especially when the road or trail is narrow,
the column of twos or files is a convenient formation, the officers
placing themselves in the column so as to divide it into nearly equal
parts. If rushed from a flank, such a column will be in readiness to
face and fire toward either or both flanks, the ranks being back to
back; if rushed from the front, the head of the column may be
deployed, the rest of the column closing up to support it and to
protect its flanks and rear. In any event, the men should be taught to
take some form of a closed back to back formation. (600)

=611. Dividing column on march into two or more separate detachments.=
The column may often be broken into two or more approximately equal
detachments separated on the march by distances of 50 to 100 yards. As
a rule the detachments should not consist of less than 25 men each.
With this arrangement of the column, it will rarely be possible for an
enemy to close simultaneously with all of the detachments, one or more
being left unengaged and under control to support those engaged or to
inflict severe punishment upon the enemy when he is repulsed. (601)

=612. Selection of site for camp or bivouac; protection.= The site for
camp or bivouac should be selected with special reference to
economical and effective protection against surprise. Double sentinels
are posted on the avenues of approach, and the troops sleep in
readiness for instant action. When practicable, troops should be
instructed in advance as to what they are to do in case of attack at
night. (602)

=613. Night operations frequently advisable.= Night operations are
frequently advisable. With the small forces employed, control is not
difficult. Irregular troops rarely provide proper camp protection, and
they may frequently be surprised and severely punished by a properly
conducted night march and attack. (603)

CEREMONIES

General Rules for Ceremonies

=614. Order in which troops are arranged for ceremonies; commander
faces command; subordinates face to front.= The order in which the
troops of the various arms are arranged for ceremonies is prescribed
by Army Regulations.

When forming for ceremonies the companies of the battalion and the
battalions of the regiment are posted from right to left in line and
from head to rear in column, in the order of rank of their respective
commanders present in the formation, the senior on the right or at the
head.

The commander faces the command; subordinate commanders face to the
front. (708)

=615. Saluting by lieutenant colonel and staffs.= At the command
present arms, given by the colonel, the lieutenant colonel, and the
colonel's staff salute; the major's staff salute at the major's
command. Each staff returns to the carry or order when the command
=order arms= is given by its chief. (709)

=616. Formation of companies, battalion and regiment.= At the
=assembly= for a ceremony companies are formed on their own parades
and informally inspected, as prescribed in par. 646.

At =adjutant's call=, except for ceremonies involving a single
battalion, each battalion is formed on its own parade, reports are
received, and the battalion presented to the major, as laid down in
par. 308. At the second sounding of adjutant's call the regiment is
formed. (710)

REVIEWS

General Rules

=617. Indication of points where column changes direction; flank to
pass 12 paces from reviewing officer; post of reviewing officer and
others.= The adjutant posts men or otherwise marks the points where
the column changes direction in such manner that its flank in passing
will be about 12 paces from the reviewing officer.

The post of the reviewing officer, usually opposite the center of the
line, is indicated by a marker.

Officers of the same or higher grade, and distinguished personages
invited to accompany the reviewing officer, place themselves on his
left; their staffs and orderlies place themselves respectively on the
left of the staff and orderlies of the reviewing officer; all others
who accompany the reviewing officer place themselves on the left of
his staff, their orderlies in rear. A staff officer is designated to
escort distinguished personages and to indicate to them their proper
positions, as prescribed in par. 73. (711)

=618. Riding around the troops; saluting the color; reviewing officer
returns only salute of commanding officer of troops.= While riding
around the troops, the reviewing officer may direct his staff, flag
and orderlies to remain at the post of the reviewing officer, or that
only his personal staff and flag shall accompany him; in either case
the commanding officer alone accompanies the reviewing officer. If the
reviewing officer is accompanied by his entire staff, the staff
officers of the commander place themselves on the right of the staff
of the reviewing officer.

The reviewing officer and others at the reviewing stand salute the
color as it passes; when passing around the troops, the reviewing
officer and those accompanying him salute the color when passing in
front of it.

The reviewing officer returns the salute of the commanding officer of
the troops only. Those who accompany the reviewing officer do not
salute. (712)

=619. Saluting by staffs.= In passing in review, each staff salutes
with its commander. (713)

=620. Turning out of column by commanding officer of troops and
staff.= After saluting the reviewing officer, the commanding officer
of the troops turns out of the column, takes post on the right of the
reviewing officer, and returns saber; the members of his staff
accompanying him take post on the right of the reviewing officer's
staff and return saber. When the rear element of his command has
passed, without changing his position, the commanding officer of the
troops salutes the reviewing officer; he and the members of his staff
accompanying him then draw saber and rejoin his command. The
commanding officer of the troops and the members of his staff are the
only ones who turn out of the column. (714)

=621. Turning out of column by commanding officer of troops and
staff.= If the person reviewing the command is not mounted, the
commanding officer and his staff on turning out of the column after
passing the reviewing officer dismount preparatory to taking post. In
such case, the salute of the commanding officer, prior to rejoining
his command, is made with the hand before remounting. (715)

=622. Salute by regimental color.= When the rank of the reviewing
officer entitles him to the honor, each regimental color salutes at
the command =present arms=, given or repeated by the major of the
battalion with which it is posted; and again in passing in review.
(716)

=623. The band.= The band of an organization plays while the reviewing
officer is passing in front of and in rear of the organization.

Each band, immediately after passing the reviewing officer, turns out
of the column, takes post in front of and facing him, continues to
play until its regiment has passed, then ceases playing and follows in
rear of its regiment; the band of the following regiment commences to
play as soon as the preceding band has ceased.

While marching in review but one band in each brigade plays at a time,
and but one band at a time when within 100 paces of the reviewing
officer. (717)

=624. The national air, to the color, march, flourishes or
ruffles,--when played.= If the rank of the reviewing officer entitles
him to the honor, the band plays the prescribed =national air=, or the
field music sounds =to the color=, =march=, =flourishes= or =ruffles=
when arms are presented. When passing in review at the moment the
regimental color salutes, the musicians halted in front of the
reviewing officer, sound =to the color=, =march=, =flourishes= or
=ruffles=. (718)

=625. Modifications of the review.= The formation for review may be
modified to suit the ground, and the =present arms= and the ride
around the line by the reviewing officer may be dispensed with. (719)

=626. When post of reviewing officer is on left of column.= If the
post of the reviewing officer is on the left of the column, the troops
march in review with the guide left; the commanding officer and his
staff turn out of the column to the left, taking post as prescribed
above, but to the left of the reviewing officer; in saluting, the
captains give the command: =1. Eyes, 2. LEFT.= (720)

=627. Cadence at which troops pass in review.= Except in the review of
a single battalion, the troops pass in review in quick time only.
(721)

=628. Reviews of brigades or larger commands; action of battalions
after passing reviewing officer.= In reviews of brigades or larger
commands, each battalion, after the rear has passed the reviewing
officer 50 paces, takes the double time for 100 yards in order not to
interfere with the march of the column in rear; if necessary, it then
turns out of the column and returns to camp by the most practicable
route; the leading battalion of each regiment is followed by the other
units of the regiment. (722)

=629. Standing "at ease," "rest," etc., in review of brigade or larger
command.= In a brigade or larger review a regimental commander may
cause his regiment to stand =at ease=, =rest=, or =stack arms= and
=fall out= and =resume attention=, so as not to interfere with the
ceremony. (723)

=630. Review by inspector junior to commanding officer.= When an
organization is to be reviewed before an inspector junior in rank to
the commanding officer, the commanding officer receives the review
and is accompanied by the inspector, who takes post on his left. (724)

Battalion Review

=631. Presenting battalion to reviewing officer; passing around
battalion; battalion passing in review at quick time.= The battalion
having been formed in line, the major faces to the front; the
reviewing officer moves a few paces toward the major and halts; the
major turns about and commands: =1. Present, 2. ARMS=, and again turns
about and salutes.

The reviewing officer returns the salute; the major turns about,
brings the battalion to order arms, and again turns to the front.

The reviewing officer approaches to about 6 paces from the major, the
latter salutes, takes post on his right, and accompanies him around,
the battalion. The band plays. The reviewing officer proceeds to the
right of the band, passes in front of the captain to the left of the
line and returns to the right, passing in rear of the file closers and
the band. (See par. 625.)

On arriving again at the right of the line, the major salutes, halts,
and when the reviewing officer and staff have passed, moves directly
to his post in front of the battalion, faces it, and commands: =1.
Pass in review, 2. Squads right, 3. MARCH.=

At the first command the band changes direction if necessary, and
halts.

At the third command, given when the band has changed direction, the
battalion moves off, the band playing; without command from the major
the column changes direction at the points indicated, and column of
companies at full distance is formed successively to the left at the
second change of direction; the major takes his post 20 paces in front
of the band immediately after the second change; the band having
passed the reviewing officer, turns to the left of the column, takes
post in front of and facing the reviewing officer, and remains there
until the review terminates.

The major and staff salute, turn the head as in =eyes right=, and look
toward the reviewing officer when the major is 6 paces from him; they
return to the carry and turn the head and eyes to the front when the
major has passed 6 paces beyond him.

Without facing about, each captain or special unit commander, except
the drum major, commands: =1. Eyes=, in time to add, =2. RIGHT=, when
at 6 paces from the reviewing officer, and commands =front= when at 6
paces beyond him. At the command =eyes= the company officers armed
with the saber execute the first motion of present saber; at the
command =right= all turn head and eyes to the right, the company
officers complete =present saber=, and the noncommissioned officers
armed with the saber execute the first motion of present saber; at the
command =front= all turn head and eyes to the front, and officers and
noncommissioned officers armed with the saber resume the carry saber;
without arms in hand, the first motion of the hand salute is made at
the command =right=, and the second motion not made until the command
=front=.

Noncommissioned staff officers, noncommissioned officers in command of
subdivisions, and the drum major salute, turn the head and eyes,
return to the front, resume the carry or drop the hand, at the points
prescribed for the major. Officers and dismounted noncommissioned
officers in command of subdivisions, with arms in hand, render the
rifle or saber salute. Guides charged with the step, trace, and
direction do not execute =eyes right=.

If the reviewing officer is entitled to a salute from the color the
regimental color salutes when at 6 paces from him, and is raised when
at 6 paces beyond him.

The major, having saluted, takes post on the right of the reviewing
officer, returns saber and remains there until the rear of the
battalion has passed, then salutes and rejoins his battalion. The band
ceases to play when the column has completed its second change of
direction after passing the reviewing officer. (725)

=632. Passing in review at double time.= When the battalion arrives at
its original position in column, the major commands: =1. Double time,
2. MARCH.=

The band plays in double time.

The battalion passes in review as before, except that in double time
the command =eyes right= is omitted and there is no saluting except by
the major when he leaves the reviewing officer.

The review terminates when the rear company has passed the reviewing
officer: the band then ceases to play, and, unless otherwise directed
by the major, returns to the position it occupied before marching in
review, or is dismissed; the major rejoins the battalion and brings it
to =quick time=. The battalion then executes such movements as the
reviewing officer may have directed, or is marched to its parade
ground and dismissed.

Marching past in double time may, in the discretion of the reviewing
officer, be omitted; the review terminates when the major rejoins his
battalion. (726)

=633. Major and staff may be dismounted.= At battalion review the
major and his staff may be dismounted in the discretion of the
commanding officer. (727)

PARADES

General Rules

=634. Position assumed by reviewing officer and staff while band is
sounding off.= If dismounted, the officer reviewing the parade, and
his staff, stand at parade rest, with arms folded, while the band is
sounding off; they resume attention with the adjutant. If mounted,
they remain at attention. (732)

=635. Reports by captains and majors.= At the command =report=, given
by a battalion adjutant, the captains in succession from the right
salute and report: =A= (or =other=) =company=, =present= or =accounted
for=; or =A= (or =other=) =company, (so many) officers= or =enlisted
men absent=, and resume the order saber; at the same command given by
the regimental adjutant, the majors similarly =report= their
battalions. (733)

Battalion Parade

=636. At adjutant's call= the battalion is formed in line, as
explained in par. 308, but not presented. Lieutenants take their posts
in front of the center of their respective platoons at the captain's
command for dressing his company on the line, as explained in par.
302. The major takes post at a convenient distance in front of the
center and facing the battalion.

The adjutant from his post in front of the center of the battalion,
after commanding: =1. Guides, 2. POSTS=, adds: =1. Parade, 2. REST=;
the battalion executes parade rest. The adjutant directs the band:
=SOUND OFF.=

The band, playing in quick time, passes in front of the line of
officers to the left of the line and back to its post on the right,
when it ceases playing. At evening parade, when the band ceases
playing, =retreat= is sounded by the field music and, following the
last note and while the flag is being lowered, the band plays the
=Star Spangled Banner=.

Just before the last note of retreat, the adjutant comes to attention
and, as the last note ends commands: =1. Battalion, 2. Attention, 3.
Present, 4. Arms=, and salutes retaining that position until the last
note of the National Anthem. He then turns about and reports: =Sir,
the parade is formed.= The major directs the adjutant: =Take your
post, Sir.= The adjutant moves at a trot (if dismounted, in quick
time), passes by the major's right, and takes his post.

The major draws saber and commands: =1. Order, 2. ARMS=, and adds such
exercises in the manual of arms as he may desire. Officers,
noncommissioned officers commanding companies or armed with the saber,
and the color guard, having once executed order arms, remain in that
position during the exercises in the manual.

The major then directs the adjutant: =Receive the reports, Sir.= The
adjutant, passing by the major's right, advances at a trot (if
dismounted, in quick time) toward the center of the line, halts midway
between it and the major, and commands: =REPORT.= (See par. 635.)

The reports received, the adjutant turns about, and reports: =Sir, all
are present or accounted for=; or =Sir, (so many) officers or enlisted
men are absent=, including in the list of absentees those from the
band and field music reported to him by the drum major prior to the
parade.

The major directs: =Publish the orders, Sir.=

The adjutant turns about and commands: =Attention to orders=; he then
reads the orders, and commands: =1. Officers, 2. CENTER, 3. MARCH.=

At the command =center=, the company officers carry saber and face to
the center. At the command =march=, they close to the center and face
to the front; the adjutant turns about and takes his post.

The officers having closed and faced to the front, the senior
commands: =1. Forward, 2. MARCH.= The officers advance, the band
playing; the left officer of the center or right center company is the
guide, and marches on the major; the officers are halted at 6 paces
from the major by the senior, who commands: =1. Officers, 2. HALT.=
They halt and salute, returning to the carry saber with the major. The
major then gives such instructions as he deems necessary, and
commands: =1. Officers, 2. POSTS, 3. MARCH.=

At the command =posts=, company officers face about.

At the command =march=, they step off with guide as before, and the
senior commands: =1. Officers, 2. HALT=, so as to halt 3 paces from
the line; he then adds: =1. POSTS, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =posts=, officers face outward and, at the command
=march=, step off in succession at 4 paces distance, resume their
posts and order saber; the lieutenants march directly to their posts
in rear of their companies.

The music ceases when all officers have resumed their posts.

The major then commands: =1. Pass in review, 2. Squads right, 3.
MARCH=, and returns saber.

The battalion marches according to the principles of review; when the
last company has passed, the ceremony is concluded, as explained in
pars. 617; 631.

The band continues to play while the companies are in march upon the
parade ground. Companies are formed in column of squads, without
halting, and are marched to their respective parades by their
captains.

When the company officers have saluted the major, he may direct them
to form line with the staff, in which case they individually move to
the front, passing to the right and left of the major and staff, halt
on the line established by the staff, face about, and stand at
attention. The music ceases when the officers join the staff. The
major causes the companies to pass in review under the command of
their first sergeants by the same commands as before. The company
officers return saber with the major and remain at attention. (734)

ESCORTS

Escort of the Color

=637. By a company.= The regiment being in line or line of masses, the
colonel details a company, other than the color company, to receive
and escort the national color to its place. During the ceremony the
regimental color remains with the color guard at its post with the
regiment.

The band moves straight to its front until clear of the line of field
officers, changes direction to the right, and is halted; the
designated company forms column of platoons in rear of the band, the
color bearer or bearers between the platoons.

The escort then marches without music to the colonel's office or
quarters and is formed in line facing the entrance, the band on the
right, the color bearer in the line of file closers.

The color bearer, preceded by the first lieutenant and followed by a
sergeant of the escort, then goes to obtain the color.

When the color bearer comes out, followed by the lieutenant and
sergeant, he halts before the entrance, facing the escort; the
lieutenant places himself on the right, the sergeant on the left of
the color bearer; the escort presents arms, and the field music sounds
=to the color=; the first lieutenant and sergeant salute.

Arms are brought to the order; the lieutenant and sergeant return to
their posts; the company is formed in column of platoons, the band
taking post in front of the column; the color bearer places himself
between the platoons; the escort marches in quick time, with guide
left, back to the regiment, the band playing; the march is so
conducted that when the escort arrives at 50 paces in front of the
right of the regiment, the direction of the march shall be parallel to
its front; when the color arrives opposite its place in line, the
escort is formed in line to the left; the color bearer, passing
between the platoons, advances and halts 12 paces in front of the
colonel.

The color bearer having halted, the colonel, who has taken post 30
paces in front of the center of the regiment, faces about, commands:
=1. Present, 2. ARMS=, resumes his front, and salutes; the field music
sounds to the color; and the regimental color bearer executes the
color salute at the command =present arms=.

The colonel then faces about, brings the regiment to the order, at
which the color bearer resumes the carry and takes his post with the
color company.

The escort presents arms and comes to the order with the regiment, at
the command of the colonel, after which the captain forms it again in
column of platoons, and, preceded by the band, marches it to its
place, passing around the left flank of the regiment.

The band plays until the escort passes the left of the line, when it
ceases playing and returns to its post on the right, passing in rear
of the regiment.

The regiment may be brought to a rest when the escort passes the left
of the line. (736)

=638. By a battalion.= Escort of the color is executed by a battalion
according to the same principles. (737)

Escorts of Honor

=639.= Escorts of honor are detailed for the purpose of receiving and
escorting personages of high rank, civil or military. The troops for
this purpose are selected for their soldierly appearance and superior
discipline.

The escort forms in line, opposite the place where the personage
presents himself, the band on the flank of the escort toward which it
will march. On the appearance of the personage, he is received with
the honors due to his rank. The escort is formed into column of
companies, platoons or squads, and takes up the march, the personage
and his staff or retinue taking positions in rear of the column; when
he leaves the escort, line is formed and the same honors are paid as
before.

When the position of the escort is at a considerable distance from the
point where the personage is to be received, as for instance, where a
courtyard or wharf intervenes, a double line of sentinels is posted
from that point to the escort, facing inward; the sentinels
successively salute as he passes and are then relieved and join the
escort.

An officer is appointed to attend him and bear such communication as
he may have to make to the commander of the escort. (738)

Funeral Escort

=640. Composition and strength, formation, presenting arms, marching,
etc.= The composition and strength of the escort are prescribed in
Army Regulations.

The escort is formed opposite the quarters of the deceased; the band
on that flank of the escort toward which it is to march.

Upon the appearance of the coffin, the commander commands: =1.
Present, 2. ARMS=, and the band plays an appropriate air; arms are
then brought to the order.

The escort is next formed into column of companies, platoons, or
squads. If the escort be small, it may be marched in line. The
procession is formed in the following order: =1. Music, 2. Escort, 3.
Clergy, 4. Coffin and pallbearers, 5. Mourners, 6. Members of the
former command of the deceased, 7. Other officers and enlisted men, 8.
Distinguished persons, 9. Delegations, 10. Societies, 11. Civilians.=
Officers and enlisted men (Nos. 6 and 7), with side arms, are in the
order of rank, seniors in front.

The procession being formed, the commander of the escort puts it in
march.

The escort marches slowly to solemn music; the column having arrived
opposite the grave, line is formed facing it.

The coffin is then carried along the front of the escort to the grave;
arms are presented, the music plays an appropriate air; the coffin
having been placed over the grave, the music ceases and arms are
brought to the order.

The commander next commands: =1. Parade, 2. REST.= The escort executes
=parade rest=, officers and men inclining the head.

When the funeral services are completed and the coffin lowered into
the grave, the commander causes the escort to resume attention and
fire three rounds of blank cartridges, the muzzles of the pieces being
elevated. When the escort is greater than a battalion, one battalion
is designated to fire the volley.

A musician then sounds =taps=.

The escort is then formed into column, marched in quick time to the
point where it was assembled, and dismissed.

The band does not play until it has left the inclosure.

When the distance to the place of interment is considerable, the
escort, after having left the camp or garrison, may march =at ease= in
quick time until it approaches the burial ground, when it is brought
to attention. The music does not play while marching =at ease=.

In marching at attention, the field music may alternate with the band
in playing. (739)

=641. Funeral of general officer; playing national air, sounding
ruffles, etc., as honor.= When arms are presented at the funeral of a
person entitled to any of the following honors, the band plays the
prescribed =national air=, or the field music sounds to the =color=,
=march=, =flourishes=, or =ruffles=, according to the rank of the
deceased, after which the band plays an appropriate air. The commander
of the escort, in forming column, gives the appropriate commands for
the different arms. (740)

=642. Funeral of mounted officer or soldier.= At the funeral of a
mounted officer or enlisted man, his horse, in mourning caparison,
follows the hearse. (741)

=643. When hearse, cavalry, and artillery are unable to enter
cemetery.= Should the entrance of the cemetery prevent the hearse
accompanying the escort till the latter halts at the grave, the column
is halted at the entrance long enough to take the coffin from the
hearse, when the column is again put in march. The Cavalry and
Artillery, when unable to enter the inclosure, turn out of the column,
face the column, and salute the remains as they pass. (742)

=644. Escorting remains from quarters to church before funeral
services.= When necessary to escort the remains from the quarters of
the deceased to the church before the funeral service, arms are
presented upon receiving the remains at the quarters and also as they
are borne into the church. (743)

=645. Instructions to clergyman and pallbearers.= The commander of the
escort, previous to the funeral, gives the clergyman and pallbearers
all needful directions. (744)

Company Inspection

=646.= Being in line at a halt: =1. Open ranks, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march= the front rank executes =right dress=; the rear
rank and the file closers march backward 4 steps, halt, and execute
right dress; the lieutenants pass around their respective flanks and
take post, facing to the front, 3 paces in front of the center of
their respective platoons. The captain aligns the front rank, rear
rank, and file closers, takes post 3 paces in front of the right
guide, facing to the left, and commands: =1. FRONT, 2. PREPARE FOR
INSPECTION.=

At the second command the lieutenants carry saber; the captain returns
saber and inspects them, after which they face about, order saber, and
stand at ease; upon the completion of the inspection they carry saber,
face about, and order saber. The captain may direct the lieutenants to
accompany or assist him, in which case they return saber and, at the
close of the inspection, resume their posts in front of the company,
draw and carry saber.

Having inspected the lieutenants, the captain proceeds to the right of
the company. Each man, as the captain approaches him, executes
=inspection arms=.

The captain takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just
above the rear sight, the man dropping his hands. The captain inspects
the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same position as in
receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes it with the left
hand at the balance and executes =order arms=.

As the captain returns the piece, the next man executes =inspection
arms=, and so on through the company.

Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man executes
=order arms= as soon as the captain passes to the next man.

[Illustration: Plate VI]

The inspection is from right to left in front, and from left to right
in the rear, of each rank and of the line of file closers.

When approached by the captain, the first sergeant executes
=inspection saber=. Enlisted men armed with the pistol execute
=inspection pistol= by drawing the pistol from the holster and holding
it diagonally across the body, barrel up, and 6 inches in front of the
neck, muzzle pointing up and to the left. The pistol is returned to
the holster as soon as the captain passes.

Upon completion of the inspection, the captain takes post facing to
the left in front of the right guide and on line with the lieutenants
and commands: =1. Close ranks, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march= the lieutenants resume their posts in line; the
rear rank closes to 40 inches, each man covering his file leader; the
file closers close to 2 paces from the rear rank. (745)

=647. Inspection of quarters or camp.= If the company is dismissed,
rifles are put away. In quarters, headdress and accouterments are
removed, and the men stand near their respective bunks; in camp, they
stand covered, but without accouterments, in front of their tents.

If the personal field equipment has not been inspected in ranks and
its inspection in quarters or camp is ordered, each man will arrange
the prescribed articles on his bunk, if in quarters or permanent camp,
or in front of his half of the tent, if in shelter tent camp, in the
same relative order as directed in paragraph 648.

The captain, accompanied by the lieutenants, then inspects the
quarters or camp. The first sergeant precedes the captain and calls
the men to attention on entering each squad room or on approaching the
tents; the men stand at attention, but do not salute. (746)

=648. When inspection includes examination of equipment.= If the
inspection is to include an examination of the equipment while in
ranks, the captain, after closing ranks, causes the company to stack
arms, to march backward until 4 paces in rear of the stacks and to
take intervals. He then commands:

=1. UNSLING EQUIPMENT, 2. OPEN PACKS.=

At the first command each man unslings his equipment and places it on
the ground at his feet, haversack to the front, end of the pack 1 foot
in front of toes.

At the second command, pack carriers are unstrapped, packs removed and
unrolled, the longer edge of the pack along the lower edge of the
cartridge belt. Each man exposes shelter-tent pins; removes meat can,
knife, fork, and spoon from the meat-can pouch, and places them on the
right of the haversack, knife, fork, and spoon in the open meat can;
removes the canteen and cup from the cover and places them on the left
side of the haversack; unstraps and spreads out haversack so as to
expose its contents; folds up the carrier to uncover the cartridge
pockets; opens same; unrolls toilet articles and places them on the
outer flap of the haversack; places underwear carried in pack on the
left half of the open pack, with round fold parallel with front edge
of pack; opens first-aid pouch and exposes contents to view. Special
articles carried by individual men, such as flag kit, field glasses,
compass, steel tape, notebook, etc., will be arranged on the right
half of the open pack. Each man then resumes the attention. Plate VI
(Page 151) shows the relative position of all articles except
underwear and special articles.

The captain then passes along the ranks and file closers, as before,
inspects the equipment, returns to the right, and commands: =CLOSE
PACKS.=

Each man rolls up his toilet articles and underwear, straps up his
haversack and its contents, replaces the meat can, knife, fork, and
spoon, and the canteen and cup; closes cartridge pockets and first-aid
pouch; restores special articles to their proper receptacles; rolls up
and replaces pack in carrier, and, leaving the equipment in its
position on the ground, resumes the attention.

All equipments being packed, the captain commands: =SLING EQUIPMENT.=

The equipments are slung and belts fastened.

The captain then causes the company to assemble and take arms. The
inspection is completed as already explained. (747)

=649. When the inspector is other than the captain.= Should the
inspector be other than the captain, the latter, after commanding
=front=, adds =REST=, and faces to the front. When the inspector
approaches, the captain faces to the left, brings the company to
attention, faces to the front, and salutes. The salute acknowledged,
the captain carries saber, faces to the left, commands: =PREPARE FOR
INSPECTION=, and again faces to the front.

The inspection proceeds as before; the captain returns saber and
accompanies the inspector as soon as the latter passes him. (748)

Battalion Inspection

=650. Inspection may precede or follow review; the inspection up to
time the companies are inspected.= If there be both inspection and
review, the inspection may either precede or follow the review.

The battalion being in column of companies at full distance, all
officers dismounted, the major commands: =1. Prepare for inspection,
2. MARCH.=

At the first command each captain commands: =Open ranks.=

At the command =march= the ranks are opened in each company, as in the
inspection of the company, as prescribed in par. 646.

The field musicians join their companies.

The drum major conducts the band to a position 30 paces in rear of the
column, if not already there, and opens ranks.

The major takes post facing to the front and 20 paces in front of the
center of the leading company. The staff takes post as if mounted. The
color takes post 5 paces in rear of the staff.

Field and staff officers senior in rank to the inspector do not take
post in front of the column, but accompany him.

The inspector inspects the major, and, accompanied by the latter,
inspects the staff officers.

The major then commands: =REST=, returns saber, and, with his staff,
accompanies the inspector.

If the major is the inspector he commands: =REST=, returns saber, and
inspects his staff, which then accompanies him.

The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, then makes a
minute inspection of the color guard, the noncommissioned staff, and
the arms, accouterments, dress and ammunition of each soldier of the
several companies in succession, and inspects the band.

The adjutant gives the necessary commands for the inspection of the
color guard, noncommissioned staff, and band.

The color guard and noncommissioned staff may be dismissed as soon as
inspected. (749)

=651. Inspection of the companies.= As the inspector approaches each
company, its captain commands: =1. Company, 2. ATTENTION, 3. PREPARE
FOR INSPECTION=, and faces to the front; as soon as inspected he
returns saber and accompanies the inspector. The inspection proceeds
as in company inspection, as explained in pars. 646-649. At its
completion the captain closes ranks and commands: =REST.= Unless
otherwise directed by the inspector, the major directs that the
company be marched to its parade and dismissed. (750)

=652. When inspection lasts long time.= If the inspection will
probably last a long time the rear companies may be permitted to stack
arms and fall out; before the inspector approaches, they fall in and
take arms. (751)

=653. The band.= The band plays during the inspection of the
companies.

When the inspector approaches the band the adjutant commands: =PREPARE
FOR INSPECTION.=

As the inspector approaches him each man raises his instrument in
front of the body, reverses it so as to show both sides, and then
returns it.

Company musicians execute inspection similarly. (752)

=654. Inspection of quarters or camp.= At the inspection of quarters
or camp the inspector is accompanied by the captain, followed by the
other officers or by such of them as he may designate. The inspection
is conducted as described in the company inspection, as laid down in
pars. 646-649.

MUSTER

Regimental, Battalion, or Company Muster

=655. Inspection and review; muster rolls; lists of absentees.= Muster
is preceded by an inspection, and, when practicable, by a review.

The adjutant is provided with the muster roll of the field, staff, and
band, the surgeon with the hospital roll; each captain with the roll
of his company. A list of absentees, alphabetically arranged, showing
cause and place of absence, accompanies each roll. (755)

=656. Calling the names; verifying presence of absentees.= Being in
column of companies at open ranks, each captain, as the mustering
officer approaches, brings his company to right shoulder arms, and
commands: =ATTENTION TO MUSTER.=

The mustering officer or captain then calls the names on the roll;
each man, as his name is called, answers =Here= and brings his piece
to order arms.

After muster, the mustering officer, accompanied by the company
commanders and such other officers as he may designate, verifies the
presence of the men reported in hospital, on guard, etc. (756)

=657. Muster of company on company parade.= A company may be mustered
in the same manner on its own parade ground, the muster to follow the
company inspection. (757)

THE COLOR

=658. Meaning of "Color;" Army Regulations.= The word "color" implies
the national color; it includes the regimental color when both are
present.

The rules prescribing the colors to be carried by regiments and
battalions on all occasions are contained in Army Regulations. (766)

=659. Where the colors are kept; "cased" defined.= In garrison the
colors, when not in use, are kept in the office or quarters of the
colonel, and are escorted thereto and therefrom by the color guard. In
camp the colors, when not in use, are in front of the colonel's tent.
From reveille to retreat, when the weather permits, they are displayed
uncased; from retreat to reveille and during inclement weather they
are cased.

Colors are said to be cased when furled and protected by the oil cloth
covering. (767)

=660. Regimental and national colors--salutes by.= The regimental
color salutes in the ceremony of escort of the color, and when
saluting an officer entitled to the honor, but in no other case.

If marching, the salute is executed when at 6 paces from the officer
entitled to the salute; the carry is resumed when 6 paces beyond him.

The national color renders no salute. (768)

The Color Guard

=661. Composition of color guard; carrying of regimental and national
colors.= The color guard consists of two color sergeants, who are the
color bearers, and two experienced privates selected by the colonel.
The senior color sergeant carries the national color; the junior color
sergeant carries the regimental color. The regimental color, when
carried, is always on the left of the national color, in whatever
direction they may face. (769)

=662. Formation and marching of color guard.= The color guard is
formed and marched in one rank, the color bearers in the center. It is
marched in the same manner and by the same commands as a squad,
substituting, when necessary, guard for squad. (770)

=663. Color company defined; color guard remains with it.= The color
company is the center or right center company of the center or right
center battalion. The color guard remains with that company unless
otherwise directed. (771)

=664. Post of color guard in various formations.= In line, the color
guard is in the interval between the inner guides of the right and
left center companies.

In line of columns or in close line, the color guard is midway between
the right and left center companies and on line with the captains.

In column of companies or platoons, the color guard is midway between
the color company and the company in rear of the color company and
equidistant from the flanks of the column.

In close column, the color guard is on the flank of the color company.

In column of squads, the color guard is in the column between the
color company and the company originally on its left.

When the regiment is formed in line of masses for ceremonies, the
color guard forms on the left of the leading company of the center
(right center) battalion. It rejoins the color company when the
regiment changes from line of masses. (772)

=665. In battle color guard joins reserve.= The color guard, when with
a battalion that takes the battle formation, joins the regimental
reserve, whose commander directs the color guard to join a certain
company of the reserve. (773)

=666. Loadings, firings, manual of arms, and movements by color
guard.= The color guard executes neither loadings nor firings; in
rendering honors, it executes all movements in the manual; in drill,
all movements unless specially excused. (774)

To Receive the Color

=667. Receiving the color by color guard.= The color guard, by command
of the senior color sergeant, presents arms on receiving and parting
with the color. After parting with the color, the color guard is
brought to order arms by command of the senior member, who is placed
as the right man of the guard. (775)

=668. Receiving the color by color company.= At drills and ceremonies,
excepting escort of the color, the color, if present, is received by
the color company after its formation.

The formation of the color company completed, the captain faces to the
front; the color guard, conducted by the senior sergeant, approaches
from the front and halts at a distance of 10 paces from the captain,
who then faces about, brings the company to the =present=, faces to
the front, salutes, again faces about and brings the company to the
=order=. The color guard comes to the =present= and =order= at the
command of the captain, and is then marched by the color sergeant
directly to its post on the left of the color company. (776)

=669. Escorting color to office or quarters of colonel.= When the
battalion is dismissed the color guard escorts the color to the office
or quarters of the colonel. (777)

Manual of the Color

=670.= At the =carry=, the heel of the pike rests in the socket of the
sling; the right hand grasps the pike at the height of the shoulder.

At the =order=, the heel of the pike rests on the ground near the
right toe, the right hand holding the pike in a vertical position.

At =parade rest=, the heel of the pike is on the ground, as at the
=order=; the pike is held with both hands in front of the center of
the body, left hand uppermost.

The =order= is resumed at the command =attention=.

The left hand assists the right when necessary.

The =carry= is the habitual position when the troops are at a
shoulder, port, or trail.

The =order= and =parade rest= are executed with the troops.

=The color salute:= Being at a carry, slip the right hand up the pike
to the height of the eye, then lower the pike by straightening the arm
to the front. (778)

Manual of the Saber

=671. Drawing saber; position of carry saber dismounted; unhooking
scabbard before mounting; on foot carrying scabbard hooked up.=

=1. Draw, 2. SABER.=

At the command =draw=, unhook the saber with the thumb and first two
fingers of the left hand, thumb on the end of the hook, fingers
lifting the upper ring; grasp the scabbard with the left hand at the
upper band, bring the hilt a little forward, seize the grip with the
right hand, and draw the blade 6 inches out of the scabbard, pressing
the scabbard against the thigh with the left hand.

At the command =saber=, draw the saber quickly, raising the arm to its
full extent, to the right front, at an angle of about 45° with the
horizontal, the saber, edge down, in a straight line with the arm;
make a slight pause and bring the back of the blade against the
shoulder, edge to the front, arm nearly extended, hand by the side,
elbow back, third and fourth fingers back of the grip; at the same
time hook up the scabbard with the thumb and first two fingers of the
left hand, thumb through the upper ring, fingers supporting it; drop
the left hand by the side.

=This is the position of carry saber dismounted.=

Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber unhook the
scabbard before mounting; when mounted, in the first motion of =draw
saber= they reach with the right hand over the bridle hand and without
the aid of the bridle hand draw the saber as before; the right hand at
the carry rests on the right thigh.

On foot the scabbard is carried hooked up. (782)

=672. Holding of saber in publishing orders, etc.; use of saber knot.=
When publishing orders, calling the roll, etc., the saber is held
suspended from the right wrist by the saber knot; when the saber knot
is used it is placed on the wrist before drawing saber and taken off
after returning saber. (783)

=673. Presenting saber from carry or order; execution of the salute in
rendering honors.=

Being at the order or carry: =1. Present, 2. SABER= (or =ARMS=).

At the command =present=, raise and carry the saber to the front, base
of the hilt as high as the chin and 6 inches in front of the neck,
edge to the left, point 6 inches farther to the front than the hilt,
thumb extended on the left of the grip, all fingers grasping the grip.

At the command =saber=, or =arms=, lower the saber, point in
prolongation of the right foot and near the ground, edge to the left,
hand by the side, thumb on left of grip, arm extended. If mounted, the
hand is held behind the thigh, point a little to the right and front
of the stirrup.

In rendering honors with troops, officers execute the first motion of
the salute at the command =present=, the second motion at the command
=arms=; enlisted men with the saber execute the first motion at the
command arms and omit the second motion. (784)

=674. Coming to order from carry; executing order or carry from
present, depending upon command; coming to order saber when arms are
brought to order.=

Being at a carry: =1. Order, 2. SABER= (or =ARMS=).

Drop the point of the saber directly to the front, point on or near
the ground, edge down, thumb on back of grip.

Being at the =present saber=, should the next command be =order arms=,
officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber =order
saber=; if the command be other than =order arms=, they execute =carry
saber=.

When arms are brought to the order, the officers or enlisted men with
saber drawn =order saber=. (785)

=675. Position of saber in giving commands, etc.; bringing saber to
carry from order.= The saber is held at the carry while giving
commands, marching at attention, or changing position in quick time.

When at the order, sabers are brought to the carry when arms are
brought to any position except the =present= or =parade rest=. (786)

=676. Parade rest from order.= Being at the order: =1. Parade, 2.
REST.=

Take the position of parade rest except that the left hand is
uppermost and rests on the right hand, point of saber on or near the
ground in front of the center of the body, edge to the right.

At the command =attention=, resume the order saber and the position of
the soldier. (787)

=677. Position of saber at double time.= In marching in double time
the saber is carried diagonally across the breast, edge to the front;
the left hand steadies the scabbard. (788)

=678. On duty under arms sabers to be drawn and returned without
command; commands given with saber drawn.= Officers and
noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, on all duties under
arms draw and return saber without waiting for command. All commands
to soldiers under arms are given with the saber drawn. (789)

=679. Returning saber from carry.= Being at a carry: =1. Return, 2.
SABER.=

At the command =return=, carry the right hand opposite to and 6 inches
from the left shoulder, saber vertical, edge to the left; at the same
time unhook and lower the scabbard with the left hand and grasp it at
the upper band.

At the command =saber= drop the point to the rear and pass the blade
across and along the left arm; turn the head slightly to the left,
fixing the eyes on the opening of the scabbard, raise the right hand,
insert and return the blade; free the wrist from the saber knot (if
inserted in it), turn the head to the front, drop the right hand by
the side; hook up the scabbard with the left hand, drop the left hand
by the side.

Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, when
mounted, return saber without using the left hand; the scabbard is
hooked up on dismounting. (790)

=680. Enlisted men with saber drawn at inspection.= At inspection
enlisted men with the saber drawn execute the first motion of =present
saber= and turn the wrist to show both sides of the blade, resuming
the carry when the inspector has passed. (791)

[Illustration]

Shelter Tents

=681.= Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands:
=FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS.=

The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form a
file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first
sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the
company; blank files are filled by the file closers, or by men taken
from the front rank; the remaining guide, or guides, and file closers
form on a convenient flank.

Before forming column or platoons, preparatory to pitching tents, the
company may be redivided into two or more platoons, regardless of the
size of each. (792)

=682.= The captain then causes the company to take intervals as
described in the School of the Squad (See par. 156.), and commands:
=PITCH TENTS.=

Equipments are unslung, packs opened, shelter half and pins removed;
each man then spreads his shelter half, small triangle to the rear,
flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, the rear-rank man's half
on the right. The halves are then buttoned together; the guy loops at
both ends of the lower half are passed through the buttonholes
provided in the lower and upper halves; the whipped end of the guy
rope is then passed through both guy loops and secured, this at both
ends of the tent. Each front-rank man inserts the muzzle of his rifle
under the front end of the ridge and holds the rifle upright, sling to
the front, heel of butt on the ground, beside the bayonet. His
rear-rank man pins down the front corners of the tent on the line of
bayonets, stretching the tent taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye
of the front guy rope and drives the pin at such a distance in front
of the rifle as to held the rope taut; both men go to the rear of the
tent, each pins down a corner, stretching the sides and rear of the
tent before securing; the rear-rank man then inserts an intrenching
tool, or a bayonet in its scabbard, under the rear end of the ridge
inside the tent, the front-rank man pegging down the end of the rear
guy ropes; the rest of the pins are then driven by both men, the
rear-rank man working on the right.

The front flaps of the tent are not fastened down, but thrown back on
the tent.

As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges his equipment and the
contents of his pack in the tent and stands at attention in front of
his own half on line with the front guy-rope pin.

To have a uniform slope when the tents are pitched, the guy ropes
should all be of the same length.

In shelter-tent camps, in localities where suitable material is
procurable, tent poles may be improvised and used in lieu of the rifle
and bayonet or intrenching tool as supports for the shelter tent.
(793)

=683.= When the pack is not carried, the company is formed for shelter
tents, as prescribed in par. 681, intervals are taken, arms are laid
aside or on the ground, the men are dismissed and proceed to the
wagon, secure their packs, return to their places, and pitch tents as
heretofore described, in par. 682. (794)

=684.= Double shelter tents may be pitched by first pitching one tent
as heretofore described, then pitching a second tent against the
opening of the first, using one rifle to support both tents, and
passing the front guy ropes over and down the sides of the opposite
tents. The front corner of one tent is not pegged down, but is thrown
back to permit an opening into the tent. (795)

Single Sleeping Bag

=685.= Spread the poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet,
buttoned side to the left; fold the blanket once across its short
dimension and lay it on the poncho, folded side along the right side
of the poncho; tie the blanket together along the left side by means
of the tapes provided; fold the left half of the poncho over the
blanket and button it together along the side and bottom. (For the
position, number, and length of tapes with which blankets should be
provided, see Par. II, G. O. 11; W. D. '12--Author.) (796)

Double Sleeping Bag

=686.= Spread one poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet,
buttoned side to the left; spread the blankets on top of the poncho;
tie the edges of the blankets together with the tapes provided; spread
a second poncho on top of the blankets, buttoned end at the feet,
buttoned side to the right; button the two ponchos together along both
sides and across the end. (797)

To Strike Shelter Tents

=687.= The men standing in front of their tents: =STRIKE TENTS.=

Equipments and rifles are removed from the tent; the tents are
lowered, packs made up, and equipments slung, and the men stand at
attention in the places originally occupied after taking intervals.
(798)

To Pitch All Types of Tents, Except Shelter and Conical Wall

=688.= To pitch all types of Army tents, except shelter and conical
wall tents: Mark line of tents by driving a wall pin on the spot to be
occupied by the right (or left) corner of each tent. For pyramidal
tents the interval between adjacent pins should be about 30 feet,
which will give a passage of two feet between tents. Spread tripod on
the ground where the center of tent is to be, if tripod is used.
Spread the tent on the ground to be occupied, door to the front, and
place the right (or left) front wall loop over the pin. The door (or
doors, if more than one) being fastened and held together at the
bottom, the left (or right) corner wall loop is carried to the left
(or right) as far as it will go and a wall pin driven through it, the
pin being placed in line with the right (or left) corner pins already
driven. At the same time the rear corner wall loops are pulled to the
rear and outward so that the rear wall of the tent is stretched to
complete the rectangle. Wall pins are then driven through these loops.
Each corner pin should be directly in rear of the corresponding front
corner pin, making a rectangle. Unless the canvas be wet, a small
amount of slack should be allowed before the corner pins are driven.
According to the size of the tent one or two men, crawling under the
tent if necessary, fit each pole or ridge or upright into the ring or
ridge pole holes, and such accessories as hood, fly, and brace ropes
are adjusted. If a tripod be used an additional man will go under the
tent to adjust it. The tent steadied by the remaining men, one at each
corner guy rope, will then be raised. If the tent is a ward or storage
type, corner poles will now be placed at the four corners. The four
corner guy ropes are then placed over the lower notches of the large
pins driven in prolongation of the diagonals at such distance as to
hold the walls and ends of the tent vertical and smooth when the guy
ropes are drawn taut. A wall pin is then driven through each remaining
wall loop and a large pin for each guy rope is driven in line with the
corner guy pins already driven. The guy ropes of the tent are placed
over the lower notches, while the guy ropes of the fly are placed over
the upper notches, and are then drawn taut. Brace ropes when used, are
then secured to stakes or pins suitably placed. (709)

Conical Wall Tent

=689.= Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart. Using
the hood lines, with center pin as center, describe two concentric
circles with radii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 inches. In the outer
circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart. At intervals of about 3
feet drive the other guy pins.

In other respects conical tents are erected practically as in the case
of pyramidal tents, as explained in par. 688. (801)

To Strike Common, Wall, Pyramidal, and Conical Wall Tents

=690. STRIKE TENTS.=

The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner guy
ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of the conical wall
tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their receptacle.

One man holds each guy, and when the ground is clear the tent is
lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or tripod and pole
fastened together, and the remaining pins collected. (802)

To Fold Tents

=691. For folding common, wall, hospital, and storage tents:= Spread
the tent flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so that bottoms of
side walls are even, ends of tents forming triangles to the right and
left; fold the triangular ends of the tent in toward the middle,
making it rectangular in shape; fold the top over about 9 inches; fold
the tent in two by carrying the top fold over clear to the foot; fold
again in two from the top to the foot; throw all guys on tent except
the second from each end; fold the ends in so as to cover about
two-thirds of the second cloths; fold the left end over to meet the
turned-in edge of the right end, then fold the right end over the top,
completing the bundle; tie with two exposed guys.

=For folding pyramidal tents:= The tent is thrown toward the rear and
the back wall and roof canvas pulled out smooth. This may be most
easily accomplished by leaving the rear corner wall pins in the ground
with the wall loops attached, one man at each rear-corner guy, and one
holding the square iron in a perpendicular position and pulling the
canvas to its limit away from the former front of the tent. This
leaves the three remaining sides of the tent on top of the rear side,
with the door side in the middle.

Now carry the right-front corner over and lay it on the left-rear
corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw guys toward square iron, and
pull bottom edges even. Then take the right-front corner and return to
the right, covering the right-rear corner. This folds the right side
of the tent on itself, with the crease in the middle and under the
front side of the tent.

Next carry the left-front corner to the right and back as described
above; this, when completed, will leave the front and rear sides of
the tent lying smooth and flat and the two side walls folded inward,
each on itself.

Place the hood in the square iron which has been folded downward
toward the bottom of tent, and continue to fold around the square iron
as a core, pressing all folds down flat and smooth, and parallel with
the bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly made and the canvas
kept smooth, the last fold will exactly cover the lower edge of the
canvas. Lay all exposed guys along the folded canvas except the two on
the center-width, which should be pulled out and away from bottom edge
to their extreme length for tying. Now, beginning at one end, fold
toward the center on the first seam (that joining the first and second
widths) and fold again toward the center so that the already folded
canvas will come to within about three inches of the middle width.
Then fold over to the opposite edge of middle width of canvas. Then
begin folding from opposite end, folding the first width in half, then
making a second fold to come within about 4 or 5 inches of that
already folded, turn this fold entirely over that already folded. Take
the exposed guys and draw them taut across each other, turn bundle
over on the under guy, cross guys on top of bundle drawing tight. Turn
bundle over on the crossed guys and tie lengthwise.

When properly tied and pressed together this will make a package 11 by
23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic inches to store or pack.

Stencil the organization designation on the lower half of the middle
width of canvas in the back wall. (803)

Warning Calls

=692. First call, guard mounting, full dress, overcoats, drill,
stable, water,= and =boots and saddles= precede the =assembly= by such
interval as may be prescribed by the commanding officer.

=Mess, church, and fatigue=, classed as service calls, may also be
used as warning calls.

=First call= is the first signal for formation for roll call and for
all ceremonies except guard mounting.

=Guard mounting= is the first signal for guard mounting.

The field music assembles at =first call= and =guard mounting=.

In a mixed command, =boots and saddles= is the signal to mounted
troops that their formation is to be mounted; for mounted guard
mounting or mounted drill, it immediately follows the signal =guard
mounting= or drill.

When full dress or overcoats are to be worn, the =full dress= or
=overcoat= call immediately follows =first call=, =guard mounting=, or
=boots and saddles=. (804)

Formation Calls

=693. Assembly:= The signal for companies or details to fall in.

=Adjutant's call:= The signal for companies to form battalion; also
for the guard details to form for guard mounting on the camp or
garrison parade ground; it follows the =assembly= at such interval as
may be prescribed by the commanding officer.

It is also used as a signal for the battalions to form regiment,
following the first =adjutant's call= at such interval as the
commanding officer may prescribe.

=To the color:= Is sounded when the color salutes. (805)

Alarm Calls

=694. Fire call:= The signal for the men to fall in, without arms, to
extinguish fire.

=To arms:= The signal for the men to fall in, under arms, on their
company's parade grounds as quickly as possible.

=To horse:= The signal for mounted men to proceed under arms to their
horses, saddle, mount and assemble at a designated place as quickly as
possible. In extended order this signal is used to remount troops.
(806)

Service Calls

=695. Tattoo, taps, mess, sick, church, recall, issue, officers',
captains', first sergeants', fatigue, school=, and =the general=.

=The general= is the signal for striking tents and loading wagons
preparatory to marching.

=Reveille= precedes the =assembly= for roll call; =retreat= follows
the =assembly=, the interval between being only that required for
formation and roll call, except when there is parade.

=Taps= is the signal for extinguishing lights; it is usually preceded
by =call to quarters= by such interval as prescribed by Army
Regulations.

=Assembly, reveille, retreat, adjutant's call, to the color, the
flourishes, ruffles=, and the =marches= are sounded by all the field
music united; the other calls, as a rule, are sounded by the musician
of the guard or orderly musician; he may also sound the =assembly=
when the musicians are not united.

The morning gun is fired at the first note of =reveille=, or, if
marches be played before =reveille=, it is fired at the commencement
of the first march.

The evening gun is fired at the last note of =retreat=. (807)

APPENDIX A

War Department,
Office of the Chief of Staff,
Washington, December 2, 1911.

The Infantry Drill Regulations, 1911, have been prepared for the use
of troops armed with the United States magazine rifle, model 1903. For
the guidance of organizations armed with the United States magazine
rifle, model 1898, the following alternative paragraphs are published
and will be considered as substitute paragraphs for the corresponding
paragraphs in the text: 75 (in part), 96, 98, 99, 134, 139, 141, 142,
148 and 150.

By order of the Secretary of War:
LEONARD WOOD,
Major General, Chief of Staff.

=Note.= The paragraph numbers 75, 96, 98, etc., given above, follow
the paragraphs below.

=696.= * * * Third.

The cut-off is kept turned down, except when using the magazine. (75)

* * * * *

=697.= Being at order arms: =1. Unfix, BAYONET.=

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Take the position of
parade rest, grasp the handle on the bayonet firmly with the right
hand, press the spring with the forefinger of the left hand, raise the
bayonet until the handle is about 6 inches above the muzzle of the
piece, drop the point to the left, back of hand toward the body, and
glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing
between the left arm and body; regrasp the piece with the right hand
and resume the order.

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet
from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the
most convenient manner.

If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the
most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the
original position.

Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity, but
not in cadence. (96)

=698.= Being at order arms: =1. Inspection, 2. ARMS.=

At the second command, take the position of port arms. (=TWO.=) With
the right hand open the magazine gate, turn the bolt handle up, draw
the bolt back and glance at the magazine and chamber. Having found
them empty, or having emptied them, raise the head and eyes to the
front. (98)

=699.= Being at inspection arms: =1. Order (Right shoulder, port), 2.
ARMS.=

At the preparatory command, push the bolt forward, turn the handle
down, close the magazine gate, pull the trigger, and resume port arms.
At the command =arms=, complete the movement ordered. (99)

=700.= Pieces being loaded and in the position of load, to execute
other movements with the pieces loaded: =1. Lock, 2. PIECES.=

At the command =pieces= turn the safety lock fully to the right.

The safety lock is said to be at the "ready" when turned to the left,
and at the "safe" when turned to the right.

The cut-off is said to be "on" when turned up and "off" when turned
down. (134)

=701.= Being in line or skirmish line at halt: =1. With dummy (blank
or ball) cartridges, 2. LOAD.=

At the command =load= each front-rank man or skirmisher faces half
right and carries the right foot to the right, about one foot, to such
position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the
body; raises or lowers the piece and drops it into the left hand at
the balance, left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the height
of the breast. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt back,
takes a cartridge between the thumb and first two fingers and places
it in the receiver; places palm of the hand against the back of the
bolt handle; thrusts the bolt home with a quick motion, turning down
the handle, and carries the hand to the small of the stock. Each
rear-rank man moves to the right front, takes a similar position
opposite the interval to the right of his front-rank man, muzzle of
the piece extending beyond the front rank, and loads.

A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly
as practicable in the position of load.

If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if
kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting, the
elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down, the left hand
steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt
resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground.

For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down)
are designated as that of =load=. (139)

=702. FILL MAGAZINE.=

Take the position of load, if not already there, open the gate of the
magazine with the right thumb, take five cartridges from the box or
belt, and place them, with the bullets to the front, in the magazine,
turning the barrel slightly to the left to facilitate the insertion of
the cartridges; close the gate and carry the right hand to the small
of the stock.

To load from the magazine the command =from magazine= will be given
preceding that of =load=; the =cut-off= will be turned up on coming to
the position of =load=.

To resume loading from the belt the command from belt will be given
preceding the command =load=; the =cut-off= will be turned down on
coming to the position of =load=.

The commands =from magazine= and =from belt=, indicating the change in
the manner of loading, will not be repeated in subsequent commands.

The words =from belt= apply to cartridge box as well as belt.

In loading from the magazine care should be taken to push the bolt
fully forward and turn the handle down before drawing the bolt back,
as otherwise the extractor will not catch the cartridge in the
chamber, and jamming will occur with the cartridge following.

To fire from the magazine, the command =magazine fire= may be given at
any time. The cut-off is turned up and an increased rate of fire is
executed. After the magazine is exhausted the cut-off is turned down
and the firing continued, loading from the belt.

=Magazine fire= is employed only when, in the opinion of the platoon
leader or company commander, the maximum rate of fire becomes
necessary. (141)

=703. UNLOAD.=

All take the position of load, turn the =cut-off= up, if not already
there, turn the safety lock to the left, and alternately open and
close the chamber until all the cartridges are ejected. After the last
cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed and the trigger pulled. The
cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and returned to the box or
belt, and the piece brought to the order. (142)

=704. CLIP FIRE.=

Turn the cut-off up; =fire at will= (reloading from the magazine)
until the cartridges in the piece are exhausted; turn the cut-off
down; fill magazine; reload and take the position of =suspend firing=.
(148)

=705. CEASE FIRING.=

Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of
load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge
is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights
are laid down, and the piece is brought to the order.

=Cease firing= is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
position or to steady the men. (150)

APPENDIX B

War Department,
Office of the Chief of Staff,
Washington, December 2, 1911.

Paragraphs 747, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 797, and 798, Infantry Drill
Regulations, 1911, apply only to troops equipped with the Infantry
Equipment, model 1910. For troops equipped under General Orders, No.
23, War Department, 1906, and orders amendatory thereof, the
alternative paragraphs published herewith will govern.

By order of the Secretary of War:
LEONARD WOOD,
Major General, Chief of Staff.

Note. The paragraph numbers 747, 792, etc., given above, follow the
paragraphs below.

=706.= If the inspection is to include an examination of the blanket
rolls, the captain, before dismissing the company and after
inspecting the file closers, directs the lieutenants to remain in
place, closes ranks, stacks arms, dresses the company back to four
paces from the stacks, takes intervals, and commands: =1. Unsling, 2.
PACKS, 3. Open, 4. PACKS.=

At the second command, each man unslings his roll and places it on the
ground at his feet, rounded end to the front, square end of shelter
half to the right.

At the fourth command, the rolls are untied, laid perpendicular to the
front with the triangular end of the shelter half to the front,
opened, and unrolled to the left; each man prepares the contents of
his roll for inspection and resumes the attention.

The captain then returns saber, passes along the ranks and file
closers as before, inspects the rolls, returns to the right, draws
saber and commands: =1. Close, 2. PACKS.=

At the second command each man, with his shelter half smoothly spread
on the ground with buttons up and triangular end to the front, folds
his blanket once across its length and places it upon the shelter
half, fold toward the bottom edge one-half inch from the square end,
the same amount of canvas uncovered at the top and bottom. He then
places the parts of the pole on the side of the blanket next the
square end of shelter half, near and parallel to the fold, end of pole
about 6 inches from the edge of the blanket; nests the pins similarly
near the opposite edge of the blanket and distributes the other
articles carried in the roll; folds the triangular end and then the
exposed portion of the bottom of the shelter half over the blanket.

The two men in each file roll and fasten first the roll of the front
and then of the rear rank man. The file closers work similarly two and
two, or with the front rank man of a blank file. Each pair stands on
the folded side, rolls the blanket roll closely and buckles the
straps, passing the end of the strap through both keeper and buckle,
back over the buckle and under the keeper. With the roll so lying on
the ground that the edge of the shelter half can just be seen when
looking vertically downward, one end is bent upward and over to meet
the other, a clove hitch is taken with the guy rope first around the
end to which it is attached and then around the other end, adjusting
the length of rope between hitches to suit the wearer.

As soon as a file completes its two rolls each man places his roll in
the position it was in after being unslung and stands at attention.

All the rolls being completed, the captain commands: =1. Sling, 2.
PACKS.=

At the second command the rolls are slung, the end containing the pole
to the rear.

The company is assembled, takes arms, and the captain completes the
inspection as before. (747)

=707.= Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands:
=FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS.=

The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form a
file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first
sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the
company; blank files are filled by the file closers or by men taken
from the front rank; the remaining guide or guides, and file closers
form on a convenient flank.

Before forming column of platoons, preparatory to pitching tents, the
company may be redivided into two or more platoons, regardless of the
size of each. (792)

=708.= The captain then causes the company to take intervals as
described in the School of the Squad, and commands: =PITCH TENTS.=

At the command =pitch tents=, each man steps off obliquely to the
right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the butt
of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the front,
barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each front-rank man
then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground by the outside of
the right heel. All unsling and open the blanket rolls and take out
the shelter half, poles, and pins. Each then spreads his shelter half,
triangle to the rear, flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy,
rear-rank man's half on the right. The halves are then buttoned
together. Each front-rank man joins his pole, inserts the top in the
eyes of the halves, and holds the pole upright beside the bayonet
placed in the ground; his rear-rank man, using the pins in front, pins
down the front corners of the tent on the line of bayonets, stretching
the canvas taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye of the rope and
drives the pin at such distance in front of the pole as to hold the
rope taut. Both then go to the rear of the tent; the rear-rank man
adjusts the pole and the front-rank man drives the pins. The rest of
the pins are then driven by both men, the rear-rank man working on the
right.

As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges the contents of the
blanket roll in the tent and stands at attention in front of his own
half on line with the front guy rope pin.

The guy ropes, to have a uniform slope when the shelter tents are
pitched, should all be of the same length. (793)

=709.= When the blanket roll is not carried, intervals are taken as
described above; the position of the front pole is marked with a
bayonet and equipments are laid aside. The men then proceed to the
wagon, secure their rolls, return to their places, and pitch tents as
heretofore described. (794)

=710.= To pitch double shelter tent, the captain gives the same
commands as before, except =Take half interval= is given instead of
=Take interval=. In taking interval, each man follows the preceding
man at 2 paces. The captain then commands: =PITCH DOUBLE TENTS.=

The first sergeant places himself on the right of the right guide and
with him pitches a single shelter tent.

Only the odd numbers of the front rank mark the line with the bayonet.

The tent is formed by buttoning together the square ends of two single
tents. Two complete tents, except one pole, are used. Two guy ropes
are used at each end, the guy pins being placed in front of the corner
pins.

The tents are pitched by numbers 1 and 2, front and rear rank; and by
numbers 3 and 4, front and rear rank; the men falling in on the left
are numbered, counting off if necessary.

All the men spread their shelter halves on the ground the tent is to
occupy. Those of the front rank are placed with the triangular ends to
the front. All four halves are then buttoned together, first the
ridges and then the square ends. The front corners of the tent are
pinned by the front-rank men, the odd number holding the poles, the
even number driving the pins. The rear-rank men similarly pin the rear
corners.

While the odd numbers steady the poles, each even number of the front
rank takes his pole and enters the tent, where, assisted by the even
number of the rear rank, he adjusts the pole to the center eyes of the
shelter halves in the following order: (1) The lower half of the front
tent; (2) the lower half of the rear tent; (3) the upper half of the
front tent; (4) the upper half of the rear tent. The guy ropes are
then adjusted.

The tents having been pitched, the triangular ends are turned back,
contents of the rolls arranged, and the men stand at =attention=, each
opposite his own shelter half and facing out from the tent. (795)

FOOTNOTES:

[1] No. 1 of the first squad.

[2] Ordinarily about 20 yards wide.

[3] By Fire Direction is meant prescribing and generally directing the
firing.--Author.

[4] The "pack" includes blanket, poncho, and shelter tent.

[5] With a 4-foot white and red regimental signal flag.

CHAPTER II

MANUAL OF THE BAYONET

(The numbers following the paragraphs are those of the Manual of
the Bayonet, U. S. Army.)

=711.= The infantry soldier relies mainly on fire action to disable
the enemy, but he should know that personal combat is often necessary
to obtain success. Therefore, he must be instructed in the use of the
rifle and bayonet in hand-to-hand encounters. (1)

=712.= The object of this instruction is to teach the soldier how to
make effective use of the rifle and bayonet in personal combat; to
make him quick and proficient in handling his rifle; to give him an
accurate eye and a steady hand; and to give him confidence in the
bayonet in offense and defense. When skill in these exercises has been
acquired, the rifle will still remain a most formidable weapon at
close quarters should the bayonet be lost or disabled. (2)

=713.= Efficiency of organizations in bayonet fighting will be judged
by the skill shown by individuals in personal combat. For this purpose
pairs or groups of opponents, selected at random from among recruits
and trained soldiers, should engage in assaults, using the fencing
equipment provided for the purpose. (3)

=714.= Officers and specially selected and thoroughly instructed
noncommissioned officers will act as instructors. (4)

=715.= Instruction in bayonet combat should begin as soon as the
soldier is familiar with the handling of his rifle and will progress,
as far as practicable, in the order followed in the text. (5)

=716.= Instruction is ordinarily given on even ground, but practice
should also be had on uneven ground, especially in the attack and
defense of intrenchments. (6)

=717.= These exercises will not be used as a calisthenic drill. (7)

=718.= The principles of the commands are the same as those given in
paragraphs 58, 64, and 87. Intervals and distances will be taken as in
paragraphs 156 and 158, except that, in formations for bayonet
exercises, the men should be at least four paces apart in every
direction. (8)

=719.= Before requiring soldiers to take a position or execute a
movement for the first time, the instructor executes the same for the
purpose of illustration, after which he requires the soldiers to
execute the movement individually. Movements prescribed in this manual
will not be executed in cadence as the attempt to do so results in
incomplete execution and lack of vigor. Each movement will be executed
correctly as quickly as possible by every man. As soon as the
movements are executed accurately, the commands are given rapidly, as
expertness with the bayonet depends chiefly upon quickness of motion.
(9)

=720.= The exercises will be interrupted at first by short and
frequent rests. The rests will be less frequent as proficiency is
attained. Fatigue and exhaustion will be specially guarded against as
they prevent proper interest being taken in the exercises and delay
the progress of the instruction. Rests will be given from the position
of order arms in the manner prescribed in Infantry Drill Regulations.
(10)

THE BAYONET

NOMENCLATURE AND DESCRIPTION

=721.= The bayonet is a cutting and thrusting weapon consisting of
three principal parts, viz, the blade, guard, and grip. (11)

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

=722.= The blade has the following parts: Edge, false edge, back,
grooves, point, and tang. The length of the blade from guard to point
is 16 inches, the edge 14.5 inches, and the false edge 5.6 inches.
Length of the rifle, bayonet fixed, is 59.4 inches. The weight of the
bayonet is 1 pound; weight of rifle without bayonet is 8.69 pounds.
The center of gravity of the rifle, with bayonet fixed, is just in
front of the rear sight. (12)

I. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE RIFLE

=723.= The instructor explains the importance of good footwork and
impresses on the men the fact that quickness of foot and suppleness of
body are as important for attack and defense as is the ability to
parry and deliver a strong point or cut. (13)

=724.= All foot movements should be made from the position of _guard_.
As far as practicable, they will be made on the balls of the feet to
insure quickness and agility. No hard and fast rule can be laid down
as to the length of the various foot movements; this depends entirely
on the situations occurring in combat. (14)

=725.= The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor
commands:

=1. Bayonet exercise, 2. GUARD.=

At the command =guard=, half face to the right, carry back and place
the right foot about once and a half its length to the rear and about
3 inches to the right, the feet forming with each other an angle of
about 60°, weight of the body balanced equally on the balls of the
feet, knees slightly bent, palms of hands on hips, fingers to the
front, thumbs to the rear, head erect, head and eyes straight to the
front. (15)

=726.= To resume the attention, =1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.= The men take
the position of the soldier and fix their attention. (16)

=727. ADVANCE.= Advance the left foot quickly about once its length
follow immediately with the right foot the same distance. (17)

=728. RETIRE.= Move the right foot quickly to the rear about once its
length, follow immediately with the left foot the same distance. (18)

=729. 1. Front, 2. PASS.= Place the right foot quickly about once its
length in front of the left, advance the left foot to its proper
position in front of the right. (19)

=730. 1. Rear, 2. PASS.= Place the left foot quickly about once its
length in rear of the right, retire the right foot to its proper
position in rear of the left.

The passes are used to get quickly within striking distance or to
withdraw quickly therefrom. (20)

=731. 1. Right, 2. STEP.= Step to the right with the right foot about
once its length and place the left foot in its proper relative
position. (21)

=732. 1. Left, 2. STEP.= Step to the left with the left foot about
once its length and place the right foot in its proper relative
position.

These steps are used to circle around an enemy, to secure a more
favorable line of attack, or to avoid the opponent's attack. Better
ground or more favorable light may be gained in this way. In bayonet
fencing and in actual combat the foot first moved in stepping to the
right or left is the one which at the moment bears the least weight.
(22)

II. INSTRUCTION WITH THE RIFLE

=733.= The commands for and the execution of the foot movements are
the same as already given for movements without the rifle. (23)

=734.= The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor
commands:

=1. Bayonet exercise, 2. GUARD.=

At the second command take the position of guard (see par. 15); at the
same time throw the rifle smartly to the front, grasp the rifle with
the left hand just below the lower band, fingers between the stock and
gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the left, the right hand grasping
the small of the stock about 6 inches in front of the right hip,
elbows free from the body, bayonet point at the height of the chin.
(24) (See Fig. 2)

=735. 1. Order, 2. ARMS.=

Bring the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the position of
order arms, at the same time resuming the position of attention. (25)

=736.= During the preliminary instruction, attacks and defenses will
be executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after which they
may be executed from any position in which the rifle is held. (26)

ATTACKS

=737. 1. THRUST.=

Thrust the rifle quickly forward to the full length of the left arm,
turning the barrel to the left, and direct the point of the bayonet
at the point to be attacked, butt covering the right forearm. At the
same time straighten the right leg vigorously and throw the weight of
the body forward and on the left leg, the ball of the right foot
always on the ground. Guard is resumed immediately without command.

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

The force of the thrust is delivered principally with the right arm,
the left being used to direct the bayonet. The points at which the
attack should be directed are, in order of their importance, stomach,
chest, head, neck, and limbs. (27)

=738. 1. LUNGE.=

Executed in the same manner as the thrust, except that the left foot
is carried forward about twice its length. The left heel must always
be in rear of the left knee. Guard is resumed immediately without
command. Guard may also be resumed by advancing the right foot if, for
any reason, it is desired to hold the ground gained in lunging. In the
latter case, the preparatory command =forward= will be given. Each
method should be practiced. (28)

=739. 1. Butt, 2. STRIKE.=

Straighten right arm and right leg vigorously and swing butt of rifle
against point of attack, pivoting the rifle in the left hand at about
the height of the left shoulder, allowing the bayonet to pass to the
rear on the left side of the head. Guard is resumed without command.

The points of attack in their order of importance are, head, neck,
stomach, and crotch. (29)

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

=740. 1. Cut, 2. DOWN.=

Execute a quick downward stroke, edge of bayonet directed at point of
attack. Guard is resumed without command. (30)

=741. 1. Cut, 2. RIGHT (LEFT).=

With a quick extension of the arms execute a cut to the right (left),
directing the edge toward the point attacked. Guard is resumed without
command.

The cuts are especially useful against the head, neck, and hands of an
enemy. In executing left cut it should be remembered that the false,
or back edge, is only 5.6 inches long. The cuts can be executed in
continuation of strokes, thrusts, lunges, and parries. (31)

=742.= To direct an attack to the right, left, or rear the soldier
will change front as quickly as possible in the most convenient
manner, for example: =1. To the right rear, 2. Cut, 3. DOWN;= =1. To
the right, 2. LUNGE;= =1. To the left, 2. THRUST=, etc.

Whenever possible the impetus gained by the turning movement of the
body should be thrown into the attack. In general this will be best
accomplished by turning on the ball of the right foot.

These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of
guard is resumed at the completion of the movement. (32)

=743.= Good judgment of distance is essential. Accuracy in thrusting
and lunging is best attained by practicing these attacks against rings
or other convenient openings, about 3 inches in diameter, suitably
suspended at desired heights. (33)

[Illustration: Fig. 6.]

=744.= The thrust and lunges at rings should first be practiced by
endeavoring to hit the opening looked at. This should be followed by
directing the attack against one opening while looking at another.
(34)

=745.= The soldier should also experience the effect of actual
resistance offered to the bayonet and the butt of the rifle in
attacks. This will be taught by practicing attacks against a dummy.
(35)

=746.= Dummies should be constructed in such a manner as to permit the
execution of attacks without injury to the point or edge of the
bayonet or to the barrel or stock of the rifle. A suitable dummy can
be made from pieces of rope about 5 feet in length plaited closely
together into a cable between 6 and 12 inches in diameter. Old rope is
preferable. Bags weighted and stuffed with hay, straw, shavings, etc.,
are also suitable. (36)

[Illustration: Fig. 7.]

DEFENSES

=747.= In the preliminary drills in the defenses the position of guard
is resumed, by command, after each parry. When the men have become
proficient, the instructor will cause them to resume the position of
guard instantly without command after the execution of each parry.
(37)

=748. 1. Parry, 2. RIGHT.=

Keeping the right hand in the guard position, move the rifle sharply
to the right with the left arm, so that the bayonet point is about 6
inches to the right. (38)

=749. 1. Parry, 2. LEFT.=

Move the rifle sharply to the left front with both hands so as to
cover the point attacked. (39)

=750. 1. Parry, 2. HIGH.=

Raise the rifle with both hands high enough to clear the line of
vision, barrel downward, point of the bayonet to the left front.

When necessary to raise the rifle well above the head, it may be
supported between the thumb and forefinger of the left hand. This
position will be necessary against attacks from higher elevations,
such, as men mounted or on top of parapets. (40)

[Illustration: Fig. 8]

[Illustration: Fig. 9]

=751. 1. Low parry, 2. RIGHT (LEFT).=

Carry the point of the bayonet down until it is at the height of the
knee, moving the point of the bayonet sufficiently to the right (left)
to keep the opponent's attacks clear of the point threatened.

=752.= These parries are rarely used, as an attack below the waist
leaves the head and body exposed. (41)

[Illustration: Fig. 10]

[Illustration: Fig. 11]

=753.= Parries must not be too wide or sweeping, but sharp, short
motions, finished with a jerk or quick catch. The hands should, as far
as possible, be kept in the line of attack. Parries against =butt
strike= are made by quickly moving the guard so as to cover the point
attacked. (42)

=754.= To provide against attack from the right, left, or rear the
soldier will change front as quickly as possible in the most
convenient manner, for example, =1. To the left rear, 2. Parry, 3.
HIGH;= =1. To the right, 2. Parry, 3. RIGHT=, etc.

These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of
guard is resumed at the completion of the movement.

In changing front for the purpose of attack or defense, if there is
danger of wounding a comrade, the rifle should first be brought to a
vertical position. (43)

III. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE BAYONET

=755. 1. Club rifle, 2 SWING.=

Being at order arms at the preparatory command quickly raise and turn
the rifle, regrasping it with both hands between the rear sight and
muzzle, barrel down, thumbs around the stock and toward the butt; at
the sane time raise the rifle above shoulder farthest from the
opponent, butt elevated and to the rear, elbows slightly bent and
knees straight. Each individual takes such position of the feet,
shoulders, and hands as best accords with his natural dexterity.
=SWING.= Tighten the grasp of the hands and swing the rifle to the
front and downward, directing it at the head of the opponent and
immediately return to the position of =club rifle= by completing the
swing of the rifle downward and to the rear. Repeat by the command.
=SWING.=

The rifle should be swung with sufficient force to break through any
guard or parry that may be interposed.

Being at =club rifle=, order arms is resumed by command.

The use of this attack against dummies or in fencing is prohibited.
(44)

[Illustration: Fig. 12]

=756.= The position of club rifle may be taken from any position of
the rifle prescribed in the Manual of Arms. It will not be taken in
personal combat unless the emergency is such as to preclude the use of
the bayonet. (45)

IV. COMBINED MOVEMENTS

=757.= The purpose of combined movements is to develop more vigorous
attacks and more effective defenses than are obtained by the single
movements; to develop skill in passing from attack to defense and the
reverse. Every movement to the front should be accompanied by an
attack, which is increased in effectiveness by the forward movement of
the body. Every movement to the rear should ordinarily be accompanied
by a parry and should always be followed by an attack. Movements to
the right or left may be accompanied by =attacks= or =defenses=. (46)

=758.= Not more than three movements will be used in any combination.
The instructor should first indicate the number of movements that are
to be combined as =two movements= or =three movements=. The execution
is determined by one command of execution, and the position of guard
is taken upon the completion of the last movement only.

EXAMPLES

=Front pass and LUNGE.=
=Right step and THRUST.=
=Left step and low parry RIGHT.=
=Rear pass, parry left and LUNGE.=
=Lunge and cut RIGHT.=
=Parry right and parry HIGH.=
=Butt strike and cut DOWN.=
=Thrust and parry HIGH.=
=Parry high and LUNGE.=
=Advance, thrust and cut RIGHT.=
=Right step, parry left and cut DOWN.=
=To the left, butt strike and cut DOWN.=
=To the right rear, cut down and butt STRIKE.= (47)

=759.= Attacks against dummies will be practiced. The approach will be
made against the dummies both in quick time and double time. (48)

V. PRACTICAL BAYONET COMBAT

=760.= The principles of practical bayonet combat should be taught as
far as possible during the progress of instruction in bayonet
exercises. (49)

=761.= The soldier must be continually impressed with the extreme
importance of the offensive due to its moral effect. Should an attack
fail, it should be followed immediately by another attack before the
opponent has an opportunity to assume the offensive. Keep the opponent
on the defensive. If, due to circumstances, it is necessary to take
the defensive, constantly watch for an opportunity to assume the
offensive and take immediate advantage of it. (50)

=762.= Observe the ground with a view to obtaining the best footing.
Time for this will generally be too limited to permit more than a
single hasty glance. (51)

=763.= In personal combat watch the opponent's eyes if they can be
plainly seen, and do not fix the eyes on his weapon nor upon the
point of your attack. If his eyes can not be plainly seen, as in
night attacks, watch the movements of his weapon and of his body. (52)

=764.= Keep the body well covered and deliver attacks vigorously. The
point of the bayonet should always be kept as nearly as possible in
the line of attack. The less the rifle is moved upward, downward, to
the right, or to the left, the better prepared the soldier is for
attack or defense. (53)

=765.= Constantly watch for a chance to attack the opponent's left
hand. His position of guard will not differ materially from that
described in paragraph 24. If his bayonet is without a cutting edge,
he will be at a great disadvantage. (34)

=766.= The butt is used for close and sudden attacks. It is
particularly useful in riot duty. From the position of port arms a
sentry can strike a severe blow with the butt of the rifle. (55)

=767.= Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be careful that the
muzzle of the rifle is not grasped. All the swordsman's energies will
be directed toward getting past the bayonet. Attack him with short
stabbing thrusts, and keep him beyond striking distance of his weapon.
(56)

=768.= The adversary may attempt a greater extension in the thrust and
lunge by quitting the grasp of his piece with the left hand and
advancing the right as far as possible. When this is done, a sharp
parry may cause him to lose control of his rifle, leaving him exposed
to a counter-attack, which should follow promptly. (57)

=769.= Against odds a small number of men can fight to best advantage
by grouping themselves so as to prevent their being attacked from
behind. (58)

=770.= In fighting a mounted man armed with a saber every effort must
be made to get on his near or left side, because here his reach is
much shorter and his parries much weaker. If not possible to disable
such an enemy, attack his horse and then renew the attack on the
horseman. (59)

=771.= In receiving night attacks the assailant's movements can be
best observed from the kneeling or prone position, as his approach
generally brings him against the sky line. When he arrives within
attacking distance rise quickly and lunge well forward at the middle
of his body. (60)

VI. FENCING EXERCISES

=772.= Fencing exercises in two lines consist of combinations of
thrusts, parries, and foot movements executed at command or at will,
the opponent replying with suitable parries and returns. (61)

=773.= The instructor will inspect the entire fencing equipment before
the exercise begins and assure himself that everything is in such
condition as will prevent accidents. (62)

=774.= The men equip themselves and form in two lines at the order,
facing each other, with intervals of about 4 paces between files and a
distance of about 2 paces between lines. One line is designated as
number 1; the other, number 2. Also as attack and defense. (63)

=775.= The opponents being at the order facing each other, the
instructor commands: =SALUTE.=

Each man, with eyes on his opponent, carries the left hand smartly to
the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended and
joined, forearm horizontal, forefinger touching the bayonet. (Two)
Drop the arm smartly by the side.

This salute is the fencing salute.

All fencing exercises and all fencing at will between individuals will
begin and terminate with the formal courtesy of the fencing salute.
(64)

=776.= After the fencing salute has been rendered the instructor
commands: =1. Fencing exercise, 2. GUARD.=

At the command =guard= each man comes to the position of =guard=,
heretofore defined, bayonets crossed, each man's bayonet bearing
lightly to the right against the corresponding portion of the
opponent's bayonet. The position is known as the engage or engage
right. (65)

=777.= Being at the =engage right: ENGAGE LEFT=.

The attack drops the point of his bayonet quickly until clear of his
opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the
right; bayonets are crossed similarly as in the engaged position, each
man's bayonet bearing lightly to the left against the corresponding
portion of the opponent's bayonet. (66)

=778.= Being at =engage left: ENGAGE RIGHT=.

The attack quickly drops the point of his bayonet until clear of his
opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the
left and =engages=. (67)

=779.= Being =engaged: ENGAGE LEFT AND RIGHT=.

The attack =engages left= and then immediately =engages right=. (68)

=780.= Being =engaged left: ENGAGE RIGHT AND LEFT=.

The attack =engages right= and then immediately =engages left=. (69)

=781. 1. Number one, ENGAGE RIGHT (LEFT); 2. Number two, COUNTER.=

Number one executes the movement ordered, as above; number two quickly
drops the point of his bayonet and circles it upward to the original
position. (70)

=782.= In all fencing while maintaining the pressure in the engage, a
certain freedom of motion of the rifle is allowable, consisting of the
play, or up-and-down motion, of one bayonet against the other. This is
necessary to prevent the opponent from divining the intended attack.
It also prevents his using the point of contact as a pivot for his
assaults. In changing from one engage to the other the movement is
controlled by the left hand, the right remaining stationary. (71)

=783.= After some exercise in =engage=, =engage left=, and =counter=,
exercises will be given in the =assaults=. (72)

ASSAULTS

=784.= The part of the body to be attacked will be designated by name
as head, neck, chest, stomach, legs. No attacks will be made below the
knees. The commands are given and the movements for each line are
first explained thoroughly by the instructor; the execution begins at
the command =assault=. Number one executes the attack, and number two
parries; conversely, at command, number two attacks and number one
parries. (73)

=785.= For convenience in instruction assaults are divided into
=simple attacks=, =counter-attacks=, =attack on the rifle=, and
=feints=. (74)

SIMPLE ATTACKS

=786.= Success in these attacks depends on quickness of movement.
There are three simple attacks--the =straight=, the =disengagement=,
and the =counter disengagement=. They are not preceded by a feint.
(75)

=787.= In the =straight= the bayonet is directed straight at an
opening from the engaged position. Contact with the opponent's rifle
may, or may not, be abandoned while making it. If the opening be high
or low, contact with the rifle will usually be abandoned on commencing
the attack. If the opening be near his guard, the light pressure used
in the engage may be continued in the attack.

Example: Being at the =engage right=, =1. Number one=, at neck (head,
chest, right leg, etc.), =thrust; 2. Number two, parry right; 3.
ASSAULT.= (76)

=788.= In the =disengagement= contact with the opponent's rifle is
abandoned and the point of the bayonet is =circled under= or =over=
his bayonet or rifle and directed into the opening attacked. This
attack is delivered by one continuous spiral movement of the bayonet
from the moment contact is abandoned.

Example: Being at the =engage right=, =1. Number one=, at stomach
(left chest, left leg, etc.), =thrust, 2. Number two, parry left=
(etc.); =3. ASSAULT.= (77)

=789.= In the =counter disengagement= a swift attack is made into the
opening disclosed while the opponent is attempting to change the
engagement of his rifle. It is delivered by one continuous spiral
movement of the bayonet into the opening.

Example: Being at the =engage right=, =1. Number two, engage left; 2.
Number one=, at chest, =thrust; 3. Number two, parry left; 4.
ASSAULT.=

Number two initiates the movement, number one thrusts as soon as the
opening is made, and number two then attempts to parry. (78)

=790.= A =counter-attack= or =return= is one made instantly after or
in continuation of a parry. The parry should be as narrow as possible.
This makes it more difficult for the opponent to recover and counter
parry. The counter-attack should also be made at, or just before, the
full extension of the opponent's attack, as when it is so made, a
simple extension of the arms will generally be sufficient to reach the
opponent's body.

Example: Being at =engage=, =1. Number two=, at chest, =lunge; 2.
Number one, parry right=, and at stomach (chest, head, etc.), =thrust;
3. ASSAULT.= (79)

ATTACKS ON THE RIFLE

=791.= These movements are made for the purpose of forcing or
disclosing an opening into which an attack can be made. They are the
=press=, the =beat=, and the =twist=. (80)

=792.= In the =press= the attack quickly presses against the
opponent's bayonet or rifle with his own and continues the pressure as
the attack is delivered.

Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, press=, and at chest,
=thrust; 2. Number two, parry right; 3. ASSAULT.= (81)

=793.= The attack by =disengagement= is particularly effective
following =the press=.

Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, press=, and at
stomach, =thrust; 2. Number two, low parry left; 3. ASSAULT.= (82)

=794.= The =beat= is an attack in which a sharp blow struck against
the opponent's rifle for the purpose of forcing him to expose an
opening into which an attack immediately follows. It is used when
there is but slight opposition or no contact of rifles.

Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, beat= and at stomach
(chest, etc.), =thrust; 2. Number two, parry left; 3. ASSAULT.= (83)

=795.= In the =twist= the rifle is crossed over the opponent's rifle
or bayonet and his bayonet forced downward with a circular motion and
a straight attack made into the opening. It requires superior strength
on the part of the attack.

Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, twist=, and at
stomach, =thrust; 2. Number two, low parry, left; 3. ASSAULT.= (84)

FEINTS

=796.= Feints are movements which threaten or simulate attacks and are
made with a view to inducing an opening or parry that exposes the
desired point of attack. They are either single or double, according
to the number of such movements made by the attack. (85)

=797.= In order that the attack may be changed quickly, as little
force as possible is put into a feint.

Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, feint= head =thrust=
at stomach, =lunge; 2. Number two, parry right and low parry right; 3.
ASSAULT.=

Number one executes the feint and then the attack. Number two executes
both parries. (86)

=798.= In double feints first one part of the body and then another is
threatened and a third attacked.

Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, feint straight thrust=
at chest; =disengagement= at chest; at stomach, =lunge; 2. Number two,
parry right, parry left,= and =low parry left; 3. ASSAULT.= (87)

=799.= An opening may be offered or procured by opposition, as in the
=press= or =beat=. (88)

=800.= In fencing exercises every feint should at first be parried.
When the defense is able to judge or divine the character of the
attack the feint is not necessarily parried, but may be nullified by a
counter feint. (89)

=801.= A =counter feint= is a feint following the opponent's feint or
following a parry of his attack and generally occurs in combined
movements. (90)

COMBINED MOVEMENTS

=802.= When the men have become thoroughly familiar with the various
foot movements, parries, guards, attacks, feints, etc., the instructor
combines several of them and gives the commands in quick succession,
increasing the rapidity and number of movements as the men become more
skillful. Opponents will be changed frequently.

1. Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, by disengagement=
at chest, =thrust; 2. Number two, parry left, right step= (left foot
first), and =lunge; 3. ASSAULT.=

2. Example: Being at =engage left=, =1. Number one, press and lunge;
2. Number two, parry right, left step,= and =thrust; 3. ASSAULT.=

3. Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, by disengagement=
at chest, =thrust; 2. Number two, parry left, front pass=, and at head
=butt strike; 3. Number one, right step; 4. ASSAULT.= (91)

=803.= Examples 1 and 2 are typical of movements known as =cross
counters=, and example No. 3 of movements known as =close counters=.
(92)

=804.= A =chancery= is an attack by means of which the opponent is
disarmed, which causes him to lose control of his rifle, or which
disables his weapon. (93)

=805.= When the different combinations are executed with sufficient
skill the instructor will devise series of movements to be memorized
and executed at the command assault. The accuracy and celerity of the
movements will be carefully watched by the instructor, with a view to
the correction of faulty execution. (94)

=806.= It is not intended to restrict the number of movements, but to
leave to the discretion of company commanders and the ingenuity of
instructors the selection of such other exercises as accord with the
object of the drill. (95)

VII. FENCING AT WILL

=807.= As satisfactory progress is made the instructor will proceed to
the exercises at will, by which is meant assaults between two men,
each endeavoring to hit the other and to avoid being hit himself.
Fencing at will should not be allowed to degenerate into random
attacks and defenses. (96)

=808.= The instructor can supervise but one pair of combatants at a
time. Frequent changes should be made so that the men may learn
different methods of attack and defense from each other. (97)

=809.= The contest should begin with simple, careful movements, with a
view to forming a correct opinion of the adversary; afterwards
everything will depend on coolness, rapid and correct execution of the
movements and quick perception of the adversary's intentions. (98)

=810.= Continual retreat from the adversary's attack and frequent
dodging to escape attacks should be avoided. The offensive should be
continually encouraged. (99)

=811.= In fencing at will, when no commands are given, opponents
facing each other at the position of order arms, salute. They then
immediately and simultaneously assume the position of guard, rifles
engaged. Neither man may take the position of guard before his
opponent has completed his salute. The choice of position is decided
before the salute. (100)

=812.= The opponents being about two paces apart and the fencing
salute having been rendered, the instructor commands, =1. At will, 2.
ASSAULT=, after which either party has the right to attack. To
interrupt the contest the instructor will command =HALT=, at which the
combatants will immediately come to the order. To terminate the
contest the instructor will command, =1. Halt, 2. SALUTE=, at which
the combatants will immediately come to the order, salute, and remove
their masks. (101)

=813.= When men have acquired confidence in fencing at will, one
opponent should be required to advance upon the other in quick time at
=charge bayonet=, from a distance not to exceed 10 yards, and deliver
an attack. As soon as a hit is made by either opponent the instructor
commands, =HALT=, and the assault terminates. Opponents alternate in
assaulting. The assailant is likewise required to advance at double
time from a distance not exceeding 20 yards and at a run from a
distance not exceeding 30 yards. (102)

=814.= The instructor will closely observe the contest and decide
doubtful points. He will at once stop the contest upon the slightest
indication of temper. After conclusion of the combat he will comment
on the action of both parties, point out errors and deficiencies and
explain how they may be avoided in the future. (103)

[Illustration: Fig. 13]

=815.= As additional instruction, the men may be permitted to wield
the rifle left handed, that is on the left side of the body, left hand
at the small of the stock. Many men will be able to use this method
to advantage. It is also of value in case the left hand is wounded.
(104)

=816.= After men have fenced in pairs, practice should be given in
fencing between groups, equally and unequally divided. When
practicable, intrenchments will be used in fencing of this character.

In group fencing it will be necessary to have a sufficient number of
umpires to decide hits. An individual receiving a hit is withdrawn at
once from the bout, which is decided in favor of the group having the
numerical superiority at the end. The fencing salute is not required
in group fencing. (105)

RULES FOR FENCING AT WILL

=817.= 1. Hits on the legs below the knees will not be counted. No hit
counts unless, in the opinion of the instructor, it has sufficient
force to disable.

2. Upon receiving a hit, call out "hit."

3. After receiving a fair hit a counter-attack is not permitted. A
position of engage is taken.

4. A second or third hit in a combined attack will be counted only
when the first hit was not called.

5. When it is necessary to stop the contest--for example, because of
breaking of weapons or displacement of means of protection--take the
position of the order.

6. When it is necessary to suspend the assault for any cause, it will
not be resumed until the adversary is ready and in condition to defend
himself.

7. Attacks directed at the crotch are prohibited in fencing.

8. Stepping out of bounds, when established, counts as a hit. (106)

SUGGESTIONS FOR FENCING AT WILL

=818.= When engaging in an assault, first study the adversary's
position and proceed by false attacks, executed with speed, to
discover, if possible, his instinctive parries. In order to draw the
adversary out and induce him to expose that part of the body at which
the attack is to be made, it is advisable to simulate an attack by a
feint and then make the real attack. (107)

=819.= Return attacks should be frequently practiced, as they are
difficult to parry, and the opponent is within easier reach and more
exposed. The return can be made a continuation of the parry, as there
is no previous warning of its delivery, although it should always be
expected. Returns are made without lunging if the adversary can be
reached by thrusts or cuts. (108)

=820.= Endeavor to overcome the tendency to make a return without
knowing where it will hit. Making returns blindly is a bad habit and
leads to instinctive returns--that is, habitual returns with certain
attacks from certain parries--a fault which the skilled opponent will
soon discover. (109)

=821.= Do not draw the rifle back preparatory to thrusting and lunging
(110)

=822.= The purpose of fencing at will is to teach the soldier as many
forms of simple, effective attacks and defenses as possible.
Complicated and intricate movements should not be attempted. (111)

HINTS FOR INSTRUCTORS

=823.= The influence of the instructor is great. He must be master of
his weapon, not only to show the various movements, but also to lead
in the exercises at will. He should stimulate the zeal of the men and
arouse pleasure in the work. Officers should qualify themselves as
instructors by fencing with each other. (112)

LESSONS OF THE EUROPEAN WAR

=824. Modification of our system of bayonet combat suggested.= The
above gives, in toto, the system of bayonet exercises and combat at
present prescribed by the War Department in the =Manual of the
Bayonet=. However, the use of the bayonet in the present European war,
which has given that weapon an importance and prominence heretofore
unheard of, suggests, as indicated below, certain modifications of our
system.

(a) _Attack not to be directed against chest._ The attack should be
directed at the adversary's neck or stomach, and not against his
chest; for, if the bayonet is driven into the chest, there will
probably be difficulty in withdrawing it, and while your bayonet is
being so held, imbedded in your adversary's chest, you are at the
mercy of any other enemy soldier free to strike you.

(b) _Mêlée on parapet._ When the first wave of an attacking line
reaches the enemy's trench, it is usually met outside the trench, the
mêlée taking place on the parapet, and fortunate is the man who is
skilled in handling his bayonet. Such a man has a much greater chance
to live through the mêlée than the one who is not skillful in using
his bayonet. In the excitement and confusion of this mêlée the
greatest possible care must be taken not to stab some of your own men
in the back.

(c) _Position of feet._ The British have been teaching their men to
keep both feet pointing toward the enemy instead of having the right
foot turned to the right, as in our system. Note the position of the
feet in Figs. 15-18.

(d) _The "Short point" (or "Short thrust") and the "Jab."_ There are
two attacks used by European troops which we might learn with profit.
They are the "Short point" (or "Short thrust") and the "Jab."

POSITION OF GUARD

[Illustration: Fig. 14]

(e) _The short point (or short thrust)._ The _short point_ (or _short
thrust_) is taken from the position of guard (Fig. 14), by slipping
the left hand up to the grip of the bayonet, grasping it and the
barrel, as shown in this figure:

[Illustration: Fig. 15]

The rifle is then drawn back to the fullest extent of the right arm,
thus:

[Illustration: Fig. 16]

and a vigorous thrust is made at the objective (Fig. 15), immediately
after which the bayonet is withdrawn vigorously, the left hand relaxed
and the position of guard (Fig. 14) is resumed by pushing the rifle
smartly forward until the left hand is in its proper place.

It should be practiced on sand bags or other targets in positions at
the height of the rifle, above it and below it.

(f) _The jab._ The jab is taken from the first position of the "Short
point" (Fig. 15), by slipping the right hand up to the left as the
rifle is drawn back to make the "Short thrust" (Fig. 17).

[Illustration: Fig. 17]

Then make a vigorous _upward_ thrust (Fig. 18) which should be aimed
at the adversary's throat.

[Illustration: Fig. 18]

This may be practiced combined with the short thrust or the ordinary
thrust. It may also be practiced with a run toward the target. It is a
useful attack at close quarters.

(g) _The butt._ The rifle butt is used with great effect at close
quarters, the blows being directed against an adversary's jaw or in
the region of the heart.

(h) _Tripping adversary._ The men are taught how to trip up an enemy
and how to use their knees in throwing their opponents off their
balance.

(i) _Withdrawing the bayonet._ After driving the bayonet into an
opponent, then the first consideration is to get it out of his body.
This may be done by slipping the left hand up to the bayonet grip and
exerting a _vigorous_ pull, which is immediately followed by a return
to the position of guard.

(j) _Points in training._ In the first stages of training, special
attention is paid to a firm grip and proper handling of arms; then the
greatest attention is given to "direction" when thrusting, lunging,
and parrying.

Until these essentials have been thoroughly mastered, quickness should
not be insisted upon.

Confidence comes after continued practice, and quickness and vigor
will come with confidence.

After the men are taught to make all the attacks as individuals they
should be given practice in them as groups.

Sandbags with discs marked on them to provide targets are used in
instructing the British armies.

These bags are suspended from trees or trestles, or are put into
trenches or pits, and are also placed on the ground.

An excellent scheme is used in teaching the men what the shock of a
charge is like. The men are divided into two or more groups and are
equipped with fencing outfits. One group is designated as the defense
and is placed in trenches. The other groups are the attackers. They
may be sent forward in waves or in one line. To make their advance
more realistic they have to get over or around obstacles. To take in
all phases the attackers are made stronger than the defense and the
defense retires--whereupon the attackers endeavor to disable them by
thrusting at the kidneys. Likewise the defense is made strong enough
to drive off the offense.

In the charge the men are taught to run at the "High Port" (the rifle
is held as in "Port arms," but is carried well above the head). The
rifle is brought down to guard just before the enemy is met.

APPENDIX D

SEPTEMBER 15, 1917

INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS, 1911.

Paragraphs 120, 143, 146, 185, 187, 189, 194, 646, Infantry Drill
Regulations, 1911, apply only to troops armed with the United States
rifle, Model 1903. For troops armed with the United States rifle,
Model 1917 (Enfield), the alternative paragraphs published herewith
will govern.

By order of the Secretary of War:

=120.= The following rules govern the carrying of the piece:

First. The piece is not carried with cartridges in either the chamber
or the magazine except when especially ordered. When so loaded, or
supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked; that is, with
safety lock turned to the "=Safe.=" At all other times it is carried
unlocked, with the trigger pulled.

Second. Whenever troops are formed under arms, pieces are immediately
inspected at the commands: =1. INSPECTION, 2. ARMS, 3. ORDER (Right
shoulder port), 4. ARMS.=

A similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal.

If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine they are removed
and placed in the belt.

Third. The bayonet is not fixed except in bayonet exercise, on guard,
or for combat.

Fourth. =Fall in= is executed with the piece at the order arms. =Fall
out=, =rest=, and =at ease= are executed as without arms. On resuming
attention the position of order arms is taken.

Fifth. If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the piece is
brought to the right shoulder, at the command =MARCH=, the three
motions corresponding with the first three steps. Movements may be
executed at the trail by prefacing the preparatory command with the
words =at trail=; as =1. AT TRAIL, FORWARD, 2. MARCH.= The trail is
taken at the command =MARCH=.

Sixth. The piece is brought to the order on halting. The execution of
the order begins when the halt is completed.

Seventh. A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without
arms.

=143.= Being at order arms: =1. UNFIX, 2. BAYONET.=

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest;
grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right hand, pressing
the spring with the forefinger of the left hand; raise the bayonet
until the handle is about 12 inches above the muzzle of the piece; the
point to the left, back of the hand toward the body, and glancing at
the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing between the left
arm and the body; regrasp the piece with the right hand and resume the
order.

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet
from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the
most convenient manner.

If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the
most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the
original position.

Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity, but
not in cadence.

=146.= Being at inspection arms: =1. ORDER (Right shoulder, port), 2.
ARMS.=

At the preparatory command press the follower down with the fingers of
the left hand, then push the bolt forward just enough to engage the
follower, raise the fingers of the left hand, push the bolt forward,
turn the handle down, pull the trigger, and resume =port arms=. At the
command =ARMS=, complete the movement ordered.

To Load

=185.= Being in line or skirmish line at halt: =1. WITH DUMMY (Blank
or ball) CARTRIDGES, 2. LOAD.=

At the command =load= each front rank man or skirmisher faces half
right and carries the right foot to the right, about 1 foot, to such a
position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the
body; raises or lowers the piece and drops it into the left hand at
the balance, left thumb extended along the stock and muzzle at the
height of the breast. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt
back, takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in the clip slots,
places the thumb on the powder space at the top cartridge, the fingers
extending around the piece and tips resting on the magazine floor
plate; forces the cartridges into the magazine by pressing down with
the thumb; without removing the clip, thrusts the bolt home, turning
down the handle; turns the safety lock to the "Safe" and carries the
hand to the small of the stock. Each rear rank man moves to the right
front, takes a similar position opposite the interval to the right of
his front rank man, muzzle of the piece extending beyond the front
rank, and loads.

A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly
as practicable in the position of load.

For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down)
are designated as that of =load=.

=186.= For purposes of simulating firing, =1. SIMULATE, 2. LOAD=,
raise the bolt handle as in the preceding paragraph, draw the bolt
back until the cocking piece engages, then close the bolt, and turn
the bolt handle down.

The recruits are first taught to simulate loading and firing; after a
few lessons dummy cartridges are used. Later, blank cartridges may be
used.

Omit last paragraph.

=187. Unload:= Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and
move the bolt alternately backward and forward until all the
cartridges are ejected. After the last cartridge is ejected the
chamber is closed by pressing the follower down with the fingers of
the left hand, to engage it under the bolt, and then thrusting the
bolt home. The trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then picked up,
cleaned, and returned to the belt and the piece is brought to the
order.

=189.= [Last paragraph]. To continue the firing: =1. AIM, 2. SQUAD, 3.
FIRE.=

Each command is executed as previously explained. =Load= is executed
by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt with the right hand,
leaving the safety lock at the "Ready."

=194. Cease firing:= Firing stops; pieces are loaded and locked; the
sights are laid down and the piece is brought to the order. Cease
firing is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of position or
to steady the men.

Company Inspection

=646.= Being in line at halt: =1. OPEN RANKS, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march= the front rank executes right dress; the rear
rank and the file closers march backward 4 steps, halt, and execute
right dress; the lieutenants pass around their respective flanks and
take post, facing to the front, 3 paces in front of the center of
their respective platoons. The captain aligns the front rank, rear
rank, and file closers, takes post 3 paces in front of the right
guide, facing to the left and commands: =1. FRONT, 2. PREPARE FOR
INSPECTION.=

Having inspected the lieutenants, the captain proceeds to the right of
the company. Each man, as the captain approaches him executes
=inspection arms=.

The captain takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just
below the lower band, the man dropping his hands; the captain inspects
the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same position as in
receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes it with the left
hand at the balance and executes =order arms=.

As the captain returns the piece the next man executes =inspection
arms=, and so on through the company.

Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man executes
=order arms= as soon as the captain passes to the next man.

The inspection is from right to left in front, and from left to right
in rear of each rank and of the line of file closers.

When approached by the captain the first sergeant executes =inspection
saber=. Enlisted men armed with the pistol execute =inspection pistol=
by drawing the pistol from the holster and holding it diagonally
across the body, barrel up, and 6 inches in front of the neck, muzzle
pointing up and to the left. The pistol is returned to the holster as
soon as the captain passes.

Upon completion of the inspection the captain takes post facing to the
left in front of the right guide and on line with the lieutenants and
commands: =1. CLOSE RANKS, 2. MARCH.=

At the command march the lieutenants resume their posts in line; the
rear rank closes to 40 inches, each man covering his file leader; the
file closers close to 2 paces from the rear rank.

CHAPTER III

MANUAL OF PHYSICAL TRAINING

(EXTRACTS)

METHODS

=825.= In the employment of the various forms of physical training it
is necessary that well-defined methods should be introduced in order
that the object of this training may be attained in the most thorough
and systematic manner. Whenever it is possible this work should be
conducted out of doors. In planning these methods the following
factors must be considered:

(_a_) The condition and physical aptitude of the men.

(_b_) The facilities.

(_c_) The time.

The question of the _physical aptitude_ and _general condition_, etc.,
of the men is a very important one, and it should always determine the
nature and extent of the task expected of them; never should the work
be made the determining factor. In general, it is advisable to divide
the men into three classes, viz., the recruit class, the intermediate
class, and the advanced class. The work for each class should fit the
capabilities of the members of that class and in every class it should
be arranged progressively.

_Facilities_ are necessarily to be considered in any plan of
instruction, but as most posts are now equipped with better than
average facilities the plan laid down in this Manual will answer all
purposes.

_Time_ is a decidedly important factor, and no plan can be made unless
those in charge of this work know exactly how much time they have at
their disposal. During the suspension of drills five periods a week,
each of 45 minutes duration, should be devoted to physical training;
during the drill period a 15-minute drill in setting-up exercises
should be ordered on drill days. The time of day, too, is important.
_When possible, these drills should be held in the morning about two
hours after breakfast, and at no time should they be held immediately
before or after a meal._

Insist upon accurate and precise execution of every movement. By doing
so those other essential qualities, besides strength and
endurance--activity, agility, gracefulness, and accuracy--will also be
developed.

Exercises which require activity and agility, rather than those that
require strength only, should be selected.

It should be constantly borne in mind that these exercises are the
means and not the end; and if there be a doubt in the mind of the
instructor as to the effect of an exercise, it is always well to err
upon the side of safety. _Underdoing is rectifiable; overdoing is
often not._ The object of this work is not the development of expert
gymnasts, but the development of physically sound men by means of a
system in which the chances of bodily injury are reduced to a minimum.
When individuals show a special aptitude for gymnastics they may be
encouraged, within limits, to improve this ability, but never at the
expense of their fellows.

The drill should be made as attractive as possible, and this can best
be accomplished by employing the mind as well as the body. The
movements should be as varied as possible, thus constantly offering
the men something new to make them keep their minds on their work. A
movement many times repeated presents no attraction and is executed in
a purely mechanical manner, which should always be discountenanced.

Short and frequent drills should be given in preference to long ones,
which are liable to exhaust all concerned, and exhaustion means lack
of interest and benefit. All movements should be carefully explained,
and, if necessary, illustrated by the instructor.

The lesson should begin with the less violent exercises, gradually
working up to those that are more so, then gradually working back to
the simpler ones, so that the men at the close of the drill will be in
as nearly a normal condition as possible.

When one portion of the body is being exercised, care should be taken
that the other parts remain quiet as far as the conformation of the
body will allow. The men must learn to exercise any one part of the
body independent of the other part.

Everything in connection with physical training should be such that
the men look forward to it with pleasure, not with dread, for the mind
exerts more influence over the human body than all the gymnastic
paraphernalia that was ever invented.

Exercise should be carried on as much as possible in the open air; at
all times in pure, dry air.

Never exercise the men to the point of exhaustion. If there is
evidence of panting, faintness, fatigue, or pain, the exercise should
be stopped at once, for it is nature's way of saying "too much."

By constant practice the men should learn to breathe slowly through
the nostrils during all exercises, especially running.

A fundamental condition of exercise is unimpeded respiration. Proper
breathing should always be insisted upon; "holding the breath" and
breathing only when it can no longer be held is injurious. Every
exercise should be accompanied by an unimpeded and, if possible, by an
uninterrupted act of respiration, the inspiration and respiration of
which depends to a great extent upon the nature of the exercise.
Inhalation should always accompany that part of an exercise which
tends to elevate and distend the thorax--as raising arms over head
laterally, for instance; while that part of an exercise which exerts a
pressure against the walls of the chest should be accompanied by
exhalation, as for example, lowering arms laterally from shoulders or
overhead.

If after exercising, the breathing becomes labored and distressed, it
is an unmistakable sign that the work has been excessive. Such
excessiveness is not infrequently the cause of serious injury to the
heart and lungs or to both. In cases where exercise produces
palpitation, labored respiration, etc., it is advisable to recommend
absolute rest, or to order the execution of such exercises as will
relieve the oppressed and overtaxed organ. Leg exercises slowly
executed will afford great relief. By drawing the blood from the upper
to the lower extremities they equalize the circulation, thereby
lessening the heart's action and quieting the respiration.

_Never exercise immediately after a meal_; digestion is more important
at this time than extraneous exercise.

_Never eat or drink immediately after exercise_; allow the body to
recover its normal condition first, and the most beneficial results
will follow. If necessary, pure water, not too cold, may be taken in
small quantities, but the exercise should be continued, especially if
in a state of perspiration.

Never, if at all possible, allow the underclothing to dry on the body.
Muscular action produces an unusual amount of bodily heat; this should
be lost gradually, otherwise the body will be chilled; hence, after
exercise, never remove clothing to cool off, but, on the contrary,
wear some wrap in addition. In like manner, be well wrapped on leaving
the gymnasium.

Cold baths, especially when the body is heated, as in the case after
exercising violently, should be discouraged. In individual instances
such baths may appear apparently beneficial, or at least not
injurious; in a majority of cases, however, they can not be used with
impunity. Tepid baths are recommended. When impossible to bathe, the
flannels worn while exercising should be stripped off; the body
sponged with tepid water, and then rubbed thoroughly with coarse
towels. After such a sponge the body should be clothed in clean, warm
clothing.

Flannel is the best material to wear next to the body during physical
drill, as it absorbs the perspiration, protects the body against
drafts and, in a mild manner, excites the skin. When the conditions
permit it the men may be exercised in the ordinary athletic costume,
sleeveless shirt, flappers, socks, and gymnasium shoes.

COMMANDS--SETTING-UP EXERCISES

COMMANDS

=826.= There are two kinds of commands:

The preparatory indicates the movement to be executed.

The command of execution causes the execution.

In the command: =1. Arms forward, 2. RAISE=, the words =Arms forward=
constitute the preparatory command, and =RAISE= the command of
execution. Preparatory commands are printed in =bold face=, and those
of execution in =CAPITALS=.

The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a loudness
proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended.

The various movements comprising an exercise are executed by commands
and, unless otherwise indicated, the continuation of an exercise is
carried out by repeating the command, which usually takes the form of
numerals the numbers depending upon the number of movements, that an
exercise comprises. Thus, if an exercise consists of two movements,
the counts will be one, two; or if it consists of eight movements, the
counts will be correspondingly increased; thus every movement is
designated by a separate command.

Occasionally, especially in exercises that are to be executed slowly,
words rather than numerals are used, and these must be indicative of
the nature of the various movements.

In the continuation of an exercise the preparatory command is
explanatory, the command of execution causes the execution and the
_continuation is caused by a repetition of numerals_ denoting the
number of movements required, or of words describing the movements if
words are used. The numerals or words preceding the command =halt=
should always be given with a rising inflection on the first numeral
or word of command of the last repetition of the exercise in order to
prepare the men for the command =halt=.

For example:

=1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. Thrust arms upward, 4. EXERCISE, ONE,
TWO, ONE, TWO, ONE, HALT=; the rising inflection preparatory to the
command halt being placed on the "one" preceding the "=halt=."

Each command must indicate, by its tone, how that particular movement
is to be executed; thus, if an exercise consists of two movements, one
of which is to be energized, the command corresponding to that
movement must be emphasized.

Judgment must be used in giving commands, for rarely is the cadence of
two movements alike; and a command should not only indicate the
cadence of an exercise, but also the nature of its execution.

Thus, many of the arm exercises are short and snappy; hence the
command should be given in a smart tone of voice, and the interval
between the commands should be short.

The leg exercises can not be executed as quickly as those of the arms;
therefore, the commands should be slightly drawn out and follow one
another in slow succession.

The trunk exercises, owing to the deliberateness of execution, should
be considerably drawn out and follow one another in slow succession.

The antagonistic exercises, where one group of muscles is made to
antagonize another, tensing exercises, the commands are drawn still
more. In these exercises words are preferable to numerals. In fact it
should be the object of the instructor to convey to the men, by the
manner of his command, exactly the nature of the exercise.

All commands should be given in a clear and distinct tone of voice,
articulation should be distinct, and an effort should be made to
cultivate a voice which will inspire the men with enthusiasm and tend
to make them execute the exercises with willingness, snap, and
precision. It is not the volume, but the quality, of the voice which
is necessary to successful instruction.

THE POSITION OF ATTENTION

=827.= This is the position an unarmed dismounted soldier assumes when
in ranks. During the setting-up exercises, it is assumed whenever the
command attention is given by the instructor.

Having allowed his men to rest, the instructor commands: =1. Squad, 2.
ATTENTION.= Figs. A and B.

[Illustration: Fig. A]

[Illustration: Fig. B]

The words =class=, =section=, or =company= may be substituted for the
word "squad."

At the command =attention=, the men will quickly assume and retain the
following position:

Heels on same line and as near each other as the conformation of the
man permits.

Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45 degrees.

Knees straight without stiffness.

The body erect on the hips, the spine extended throughout its entire
length.

The shoulders falling naturally, are forced back until they are
square.

Chest arched and slightly raised.

The arms hang naturally; thumbs along seams of trousers; back of hands
out and elbows turned back.

Head erect, chin drawn in so that the axis of the head and neck is
vertical; eyes straight to the front and, when the nature of the
terrain permits it, fixed on an object at their own height.

Too much attention can not be given to this position, and instructors
are cautioned to insist that the men accustom themselves to it. As a
rule, it is so exaggerated that it not only becomes ridiculous, but
positively harmful. The men must be taught to assume a natural and
graceful position, one from which all rigidity is eliminated and from
which action is possible without first relaxing muscles that have been
constrained in an effort to maintain the position of attention. In
other words, coördination rather than strength should be depended
upon.

In the position described the weight rests principally upon the balls
of the feet, the heels resting lightly upon the ground.

The knees are extended easily, but never locked.

The body is now inclined forward until the front of the thighs is
directly over the point of the toes; the hips are square and the waist
is extended by the erection of the entire spine, but never to such a
degree that mobility of the waist is lost.

In extending the spine, the chest is naturally arched and the abdomen
is drawn in, but never to the extent where it interferes with
respiration.

In extending the spinal column, the shoulders must not be raised, but
held loosely in normal position and forced back until the points of
the shoulders are at right angles with an anterior-posterior plane
running through the shoulders.

The chin should be square; i. e., horizontal and forced back enough to
bring the neck in a vertical plane; the eyes fixed to the front and
the object on which they are fixed must be at their own height
whenever the nature of the terrain permits it.

When properly assumed, a vertical line drawn from the top of the head
should pass in front of the ear, just in front of the shoulder and of
the thigh, and find its base at the balls of the feet.

All muscles should be contracted only enough to maintain this
position, which at all times should be a lithesome one, that can be
maintained for a long period without fatigue--one that makes for
activity and that is based upon a correct anatomical and physiological
basis.

Instructors will correct the position of attention of every man
individually and they will ascertain, when the position has been
properly assumed, whether the men are "on their toes," i. e., carrying
the weight on the balls of the feet, whether they are able to respire
properly, and whether they find a strain across the small of the back,
which should be as flat as possible. This should be repeated until the
men are able to assume the position correctly without restraint or
rigidity.

At the command =rest= or =at ease= the men, while carrying out the
provisions of the drill regulations, should be cautioned to avoid
assuming any position that has a tendency to nullify the object of the
position of attention; standing on leg for instance; allowing the
shoulders to slope forward; drooping the head; folding arms across
chest, etc. The weight should always be distributed equally upon both
legs; the head, trunk, and shoulders remain erect and the arms held in
a position that does not restrict the chest or derange the shoulders.
The positions illustrated here have been found most efficacious. Figs.
C. and D.

[Illustration: Fig. C]

[Illustration: Fig. D]

FORMATIONS

=828.= The men form in a single or double rank, the tallest men on the
right.

The instructor commands: =1. Count off.=

At this command, all except the right file execute "=eyes right=" and,
beginning on the right, the men in each rank count 1, 2, 3, 4; each
man turns his head and eyes to the front as he counts.

The instructor then commands: =1. Take distance, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad,
4. HALT.=

At the command =march=, No. 1 of the front rank moves straight to the
front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of the front and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the
rear rank in the order named move straight to the front, each stepping
off, so as to follow the preceding man at four paces; the command halt
is given when all have their distances.

If it is desired that a less distance than four paces be taken, the
distance desired should be indicated in the preparatory command. The
men of the squad may be caused to cover No. 1 front rank by command
cover.

The instructor then commands: =1. Right (left), 2. FACE, 3. COVER.=

At these commands the men face in the direction indicated and cover in
file.

To assemble the squad the instructor commands: =1. Right (left), 2.
FACE, 3. Assemble, 4. MARCH.=

After facing and at command march, No. 1 of the front rank stands
fast, the other members of both ranks resuming their original
positions, or for convenience in the gymnasium they may be assembled
to the rear, in which case the assemblage is made on No. 4 of the rear
rank.

Unless otherwise indicated, the guide is =always right=.

SPECIAL TRAINING

=829.= In addition to the regular squad or class work instructors
should, when they notice a physical defect in any man, recommend some
exercise which will tend to correct it.

The most common physical defects and corresponding corrective
exercises are noted here.

DROOPING HEAD

=830.= Exercise the muscles of the neck by bending, turning, and
circling the head, muscles tense.

ROUND AND STOOPED SHOULDERS

=831.= Stretch arms sideward from front horizontal, turning palms
upward, muscles tense.

Swing arms forward and backward, muscles relaxed.

Circle arms forward and backward slowly, energize backward motion,
muscles tense; forward motion with muscles relaxed.

Circle shoulders backward, move them forward first, then raise them,
then move them backward as far as possible in the raised position,
muscles tense, and then lower to normal position, muscles relaxed.

WEAK BACK

=832.= Bend trunk forward as far as possible and erect it slowly.

Bend trunk forward, back arched and head thrown back.

Bend trunk sideward, without moving hips out of normal position, right
and left.

Lie on floor, face down, and raise head and shoulders.

WEAK ABDOMEN

=833.= Circle trunk right or left.

Bend trunk backward or obliquely backward.

Bend head and trunk backward without moving hips out of normal plane.

Lie on floor, face up, and raise head and shoulders slightly; or to
sitting position or raise legs slightly; or to a vertical position.

_To increase depth and width of chest_

Arm stretchings, sideward and upward, muscles tense.

Same, with deep inhalations.

Arm swings and arm circles outward, away from the body.

Raise extended arms over head laterally and cross them behind the
head.

Breathing exercises in connection with arm and shoulder exercises.

STARTING POSITIONS

=834.= In nearly all the arm exercises it is necessary to hold the
arms in some fixed position from which the exercises can be most
advantageously executed, and to which position the arms are again
returned upon completing the exercise. These positions are termed
=starting positions=; and though it may not be absolutely necessary to
assume one of them before or during the employment of any other
portion of the body, it is advisable to do so, since they give to the
exercise a finished, uniform, and graceful appearance.

In the following positions, at the command =down=, resume the
=attention=. Practice in assuming the starting position may be had by
repeating the commands of execution, such as =raise, down=.

=835.= While the exercises given below have been grouped for
convenient reference, into arm exercises, trunk exercises, leg
exercises, etc., one entire group _must not_ be given and then the
next and so on.

_Always bear in mind that the best results are obtained when those
exercises which affect the extensor muscles chiefly are followed by
those affecting the flexors; i. e., flexion should always be followed
by extension, or vice versa. It is also advisable that a movement
requiring a considerable amount of muscular exertion should be
followed by one in which this exertion is reduced to a minimum. As a
rule, especially in the setting-up exercises, one portion of the body
should not be exercised successively; thus, arm exercises should be
followed by a trunk exercise, and that in turn by a leg, shoulder, and
neck exercise._

ARM EXERCISES

=836.= Intervals having been taken and attention assumed, the
instructor commands:

=1. Arms forward, 2. RAISE, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN.= Fig. 1.

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

At the command =raise=, raise the arms to the front smartly, extended
to their full length, till the hands are in front of and at the height
of the shoulders, palms down, fingers extended and joined, thumbs
under forefingers. At =Arms, DOWN=, resume position of attention.

=1. Arms upward 2. RAISE, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN.= Fig. 2.

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

At the command =raise=, raise the arms from the sides, extended to
their full length, with the forward movement, until they are
vertically overhead, backs of hands turned outward, fingers as in 1.

This position may also be assumed by raising the arms laterally until
vertical. The instructor cautions which way he desires it done.

=1. Arms backward, 2. CROSS, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN.= Fig. 3.

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

At the command =cross=, the arms are folded across the back; hands
grasping forearms.

=1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN.= Fig. 4.

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

At the command =raise=, raise the forearms to the front until
horizontal, elbow forced back, upper arms against the chest, hands
tightly closed, knuckles down.

=1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN.= Fig. 5.

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

At the command =place=, place the hands on the hips, the finger tips
in line with trouser seams; fingers extended and joined, thumbs to the
rear, elbows pressed back.

_Combination of arm exercises_

=1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. THRUST ARMS FORWARD; SWING THEM
SIDEWARD, FORWARD, AND BACK TO POSITION.=

Four counts; repeat 8 to 10 times.

The arms are thrust forward, then relaxed and swung sideward, then
forward and finally brought back to position, pressing elbows well to
the rear; execute moderately fast; exhale on the first and third and
inhale on the second and fourth counts.

SETTING-UP EXERCISES

=837.= As has been stated previously, the setting-up exercises form
the basis upon which the entire system of physical training in the
service is founded. Therefore too much importance can not be attached
to them. Through the number and variety of movements they offer it is
possible to develop the body harmoniously with little if any danger of
injurious results. They develop the muscles and impart vigor and tone
to the vital organs and assist them in their functions; they develop
endurance and are important factors in the development of smartness,
grace, and precision. They should be assiduously practiced. The fact
that they require no apparatus of any description makes it possible to
do this out of doors or even in the most restricted room, proper
sanitary conditions being the only adjunct upon which their success is
dependent. No physical training drill is complete without them. They
should always precede the more strenuous forms of training, as they
prepare the body for the greater exertion these forms demand.

At the discretion of instructors these exercises may be substituted by
others of a similar character. Instructors are cautioned, however, to
employ all the parts of the body in every lesson and to suit the
exercise as far as practicable to the natural function of the
particular part of the body which they employ.

In these lessons only the preparatory command is given here; the
command of execution, which is invariably =Exercise=, and the commands
of continuance, as well as the command to discontinue, having been
explained are omitted.

Every preparatory command should convey a definite description of the
exercise required; by doing so long explanations are avoided and the
men will not be compelled to memorize the various movements.

RECRUIT INSTRUCTION

_First Series_

Position of attention, from =at ease= and =rest=.

Starting position, Figs. 1 to 5.

TRUNK EXERCISES

=838. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. QUARTER BEND TRUNK FORWARD.=

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 6.

[Illustration: Fig. 6]

The trunk is inclined forward at the waist about 45° and then extended
again; the hips are as perpendicular as possible; execute slowly;
exhale on first and inhale and raise chest on second count.

By substituting the words _half_ or _full_ for the word quarter in
the command, the half bend, Fig. 7, and full bend exercise can be
given.

[Illustration: Fig. 7]

=1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. BEND TRUNK BACKWARD.=

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 8.

[Illustration: Fig. 8]

The trunk is bent backward as far as possible; head and shoulders
fixed; knees extended; feet firmly on the ground; hips as nearly
perpendicular as possible; in recovering care should be taken not to
sway forward; execute slowly; inhale on first and exhale on second
count.

=1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. BEND TRUNK SIDEWARD, RIGHT OR LEFT.=

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 9.

[Illustration: Fig. 9]

The trunk, stretched at the waist, is inclined sideward as far as
possible; head and shoulders fixed; knees extended and feet firmly on
the ground; execute slowly; inhale on first and exhale on second
count.

If an additional exercise is desired, by commanding: =CIRCLE TRUNK
RIGHT or LEFT= a combination of the above trunk exercises is obtained.

LEG EXERCISES

=839. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. QUARTER BEND KNEES.=

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 10.

[Illustration: Fig. 10]

The knees are flexed until the point of the knee is directly over the
toes; whole foot remains on ground; heels closed; head and body erect;
execute moderately fast, emphasizing the extension; breathe naturally.

By substituting the words _half_ or _full_ for the word quarter in the
command the half bend and full bend, Fig. 11, exercises can be given.

[Illustration: Fig. 11]

=1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. RAISE KNEE.=

Two counts; repeat 10 to 12 times. Fig. 12.

[Illustration: Fig. 12]

The thigh and knee are flexed until they are at right angles, thigh
horizontal: toes depressed; the right knee is raised at =one= and the
left at =two=; trunk and head erect; execute in cadence of quick time;
breathe naturally.

SHOULDER EXERCISE

=840. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. MOVE SHOULDERS FORWARD, UP,
BACK, AND DOWN.=

Four counts; repeat 8 to 10 times.

The shoulders are relaxed and brought forward; in that position they
are raised: then they are forced back without lowering them; and then
they are dropped back to position; execute slowly; exhale on the
first; inhale on the second and third and exhale on the last count.

NECK EXERCISE

=841. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. TURN HEAD RIGHT, OR LEFT.=

Two counts; repeat 6 to 10 times, Fig. 13.

[Illustration: Fig. 13]

The head, chin square, is turned to the right, or left as far as
possible, muscles of the neck being stretched; shoulders remain
square; execute slowly: breathe naturally.

To vary this exercise the head may be _bent forward and to the rear_
by substituting the proper commands.

BREATHING EXERCISE

=842. 1. Breathing exercise, 2. INHALE, 3. EXHALE.=

At =inhale= the arms are stretched forward overhead and the lungs are
inflated; at =exhale= the arms are lowered laterally and the lungs
deflated; execute slowly; repeat four times.

TOE EXERCISE

=843. 1. Arms backward, 2. CROSS, 3. RISE ON TOES.=

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 14.

[Illustration: Fig. 14]

The body is raised smartly until the toes and ankles are extended as
much as possible; heels closed; head and trunk erect; in recovering
position heels are lowered gently; breathe naturally.

COMBINATION EXERCISE

=844.= This exercise brings into play practically all of the muscles
that have been used in the preceding exercises.

=1. LEANING REST IN FOUR COUNTS.=

Repeat 6 to 8 times, Figs. 15, 16.

[Illustration: Fig. 15]

[Illustration: Fig. 16]

At =one= knees are bent to squatting position, hands on the ground
between knees; at =two= the legs are extended backward to the leaning
rest; at =three= the first position is resumed, and at =four= the
position of attention; hands should be directly under shoulders; back
arched; knees straight; head fixed; execute moderately fast; breathe
naturally.

WALKING AND MARCHING

=845.= The length of the full step in quick time is 30 inches,
measured from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120
steps per minute.

Proper posture and carriage have ever been considered very important
in the training of soldiers. In marching, the head and trunk should
remain immobile, but without stiffness; as the left foot is carried
forward the right forearm is swung forward and inward obliquely across
the body until the thumb, knuckles being turned out, reaches a point
about the height of the belt plate. The upper arm does not move beyond
the perpendicular plane while the forearm is swung forward, though the
arm hangs loosely from the shoulder joint. The forearm swing ends
precisely at the moment the left heel strikes the ground; the arm is
then relaxed and allowed to swing down and backward by its own weight
until it reaches a point where the thumb is about the breadth of a
hand to the rear of the buttocks. As the right arm swings back, the
left arm is swung forward with the right leg. The forward motion of
the arm assists the body in marching by throwing the weight forward
and inward upon the opposite foot as it is planted. The head is held
erect; body well stretched from the waist; chest arched; and there
should be no rotary motion of the body about the spine.

As the leg is thrown forward the knee is smartly extended, the heel
striking the ground first.

The instructor having explained the principles and illustrated the
step and arm swing, commands: =1. Forward, 2. MARCH=--and to halt the
squad he commands: =1. Squad, 2. HALT.=

In executing the setting-up exercises on the march the cadence should
at first be given slowly and gradually increased as the men become
more expert; some exercises require a slow and others a faster pace;
it is best in these cases to allow the cadence of the exercise to
determine the cadence of the step.

The men should march in a single file at proved intervals. The command
that causes and discontinues the execution should be given as the left
foot strikes the ground.

On the march, to discontinue the exercise, command: =1. Quick time, 2.
MARCH=, instead of =HALT=, as when at rest.

All of the arm, wrist, finger, and shoulder exercises, and some of the
trunk and neck, may be executed on the march by the same commands and
means as when at rest.

The following leg and foot exercises are executed at the command
march; the execution always beginning with the left leg or foot.

1. =1. On toes, 2. MARCH.=
2. =1. On heels, 2. MARCH.=
3. =1. On right heel and left toe, 2. MARCH.=
4. =1. On left heel and right toe, 2. MARCH.=
5. =1. On toes with knees stiff, 2. MARCH.=
6. =1. Swing extended leg forward, ankle high, 2. MARCH.=
7. =1. Swing extended leg forward, knee high, 2. MARCH.=
8. =1. Swing extended leg forward, waist high, 2. MARCH.=
9. =1. Swing extended leg forward, shoulder high, 2. MARCH.=
10. =1. Raise heels, 2. MARCH.=
11. =1. Raise knees, thigh horizontal, 2. MARCH.=
12. =1. Raise knees, chest high, 2. MARCH.=
13. =1. Circle extended leg forward, ankle high, 2. MARCH.=
14. =1. Circle extended leg forward, knee high, 2. MARCH.=
15. =1. Circle extended leg forward, waist high, 2. MARCH.=
16. =1. Swing extended leg backward, 2. MARCH.=
17. =1. Swing extended leg sideward, 2. MARCH.=
18. =1. Raise knee and extend leg forward, 2. MARCH.=
19. =1. Raise heels and extend leg forward, 2. MARCH.=

DOUBLE TIMING

=846.= The length of the step in double time is 36 inches; the cadence
is at the rate of 180 steps per minute. To march in double time the
instructor commands: =1. Double time, 2. MARCH.=

If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of the body to the
right leg. At the command =march= raise the forearms, fingers closed;
to a horizontal position along the waist line; take up an easy run
with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural swinging
motion to the arms inward and upward in the direction of the opposite
shoulder.

In marching in quick time, at the command =march=, given as either
foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time, and then step
off in double time.

When marching in double time and in running the men breathe as much as
possible through the nose, keeping the mouth closed.

A few minutes at the beginning of the setting-up exercises should be
devoted to double timing. From lasting only a few minutes at the start
it may be gradually increased, so that daily drills should enable the
men at the end of five or six months to double time 15 or 20 minutes
without becoming fatigued or distressed.

After the double time the men should be marched for several minutes at
quick time; after this the instructor should command:

=1. Route step, 2. MARCH.=

In marching at route step, the men are not required to preserve
silence nor keep the step; if marching at proved intervals, the latter
is preserved.

To resume the cadence step in quick time, the instructor commands: =1.
Squad, 2. ATTENTION.=

Great care must be exercised concerning the duration of the double
time and the speed and duration of the run. The demands made Upon the
men should be increased gradually.

When exercise rather than distance is desired, the running should be
done on the balls of the feet, heels raised from the ground.

DOUBLE TIMING EXERCISES

While the men are double timing the instructor may vary the position
of the arms by commanding:

1. =1. Arms forward, 2. RAISE.=
2. =1. Arms sideward, 2. RAISE.=
3. =1. Arms upward, 2. RAISE.=
4. =1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE.=
5. =1. Hands on shoulders, 2. PLACE.=
6. =1. Arms forward, 2. CROSS.=
7. =1. Arms backward, 2. CROSS.=

At the command =down=, the double-time position for the arms and hands
is resumed.

RIFLE EXERCISES

=847.= The object of these exercises, which may also be performed with
wands or bar bells, is to develop the muscles of the arms, shoulders,
and back so that the men will become accustomed to the weight of the
piece and learn to wield it with that "handiness" so essential to its
successful use. When these exercises are combined with movements of
the various other parts of the body, they serve as a splendid, though
rather strenuous, method for the all-round development of the men. As
the weight of the piece is considerable, instructors are cautioned to
be reasonable in their demands. Far better results are obtained if
these exercises are performed at commands than when they are grouped
and performed for spectacular purposes.

All the exercises start from the starting position, which is the low
extended arm horizontal position in front of the body, arms straight;
the right hand grasping the small of the stock and the left hand the
barrel; the knuckles turned to the front and the distance between the
hands slightly greater than the width of the shoulders. Fig. 17.

[Illustration: Fig. 17]

This position is assumed at the command: =1. Starting, 2. POSITION=;
at the command =position= the piece is brought to the port and lowered
to the front horizontal snappily.

To recover the position of order, command: =1. Order, 2. Arms=; the
piece is first brought to the port and then to the order.

RIFLE DRILL COMBINATION

The following exercises consist of four movements, the third position
always corresponding to the first position and the fourth to the
starting position. When performed as a musical drill, the instructions
laid down in that lesson are applicable here.

All exercises begin and end with the first or starting position. Fig.
17.

The form of command is, for example:

(Being at the starting position)

=1. First group, 2. FIRST, EXERCISE=;

=1. Second group, 2. THIRD, EXERCISE=;

Etc., Etc.

FIRST GROUP

=848.= _First Exercise_

Counts

1-2. Raise piece to bent arm front horizontal, shoulder high, and
stride forward right, Fig. 18;

[Illustration: Fig. 18]

3-4. Face to the left on both heels and extend piece upward, Fig. 19;

[Illustration: Fig. 19]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=849.= _Second Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to extended high horizontal, and stride sideward
right, Fig. 20;

[Illustration: Fig. 20]

3-4. Bend right knee and lower piece to left horizontal, Fig. 21;

[Illustration: Fig. 21]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=850.= _Third Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to high side perpendicular on the left, left hand up,
and stride backward right, Fig. 22;

[Illustration: Fig. 22]

3-4. Face about on heels and swing piece down and up to high side
perpendicular on the right, Fig. 23;

[Illustration: Fig. 23]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=851.= _Fourth Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to extended high horizontal, and stride obliquely
forward right, Fig. 24;

[Illustration: Fig. 24]

3-4. Face about on heels and lower piece to horizontal on shoulders;
Fig. 25;

[Illustration: Fig. 25]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

SECOND GROUP

=852.= _First Exercise_

1-2. Lower piece to front extended horizontal and bend trunk forward,
Fig. 26;

[Illustration: Fig. 26]

3-4. Lunge obliquely forward right and raise piece to right oblique,
left hand at shoulder, Fig. 27;

[Illustration: Fig. 27]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=853.= _Second Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to high perpendicular on the left, left hand up, and
bend trunk sideward right, Fig. 28;

[Illustration: Fig. 28]

3-4. Lunge sideward right and swing piece down and up to right high
perpendicular, right hand up, Fig. 29;

[Illustration: Fig. 29]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=854.= _Third Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to high extended arm horizontal and bend trunk
backward, Fig. 30;

[Illustration: Fig. 30]

3-4. Lunge forward right, and swing piece to side horizontal, left
hand to the rear, Fig. 31;

[Illustration: Fig. 31]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=855.= _Fourth Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to right high perpendicular and side step position
left, Fig. 32;

[Illustration: Fig. 32]

3-4. Lunge sideward left and swing piece to left high perpendicular,
Fig. 33;

[Illustration: Fig. 33]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

THIRD GROUP

=856.= _First Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to front bent horizontal, arms crossed, left over
right; lunge sideward right and bend trunk sideward right, Fig. 34;

[Illustration: Fig. 34]

3-4. Extend right knee and bend trunk to the left, bending left knee
and recrossing arms, left over right, Fig. 35;

[Illustration: Fig. 35]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=857.= _Second Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to bent arm horizontal; face right and lunge forward
right and bend trunk forward, Fig. 36;

[Illustration: Fig. 36]

3-4. Raise trunk and turn to the left on both heels and extend piece
overhead, Fig. 37;

[Illustration: Fig. 37]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=858.= _Third Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to left high horizontal; lunge forward right, Fig.
38;

[Illustration: Fig. 38]

3-4. Bend trunk forward and swing piece to extended low horizontal,
Fig. 39;

[Illustration: Fig. 39]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=859.= _Fourth Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to high extended horizontal and hop to side straddle
position, Fig. 40;

[Illustration: Fig. 40]

3-4. Bend trunk forward and swing piece to extended low horizontal,
left hand between legs, right hand forward, Fig. 41;

[Illustration: Fig. 41]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

GYMNASTIC CONTESTS

=860.= These exercises are those in which the benefits are lost sight
of in the pleasure their attainment provides, which in the case of
these contests is the vanquishing of an opponent. The men are pitted
against each other in pairs; age, height, weight, and general physical
aptitude being the determining factors in the selection.

In the contests in which superiority is dependent upon skill and
agility no restrictions need be placed upon the efforts of the
contestants; but in those that are a test of strength and endurance it
is well to call a contest a "draw," when the men are equally matched
and the contest is likely to be drawn out to the point of exhaustion
of one or both contestants.

It is recommended that these contests be indulged in once or twice a
month and then at the conclusion of the regular drill.

Contests that require skill and agility should alternate with those
that depend upon force and endurance. In order to facilitate the
instruction a number of pairs should be engaged at the same time.

1. Cane wrestling: The cane to be about an inch in diameter and a yard
long, ends rounded. It is grasped with the right hand at the end,
knuckles down, and with the left hand, knuckles up, inside of and
close to the opponent's right hand. Endeavor is then made to wrest the
cane from the opponent. Loss of grip with either hand loses the bout.

2. Cane twisting. Same cane as in 1. Contestants grasp it as in 1,
only the knuckles of both hands are up, and the arms are extended
overhead. Object: The contestants endeavor to make the cane revolve in
their opponent's hand without allowing it to do so in their own. The
cane must be forced down.

3. Cane pulling: Contestants sit on the ground, facing each other,
legs straight and the soles of the feet in contact. The cane is
grasped as in 2 but close to the feet. Object: To pull the opponent to
his feet. The legs throughout the contest must be kept rigid.

4. "Bucked" contest: Contestants sit on the ground "bucked"; i. e.,
the cane is passed under the knees, which are drawn up, and the arms
passed under the cane with the fingers laced in front of the ankles.
Object: To get the toes under those of the opponent and roll him over.

5. Single pole pushing: Contestants grasp end of pole, 6 feet long and
2 inches thick, and brace themselves. Object: To push the opponent out
of position.

6. Double pole pushing: The poles are placed under the arms close to
the arm pits, ends projecting. Object: Same as in 5.

7. Double pole pulling: Position as in 6 but standing back to back.
Object: To pull the opponent out of position.

8. "Cock fight": Contestants hop on one leg with the arms folded
closely over the chest. Object: by butting with the fleshy part of the
shoulder without raising the arms, or by dodging to make the opponent
change his feet or touch the floor with his hand or other part of his
body.

9. One-legged tug of war: Contestants hop on one leg and grasp hands
firmly. Object: To pull the opponent forward or make him place the
raised foot on the floor.

10. The "siege": One contestant stands with one foot in a circle 14
inches in diameter, the other foot outside, and the arms folded as in
8. Two other contestants, each hopping on one leg, endeavor to
dislodge the one in the circle by butting him with the shoulder. The
besieged one is defeated in case he raises the foot in the circle, or
removes it entirely from the circle. The besiegers are defeated in
case they change feet or touch the floor as in 8. As soon as either of
the latter is defeated his place is immediately filled, so that there
are always two of them. The besieged should resort to volting,
ducking, etc., rather than to depend upon his strength.

11. One-armed tug: Contestants stand facing each other; right hands
grasped, feet apart. Object: Without moving feet, to pull the opponent
forward. Shifting the feet loses the bout.

12. "Tug royal": Three contestants stand facing inward and grasp each
other's wrists securely with their feet outside a circle about three
feet in diameter. Object: by pulling or pushing to make one of the
contestants step inside of the circle.

13. Indian wrestling: Contestants lie upon the ground face up, right
shoulders in close contact, right elbows locked; at one the right leg
is raised overhead and lowered, this is repeated at two, and at three
the leg is raised quickly and locked with the opponent's right leg.
Object: to roll him over by forcing his leg down.

14. Medicine ball race. Teams of five or six men are organized and a
track for each team is marked out. This track consists of marks on the
floor or ground at distances of 4 yards. On each of these marks stands
a man with legs apart, the team forming a column of files. At "ready,"
"get set," the contestants prepare for the race, and at "go," the
first man in the column rolls a medicine ball, which he has on the
floor in front of him, through his legs to No. 2, he in turn rolls it
to 3, etc., when it reaches the last man he picks it up and runs to
the starting place with it and, the others all having shifted back one
mark, the rolling is repeated. This continues until the first man
brings the ball back to the starting place and every man is in his
original position. The ball should be kept rolling: each man, as it
comes to him, pushing it on quickly. Any ball about 9 inches in
diameter will answer; it may be made of strong cloth and stuffed with
cotton waste.

CHAPTER IV

SIGNALING

Signals and Codes

_General Service Code. (International Morse Code.)_

=861.= Used for all visual and sound signaling, radiotelegraphy, and
on cables using siphon recorders, used in communicating with Navy.

A · -
B - · · ·
C - · - ·
D - · ·
E ·
F · · - ·
G - - ·
H · · · ·
I · ·
J · - - -
K - · -
L · - · ·
M - -
N - ·
O - - -
P · - - ·
Q - - · -
R · - ·
S · · ·
T -
U · · -
V · · · -
W · - -
X - · · -
Y - · - -
Z - - · ·

NUMERALS

1 · - - - -
2 · · - - -
3 · · · - -
4 · · · · -
5 · · · · ·
6 - · · · ·
7 - - · · ·
8 - - - · ·
9 - - - - ·
0 - - - - -

PUNCTUATION

Period · · · · · ·
Comma · - · - · - ·
Interrogation · · - - · ·

THE MORE IMPORTANT CONVENTIONAL FLAG SIGNALS

For communication between the firing line and the reserve or commander
in rear. In transmission, their concealment from the enemy's view
should be insured. In the absence of signal flags the headdress or
other substitute may be used.

(See par. 96 for the signals.)

Wigwag

_Signaling by flag, torch, hand lantern, or beam of searchlight
(without shutter)_[6]

=862.= 1. There is one position and there are three motions. The position is
with flag or other appliance held vertically, the signalman facing
directly toward the station with which it is desired to communicate.
The first motion (the dot) is to the right of the sender, and will
embrace an arc of 90°, starting with the vertical and returning to it,
and will be made in a plane at right angles to the line connecting
the two stations. The second motion (the dash) is a similar motion to
the left of the sender. The third motion (front) is downward directly
in front of the sender and instantly returned upward to the first
position. This is used to indicate a pause or conclusion.

2. The beam of the searchlight, though ordinarily used with the
shutter like the heliograph, may be used for long-distance signaling,
when no shutter is suitable or available, in a similar manner to the
flag or torch, the first position being a vertical one. A movement of
the beam 90° to the right of the sender indicates a dot, a similar
movement to the left indicates a dash; the beam is lowered vertically
for front.

3. To use the torch or hand lantern, a footlight must be employed as a
point of reference to the motion. The lantern is more conveniently
swung out upward to the right of the footlight for a dot, to the left
for a dash, and raised vertically for front.

4. To call a station, make the call letter until acknowledged, at
intervals giving the call or signal of the calling station. If the
call letter of a station is unknown, wave flag until acknowledged. In
using the searchlight without shutter throw the beam in a vertical
position and move it through an arc of 180° in a plane at right angles
to the line connecting the two stations until acknowledged. To
acknowledge a call, signal "Acknowledgment (or) I understand
(----front)" followed by the call letter of the acknowledging station.

_Notes on Wig-wagging_

5. In order to avoid the flag wrapping itself about the staff, stand
facing the receiving station, with feet apart. Hold the staff with the
left hand at butt and right hand 24 inches from end. In moving flag to
the right, bring it down with an outward and inward sweep, and then
return it to the vertical. When the tip is farthest down the staff
inclines to the right front and as the flag is brought upward it is
swept inward and upwards and as it approaches the vertical position it
sweeps forward slightly. In moving to the left the motion is
similar,--at the lowest point the staff inclines to the left front. A
combination of right and left is made with a figure-of-eight motion.

In making "front" the flag is lowered and moved very slightly to the
left front and then swept slightly to the right front, making a
figure-of-eight.

The body should be twisted and bent at the waist in making the light
and left motions.

Care should be exercised in keeping the flag in front of the body in
making "front," the figure-of-eight is necessarily very flat.

Do not make letters in a careless slipshod manner.

The Two-arm Semaphore Code

(See Plates I and II)

=863.= Semaphore signaling may be done with or without flags. Without
flags it is rarely dependable beyond 600 yards.

In sending stand with feet apart, squarely facing the receiver.

In making letters which require the use of both arms on the same side
of body, twist the body to that side and bend at waist, so as to
throw both arms well away from body. But be careful to keep arms in
plane of original position of body.

When a letter repeats--bring both hands (if a two-armed letter) to
chest after first, then make second.

Do not try to send rapidly so as to exhibit your ability. Remember
that the receiver's ability determines the speed to be used. Anyone
can send faster than he himself can receive. If you want to display
your skill have some one send rapidly to you.

In receiving, if you miss a letter--let it go and get the others. If
you miss a word signal--"O" (waving flags or arms) and signal the last
word you have received.

_Rapidity_ is secondary to _accuracy_.

Take the positions for the various letters _accurately_. The
horizontal position should not incline upward nor downward. In making
an "L," for example, if the left arm is midway between its proper
position and the horizontal it is difficult to tell whether it is L or
M.

In making D, J, K, P, T, and V, the arm in the vertical position
should be brought exactly in front of the body by carrying the
shoulder in almost under the chin, twisting the elbow in until it is
directly before the eyes, and the forearm held in the vertical
position with the palm to the rear. When so done there is no
possibility of this position being mistaken for any other.

"Manila Milkman" may be sent without changing the position of the
right hand. In making I, be sure to twist body well to the right in
order that the left arm may be seen in the upper slanting position to
the right. City and similar words may be so made.

D may be made with either hand.

Be sure how next letter is made before moving hands. Make no false
motions.

Acquire accuracy; then try for speed.

"CHOP-CHOP." The "chop-chop" signal is made by placing _both_ arms at
the right horizontal (that is, by bringing the _left_ arm up to the
position of the _right_ arm as in the figure for letter "B"), and then
moving each up and down, several times, in opposite direction, making
a cutting motion.

END OF WORD. After each word the "Interval" signal is made.

END OF SENTENCE. After each sentence the chop signal is made twice.

END OF MESSAGE. At the end of a message the chop signal is made three
times.

ERROR. Signal "A" several times quickly, followed by interval; then
repeat the word.

TO BREAK IN. Signal "Attention."

NUMERALS. Numbers are always preceded by the signal, "Numerals." After
"Numerals" has been signaled, everything that follows will be numbers
until "Interval" is signaled, after which what follows will be
letters.

[Illustration: The Two-arm Semaphore Code

Plate I]

[Illustration: The Two-arm Semaphore Code

Plate II]

_Signaling with heliograph, flash lantern, and searchlight (with
shutter)_[7]

=864.= 1. The first position is to turn a steady flash on the
receiving station. The signals are made by short and long flashes. Use
a short flash for dot and a long steady flash for dash. The elements
of a letter should be slightly longer than in sound signals.

2. To call a station, make the call letter until acknowledged, at
intervals the call or signal of the calling station.

3. If the call letter of a station be unknown, signal a series of dots
rapidly made until acknowledged. Each station will then turn on a
steady flash and adjust. When the adjustment is satisfactory to the
called station, it will cut off its flash, and the calling station
will proceed with its message.

4. If the receiver sees that the sender's mirror needs adjustment, he
will turn on a steady flash until answered by a steady flash. When the
adjustment is satisfactory, the receiver will cut off his flash and
the sender will resume his message.

5. To break the sending station for other purposes, turn on a steady
flash.

_Sound Signals_[7]

=865.= 1. Sound signals made by the whistle, foghorn, bugle, trumpet,
and drum may be used in a fog, mist, falling snow, or at night. They
may be used with the dot and dash code.

2. In applying the code to whistle, foghorn, bugle, or trumpet, one
short blast indicates a dot and one long blast a dash. With the drum,
one tap indicates a dot and two taps in rapid succession a dash.
Although these signals can be used with a dot and dash code, they
should be so used in connection with a preconcerted or conventional
code.

_Morse Code. (American Morse Code)_[7]

=866.= Used only by the army on telegraph lines, on short cables, and
on field lines, and on all commercial lines in the United States.

A · -
B - · · ·
C · · ·
D - · ·
E ·
F · - ·
G - - ·
H · · · ·
I · ·
J - · - ·
K - · -
L --
M - -
N - ·
O · ·
P · · · · ·
Q · · - ·
R · · ·
S · · ·
T -
U · · -
V · · · -
W · - -
X · - · ·
Y · · · ·
Z · · · ·
& · · · ·

NUMERALS

1 · - - ·
2 · · - · ·
3 · · · - ·
4 · · · · -
5 - - -
6 · · · · · ·
7 - - · ·
8 - · · · ·
9 - · · -
0 ---

PUNCTUATION

Period · · - - · ·
Comma · - · -
Interrogation - · · - ·

FOOTNOTES:

[6] Extracts from Signal Book, United States Army.

[7] Extracts from Signal Book, United States Army.

PART II

COMPANY COMMAND

CHAPTER I

THE GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION OF A COMPANY

=867. The proper performance of the duty of COMPANY COMMANDER, like
the proper performance of any other duty, requires work and attention
to business.=

The command of a company divides itself into two kinds of duty:
government and administration.

The government includes the instruction, discipline, contentment, and
harmony of the organization, involving, as it does, esprit de corps,
rewards, privileges, and punishments.

The administration includes the providing of clothing, arms,
ammunition, equipage, and subsistence; the keeping of records,
including the rendition of reports and returns; and the care and
accountability of Government and company property, and the
disbursement of the company fund.

System and care are prerequisites of good administration.

The efficient administration of a company greatly facilitates its
government.

THE CAPTAIN

=868.= With regard to his company the captain stands in the same light
as a father to a large family of children. It is his duty to provide
for their comfort, sustenance, and pleasure; enforce strict rules of
obedience, punish the refractory and reward the deserving.

He should be considerate and just to his officers and men and should
know every soldier personally and make him feel that he so knows him.

He should by word and act make every man in the company feel that the
captain is his protector.

The captain should not be indifferent to the personal welfare of his
men, and when solicited, being a man of greater experience, education,
and information, he should aid and counsel them in such a way as to
show he takes an interest in their joys and sorrows.

When any men are sick he should do everything possible for them until
they can be taken care of by the surgeon. He can add much to the
comfort and pleasure of men in the hospital by visiting them from time
to time and otherwise showing an interest in their condition.

In fact, one of the officer's most important duties is to look after
the welfare of his men--to see that they are well fed, well clothed
and properly cared for in every other way--to see that they are happy
and contented. The officer who does not look after the welfare of his
men to the best of his ability, giving the matter his earnest personal
attention, neglects one of the principal things that the Government
pays him to do.

The soldier usually has a decided feeling for his captain, even though
it be one of hatred. With regard to the higher grade of officers, he
has respect for them according to regulations; otherwise, for the most
part, he is indifferent. At the very most, he knows whether his post
or regimental commander keeps him long at drill, and particularly
whether he has any peculiar habits. The average soldier looks upon his
captain as by far the most important personage in the command.

There is no other position in the Army that will give as much
satisfaction in return for an honest, capable and conscientious
discharge of duty, as that of captain. There is a reward in having
done his full duty to his company that no disappointment of
distinction, no failure, can deprive him of; his seniors may overlook
him in giving credits, unfortunate circumstances may defeat his
fondest hopes, and the crown of laurel may never rest upon his brow,
but the reward that follows upon the faithful discharge of his duty to
his company he can not be deprived of by any disaster, neglect or
injustice.

He is a small sovereign, powerful and great, within his little domain.

=869. Devolution of Work and Responsibility.= The company commander
should not attempt to do all the work--to look after all the details
in person--he should not try to command directly every squad and every
platoon. The successful company commander is the one who distributes
work among his subordinates and organizes the help they are supposed
to give him. By War Department orders, Army Regulations and customs of
the service, the lieutenants and noncommissioned officers are charged
with certain duties and responsibilities. Let every one of them carry
the full load of their responsibility. The company commander should
not usurp the functions of his subordinates--he should not relieve
them of any of their prescribed or logical work and responsibility. On
the contrary, he should give them more, and he should see that they
"deliver the goods." Skill in distributing work among subordinates is
one of the first essentials of leadership, as is the ability to get
work out of them so that they will fill their functions to the full
within the limits of their responsibility. Not only does devolution of
work and responsibility cause subordinates to take more interest in
their work (it makes them feel less like mere figure-heads), but it
also teaches them initiative and gives them valuable experience in the
art of training and handling men. Furthermore, it enables the company
commander to devote more time to the larger and more important matters
connected with the discipline, welfare, training, instruction and
administration of the company.

The captain who allows his lieutenants to do practically nothing makes
a mistake--he is doing something that will rob his lieutenants of all
initiative, cause them to lose interest in the company, and make them
feel like nonentities--like a kind of "fifth wheel"--it will make them
feel they are not, in reality, a part of the company--it will prevent
them from getting a practical, working knowledge of the government and
administration of a company.

By allowing his lieutenants to participate to the greatest extent
possible in the government and administration of the company, and by
not hampering and pestering them with unnecessary instructions about
details, the captain will get out of his lieutenants the very best
that there is in them.

The captain should require RESULTS from his lieutenants, and the mere
fact that a lieutenant is considered inefficient and unable to do
things properly, is no reason why he should not be required to do
them. The captain is by Army Regulations responsible for the
efficiency and instruction of his lieutenants regarding all matters
pertaining to the company, and he should require them to perform all
their duties properly, resorting to such disciplinary measures as may
be considered necessary. The lieutenant who can not, or who will not,
perform his duties properly is a drag on the company, and such a man
has no business in the Army, or in the Organized Militia.

THE LIEUTENANT

=870.= To be able to perform well the duties of captain when the
responsibility falls upon him, should be the constant study and
ambition of the lieutenant.

He is the assistant of the captain and should be required by the
captain to assist in the performance of all company duties, including
the keeping of records and the preparation of the necessary reports,
returns, estimates and requisitions. The captain should give him lots
to do, and should throw him on his own responsibility just as much as
possible. He should be required to drill the company, attend the daily
inspection of the company quarters, instruct the noncommissioned
officers, brief communications, enter letters in the Correspondence
Book, make out ration returns, reports, muster and pay rolls, etc.,
until he shows perfect familiarity therewith.

Whenever told to do a thing by your captain, do it yourself or see
personally that it is done. Do not turn it over to some
noncommissioned officer and let it go at that. If your captain wants
some noncommissioned officer to do the thing, he himself will tell him
to do it--he will not ask you to do it.

It is customary in the Army to regard the company as the property of
the captain. Should the lieutenant, therefore, be in temporary command
of the company he should not make any changes, especially in the
reduction or promotion of noncommissioned officers without first
having consulted the captain's wishes in the matter.

It is somewhat difficult to explain definitely the authority a
lieutenant exercises over the men in the company when the captain is
present. In general terms, however, it may be stated the lieutenant
can not make any changes around the barracks, inflict any punishment
or put men on, or relieve them from, any duty without the consent of
the captain. It is always better if there be a definite understanding
between the captain and his lieutenants as to what he expects of them,
how he wishes to have certain things done and to what extent he will
sustain them.

If the lieutenant wants anything from the company in the way of
working parties, the services of the company artificer or company
clerk, the use of ordnance stores or quartermaster articles, he should
always speak to the captain about the matter.

THE CAPTAIN AND THE LIEUTENANTS

=871.= The company officers should set an example to their men in
dress, military bearing, system, punctuality and other soldierly
qualities. It should be remembered that the negligence of superiors is
the cue for juniors to be negligent.

If the men of a company are careless and indifferent about saluting
and if they are shabby and lax in their dress, the company commander
is to blame for it--company officers can always correct defects of
this kind, if they will only try.

The character and efficiency of officers and the manner in which they
perform their duties are reflected in the conduct and deportment of
their men.

Of course, courage is a prerequisite quality for a good officer, and
every officer should seek to impress his men that he would direct them
to do nothing involving danger that he would not himself be willing to
do under similar circumstances.

If a company officer be ignorant of his duties, his men will soon find
it out, and when they do they will have neither respect for, nor
confidence in, him.

Company officers should take an active interest in everything that
affects the amusement, recreation, happiness and welfare of their men.

An officer just joining a company should learn without delay the names
of all the men. A roll of the organization should be gotten and
studied.

While an officer can gruffly order a soldier to do a thing and have
his orders obeyed, it should be remembered that, as a rule, human
nature, especially American human nature, responds best to an appeal
to pride, fairness, justice, reason, and the other nobler instincts of
man. It is only in rare instances that the average man will give the
best there is in him under coercion or pressure of authority.

There are but few men who have not some good in them, and this good
can generally be gotten at, if one only goes about it in the right
way. Study your men and try to arouse in them pride and interest in
their work.

The soldier first learns to respect, then to honor and finally to love
the officer who is strict but just; firm but kind--and this is the
officer who will draw out of his men the very best there is in them.

=872.= Treat your men like men, and remember there is nothing that
will so completely take the spirit out of a man as to find fault with
him when he is doing his best.

Young officers sometimes run to one of two extremes in the treatment
of their men--they either, by undue familiarity, or otherwise,
cultivate popularity with the men; or they do not treat them with
sufficient consideration--the former course will forfeit their esteem;
the latter, ensure their dislike, neither of which result is
conducive to commanding their respect.

Treat your soldiers with proper consideration, dignity, and
justice--remember they are members of your profession, the difference
being one of education, rank, command, and pay--but they are men, like
yourself, and should be treated as such.

Under no circumstances should you ever swear at a soldier--not only is
this taking a mean, unfair advantage of your position, but it is also
undignified, ungentlemanly, and unmilitary. It is even more improper
for you to swear at a soldier than it is for a superior to swear at
you--in the latter case the insult can be properly resented; in the
former, it must be borne in humiliating silence.

Remember, that if by harsh or unfair treatment you destroy a man's
self-respect, you at the same time destroy his usefulness.

Familiarity is, of course, most subversive of discipline, but you can
treat your men with sympathetic consideration without being familiar
with them.

In dealing with enlisted men, do not use the same standard of
intellect and morals that apply in the case of officers. And remember,
too, that a thing that may appear small and trivial to an officer may
mean a great deal to an enlisted man--study your men, learn their
desires, their habits, their way of thinking, and then in your
dealings with them try to look at things from their standpoint also.
In other words in your treatment of your men be just as human as
possible.

The treatment of soldiers should be uniform and just, and under no
circumstances should a man be humiliated unnecessarily or abused.
Reproof and punishment must be administered with discretion and
judgment, and without passion; for the officer who loses his temper
and flies into a tantrum has failed to obtain his first triumph in
discipline. He who can not control himself can not control others.

Every officer should study himself carefully, he should analyze
himself, he should place himself under a microscopic glass, so as to
discover his weak points--and he should then try with his whole might
and soul to make these weak points strong points. If, for instance,
you realize that you are weak in applied minor tactics, or that you
have no "bump of locality," or that you have a poor memory, or that
you have a weak will, do what you can to correct these defects in your
make-up. Remember "Stonewall" Jackson's motto: "A man can do anything
he makes up his mind to do."

The Progress Company, Chicago, Ill., publishes "Mind Power," "Memory,"
"The Will," "The Art of Logical Thinking" (all by W. W. Atkinson), and
several other books of a similar nature, that are both interesting and
instructive. "The Power of the Will," by Haddock, for sale by Albert
Lewis Pelton, Meriden, Conn., is an excellent book of its kind.

THE FIRST SERGEANT

=873.= It has been said the captain is the proprietor of the company
and the first sergeant is the foreman.

Under supervision of the captain, he has immediate charge of all
routine matters pertaining to the company.

In some companies in the Regular Army, it is customary for soldiers,
except in cases of emergency, to get permission from the first
sergeant to speak to the company commander at any time. In other
organizations soldiers who wish to speak to the company commander away
from the company quarters must first obtain the first sergeant's
permission, but it is not necessary to get this permission to speak to
the company commander when he is at the barracks.

The first sergeant is sometimes authorized to place noncommissioned
officers in arrest in quarters and privates in confinement in the
guardhouse, assuming such action to be by order of the captain, to
whom he at once reports the facts. However, with regard to the
confinement of soldiers by noncommissioned officers, attention is
invited to the Army Regulations on the subject.

THE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS

=(The status, duties, etc., of noncommissioned officers are covered in
greater detail in Noncommissioned Officers' Manual, by the author.
General agents: George Banta Publishing Co., Menasha, Wis.)=

=874.= The efficiency and discipline of a company depend to such an
extent on the noncommissioned officers that the greatest care and
judgment should be exercised in their selection. They should be men
possessing such soldierly qualities as a high sense of duty, cheerful
obedience to orders, force of character, honesty, sobriety and
steadiness, together with an intelligent knowledge of drills,
regulations, and orders.

They should exact prompt obedience from those to whom they give
orders, and should see that all soldiers under them perform their
military duties properly. They must not hesitate to reprove them when
necessary, but such reproof must not be any more severe than the
occasion demands.

The company officers must sustain the noncommissioned officers in the
exercise of their authority, except, of course, when such authority is
improperly or unjustly exercised. If they do wrong, they should be
punished the same as the privates, but if it be simply an error of
judgment they should merely be admonished. A noncommissioned officer
should never be admonished in the presence of privates.

Judicious praising of noncommissioned officers in the presence of
privates is not only gratifying to the noncommissioned officer, but it
also tends to enhance the respect and esteem of the privates for him.

In addition to dividing the company into squads, each squad being
under a noncommissioned officer as required by the Army Regulations,
the company should also be divided into sections, each section being
in charge of a sergeant. The squads and sections should, as far as
possible, be quartered together in barracks, and the chiefs of squads
and the chiefs of sections should be held strictly responsible for the
conduct, dress, cleanliness, and the care of arms of the members of
their respective squads and sections. Not only does this throw the
corporals and the sergeants upon their own responsibility to a certain
extent, but it also impresses upon them the importance of their
position, and gets the privates in the habit of realizing and
appreciating the authority exercised by noncommissioned officers.

When practicable, the noncommissioned officers should have separate
rooms or tents, and should mess together at tables separate from the
privates; for, everything that conduces to familiarity with inferiors
tends to lower the dignity of the noncommissioned officers' position.

Throw your noncommissioned officers upon their own
responsibility--throw them into deep water, so to speak, where they
will either have to swim or sink. You can never tell what a man can
really do until you have given him a chance to show you--until you
have put him on his mettle--until you have tried him out. And very
often men who seem to have nothing in them, men who have never before
been thrown upon their own responsibility, will surprise you.

Do all you can to make your noncommissioned officers realize and
appreciate the importance of their position. Consult them about
different matters--get their opinions about various things. When going
through the barracks at Saturday morning inspection, for instance, as
you come to the different squads, have the squad leaders step to the
front and follow you while you are inspecting their respective squads.
If you find anything wrong with a man's bunk, speak to the squad
leader about it. Also ask the squad leaders various questions about
their squads.

Not only does such treatment of noncommissioned officers make them
appreciate the importance, responsibility and dignity of their
position, but it also gives them more confidence in themselves and
raises them in the eyes of the privates.

Noncommissioned officers should always be addressed by their titles,
by both officers and soldiers.

Noncommissioned officers are forbidden by regulations to act as
barbers, or as agents for laundries, or in any other position of a
similar character.

Everything possible should be done by the company officers to instruct
the noncommissioned officers properly in their duties.[8]

So far as the company is concerned, the noncommissioned officers are
expected to assist the company commander in carrying out his own
orders and those of his superiors--they should see that all company
orders are obeyed and that the known wishes of the captain are carried
out. If, for instance, the captain should tell the first sergeant that
the men in the company may play cards among themselves, but that
noncommissioned officers are not to play with privates and that men
from other companies are not allowed to take part in, or to be present
at the games, then it is the duty of the first sergeant to see that
these instructions are carried out--it is his duty to make frequent
inspections of the tables at which the men may be playing to see that
no noncommissioned officers are playing and that no outsiders are
present. The first sergeant who confined himself to publishing the
order to the company and then doing nothing more, would be neglectful
of his proper duty.

Noncommissioned officers clothed in the proper uniform of their grade
are on duty at all times and places for the suppression of disorderly
conduct on the part of members of the company in public places. Men
creating disorder will be sent to their quarters in arrest and the
facts reported to the company commander without delay.

Noncommissioned officers can do much to prevent the commission of
offenses by members of their commands, both when on and when off duty,
and such prevention is as much their duty as reporting offenses after
they are committed; in fact, it is much better to prevent the offense
than to bring the offender to trial.

Company commanders should drill their noncommissioned officers
thoroughly in the principles of discipline.

=875. Noncommissioned Officers Authorized to Confine Enlisted Men.= A
company or detachment commander may delegate to his noncommissioned
officers the authority to confine enlisted men in the guardhouse and
to place them in arrest in quarters, provided the case is immediately
reported to the company or detachment commander, who confirms the act
of the noncommissioned officer and adopts it as his own.--W. D.
decision, December, 1905.

=876. Reduction and Resignation.= A noncommissioned officer should
never be reduced to ranks, except for grave and sufficient reasons.
Nothing demoralizes the noncommissioned officers of a company so much
and upsets discipline to such an extent as the feeling that upon the
slightest pretext or fancy one is to be sent back to the ranks, to
associate with the privates he has been required to discipline.

In some regiments noncommissioned officers are permitted to send in
formal resignations, while in other regiments they are not, but, with
the approval of the company commander, they may ask for reduction,
giving proper, satisfactory and specific reasons. Of course,
resignations submitted in a spirit of accepted insubordination or
pique should not be considered, nor should they ever be in
substitution for deserved disciplinary punishment. If a
noncommissioned officer has good reasons for requesting reduction and
the granting of the request would not result in detriment to the
company, there is no reason why his application should not be
favorably considered. However, in such a case, the noncommissioned
officer should consult his company commander before submitting his
request in writing. It is thought the preponderance of custom is
against considering formal resignations.

Contentment and Harmony

=877.= The officers of the company should do everything possible to
make the organization contented and harmonious. Contentment and
harmony are not only conducive to good discipline and efficiency, but
they also make the government of the company easy and reduce
desertions to a minimum.

The showing of favoritism on the part of the captain is always a cause
of great dissatisfaction amongst the soldiers in the company. Soldiers
do not care how strict the captain is, just so he is fair and
impartial, treating all men alike.

=878. The Mess.= The captain should give the mess his constant
personal attention, making frequent visits to the kitchen and
dining-room while the soldiers are at meals so as to see for himself
what they are getting, how it is served, etc.

It is not saying too much to state that, in time of peace, a good mess
is the real basis of the contentment of a company.

Ascertain what the soldiers like to eat and then gratify their
appetites as far as practicable.

Be careful that the cook or the mess sergeant doesn't fall into a rut
and satiate the soldiers day after day with the same dishes.

Give the ration your personal attention--know yourself what the
company is entitled to, how much it is actually getting, what the
savings amount to, etc.

=879. Library and Amusement Room.= A library and an amusement room,
supplied with good books, magazines, papers, a billiard or pool table,
and a phonograph, are a source of much pleasure and contentment.

=880. Athletic Apparatus.= A judicious investment of the company fund
in baseballs, bats, dumb bells, Indian clubs, boxing gloves and other
athletic goods, and the encouragement of baseball, basketball, quoits,
etc., are in the interest of harmony and happiness.

Rewards and Privileges

=881.= 1. Deny all passes and requests for privileges of men whose
conduct is not good, and on the other hand grant to men whose conduct
is good, as many indulgences as is consistent with discipline.

2. Judicious praise in the presence of the first sergeant, a few
noncommissioned officers, or the entire company, depending upon
circumstances, very often accomplishes a great deal. After the
according of such praise, let your action toward the man show that his
good conduct is appreciated and that it has raised him in your
estimation, and make him feel you are keeping your eye on him to see
whether he will continue in his well doing.

3. Publication of commendatory orders, desirable special duty details,
etc.

4. Promotion, and extra duty details which carry extra pay.

5. Meritorious conduct of importance should be noted in the soldier's
military record and also on his discharge.

6. At the weekly company inspection, each chief of squad picks out the
neatest and cleanest man in his squad--the captain then inspects the
men so selected, the neatest and cleanest one being excused from one
or two tours of kitchen police, or some other disagreeable duty; or
given a two days' pass.

NOTE: Some officers do not think that good conduct should be
especially rewarded, but that if all soldiers be held strictly
accountable for their actions by a system of strict discipline,
good conduct attains its own reward in the immunities it enjoys.

=882. Company punishment.= It is neither necessary nor desirable to
bring every dereliction of duty before a court-martial for trial. In
fact, the invariable preferring of charges for minor[9] offenses will,
as a rule, injure rather than help the discipline of a command. The
104th Article of War states, "The commanding officer of any
detachment, company, or higher command may, for minor offenses not
denied by the accused, impose disciplinary punishments upon persons of
his command without the intervention of a court-martial, unless the
accused demands trial by court-martial." The disciplinary punishments
authorized may include admonition, reprimand, withholding of
privileges, extra fatigue, and restriction to certain specified
limits, but shall not include forfeiture of pay or confinement under
guard. (Par. 333, Manual for Courts-Martial.)

Some Efficacious Forms of Company Punishment

=883.= 1. Extra fatigue under the Company Supply Sergeant or the
noncommissioned officer in charge of quarters, cleaning up around and
in the company quarters, scrubbing pots, scouring tin pans, polishing
stoves, cutting wood, policing the rears, cutting grass, pulling
weeds, polishing the brass and nickel parts in the water closets and
bath rooms, washing and greasing leather, cleaning guns, boiling
greasy haversacks, and in camp, digging drains and working around slop
holes.

If the work be done well the offender may be let off sooner--if the
work be not done well, he may be tried for it.

2. Men may not be allowed to leave the immediate vicinity of the
barracks for periods ranging from one to ten days, during which time
they are subject to all kinds of disagreeable fatigue, and required to
report to the N. C. O. in charge of quarters at stated hours.

3. Breaking rocks for a given number of days. For every man so
punished, a private of the same company is detailed as a sentinel and
for every four men a corporal is detailed in addition--the idea being
to cause every man in each organization to take an interest in
preventing his own comrades from violating rules and regulations.

4. When two soldiers get into a row that is not of a serious nature, a
good plan is to set them at work scrubbing the barrack windows--one on
the outside and one on the inside, making them clean the same pane at
the same time. They are thus constantly looking in each other's faces
and before the second window is cleaned they will probably be laughing
at each other and part friends rather than nursing their wrath.

5. Confinement to barracks, reporting to the noncommissioned officer
in charge of quarters once every hour, from reveille to, say, 9 P. M.

NOTE: Some company commanders follow, for moral effect, the
practice of publishing to their companies all summary court
convictions of soldiers belonging to the organization.

Withholding of Privileges

1. Withholding of passes and of credit at the post exchange.

2. Withholding of furloughs.

=884. Control of Drunken and Obscene Men.= In order to control drunken
and obscene men, they have been bucked and gagged until sufficiently
sober to regain self-control and quiet down. The use of a cold water
hose in such cases has been known to accomplish good results. Great
care and judgment, however, should be exercised and no more force used
than is absolutely necessary.

It may also be said that persistently filthy men have been washed and
scrubbed.

=885.= Saturday morning and other company inspections are intended to
show the condition of the organization regarding its equipment,
military appearance and general fitness for service, and the
condition of the quarters as regards cleanliness, order, etc. Usually
everyone except the guard, one cook, and others whose presence
elsewhere can not be spared, are required to attend inspections,
appearing in their best clothes, their arms and accouterments being
shipshape and spick and span in every respect.

A man appearing at inspection with arms and equipments not in proper
shape, especially if he be a recruit or if it be his first offense,
may be turned out again several hours later, fully armed and equipped,
for another inspection, instead of being tried by summary court.

Property Responsibility

=886.= Special attention should be given to the care and
accountability of all company property.

1. All property (tents, axes, spades, chairs, hatchets, etc.) should
be plainly marked with the letter of the company.

2. Keep a duplicate copy of every memorandum receipt given for
property, and when such property is turned in or another officer's
memorandum receipt is given covering the property, don't fail to get
your original memorandum from the quartermaster.

3. See that the quartermaster gives you credit for all articles turned
in, or property accounted for on statement of charges, proceedings of
a surveying officer or otherwise.

4. Have a settlement with the quartermaster at the end of every
quarter as required by Army Regulations, taking an inventory of all
property held on memorandum receipt and submitting to the
quartermaster a statement of charges and a certified list of the china
and glassware unavoidably broken during the quarter.

5. Keep an account of all articles issued to the men, turned in to the
quartermaster, condemned, expended, lost, stolen or destroyed.

6. Worn out and unserviceable, property that is beyond repair in the
company should be submitted to the action of a surveying officer, the
Survey Reports (Form No. 196, A. G. O.) being prepared in triplicate,
and submitted to the commanding officer, who will appoint a surveying
officer. No property that can be repaired in the company should ever
be submitted to the action of a surveying officer or inspector. In
this connection company commanders and supply sergeants should be
thoroughly familiar with Ordnance Department pamphlet No. 1965 and G.
O. 26, 1917, the two covering the care, repair and disposition of
unserviceable Ordnance equipment.

7. Property that is to be submitted to the action of a surveying
officer or an inspector should always first be carefully examined by
the responsible officer in person, who should be prepared to give all
necessary information in regard to it.

The property should be arranged in the order of enumeration in the
survey or the inventory report, and should be arranged in rows of
five, ten, or some other number, so that the numbers of the various
articles can be counted at a glance.

The Army Regulations require that the responsible officer shall be
present at the inspection of property by a regular inspector. He
should also be present when property is acted on by a surveying
officer.

8. All company property (Ordnance, Quartermaster, Signal and Engineer)
except the litter (Medical Department) is gotten from the unit supply
officer on memorandum receipt. The litter is gotten from the surgeon
on memorandum receipt. Settlements are required to be made quarterly
with the officers concerned, and also when relinquishing command.

Company Paperwork

=887. Scope of subject.= To cover in full the subject of company
paperwork would require more space than it is practicable to spare in
a manual of this nature, and consequently only brief reference is made
herein to the principal books, records and papers connected with the
administration of a company.

The subject of company paperwork, as well as Army administration in
general, is covered in full in _Army Paperwork_, published by Geo.
Banta Publishing Co., Menasha, Wis. Price $2.00, postpaid.

In connection with company paperwork, it may be remarked that
now-a-days no company office is complete without a typewriter. For
all-around field and garrison work the CORONA, which is used
throughout the Army, is recommended. Not only is it less bulky and
lighter than other machines, but it is simpler of construction and
will stand harder usage. The Corona Folding Stand adds very much to
the convenience of the machine for field use.

=888. Morning Report.= Which shows, at the hour the report is
submitted, the exact condition of the company as to the number of
officers and men present for duty, sick, absent, etc. All changes
since the last report (the day before) are shown by name, under
"Remarks," on the right-hand page, and by number on the left-hand
page. In case of no change since last report, note, "No change,"
under, "Remarks," and also on the left-hand page. (See model given
below.)

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

NOTE. The numbers 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, etc., entered by hand on the left in
model, and which show the number of days from each printed number
(date) to the end of the month, are entered the beginning of each
month, and are a convenience in showing at once the number of rations
to be added or deducted in the case of men joining or leaving the
company.

=889. Daily Sick Report.= On which are entered the names of all
enlisted men requiring medical attention and such of the company
officers as may be excused from duty because of illness. The report is
signed each day by the surgeon and the company commander, and shows
whether or not the sickness was incurred in line of duty.

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

=890. Duty Roster.= On which is kept a record of all details for guard
duty, kitchen police, and other details for service in garrison and in
the field, except the authorized special and extra duty details. For
instructions regarding the keeping of roster, see, "Details and
Rosters," Manual of Interior Guard Duty and the Model and instructions
on the form itself.

=891. Files of Orders.= A file will be kept of all orders issued by
the company commander. Files will also be kept of all orders and
instructions received from higher authority.

=892. Company Fund Book.= In which are entered all receipts to, and
expenditures from, the company fund, together with the monthly
proceeding of the Company Council of Administration, and a list of
property, with cost thereof, purchased from the company fund. The
model in the front of the book shows how the account is to be kept.

=893. Correspondence Book, with index.= In which is entered a brief of
each item of correspondence in respect to which a record is necessary,
and a notation of the action taken thereon.

=894. Document File=, being the original documents or communications
when these are retained, and carbon, letter press, or other copies of
letters, indorsements, or telegrams sent in regard to the same, all of
which are filed according to serial numbers.

=895. Delinquency Record=, in which are noted the disciplinary
punishments awarded by the company commander in compliance with the
provisions of Army Regulations.

=896. Property Responsibility.= Two loose-leaf books in which are
listed, in one all articles of quartermaster property, and in the
other, all articles of ordnance property, issued each soldier for his
personal use.

=897. Service Record.= (Formerly known as "Descriptive List.") One for
each member of the company, in which is kept a full description of
him, including date of enlistment, personnel description, record of
deposits, trial by court-martial, record of vaccination, clothing
account, etc.

=898. Descriptive Card of Public Animals.= To be kept in organizations
supplied with public animals.

=899. Retained Copies of Rolls, Returns, etc.= Retained copies of the
various rolls, reports, and returns (property and other) that are
required by orders and regulations.

=900. Memorandum Receipts=, showing all articles of ordnance
quartermaster, and other property that may be held on memorandum
receipt, with date of receipt, from whom received, etc. The company
commander has a quarterly settlement with the staff officers
concerned.

=901. Abstract Record of Memorandum Receipts.= For keeping a record of
property issued on memorandum receipt, in connection with the unit
accountability equipment.

=902. Record of Rifles=, showing the number of the rifle, the Arsenal
where made, date of receipt, to whom issued, and number of shots fired
each target season. (Note. Geo. Banta Publishing Co., Menasha, Wis.,
print an excellent card for this purpose.)

=903. Summary Court Records.= Commanding officers are required to
furnish organization commanders with true copies of all summary court
records relating to men of their organizations, which papers form a
part of the records of the organization.

=904. Statement of Clothing Charged to Enlisted Men.= When clothing is
drawn individually from the quartermaster, the Individual Clothing
Slips are entered on the Statement of Clothing Charged to Enlisted
Men, which is filed with the requisition to which it pertains.

=905. Abstract of Clothing.= All individual clothing slips are entered
on this abstract as the issues are made, the total quantities and
money values being determined and the abstract completed at the end of
month or when the organization leaves the vicinity of the issuing
quartermaster for an extended period. At the close of period covered,
the organization commander compares his copy of the abstract with the
quartermaster's copy, and it is then filed with the Individual
Clothing Slips and Statement of Clothing Charged to Enlisted men.

=906. Record of Size of Clothing.= A record of the sizes of clothing
of every man in the company as ascertained by measurement.

=907. Company Target Records.= An individual record is kept for each
man of the company and for every officer firing, on which are entered
the record rifle practice and the qualification for each target
season. A similar record is kept in the case of those required to fire
with the pistol. Records are also kept of the company combat firing
and the proficiency test, and of the combat practice. The combat
practice records are kept until the close of the following target
season, when they may be destroyed.

=908. Company Return.= On the first day of each month a Company Return
for the preceding month is submitted to regimental headquarters. The
return gives by name all changes since rendition of last return in the
case of officers, and by number all changes in the case of enlisted
men, and shows the condition of the company at midnight of the last
day of the month for which rendered. All officers, present and absent,
are accounted for by name, and under "Record of Events," is given a
brief statement of the duties performed by the company during the
month, including marches made, actions in which engaged, etc. See next
page for a "Model" Company Return.

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

=909. Ration return.= In addition to rations, on this form are
obtained soap, candles, matches, toilet paper, rock salt, vinegar for
animals, flour for paste in target practice, towels, and ice, the
allowances of which are prescribed in the Army Regulations.

The best way to show how a ration return is prepared is to give a
"model" and then explain how the figures thereon were obtained.

The figures in the above "model" were obtained as follows:

(a) The enlisted strength of Co. "H," 50th Inf., present
and absent according to the morning report of Feb. 29/16,
was 97

(b) Deduct from the above the number of men absent
according to the morning report of Feb. 29/16, and for
whom rations will not, therefore, be drawn for any part
or for the whole of the month of March, the number of men
absent being (assumed) as follows:

On furlough 3
On detached service 2
Absent sick 2
Absent in confinement 1
Present sick in hospital 4
Attached to and rationed with the band 2 14
---------
Balance 83

(c) Add the number of men attached to the company for
rations, which (it is assumed) consists of two general
prisoners 2
---------
TOTAL 85

That is to say, we have 85 men for whom one ration per
day must be drawn for the month of March, that is to
say, 31 days.

Hence, the total number of rations will be,
85 × 31 = 2635 rations.

(d) Additions and deductions must be made as follows:

_Additions_

For the men who were attached to the company for
rations and who joined during the month of February,
from absent sick, furlough, detached service, etc., and
which (let us assume) the "Plus" column of "Rations" on
the company morning report for February shows to be 150

_Deductions_

For the men who left the company during the month of
February, on account of being sent to the hospital sick,
going on furlough, etc., and which (let us assume) the
"Minus" column of "Rations" on the company morning
report for February shows to be 200

Leaving us (a "Net correction") to be _added_ of 50
---------
And making the total number due the company for the
month of March 2585

EXTRA ISSUES

The Army Regulations fixes the maximum allowance of soap, toilet
paper, matches, etc., the commanding officer being authorized, if he
so desires, to determine the allowances, with the prescribed maximum.
The allowances are based either on so much per ration, per so many
rations, or per organization. In the case of candles and matches the
allowance is left entirely to the commanding officer.

[Illustration: Fig. 6: "Model" Ration Return]

_Example_

(See "model" ration return above)

_Soap._ Allowance is 0.64 for each ration or 4 lbs. to 100
rations. 25.85 × 4 = 103.40, i. e., the company is entitled to 103
lbs. of soap for the month of March.

_Toilet paper._ Allowance is 1000 sheets for every 60 rations,
2585 ÷ 60 = 43+, that is, the company is entitled to 43 packages
of toilet paper.

_Matches._ Allowance of matches for lighting fires and lights, for
which fuel and the illumination supplies are issued, is such as
the commanding officer may order as necessary.

_Flour._ Allowance of flour for paste used in target practice is
50 lbs. for each troop or company for the practice season.

FOOTNOTES:

[8] Silicate Roll Blackboards, which are perfectly flexible and can be
rolled tightly, like a map, without injury, may be obtained from the
New York Silicate Book Slate Co., 20 Vesey St., New York. They are
made in various sizes, about the most convenient for use in
noncommissioned officers' schools is No. 3, three by four feet--price
$2.

[9] For example, noisy or disorderly conduct in quarters, failure to
salute officers, slovenly dressed at formations, rifle equipments not
properly cleaned at inspection or other formations, overstaying pass,
short absences without leave and absences from formations (especially
for first offense).

CHAPTER II

DISCIPLINE

=910. Definition.= Discipline is not merely preservation of order,
faithful performance of duty, and prevention of offenses--in other
words, discipline is not merely compliance with a set of rules and
regulations drawn up for the purpose of preserving order in an
organization. This is only one phase of discipline. In its deeper and
more important sense discipline may be defined as the habit of
instantaneous and instinctive obedience under any and all
circumstances--it is the habit whereby the very muscles of the soldier
instinctively obey the word of command, so that under whatever
circumstances of danger or death the soldier may hear that word of
command, even though his mind be too confused to work, his muscles
will obey. It is toward this ultimate object that all rules of
discipline tend. In war, the value of this habit of instantaneous and
instinctive obedience is invaluable, and during the time of peace
everything possible should be done to ingrain into the very blood of
the soldier this spirit, this habit, of instantaneous, instinctive
obedience to the word of command.

=911. Methods of Attaining Good Discipline.= Experience shows that
drill, routine, military courtesy, attention to details, proper
rewards for good conduct, and invariable admonition or punishment of
all derelictions of duty, are the best methods of attaining good
discipline--that they are the most effective means to that end.

=912. Importance.= History shows that the chief factor of success in
war is discipline, and that without discipline no body of troops can
hold their own against a well-directed, well-disciplined force.

=913. Sound System.= We must bear in mind that what may be considered
a sound system of discipline at one epoch or for one nation, may be
inapplicable at another epoch or for another nation. In other words,
sound discipline depends upon the existing state of civilization and
education, the political institutions of the country, the national
trait and the national military system. For example, the system of
discipline that existed in the days of Frederick the Great, and which,
in modified form, exists today in certain European armies, whereby the
soldier was so inured to a habit of subjection that he became a sort
of machine--a kind of automaton. Such a system of discipline, while
answering admirably well its purpose at that time and for those
nations, would not do at all in this day and generation, and with a
people like ours, in whom the spirit of personal freedom and
individual initiative are born. Of course, the discipline that will
insure obedience under any and all conditions--the discipline that
will insure prompt and unhesitating obedience to march, to attack, to
charge--is just as important today as it was a thousand years ago, but
we can not attain it by the machine-making methods of former times.
The system we use must be in keeping with the national
characteristics of our people and the tactical necessities of the day,
the latter requiring individual initiative. According to the old
system, the company commander imposed his will upon a body of
submissive units; under the new system the company commander, backed
by authority and greater knowledge, leads obedient, willing units,
exacting ready obedience and loyal coöperation. The company commander
used to drive; now he leads.

=914. Means of attaining and maintaining such discipline.=

1. Explain to the men the importance of discipline and its value on
the field of battle, and give the reasons that makes it necessary to
subject soldiers to restrictions that they were not subjected to in
civil life.

2. Do not impose unnecessary restrictions or hardships on your men,
nor issue orders that have no bearing on their efficiency, health,
cleanliness, orderliness, etc.

3. Demand a high standard of excellence in the performance of all
duties whatsoever, and exact the utmost display of energy.

A system of discipline based on the above principles develops habits
of self-control, self-reliance, neatness, order, and punctuality, and
creates respect for authority and confidence in superiors.

=915. Punishment.= In maintaining discipline, it must be remembered
the object of punishment should be two-fold: (a) To prevent the
commission of offenses, and (b) to reform the offender. Punishment
should, therefore, in degree and character depend upon the nature of
the offense. Punishment should not be debasing or illegal, and the
penalty should be proportionate to the nature of the offense. If too
great, it tends to arouse sympathy, and foster friends for the
offender, thus encouraging a repetition of the offense. A distinction,
therefore, should be made between the deliberate disregard of orders
and regulations, and offenses which are the result of ignorance or
thoughtlessness. In the latter case the punishment should be for the
purpose of instruction and should not go to the extent of inflicting
unnecessary humiliation and discouragement upon the offender.

General Principles

=916.= In the administration of discipline the following principles
should be observed.

1. Everyone, officers and soldiers, should be required and made to
perform their full duty. If the post commander, for instance, requires
the company commanders to do their full duty, they will require their
noncommissioned officers to do their full duty, and the
noncommissioned officers will in turn require the men to do the same.

2. Subordinates should be held strictly responsible for the proper
government and administration of their respective commands, and all
changes or corrections should be made through them.

3. Subordinates should have exclusive control of their respective
commands, and all orders, instructions and directions affecting their
commands should be given through them.

4. If, in case of emergency, it be not practicable to make certain
changes or corrections, or to give certain orders, instructions or
directions, through the subordinates, they should be notified at once
of what has been done.

5. After a subordinate has been placed in charge of a certain duty,
all instructions pertaining thereto should be given through him, and
all meddling and interfering should be avoided. Interference by
superiors relieves the subordinate of responsibility, and causes him
to lose interest, become indifferent, and do no more than he is
obliged to do.

6. The certainty of reward for, and appreciation of, meritorious
conduct, should equal the certainty of punishment for dereliction of
duty.

7. It is the duty of an officer or noncommissioned officer who gives
an order to see that it is obeyed; carrying out orders received by him
does not end with their perfunctory transmission to subordinates--this
is only a small part of his duty. He must personally see that the
orders so transmitted are made effective.

8. The treatment of soldiers should be uniform and just, and under no
circumstances should a man be humiliated unnecessarily or abused.
Reproof and punishment must be administered with discretion and
judgment, and without passion; for an officer or noncommissioned
officer who loses his temper and flies into a tantrum has failed to
obtain his first triumph in discipline. He who can not control himself
can not control others.

9. Punishment should invariably follow dereliction of duty, for the
frequency of offenses depends, as a general rule, on the degree of
certainty with which their commission is attended with punishment.
When men know that their derelictions and neglects will be observed
and reproved, they will be much more careful than they would be
otherwise--that's human nature.

A strict adherence to the above general principles will instill into
the minds of those concerned, respect for authority and a spirit of
obedience.

PART III

MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS PERTAINING TO COMPANY TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION

CHAPTER I

GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF COMPANY TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION[10]

=917. Object of Training and Instruction.= The object of training and
instructing a company is to thoroughly knit together its different
parts, its various elements (individuals, squads and platoons), into a
complete, homogeneous mass, a cohesive unit, that will under any and
all conditions and circumstances respond to the will of the captain--a
cohesive unit that knows how to march, that knows how to live properly
in camp, that knows how to fight and that can be readily handled
tactically on the field of battle. In short, the object of training
and instruction is to make out of the company an efficient, wieldy
fighting weapon, to be manipulated by the captain. There is but one
way this object can be obtained, and that is by work, work, work--and
then more work--by constant care, attention and pains--by coöperation,
by team work, among the officers, the noncommissioned officers and the
privates.

=918. Method and Progression.= Arrangement is an essential of sound
teaching. Training and instruction in order to be easily understood
and readily assimilated--in order to give the greatest results in the
shortest time--must be carried on according to a methodical and
progressive plan. Each subject or subjects upon a knowledge of which
depend the proper understanding and mastering of another, should be
studied and mastered before taking up the other subject, and the
elementary and simpler aspects of a given subject must be mastered
before taking up the higher and more difficult phases of the subject,
which means that individual training and instruction must precede, and
provide a sound foundation for, collective training and
instruction--that is to say, for the higher tactical training and
instruction of the company as a unit. These basic, fundamental
principles of successful training and instruction apply to practical
as well as theoretical training. For instance, in the subject of
entrenchments we would first instruct the men individually in the use
of the tools and in the construction and use of the trenches, after
which we would pass on to the tactical use of entrenchments by the
company. Also, in training and instructing the company in fire
discipline, we would first explain to the men the power and tactical
value of the rifle, and instruct them in their duties on the firing
line as regards adjustment of sights, attention to commands, economy
of ammunition, etc.; we would explain to the platoon commanders and
guides their duties as regards control of fire, enforcement of fire
discipline, etc., after which we would practice the company as a unit
in fire action, and fire control, ending up with an exercise showing
the tactical application of the rules and principles explained. And
again, in the training and instruction of the company in the attack,
we would first train and instruct the company in all the formations
and operations that naturally precede an attack (patrolling, outposts,
advance guard, rear guard), and also in those that form an inherent
part of an attack (extended order, field firing, use of cover, etc.).

=919. Program.= The training and instruction of a company, whether
practical or theoretical, should be carried on in accordance with a
fixed, definite program, in which the subjects are arranged in a
natural, progressive order.

=920. Simultaneous Instruction and Training.= The next question that
presents itself is: Should instruction and training in each branch be
completed before proceeding to the next, or should instruction and
training be carried on simultaneously in two or more different
subjects, as one, for example, are taught mathematics, French and
history at the same time, a different hour of the day being devoted to
each subject? In other words, should we, for instance, devote one hour
of the day to attack, one hour to defense, and one hour to the service
of security, thus preventing the soldier from getting weary of doing
the same thing that whole day? Our answer is:

1st. If the instruction and training is being given on the ground
where the application of the principles of any given subject is varied
so much by the type of the ground and the nature of the situation,
each type of ground affording a different solution of the problem, it
is thought the best results can be obtained by finishing each subject
before proceeding to the next, thus not losing the "atmosphere" of one
subject by switching to the next, and also confusing the minds of the
men with different principles.

2nd. However, if the instruction and training be theoretical and the
time available each day be several hours, better results can be
obtained by studying two or more subjects simultaneously. This would
also be the case if the work be practical, but if it be such that the
type of the ground and the nature of the situation will not of
themselves afford variety in the application of the same principles.

=921. Responsibility.= The Army Regulations and War Department orders
hold the company commander responsible for the training and
instruction of the company. The subject is a most important one and
should receive serious thought and study. Before admonishing one of
your men for not knowing a subject, always ask yourself, "Have I made
an effort to teach it to him?"

=922. Interest.= Special effort should be made to make the training
and instruction of the company interesting, so that the work will not
become monotonous and irksome, and thus cause the men to lose interest
and get stale. To accomplish this, these points should be borne in
mind:

_Variety._ Inject variety into the work. Do not keep the men too long
at one thing.

_Clearness._ Every exercise, lesson or lecture should have in view a
well-defined object, the meaning and importance of which must be
explained to, and understood by, the men at the beginning of the
exercise, lesson or lecture. In other words, at the beginning, explain
the main, governing idea of the subject, and then take pains to
explain in a simple, conversational way each phase as you come to it.
Give the reasons for everything. You can not expect men to take an
interest in things the meaning of which they do not understand and the
reason for which they do not see. Make sure by asking questions of
different ones as you go along that your explanations are understood.

_Thoroughness._ Every lecture, talk, drill or exercise should be
carefully planned and arranged beforehand. Remember, that the men who
are going to listen to your talk--the men who are going to go through
the exercise--have the right to expect this of you, and you have no
right to compel them to listen to lots of disconnected, half-baked
statements, or make them go through a disjointed exercise or drill. In
the case of tactical exercises always, if practicable, visit and
examine the terrain beforehand. Of course, all this will mean
work--additional work--but remember the government pays you to work.

_Reality._ Make all practical work as real as possible--do not permit
the commission of absurdities--do not let men do things which
manifestly they would not be able to do in actual practice--and you
yourself be sure to make your exercises and tactical scheme as like
real conditions of warfare as possible.

=923. Individual Initiative.= The effective range and great power of
modern firearms cause troops in battle to be spread out over large
areas, thus decentralizing control over men and operations, and
consequently increasing the value and importance of individual
initiative. The company commander should, therefore, practice,
accustom and encourage the privates, noncommissioned officers and
lieutenants in the development and exercise of individual initiative
and responsibility. This should be borne in mind in all training and
instruction.

Officers, noncommissioned officers and privates must not "lay down"
just because they have no specific orders. Remember, the one thing
above all others that counts in war, is =action, initiative=. Indeed,
'tis better to have acted and lost than never to have acted at all.
Listen to what the Chief of Staff of the Army has to say about this in
the preface to the Field Service Regulations: "Officers and men of all
ranks and grades are given a certain independence in the execution of
the tasks to which they are assigned and are expected to show
initiative in meeting the different situations as they arise. Every
individual, from the highest commander to the lowest private, must
always remember that inaction and neglect of opportunities will
warrant more severe censure than an error in the choice of means."

=924. Determination and Individual Intelligence.= While the value of
discipline can hardly be overestimated, there are two other factors in
battle that are fully as important, if not more so, and they are,
=determination= to win, and =individual intelligence=, which, in war,
as in all other human undertakings, almost invariably spell success.
Therefore, make these two factors one of the basic principles of the
instruction and training of the company, and do all you can to instill
into your men a spirit of determination, and to develop in them
individual intelligence. Every human being has in his soul a certain
amount of determination, even though it be only enough to determine
upon the small things of life. Some people are born with more
determination than others, but it is a mistake to suppose that a man
must remain through life with the same amount of determination that he
brought into it. The attributes of the human mind, such as
determination, bravery, ambition, energy, etc., are all capable of
improvement and also of deterioration. It is essential therefore, for
us to endeavor by all means in our power to improve our strength of
character--our determination. It is, of course, useless for us to
learn the art of war if we have not sufficient determination, when we
meet the enemy, to apply the principles we have studied. There is no
reason, however, why every officer, noncommissioned officer and
private should not improve his determination of character by careful
training in peace. It can only be done by facing the difficulties,
thoroughly understanding the dangers, and asking ourselves repeatedly
whether we are prepared to face the ordeal in war. Let us not think,
in a vague sort of a way, that in war we shall be all right and do as
well as most people. We know that we are not gifted with tremendous
personal courage, and we know that, whatever happens, we shall not run
away. But that is not enough. We must train ourselves to understand
that in the hour of trial we can harden our hearts, that we can assume
the initiative, and retain it by constant advance and constant attack;
unless we can fill our hearts with the determination to win, we can
not hope to do our full duty on the field of battle and acquit
ourselves with credit.

=925. The Human Element.= No system of training and instruction that
does not take into account human nature, can be thoroughly effective.
The human element probably enters into war more than it does into any
other pursuit. The old idea of turning a human being into a machine,
by means of discipline, and making him dread his captain more than the
enemy, died long ago, especially with the American people. In modern
war success depends to a great extent upon the initiative, the
individual action of the soldier and this action is greatly influenced
by the soldier's state of mind at the moment, by the power that can be
exercised over his mind by his comrades and those leading him. The
company commander should, therefore, study the characteristics of the
human mind with the object of ascertaining how he can influence the
men under his command, so that in battle those human attributes which
are favorable to success, may be strengthened and those which are
favorable to defeat may be weakened. Of the former, courage,
determination, initiative, respect, cheerfulness, comradeship,
emulation and esprit de corps, are the principal ones; of the latter,
fear, surprise, disrespect, and dejection, are the leading ones. By
means of good, sound discipline, we can create, improve and foster the
qualities mentioned that are favorable to success, and we can
eliminate to a considerable extent, if not entirely, those that are
detrimental to success.

=926. Fear.= The emotion of fear acts more powerfully upon the
feelings of the individual soldier than any other emotion, and it is
also probably the most infectious. Fear in a mild form is present in
every human being. Nature wisely put it there, and society could not
very well get along without it. For example, we stop and look up and
down a crowded street before starting to cross, for fear of being run
over; in going out in the cold we put on our overcoats, for fear of
catching cold. In fact, we hardly do anything in life without taking
a precaution of some kind. These are all examples of reasonable fear,
which, within bounds is a perfectly legitimate attribute of a soldier
in common with other human beings. For example, we teach the men to
take advantage of cover when attacking, and we dig trenches when on
the defense, in both cases for fear of being shot by the enemy. It is
the unreasoning type of fear that plays havoc in war, and the most
deadly and common form of it is a vague, indefinite, nameless dread of
the enemy. If the average man was to analyze his feelings in war and
was to ask himself if he were actually afraid of being killed, he
would probably find that he was not. The ordinary soldier is prepared
to take his chance, with a comfortable feeling inside him, that,
although no doubt a number of people will be killed and wounded, he
will escape. If, then, a man is not unreasonably afraid of being
killed or wounded, is it not possible by proper training and
instruction to overcome this vague fear of the enemy? Experience shows
that it is. If a soldier is suffering from this vague fear of the
enemy, it will at least be a consolation to him to know that a great
many other soldiers, including those belonging to the enemy, are
suffering in a similar manner, and that they are simply experiencing
one of the ordinary characteristics of the human mind. If the soldier
in battle will only realize that the enemy is just as much afraid of
him as he is of the enemy, reason is likely to assert itself and to a
great extent overcome the unpleasant feelings inside him. General
Grant, in his Memoirs, relates a story to the effect that in one of
his early campaigns he was seized with an unreasonable fear of his
enemy, and was very much worried as to what the enemy was doing, when,
all at once, it dawned upon him that his enemy was probably worrying
equally as much about what he, Grant, was doing, and was probably as
afraid as he was, if not even more so, and the realization of this
promptly dispelled all of his, Grant's, fear. Confidence in one's
ability to fight well will also do much to neutralize fear, and if a
soldier knows that he can shoot better, march better, and attack
better, than his opponent, the confidence of success that he will, as
a result, feel will do much to dispel physical fear. By sound and
careful training and instruction make your men efficient and this
efficiency will give them confidence in themselves, confidence in
their rifles, confidence in their bayonets, confidence in their
comrades and confidence in their officers.

The physical methods of overcoming fear in battle are simply to direct
the men's minds to other thoughts by giving them something for their
bodies and limbs to do. It is a well-known saying that a man in battle
frequently regains his lost courage by repeatedly firing off his
rifle, which simply means that his thoughts are diverted by physical
movements. This is no doubt one of the reasons why the attack is so
much more successful in war than the defense, because in the attack
the men are generally moving forward and having their minds diverted
by physical motion from this vague dread of the enemy.

=927. Courage.= Courage, like all other human characteristics, is very
infectious, and a brave leader who has no fear of the enemy will
always get more out of his men than one who is not so well equipped in
that respect. However, it is a well-known fact that a man may be
brave far above his fellows in one calling or occupation, and
extremely nervous in another. For example, a man may have greatly
distinguished himself in the capture of a fort, who would not get on a
horse for fear of being kicked off. Courage of this kind is induced
chiefly by habit or experience--the man knows the dangers and how to
overcome them, he has been through similar experiences before and he
has come out of them with a whole skin. This type of courage can be
developed by careful training during peace, and it can be increased by
self-confidence--by so training the soldier that he knows and feels he
will know what to do in any emergency which may arise, and how to do
it; he will not be surprised by the unexpected event, which invariably
occurs, and he will understand others besides himself are being
troubled by unpleasant feelings, which it is his duty as a man and a
soldier to overcome.

=928. Surprise.= Surprise may be said to be the mother of a panic,
which is the worst form of fear. In such a case unreasoning fear
sometimes turns into temporary insanity. Panic is most infectious,
but, on the other hand, a panic can often be averted or stayed by the
courageous action of one or more individuals, who can thus impose
their will on the mass and bring the people to a reasonable state of
mind. =Teach every man in the company that when surprised the only
hope of success is to obey at once and implicitly the orders of his
immediate commander.=

Surprises in war are not limited to the ordinary acceptance of the
term, such as a sudden attack from an unexpected direction. The
soldier who goes into battle, for instance, and hears the whiz of a
bullet, or sees a shell burst in front of him, is surprised if he has
not been taught in peace that these things have to be faced, and that
for one bullet that hurts anyone thousands have to be fired.
Similarly, a man sees a comrade knocked over; the horrors of war are
immediately brought to him, and his courage begins to ebb--he has been
surprised, because he has not realized in peace that men are bound to
be killed in war. The whole atmosphere of the battlefield is a
surprise to the average soldier with no previous experience--the enemy
is everywhere, behind every bush, and lurking in every bit of cover,
the air is full of bullets, and any advance towards the
formidable-looking position held by the enemy is suicidal. However, if
the soldier is properly trained and instructed in peace, he will not
be greatly surprised at his novel surroundings; he will know that the
enemy is not everywhere, and that one bullet sounds much more
dangerous than it really is. A bullet sounds quite close when it is
fifty yards away, and there is a popular saying that a man's weight in
lead is fired for every man that is killed in war.

=929. Respect.= It is a mistake to imagine that all that is required
from a soldier is respect to his officers and noncommissioned
officers. Self-respect is fully as important. A soldier is a human
being; if he possesses self-respect he will respect all that is good
in his comrades, and they will respect all that is good in him. A man
who respects himself knows how to respect other people. These are the
men that form the backbone of the company, and are the best material
on which to work in order to raise the general standard of courage in
Battle. From a purely military point of view, it is absolutely
necessary for an officer, noncommissioned officer, or private to
possess some marked military qualifications in order to gain respect
from others.

This respect engenders confidence in others. Self-respect in the
individual can be encouraged, not by fulsome praise, but by a quiet
appreciation of the good military qualities displayed by him, and by
making use of those qualities whenever an opportunity occurs. For
example, if a soldier is seen to do a good piece of scouting or
patrolling, the first opportunity should be taken to give him a
similar task, if possible in a more responsible position or on a more
important occasion. Knowledge is a powerful factor in creating
respect, and is probably second only to determination of character. It
is essential, therefore, that all officers and noncommissioned
officers should have a thorough knowledge of their duties--that they
should be "on to their jobs."

=930. Cheerfulness.= Cheerfulness is a valuable military asset in war,
and like all other characteristics of the human being, is very
infectious, and in times of depression, such as during a long siege,
or after the failure of an attack, it does more than anything else to
restore the fighting power of the men.

=931. Contentment.= Contentment amongst troops in war is dependent
upon these main factors: good leading, good food, and sufficient
shelter and sleep. Of these, good leading is by far the most
important, because it has been proved time and again that badly fed
and badly quartered troops, who have suffered great hardships, will
still be content and will fight in the most gallant and vigorous
manner, provided they are well led. Although good leading emanates in
the first instance from the highest military authorities, a great deal
depends upon the company officers and noncommissioned officers. A good
leader as a rule is careful of the comforts of his men; he obtains the
best food and best shelter available, he does not wear out the men by
unnecessary movements or unnecessary work, either in the field or in
camp, and consequently when he does order them to do anything they
know at once that it is necessary and they do it cheerfully.

=932. Comradeship.= Comradeship is a very valuable military
characteristic. What a world of meaning there is in the words, "Me and
my bunkie." A soldier may have many acquaintances and a number of
friends, but he has but one "bunkie." In times of great danger two men
who are "bunkies" will not shirk so easily as two independent men. The
best in one man comes out to the surface and dominates any bad
military points in the other. They can help each other in countless
ways in war, and if one is unfortunately killed or wounded, the other
will probably do his best to get even with the enemy at the earliest
possible opportunity. This spirit may not be very Christianlike, but
it is very human and practical, and helps to win battles, and to win
battles is the only reason why soldiers go to war.

ART OF INSTRUCTION ON THE GROUND

=933. Advantages.= Whenever practicable, training and instruction
should, in whole or in part, be imparted on the ground, as this gives
the instruction a practical aspect that is most valuable, and enables
the soldier to grasp and apply principles that he would not otherwise
understand. Knowledge that a man can not apply has no value.

=934. Different Methods.= Instruction on the ground may be given
according to one of these three methods:

_1st Method._ By means of a talk or lecture prepare the minds of the
men for the reception and retention of the subject to be explained
later on the ground. In other words, first explain the principles of
the subject and then put a "clincher" on the information thus imparted
by taking the men to some suitable ground, assuming certain situations
and then by quizzing different men see how they would apply the
principles just explained in the talk or lecture. For example, after a
lecture on the selection of fire-positions take the men to some
suitable nearby place and explain to them that the company is
attacking toward that house and is being fired upon from that
direction. Then continue:

=Captain:= Remember what I told you about the selection of good
fire-positions during the advance. We want to use our rifles with
effect, so we must be able to see the position of the enemy. On the
other hand, we want to avoid being hit ourselves, if possible; so, we
would like to get as much cover as possible. Now, Smith, do you think
where we are at present standing is a good place for a fire-position?

=Smith:= No, sir.

=Captain:= Why not?

=Smith:= We can see the enemy from here, but he can see us better than
we can see him, and can hit us easier than we can hit him.

=Captain:= Jones, can you choose a better place, either to the front
or rear of where we are now standing?

=Jones:= I would choose a position along that row of bushes, about
fifty yards to the front.

=Captain:= Why?

=Jones:= Because, etc., etc.

Twenty minutes' instruction in this manner, after a lecture, will
firmly fix in the brains of the men the principles explained in the
lecture.

It is a good plan to repeat the salient points of the lecture in the
questions, as was done in the first question asked above, or to do so
in some other way.

If a man can not give an answer, or choose a suitable place, explain
the requirements again and help him to use his common sense.

_2d Method._ By practicing the men on the ground in the subject about
which the talk or lecture was delivered.

_3d Method._ This may be called the ocular demonstration method, which
consists in having a part of the company go through the exercise or
drill, while the rest of the company observes what is being done. This
method is illustrated by the following example:

=935. Attack.= The company commander has just delivered a talk to the
company on the second stage of the attack, and has marched the company
to a piece of ground suitable for practicing this particular
operation, and which the company commander has himself visited
beforehand (The ground should always be visited beforehand by the
company commander, who should be thoroughly familiar with it. If
possible, ground suitable for practicing the operation in question
should always be selected.) The operation should begin about 1200
yards from the enemy's position. After pointing out the enemy's
position to the company, the particular part of his line it is
intended to assault and the direction the company is to advance, the
company commander would then proceed something like this: "We are part
of a battalion taking part in a battle, and there are companies to our
right and left, with a support and reserve in our rear. So far we have
been advancing over ground that is exposed to hostile artillery fire
(or not exposed to hostile artillery fire, according to the actual
country). We have just come under the enemy's infantry fire also, and
consequently we must change our method of advancing. Our immediate
object is to get forward, without expending more ammunition than is
absolutely necessary, to a position close enough to the enemy to
enable us to use our rifles with such deadly effect that we will be
able to gain a superiority of fire. Now, is this place sufficiently
close for the purpose? No, it is not--it's entirely too far away. Is
that next ridge just in front of us close enough? No, it is not; it is
at least 1,000 yards from the enemy's position. As a rule, we must get
from eight to six hundred yards from the enemy's position before the
real struggle for superiority of fire begins.

"The following are the main points to which attention must be paid
during this part of the advance:

"1. We must halt in good fire position from which we can see and fire
at the enemy, and from which we can not be seen very clearly.

"2. We must advance very rapidly over any open ground that is exposed
to the enemy's artillery or rifle fire.

"3. We must find halting places, if possible under cover, or under the
best cover available, so as to avoid making our forward rushes so long
that the men will get worn out, and begin to straggle long before they
get close enough to the enemy to use their rifles with deadly effect.

"4. Whenever possible, company scouts should be sent on ahead to
select fire-positions."

Of course, the above points will have been explained already in the
lecture, but this short summary is given in order to focus the minds
of the men upon the action that must be taken by the privates, and
squad leaders and the platoon commanders.

We now take one platoon and the remainder of the company looks on. The
platoon commander is reminded that he is under artillery and infantry
fire, and is then directed to advance, in proper formation, to the
first fire-position available.

We will suppose there is a gentle slope up to the next ridge or
undulation of the ground, and that there are no obstructions to the
view except those afforded by the ground itself. The platoon now
advances, the captain remaining with the rest of the company, pointing
out mistakes as well as good points, and asking the men questions,
such as:

=Captain:= Corporal Smith, should the whole platoon have gone forward
together, or would it have been better to advance by squads?

=Corporal Smith:= I think it should have advanced by squads.

=Captain:= No, it was all right to advance as they did. At this
distance the enemy's infantry fire would not be very deadly, the
platoon is well extended as skirmishers, it would take considerably
longer to go forward to the next position by successive squads and we
want to advance at this stage as rapidly as possible; for, the longer
we took, the longer would the men be exposed to fire, and consequently
the greater would be the number of casualties.

=Captain:= Sergeant Jones, why did the platoon advance at a run when
moving down the slope, and begin to walk just before reaching the foot
of the slope?

=Sergeant Jones:= Because the slope is exposed and it was necessary to
get over it as quickly as possible. They began to walk just before
reaching the foot of the slope, because they struck dead ground and
were covered from the enemy's fire by the ridge in front.

=Captain:= Corporal Adams, shouldn't the platoon have halted when it
reached cover, so as to give the men a rest?

=Corporal Adams:= No, sir; the men had not run very far and walking
gave them sufficient rest. It would have been an unnecessary loss of
time to halt.

=Captain:= Harris, why did that man run on ahead as soon as the
platoon halted?

=Pvt. Harris:= So he could creep up the crest of the ridge and lie
down in exactly the spot that is the best fire-position--that is,
where he can just see to fire over the crest and where the enemy can
not see him.

=Captain:= Yes, that's right. All the men in the platoon might not
stop at the best fire-position and in the hurry and excitement of the
moment the platoon commander might also fail to do so, but if a man
goes forward and lies down, the whole platoon knows that they must not
go beyond him. Individual men who, owing to slight undulations of
ground, may not be able to fire when they halt in line with this man,
can creep up until they can see. Others who, for the same reason as
regards the ground, find that if they get up on a line with the man
they will be unduly exposed, will halt before that time.

=Captain:= Sergeant Roberts, is it necessary for another platoon to
provide covering fire during the advance of the platoon?

=Sergeant Roberts:= No sir. At this range the enemy's infantry fire
would not be very effective, and it is important to husband our
ammunition for the later stages of the attack.

Having asked any other questions suggested by the situation or the
ground, the captain will then take the rest of the company forward
over the ground covered by the platoon, halting at the place where the
platoon changed its pace from a rush to a walk, so that the men can
see for themselves that cover from fire has been reached. He will then
move the rest of the company forward and tell them to halt and lie
down in what each man considers to be the best fire-position, not
necessarily adopting the same position as that chosen by the leading
platoon. The platoon commanders will then go along their platoons and
point out any mistakes.

The leading platoon will now join the company and another platoon will
be deployed in the fire position, the platoon commander being directed
to advance to the next fire-position.

As we are now about 1,000 yards from the enemy's position the question
will again arise as to whether covering fire is necessary.

If the enemy's rifle fire were heavy and accurate it might be
necessary, but it should be avoided if possible, on account of the
expenditure of ammunition.

We will suppose that the ground falls gently towards the enemy and is
very exposed to view for about 300 yards, and half this distance away
there is a low bank running parallel to the front of the attack and
with a small clump of three or four trees on the bank directly in
front of the platoon. Four hundred yards away is the bottom of the
valley covered with bushes and shrubs. On the far side the ground
rises with small undulations and low foot hills to the high ground
occupied by the enemy.

There appears to be no marked fire-position which will afford any
cover except the bank 150 yards away. The second platoon advances in
the same manner as did the first and the captain with the commanders
of the remaining platoons will continue to ask questions and point out
what has been done right or wrong by the leading platoon. The first
question which will arise is whether the platoon can reach the fire
position offered by the bank in one rush, and secondly, whether the
bank is a good fire-position. A former question will again crop up as
to whether the whole platoon should go forward at once or whether the
advance should be made by squads.

A hundred and fifty yards is a long way to advance without a halt, and
if a halt is made on such exposed ground fire must be opened. Probably
three advances, each of about fifty yards, would be made, covering
fire being provided by the other platoons, which will be occupying the
fire-position which the leading platoon has just left. This covering
fire would not endanger the leading platoon as it would be delivered
from just behind the crest and the leading platoon would be over the
crest and out of sight and therefore out of fire from the platoon in
rear.

The selection of a fire-position during this advance would depend upon
very minute folds of the ground, or very low bushes, grass, etc.,
which might give a certain amount of cover from view, and therefore
make it difficult for the enemy to aim or range accurately. We will
suppose that the leading platoon has halted to fire about fifty yards
in front, the remaining platoons, in turn, should then be taken
forward, examining the ground very carefully as they go, and each
platoon commander asked to halt his platoon in what he considers to be
the best place.

The possibility of using a scout to select a fire-position would be
considered, and a fire-position selected by one platoon would be
compared with that selected by another.

The third platoon would then lead during the advance to the next
fire-position, and so on with the fourth platoon, if necessary, until
the bank was reached. The bank will afford a good deal of material for
discussion. Is it a good fire-position or is it not, should it be
occupied as such or should it be avoided altogether?

If we ask an artillery officer his opinion about the matter, he will
tell us that by means of the clump of trees the defenders' artillery
will be able to range with absolute accuracy on that bank. The
direction of the bank is parallel to their front, and therefore they
can fire at any part of it for some distance right and left of the
clump without materially altering their range, and if any infantry
occupy the bank they can bring a very deadly fire to bear against
them.

There appears to be no doubt, from an artillery point of view, that
our platoon should avoid occupying it and get out of its neighborhood
as rapidly as possible.

There is another drawback as regards the bank: it is some 850 yards
from the enemy's position and may be expected to be under an effective
rifle fire. It is no doubt a good mark for the enemy, and, now we come
to the crux of the whole matter; his artillery and infantry fire might
not do us much damage so long as we remain behind the bank, but they
might make it very unpleasant for us directly we try to leave this
cover and advance further.

Before finally deciding what to do we must consider human nature,
which is entirely in favor of halting behind the bank, and if allowed
to remain there long, will be opposed to leaving it. We cannot hope to
gain superiority of fire over the enemy at a range of 850 yards, so
that a long halt at the bank is out of the question. But it appears to
be an extraordinary thing, when we are searching everywhere for cover,
that we should be doubtful about occupying such good cover when we
find it.

If we decide not to occupy it, the logical conclusion is that, when
preparing a position for defense, we should construct a good
fire-position for the attack some 850 yards away, which is the last
thing we should think of doing.

There is no doubt about it, that with badly-trained troops such a
fire-position would be liable to become a snare, and that if they once
occupied it, there would be great difficulty in getting them forward
again, and probably the attack would be brought to a standstill at a
critical time.

The answer appears to be found in the simple solution of good
training. We must teach our men that when they get into such positions
they must use the cover afforded, but for no longer than any other
fire-position, and that they must get into the habit in peace of
looking upon such localities with suspicion, and with the knowledge
that they are not suitable for lengthy occupation in war, if the
battle is to be won.

We now come to a still more difficult question of training, namely,
how far can the company get forward from the bank without being
compelled to stop in order to gain superiority of fire over the
defense? In war we want to get as close as possible; the moral effect
on the defense is greater, our fire is more effective, and we are
likely to gain our object more rapidly. In peace there is no fire to
stop us, and we move forward to ridiculous positions which we could
not possibly reach in war without first gaining superiority of fire.
The result of this is that we try to do the same thing when first we
go to war, and we are stopped, probably much further back than we
should have been if we had studied the question in peace.

Even on the most open ground we must get to within 600 yards of the
enemy, and if the ground affords any cover in front, the exposed space
must be rushed and the more forward position gained. Having pointed
out this difficulty to the company during the previous lecture, and
reminded them of it on the ground, we can now extend the whole company
and move forward from the bank, using covering fire and letting each
platoon commander decide how far he can get to the front after a
series of rushes, the company acting as a whole.

The captain can then go down the line and discuss with each platoon
the position it has reached. Whilst he is doing this, the remaining
platoons can be trained in fire direction and control, which should be
carefully watched and criticized by the platoon commanders. One
platoon, owing to the nature of the ground in front of it, can get
forward further than other platoons, and this should be brought home
to each platoon, so as to avoid the possibility of playing the game of
follow your leader, and one platoon halting merely because another has
halted.

If there is still time available, and the ground is suitable, the
company can be moved to a flank to choose a similar fire-position
where the ground is more favorable to an advance, and where the
company could get within 300 yards of the enemy, or even less, before
it would be absolutely necessary to stop in order to gain superiority
of fire.

If there is still time available, and the ground is suitable, the
whole operation can be carried out in the opposite direction or in
some other direction, and the platoons can thus be trained to
appreciate that fire-positions which are good in one place are bad in
another.

=936. Defense.= Demonstrations in defense can be carried out in a
similar manner, the captain explaining to the company the general line
of defense to be taken up, the portion allotted to the company, and
the probable direction of the enemy's attack.

The coöperation of the artillery and infantry will have been pointed
out in the previous lecture: how some part of the enemy's advance will
be dealt with by artillery alone, some part by both artillery and
infantry, and some part by infantry alone.

This can now be pointed out to the men on the ground. Having
considered the assistance provided by the artillery, the next point to
decide upon is the exact position of the fire trench. The best way to
proceed is to allot a certain portion of the front occupied by the
company to each platoon and to let the platoon commanders take charge
of the operations. The platoon commander can direct one of his squads
to select a position for the trench, and that squad can lie down
there. The remaining squads will then select a position in turn. If
two squads select the same they can lie down together. The platoon
commander will then fall in his platoon, and make them lie down in the
most retired position chosen; he will ask the squad leader why the
squad chose that locality in preference to any other, why they did not
go ten yards further forward or ten yards further back; and he will
explain to the whole platoon the advantages and disadvantages of
selecting this locality. He will then move the whole platoon forward
to the next position chosen by another squad and deal with that
locality. Finally, he will select the position he thinks the best,
giving his reasons why he has decided upon it, and place the whole
platoon on it. When all the platoons have decided upon their line of
defense, the captain will move the whole company in turn from the
ground occupied by one platoon to that occupied by another, asking the
platoon commander in each case to explain why the position was chosen
in preference to any other.

He will give his decision as regards each platoon, and he will finally
arrange for the position to be occupied by the whole company. One
platoon, for some good reason, may have chosen a place which it would
not be safe to occupy, owing to the fire of another platoon on the
flank. Another platoon may have chosen a place which was very good as
regards the field of fire in a direction which was already adequately
defended by another platoon, but which had a bad field of fire over
ground which no other platoon could fire upon. The company commander
would adjust all these matters, and in the end one or more platoons
might not be placed in the best position as regards their own
particular front, but in the best as regards the whole company.

Having decided upon the exact site of the trenches and the general
distribution of fire, the next matter to consider is the amount of
clearing that is necessary, and the position and nature of any
obstacles which may be required. Each platoon commander having been
allotted a definite fire zone, can point out to his platoon what
clearance is necessary; he can then ask each squad, as before, to
choose the position for the obstacle. The company commander can then
take the whole company to the position occupied by each platoon and
tell the platoon commander to explain what ground they propose to
clear, where they propose to place their obstacle, the material
available for its construction, and in every case the reason why the
decision has been arrived at. If digging is permitted, the trenches
will now be constructed, and care will be taken that they are actually
finished. It is far better to work overtime than to construct trenches
which would be of little use in war and could not be properly
defended. It is the exception rather than the rule to see trenches
properly finished, fit for occupation, and capable of resisting a
heavy attack. If the trenches cannot be dug the company can be taken
to another part of the same position, where the ground in front is
totally different, and the exercise can be repeated, the platoon and
company commanders pointing out why a fire trench which was well sited
in the first case would be badly sited if a similar position was
selected in the second case.

=937. Outpost.= We can now turn to the method of training the company
in outpost duty, making use of the same system of demonstration.
Having pointed out to the company the locality where the main body is
bivouacked, the fighting position which the main body will occupy in
case a heavy attack is made against the outposts, and the general line
of the outposts, the company commander will indicate on the ground the
extent of front which is to be guarded by his company, stating whether
imaginary companies continue the position on one or both flanks. He
will point out the possible avenues of approach from the direction of
the enemy to that portion of the position to be occupied by the
company, and state from which direction the enemy is most likely to
advance and why.

The first point to decide is the number of outguards and their exact
position. In war this would always be done by the company commander,
but if it is desired to give the junior officers of the company some
instruction in this important detail, they should be sent out before
the company arrives on the ground to reconnoiter the position and make
their decisions. The exact siting of the trenches for the outguards,
the construction of obstacles, and the clearance of the foreground
having been decided upon and the positions selected for each outguard
discussed, and a definite site selected, the next question to decide
is the number and position of the sentries.

The platoon commander would then take each scheme in turn, visit with
the whole platoon each position selected for the sentry, and decide
finally what it would be best to do, giving, as usual, his reasons.

Having decided upon the positions of the sentries, and their line of
retreat, so as not to mask the fire of the outguard, the next matter
to consider would be the number of patrols that are required, and the
particular areas of ground that must be examined by them periodically.
The necessary trenches, obstacles, etc., would then be constructed.

Finally, the whole company should be assembled, marched to the
position chosen for each outguard and the reasons for selecting the
position explained by the company commander. The company should then
be told off as an outpost company, and divided into outguards,
supports, if any, and the necessary sentries over arms, patrols, etc.,
and marched to their respective posts.

If there is still time available each platoon commander can
reconnoiter the ground for suitable positions for his outguards by
night, take the outguards there, explain why the change of position is
desirable, and direct the outguard commanders with their outguards to
select positions for the sentries, following the same procedure as by
day.

Although it is quite correct to select positions for night outposts
during daylight, when possible, they should never be definitely
occupied by the company before dark, when the forward movement could
not be observed by the enemy. To practice night outposts by day is bad
instruction, outguards and sentries are placed in positions which
appear ridiculous to the ordinary mind, and the men get confused ideas
on the subject. When it is desired to practice day and night outposts
as an advanced exercise it is advisable to commence work in the
afternoon, establish the day outposts, reconnoiter for the night
outposts, make the change after dark and construct the necessary
trenches, obstacles, etc., after dark.

It is, however, extremely important that the patrols should get to
know their way about the country in front during the daylight, when
possible, so that they will have some practice in recognizing land
marks by night.

It frequently occurs, when training the company in outpost duties,
that periods elapse during which the outguards are doing nothing.
These opportunities should be taken to instruct the men in their
duties when ordered to patrol to the front, the same system of
demonstration being employed. For instance, the officer or
noncommissioned officer commanding a piquet can select three men,
point out certain ground in front which the sentries cannot see and
which must be examined by a patrol, and proceed to instruct the whole
picket in the best manner of carrying out this work. We will suppose
that the patrol is working by day and that the ground to be visited is
behind a small hill some 500 yards in front of the sentry. The
commander of the picket will then explain to the men that the first
object of the patrol is to reach the ground to be examined without
being seen by any hostile patrols which may be moving about in front.
Before proceeding further it is necessary for the patrol to decide
upon the best line of advance. The various lines of advance will be
discussed and the patrol asked to decide which they would select.
Three other men can then be asked to give their opinion, and so on
until all the men of the picket have expressed their views. The
commander of the picket will then state which he considers the best
line and give his reasons.

The next matter to decide is the method of advance to be adopted by
the patrol. Are the three men to march past the sentry in one body and
walk straight over the hill in front? If they do this there may be a
hostile patrol hiding just behind the crest, watching the movements of
our patrol, and directly the latter reach the hill they will be
covered by the rifles of the hostile patrol at a few yards' range and
will be captured or shot.

If the patrol is not to advance in one body how is it to act? There is
plenty of time available, so that there are no objections to
deliberate methods. The patrol should advance from cover to cover with
one man always going forward protected by the rifles of the remaining
two men who have halted in a good position to fire on any enemy that
can fire on the leading man. The leading man having readied the cover
in front will signal back all clear, and the two men in the rear will
join him. They will then make their next advance in a similar manner.

By looking at the hill the patrol can make a good guess at the
locality which a hostile patrol would select if it was on the hill. It
would be a place where it could get a good view towards our outpost
line, and where the patrol could not be seen itself from the outpost
line. If the hill was quite bare with nothing but grass on it and flat
round top, the best place for the enemy's patrol would be exactly on
the top just behind the crest. In such a position he could not be seen
by any sentry to the right or left of our picket. For example, if the
hostile patrol chose a place on the side of the bare slope of the hill
and looked over the crest line it would not be seen by our sentry, but
it might be seen by another one on the flank.

The object of our patrol would be to approach the hill, not direct
from the outguard, but either from the left or right of the hill and
thus come on the flank of the enemy's patrol if he was there.

The whole picket can then be taken out to the front and follow the
movements of the patrol from cover to cover until the hill is reached.

The next step will be to ascertain if there is any one on the top of
the hill. If the hill is perfectly bare with a somewhat convex slope,
it would be best for the three men to extend to about twenty yards
interval and move forward together, prepared to drop on the first sign
of the enemy, so that they can creep up and open fire on him without
exposing themselves. Three men with magazine rifles extended in this
manner, opposed to a hostile patrol collected in one party, should be
able to deal with the latter without much difficulty. Their fire would
be converging, and coming from different directions would confuse the
hostile patrol, especially if the advance was made from a flank. The
men of the patrol when creeping up the hill should avoid exposing
themselves in the direction of the ground behind the hill, if
possible, because they want to examine that ground later on, and if
seen by the enemy they might fall into an ambuscade. If it is
impossible to avoid being seen from the ground beyond, it would be
best for the patrol to retire as though they were going back to the
outposts, and then move round the flank of the hill and advance to the
ground beyond from an unexpected direction. All this would be
considered by the officer or noncommissioned officer commanding the
picket, together with many other points.

Sufficient has been said to explain how this system of demonstration
can be worked in connection with any class of operation in the field.
It is certainly slow, and takes a long time, but no one is ever idle
and every one is constantly learning something fresh, for the simple
reason that, although one may know every detail of the subject, the
ground constantly differs and requires to be dealt with in a common
sense and skillful manner. The men are interested throughout, and one
morning spent on this kind of work is worth several days of practice
in the ordinary manner.

It should be remembered that this system of demonstration is only
required to teach the men their work; when they have once learned it
and thoroughly understand the necessary details they must be practiced
in it, the company or platoon commander indicating what has been well
done, what has been badly done, and what requires improvement. (See
"Outposts," Par. 1051.)

OTHER EXAMPLES OF THE OCULAR DEMONSTRATION METHOD

=938.= The following illustrations will suggest other examples of the
employment of the ocular demonstration method of instruction:

=The advantages and disadvantages of close and extended order.= Send a
lieutenant or a noncommissioned officer with two or three squads of
the older soldiers some distance to the front of the company, and have
them advance toward the company, first in close order and then in
extended order.

By =ocular demonstration= show the men who are watching the approach
of the company how easy it would be even for the poorest shots to land
bullets in the thick of a closed body, but how much of a less distinct
target the extended order offers and how many spaces there are in the
skirmish line for the bullets to pass through; also, how much more
easily cover can be employed and the rifle used in the extended order.
Let them see also how much more difficult it is for the officers and
noncommissioned officers to maintain control over the movements of
troops in extended order, and the consequent necessity and duty of
every soldier, when in extended order, doing all he can, by attention
and exertion, to keep order and help his officers and noncommissioned
officers to gain success.

=939. The Use of Cover.= Send a lieutenant or noncommissioned officer
with a couple of squads of old soldiers a few hundred yards to the
front and have them advance on the company as if attacking, first
without taking advantage of cover and then taking advantage of all
available cover, the part of the company that is supposed to be
attacked lying down and aiming and snapping at the approaching
soldiers. Then reverse the operation--send the defenders out and have
them advance on the former attackers. Explain that the requisites of
good cover are: Ability to see the enemy; concealment of your own
body; ability to use the rifle readily. Then have a number of men take
cover and snap at an enemy in position, represented by a few old
soldiers. Point out the defects and the good points in each case.

=940. Practice in Commanding Mixed Squads.= In order to practice
noncommissioned officers in commanding mixed firing squads, and in
order to drill the privates in banding themselves together and obeying
the orders of anyone who may assume command, it is good training for
two or more companies to practice reënforcing each other by one
company assuming a given fire-position and the other sending up
reënforcements by squads, the men being instructed to take positions
anywhere on the firing line where they may find an opening. However,
explain to the men that whenever possible units should take their
positions on the firing line as a whole, but that in practice it is
very often impossible to do this, and that the drill is being given so
as to practice the noncommissioned officers in commanding mixed units
on the firing line and also to give the privates practice in banding
themselves into groups and obeying the command of any noncommissioned
officer who may be over them.

=941. Operating Against Other Troops.= There is no better way of
arousing interest, enthusiasm, and pride in training troops than by
creating a feeling of friendly rivalry and competition amongst the
men, and the best way to do this is to have one part of the company
operate against the other in all such practical work as scouting,
patrolling, attacking, etc. Whenever practicable, blank ammunition
should be used. One of the sides should wear a white handkerchief
around the hat or some other distinguishing mark. =The troops that are
sent out must be given full and explicit instructions as to just
exactly what they are to do, so that the principles it is intended to
illustrate may be properly brought out.=

FOOTNOTES:

[10] This chapter is based on "Company Training," by General Haking,
British Army, which is the best book the author has ever seen on the
subject of company training. "Field Training of a Company of
Infantry," by Major Craufurd, British Army, an excellent little book,
was also consulted.

CHAPTER II

GENERAL COMMON SENSE PRINCIPLES OF APPLIED MINOR TACTICS[11]

=942.= To begin with, you want to bear in mind that there is nothing
difficult, complicated or mysterious about applied minor tactics--it
is just simply the application of plain, every-day, common horse
sense--the whole thing consists in familiarizing yourself with certain
general principles based on common sense and then applying them with
common sense. Whatever you do, don't make the mistake of following
blindly rules that you have read in books.

=943.= One of the ablest officers in the Army has recently given this
definition of the Art of War:

One-fifth is learned from books;
One-fifth is common sense;
Three-fifths is knowing men and how to lead them.

The man who would be successful in business must understand men and
apply certain general business principles with common sense; the man
who would be a successful hunter must understand game and apply
certain general hunting principles with common sense, and even the man
who would be a successful fisherman must understand fish and apply
certain general fishing principles with common sense. And so likewise
the man who would lead other men successfully in battle must
understand men and apply certain general tactical principles with
common sense.

Of course, the only reason for the existence of an army is the
possibility of war some day, and everything the soldier does--his
drills, parades, target practice, guard duty, schools of instruction,
etc.--has in view only one end: The preparation of the soldier for the
field of battle.

=944.= While the responsibilities of officers and noncommissioned
officers in time of peace are important, in time of battle they are
much more so: for then their mistakes are paid for in human blood.

What would you think of a pilot who was not capable of piloting a boat
trying to pilot a boat loaded with passengers; or, of an engineer who
was not capable of running a locomotive trying to run a passenger
train? You would, of course, think him a criminal--but do you think he
would be more criminal than the noncommissioned officer who is not
capable of leading a squad in battle but who tries to do so, thereby
sacrificing the lives of those under him?

You can, therefore, appreciate the importance, the necessity, of every
officer and noncommissioned officer doing everything that he possibly
can during times of peace to qualify himself for his duties and
responsibilities during times of war.

If we are going to have a good army we must have good regiments; to
have good regiments we must have good battalions; to have good
battalions we must have good companies--but to have good companies we
must have efficient company officers and noncommissioned officers.

As stated before, everything in the life of the soldier leads to the
field of battle. And so it is that in the subject of minor tactics all
instruction leads to the battle. First we have map problems; then
terrain exercises; next the war game; after that maneuvers, and
finally the battle.

=945. Map Problems and Terrain Exercises.= In the case of map problems
you are given tactical problems to solve on a map; in the case of
terrain exercises you are given problems to solve on the ground. (The
word "Terrain," means earth, ground.) These are the simplest forms of
tactical problems, as you have only one phase of the action, your
information is always reliable and your imaginary soldiers always do
just exactly what you want them to do.

=946. War Game.= Next comes the war game, which consists of problems
solved on maps, but you have an opponent who commands the enemy--the
phases follow one another rapidly and the conditions change--your
information is not so complete and reliable. However, your men being
slips of cardboard or beads, they will, as in the case of your
imaginary soldiers in the map problems and terrain exercises, go where
you wish them to and do what you tell them to do--they can't
misunderstand your instructions and go wrong--they don't straggle and
get careless as real soldiers sometimes do.

Map problems, terrain exercises and war games are but aids to
maneuvers--their practice makes the maneuvers better; for you thus
learn the principles of tactics and in the simplest and quickest way.

=947. Maneuvers.= In the case of the maneuver the problem is the same
as in the war game, except that you are dealing with real, live men
whom you can not control perfectly, and there is, therefore, much
greater chance for mistakes.

=948. The battle.= A battle is only a maneuver to which is added great
physical danger and excitement.

General rules and principles that must be applied in map problems,
terrain exercises, the war game and maneuvers

=949.= Everything that is done must conform in principle to what
should be done in battle--otherwise your work is wasted--your time is
thrown away.

In solving map problems and in the war game, always form in your mind
a picture of the ground where the action is supposed to be taking
place--imagine that you see the enemy, the various hills, streams,
roads, etc., that he is firing at you, etc.--and don't do anything
that you would not be able to do if you were really on the ground and
really in a fight.

Whether it be a corporal in command of a squad or a general in command
of an army, in the solution of a tactical problem, whether it be a map
problem, a terrain exercise, a war game, maneuver or battle, he will
have to go through the same operation:

1st. Estimate the situation;
2d. Decide what he will do;
3d. Give the necessary orders to carry out his decision.

At first these three steps of the operation may appear difficult and
laborious, but after a little practice the mind, which always works
with rapidity in accustomed channels, performs them with astonishing
quickness.

The child beginning the study of arithmetic, for example, is very slow
in determining the sum of 7 and 8, but later the answer is announced
almost at sight. The same is true in tactical problems--the process
may be slow at first, but with a little practice it becomes quick and
easy.

=950. Estimating the Situation.= This is simply "sizing up the
situation," finding out what you're "up against," and is always the
first thing to be done. It is most important, and in doing it the
first step is to determine your MISSION--what you are to do, what you
are to accomplish--the most important consideration in any military
situation.

Consider next your own forces and that of the enemy--that is, his
probable strength and how it compares with yours.

Consider the enemy's probable MISSION[12] and what he will probably do
to accomplish it.

Consider the geography of the country so far as it affects the
problem--the valleys to cross, defiles to pass through, shortest road
to follow, etc.

Now, consider the different courses open to you with the advantages
and disadvantages of each.

You must, of course, in every case know what you're up against before
you can decide intelligently what you're going to do.

In making your plan always bear in mind not only your own MISSION, but
also the general mission of the command of which you form a part, and
this is what nine men out of ten forget to do.

=951. The Decision.= It is important that you should come to a clear
and correct decision--that you do so promptly and then execute it
vigorously.

The new Japanese Field Service Regulations tell us that there are two
things above all that should be avoided--inaction and hesitation. "To
act resolutely even in an erroneous manner is better than to remain
inactive and irresolute"--that is to say do something.

You are now ready to come to a decision, which is nothing more or less
than a clear, concise determination of what you're going to do and how
you're going to do it. Frederick the Great, expressed the same idea
in fewer words: "Don't haggle."

Having settled on a plan, push it through--don't vacillate, don't
waver. Make your plan simple. No other has much show. Complicated
plans look well on paper, but in war they seldom work out. They
require several people to do the right thing at the right time and
this under conditions of excitement, danger and confusion, and, as a
result, they generally fail.

=952. The Order.= Having completed your estimate of the situation and
formed your plan, you are now ready to give the orders necessary to
carry it out.

You must first give your subordinates sufficient information of the
situation and your plan, so that they may clearly understand their
mission.

The better everyone understands the whole situation the better he can
play his part. Unexpected things are always happening in war--a
subordinate can act intelligently only if he knows and understands
what his superior wants to do.

Always make your instructions definite and positive--vague
instructions are sometimes worse than none.

Your order, your instructions, must be clear, concise and
definite--everyone should know just exactly what he is to do.

A Few General Principles

=953.= The man who hunts deer, moose, tigers and lions, is hunting big
game, but the soldier operating in the enemy's territory is hunting
bigger game--he's hunting for human beings--but you want to remember
that the other fellow is out hunting for you, too; he's out "gunning"
for you. So, don't fail to be on the alert, on the lookout, all the
time, if you do he'll "get the drop" on you. Remember what Frederick
the Great said: "It is pardonable to be defeated, but never to be
taken by surprise."

Do not separate your force too much; if you do, you weaken
yourself--you take the chance of being "defeated in detail"--that is,
of one part being defeated after another. Remember the old saying: "In
union there is strength." Undue extension of your line (a mistake, by
the way, very often made) is only a form of separation and is equally
as bad.

While too much importance can not be attached to the proper use of
cover, you must not forget that sometimes there are other
considerations that outweigh the advantages of cover. Good sense alone
can determine. A certain direction of attack, for instance, may afford
excellent cover but it may be so situated as to mean ruin if defeated,
as where it puts an impassable obstacle directly in your rear. And
don't forget that you should always think in advance of what you would
do in case of defeat.

What is it, after all, that gives victory, whether it be armies or
only squads engaged? It's just simply inflicting on the enemy a loss
which he will not stand before he can do the same to you. Now, what is
this loss that he will not stand? What is the loss that will cause him
to break? Well, it varies; it is subject to many
conditions--different bodies of troops, like different timbers, have
different breaking points. However, whatever it may be in any
particular case it would soon come if we could shoot on the
battlefield as we do on the target range, but we can not approximate
it.

There are many causes tending to drag down our score on the
battlefield, one of the most potent being the effect of the enemy's
fire. It is cited as a physiological fact that fear and great
excitement cause the pupil of the eye to dilate and impair accuracy in
vision and hence of shooting. It is well established that the
effectiveness of the fire of one side reduced proportionately to the
effectiveness of that of the other.

Bear in mind then these two points--we must get the enemy's breaking
point before he gets ours, and the more effective we make our fire the
less effective will be his.

Expressed in another way--to win you must gain and keep a fire
superiority.

This generally means more rifles in action, yet a fire badly
controlled and directed, though great in volume, may be less effective
than a smaller volume better handled.

The firing line barring a few exceptional cases, then, should be as
heavy as practicable consistent with the men's free use of their
rifles.

This has been found to be about one man to the yard. In this way you
get volume of fire and the companies do not cover so much ground that
their commanders lose their power to direct and control.

If it becomes necessary to hold a line too long for the force
available, it is then better to keep the men close together and leave
gaps in the line. The men are so much better controlled, the fire
better directed, the volume the same, and the gaps are closed by the
cross fire of parties adjacent.

FOOTNOTES:

[11] In the preparation of the first part of this chapter, extracts of
words and of ideas, were made from a paper on Applied Minor Tactics
read before the St. Louis convention of the National Guard of the
United States in 1910, by Major J. F. Morrison, General Staff, U. S.
Army.

[12] The word "_mission_" is used a great deal in this text. By your
"_mission_" is meant your business, what you have been told to do,
what you are trying to accomplish.

CHAPTER III

GENERAL PLAN OF INSTRUCTION IN MAP PROBLEMS FOR NONCOMMISSIONED
OFFICERS AND PRIVATES--INSTRUCTION IN DELIVERING MESSAGES

=(The large wall map to be used for this instruction can be obtained
from the George Banta Publishing Co., Menasha, Wis., at a cost of
$1.50.)=

[Illustration: Elementary Map]

=954.= The noncommissioned officers and the privates of the squad,
section, platoon or company are seated in front of the instructor,
who, with pointer in hand, is standing near the map on the wall.

The instructor assumes certain situations and designates various
noncommissioned officers to take charge of squads for the purpose of
accomplishing certain missions; he places them in different
situations, and then asks them what they would do. He, or the
noncommissioned officer designated to perform certain missions,
designates certain privates to carry messages, watch for signals, take
the place of wounded noncommissioned officers, etc. For example, the
instructor says: "The battalion is marching to Watertown (see
Elementary Map in pocket at back of book) along this road (indicating
road): our company forms the advance guard; we are now at this point
(indicating point). Corporal Smith, take your squad and reconnoiter
the woods on the right to see if you can find any trace of the enemy
there, and rejoin the company as soon as you can. Corporal Jones, be
on the lookout for any signals that Corporal Smith may make."

Corporal Smith then gives the command, "=1. Forward, 2. March=," and
such other commands as may be necessary.

=Instructor:= Now, when you reach this point (indicating point), what
do you see?

(Corporal Smith holds his rifle horizontally above his head.)

=Corporal Jones:= Captain, Corporal Smith signals that he sees a small
body of the enemy.

=Corporal Smith:= =Lie down. Range, 700. 1. Ready; 2. AIM; 3. Squad;
4. FIRE. 1. Forward; Double time; 2. MARCH=, etc.

The noncommissioned officers and the privates who are thus designated
to do certain things must use their imagination as much as possible.
They must look at the map and imagine that they are right on the
ground, in the hostile territory; they must imagine that they see the
streams, hills, woods, roads, etc., represented on the map, and they
must not do anything that they could not do if in the hostile
territory, with the assumed conditions actually existing.

=955.= The general idea of this system of instruction is to make the
noncommissioned officers and the privates think, to make them use
common sense and initiative in handling men in various situations, in
getting out of difficulties. By thus putting men on their mettle in
the presence of their comrades and making them bring into play their
common sense and their powers of resourcefulness, it is comparatively
easy to hold the attention of a whole squad, section, platoon or
company, for those who are not actually taking part in the solution of
a particular problem are curious to see how those who are taking part
will answer different questions and do different things--how they will
"pan out."

=956.= Everything that is said, everything that is done, should, as
far as practicable, be said and done just as it would be said and done
in the field. The commands should be actually given, the messages
actually delivered, the reports actually made, the orders and
instructions actually given, the signals actually made, etc., just the
same as they would be if the operations were real. Of course,
sometimes it is not practicable to do this, and again at other times
it would be advisable not to do so. If, for instance, in the solution
of a problem there were a great many opportunities to give commands to
fire, to make signals, to deliver messages, etc., and if these things
were actually done every time, it would not only become tiresome but
it would also delay the real work and instruction. Common sense must
be used. Just bear this in mind: In the solution of map problems the
noncommissioned officers and the privates are to be given proper and
sufficient instruction in giving commands, making signals, sending and
delivering messages, making reports, etc., the instructor using his
common sense in deciding what is proper and sufficient instruction. In
carrying out this feature of the instruction it would be done thus,
for instance:

Instead of a platoon leader saying, "I would give the order for the
platoon (two, three or four squads) to fire on them," he would say,
for instance, "I would then give the command, '=AT LINE OF MEN. RANGE,
600. FIRE AT WILL=,' and would continue the firing as long as
necessary." Should the instructor then say, for instance, "Very well;
the enemy's fire has slackened; what will you do now?" The platoon
leader would answer, for instance, "I would signal: =1. By squads from
the right; 2. RUSH.="

Instead of saying, for instance, "I would advance my squad to the top
of this hill at double time," the squad leader should say, "I would
give the command: '=1. Forward, double time; 2. MARCH=,' and upon
reaching the top of this hill, I would command, '=1. Squad; 2. HALT=,'
cautioning the men to take advantage of cover."

Instead of saying, "I would signal back that we see the enemy in
force," the squad leader should take a rifle and make the signal, and
if a man has been designated to watch for signals, the man would say
to the captain (or other person for whom he was watching for signals):
"Captain, Corporal Smith has signaled that he sees the enemy in
force."

Instead of saying, "I would send a message back that there are about
twenty mounted men just in rear of the Jones' house; they are
dismounted and their horses are being held by horseholders," say,
"Smith, go back and tell the captain (or other person) there are
about twenty mounted men just in rear of the Jones' house. They are
dismounted and their horses are being held by horseholders." Private
Smith would then say to the captain (or other person), "Captain,
Corporal Harris sends word there are about twenty men just in the rear
of the Jones' house. They are dismounted and their horses are being
held by horse holders."

=957.= For problems exemplifying this system of instruction, see Par.
1017.

The instruction may be varied a little by testing the squad leaders in
their knowledge of map reading by asking, from time to time during the
solution of the problem, such questions as these:

=Captain:= Corporal Smith, you are standing on Lone Hill (See
Elementary Map), facing north. Tell me what you see?

=Corporal:= The hill slopes off steeply in front of me, about eighty
feet down to the bottom land. A spur of the hill runs off on my right
three-fourths of a mile to the north. Another runs off on my left the
same distance to the west. Between these two spurs, down in front of
me, is an almost level valley, extending about a mile to my right
front, where a hill cuts off my view. To my left front it is level as
far as I can see. A quarter of a mile in front of me is a big pond,
down in the valley, and I can trace the course of a stream that drains
the pond off to the northwest, by the trees along its bank. Just
beyond the stream a railroad runs northwest along a fill and crosses
the stream a mile and a half to the northwest, where I can see the
roofs of a group of houses. A wagon road runs north across the valley,
crossing the western spur of this hill 600 yards from Lone Hill. It is
bordered by trees as far as the creek. Another road parallels the
railroad, the two roads crossing near a large orchard a mile straight
to my front.

=Captain:= Can you see the Chester Pike where the railroad crosses it?

=Corporal:= No, sir.

=Captain:= Why?

=Corporal:= Because the hill "62," about 800 yards from Lone Hill, is
so high that it cuts off my view in that direction of everything
closer to the spur "62" than the point in the Salem-Boling road, where
the private lane runs off east to the Gray house.

=Captain:= Sergeant Jones, in which direction does the stream run that
you see just south of the Twin Hills?

=Sergeant:= It runs south through York, because I can see that the
northern end starts near the head of a valley and goes down into the
open plain. Also it is indicated by a very narrow line near the Twin
Hills which becomes gradually wider or heavier the further south it
goes. Furthermore, the fact that three short branch streams are shown
joining together and forming one, must naturally mean that the
direction of flow is towards the one formed by the three.

=Captain:= Sergeant Harris, does the road from the Mason farm to the
Welsh farm run up or down hill?

=Sergeant:= It does both, sir. It is almost level for the first half
mile west of the Mason farm; then, as it crosses the contour marked
20 and a second marked 40, it runs up hill, rising to forty feet
above the valley, 900 yards east of the Mason farm. Then, as it again
crosses a contour marked 40 and a second marked 20, it goes down hill
to the Welsh farm. That portion of the road between the points where
it crosses the two contours marked 40, is the highest part of the
road. It crosses this hill in a "saddle," for both north and south of
this summit on the road are contours marked 60 and even higher.

=Captain:= Corporal Wallace, you are in Salem with a patrol with
orders to go to Oxford. There is no one to tell you anything about
this section of the country and you have never been there before. You
have this map and a compass. What would you do?

=Corporal:= I would see from my map and by looking around me that
Salem is situated at the crossing of two main roads. From the map I
would see that one leads to Boling and the other was the one to take
for Oxford. Also, I would see that the one to Boling started due north
out of Salem and the other, the one I must follow, started due west
out of Salem. Taking out my compass, I would see in what direction the
north end of the needle pointed; the road running off in that
direction would be the one to Boling, so I would start off west on the
other.

=Captain:= Suppose you had no compass?

=Corporal:= I would look and see on which side of the base of the
trees the moss grew. That side would be north. Or, in this case, I
would probably not use a compass even if I had it; for, from the map,
I know that the road I wish to start off on crosses a railroad track
within sight of the crossroads and on the opposite side of the
crossroads from the church shown on the map; also, that the Boling
road is level as far as I could see on the ground, while the Chester
Pike crosses the spur of Sandy Ridge, about a half mile out of the
village.

=Captain:= Go ahead, corporal, and explain how you would follow the
proper route to Oxford.

=Corporal:= I would proceed west on the Chester Pike, knowing I would
cross a good sized stream, on a stone bridge, about a mile and a half
out of Salem; then I would pass a crossroad and find a swamp on my
right, between the road and the stream. About a mile and a half from
the crossroad I just mentioned, I would cross a railroad track and
then I would know that at the fork of the roads one-quarter of a mile
further on I must take the left fork. This road would take me straight
into Oxford, about a mile and three-quarters beyond the fork.

=Captain:= Sergeant Washington, do the contours about a half mile
north of the Maxey farm, on the Salem-Boling road, represent a hill or
a depression?

=Sergeant:= They represent a hill, because the inner contour has a
higher number 42, than the outer, marked 20. They represent sort of a
leg-of-mutton shaped hill about 42 feet higher than the surrounding
low ground.

Variety and interest may be added to the instruction by assuming that
the squad leader has been killed or wounded and then designate some
private to command the squad; or that a man has been wounded in a
certain part of the body and have a soldier actually apply his first
aid packet; or that a soldier has fainted or been bitten by a
rattlesnake and have a man actually render him first aid.

=958.= The privates may be given practical instruction in delivering
messages by giving them messages in one room and having them deliver
them to someone else in another room. It is a good plan to write out a
number of messages in advance on slips of paper or on cards, placing
them in unsealed envelopes. An officer or a noncommissioned officer in
one room reads one of the messages to a soldier, then seals it in an
envelope and gives it to the soldier to hand to the person in another
room to whom he is to deliver the message. The latter checks the
accuracy of the message by means of the written message. Of course,
this form of instruction should not be given during the solution of
map problems by the men. (For model messages, see par. 980.)

The same slips or cards may be used any number of times with different
soldiers. A soldier should never start on his way to deliver a message
unless he understands thoroughly the message he is to deliver.

CHAPTER IV

THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION

(Based on the Field Service Regulations.)

PATROLLING

=959. Patrols= are small bodies of infantry or cavalry, from two men
up to a company or troop, sent out from a command at any time to gain
information of the enemy and of the country, to drive off small
hostile bodies, to prevent them from observing the command or for
other stated objects, such as to blow up a bridge, destroy a railroad
track, communicate or keep in touch with friendly troops, etc. Patrols
are named according to their objects, reconnoitering, visiting,
connecting, exploring, flanking patrols, etc. These names are of no
importance, however, because the patrol's orders in each case
determine its duties.

=960.= The size of a patrol depends upon the mission it is to
accomplish; if it is to gain information only, it should be as small
as possible, allowing two men for each probable message to be sent
(this permits you to send messages and still have a working patrol
remaining); if it is to fight, it should be strong enough to defeat
the probable enemy against it. For instance, a patrol of two men might
be ordered to examine some high ground a few hundred yards off the
road. On the other hand, during the recent war in Manchuria a Japanese
patrol of 50 mounted men, to accomplish its mission marched 1,160
miles in the enemy's country and was out for 62 days.

=961. Patrol Leaders.= (=a=) Patrol leaders, usually noncommissioned
officers, are selected for their endurance, keen eyesight, ability to
think quickly and good military judgment. They should be able to read
a map, make a sketch and send messages that are easily understood.
Very important patrols are sometimes lead by officers. The leader
should have a map, watch, field glass, compass, message blank and
pencils.

(=b=) The ability to lead a patrol correctly without a number of
detailed orders or instructions, is one of the highest and most
valuable qualifications of a noncommissioned officer. Since a
commander ordering out a patrol can only give general instructions as
to what he desires, because he cannot possibly forsee just what
situations may arise, the patrol leader will be forced to use his own
judgment to decide on the proper course to pursue when something of
importance suddenly occurs. He is in sole command on the spot and must
make his decisions entirely on his own judgment and make them
instantly. He has to bear in mind first of all his mission--what his
commander wants him to do.

Possibly something may occur that should cause the patrol leader to
undertake an entirely new mission and he must view the new situation
from the standpoint of a higher commander.

(=c=) More battles are lost through lack of information about the
enemy than from any other cause, and it is the patrols led by
noncommissioned officers who must gather almost all of this
information. A battalion or squadron stands a very good chance for
defeating a regiment if the battalion commander knows all about the
size, position and movements of the regiment and the regimental
commander knows but a little about the battalion; and this will all
depend on how efficiently the patrols of the two forces are led by the
noncommissioned officers.

=962.= Patrols are usually sent out from the advance party of an
advance guard, the rear party of a rear guard, the outguards of an
outpost, and the flank (extreme right or left) sections, companies or
troops of a force in a fight, but they may be sent out from any part
of a command.

The commander usually states how strong a patrol shall be.

=963. Orders or Instructions=--(=a=) The orders or instructions for a
patrol must state clearly whenever possible:

1. Where the enemy is or is supposed to be.

2. Where friendly patrols or detachments are apt to be seen or
encountered and what the plans are for the body from which the patrol
is sent out.

3. What object the patrol is sent out to accomplish; what information
is desired; what features are of special importance; the general
direction to be followed and how long to stay out in case the enemy is
not met.

4. Where reports are to be sent.

(=b=) It often happens that, in the hurry and excitement of a sudden
encounter or other situation, there is no time or opportunity to give
a patrol leader anything but the briefest instructions, such as "Take
three men, corporal, and locate their (the enemy's) right flank." In
such a case the patrol leader through his knowledge of the general
principles of patrolling, combined with the exercise of his common
sense, must determine for himself just what his commander wishes him
to do.

=964. Inspection of a Patrol Before Departure.= Whenever there is time
and conditions permit, which most frequently is not the case, a patrol
leader carefully inspects his men to see that they are in good
physical condition; that they have the proper equipment, ammunition
and ration; that their canteens are full, their horses (if mounted)
are in good condition, not of a conspicuous color and not given to
neighing, and that there is nothing about the equipment to rattle or
glisten. The patrol leader should also see that the men have nothing
with them (maps, orders, letters, newspapers, etc.) that, if captured,
would give the enemy valuable information. This is a more important
inspection than that regarding the condition of the equipment.

Whenever possible the men for a patrol should be selected for their
trustworthiness, experience and knack of finding their way in a
strange country.

=965. Preparing a Patrol for the Start.= The patrol leader having
received his orders and having asked questions about anything he does
not fully understand, makes his estimate of the situation (See Par.
950.) He then selects the number of men he needs, if this has been
left to him, inspects them and carefully explains to them the orders
he has received and how he intends to carry out these orders, making
sure the men understand the mission of the patrol. He names some
prominent place along the route they are going to follow where every
one will hasten if the patrol should become scattered.

For example: An infantry company has arrived at the town of York (See
Elementary Map). Captain A, at 2 P. M., calls up Corporal B and three
men of his squad.

=Captain A:= Corporal, hostile infantry is reported to be at Oxford.
Nothing else has been heard of the enemy. The company remains here
tonight. You will take these three men and reconnoiter about two miles
north along this road (indicates the Valley Pike) for signs of a
hostile advance in this direction.

Stay out until dusk.

Corporal C has been sent out that road (points east along the county
road).

Send messages here. Do you understand?

=Corporal B:= Yes, sir; I am to--(here he practically repeats Captain
A's orders, the three men listening). Is Corporal C to cover that hill
(points toward Twin Hills)?

=Captain A:= No; you must cover that ground. Move out at once,
corporal. (Corporal B quickly glances at the men and sees that they
have their proper equipment.)

=Corporal B= (to his men): You heard the captain's orders. We will
make for that hill (points to Twin Hills). Jones, I want you to go 150
yards in advance of me; Williams, follow me at 100 yards; Smith,
you'll stay with me. Jones, you'll leave this road after crossing the
creek and march on that clump of trees. I want both you and Williams
to be on the alert and watch me every minute for signals. In case we
become scattered, make for that hill (points to Twin Hills).

=Private Jones:= Corporal, shall I keep 150 yards from you or will you
keep the correct distance?

=Corporal B:= You keep the correct distance from me. Forward, Jones.

Of course, the patrol leader makes all these preparations if he has
time; but, as we have said before, there will be a great many
occasions when he is required to start out so promptly that he will
not have any time for the inspection described and he will have to
make an estimate of the situation and give his detailed orders to the
members of his patrol as they start off.

=966. Co-ordination Before Departure.= Every member of a patrol should
notice for himself the direction taken and all landmarks that are
passed, and every man should keep his eyes and ears open all the time.
Before leaving an outpost position or other place to which it is to
return, the patrol commander should "co-ordinate" himself--he should
see where he is with respect to certain mountains, high buildings and
other prominent objects, and after the patrol has left, he should
frequently turn his head around and see what the starting point looks
like from where he is. This will help him to find his way back without
difficulty.

THE PRINCIPLES OF PATROLLING

=967.= Paragraphs 967 to 1015 describe the methods of leading a
patrol--the points a patrol leader should fully understand. In other
words, they state the principles of patrolling. When you first study
this chapter, simply read over these principles without trying to
memorize any of them. Whenever one of the principles is applied in the
solution of any of the problems on patrolling given in this book you
will generally find the number of the paragraph which states that
principle enclosed in brackets. Turn back and study the paragraph
referred to until you thoroughly understand its meaning and you feel
sure that you know how to apply that principle whenever the occasion
might arise in actual patrolling. Try to impress its common sense
meaning (never the mere words) on your mind, so that when a situation
arises requiring the sort of action indicated in the principle, YOU
WILL NOT FAIL TO RECOGNIZE IT.

[Illustration: Figure 1]

=968. Formation of Patrols.=

(=a=) Figure 1 gives some examples of various ways of forming patrols.
These are merely examples for the purpose of giving a general idea of
the arrangement of the men. In practice common sense must dictate to
the patrol leader the best formation in each case.

(=b=) In very small patrols the leader is usually in advance where he
can easily lead the patrol, though not always (See E, Figure 1.) The
distance between men depends upon the character of the country and the
situation. In L, Figure 1, it might be anywhere from 150 to 400 yards
from the leading man to the last, the distance being greater in level
or open country. Some such formation as G, Figure 1, could be used in
going through high brush, woods, or over very open country.

(=c=) The men must be so arranged that each man will be within
signaling distance of some member of the patrol and the escape of at
least one man, in case of surprise, is certain.

It must be remembered that the patrol may have to march a long
distance before it is expected that the enemy will be encountered, or
it may have a mission that requires it to hurry to some distant point
through very dangerous country. In such cases the patrol will probably
have to follow the road in order to make the necessary speed, and it
will not be possible for flankers to keep up this rate marching off
the road. The formation in such cases would be something like those
shown in F, II and O.

Marching off the road is always slow work, so when rapidity is
essential, some safe formation for road travel is necessary, as in F,
L and O.

If, from the road the country for, say one-half mile on each side, can
be seen, there is absolutely no use in sending out flankers a few
hundred yards from the road. Use common sense.

=969. Rate of March.= (=a=) Patrols should advance quickly and
quietly; be vigilant and make all practicable use of cover. If rapid
marching is necessary to accomplish the mission, then little attention
can be paid to cover.

(=b=) Returning patrols, near their own lines, march at a walk, unless
pressed by the enemy. A patrol should not, if possible, return over
its outgoing route, as the enemy may have observed it and be watching
for its return.

=970. Halts.= A patrol should be halted once every hour for about ten
minutes, to allow the men to rest and relieve themselves. Whenever a
halt is made one or two members of the patrol must advance a short
distance ahead and keep a sharp lookout to the front and flanks.

=971. Action Upon Meeting Hostile Patrol.= If a patrol should see a
hostile patrol, it is generally best to hide and let it go by, and
afterwards look out for and capture any messenger that may be sent
back from it with messages for the main body. And when sent back
yourself with a message, be careful that the enemy does not play this
trick on you--always keep your ears and eyes open.

=972. Scattered Patrols.= A scattered patrol reassembles at some point
previously selected; if checked in one direction, it takes another; if
cut off, it returns by a detour or forces its way through. As a last
resort it scatters, so that at least one man may return with
information.

Occasionally it is advisable for the leader to conceal his patrol and
continue the reconnaissance with one or two men; in case of cavalry
the leader and men thus detached should be well mounted. If no point
of assembly was previously agreed upon, it is a good general rule to
reassemble, if possible, at the last resting place.

=973. Return by Different Route.= A patrol should always make it a
rule to return by a different route, as this may avoid its being
captured by some of the enemy who saw it going out and are lying in
wait for it.

=974. Guard Against Being Cut off.= When out patrolling always guard
against being cut off. Always assume that any place that affords good
cover is held by the enemy until you know that it is not, and be
careful not to advance beyond it without first reconnoitering it; for,
if you do, you may find yourself cut off when you try to return.

=975. Night Work.= Patrols far from their commands or in contact with
the enemy, often remain out over night. In such cases they seek a
place of concealment unknown to the inhabitants, proceeding thereto
after nightfall or under cover. Opportunities for watering, feeding
and rest must not be neglected, for there is no assurance that further
opportunities will present themselves. When necessary the leader
provides for subsistence by demand or purchase.

=976. Civilians:= In questioning civilians care must be taken not to
disclose information that may be of value to the enemy. Strangers must
not be allowed to go ahead of the patrol, as they might give the enemy
notice of its approach. Patrol leaders are authorized to seize
telegrams and mail matter, and to arrest individuals, reporting the
facts as soon as possible.

=977. Patrol Fighting.= (=a=) A patrol sent out for information never
fights unless it can only get its information by fighting or is forced
to fight in order to escape. This principle is the one most frequently
violated by patrol leaders, particularly in peace maneuvers. They
forget their mission--the thing their commander sent them out to
do--and begin fighting, thus doing harm and accomplishing no important
results.

(=b=) A patrol sent out to drive off hostile detachments has to fight
to accomplish its mission. Sometimes a patrol has orders both to gain
information and to drive back hostile patrols. In this case it may be
proper to avoid a fight at one moment and to seek a fight at another.
The patrol leader must always think of his mission when deciding on
the proper course to follow, and then use common sense.

=978. Signals.= The following should be clearly understood by members
of a patrol:

=Enemy in sight in small numbers:= Hold the rifle above the head
horizontally.

=Enemy in force:= Same as preceding, raising and lowering the rifle
several times.

=Take cover:= A downward motion of the hand.

Other signals may be agreed upon before starting, but they must be
simple and familiar to the men; complicated signals must be avoided.
Signals must be used cautiously, so as not to convey information to
the enemy.

The patrol leader should see that all his men thoroughly understand
that whenever they are away from the center of the patrol they must
look to the nearest man for signals at least once every minute. It
should never be necessary for the patrol leader to call to a man in
order to get his attention. All movements of men at a distance should
be regulated by signals and the men should constantly be on the
lookout for these signals.

=979. Messages.= (=a=) The most skillful patrol leading is useless
unless the leader fully understands when to send a message and how to
write it.

(=b=) A message, whether written or verbal, should be short and clear,
resembling a telegram. If it is a long account it will take too much
time to write, be easily misunderstood, and if verbal, the messenger
will usually forget parts of it and confuse the remainder.

(=c=) Always state when and where things are seen or reported. If
haste is required, do not use up valuable moments writing down the day
of the month, etc. These data are essential as a matter of future
record for formal telegrams and should be put in patrol messages only
when time is abundant, but never slight the essential points of
information that will give valuable help to your chief. Always try to
put yourself in his place--not seeing what you see and read your
message--and then ask yourself, What will he want to know?

(=d=) The exact location of the enemy should be stated; whether
deployed, marching or in camp, his strength, arm of the service
(cavalry, infantry or artillery), and any other detail that you think
would be valuable information for your chief. In giving your location
do not refer to houses, streets, etc., that your chief in the rear has
no knowledge of. Give your direction and distance from some point he
knows of or, if you have a map like his, you can give your map
location.

(=e=) Be sure your message is accurate. This does not mean that
something told you should not be reported, but it should be reported,
not as a fact, but as it is--a statement by somebody else. It is well
to add any information about your informant, such as his apparent
honesty, the probability of his having correct information, etc.--this
may help your chief.

(=f=) A message should always end with a short statement of what you
are going to do next. For example: "Will remain in observation," "Will
continue north," "Will work around to their rear," etc. Time
permitting, the bearer of a verbal message should always be required
to repeat it before leaving.

(=g=) The following is a reproduction of a message blank used in field
service. The instructions on the envelope are also given. A patrol
leader will usually be furnished with a pad of these blanks:

[Illustration]

The heading "From" is filled in with the _name_ of the detachment
sending the information, as "Officer's Patrol, 7th Cav". Messages sent
on the same day from the same source to the same person are numbered
consecutively. The address is written briefly, thus, "Commanding
Officer, Outpost, 1st Brigade". In the signature the writer's surname
only and rank are given.

This blank is four and a half by eight inches, including the margin on
the left for binding. The back is ruled in squares and provided with
scales for use in making simple sketches explanatory of the message.
It is issued by the Signal Corps in blocks of forty with duplicating
sheets. The regulation envelope is three by five and one fourth inches
and is printed as follows:

[Illustration]

MODEL MESSAGES

=980. 1. Verbal.= "Four hostile infantrymen one mile north of our
camp, moving south. I will continue north."

=2. Verbal.= "About one hundred hostile infantrymen two miles north of
our camp at two o'clock, marching south. Will observe them."

=3. Verbal.= "Long column of troops marching west in Sandy Creek
Valley at two o'clock. Will report details later."

=4. Verbal.= "Just fired on by cavalry patrol near Baker's Pond. Will
work to their rear."

=5. Written.=

Patrol from Support No 2.
Lone Hill,
26 Mch. 11, 8-15 A. M., No. 1.

C. O.,
Support No. 2.

See hostile troop of cavalry halted at x-roads, one mile S. of our
outguards. Nothing else in sight. Will remain here in observation.

James,
Corporal.

=6. Written= (very hurriedly).

Lone Hill, 8-30, No 2.

C. O.,
Support No. 2.

Column of about 300 hostile cavalry trotting north towards hostile
troop of cavalry now halted at x-roads one mile south of our
outguards. Will remain here.

James,
Cpl.

=7. Written.=

Patrol from 5th Inf.,
S. E. corner Boling Woods,
3 Apl. 11, 2-10 P. M., No. 2.

Adjutant,
5th Inf., near Baker House.

Extreme right of hostile line ends at R. R. cut N. E. of BAKER'S
POND. Entrenchments run S. from cut along crest of ridge. Line
appears to be strongly held. Can see no troops in rear of line.
Will reconnoiter their rear.

Smith,
Sergeant.

=8. Written= (from cavalry patrol far to front).

Patrol from Tr. B, 7th Cav.,
Boling,
14 June, 12, 10 A. M., No. 3.

To C. O.,
Tr. B, 7th Cav.,
S. on Chester Pike.

No traces of enemy up to this point. Telegraph operator here
reports wires running north from Boling were cut somewhere at 8-30
A. M. Inhabitants appear friendly. Will proceed north.

Jones,
Sergeant.

=9. Written= (from cavalry patrol far to front).

Patrol from Tr B, 7th Cav.,
Oxford,
8 July, 12, 10-15 A. M., No. 2.

To C. O.,
1st Sq. 7th Cav.,
On Valley Pike, S. of York.

Bearer has canteen found in road here, marked "85 CAV.--III
CORPS." Inhabitants say no enemy seen here. They appear hostile
and unreliable. No telegraph operator or records remain here.
Roads good macadam. Water and haystacks plentiful. Will move
rapidly on towards CHESTER.

Lewis,
Sergeant.

Patrol from Support No. 3,
On Ry. 3/4 mi. N. of County Road,
2 Aug. 12, 9-15 P. M., No. 1.

C. O.,
Support No. 2,
Near Maxey House.

R. R. crosses creek here on 80-foot steel trestle. Hostile
detachment is posted at N. end. Strength unknown. Creek 5 ft. deep
by 60 ft. wide, with steep banks, 5 ft. high. Flows through meadow
land. Scattered trees along banks. R. R. approaches each end of
trestle on 10-foot fill. R. R. switch to N. E. 700 yds. S. of
bridge. (See sketch on back.) I will cross creek to N. of bridge.

Brown,
Corporal.

=981.= A message should be sent as soon as the enemy is first seen or
reported. Of course, if the enemy is actually known to be in the
vicinity and his patrols have been seen, etc., you must by all means
avoid wasting your men by sending them back with information about
small hostile patrols or other things you know your chief is already
aware of and did not specifically tell you to hunt for.

If you have properly determined in your own mind what your mission is
then you will have no trouble in deciding when to send messages. For
example, suppose your orders are "To reconnoiter along that ridge and
determine if the enemy is present in strength," and you sight a patrol
of eight men. You would waste no time or men sending back any message
about the patrol, for your mission is to find out if strong bodies of
the enemy are about. But suppose that while working under the above
orders you located a hostile battalion of infantry--a large body of
troops. In this case you would surely send a detailed message, as your
mission is to determine if the enemy was present in strength.

Again, suppose that while moving towards the ridge indicated by your
chief in his orders, you saw his force suddenly and heavily fired on
from a new and apparently unexpected quarter, not a great distance
from you, but not on the ridge referred to. You know or believe none
of your patrols are out in that neighborhood. In this case you should
realize instantly, without any order, that your mission had changed
and you should hasten to discover the size and position of this new
enemy and send the information back to your chief, first notifying him
of your intended change of direction.

Never forget your mission in the excitement of leading your own little
force.

=982. Absence of the Enemy.= It is frequently just as important to
send a message to your chief that the enemy is not in a certain
locality as it is to report his actual whereabouts. You must determine
from your mission when this is the case. For example, if you were
ordered "To patrol beyond that woods and see if any hostile columns
are moving in that direction," and on reaching the far side of the
woods you had a good view of the country for some distance beyond, it
would be very important to send a message back telling your chief that
you could see, say, one-half mile beyond the woods and there was no
enemy in sight. This information would be of the greatest importance
to him. He might feel free to move troops immediately from that
vicinity to some more dangerous place. You would then continue your
reconnaissance further to the front.

Suggestions for Gaining Information About the Enemy

=983. Enemy on the March.= (=a=) The patrol should observe the march
of the column from a concealed position that hostile patrols or
flankers are not apt to search (avoid conspicuous places). Always try
to discover if one hostile detachment is followed by another--if what
can be seen appears to be an advance guard of a larger body not yet in
view. The distance between the detachments, their relative size, etc.,
is always important.

(=b=) =Estimating Strength of Column.= The strength of a column may be
estimated from the length of time it takes to pass a selected point.
As infantry in column of squads occupies half a yard per man, cavalry
one yard per horse and artillery in single file twenty yards per gun
or caisson (ammunition wagon), a selected point would be passed in one
minute by 175 infantry; 110 cavalry (at a walk); 200 cavalry at a trot
and 5 guns or caissons. If marching in columns of twos, take one-half
of the above figures.

(=c=) =Dust.= The direction of march, strength and composition
(infantry, cavalry or artillery) of a column can be closely estimated
from the length and character of the cloud of dust that it makes. Dust
from infantry hangs low; from cavalry it is higher, disperses more
quickly, and, if the cavalry moves rapidly, the upper part of the
cloud is thinner; from artillery and wagons, it is of unequal height
and disconnected. The effect of the wind blowing the dust must be
considered.

(=d=) =Trail of Column.= Evenly trodden ground indicates infantry;
prints of horseshoes mean cavalry and deep and wide wheel tracks
indicate artillery. If the trail is fresh, the column passed recently;
if narrow, the troops felt secure and were marching in column of
route; if broad they expected an action and were prepared to deploy. A
retreating army makes a broad trail across fields, especially at the
start.

Always remember that the smallest or most insignificant things, such
as the number of a regiment or a discarded canteen or collar ornament,
may give the most valuable information to a higher commander. For
example, the markings on a discarded canteen or knapsack might prove
to a general commanding an army that a certain hostile division,
corps, or other force was in front of him when he thought it had not
been sent into the field. The markings on the canteen would convey
little or no meaning to the patrol leader, but if he realized his duty
he would take care to report the facts. Cavalry patrols working far
ahead of the foot troops should be most careful to observe and report
on such details.

(=e=) =Reflection of Weapons.= If brilliant, the troops are marching
toward you, otherwise they are probably marching away from you.

=Enemy in Position.= (=a=) If an outpost line, the patrol locates the
line of sentinels, their positions, the location and strength of the
outguards and, as far as possible, all troops in rear. The location of
the flanks of the line, whether in a strong or weak position, is of
the utmost importance. Places where the line may be most easily
penetrated should be searched for and the strength and routes of the
hostile patrols observed.

As outposts are usually changed at dawn this is the best time to
reconnoiter their positions.

(=b=) A hostile line of battle is usually hard to approach, but its
extent, where the flanks rest and whether or not other troops are in
rear of these flanks, should be most carefully determined.

Information as to the flanks of any force, the character of the
country on each flank, etc., is always of the greatest importance,
because the flanks are the weakest portions of a line. In attacking an
enemy an effort is almost always made to bring the heaviest fire or
blow to bear on one of his flanks. Naturally all information about
this most vulnerable part of an enemy is of great importance.

=984. Prisoners.= When a patrol is ordered to secure prisoners they
should be questioned as soon as captured, while still excited and
their replies can in a way be verified. Their answers should be
written down (unknown to them) and sent back with them as a check on
what they may say on second thought.

Prisoners should always be questioned as to the following points: What
regiment, brigade, division, etc., they belong to; how long they have
been in position, on the march, etc.; how much sickness in their
organization; whether their rations are satisfactory; who commands
their troops, etc. Always try to make the prisoners think the
questions are asked out of mere curiosity.

=985. Camp Noises.= The rumble of vehicles, cracking of whips,
neighing of horses, braying of mules and barking of dogs often
indicate the arrival or departure of troops. If the noise remains in
the same place and new fires are lighted, it is probable that
reënforcements have arrived. If the noise grows more indistinct, the
troops are probably withdrawing. If, added to this, the fires appear
to be dying out, and the enemy seems to redouble the vigilance of the
outposts, the indications of retreat are strong.

=986. Abandoned Camps.= (=a=) Indications are found in the remains of
camp fires. They will show, by their degree of freshness, whether much
or little time elapsed since the enemy left the place, and the
quantity of cinders will give an indication of the length of time he
occupied it. They will also furnish a means of estimating his force
approximately, ten men being allowed to each fire.

(b) Other valuable indications in regard to the length of time the
position was occupied and the time when it was abandoned may be found
in the evidence of care or haste in the construction of huts or
shelters, and in the freshness of straw, grain, dung or the entrails
of slaughtered animals. Abandoned clothing, equipments or harness will
give a clue to the arms and regiments composing a retreating force.
Dead horses lying about, broken weapons, discarded knapsacks,
abandoned and broken-down wagons, etc., are indications of the fatigue
and demoralization of the command. Bloody bandages lying about, and
many fresh graves, are evidences that the enemy is heavily burdened
with wounded or sick.

=987. Flames or Smoke.= If at night the flames of an enemy's camp
fires disappear and reappear, something is moving between the observer
and the fires. If smoke as well as flame is visible, the fires are
very near. If the fires are very numerous and lighted successively,
and if soon after being lighted they go out it is probable the enemy
is preparing a retreat and trying to deceive us. If the fires burn
brightly and clearly at a late hour, the enemy has probably gone, and
has left a detachment to keep the fires burning. If, at an unusual
time, much smoke is seen ascending from an enemy's camp, it is
probable that he is engaged in cooking preparatory to moving off.

If lines of smoke are seen rising at several points along a railway
line in the enemy's rear, it may be surmised that the railroad is
being destroyed by burning the crossties, and that a retreat is
planned.

=988. Limits of vision.= (a) On a clear day a man with good vision can
see:

At a distance of 9 to 12 miles, church spires and towers;
At a distance of 5 to 7 miles, windmills;
At a distance of 2-1/2 miles, chimneys of light color;
At a distance of 2,000 yards, trunks of large trees;
At a distance of 1,000 yards, single posts;
At 500 yards the panes of glass may be distinguished in a window.

(b) Troops are visible at 2,000 yards, at which distance a mounted man
looks like a mere speck; at 1,200 yards infantry can be distinguished
from cavalry; at 1,000 yards a line of men looks like a broad belt; at
600 yards the files of a squad can be counted, and at 400 yards the
movements of the arms and legs can be plainly seen.

(c) The larger, brighter or better lighted an object is, the nearer it
seems. An object seems nearer when it has a dark background than when
it has a light one, and closer to the observer when the air is clear
than when it is raining, snowing, foggy or the atmosphere is filled
with smoke. An object looks farther off when the observer is facing
the sun than when he has his back to it. A smooth expanse of snow,
grain fields or water makes distances seem shorter than they really
are.

Suggestions for the Reconnaissance of Various Positions and Localities

=989.= Cross roads should be reconnoitered in each direction for a
distance depending on how rapidly the patrol must continue on, how far
from the main road the first turn or high point is, etc. The main body
of the patrol usually remains halted near the crossroads, while
flankers do the reconnoitering.

=990. Heights.= In reconnoitering a height, if the patrol is large
enough to admit of detaching them, one or two men climb the slope on
either flank, keeping in sight of the patrol, if possible. In any
case, one man moves cautiously up the hill, followed by the others in
the file at such distance that each keeps his predecessor in view.

=991. Defiles.= On approaching a defile, if time permits, the heights
on either side are reconnoitered by flankers before the patrol enters.
If the heights are inaccessible or time is urgent, the patrol passes
through, in single file at double time. The same method is adopted in
reconnoitering a railroad cut or sunken road.

=992. Bridges and Fords.= At a bridge or ford, the front of the patrol
is contracted so as to bring all the men to the passage. The leading
patrolers cross first and reconnoiter the far side to prevent the
possibility of the enemy surprising the main body of the patrol as it
is crossing the bridge. The patrol then crosses rapidly, and takes up
a proper formation. A bridge is first examined to see that it is safe
and has not been tampered with by the enemy.

=993. Woods.= The patrol enters a wood in skirmishing order, the
intervals being as great as may be consistent with mutual observation
and support on the part of the members of the patrol. On arriving at
the farther edge of the wood, the patrol remains concealed and
carefully looks about before passing out to open ground. When there is
such a growth of underbrush as to make this method impracticable, and
it is necessary to enter a wood by a road, the road is reconnoitered
as in case of defile, though not usually at double time.

=994. Enclosures.= In reconnoitering an enclosure, such as a garden,
park or cemetery, the leading patrolers first examine the exterior, to
make sure that the enemy is not concealed behind one of the faces of
the enclosure. They then proceed to examine the interior. Great care
is taken in reconnoitering and entering an enclosure to avoid being
caught in a confined or restricted space by the enemy.

=995. Positions.= In approaching a position, but one man advances (one
is less liable to be detected than two or more), and he crawls
cautiously toward the crest of the hill or edge of the wood or opening
of the defile, while the others remain concealed in the rear until he
signals them to advance.

=996. Houses.= When a house is approached by a patrol, it is first
reconnoitered from a distance, and if nothing suspicious is seen, it
is then approached by one or two men, the rest of the party remaining
concealed in observation. If the patrol is large enough to admit of
it, four men approach the house, so as to examine the front and back
entrances at the same time. Only one man enters the door, the others
remaining outside to give the alarm, should a party of the enemy be
concealed in the house. The patrol does not remain in the vicinity of
the house any longer than necessary, as information relative to its
numbers and movements might be given to the enemy, if a hostile party
should subsequently visit the place. Farmhouses are searched for
newspapers and the inhabitants questioned. If necessary to go up to a
building, wood or hill, where an enemy is likely to be concealed, run
for the last couple of hundred yards, having your rifle ready for
instant use, and make for some point that will afford you cover when
you get close up. In the case of a building, for instance, you would
make for one of the corners. Such a maneuver would probably be
disconcerting to anyone who might be lying in wait for you, and would
be quite likely to cause them to show themselves sooner than they
intended, and thus give you a chance to turn around and get away. If
they fired on you while you were approaching at a run, they would not
be very likely to hit you.

=997. Villages.= (=a=) In approaching a small village one or two men
are sent in to reconnoiter and one around each flank, but the main
body does not enter until the scouts have reported. In small patrols
of three to six men so much dispersion is not safe and only one
section of the village can be reconnoitered at a time.

(=b=) If the presence of the enemy is not apparent, the patrol enters
the village. A suitable formation would be in single file at proper
distance, each man being on the opposite side of the street from his
predecessor, thus presenting a more difficult target for hostile fire
and enabling the men to watch all windows.

(=c=) If the patrol is strong enough, it seizes the postoffice,
telegraph office and railroad stations, and secures all important
papers, such as files of telegrams sent and received, instructions to
postmasters, orders of town mayor, etc., that may be there. If the
patrol is part of the advance guard, it seizes the mayor and
postmaster of the place and turns them over to the commander of the
vanguard with the papers seized.

(=d=) While searching a village sentinels are placed at points of
departure to prevent any of the inhabitants from leaving. Tall
buildings and steeples are ascended and an extensive view of the
surrounding country obtained.

(=e=) At night a village is more cautiously approached by a small
party than by day. The patrol glides through back alleys, across
gardens, etc., rather than along the main street. If there are no
signs of the enemy, it makes inquiry. If no light is seen, and it
seems imprudent to rouse any of the people, the patrol watches and
captures one of the inhabitants, and gets from him such information as
he may possess.

(=f=) The best time for the patrol to approach a village is at early
dawn, when it is light enough to see, but before the inhabitants are
up. It is dangerous in the extreme for a small patrol to enter a
village unless it is certain that it is not occupied by the enemy, for
the men could be shot down by fire from the windows, cellarways, etc.,
or entrapped and captured. As a rule large towns and cities are not
entered by small patrols, but are watched from the outside, as a small
force can not effectively reconnoiter and protect itself in such a
place.

Facts Which Should Be Obtained by Patrols Regarding Certain Objects

=998. Roads.= Their direction, their nature (macadamized, corduroy
plank, dirt, etc.), their condition of repair, their grade, the nature
of crossroads, and the points where they leave the main roads; their
borders (woods, hedges, fences or ditches), the places at which they
pass through defiles, cross heights or rivers, and where they
intersect railroads, their breadth (whether suitable for column of
fours or platoons, etc.).

=999. Railroads.= Their direction, gauge, the number of tracks,
stations and junctions, their grade, the length and height of the
cuts, embankments and tunnels.

=1000. Bridges.= Their position, their width and length, their
construction (trestle, girder, etc.), material (wood, brick, stone or
iron), the roads and approaches on each bank.

=1001. Rivers and Other Streams.= Their direction, width and depth,
the rapidity of the current, liability to sudden rises and the highest
and lowest points reached by the water, as indicated by drift wood,
etc., fords, the nature of the banks, kinds, position and number of
islands at suitable points of passage, heights in the vicinity and
their command over the banks.

=1002. Woods.= Their situation, extent and shape; whether clear or
containing underbrush; the number and extent of "clearings" (open
spaces); whether cut up by ravines or containing marshes, etc.; nature
of roads passing through them.

=1003. Canals.= Their direction, width and depth; condition of
tow-paths; locks and means of protecting or destroying them.

=1004. Telegraphs.= Whether they follow railroads or common roads;
stations, number of wires.

=1005. Villages.= Their situation (on a height, in a valley or on a
plain); nature of the surrounding country; construction of the houses,
nature (straight or crooked) and width of streets; means of defense.

=1006. Defiles.= Their direction; whether straight or crooked; whether
heights on either side are accessible or inaccessible; nature of
ground at each extremity; width (frontage of column that can pass
through).

=1007. Ponds and Marshes.= Means of crossing; defensive use that might
be made of them as obstacles against enemy; whether the marshy grounds
are practicable for any or all arms.

=1008. Springs and Rivulets.= Nature of approaches; whether water is
drinkable and abundant.

=1009. Valleys.= Extent and nature; towns, villages, hamlets, streams,
roads and paths therein; obstacles offered by or in the valley, to the
movement of troops.

=1010. Heights.= Whether slopes are easy or steep; whether good
defensive positions are offered; whether plateau is wide or narrow;
whether passages are easy or difficult; whether the ground is broken
or smooth, wooded or clear.

Suggestions for Patrols Employed in Executing Demolition

(Destruction or blocking of bridges, railroads, etc.)

=1011. Patrols never execute any demolition unless specifically
ordered to do so.= Demolition may be of two different characters:
Temporary demolition, such as cutting telegraph wires in but a few
places or merely burning the flooring of bridges, removing a few rails
from a track, etc., and permanent demolition, such as cutting down an
entire telegraph line, completely destroying bridges, blowing in
tunnels, etc. Only temporary demolition will be dealt with in this
book.

=1012. Telegraph Line.= To temporarily disable telegraph lines,
connect up different wires close to the glass insulators, wrap a wire
around all the wires and bury its ends in the ground (this grounds or
short circuits the wire), or cut all the wires in one or two places.

=1013. Railroads.= To temporarily disable railroads remove the fish
plates (the plates that join the rails together at the ends) at each
end of a short section of track, preferably upon an embankment, then
have as many men as available raise the track on one side until the
ties stand on end and turn the section of track so that it will fall
down the embankment; or, cut out rails by a charge of dynamite or gun
cotton placed against the web and covered up with mud or damp clay.
Eight to twelve ounces of explosive is sufficient. Or blow in the
sides of deep cuts or blow down embankments. Bridges, culverts,
tunnels, etc., are never destroyed except on a written order of the
commander-in-chief.

=1014. Wagon Road.= (=a=) Bridges can be rendered temporarily useless
by removing the flooring, or, in the case of steel bridges, by burning
the flooring (if obtainable, pour tar or kerosene on flooring),
particularly if there is not time to remove it.

Short culverts may sometimes be blown in.

A hastily constructed barricade across a bridge or in a cut of trees,
wagons, etc, may be sufficient in some cases where only the temporary
check of hostile cavalry or artillery is desired.

(=b=) The road bed may be blocked by digging trenches not less than
thirty feet wide and six feet deep, but as this would take a great
deal of time patrols would rarely be charged with such work.

=1015. Report on Return of Patrol.= On returning the patrol leaders
should make a short verbal or written report, almost always the
former, briefly recounting the movements of the patrol, the
information obtained of the enemy, a description of the country passed
over and of friendly troops encountered. Of course, this is not
practicable when the situation is changing rapidly and a returning
patrol is immediately engaged in some new and pressing duty.

Model Reports of Patrol Leaders

=1016. 1. Verbal.=

=Patrol Leader= (Corporal B): Sir, Corporal B reports back with his
patrol.

=Captain A:= I received two messages from you, corporal. What else did
you discover?

=Corporal B:= That was a regiment of infantry, sir, with one battalion
thrown out as advance guard. The main body of two battalions went into
bivouac at the crossroads and the advance guard formed an outpost line
along the big creek two miles south of here.

=Captain A:= Give me an account of your movements.

=Corporal B:= We followed this main road south to the creek, where we
avoided a mounted patrol moving north on the road at 1-45 P. M., and
then reconnoitered the valley from a ridge west of the road. We
followed the ridge south for half a mile to a point where we could see
a road crossing the valley and the main road at right angles, three
miles south of here. There we halted, and at 2:20 what seemed to be
the point and advance party (about forty men) of an infantry advance
guard appeared, marching north up this road, the head at the
crossroad. I then sent you message No. 1 by Private Brown.

In fifteen minutes three companies had appeared 600 yards in rear of
the advance party, and I could see a heavy, low column of dust about
one-half mile further to the rear. Message No. 2 was then sent in by
Privates Baker and Johnson, and to avoid several hostile patrols, I
drew off further to the northwest.

The advance guard then halted and established an outpost line along
the south of the creek, two miles from here. The cloud of dust proved
to be two more battalions and a wagon train. These two battalions went
into bivouac on opposite sides of this road at the crossroads and sent
out strong patrols east and west on the crossroad. Five wagons went
forward to the outpost battalion and the reserve built cook fires.

As Private Rush, here, was the only man I had left, we started back,
sketching the valley, ridge and positions of the main body and
outpost. Here is the sketch, sir. The fields are all cut crops or
meadow.

We sighted two foot patrols from the outpost, moving north about a
mile from here, one following the road and one further east.

I did not see any of our patrols.

That is all, sir.

=2. Written.=

=Report of Sergeant Wm. James' Patrol of Five Men=

Support No. 1,
Outpost of 6th Inf., Near Dixon,
22 Aug. 12, 2-30 to 5 P. M.

The patrol followed the timber along the creek for one mile S.
from our outguards and leaving the creek bottom moved 1/2 mile S.
E. to the wooded hill (about 800 ft. high), visible from our
lines.

From this hill top the valley to the east (about one mile wide)
could be fairly well observed. No signs of the enemy were seen and
a message, No. 1, was sent back by Private Russel.

A wagon road runs N. and S. through the valley, bordered by four
or five farms with numerous orchards and cleared fields. Both
slopes of the valley are heavily wooded.

The patrol then moved S. W., until it struck the macadam pike
which runs N. and S., through our lines. Proceeding S. 400 yds. on
this pike to a low hill a farmer, on foot, was met. Said he lived
one mile further S.; was looking for some loose horses; that four
hostile cavalrymen, from the east, stopped at his farm at noon,
drank some milk, took oats for their horses, inquired the way to
Dixon and rode off in that direction within fifteen minutes. He
said they were the first hostiles he had seen; that they told
nothing about themselves, and they and their horses looked in good
condition. Farmer appeared friendly and honest.

The patrol then returned to our lines following the pike about two
miles. Road is in good condition, low hedges and barbed wire
fences, stone culverts and no bridges in the two miles. Bordering
country is open and gently rolling farming country and all crops
are in. A sketch is attached to this report. None of our patrols
was seen.

Respectfully submitted,
Wm. James,
Sergeant, Co. A, 6th Infy.

Problem in Patrol Leading and Patrolling

=1017.= In studying or solving tactical problems on a map you must
remember that unless you carefully work out your own solution to the
problem before looking at the given solution, you will practically
make no progress.

It is best, if your time permits, to write out your solutions, and
when you read over the given solutions, compare the solution of each
point with what you thought of that same point when you were solving
the problem, and consider why you did just what you did. Without this
comparison much of the lasting benefit of the work is lost.

In some of these problems both the problem and solutions are presented
in dialogue form so as to give company officers examples of the best
method of conducting the indoor instruction of their men in minor
tactics. It also gives an example of how to conduct a tactical walk
out in the country, simply looking at the ground itself, instead of a
map hanging on the wall. The enlarged Elementary Map referred to in
Par. 954, is supposed to be used in this instruction as well as in the
war games.

Problem No. 1. (Infantry)

=1018.= The Elementary Map (scale 12 inches to the mile) being hung on
the wall, about two sergeants and two squads of the company are seated
in a semicircle facing it, and the captain is standing beside the map
with a pointer (a barrack cleaning rod makes an excellent pointer).

=Captain:= We will suppose that our company has just reached the
village of York. The enemy is reported to be in the vicinity of Boling
and Oxford (he points out on the map all places as they are
mentioned). We are in the enemy's country.

Corporal James, I call you up at 3 P. M. and give you these orders:
"Nothing has been seen of the enemy yet. Our nearest troops are three
miles south of here. Take four men from your squad and reconnoiter
along this road (County Road) into the valley on the other side of
that ridge over there (points to the ridge just beyond the cemetery),
and see if you can discover anything about the enemy. Report back here
by 5 o'clock. I am sending a patrol out the Valley Pike." Now,
Corporal, state just what you would do.

=Corporal James:= I would go to my squad, fall in Privates Amos,
Barlow, Sharp and Brown; see that they had full canteens; that their
arms were all right; that they were not lame or sick and I would have
them leave their blanket rolls, haversacks and entrenching tools with
the company. (Par. 964.)

I would then give these orders (Par. 963); "We are ordered out on
patrol duty. Nothing has been seen of the enemy yet. Our nearest
troops are three miles south of here. We are ordered to reconnoiter
along this road into the valley on the other side of that ridge, and
see if we can discover anything about the enemy. Another patrol is
going up the Valley Pike. Reports are to be sent here. In case we are
scattered we will meet at the woods on the hill over there (indicates
the clump of trees just west of Mills' farm).

"I will go ahead. Amos, follow about fifty yards behind me. Barlow,
you and Sharp keep about 100 yards behind Amos, and Brown will follow
you at half that distance. All keep on the opposite side of the road
from the man ahead of you." (Par. 968.)

=Captain:= All right, Corporal, now describe what route you will
follow.

=Corporal James:= The patrol will keep to the County Road until the
crest of the ridge near the stone wall is reached, when what I see in
the valley beyond will decide my route for me.

=Captain:= How about the woods west of the stone walls?

=Corporal James:= If I did not see anyone from our patrol on the
Valley Pike reconnoitering there, I would give Barlow these orders
just after we have examined the cemetery, when the patrol would have
temporarily closed up somewhat: "Barlow, take Sharp and examine that
little woods over there. Join us at the top of this hill." I would
then wave to Brown to close up and would proceed to the hill top.

=Captain:= Barlow what do you do?

=Private Barlow:= I would say, "Sharp, out straight across for that
woods. I will follow you." I would follow about 100 yards behind him.
When he reached the edge of the woods I would signal him to halt by
holding up my left hand. After I had closed up to about fifty yards I
would say to him, "Go into the woods and keep me in sight." I would
walk along the edge of the woods where I could see Sharp and the
corporal's patrol on the road at the same time.

=Captain:= That is all right, Barlow. Corporal, you should have
instructed Amos or Brown to keep close watch on Barlow for signals.

=Corporal James:= I intended to watch him myself.

=Captain:= No, you would have enough to do keeping on the alert for
what was ahead of you. Now describe how you lead the patrol to the top
of the hill, by the stone wall.

=Corporal James:= When I reached the crest I would hold up my hand for
the patrol to halt and would cautiously advance and look ahead into
the valley. If I saw nothing suspicious I would wave to the men to
close up and say, "Amos, go to that high ground about 250 yards over
there (indicates the end of the nose made by the 60-foot contour just
north of the east end of the stone wall), and look around the
country." I would keep Brown behind the crest, watching Barlow's
movements.

=Captain:= Now, Corporal, Amos reaches the point you indicated and
Barlow and Sharp join you. What do you do?

=Corporal James:= Can I see the Steel Bridge over Sandy Creek?

=Captain:= No, it is three-fourths of a mile away and the trees along
the road by Smith's hide it. You can see the cut in the road east of
the bridge and the Smith house, but the crossroads are hidden by the
trees bordering the roads. You see nothing suspicious. It is a clear,
sunny afternoon. The roads are dusty and the trees in full foliage.
The valley is principally made up of fields of cut hay, corn stubble
and meadow land.

=Corporal James:= Does Private Amos give me any information?

=Captain:= No, he makes you no signals. You see him sitting behind a
bush looking northwest, down the valley.

=Corporal James:= I would say, "Barlow, head straight across to where
that line of trees meets the road (indicates the point where the lane
from Mills' farm joins the Chester Pike). Sharp, keep about fifty
yards to my right rear." I would follow Barlow at 150 yards and when I
had reached the bottom land I would wave to Amos to follow us.

=Captain:= How about Brown?

=Corporal James:= I had already given him his orders to follow as rear
guard and he should do so without my telling him.

=Captain:= Amos, what do you do when you see the corporal wave to you?

=Private Amos:= I would go down the hill and join him.

=Captain:= No, you could do better than that. You are too far from the
corporal for him to signal you to do much of anything except stay
there or join him. You should join him, but you should not go straight
down to him. You should head so as to strike the Mills' Lane about 100
yards east of the house and then go down the lane, first looking along
the stone wall. In this way you save time in reconnoitering the ground
near the Mills' farm and protect the patrol against being surprised by
an enemy hidden by the line of trees, or the wall along the lane. You
are not disobeying your orders but just using common sense in
following them out and thinking about what the corporal is trying to
do.

Now, Corporal, why didn't you go to the Smith house and find out if
the people there had seen anything of the enemy?

=Corporal James:= You said we were in the enemy's country, sir, so I
thought it best to avoid the inhabitants until I found I could not get
information in any other way. I intended first to see if I could
locate any enemy around here, and if not, to stop at houses on my
return. In this way I would be gone before the people could send any
information to the enemy about my patrol.

=Captain:= Barlow reaches the Chester Pike where the Mills' lane
leaves it. You are about 150 yards in his rear. Sharp is 50 yards off
to your right rear, Amos 100 yards to your left rear and Brown 50
yards behind you. Just as Barlow starts to climb over the barbed wire
fence into the Chester Pike you see him drop down on the ground. He
signals, "Enemy in sight." Tell me quickly what would you do?

=Corporal James:= I would wave my hand for all to lie down, and I
would hasten forward, stooping over as I ran, until I was about twenty
yards from him, when I would crawl forward to the fence, close by him.
Just before I reached him I would ask him what he saw.

=Captain:= He replies, "There are some hostile foot soldiers coming up
this road."

=Corporal James:= I would crawl forward and look.

=Captain:= You see three or four men, about 500 yards north of you,
coming up the Chester Pike. They are scattered out.

=Corporal James:= I would say, "Crawl into the lane, keep behind the
stone wall, watch those fellows, and work your way to that farm"
(indicates the Mills' farm). I would start towards the Mills' farm
myself, under cover of the trees along the lane and would wave to the
other men to move rapidly west, towards the hills.

=Captain:= Why didn't you try to hide near where you were and allow
the hostile men to pass?

=Corporal James:= There does not seem to be any place to hide near
there that a patrol would not probably examine.

=Captain:= What is your plan now?

=Corporal James:= I want to get my patrol up to that small woods near
the Mills' farm, but I hardly expect to be able to get them up to that
point without their being seen. In any event, I want them well back
from the road where they can lie down and not be seen by the enemy
when he passes.

=Captain:= You succeed in collecting your patrol in the woods without
their being seen, and you see four foot soldiers in the road at the
entrance to the land. One man starts up the lane, the others remaining
on the road.

=Corporal James:= I say, "Brown, go through these woods and hurry
straight across to York. You should be able to see the village from
the other side of the woods. Report to the captain that a hostile
patrol of four foot men is working south up the valley, two miles
northeast of York. We will go further north. Repeat what I have told
you." (Par. 979.)

=Captain:= Why didn't you send this message before?

=Corporal James:= Because we were moving in the same direction that
the messenger would have had to go, and, by waiting a very few
minutes, I was able to tell whether it was a mere patrol or the point
of an advance guard.

=Captain:= Do you think it correct to send a messenger back with news
about a small patrol?

=Corporal James:= Ordinarily it would be wrong, but as nothing has
been seen of the enemy until now, this first news is important because
it proves to the Captain that the enemy really is in this
neighborhood, which it seems to me is a very important thing for him
to know and what my mission required me to do. (Par. 981.)

=Captain:= What are you going to do now, Corporal?

=Corporal James:= We have traveled about two miles and stopped
frequently, so it must be about 4 o'clock. It is one and one-third
miles back to York, where I should arrive about 5 o'clock. It would
take me twenty-five minutes to go from here to York, so I have about
thirty-five minutes left before 5 o'clock. This will permit me to go
forward another mile and still be able to reach York on time. It is
two-thirds of a mile to the Mason farm, and if the hostile patrol
appears to be going on, I will start for that point. Did anyone at the
Mills' farm see us?

=Captain:= No, but tell me first why you do not go along this high
ground that overlooks the valley?

=Corporal James:= Because our patrol that started out the Valley Pike
is probably near Twin Hills and I want to cover other country. The
orchard at Mason's would obstruct my view from the hills.

=Captain:= The hostile patrol goes on south. Describe briefly your
next movements.

=Corporal James:= I lead my patrol over to Mason's and, concealing two
of the men so that both roads and the house can be watched, I take one
man and reconnoiter around the farm yard and go up to the house to
question the inhabitants. (Par. 996.)

=Captain:= You find one woman there who says some other soldiers, on
foot, passed there a few minutes ago, marching south. She gives you no
other information about the enemy or country.

=Corporal James:= I would send Amos over to see how deep and wide
Sandy Creek is (Par. 1001.) When he returned I would take the patrol
over to Twin Hills, follow the ridge south to the stone wall on the
County Road, watching the valley for signs of the hostile patrol, and
follow the road back to York; then make my report to the Captain,
telling him where I had gone, all I had seen, including a description
of the country. If I had not been hurried, I would have made a sketch
of the valley. I can make a rough one after I get in. (Par. 1015.)

=Captain:= Suppose on your way back you saw hostile troops appearing
on the County Road, marching west over Sandy Ridge. Would you stay out
longer or would you consider that you should reach Oxford by 5
o'clock?

=Corporal James:= I would send a message back at once, and remain out
long enough to find out the strength and probable intention of the new
enemy.

=Captain (to one platoon of his troop of cavalry):= We will suppose
that this troop has just (9 A. M.) arrived in Boling (Elementary Map)
on a clear, dry, summer day. The enemy is supposed to be near Salem
and we have seen several of his patrols this morning on our march
south to Boling. Sergeant Allen, I call you up and give you these
instructions: "Take Corporal Burt's squad (eight men) and reconnoiter
south by this road (indicates the Boling-Morey house road) to Salem. I
will take the troop straight south to Salem and you will join it
there about 10:15. It is four and one-half miles to Salem. Start at
once." (You have no map.)

=Sergeant Allen:= I would like to know just what the Captain wishes my
patrol to do. (Par. 965.)

=Captain:= We will suppose that this is one of the many occasions in
actual campaign where things must be done quickly. Where there is no
time for detailed orders. You know that the troop has been marching
south towards Salem where the enemy is supposed to be. You also know
we have seen several of his patrols. I have told you what the troop is
going to do, and from all this you should be able to decide what your
mission is in this case. We will, therefore, consider that there is no
time to give you more detailed orders, and you have to decide for
yourself. Of course, if you had failed to hear just what I said, then,
in spite of the necessity for haste, I would repeat my instructions to
you. (Par. 963.)

=Sergeant Allen:= I would ride over to Corporal Burt's squad and lead
it out of the column to the road leading to the Morey house, and say,
"The troop is going on straight south to Salem, four and one-half
miles away. This squad will reconnoiter south to Salem by this road,
joining the troop there about 10:15. In case we become separated, make
for Salem. Corporal, take Brown and form the point. I will follow with
the squad about 300 yards in rear. Regulate your gait on me after you
get your distance. Move out now at a trot." (Par. 963.)

After Corporal Burt had gotten 150 yards out I would say, "Carter,
move out as connecting file." I would then say, "Downs, you will
follow about 150 yards behind us as rear guard." When Carter had gone
150 yards down the road I would order, "=1. Forward; 2. Trot; 3.
March=," and ride off at the head of the four remaining men (in column
of twos.) (Par. 968.)

=Captain:= Sergeant, tell me briefly what is your estimate of the
situation--that is, what sort of a proposition you have before you and
how you have decided to handle it.

=Sergeant Allen:= As the enemy is supposed to be near Salem and we
have already seen his patrols, I expect to encounter more patrols and
may meet a strong body of the enemy, on my way to Salem. As I have no
map, I cannot tell anything about the road, except that it is about
four and one-half miles by the direct road the troop will follow,
therefore my route will be somewhat longer. I have been given an hour
and fifteen minutes in which to make the trip, so, if I move at a trot
along the safer portions of the road. I will have time to proceed very
slowly and cautiously along the dangerous portions. My patrol will be
stretched out about 500 yards on the road, which should make it
difficult for the enemy to surprise us and yet should permit my
controlling the movements of the men. (Par. 968.)

I consider that my mission is to start out on this road and find my
way around to Salem in about an hour and, particularly, to get word
across to the Captain on the other road of anything of importance
about the enemy that I may learn.

=Captain:= Very well. When you reach the cut in the road across the
south nose of Hill 38, your point has almost reached the Morey house.
Do you make any change in your patrol?

=Sergeant Allen:= I order, "=1. Walk, 2. MARCH=," and watch to see if
the connecting file observes the change in gait and comes to a walk.

=Captain:= Suppose he does not come to a walk?

=Sergeant Allen:= I would say, "Smith, gallop ahead and tell Carter to
walk and to keep more on the alert."

=Captain:= Corporal Burt, you reach the road fork at Morey's. What do
you do?

=Corporal Burt:= I say, "Brown, wait here until Carter is close enough
to see which way you go and then trot up to me." I would walk on down
the road.

=Captain:= Wouldn't you make any inspection of the Morey house?

=Corporal Burt:= Not unless I saw something suspicious from the road.
I would expect the main body of the patrol to do that.

=Captain:= Don't you make any change on account of the woods you are
passing?

=Corporal Burt:= No, sir. It has very heavy underbrush and we would
lose valuable time trying to search through it. A large force of the
enemy would hardly hide in such a place.

=Captain:= Sergeant Allen, you reach the road fork. What do you do?

=Sergeant Allen:= I would have two men go into the Morey house to
question anyone they found there. I would order one of the other two
men to trot up (north) that road 200 yards and wait until I signaled
to him to return. With the other man I would await the result of the
inspection of the Morey house. Corporal Burt should have gone ahead
without orders to the cut in the road across Long Ridge, leaving Brown
half way between us. (Pars. 987 to 996.)

=Captain:= You find no one at the Morey house.

=Sergeant Allen:= I would signal the man to the north to come in. I
would then order two men to "find a gate in the fence and trot up on
that hill (indicating Long Ridge), and look around the country and
join me down this road." (Par. 968.) I would then start south at a
walk, halting at the cut to await the result of the inspection on the
country from the hill.

=Captain:= Foster, you and Lacey are the two men sent up on Long
Ridge. When you reach the hilltop you see four hostile cavalrymen
trotting north on the Valley Pike, across the railroad track.

=Private Foster:= I signal like this (enemy in sight), and wait to see
if they go on north. (Par. 978.) Do I see anything else behind or
ahead of them?

=Captain:= You see no other signs of the enemy on any road. Everything
looks quiet. The hostile cavalrymen pass the Baker house and continue
north.

=Private Foster:= I would then take Lacey, trot down the ridge to
Sergeant Allen, keeping below the crest and report, "Sergeant, We saw
four hostile mounted men trotting north on the road about
three-quarters of a mile over there (pointing), and they kept on
north, across that road (pointing to the Brown-Baker-Oxford road).
There was nothing else in sight." I would then tell him what the
country to the south looked like, if he wanted to know.

=Captain:= Sergeant Allen, what do you do now?

=Sergeant Allen:= I would continue toward the Brown house at a trot. I
would send no message to you as you already know there are hostile
patrols about and therefore this information would be of little or no
importance to you. (Par. 981.)

=Captain:= You arrive at Brown's house.

=Sergeant Allen:= I would send two men in to question the people and I
would continue on at a walk. I would not send any one up the road
towards Oxford as Foster has already seen that road.

=Captain:= You should have sent a man several hundred yards out the
Farm Lane. (Par. 989.) If he moved at a trot it would only have taken
a very short time. Continue to describe your movements.

=Sergeant Allen:= I would halt at the railroad track until I saw my
two men coming on from the Brown house. I would then direct the other
two men who were with me to go through the first opening in the fence
to the west and ride south along that ridge (62--Lone Hill--Twin
Hills' ridge) until I signaled them to rejoin. I would tell them to
look out for our troop over to the east. If there were a great many
fences I would not send them out until we were opposite the southern
edge of that woods ahead of us. There I would send them to the high
ground to look over the country, and return at once.

=Captain:= There are a great many fences west of the road and
practically none east of the road to Sandy Creek. Just as you arrive
opposite the southern edge of those woods and are giving orders for
the two men to ride up the hill, you hear firing in the direction of
Bald Knob. In the road at the foot of the south slope of Bald Knob,
where the trail to the quarry starts off, you can see quite a clump of
horses. You see nothing to the west of your position or towards
Mason's. What do you do?

=Sergeant Allen:= I signal "RALLY" to Carter and Downs. If there is a
gate nearby I lead my men through it. If not, I have them cut or break
an opening in the fence and ride towards the railroad fill at a fast
trot, having one man gallop ahead as point.

When we reach the fill, the point having first looked beyond it, I
order, "=DISMOUNT=. Lacey, hold the horses. =1. As skirmishers along
that fill, 2. MARCH.=" When Corporal Burt, Brown, Carter and Downs
come up Lacey takes their horses and they join the line of
skirmishers. Captain, what do I see from the fill?

=Captain:= There appear to be about twenty or thirty horses in the
group. The firing seems to come from the cut in the road just north of
the horses and from the clump of trees by the Quarry. You can also
hear firing from a point further north on the road, apparently your
troop replying to the fire from Bald Knob. You see nothing in the road
south of the horses as far as Hill 42, which obstructs your view. What
action do you take?

=Sergeant Allen:= I order, "=AT THE FEET OF THOSE HORSES. RANGE, 850.
CLIP FIRE.="

=Captain:= What is your object in doing as you have done?

=Sergeant Allen:= I know the captain intended to go to Salem with the
troop. From the fact that he is replying to the hostile fire I judge
he still wishes to push south. I was ordered to reconnoiter along this
road, but now a situation has arisen where the troop is being
prevented or delayed in doing what was desired and I am in what
appears to be a very favorable position from which to give assistance
to the troop and enable them to push ahead. I am practically in rear
of the enemy and within effective range of their lead horses. I
therefore think my mission has at least temporarily changed and I
should try and cause the twenty or thirty hostile troopers to draw off
(Par. 1011). Besides, I think it is my business to find out what the
strength of this enemy is and whether or not he has reinforcements
coming up from Salem, and send this information to the captain. From
my position I can still watch the Chester Pike.

=Captain:= After you have emptied your clips you see the enemy running
down out of the cut and from among the trees mount their horses and
gallop south. What do you do?

=Sergeant Allen:= I would send Foster across the creek above the
trestle (south of trestle), to ride across to that road (pointing
towards the cut on Bald Hill) and tell the captain, who is near there,
that about thirty men were on the hill and they have galloped south,
and that I am continuing towards Salem. I would have Foster repeat the
message that I gave him. I would then trot back to the Chester Pike
and south to Mason's, taking up our old formation.

=Captain:= You see nothing unusual at Mason's and continue south until
you reach the cross roads by the Smith farm. Corporal Burt and Private
Brown are near the stone bridge south of Smith's; Private Carter is
half way between you and Corporal Burt; and Private Downs is 100 yards
north of Smith's. You have three men with you. What do you do?

=Sergeant Allen:= What time is it now?

=Captain:= It is now 9:45 A. M.

=Sergeant Allen:= I would say, "Lacey, take Jackson and gallop as far
as that cut in the road (points east) and see if you can locate the
enemy or our troop in the valley beyond. I will wave my hat over my
head when I want you to return." I would then say to Private Moore,
"Gallop down to Corporal Burt and tell him to fall back in this
direction 100 yards, and then you return here bringing the other two
men with you." I would then await the result of Private Lacey's
reconnaissance, sending Carter to the turn in the road 200 yards west
of the cross roads.

=Captain:= Lacey, what do you do?

=Private Lacey:= I order Jackson, "Follow 75 yards behind me and watch
for signals from Sergeant Allen," and I then gallop across the steel
bridge and half way up the hill. I then move cautiously up to the cut
and, if the fences permit, I ride up on the side of the cut,
dismounting just before reaching the crest of the ridge, and walk
forward until I can see into the valley beyond.

=Captain:= You see no signs of the enemy in the valley, but you see
your own troop on the road by the Gibbs farm with a squad in advance
in the road on Hill 42.

=Private Lacey:= I look towards Sergeant Allen to see if he is
signaling. I make no signals.

=Captain:= What do you do, Sergeant?

=Sergeant Allen:= I wave my hat for Private Lacey to return. I wave to
Private Downs to join me and when Private Lacey arrives I signal
"ASSEMBLE" to Corporal Burt and then say, "Lacey, join Corporal Burt
and tell him to follow me as rear guard. Martin, join Carter and tell
him to trot west. We will follow. You stay with him." After he got
started I would order, "Follow me. =1. Trot; 2. MARCH.="

=Captain:= When Private Carter reaches the crest of the ridge about
one-half mile west of Smith's he signals, "Enemy in sight in large
numbers," and he remains in the road with Martin fifty yards in rear.
(Par. 978.)

=Sergeant Allen:= I order, "=1. Walk; 2. MARCH.= =1. Squad; 2. HALT=,"
and gallop up to Private Carter, dismount just before reaching the
crest, give my horse up to Private Martin, and run forward.

=Captain:= Carter points out what appears to be a troop of cavalry
standing in the road leading north out of York, just on the edge of
the town. You see about four mounted men 200 yards out of York on your
road, halted, and about the same number on the Valley Pike near where
it crosses the first stream north of York. What do you do?

=Sergeant Allen:= I wait about three minutes to see if they are going
to move.

=Captain:= They remain halted, the men at York appear to be
dismounted.

=Sergeant Allen:= I write the following message:

Hill 1/2 mile N. E. of York,
10 A. M.

Captain X:

A hostile troop of cavalry is standing in road at YORK (west of
SALEM) with squads halted on N. and N. E. roads from YORK. Nothing
else seen. Will remain in observation for the present.

Allen,
Sgt. (Pars. 979 and 981.)

I would give the message to Martin, who had previously brought my
horse up close in rear of the crest, and would say to him, "Take this
message to the captain, straight across to the road the troop is on,
and turn south towards Salem if you do not see them at first. Take
Lacey with you. Tell him what you have seen. He knows where the troop
is." I would have Carter hold my horse, and watch the remainder of the
patrol for signals, while I observed the enemy.

=Captain:= At the end of five minutes the hostile troop trots north on
the Valley Pike, the patrol on your road rides across to the Valley
Pike and follows the troop.

=Sergeant Allen:= I would wait until the troops had crossed the creek
north of York and would then face my patrol east and trot to the cross
roads at Smith's, turn south and continue to Salem, sending one man to
ride up on Sandy Ridge, keeping the patrol in sight.

=Captain:= We have carried out the problem far enough. It furnishes a
good example of the varying situations a patrol leader has to meet.
Good judgment or common sense must be used in deciding on the proper
course to follow. You must always think of what your chief is trying
to do and then act in the way you think will best help him to
accomplish his object. If you have carefully decided just what mission
you have been given to accomplish, you cannot easily go wrong. In
handling a mounted patrol you must remember that if the men become
widely separated in strange country, or even in country they are
fairly familiar with, they are most apt to lose all contact with each
other or become lost themselves.

Problem No. 2. (Infantry)

=1019. Captain (to one platoon of his company):= We will suppose it is
about half an hour before dawn. One platoon of the company is deployed
as skirmishers, facing north, in the cut where the County Road crosses
Sandy Ridge. It is the extreme right of a line of battle extending
west along the line of the County Road. The fight was not commenced.
This platoon is resting in a wheat field between the railroad and the
foot of the slope of Sandy Ridge, 200 yards south of the County Road.
Sergeant Allen, I call you up and give you these instructions: "The
enemy's line is off in that direction (pointing northwest). Take six
men and work north along the railroad until it is light enough to see;
then locate the hostile line and keep me informed of their movements.
I will be in this vicinity. You have a compass. Start at once."
Describe briefly the formation of your patrol while it is moving in
the dark.

=Sergeant Allen:= One man will lead. A second man will follow about
fifteen yards in rear of him. I will follow the second man at the same
distance with three more men, and the last man will be about twenty
yards in rear of me. All will have bayonets fixed, loaded and pieces
locked. One short, low whistle will mean, =Halt=, two short whistles
will mean, =Forward=, and the word "Sandy" will be the countersign by
which we can identify each other.

=Captain:= Very well. We will suppose that you reach the steel trestle
over Sandy Creek just at dawn and have met no opposition and heard
nothing of the enemy. On either side of Sandy Creek are fields of
standing corn about six feet tall. In the present dim light you can
only see a few hundred yards off.

=Sergeant Allen:= The patrol being halted I would walk forward to the
leading man (Brown) and say, "Brown, take Carter and form the point
for the patrol, continuing along this railroad. We will follow about
150 yards in rear." I would then rejoin the main body of the patrol
and order the man in rear to follow about 75 yards in rear of us. When
the point had gained its distance I would move forward with the main
body, ordering one man to move along the creek bank (west bank),
keeping abreast of us until I signaled to him to come in.

=Captain:= Just as you reach the northern end of the railroad fill
your point halts and you detect some movement in the road to the west
of you. It is rapidly growing lighter.

=Sergeant Allen:= I would move the main body by the left flank into
the corn, signaling to the man following the creek to rejoin, and for
the rear guard to move off the track also. I would expect Brown to do
the same, even before he saw what we had done. I would then close up
on the point until I could see it and, halting all the patrol, I would
order Foster to take Lacey and work over towards the road to see what
is there and to report back to me immediately.

=Captain:= In a few minutes Foster returns and reports, "The enemy is
moving south in the road and in the field beyond, in line of squads or
sections. A hostile patrol is moving southeast across the field behind
us. We were not seen."

(Note: This situation could well have been led up to by requiring
Private Foster to explain how he conducted his reconnaissance and
having him formulate his report on the situation as given.)

=Sergeant Allen:= I would then work my patrol closer to the road,
keeping Foster out on that flank, and prepare to follow south in rear
of the hostile movement.

=Captain:= The information you have gained is so important that you
should have sent a man back to me with a verbal message, particularly
as you are in a very dangerous position, and may not be able to send a
message later. While you have not definitely located the left of the
enemy's line, you have apparently discovered what appears to be a
movement of troops forward to form the left of the attacking line.
Your action in turning south to follow the troops just reported, is
proper, as you now know you are partly in rear of the hostile movement
and must go south to locate the hostile flank that your mission
requires you to report on.

You men must picture in your minds the appearance of the country the
sergeant is operating through. His patrol is now in a field of high
standing corn. Unless you are looking down between the regular rows of
corn you can only see a few yards ahead of you. The road has a wire
fence and is bordered by a fairly heavy growth of high weeds and
bushes. The ground is dry and dusty. Sergeant, how do you conduct your
movement south?

=Sergeant Allen:= As my patrol is now in a very dangerous neighborhood
and very liable to be caught between two hostile lines, with a deep
creek between our present position and our platoon, I think it best to
move cautiously southeast until I reach the creek bank (I cannot see
it from where I now am), and then follow the creek south. I think I am
very apt to find the enemy's left resting on this creek. Besides, if I
do not soon locate the enemy, I can hold the main body of my patrol
close to the creek and send scouts in towards the road to search for
the enemy. It will also be much easier to send information back to the
platoon from the creek bank, as a messenger can ford it and head
southeast until he strikes the railroad and then follow that straight
back to our starting point. It would thus be very difficult for him to
get lost.

=Captain:= You move southeast and strike the creek bank just south of
the railroad trestle. You now hear artillery fire off to the west and
a rifle fire to the southwest which gradually increases in volume. You
see a high cloud of dust hanging over the road on the hill west of
Mason's and south of this road on the north slope of the northern-most
knoll of the Twin Hills, you can occasionally see the flash of a gun,
artillery being discharged. There seems to be no rifle firing directly
in your front.

=Sergeant Allen:= I hurriedly write the following message:

At Ry. trestle 1 mi. N. of Platoon,
5:15 A. M.

Captain X:

Can see arty. firing from position on N. slope of knoll on high
ridge to W. of me, and 1/4 mi. S. of E. and W. road. Hostile line
is S. of me. Have not located it. Will move S.

Allen,
Sgt. (Par. 474.)

I hand this to Private Smith and say to him. "Carry this quickly to
the captain. Follow the railroad back until you cross a wagon road.
Our platoon should be to the west of the track just beyond the road."
I also read the message to Smith and point out the hostile artillery.
I have considered that I sent a message before telling about the
hostile advance.

I then continue south, moving slowly and with great caution. I
instruct the remaining four men that in case we are surprised to try
to cross the creek and follow the railroad back to the platoon.

=Captain:= Your information about the hostile artillery position was
important and should have been sent in, provided you think your
description of the hostile position was sufficiently clear to be
understood by an observer within your own lines.

There is some question as to the advisability of your remaining on the
west bank of the creek. Still you would not be able to tell from where
you were what direction the creek took, so you probably would remain
on the west bank for the present.

You continue south for about 150 yards and your leading man halts,
comes back to you, and reports that the corn ahead is broken and
trampled, showing it has been passed over by foot troops. About the
same time you hear rifle fire to your immediate front. It sounds very
close.

=Sergeant Allen:= I say, "Cross this creek at once," and when we reach
the other bank and the patrol forms again, we move slowly south, all
the men keeping away from the creek bank, except myself, and I march
opposite the two men constituting the main body.

=Captain:= About this time you detect a movement in the corn across
the creek in rear of the place you have just left. You think it is a
body of troops moving south. The firing in front seems to be delivered
from a point about two or three hundred yards south of you and you can
hear heavy firing from off in the direction of your company, a few
bullets passing overhead. There are scattered trees along the creek
and some bushes close to the edge.

=Sergeant Allen:= I would conceal myself close to the bank, the patrol
being back, out of sight from the opposite bank, and await
developments.

=Captain:= Sergeant, your patrol is in a dangerous position. The enemy
will very likely have a patrol or detachment in rear and beyond his
flank. This patrol would probably cross the railroad trestle and take
you in rear. You should have given the last men in your patrol
particular instructions to watch the railroad to the north. It would
have been better if you had sent one man over to the railroad, which
is only a short distance away, and had him look up and down the track
and also make a hurried survey of the country from an elevated
position on the fill.

I also think it would be better not to await developments where you
now are, but to push south and make sure of the position of the left
of the enemy's firing line, later you can devote more time to the
movements in rear of the first line. You are taking too many chances
in remaining where you are. I do not mean that you should leave merely
because you might have some of your men killed or captured, but
because if this did occur you would probably not be able to accomplish
your mission. Later you may have to run a big chance of sacrificing
several of your men, in order to get the desired information, which
would be entirely justifiable. Tell me how your men are arranged and
what your next movement would be.

=Sergeant Allen:= I have four men left, I am close to the stream's
bank, under cover; two men are about 25 yards further away from the
stream; Private Brown is up stream as far off as he can get and still
see the other two men, and Private Foster is down stream the same
distance. Both Brown and Foster are well back from the stream. The two
men in the middle, the main body of the patrol, make their movements
conform to mine, and Brown and Foster regulate their movements on the
main body. I will move south until I can locate the enemy's advance
line.

=Captain:= When you are opposite the Mason house, Brown comes back to
you, having signaled halt, and reports he can see the enemy's firing
line about 100 yards ahead on the other side of the stream, and that a
small detachment is crossing the stream just beyond where he was. What
do you do?

=Sergeant Allen:= I creep forward with Brown to verify his report. The
remainder of the patrol remains in place.

=Captain:= You find everything as Brown reported. You see that the
firing line extends along the southern edge of the cornfield, facing
an uncultivated field covered with grass and frequent patches of weeds
two or three feet high. You cannot determine how strong the line is,
but a heavy fire is being delivered. You cannot see the detachment
that crossed the creek south of you because of the standing corn.

=Sergeant Allen:= I crawl back to the main body, leaving Brown, and
write the following message:

5/6 mi. N. of Platoon,
5:32 A. M.

Captain X:

Enemy's left rests on creek 3/4 mile to your front, along S. edge
of cornfield. Creek is 5 ft. deep by 60 ft. wide. Hostile patrols
have crossed the creek. Will watch their rear.

Allen,
Sgt.

I give this to Private James and say, "Go over to the railroad
(pointing), then turn to your right and follow the track until you
cross a wagon road. Our platoon is just beyond that, on this side of
the track. Give this message to the captain. Hurry."

=Captain:= You should have either read the message to James or had him
read it. You should also have cautioned him to watch out for that
hostile detachment. It might be better to send another man off with a
duplicate of the message, as there is quite a chance that James may
not get through and the message is all-important. James, you get back
to the wagon road here (pointing) and find yourself in the right of
your battle line, but cannot locate me or the company right away.

=Private James:= I would show the note to the first officer I saw in
any event, and in this case, I would turn it over to the officer who
appeared to be in command of the battalion or regiment on the right of
the line, telling him what company the patrol belonged to, when we
went out, etc.

=Captain:= What do you do, sergeant?

=Sergeant Allen:= I start to move north a short distance in order to
find out what reënforcements are in rear of the hostile line.

=Captain:= After you have moved about 75 yards you are suddenly fired
into from across the creek, and at the same time from the direction of
the railroad trestle. Your men break and run east through the corn and
you follow, but lose sight of them. When you cross the railroad fill
you are fired on from the direction of the bridge. You finally stop
behind the railroad fill on the quarry switch, where two of your men
join you.

=Sergeant Allen:= I would start south to rejoin the company and
report.

=Captain:= That would be a mistake. It would require a long time for a
second patrol to make its way out over unknown ground, filled with
hostile patrols, to a point where they could observe anything in rear
of the hostile flank. You are now fairly familiar with the ground, you
also know about where the hostile patrols are and you have two men
remaining. After a brief rest in some concealed place nearby, you
should start out again to make an effort to determine the strength of
the troops in rear of the hostile flank near you, or at least remain
out where you could keep a sharp lookout for any attempted turning
movement by the enemy. Should anything important be observed you can
send back a message and two of you remain to observe the next
developments before returning. The information you might send back and
the additional information you might carry back, would possibly enable
your own force to avoid a serious reverse or obtain a decided victory.

Your work would be very hazardous, but it is necessary, and while
possibly resulting in loss of one or two of your men, it might prevent
the loss of hundreds in your main force.

CHAPTER V

THE SERVICE OF SECURITY

(Based on the Field Service Regulations.)

General Principles

=1020. The Service of Security= embraces all those measures taken by a
military force to protect itself against surprise, annoyance or
observation by the enemy. On the march, that portion of a command
thrown out to provide this security is called an advance, flank or
rear guard, depending on whether it is in front, to the flank or in
rear of the main command; in camp or bivouac, it is called the
outpost.

The principal duties of these bodies being much the same, their
general formations are also very similar. There is (1) the cavalry
covering the front; next (2) a group (4 men to a platoon) or line of
groups in observation; then (3) the support, or line of supports,
whose duty is to furnish the men for the observation groups and check
an enemy's attempt to advance until reinforcements can arrive; still
farther in rear is (4) the reserve.

In small commands of an infantry regiment or less there usually will
not be any cavalry to cover the front, and the reserve is generally
omitted. Even the support may be omitted and the observation group or
line of groups be charged with checking the enemy, in addition to its
regular duties of observation. But whatever the technical designation
of these subdivisions, the rearmost one is always in fact a reserve.
For example, if the command is so small that the subdivision formally
designated as the reserve is omitted, the rear element (squad or
platoon or company, etc.) is used as a reserve. As this text deals
principally with small commands and only those larger than a regiment
usually have the subdivision termed the reserve, this distinction
between the element in the Field Service Regulations called the
reserve and the actual reserve, must be thoroughly understood.

The arrangements or formations of all detachments thrown out from the
main force to provide security against the enemy, are very flexible,
varying with every military situation and every different kind of
country. The commander of such a detachment must, therefore, avoid
blindly arranging his men according to some fixed plan and at certain
fixed distances. Acquire a general understanding of the principles of
the service of security and then with these principles as a foundation
use common sense in disposing troops for this duty.

ADVANCE GUARD

=1021. Definition and Duties.= An advance guard is a detachment of a
marching column thrown out in advance to protect the main column from
being surprised and to prevent its march from being delayed or
interrupted. (The latter duty is generally forgotten and many
irritating, short halts result, which wear out or greatly fatigue the
main body, the strength of which the advance guard is supposed to
conserve.)

In detail the duties of the advance guard are:

1. To guard against surprise and furnish information by reconnoitering
to the front and flanks.

2. To push back small parties of the enemy and prevent their
observing, firing upon or delaying the main body.

3. To check the enemy's advance in force long enough to permit the
main body to prepare for action.

4. When the enemy is met on the defenses, seize a good position and
locate his lines, care being taken not to bring on a general
engagement unless the advance guard commander is authorized to do so.

5. To remove obstacles, repair the road, and favor in every way
possible the steady march of the column.

=1022. Strength:= The strength of the advance guard varies from
one-ninth to one-third of the total command. The larger the force the
larger in proportion is the advance guard, for a larger command takes
relatively longer to prepare for action than a small one. For example,
a company of 100 men would ordinarily have an advance guard of from
one to two squads, as the company could deploy as skirmishers in a few
seconds. On the other hand, a division of 20,000 men would ordinarily
have an advance guard of about 4,500 men, all told, as it would
require several hours for a division to deploy and the advance guard
must be strong enough to make a stubborn fight.

=1023. Composition.= The advance guard is principally composed of
infantry, preceded if possible, by cavalry well to the front. When
there is only infantry, much more patrolling is required of the front
troops than when cavalry (called "Advance cavalry") is out in advance.
This book does not deal with large advance guards containing artillery
and engineers. Machine guns, however, will be frequently used in small
advance guards to hold bridges, defiles, etc.

=1024. Distance From Main Body.= The distance at which the advance
guard precedes the main body or the main body follows the advance
guard depends on the military situation and the ground. It should
always be great enough to allow the main body time to deploy before it
can be seriously engaged. For instance the advance guard of a company,
say 1 squad, should be 350 to 500 yards in advance of the company. The
distance from the leading man back to the principal group of the squad
should generally be at least 150 yards. This, added to the distance
back to the main body or company, makes a distance of from 500 to 650
yards from the leading man to the head of the main body.

Examples:

Command. Advance Guard. Distance (yds.).

Patrol of 1 squad 2 men 100 to 300
Section of 3 squads 4 men 200 to 400
Inf. platoon of 50 men 1 squad 300 to 450
Cav. platoon of 20 men 4 men 300 to 450
Inf. company of 108 men 1 to 2 squads 350 to 500
Cav. troop of 86 men 1/2 platoon 450 to 600
Inf. battalion 1/2 to 1 company 500 to 700
Cav. squadron 1/2 to 1 troop 600 to 800

These are not furnished as fixed numbers and distances, but are merely
to give the student an approximate, concrete idea.

=1025. Connecting Files.= It should be remembered that between the
advance guard and the main body, and between the several groups into
which the advance guard is subdivided, connecting files are placed so
as to furnish a means of communicating, generally by signals, between
the elements (groups) of the column. There should be a connecting file
for at least ever, 300 yards. For example, suppose the advance guard
of a platoon is 300 yards in front of the main body. In ordinary
rolling country, not heavily wooded, a connecting file would be placed
half way between the two elements--150 yards from each one.

It is generally wiser to use two men together instead of one, because
this leaves one man free to watch for signals from the front while the
other watches the main body. However, in very small commands like a
company, this is not practicable, as the extra man could not be
spared.

FORMATION OF ADVANCE GUARDS.

=1026. Subdivisions.= The advance guard of a large force like a
brigade or division is subdivided into a number of groups or elements,
gradually increasing in size from front to rear. The reason for this
is that, as has already been explained, a larger group or force
requires longer to deploy or prepare to fight than a smaller one,
therefore the small subdivisions are placed in front where they can
quickly deploy and hold the enemy temporarily in check while the
larger elements in rear are deploying. The number of these
subdivisions decreases as the strength of the advance guard decreases,
until we find the advance guard of a company consists of one or two
squads, which naturally cannot be subdivided into more than two
groups; and the advance guard of a squad composed of two men, which
admits of no subdivision.

=Distance to next
element in rear.=

=Advance Cavalry= 1 to 5 miles
{=Advance party= {=Point= 150 to 300 yds.
=Support= {(=furnishes patrols=) {=Advance party proper= 300 to 600 yds.
{=Support proper= 400 to 800 yds.
=Reserve= (usually omitted in small commands) 500 yds. to
1 mile

The distances vary principally with the size of the command--slightly
with the character of the country.

The advance cavalry is that part of the advance guard going in front
of all the foot troops. It is generally one to five miles in advance
of the infantry of the advance guard, reconnoitering at least far
enough to the front and flanks to guard the column against surprise by
artillery fire--4,500 yards.

=1027. Support.= (=a=) The support constitutes the principal element
or group of all advance guards. It follows the advance cavalry, when
there is any, and leads the advance guard when there is no cavalry.
The support of a large command is subdivided within itself in much the
same manner as the advance guard as a whole is subdivided. It varies
in strength from one-fourth to one-half of the advance guard.

=1028. (b) Advance Party.= As the support moves out it sends forward
an advance party several hundred yards, the distance varying with the
nature of the country and size of the command. For example, the
advance party of a support of one company of 108 men, would ordinarily
be composed of one section of three squads, and would march about 300
yards in advance of the company in open country, and about 200 yards
in wooded country.

The advance party sends out the patrols to the front and flanks to
guard the main body of the support from surprise by effective rifle
fire. Patrols are only sent out to the flanks to examine points that
cannot be observed from the road. As a rule they will have to rejoin
some portion of the column in rear of the advance party. As the
advance party becomes depleted in strength in this manner, fresh men
are sent forward from the main body of the support to replace those
who have fallen behind while patrolling. When there is advance
cavalry, much less patrolling is required of the infantry.

(=c=) The point is a patrol sent forward by the advance party 150 to
300 yards. When the advance party is large enough the point should
ordinarily consist of a complete squad, commanded by an officer or
experienced noncommissioned officer. It is merely a patrol in front of
the column and takes the formation described for patrols.

(=d=) The commander of the support ordinarily marches with the advance
party. He should have a map and control of the guide, if any is
present. He sees that the proper road is followed; that guides are
left in towns and at crossroads; that bridges, roads, etc., are
repaired promptly so as not to delay the march of the column and that
information of the enemy is promptly sent back to the advance guard
commander; he verifies the correctness of this information, if
possible.

=1029.= (=a=) A thorough understanding of the arrangement of the
support and the duties of the leaders of its subdivisions--point,
flank patrols, advance party and main body (of the support)--is of the
greatest importance to a noncommissioned officer. For example, the
ignorance of one noncommissioned officer leading the advance party of
a column of troops six miles long can cause the entire column to be
delayed. If he halts because a few shots are fired at his men, and
conducts a careful reconnaissance before attacking (instead of pushing
right in on the enemy, forcing him to fall back quickly, if a weak
detachment; or, to disclose his strength, if strong), the entire
column, six miles long, is halted, the march interrupted, valuable
time lost, and what is more important, the men irritated and tired
out.

(=b=) The leader of the point must understand that as the principal
duty of an advance guard is to secure the safe and uninterrupted march
of the main body, he is the first man to discharge this duty. If, for
example, his squad receives a volley of shots from some point to the
front, he cannot take the time and precautions the commander of a
large body would take to reconnoiter the enemy's position, determine
something about his strength, etc., before risking an attack. If he
did he would not be securing the uninterrupted march of the main body.
He has to deploy instantly and press the enemy hard until the hostile
opposition disappears or the advance party comes up and its commander
takes charge. The point will lose men in this way, but it is
necessary, for otherwise one small combat patrol could delay the march
time after time.

(=c=) The same problem must be met in much the same manner by the
leader of the advance party. In this case there is more time to think,
as the point, being in advance, will have begun the fight before the
advance party arrives; but the leader of the advance party must use
his men freely and quickly to force the enemy to "show his hand," thus
preventing small harassing or combat detachments from delaying the
march.

(=d=) As the subdivisions of the advance guard become larger their
leaders act with increasing caution, for as soon as it develops that
the enemy in front is really present in some strength, then a halt
becomes obligatory and a careful reconnaissance necessary.

(=e=) The leader of every subdivision must always start a
reconnaissance the instant the enemy develops. He may, as in the case
of the point, only send one man around to discover the enemy's
strength; or, if the leader of the main body of the support, he may
send an entire squad. In almost every case the instant he has given
his orders for deploying and firing at or rushing the enemy, he sends
out his man or men to work around to a position permitting a view of
the hostile force. Every noncommissioned officer should impress this
on his memory so that he will not forget it in the excitement of a
sudden engagement.

(=f=) No attempt should be made to subdivide the advance guard of a
small force into all the elements previously described. For example,
the advance guard of a squad is simply a point of one or two men; the
advance guard of a company is usually no more than a squad acting as a
point, the squad actually having several men from 100 to 150 yards in
advance, who really constitute a point for the squad; the advance
guard of a battalion would usually consist of a company or less
distributed as an advance party proper and a point. The advance guard
of a regiment would have no reserve--if, for example, a battalion were
used as the advance guard of a regiment, there would be only a
support, which would be distributed about as follows: A support proper
of about three companies and an advance party (point included) of
about one company.

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

=1030. Reserve.= An advance guard large enough to have a reserve would
be distributed as follows:

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

The distance Z would be greater than Y and Y would be greater than X.
For example, a regiment acting as the advance guard of a brigade
would, under ordinary conditions, be distributed about as follows:

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

As only large commands have a reserve, which would always be commanded
by an officer, noncommissioned officers need not give this much
consideration, but it must be understood that while this fourth
subdivision of the advance guard is the only one officially termed
reserve, the last subdivision of any advance guard actually is a
reserve, no matter what its official designation.

The advance guard of a cavalry command adopts formations similar to
those described above, except that the distances are increased because
of the rapidity with which the command can close up or deploy. An
advance party with a few patrols is usually enough for a squadron, and
precedes it from 600 to 1,000 yards.

=1031. Reconnaissance.= In reconnaissance the patrols are, as a rule,
small (from two to six men).

The flanking patrols, whether of the advance cavalry or of the advance
party, are sent out to examine the country wherever the enemy might be
concealed. If the nature of the ground permits, these patrols march
across country or along roads and trails parallel to the march of the
column. For cavalry patrols this is often possible; but with infantry
patrols and even with those that are mounted, reconnaissance is best
done by sending the patrols to high places along the line of march to
overlook the country and examine the danger points. These patrols
signal the results of their observations and, unless they have other
instructions, join the columns by the nearest routes, other patrols
being sent out as the march proceeds and as the nature of the country
requires.

Deserters, suspicious characters and bearers of flags of truce (the
latter blindfolded), are taken to the advance guard commander.

=1032. Advance Guard Order.= On receipt of the order for a march
designating the troops for the advance guard, the commander of the
latter makes his estimate of the situation; that is, he looks at the
map or makes inquiries to determine what sort of a country he must
march through and the nature of the roads; he considers what the
chances are of encountering the enemy, etc., and then how he should
best arrange his advance guard to meet these conditions, and what time
the different elements of his advance guard must start in order to
take their proper place in the column. He then issues his order at the
proper time--the evening before if possible and he deems it best, or
the morning of the march.

The order for a large advance guard would ordinarily be written; for a
small command it would almost invariably be verbal, except that the
commander or leader of each element should always make written notes
of the principal points, such as the road to be followed, time to
start, distances, etc.

ADVANCE GUARD PROBLEMS

Problem No. 1. (Infantry)

=1033. Captain (to one platoon of his company):= We will assume that
our battalion camped last night at Oxford (Elementary Map) in the
enemy's country. It is now sunrise, 5:30 A. M.; camp has been broken
and we are ready to march. The officers have returned from reporting
to the major for orders and I fall in the company and give the
following orders:

"A regiment of the enemy's cavalry is thought to be marching towards
Salem from the south. Our battalion will march at once towards Salem
to guard the railroad trestle over Sandy Creek, following this road
(pointing southeast along the road out of Oxford) and the Chester Pike
Which is one and three-quarters miles from here.

"This company will form the advance guard.

"Sergeant Adams, you will take Corporal Baker's squad and form the
point, followed by the remainder of the company at about 400 yards.
Patrols and connecting files will be furnished by the company.

"The company wagon will join the wagons of the battalion.

"I will be with the company.

"Move out at once."

The weather is fine and the roads are good and free from dust. It is
August and nearly all the crops are harvested. Bushes and weeds form a
considerable growth along the fences bordering the road.

Sergeant, give your orders.

=Sergeant Adams:= 1st squad, =1. Right, 2. FACE, 1. Forward, 2.
MARCH.= Corporal Baker, take Carter (Baker's rear rank man) and go
ahead of the squad about 200 yards. Move out rapidly until you get
your distance and then keep us in sight.

I would then have the two leading men of the rest of the squad follow
on opposite sides of the road, as close to the fence as possible for
good walking. This would put the squad in two columns of files of
three men each, leaving the main roadway clear and making the squad as
inconspicuous as possible, without interfering with ease of marching
or separating the men. [Par. 1028 (c).] What sort of crops are in the
fields on either side of the road?

=Captain:= The field on the right (south) is meadow land; that on the
left, as far as the railroad, is cut hay; beyond the railroad there is
more meadow land.

=Sergeant Adams:= I would have told Corporal Baker to wait at the
cross roads by the Baker house for orders and--

=Captain:= If you were actually on the ground you probably could not
see the cross roads from Oxford. In solving map problems like these do
not take advantage of seeing on the map all the country that you are
supposed to go over, and then give orders about doing things at places
concerning which you would not probably have any knowledge if actually
on the ground without the map.

Besides, in this particular case, it was a mistake to have your point
wait at the cross roads. If there was any danger of their taking the
wrong road it would be a different matter, but here your mission
requires you to push ahead. (Par. 1029.) The major is trying to get
south of the trestle towards Salem before the cavalry can arrive and
destroy it.

=Sergeant Adams:= I would march steadily along the road, ordering the
last man to keep a lookout to the rear for signals from the connecting
file (Par. 511a), and I would direct one of the leading men to watch
for signals from Corporal Baker.

=Captain:= You should have given the direction about watching for
signals earlier, as this is very important. You also should have
ordered two men to follow along the timber by the creek to your south
until you signaled for them to come in. The trees along the creek
would obstruct your view over the country beyond the creek.

=Sergeant Adams:= But I thought, Captain, that the patrolling was to
be done by the company.

=Captain:= Yes, the patrolling is to be done by the company, but the
creek is only a quarter of a mile, about 400 yards, from the road you
are following and the men sent there are merely flankers, not a
patrol. You have eight men under your command and you are responsible
for the ground within several hundred yards on either side of your
route of march. Long Ridge is almost too far for you to send your men,
because they would fall far behind in climbing and descending its
slopes, but it would not be a great mistake if you sent two men there.
As Long Ridge affords an extended view of the valley through which the
Chester Pike runs, a patrol should go up on it and remain there until
the battalion passes, and this would be more than the leading squad
could be expected to attend to. The creek is almost too far from the
road in places, but as it is open meadow land you can keep the men
within easy touch of you and recall them by signal at any moment you
desire. In this work you can see how much depends on good judgment and
a proper understanding of one's mission.

Corporal Baker, explain how you would move out with Carter.

=Corporal Baker:= We would alternate the walk and double time until we
had gotten about 200 yards ahead of the squad. I would then say,
"Carter, walk along this side of the road (indicates side), keeping on
the lookout for signals from the squad. I will go about fifty yards
ahead of you." I would keep to the opposite side of the road from
Carter, trying to march steadily at the regular marching gait, and
keeping a keen watch on everything in front and to the flanks.

=Captain:= Very good. When you arrive at the cross roads you see a man
standing in the yard of the Baker house.

=Corporal Baker:= I would not stop, but would continue on by the cross
roads, as I have no time to question the man and the Sergeant will
want to do that. I would call to him and ask him if he had seen any of
the enemy about and how far it was to the Chester Pike. If anything
looked suspicious around the house or barnyard, I would investigate.

=Captain:= Sergeant, you arrive at the cross roads, and see the
Corporal and Carter going on ahead of you.

=Sergeant Adams:= I would have already signaled to the two men
following the creek to come in and would send a man to meet them with
the following order: "Tell Davis to move along the railroad fill with
Evans, keeping abreast of us. Then you return to me." I would then
say, "Fiske, look in that house and around the barn and orchard and
then rejoin me down this road (pointing east)." I would have the
civilian join me and walk down the road with me while I questioned
him.

=Captain:= Do you think you have made careful arrangements for
searching the house, etc., by leaving only one man to do the work?

=Sergeant Adams:= I have not sufficient men nor time enough to do much
more. I simply want to make sure things are reasonably safe and I
thought that a couple of men from the main body of the advance guard
would do any careful searching, questioning, etc., that might be
deemed necessary. I must not delay the march.

=Captain:= That is right. You learn nothing from the civilian and he
does not arouse any suspicion on your part. You continue along the
road. The fields to the north of the road are in wheat stubble; the
ground to the south, between your road and the railroad, is rough,
rocky grass land with frequent clumps of bushes. Davis and Evans, your
right flankers on the railroad fill, are just approaching the cut;
Fiske has rejoined; Corporal Baker and his men are about 200 yards
from the road forks at Brown's, and you and your four men are 200
yards in their rear, at the turn of the road. At this moment a half
dozen shots are fired down the road in your direction from behind the
wall along the edge of the orchard on the Brown farm. This firing
continues and your two leading men are lying down at the roadside
returning the fire. Tell me quickly just what you are going to do?

=Sergeant Adams:= I order my four men to deploy as skirmishers in that
field (pointing to the rough ground south of the road); I go under the
fence with the men and lead them forward at a fast run, unless the
fire is very heavy.

=Captain= (interrupting the Sergeant): Davis, you had just reached the
cut on the railroad when this happened. What do you do?

=Private Davis:= I take Evans forward with me at a run through the
cut. What do I see along the Chester Pike or Sandy Creek?

=Captain:= You see no sign of the enemy any place, except the firing
over the wall.

=Private Davis:= I run down the south side of the fill and along
towards the road with Evans to open fire on the enemy from their
flank, and also to see what is in the orchard. I will probably cross
the road so that I can see behind the stone wall.

=Captain:= That's fine and shows how you should go ahead at such a
time without any orders. There is usually no time or opportunity at
such a moment for sending instructions and you must use common sense
and do something. Generally it would have been better to have tried to
signal or send word back that there was nothing in sight along the
road or in the valley, but in this particular case you could probably
do more good by going quickly around in rear as you did, to discover
what was there and assist in quickly dislodging whatever it was. If
there had been no nose of the ridge to hide you as you came up and a
convenient railroad fill to hurry along behind as you made for the
road, your solution might have been quite different.

Sergeant, continue with your movements.

=Sergeant Adams:= I would attempt to rush the wall. If the fire were
too heavy, I would open fire (at will) with all my men, and, if I
seemed to get a little heavier fire than the enemy's, I would start
half of my men forward on a rush while the others fired. I would try
to rush in on the enemy with as little delay as possible, until it
developed that he had more than a small detachment there. I assumed it
was a delaying patrol in front of me, and as my mission requires me to
secure the uninterrupted march of the main body, I must not permit any
small detachment to delay me. If, however, it proves to be a larger
force, for instance, the head of an advance guard, I will lose some
men by plunging in, but as I understand it, that is the duty of the
point. Then again, if it be the head of a hostile advance guard, I
will want to rush them out of their favorable position under cover of
the stone wall, buildings and orchard, before any more of their force
can come up. This would give the favorable position to our force; by
acting too cautiously we would lose the valuable moments in which the
enemy's reënforcements (next elements of the advance guard) were
coming up, with this desirable position being weakly held by a small
part of the enemy.

=Captain:= That is all correct. What messages would you have sent?

=Sergeant Adams:= Up to the present time I would not have sent any. I
could not have sent any. I could not afford to take the time to send a
man back, nor could I spare the man. Besides, all I could say was that
we were fired on, and you should be able to see and hear that from
where the company is.

=Captain:= About the time you reached the position of Corporal Baker
the firing ceases, and when you reach the wall you see five mounted
men galloping northeast up Farm Lane. The Brown farm appears to be
deserted.

=Sergeant Adams:= I would turn to one of the men and say, "Run back to
the Captain and tell him we were fired on from this orchard by a
mounted patrol of five men who are galloping off up a lane to the
northeast. I am going south." When he had repeated the message I would
start south down the Chester Pike, directing Corporal Baker to follow
this road south and to tell Davis to follow the high ridge west of the
road, going through the clump of woods just ahead. I would send one
man as a left flanker to follow the west bank of Sandy Creek. This
would leave me with two men, one watching for signals from the front
and along Sandy Creek, the other from Davis and from the rear. I would
expect to see a patrol from the company moving across towards Boling
Woods. Had I not been mixed up in a fight as I approached the Brown
farm I would have sent two men as left flankers across country to the
cut on the Chester Pike on the western edge of the Boling Woods.

=Captain:= Very good. That is sufficient for this problem. All of you
should have caught the idea of the principal duties of the point and
flankers of an advance guard. You must watch the country to prevent
being surprised and you must at the same time manage to push ahead
with the least possible delay. The point cannot be very cautious so
far as concerns its own safety, for this would mean frequent halts
which would delay the troops in rear, but it must be cautious about
reconnoitering all parts of the ground near the road which might
conceal large bodies of the enemy.

The leader of the point must be careful in using his men or he will
get them so scattered that they will become entirely separated and he
will lose all control of them. As soon as the necessity for flankers
on one side of the line of march no longer exists, signal for them to
rejoin and do not send them out again so long as you can see from the
road all the country you should cover.

Problem No. 2. (Infantry)

=1034. Captain (to one platoon of his company):= Let us assume that
this platoon is the advance party of an advance guard, marching
through Salem along the Chester Pike [Par. 1028 (b)]. One squad is 350
yards in front, acting as the point. The enemy is thought to be very
near, but only two mounted patrols have been seen during the day. The
command is marching for Chester. The day is hot, the roads are good
but dusty, and the crops are about to be harvested.

Sergeant Adams, explain how you would conduct the march of the advance
party, beginning with your arrival at the cross roads in Salem.

=Sergeant Adams:= The platoon would be marching in column of squads
and I would be at the head. Two pairs of connecting files would keep
me in touch with the point. (Par. 1025.) I would now give this order:
"Corporal Smith, take two men from your squad and patrol north along
this road (pointing up the Tracy-Maxey road) for a mile and then
rejoin the column on this road (Chester Pike), to the west of you." I
would then say to Private Barker, "Take Carter and cut across to that
railroad fill and go along the top of that (Sandy) ridge, rejoining
the column beyond the ridge. Corporal Smith with a patrol is going up
this road. Keep a lookout for him." When we reached the point where
the road crosses the south nose of Sandy Ridge and I saw the valley in
front of me with the long high ridge west of Sandy Creek, running
parallel to the Chester Pike and about 800 yards west of it, I would
give this order: "Corporal Davis, take the three remaining men in
Corporal Smith's squad, cross the creek there (pointing in the
direction of the Barton farm) go by that orchard, and move north along
that high ridge, keeping the column in sight. Make an effort to keep
abreast of the advance guard, which will continue along this road."

I gave Corporal Davis the remaining men out of Corporal Smith's squad
because I did not want to break up another squad and as this is, in my
opinion, a very important patrol, I wanted a noncommissioned officer
in charge of it. Unless something else occurs this will be all the
patrols I intend sending out until we pass the steel railroad trestle
over Sandy Creek.

=Captain:= Your point about not breaking up a squad when you could
avoid it by using the men remaining in an already broken squad, is a
very important one. Take this particular case. You first sent out two
pairs of connecting files between the advance party and your
point--four men. This leaves a corporal and three men in that squad.
If we assume that no patrols were out when we passed through Salem,
this corporal and two of his men could have been sent up the
Tracy-Maxey road, leaving one man to be temporarily attached to some
squad. From the last mentioned squad you would pick your two men for
the Sandy Ridge patrol and also the corporal and three men for the
Barton farm, etc., patrol. This would leave three men in this squad
and you would have under your immediate command two complete squads
and three men. As the patrols return, organize new squads immediately
and constantly endeavor to have every man attached to a squad. This is
one of your most important duties, as it prevents disorder when some
serious situation suddenly arises. Also it is one of the duties of the
detachment commander that is generally overlooked until too late.

The direction you sent your three patrols was good and their orders
clear, covering the essential points, but as you have in a very short
space of time, detached nine men, almost a third of your advance
party, don't you think you should have economized more on men?

=Sergeant Adams:= The Sandy Ridge patrol is as small as you can make
it--two men. I thought the other two patrols were going to be detached
so far from the column that they should be large enough to send a
message or two and still remain out. I suppose it would be better to
send but two men with Corporal Davis, but I think Corporal Smith
should have two with him.

=Captain:= Yes, I agree with you, for you are entering a valley which
is, in effect, a defile, and the Tracy-Maxey road is a very dangerous
avenue of approach to your main body. But you must always bear in mind
that it is a mistake to use one more man than is needed to accomplish
the object in view. The more you send away from your advance party,
the more scattered and weaker your command becomes, and this is
dispersion, which constitutes one of the gravest, and at the same
time, most frequent tactical errors.

To continue the problem, we will suppose you have reached the stone
bridge over Sandy Creek; the point is at the cross roads by the Smith
house; you can see the two men moving along Sandy Ridge; and Corporal
Davis' patrol is just entering the orchard by the Barton farm. Firing
suddenly commences well to the front and you hear your point reply to
it.

=Sergeant Adams:= I halt to await information from the point.

=Captain:= That is absolutely wrong. You command the advance party of
an advance guard; your mission requires you to secure the
uninterrupted march of the main body; and at the first contact you
halt, thus interrupting the march (Par. 1021). The sooner you reach
the point, the better are your chances for driving off the enemy if he
is not too strong, or the quicker you find out his strength and give
your commander in the rear the much desired information.

=Sergeant Adams:= Then I push ahead with the advance party, sending
back the following message--

=Captain= (interrupting): It is not time to send a message. You know
too little and in a few minutes you will be up with the point where
you can hear what has happened and see the situation for yourself.
Then you can send back a valuable message. When but a few moments
delay will probably permit you to secure much more detailed
information, it is generally best to wait for that short time and thus
avoid using two messengers. When you reach the cross roads you find
six men of the point deployed behind the fence, under cover of the
trees along the County Road, just west of the Chester Pike, firing at
the stone wall along the Mills' farm lane. The enemy appears to be
deployed behind this stone wall, from the Chester Pike west for a
distance of fifty yards, and his fire is much heavier than that of
your point. You think he has at least twenty rifles there. You cannot
see down the Chester Pike beyond the enemy's position. Your patrol on
Sandy Ridge is midway between the 68 and 66 knolls, moving north. The
ground in your front, west of the road, is a potato field; that east
of the road as far as the swamp, is rough grass land.

=Sergeant Adams:= I give order, "Corporal Gibbs, deploy your squad to
the right of the Pike and push forward between the Pike and the swamp.
Corporal Hall (commands the point), continue a heavy fire. Here are
six more men for your squad." I give him the four connecting files and
two of the three men in the advance party whose squad is on patrol
duty. "Corporal Jackson, get your squad under cover here. Lacey, run
back to the major and tell him the point has been stopped by what
appears to be twenty of the enemy deployed behind a stone wall across
the valley 500 yards in our front. I am attacking with advance party."

=Captain:= Corporal Davis (commands patrol near Barton farm), you can
hear the firing and see that the advance is stopped. What do you do?

=Corporal Davis:= I would head straight across for the clump of woods
on the ridge just above the Mills' farm, moving as rapidly as
possible.

=Captain:= That is all right. Sergeant, Corporal Hall's squad keeps up
a heavy fire; Corporal Gibb's squad deploys to the right of the pike,
rushes forward about 75 yards, but is forced to lie down by the
enemy's fire, and opens fire. Corporal Gibbs, what would your command
for firing be?

=Corporal Gibbs:= =AT THE BOTTOM OF THAT WALL. BATTLE SIGHT. CLIP
FIRE.=

=Captain:= Why at the bottom of the wall?

=Corporal Gibbs:= The men are winded and excited and will probably
fire high, so I gave them the bottom of the wall as an objective.

=Captain:= The enemy's fire seems as heavy as yours. Sergeant, what do
you do?

=Sergeant Adams:= I give this order. "Corporal Jackson, deploy your
squad as skirmishers on the left of Corporal Hall's squad and open
fire." What effect does this additional fire have on the enemy?

=Captain:= His bullets seem to go higher and wider. You appear to be
getting fire superiority over him.

=Sergeant Adams:= If I do not see any signs of the enemy being
reënforced, dust in the road behind his position, etc., I take
immediate command of the squads of Corporals Hall and Jackson, and
lead them forward on a rush across the potato field.

=Captain:= Corporal Gibbs, what do you do when you see the other two
squads rush?

=Corporal Gibbs:= I order, =FIRE AT WILL=, and urge the men to shoot
rapidly in order to cover the advance.

=Captain:= Sergeant Adams' squads are forced to halt after advancing
about 150 yards.

=Corporal Gibbs:= I keep up a hot fire until they can resume their
firing, when I lead my squad forward in a rush.

=Captain:= What do you do, Sergeant?

=Sergeant Adams:= I would have the Corporals keep up a heavy fire. By
this time I should think the support would be up to the cross roads.

=Captain:= It is, but have you given up your attack?

=Sergeant Adams:= If it looks as if I could drive the enemy out on my
next rush, I do so, but otherwise I remain where I am, as I have no
reserve under my control and the action has gotten too serious for me
to risk anything more when my chief is practically on the ground to
make the next decision. He should have heard something about what is
on the Pike behind the enemy, from the patrol on Sandy Ridge.

=Captain:= Your solution seems correct to me. Why did you send
Corporal Gibbs' squad up between the pike and the swamp?

=Sergeant Adams:= It looked as if he would strike the enemy from a
better quarter; there appeared to be better cover that way, afforded
by the turn in the road, which must have some weeds, etc., along it,
and the swamp would prevent him from getting too far separated from
the remainder of the advance party.

=Captain:= The Sergeant's orders for the attack were very good. He
gave his squad leaders some authority and attached his extra men to a
squad. He did not attempt to assume direct control of individual men,
but managed the three squads and made the squad leaders manage the
individual men. This is the secret of successful troop leading. His
orders were short, plain and given in proper sequence.

Problem No. 3 (Infantry)

(See Fort Leavenworth map in pocket at back of book.)

[Illustration: MAP of FORT LEAVENWORTH, KAS. and VICINITY]

=1035.= Situation.

A Blue battalion, in hostile country, is in camp for the night, August
5-6, at Sprong (ja'). At 9:00 P. M., August 5th, Lieutenant A,
Adjutant gives a copy of the following order to Sergeant B:

1st Battalion, 1st Infantry,
Sprong, Kansas,
5 Aug., '09.

Field Orders No. 5.

1. The enemy's infantry is six miles east of FORT LEAVENWORTH. His
cavalry patrols were seen at F (qg') today.

Our regiment will reach FRENCHMAN'S (oc') at noon tomorrow.

2. The battalion will march tomorrow to seize the ROCK ISLAND
BRIDGE (q) at FORT LEAVENWORTH.

3. (a) The advance guard, consisting of 1st platoon Co. A and
mounted orderlies B, C, and D, under Sergeant B, will precede the
main body at 400 yards.

(b) The head of the main body will march at 6:30 A. M., from 19
via the 17 (jc')--15 (jg') 1--5 (lm')--FORT LEAVENWORTH (om')
road.

4. The baggage will follow close behind the main body under escort
of Corporal D and one squad, Co. B.

5. Send reports to head of main body.

C,
Major, Comdg.

Copies to the company commanders, to Sergeant B and Corporal D.

=A. Required, 1.= Give Sergeant B's estimate of the situation. (The
estimate of the military situation includes the following points:

1. His orders or mission and how much discretion he is allowed.
2. The ground as it influences his duty.
3. The position, strength and probable intentions of the enemy.
4. Sergeant B's decision.)

=Answer.= 1. The size of the advance guard, its route and the distance
it is to move in front of the main body are prescribed by Major C.
Sergeant B is free to divide up the advance as he sees fit, to use the
various parts so as to best keep open the way of the main body,
maintain the distance of 400 yards in front of it, and protect it from
surprise by the enemy.

2. The ground may be such as to make easy or to hinder reconnaissance,
such as hills or woods; to impede or hasten the march, such as roads,
streams, defiles; to offer good or poor defensive positions; to offer
good or poor opportunities for an attack. Sergeant B sees from his map
that the ground is rolling and open as far as Kern (ji') with good
positions for reconnaissance and for defense or attack. There is a
bridge over Salt Creek (ig') which has steep banks and will be a
considerable obstacle if the bridge has been destroyed. From this
creek to Kern the advance would be under effective fire from Hancock
Hill (ki'), so that these heights must be seized before the main body
reaches 15 (jg').

Beyond Kern the heavy woods make reconnaissance difficult and must be
treated somewhat like a defile by the point. (Par. 991.)

3. There is little to fear from the main body of the enemy which is
1-1/2 miles farther from the Rock Island bridge than we are, but we
know the enemy has cavalry. The size of the cavalry force is not
known, and may be sufficient to cause us considerable delay,
especially in the woods. The enemy's evident intention is to keep us
from seizing the bridge.

4. Having considered all these points, Sergeant B comes to the
following decision: ... (Before reading the decision as contained in
the following paragraph, make one of your own.)

=Answer:= To have only an advance party with which to throw forward a
point of 5 men 200 yards to the front and send out flankers, as needed
(Par. 983); to send the three mounted orderlies well to the front of
the point to gain early information of the enemy, especially on
Hancock Hill (ji') and the ridge to the north of 11 (jj').

=Required, 2.= Sergeant B's order. (Par. 963.)

=Answer.= Given verbally to the platoon and mounted orderlies, at 9:30
P. M.

"The enemy's cavalry patrols were seen at F (qh') today; no hostile
infantry is on this side of the Missouri river. The battalion will
move tomorrow to Fort Leavenworth, leaving 19 (ja') at 6:30 A. M.

"This platoon and orderlies B, C, and D will form the advance guard,
and will start from the hedge 400 yards east of 19 at 6:30 A. M. via
the 17 (jc')--15 (jg')--5 (lm') road.

"The point, Corporal Smith and 4 men of his squad, will precede the
remainder of the advance guard at 200 yards.

"I will be with the advance party. Privates X and Y will act as
connecting files with the main body."

The flankers will be sent out from time to time by Sergeant B as
necessary.

=Required, 3.= The flankers sent out by Sergeant B between 19 (ja')
and 15 (jg').

=Answer.= A patrol of 3 men is sent to Hill 900 southeast of 19 (ja'),
thence by Moss (kc') and Taylor (lc') houses to Hill 840 east of
Taylor, thence to join at 15 (jg').

Two men are sent from the advance party as it passes Hill 875.5 (ie')
to the top of this hill to reconnoiter to the front and northeast.
These men return to the road and join after the advance party has
reached Salt Creek. Two men are sent ahead of the advance party at a
double time take position on "Hill 875 northeast of J. E. Daniels"
place (jf') and reconnoiter to the northeast and east.

=Reasons.= The patrol sent out on the south moves out far enough to
get a good view from the hills which an enemy could observe or fire
into the column. There is no necessity of sending out flankers north
of the road at first, because from the road itself a good view is
obtained. Hills 875.5 and 875 give splendid points for observing all
the ground to the north and east. (Don't send flankers out unless they
are necessary.)

=Required, 4.= When the advance party reaches J. E. Daniels' house
(je') a civilian leaves the house and starts toward 15. What action
does Sergeant B take?

=Required, 5.= When the advance party reaches Salt Creek bridge (jg')
the point signals "enemy in sight," and Private H reports that he saw
about 6 or 8 mounted men ride up to the edge of the woods at Kern,
halt a moment, and disappear. What action does Sergeant B take?

=Answer.= He at once sends a message back by Private H stating the
facts. He then orders the advance party to move forward, hastens up to
the point and directs it to continue the march, seeking cover of
fences and ravines and hill top.

=Required, 6.= When the point reaches Schroeder (jh') it receives fire
from the orchard at Kern. What action is taken?

=Answer.= The men in the point are moved rapidly down the hill and
gain shelter in the ravines leading toward Kern. Two squads are
rapidly placed in line along the ridge west of Schroeder and under
cover of their fire the remainder of the advance party run down the
hill at 10 yards distance to join the point. A squad of this force is
then hurried forward to the Kern house. Here the squad is stopped by
fire and Sergeant B deploys two more squads which advance by rushes
and drive out the enemy, found to be 10 cavalrymen. The squads left at
Schroeder now join at double time and the advance party moves forward,
without having delayed the march of the main body.

Problem No. 4 (Infantry)

=1036. Situation:=

A Blue force of one regiment of infantry has outposts facing south on
the line Pope Hill (sm')--National cemetery (pk')--E (qh'). A Red
force is reported to have reached Soldiers' Home (3 miles south of
Leavenworth) from the south at 7:00 o'clock this morning. Corporal A
is directed by Sergeant B, in command of the left support at Rabbit
Point (tn'), to take out a patrol toward the waterworks and south
along the Esplanade (xo') to the Terminal bridge.

=Required, 1.= Give Sergeant B's orders to Corporal A.

=Answer.= "The enemy, strength unknown, was at Soldiers' Home at 7:00
o'clock this morning. Another patrol will advance along Grant avenue
(tm').

"Our outposts will remain here for the day.

"Select from the first section a patrol and reconnoiter this road
(Farragut avenue) as far as the waterworks (vn'), thence by Esplanade
to the Terminal bridge, and report on the ground in our front. When
you reach the Terminal bridge return if no enemy is seen.

"Send reports here."

=Required, 2.= How many men does Corporal A select, and why? (Par.
456.)

=Answer.= Five men are taken because the patrol is to reconnoiter, not
to fight, and on account of the distance to go and lack of information
of the enemy, 2 or 3 messages may have to be sent.

=Required, 3.= What equipment should Corporal A have? (Par. 457.)

=Required, 4.= State the points to be noted by Corporal A in selecting
his patrol and what inspection does he make? (Par. 964.)

=Answer.= He selects Privates C, D, E, F and G, on account of their
bravery, attention to duty and discretion. He directs them to carry
one meal in their haversacks, full canteen and fifty rounds of
ammunition. He then inspects them as to their physical condition, sees
that they have proper equipment and that nothing to rattle or glisten
is carried.

=Required, 5.= What does Corporal A next do? (Par. 965.)

=Answer.= He gives them their instructions as follows: "The enemy,
strength unknown, was at Soldiers' Home (about three miles south of
Leavenworth) at 7 o'clock this morning. There will be a friendly
patrol along that road (pointing to Grant avenue). We are to
reconnoiter along this road and down toward that bridge (pointing). Be
very careful not to be seen, take advantage of all cover, and keep in
touch with C and myself on this road at the point of the patrol. In
case we get separated meet at the waterworks (vn')."

He then explains the signals to be used, and moves the patrol in,
close order out along the road until it passes the sentinel at the
bridge XV (un'), to whom he gives the direction to be taken by the
patrol.

=Required, 6.= Upon leaving XV, what formation would the patrol take,
and reasons for same. (Par. 968.)

=Answer.= Corporal A and Private C form the point on the road leading
southwest of the waterworks; Private D moves on the left overlooking
the railroad; Private E moves promptly up Corral creek (um') to the
top of Grant Hill (um') to observe the country toward the southwest;
Private F moves about 50 yards in rear of the point, followed at 50
yards by Private G.

Corporal A forms his patrol as stated because of the necessity of
getting a view from the hill on each side. Only one man is sent out on
each side because they can be plainly seen by the patrol on the road,
and no connecting file is necessary. The distances taken along the
road assure at least one man's escape, and Corporal A is in front to
get a good view and to signal the flankers.

Problem No. 5 (Infantry)

=1037. Situation:=

The head of the patrol is now at the bridge, XVI (un') northwest of
the waterworks.

Private E has reached the top of Grant Hill and signals the enemy in
sight; the patrol halts and Corporal A moves out to meet Private E who
is coming down toward the patrol. He says he saw three mounted men
ride up to Grant and Metropolitan avenues (wm') from the south and
after looking north a moment move west.

=Required, 1.= Corporal A's action. (Pars. 979 and 981.)

=Answer.= Corporal A at once writes the following message and sends it
back by Private E:

"No. 1 Patrol, Company B,
Farragut Avenue,
Northwest of Waterworks,
10 May, '09, 8:30 A. M.

To Commander Blue Left Support,
Rabbit Point.

Three mounted Reds, seen by Private E, just now reconnoitered at
Grant and Metropolitan avenues; they are moving west on
Metropolitan avenue; the patrol will continue toward the Terminal
bridge.

A,
Corporal."

=Reasons.= The message is sent because this is the first time the
enemy has been seen, and they have not been reported north of
Soldiers' Home before. The message should state who saw the enemy, and
the man seeing them should always carry the message telling of the
facts. The patrol would not allow this small hostile patrol to stop
its advance, but would proceed on its route cautiously to avoid being
seen, and to see if the Red cavalrymen are followed by others of the
enemy.

=Required, 2.= Give the method of reconnoitering the buildings at the
waterworks and coal mine. (Par. 996.)

=Answer.= Private D carefully examines the east side of the enclosures
and buildings, while Private C examines the west side. The remainder
of the patrol halts concealed in the cut west of the north enclosure,
until C and D signal no enemy in sight, whereupon the patrol moves
forward along the road (XV--3rd St.), C and D advancing rapidly
between the buildings to the town where they join the patrol.

=Required, 3.= Give the route followed by E from Grant Hill to edge of
Leavenworth.

=Answer.= He moves down the east slope of Grant Hill to the ravine
just east of the old R. R. bed (um'), being careful to keep concealed
from the direction of Leavenworth. He moves up the ravine, keeping a
sharp lookout to the front, and moving rapidly until abreast, if he
has fallen behind. He takes the branch ravine lying just west of
Circus Hill (vm'), and moves up to its end. Here he halts and makes
careful inspection of Metropolitan avenue and the street south into
the city. Being sure the coast is clear, he darts across the narrow
ridge south of Circus Hill to the ravine to the east and then joins
the patrol. He reports to Corporal A any indication of the enemy he
may have seen.

Problem No. 6 (Infantry)

=1038. Situation:=

A Blue force holds Fort Leavenworth (om') in hostile country. Outposts
occupy the line Salt Creek Hill (gh')--13 (ij')--Sheridan's Drive,
(mi') against the Reds advancing from the northwest.

At 4:30 P. M., June 25th, Sergeant A is given the following orders by
Captain B, commanding the support:

"The enemy will probably reach Kickapoo late today. Our outposts
extend as far north as Salt Creek Hill. There were six of our men
prisoners at 45 (de') this afternoon at 1 o'clock, being held by 15
home guards at Kickapoo. Take ---- men from the company and move to
Kickapoo, recapture the prisoners and gain all the information you can
of the enemy north of there."

=Required, 1.= How many men does Captain B name, and why? (Par. 960.)

=Answer.= Thirty men are assigned.

=Reason.= This is twice as many as the enemy holding the prisoners,
and to secure secrecy no larger force than is absolutely necessary
should be taken. This force will allow men to surround the enemy while
the remainder rush them.

=Required, 2.= Give the order of Sergeant A to his patrol. (See 6th
requirement. Problem 4.)

=Required, 3.= What route will the patrol take?

=Answer, 11= (jj')--13 (ij')--Salt Creek Hill (gh')--and along the
edge of the woods east of the M. P. R. R. (fg') as far as the bridge
opposite Kickapoo Hill--thence up Kickapoo Hill toward 45 (de').

=Reasons.= Since the patrol's orders do not require any reconnaissance
before reaching Kickapoo the shortest and most practical route is
chosen. The route as far as Salt Creek Hill lies behind our outpost
line and is thus protected. The main roads are avoided because they
will be carefully watched by the enemy. The edge of the woods east of
the M. P. Ry. (beginning about ff') gives good cover and by moving to
the bridge the patrol can probably sneak close in on the enemy and
capture them by surprise.

Problem No. 7 (Infantry)

=1039. Situation:=

The patrol reaches the top of Kickapoo Hill (cd'). Sergeant A and
Private C move cautiously to the top and see the six prisoners in the
cemetery (cd') just west of Kickapoo Hill, and a Red sentinel at each
corner. Just west of the cemetery are about 10 more Reds. No others
are visible.

=Required, 1.= What decision does Sergeant A make and what does he do?

=Answer.= He decides to capture the enemy by surprise. He leaves
Private C to watch and, moving cautiously back to his patrol, makes
the following dispositions: Corporal D with 10 men to move up to
Private C and cover the enemy, remaining concealed. He takes the
remainder of the patrol with fixed bayonets around the northeast slope
of Kickapoo Hill in the woods and moves up the ravine toward 29. When
his detachment arrives within about 100 yards of the enemy, they
charge bayonet and rush them. Corporal D's party at the same time rush
in from the opposite side. (Note: The enemy are demoralized by the
surprise and are captured without a shot being fired.)

=Required, 2.= What action does Sergeant A now take?

=Answer.= He causes the enemy to be kept apart while he and his
noncommissioned officers question them separately. He then questions
the Blue prisoners, and furnishing them the guns taken from the Reds,
sends them and the captured Reds back to our line under Corporal D,
with a written message giving the information secured from his
questions. (Par. 984.)

=Required, 3.= What does he then do?

=Answer.= Places his main body in concealment at the Cemetery (cd')
and sends a patrol under Corporal H via 35-41-43 and one under
Corporal F via 29-27-23 west to learn further of the enemy in
execution of the second part of his orders.

The patrol under Corporal H sends back the following message:

"No.1 Patrol, Company A, 1st Infantry,
21 June, '09; 5:30 P. M.

Commander Expeditionary Patrol at 45:

A column of infantry is moving east about 1 mile west of
Schweizer (aa'); about 800 yards in front of this body is another
small body with 8 to 10 men 300 yards still farther east. It took
the main body 2 min., 45 sec. to pass a point on the road. I
remain in observation.

H,
Corporal."

=Required, 3.= The size of the command reported by Corporal H and its
formation. (Par. 983.)

=Answer.= One battalion infantry (512 men), preceded by 1 section at
advance guard. The advance guard having only advance party and point,
2-3/4 minutes × 175 = 481 men in the main body, leaving about 32 men
for the advance men for the advance guard.

Problem No. 8 (Infantry)

=1040. General Situation:=

A Blue force of one regiment of infantry has outposts facing south on
the line Pope Hill (sm'), National Cemetery (qk')--E (qi'). A Red
force moving north reached Soldiers' Home at 7 o'clock this morning.

=Special Situation:=

Corporal B is chosen by Sergeant A, commander of the right support at
the National Cemetery, to take a patrol south as far as 20th street
(yf') and Metropolitan avenue (wh'), to report on the ground along the
route, and to reconnoiter the enemy. A friendly patrol moves along
Sheridan's Drive (i)--Atchison Hill (rg')--Southwest Hill (ue'), and
one on Prison Lane (rk').

=Required, 1.= Sergeant A's orders, verbatim (that is, word for word).

=2.= Give the various details attended to by Corporal B before he
moves out with his patrol.

=3.= What is the formation of the patrol when its point is at E (qh')?

=4.= When the patrol reaches 14 (ug'), how are the intersecting roads
reconnoitered?

=5.= Four mounted men are seen riding west at a walk at 64 (wb'). What
action does Corporal A take?

=6.= Describe the ground passed over by the patrol.

Problem No. 9 (Infantry)

=1041. Situation:=

The enemy is moving east toward Frenchman (oc') and is expected to
reach there early tomorrow. A company at 72 (uj') forms the left
support of an outpost in hostile country, on the line 70
(vj')--National Cemetery (qj'). At 4 P. M. Sergeant A is ordered to
take a patrol of 12 men and go to Frenchman and destroy the bridge
there, and remain in observation in that vicinity all night.

=Required, 1.= His orders to the patrol.

=2.= The route the patrol will follow, and its formation crossing the
Atchison Hill--Government Hill ridge.

=3.= Give the conduct of the patrol from Atchison Hill
(rg')--Government Hill (tf') to its position at the bridge at
Frenchman.

=General Situation:=

A Blue squadron is camped for the night at Waterworks (vn'), Fort
Leavenworth, and has outposts on the line XIV (un')--Grant Hill
(um')--Prison Hill (wk'). A Red force is reported to be advancing from
the north on Kickapoo (cb').

Problem No. 10 (Cavalry)

=1042. Special Situation:=

Lieutenant A, commanding the left support on Prison Hill, at 5 P. M.,
directs Sergeant Jones to take a patrol of 5 men from his platoon and
move via Atchison Cross (ug') to the vicinity of Kickapoo and secure
information of any enemy that may be in that locality. Another patrol
is to go via Fort Leavenworth (ol').

=Required, 1.= The order given by Lieutenant A, verbatim. (Pars. 963
and 965.)

=Answer.= "Sergeant Jones, the enemy is north of Kickapoo, moving on
that place. This squadron will remain here tonight; Sergeant B will
take a patrol through Fort Leavenworth.

"Select a patrol of 5 men from your platoon and move out via
Frenchman's (oc') toward Kickapoo.

"Secure any information you can of the enemy in that locality.

"Report on the condition of the bridges between here and 47 (fd').

"You may have to stay out over night.

"Send messages here."

Sergeant Jones selects five good men, directs them to take one cooked
ration each and canteen full of water. He inspects the men and horses
carefully; sees that no horse of conspicuous color or that neighs is
taken. Explains the orders to his men, etc., as was done in the
infantry patrol.

=Required, 2.= What route does the patrol take, and why?

=Answer.= Metropolitan avenue (w)--70 (vj')--72 (vj')--14
(ug')--Frenchman (oc')--17 (jc')--47 (ec').

=Reasons.= The enemy is distant and Kickapoo, the objective of the
patrol, is seen from the map, which Sergeant Jones has, to be over an
hour's ride at a walk and trot. It is not at all probable that the
enemy will be met until the patrol reaches the vicinity of Kickapoo
and Sergeant Jones decides to take the shortest and best road though
it is a main highway, instead of Sheridan's Drive (j) of the F
(qg')--15 (jg') lane.

It is always well for a patrol to avoid main highways when the enemy
is near, especially in hostile country, but here the time saved more
than justifies the use of the direct route.

Problem No. 11 (Cavalry)

=1043.= Same situation as Problem 1.

=Required, 1.= The formation and conduct of the patrol as far as
Frenchman's.

=Answer.= Sergeant Jones determines to move at a walk and trot (5
miles per hour) in order to reach the vicinity of Kickapoo and take up
a position of observation before night. Sergeant Jones and Private B
are in the lead, 2 men about 100 yards to the rear, the remaining 2
men about 75 yards in the rear of these. They move out at a trot along
the road until Atchison Cross is reached. The two cross roads are
reconnoitered without halting the patrol, inasmuch as from the cross
roads a good view is had north and south.

From Atchison Cross to 16 (sf') the patrol moves at a walk, being up a
slope from 4 to 6 degrees. Usually such a place would be rushed
through, but the distance of the enemy makes this unnecessary. No
scouting is done off the road through the woods, because of the
distance of the enemy. On reaching the top of the hill the patrol is
halted while Sergeant Jones moves up to the high ground south of the
road at the crest, and in concealment searches with his glasses the
road as far as Frenchman's, especially the village beyond G (qf').
Seeing no signs of the enemy he moves the patrol down the hill at a
walk until the cut is passed and there takes a fast trot, so as to
avoid being long in a position where they could be seen from the
direction of Kickapoo. The same formation and gait are maintained as
far as Gauss' (pd'), where a walk is taken to rest the horses and to
gain opportunity to see if any enemy are holding the bridge at
Frenchman's.

=Situation:=

Just as the patrol comes to a walk Sergeant Jones sees what appears to
be a dismounted patrol moving south over the ridge about 650 yards
north of Frenchman's. He can see three men.

=Required, 2.= Action taken by Sergeant Jones.

=Answer.= The patrol is moved into the orchard just off the road,
while Sergeant Jones moves quickly to the top of the hill and,
concealed by the trees, examines the road north to see if the 3 men
are followed by others forming a part of a larger patrol or column.
He finds the three men are not followed.

=Required, 3.= What does he do next?

=Answer.= He determines to capture the patrol by surprise. He has the
horses led over south of the orchard hill so as not to be visible to
the enemy. He then distributes his men along the north edge of the
orchard, himself nearest the bridge, 2 men 75 yards back along the
road toward G (qf'), then 2 men 75 yards farther along toward G. As
the third man comes opposite him, Sergeant Jones cries "Halt," which
is the signal for the other parties to similarly hold up their men.

=Reasons.= Sergeant Jones might either capture the hostile patrol or
let it pass, and then proceed on his road. Since they are the first
enemy seen and there is such a good chance to capture them, and as
they may furnish definite information of the enemy's main force, he
decides as stated. There is an objection in capturing them that he
will have to send one or two men to take them to camp. The patrol is
placed as described above so as to have the two men opposite each of
the enemy, except for Sergeant Jones, who is alone. By thus covering
each man of the hostile patrol by two of our men, they will at once
see the folly of an effort to escape and no shot need be fired. One
man is holding the horses.

Problem No. 12 (Cavalry)

=1044.= Same situation as Problem 10.

=Required:=

1. What action does Sergeant Jones take before leaving the vicinity of
Frenchman's?

2. Give the formation and conduct of the patrol after leaving here.

3. Give the report submitted by Sergeant Jones under his instructions
in regard to bridges. (Par. 1000.)

At 6:30 P. M. (it is dark at 7:30) the patrol reaches 17 (jc').

4. Give the route followed from here and the disposition of the patrol
made for the night.

Problem No. 13 (Cavalry)

=1045. Situation:=

The Missouri river is the boundary between hostile countries.

A Blue separate brigade (3 regiments infantry, 1 squadron cavalry, 1
battery field artillery) is moving from Winchester (19 miles west of
Leavenworth) to seize the Rock Island bridge (q) across the Missouri
river at Fort Leavenworth. The cavalry squadron is camped at Lowemont,
8 miles west of Leavenworth, for night June 4-5. At 3 P. M. Sergeant
Jones is directed to take a patrol of six men and move via the Rock
Island bridge into Missouri and gain information of the enemy reported
to be now just east of the river.

=Required, 1.= Give the formation of the patrol when it first comes on
the map.

=Required, 2.= Give the conduct of the patrol from Mottin's (oa') to G
(qf').

At Frenchman's, Sergeant Jones met a farmer coming from Fort
Leavenworth, who said about 200 hostile cavalry were seen just east of
the Missouri about 2 P. M., moving towards the Terminal Bridge (z).

=Required, 3.= Action of Sergeant Jones. (Does he hold the man? Does
he send a message? Does he change his plans or direction of march?)

The patrol reaches the top of the hill, Sheridan's Drive--Government
Hill (tf').

=Required, 4.= What action does Sergeant Jones take before proceeding
east?

FLANK GUARDS

=1046.= The flanks of a column are ordinarily protected by the advance
guard, which sends out patrols to carefully examine the country on
both sides of the line of march. In some cases, however, the direction
of march of the column is such that there is a great danger of the
enemy's striking it in flank and some special provision is necessary
to furnish additional security on the threatened flank. This is done
by having a detachment, called a flank guard, march off the exposed
flank. The flank guard usually follows a road, parallel to the one on
which the column is marching and at least 1,000 yards (effective rifle
range) beyond it. If hostile artillery is feared this distance is much
greater.

The flank guard regulates its march so as to continue abreast of the
advance guard of the main column. It takes a formation similar to an
advance guard, does most of its patrolling to the front and on the
exposed flank, and keeps in constant touch with the main column by
means of mounted or dismounted messengers.

In case the enemy is encountered the flank guard drives him off if
practicable or takes up a defensive position, protecting the march of
the main column, and preventing the enemy from disturbing the latter's
march.

REAR GUARD

=1047. Definition and Duties.= A rear guard is a detachment of a
marching column following in rear to protect the main column from
being surprised and to prevent the march from being delayed or
interrupted.

When the main column is marching toward the enemy the rear guard is
very small and its duties relatively unimportant. It is principally
occupied in gathering up stragglers.

When the main column is marching away from the enemy (retreating) the
rear guard is all important. It covers the retreat of the main body,
preventing the enemy from harassing or delaying its march.

=1048. Strength.= The strength of a rear guard is slightly greater
than that of an advance guard, as it cannot expect, like the latter,
to be reinforced in case it is attacked, as the main column is
marching away from it and avoiding a fight.

=1049. Form of Order.= The rear guard commander, on the receipt of the
retreat order, issues a rear guard order, according to the form given
in the Field Service Regulations.

The distance of a rear guard from the main body and its formation are
similar to those of an advance guard. The elements corresponding to
the advance cavalry, the point, and the advance party of an advance
guard are termed the rear cavalry, rear point and rear party,
respectively. The support and reserve retain the same designations.

A rear guard formed during an engagement to cover the withdrawal or
retreat of the main body, may first be compelled to take up a
defensive position behind which the main body forms up and moves off.
It may be forced to withdraw from this position by successive skirmish
lines, gradually forming up in column on the road as it clears itself
from fighting contact with the enemy.

The rate of march of the rear guard depends upon that of the main
body. The main body may be much disorganized and fatigued,
necessitating long halts and a slow marching rate.

=1050. Action of the Rear Guard.= The withdrawal of defeated troops is
delayed, if possible, until night. If it becomes necessary to begin a
retreat while an engagement is in progress, the rear guard is
organized and takes up a defensive position generally behind the
fighting line; the latter then falls back and assembles under cover of
the rear guard.

The rear cavalry gives away before the enemy's pursuit only when
absolutely necessary, maintains communication with and sends
information to the rear guard commander, and pays special attention to
the weak points in the retreat, namely, the flanks. It makes use of
every kind of action of which it is capable, according to the
situation, and unless greatly outnumbered by hostile cavalry, it
causes considerable delay to the enemy.

When the enemy is conducting an energetic pursuit the rear guard
effects its withdrawal by taking up a succession of defensive
positions (that is, where the nature of the ground enables the rear
guard to defend itself well) and compelling the enemy to attack or
turn them. (It should be understood that these successive defensive
positions must, in the case of a large force, be from two to four
miles apart and in the case of a small force at least one-half mile
apart--not a few hundred yards as is frequently attempted in peace
maneuvers.)

When the enemy's dispositions for attack are nearly completed, the
rear guard begins to fall back, the cavalry on the flanks being
usually the last to leave. The commander designates a part of the rear
guard to cover the withdrawal of the remainder; the latter then falls
back to a new position in rear, and in turn covers the withdrawal of
the troops in front. These operations compel the enemy continually to
deploy or make turning movements, and constantly retard his advance.

The pursuit may be further delayed by obstacles placed in the enemy's
path; bridges are burned or blown up; boats removed or destroyed;
fords and roads obstructed; tracks torn up; telegraph lines cut, and
houses, villages, woods and fields fired. Demolitions and obstructions
are prepared by engineers, assisted, if necessary, by other troops
detailed from the reserve, and are completed by the mounted engineers
of the rear party at the last moment.

The instructions of the supreme commander govern in the demolition of
important structures.

OUTPOSTS

(See "Outpost," Par. 887)

=1051. Definition and Duties.= Outposts are detachments thrown out to
the front and flanks of a force that is in camp or bivouac, to protect
the main body from being surprised and to insure its undisturbed rest.
In fact, an outpost is merely a stationary advance guard. Its duties,
in general, are to _observe_ and _resist_--to observe the enemy, and
to resist him in case of attack. Specifically its duties are:

(=a=) To observe toward the front and flanks by means of stationary
sentinels and patrols, in order to locate the enemy's whereabouts and
learn promptly of his movements, thus making it impossible for him to
surprise us.

(=b=) To prevent the main body from being observed or disturbed.

(=c=) In case of attack, to check the enemy long enough to enable the
main body to prepare for action and make the necessary dispositions.

=1052. Size.= The size of the outpost will depend upon many
circumstances, such as the size of the whole command, the nearness of
the enemy, the nature of the ground, etc. A suitable strength for an
outpost may vary from a very small fraction to one-third of the whole
force. However, in practice it seldom exceeds one-sixth of the whole
force--as a rule, if it be greater, the efficiency of the troops will
be impaired. For a single company in bivouac a few sentinels and
patrols will suffice; for a large command, a more elaborate outpost
system must be provided. The most economical form of outpost is
furnished by keeping close contact with the enemy by means of outpost
patrols, in conjunction with resisting detachments on the avenues of
approach.

Troops at a halt are supposed to be resting, night or day, and the
fewer on outpost the more troops will there be resting, and thus
husbanding their strength for approaching marches and encounters with
the enemy. Outpost duty is about the most exhausting and fatiguing
work a soldier performs. It is, therefore, evident that not a man or
horse more than is absolutely necessary should be employed, and that
the commander should use careful judgment in determining the strength
of the outpost, and the chiefs of the various outpost subdivisions
should be equally careful in disposing their men so as to permit the
greatest possible number to rest and sleep undisturbed, _but at the
same time always considering the safety of the main body as the chief
duty_.

=1053. Composition.= The composition of the outpost will, as a rule,
depend upon the size and composition of the command, but a mixed
outpost is composed principally of infantry, which is charged with the
duty of local observation, especially at night, and with resisting the
enemy, in case of attack, long enough for the main body to prepare for
action.

The cavalry is charged with the duty of reconnaissance, and is very
useful in open country during the day.

Artillery is useful to outposts when its fire can sweep defiles or
large open spaces and when it commands positions that might be
occupied by hostile artillery.

Machine guns are useful to command approaches and check sudden
advances of the enemy.

Engineers are attached to an outpost to assist in constructing
entrenchments, clearing the field of fire, opening communication
laterally and to the rear. The outpost should be composed of complete
organizations. For example, if the outpost is to consist of one
company, do not have some of the platoons from one company and the
others from another, and if it is to consist of one battalion, do not
have some of the companies from one battalion and others from another,
etc.

FORMATION OF OUTPOSTS

=1054. Subdivisions.= As in the case of an advance guard, the outpost
of a large force is divided into elements or parts, that gradually
increase in size from front to rear. These, in order from the main
body, are the reserve, the line of supports, the line of outguards,
and the advance cavalry, and their formation, as shown by the drawing
on the preceding page, may be likened to an open hand, with the
fingers apart and extended, the wrist representing the main body, the
knuckles the line of supports, the first joints the line of outguards,
the second joints the line of sentinels and the finger tips the
advance cavalry.

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

In case of attack each part is charged with holding the enemy in check
until the larger element, next in rear, has time to deploy and prepare
for action.

=1055. Distances Between the Subdivisions.= The distances separating
the main body, the line of supports, the line of outguards, the line
of sentries and the advance cavalry, will depend upon circumstances.
There can be no uniformity in the distance between supports and
reserves, nor between outguards and supports, even in the same
outpost. The avenues of approach and the important features of the
ground will largely control the exact positions of the different parts
of the outposts. The basic principle upon which the distances are
based, is: _The distance between any two parts of the outpost must be
great enough to give the one in rear time to deploy and prepare for
action in case of attack, and the distance of the whole outpost from
the main body must, in the case of small commands, be sufficiently
great to hold the enemy beyond effective rifle range until the main
body can deploy, and, in case of large commands, it must be
sufficiently great to hold the enemy beyond effective artillery range
until the main body can deploy._

It is, therefore, evident that the distances will be materially
affected not only by the size of the main body, but also by the nature
of the cover afforded by the ground.

The following is given merely as a very general guide, subject to many
changes:

Distance to next
element in rear.

Advance cavalry 2 to 6 miles
Supports {Sentinels (furnished by outguard) 20 to 40 yds.
(Generally {Outguards (furnished by support) 200 to 500 yds.
two or {Support proper furnishes majority 400 to 800 yds.
more) of patrols.
Reserve (usually omitted in small commands) 1/2 to 2 miles

=1056. Advance Cavalry.= The advance cavalry is that part of the
outpost sent out in front of all foot troops. It generally operates
two to six miles beyond the outpost infantry, reconnoitering far to
the front and flanks in order to guard the camp against surprise by
artillery fire and to give early information of the enemy's movements.

After dusk the bulk of the cavalry usually withdraws to a camp in rear
of the outpost reserve, where it can rest securely after the day's
hard work and the horses can be fresh for the next day. Several
mounted patrols are usually left for the night at junctions or forks
on the principal roads to the front, from one to four miles beyond the
infantry line of observation.

=1057. Supports.= The _supports_ constitute a line of _supporting_ and
_resisting_ detachments, varying in size from a half a company to a
battalion. In outposts consisting of a battalion or more the supports
usually comprise about one-half of the infantry. Supports are numbered
numerically consecutively from right to left and are placed at the
more important points on the outpost line, on or near the line on
which resistance is to be made in case of attack.

As a rule, roads exercise the greatest influence on the location of
supports, and a support will generally be placed on or near a road.

Each support has assigned to it a definite, clearly-defined section of
front that it is to cover, and the support should be located as
centrally as possible thereto.

=1058. Outguards.= The outguards constitute the line of small
detachments farthest to the front and nearest to the enemy, and their
duty is to maintain uninterrupted observation of the ground in front
and on the flanks; to report promptly hostile movements and other
information relating to the enemy; to prevent unauthorized persons
from crossing the line of observation; to drive off small parties of
the enemy, and to make temporary resistance to larger bodies. For
convenience outguards are classified as pickets, sentry squads, and
cossack posts. They are numbered consecutively from right to left in
each support.

=1059.= _A picket_ is a group consisting of two or more squads,
ordinarily not exceeding half a company, posted in the line of
outguards to cover a given sector. It furnishes patrols and one or
more sentinels, double sentinels, sentry, squads, or cossack posts for
observation.

Pickets are placed at the more important points in the line of
outguards, such as road forks. The strength of each depends upon the
number of small groups required to observe properly its sector.

=1060.= _A sentry squad_ is a squad posted in observation at an
indicated point. It posts a double sentinel in observation, the
remaining men resting near by and furnishing the reliefs of sentinels.
In some cases it may be required to furnish a patrol.

=1061.= _A cossack post_ consists of four men. It is an observation
group similar to a sentry squad; but employs a single sentinel.

At night, it will sometimes be advisable to place some of the
outguards or their sentinels in a position different from that which
they occupy in the daytime. In such case the ground should be
carefully studied before dark and the change made at dusk. However, a
change in the position of the outguard will be exceptional.

=1062.= _Sentinels_ are generally used singly in daytime, but at night
double sentinels will be required in most cases. Sentinels furnished
by cossack posts or sentry squads are kept near their group. Those
furnished by pickets may be as far as 100 yards away.

Every sentinel should be able to communicate readily with the body to
which he belongs.

Sentinel posts are numbered consecutively from right to left in each
outguard. Sentry squads and cossack posts furnished by pickets are
counted as sentinel posts.

If practicable, troops on outpost duty are concealed and all movements
made so as to avoid observation by the enemy; sentinels are posted so
as to have a clear view to the front and, if practicable (though it is
rarely possible), so as to be able, by day, to see the sentinels of
the adjoining outguards. Double sentinels are posted near enough to
each other to be able to communicate easily in ordinary voice.

Sentinels are generally on duty two hours out of six. For every
sentinel and for every patrol there should be at least three reliefs;
therefore, one-third the strength of the outguards gives the greatest
number of men that should be on duty as sentinels and patrols at one
time.

Skillful selection of the posts of sentinels increases their field of
observation. High points, under cover, are advantageous by night as
well as by day; they increase the range of vision and afford greater
facilities for seeing lights and hearing noises. Observers with good
field glasses may be placed on high buildings, on church steeples or
in high trees.

Glittering objects on uniform or equipment should be concealed. It is
seldom necessary to fix bayonets, except at night, in dense fog, or in
very close country.

Reliefs, visiting patrols, and inspecting officers, approach sentinels
from the rear, remaining under cover if possible.

=1063. Reserve.= The reserve forms a general support for the line of
resistance. It is, therefore, centrally located near the junction of
roads coming from the direction of the enemy, and in concealment if
practicable.

Of the troops detailed for outpost duty, about one-half of the
infantry, generally all of the artillery, and the cavalry not
otherwise employed, are assigned to the reserve. If the outpost
consists of less than two companies the reserve may be omitted
altogether.

The arms are stacked and the equipments (except cartridge belts) may
be removed. Roads communicating with the supports are opened.

When necessary, the outpost order states what is to be done in case of
attack, designates places of assembly and provides for interior
guards. Interior guards are posted in the camp of the reserve or main
body to maintain order, and furnish additional security. Additional
instructions may be given for messing, feeding, watering, etc. In the
vicinity of the enemy or at night a portion of the infantry may be
required to remain under arms, the cavalry to hold their horses
(cinches loosened), and the artillery to remain in harness, or take up
a combat position.

In case of alarm, the reserve prepares for action without delay, and
word is sent to the main body. In combat, the reserve reinforces the
line of resistance, and if unable to check the enemy until the arrival
of the main body, delays him as much as possible.

The distance of the reserve from the line of resistance varies, but is
generally about half a mile; in outposts of four companies or less
this distance may be as small as 400 yards.

=1064. Patrols.= Instead of using outguards along the entire front of
observation, part of this front may be covered by patrols only. These
should be used to cover such sections of the front as can be crossed
by the enemy only with difficulty and over which he is not likely to
attempt a crossing after dark.

In daylight much of the local patrolling may be dispensed with if the
country can be seen from the posts of the sentinels. However, patrols
should frequently be pushed well to the front unless the ground in
that direction is exceptionally open.

Patrols must be used to keep up connection between the parts of the
outpost except when, during daylight, certain fractions or groups are
mutually visible. After dark this connection must be maintained
throughout the outpost except where the larger subdivisions are
provided with wire communication.

The following patrols are usually sent out from the main bodies of the
supports:

(=a=) Patrols of from three men to a squad are sent along the roads
and trails in the direction of the enemy, for a distance of from one
to five miles, depending on how close the enemy is supposed to be,
whether or not there is any advance cavalry out, and how long the
outpost has been in position. The extreme right and left supports send
patrols well out on the roads to the flanks. These patrols generally
operate continuously as soon as one returns from the front, or
possibly even before it returns, another goes out in the same general
direction to cover the same country. Frequently a patrol is sent out
along a road to the front for two or three miles with orders to remain
out until some stated time--for example, 4 P. M., dusk or dawn. It
sends in important information, and remains out near the extremity of
its route, keeping a close watch on the surrounding country.

An effort should always be made to secure and maintain contact with
the enemy, if within a reasonable distance, in order that his
movements or lack of movement may be constantly watched and reported
on. The usual tendency is towards a failure to send these patrols far
enough to the front and for the patrol leader to overestimate the
distance he has traveled. A mile through strange country with the
ever-present possibility of encountering the enemy seems three miles
to the novice.

At night the patrols generally confine their movements to the roads,
usually remaining quietly on the alert near the most advanced point of
their route to the front.

The majority of such patrols are sent out to secure information of the
enemy--reconnoitering patrols--and they avoid fighting and hostile
patrols, endeavoring to get in touch with the enemy's main force.
Other patrols are sometimes sent out to prevent hostile detachments
from approaching the outposts; they endeavor to locate the hostile
patrols, drive them back, preventing them from gaining any vantage
point from which they can observe the outpost line. These are called
combat patrols and have an entirely different mission from
reconnoitering patrols.

(=b=) Patrols of from two men to a squad, usually two men, are sent
from the support around the line of its outguards, connecting with the
outguards of the adjacent supports, if practicable. These are
"visiting patrols," and they serve to keep the outguards of a support
in touch with it and with each other; to keep the commander of a
support in touch with his outguards and the adjacent supports; and to
reconnoiter the ground between the outguards. Since a hostile force of
any size is practically forced to keep to the roads, there are rarely
ever any supports and very few outguards posted off the roads, the
intervals being covered by patrols, as just described.

When going out a patrol will always inform the nearest sentinel of the
direction it will take and its probable route and hour of return.

=1065. Detail for Patrols.= Since for every patrol of four men, twelve
are required (3 reliefs of 4 men each), the importance of sending out
just enough men and not one more than is actually needed, can readily
be understood. As fast as one visiting patrol completes its round,
another should usually be sent out, possibly going the rounds by a
slightly different route or in the reverse direction. The same
generally applies to the reconnoitering and combat patrols, though
frequently they are sent out for the entire day, afternoon or night,
and no 2d and 3d relief is required. Three reliefs are required for
the sentinel or sentinels at the post of the supports, so care should
be taken to establish but one post, if it can do all that is required.
It should not be considered that every man in the support should be on
duty or on a relief for an outguard, a patrol or sentinel post. There
should be as many men as possible in the main body of a support (this
term is used to distinguish this body from the support proper, which
includes the outguards and their sentinels) who only have no duty
other than being instantly available in case of attack.

=1066. Flags of Truce.= Upon the approach of a flag of truce, the
sentry will at once notify the commander of the outguard, who will in
turn send word to the commander of the outpost and ask for
instructions. One or more men will advance to the front and halt the
party at such distance as to prevent any of them from overlooking the
outposts. As soon as halted, the party will be ordered to face in the
opposite direction. If permission is given to pass the party through
the outpost line, they will be blindfolded and led under escort to the
commander of the outpost. No conversation, except by permission of the
outpost commander, is to be allowed on any subject, under any pretext,
with the persons bearing the flag of truce.

=1067. Entrenchments and Obstacles.= The positions held by the
subdivisions of an outpost should generally be strengthened by the
construction of entrenchments and obstacles, but conditions may render
this unnecessary.

=1068. Concealment.= Troops on outpost must keep concealed as much as
is consistent with the proper performance of their duties; especially
should they avoid the sky line.

=1069. Detached Posts.= In addition to ordinary outguards, the outpost
commander may detail from the reserve one or more detached posts to
cover roads or areas not in general line assigned to the supports.

In like manner the commander of the whole force may order detached
posts to be sent from the main body to cover important roads or
localities not included in the outpost line.

Detached posts may be sent out to hold points which are of importance
to the outpost cavalry, such as a ford or a junction of roads; or to
occupy positions especially favorable for observation, but too far to
the front to be included in the line of observation; or to protect
flanks of the outpost position. Such posts are generally established
by the outpost commander, but a support commander might find it
necessary to establish a post practically detached from the rest of
his command. They usually vary in strength from a squad to a platoon.
The number and strength of detached posts are reduced to the absolute
needs of the situation.

=1070. Examining Posts.= An examining post is a small detachment,
under the command of an officer or a noncommissioned officer,
stationed at some convenient point to examine strangers and to receive
bearers Of flags of truce brought in by the outguards or patrols.

Though the employment of examining posts is not general in field
operations, there are many occasions when their use is important; for
example: When the outguards do not speak the language of the country
or of the enemy; when preparations are being made for a movement and
strict scrutiny at the outguards is ordered: at sieges, whether in
attack or defense. When such posts, are used, strangers approaching
the line of observation are passed along the line to an examining
post.

No one except the commander is allowed to speak to persons brought to
an examining post. Prisoners and deserters are at once sent under
guard to the rear.

=1071. Cavalry Outpost.= Independent cavalry covering a command or on
special missions, and occasionally the advance cavalry of a mixed
command, bivouac when night overtakes them, and in such cases furnish
their own outposts. The outposts are established, in the main, in
accordance with the foregoing principles, care being taken to confine
outpost work to the lowest limits consistent with safety. No
precaution, however, should be omitted, as the cavalry is generally in
close proximity to the enemy, and often in territory where the
inhabitants are hostile.

The line of resistance is occupied by the supports, the latter sending
out the necessary outguards and patrols. Each outguard furnishes its
own vedettes (mounted sentinels), or sentinels. Due to the mobility of
cavalry, the distances are generally greater than in an outpost for a
mixed command. An outguard of four troopers is convenient for the day
time, but should be doubled at night, and at important points made
even stronger. The sentinels are generally dismounted, their horses
being left with those of the outguards.

Mounted cavalry at night can offer little resistance; the supports and
outguards are therefore generally dismounted, the horses being under
cover in rear, and the positions are strengthened by intrenchments and
obstacles. By holding villages, bridges, defiles, etc., with
dismounted rifle fire, cavalry can greatly delay a superior force.

There should always be easy communication along the line of resistance
to enable the cavalry to concentrate at a threatened point.

A support of one squadron covers with its outposts a section rarely
longer than two miles.

As such a line is of necessity weak, the principal reliance is placed
on distant patrolling. If threatened by infantry, timely information
enables the threatened point to be reinforced, or the cavalry to
withdraw to a place of safety. If there is danger from hostile
cavalry, the roads in front are blocked at suitable points, such as
bridges, fords, defiles, etc., by a succession of obstacles and are
defended by a few dismounted men. When compelled to fall back these
men mount and ride rapidly to the next obstacle in rear and there take
up a new position. As the march of cavalry at night is, as a rule,
confined to roads, such tactics seriously delay its advance.

In accordance with the situation and the orders they have received,
the support commanders arrange for feeding, watering, cooking, resting
and patrolling. During the night the horses of the outguards remain
saddled and bridled. During the day time cinches may be loosened,
one-third of the horses at a time. Feeding and watering are done by
reliefs. Horses being fed are removed a short distance from the
others.

Independent cavalry generally remains in outpost position for the
night only, its advance being resumed on the following day; if stopped
by the enemy, it is drawn off to the flanks upon the approach of its
own infantry.

ESTABLISHING THE OUTPOST

=1072.= The outpost is posted as quickly as possible, so that the
troops can the sooner obtain rest. Until the leading outpost troops
are able to assume their duties, temporary protection, known as the
_march outpost_, is furnished by the nearest available troops.

Upon receipt of the _halt order_ from the commander of the main
column, the outpost commander issues the _outpost order_ with the
least practicable delay.

The _halt order_, besides giving the necessary information and
assigning camp sites to the parts of the command, details the troops
to constitute the outpost, assigns a commander therefor, designates
the general line to be occupied, and, when practicable, points out the
position to be held in case of attack.

The _outpost order_ gives such available information of the situation
as is necessary to the complete and proper guidance of subordinates;
designates the troops to constitute the supports; assigns their
location and the sector each is to cover; provides for the necessary
detached posts; indicates any special reconnaissance that is to be
made; orders the location and disposition of the reserve; disposes of
the train if the same is ordered to join the outpost; and informs
subordinates where information will be sent. In large commands it may
often be necessary to give the order from the map, but usually the
outpost commander will have to make some preliminary reconnaissance,
unless he has an accurate and detailed map.

Generally it is preferable for the outpost commander to give verbal
orders to his support commanders from some locality which overlooks
the terrain. The time and locality should be so selected that the
support commanders may join their commands and conduct them to their
positions without causing unnecessary delay to their troops. The
reserve commander should, if possible, receive his orders at the same
time as the support commanders. Subordinates to whom he gives orders
separately should be informed of the location of other parts of the
outpost.

=1073.= After issuing the initial orders, the outpost commander
inspects the outpost, orders the necessary changes or additions, and
sends his superior a report of his dispositions.

_The reserve_ is marched to its post by its commander, who then sends
out such detachments as have been ordered and places the rest in camp
or bivouac, over which at least one sentinel should be posted.
Connection must be maintained with the main body, the supports, and
nearby detached posts.

The supports march to their posts, using the necessary covering
detachments when in advance of the march outpost. A support
commander's order should fully explain the situation to subordinates,
or to the entire command, if it be small. It should detail the troops
for the different outguards and, when necessary, define the sector
each is to cover. It should provide the necessary sentinels at the
post of the support, the patrols to be sent therefrom, and should
arrange for the necessary intrenching.

In posting his command the support commander must seek to cover his
sector (the front that he is to look after) in such manner that the
enemy can not reach, in dangerous numbers and unobserved, the position
of the support or pass by it within the sector intrusted to the
support. On the other hand, he must economize men on observation and
patrol duty, for these duties are unusually fatiguing. He must
practice the greatest economy of men consistent with the requirements
of practical security.

As soon as the posting of the support is completed, its commander
carefully inspects the dispositions and corrects defects, if any, and
reports the disposition of his support, including the patrolling
ordered, to the outpost commander. This report is preferably made by
means of a sketch.

By day the outpost will stack arms and the articles of equipment,
except the cartridge belt and canteen, will be placed by the arms. At
night the men will invariably sleep with their arms and equipment near
them.

In addition to the sentinel posted over the support, a part of the
support, say one-third or one-fourth, should always be awake at night.

Each outguard is marched by its commander to its assigned station, and
especially in the case of a picket, is covered by the necessary
patrolling to prevent surprise.

Having reached the position, the commander explains the situation to
his men and establishes reliefs for each sentinel, and, if possible,
for each patrol to be furnished. Besides these sentinels and patrols,
a picket must have a sentinel at its post.

The commander then posts the sentinels and points out to them the
principal features, such as towns, roads, and streams, and gives their
names. He gives the direction and location of the enemy, if known, and
of adjoining parts of the outpost.

He gives to patrols the same information and the necessary orders as
to their routes and the frequency with which the same shall be
covered. Each patrol should go over its route once before dark.

Each picket should maintain connection by patrols with the outguards
on its right and left.

=1074. Intercommunication.= It is most important that communication
should be maintained at all times between all parts of the outpost,
and between the outpost and the main body. This may be done by
patrols, messengers, wire or signal.

The commander of the outpost is responsible that proper communication
be maintained with the main body, and the support commanders keep up
communication with the outguards, with the adjoining supports and with
the reserve. The commander of a detached post will maintain
communication with the nearest outguard.

=1075. Changes for the Night.= In civilized warfare, it is seldom
necessary to draw the outpost closer to the main body at night in
order to diminish the front; nor is it necessary to strengthen the
line of observation, as the enemy's advance in force must be confined
to the roads. The latter are therefore strongly occupied, the
intervening ground being diligently patrolled.

In very open country or in war with savage or semi-civilized people
familiar with the terrain, special precautions are necessary.

=1076. Relieving the Outpost.= Ordinarily outposts are not kept on
duty longer than twenty-four hours. In temporary camps or bivouac they
are generally relieved every morning. After a day's advance the
outpost for the night is usually relieved, the following morning when
the support of the new advance guard passes the line of resistance. In
retreat the outpost for the night usually forms the rear guard for the
following day, and is relieved when it passes the line of observation
of the new outpost.

Outguards that have become familiar with the country during the day
time should remain on duty that night. Sentinels are relieved once in
two hours, or oftener, depending on the weather. The work of patrols
is regulated by the support commander.

Commanders of the various fractions of an outpost turn over their
instructions and special orders, written and verbal, to their
successors, together with the latest information of the enemy, and a
description of the important features of the country. When practicable
the first patrols sent out by the new outposts are accompanied by
members of the old outpost who are familiar with the terrain. When
relieved the old outguards return to their supports, the supports to
the reserve and the latter to the main body; or, if more convenient,
the supports and reserves return to the main body independently, each
by the shortest route.

When relieved by an advance guard, the outpost troops ordinarily join
their units as the column passes.

Evening and shortly before dawn are hours of special danger. The enemy
may attack late in the day in order to establish himself on captured
ground by intrenching during the night; or he may send forward troops
under cover of darkness in order to make a strong attack at early
dawn. Special precaution is therefore taken at those hours by holding
the outpost in readiness, and by sending patrols in advance of the
line of observation. If a new outpost is to be established in the
morning it should arrive at the outpost position at daybreak, thus
doubling the outpost strength at that hour.

OUTPOST PROBLEMS

Problem No. 1 (Infantry)

=1077. Lieutenant (to two squads of his company):= Two battalions of
our regiment have camped by Baker's Pond (Elementary Map) for the
night. It is now 3 P. M. on a rainy day in August. The enemy is
thought to be about five miles to the south of us. Our platoon is the
left support of the outpost and is stationed at the road fork on the
Chester Pike, by the Mason house. The Twin Hills-Lone Hill ridge is
taken care of by other troops. Corporal Baker, where do you think I
should place outguards?

=Corporal Baker:= One at the junction of the Mills farm lane and the
Chester Pike, and one at the steel railroad trestle over Sandy Creek.

=Lieutenant:= Those positions are both too far from the support,
almost a half mile, but they cover the two main avenues of approach
and there is no good place for a position nearer the support. A
position farther north of the Mill's farm lane would have its view
obstructed by the wall and trees along the lane and the wall would be
a bad thing to leave unoccupied such a short distance to your front.
So in this case, in spite of the excessive distances from the support,
I think the two positions are well chosen. Each should be an outguard
of a squad, for in the day time, in addition to furnishing a sentinel
to observe to the front, they should have some power of resistance,
particularly at the trestle. At night they should each have one double
sentinel post. This requires three reliefs of two men each, which,
with the corporal, only leaves one extra man, who can be used as a
messenger.

Corporal Baker, I order you to take your squad and post it as Outguard
No. 1, at the junction of this (Chester) pike and that farm lane
(Mills farm) in front. Corporal Davis' squad will be Outguard No. 2,
at the railroad trestle over there (pointing). Friendly troops will be
on the ridge to the east of your position. Your meals will be cooked
here and sent to you.

Explain how you post your squad.

=Corporal Baker:= I order Smith to double time 150 yards to the front
and act as point for the squad. I then march the squad down to its
position, keeping Smith about 200 yards in front until I have arranged
everything. I then post Brown under cover of the trees along the lane
where he can look down the road as far as possible and I tell him,
"Brown, you are to take post here, keeping a sharp lookout to the
front and flanks. The enemy is thought to be about five miles south
(pointing) of us. This is the Chester Pike. That creek over there is
Sandy Creek. Salem is about a mile and three-quarters down this pike
in that (S. E.) direction. York is a mile and a half in that (S. W.)
direction. Our troops are on that ridge (Twin Hills) and a squad is at
the trestle over there. It is Outguard No. 2. You are in Outguard No.
1. You know where we left our platoon. It is our support. Signal Smith
to come in." I then have the squad pitch their shelter tents along the
northern side of the wall, where they will be hidden to view from the
front by the trees along the lane and the wall. I want the men to get
shelter from the rain as soon as possible. I then instruct the men of
the squad, in the same manner that I did Brown; I notice the time,
and detail Davis as second relief and Carter as third relief for
Brown's post.

I then direct two men to take all the canteens and go over to that
farm (Mills) and fill them, first questioning the people about the
enemy and about the country around here. I also direct these two men
to get some straw or hay for bedding in the shelter tents, and
instruct them to return with as little delay as possible.

I wait until they return and order two other men to go down to the
cross roads, question the people there, look the ground over and
return here. I caution them not to give any information about our
force or the outguard. I would see that the sentinel's position was
the best available and that the men had as comfortable quarters as
possible, without being unduly exposed to view and without interfering
with their movements in case of attack. They would keep their rifles
at their sides at all times and not remove their equipments. After
dark I put two men on post at the same time. To do this I arrange
three reliefs of two men each. They are posted in pairs for two hours
at a time.

If no patrol from the support appeared within a half hour after I
first took position I would send a messenger back to you to see if
everything was all right and tell you what I had done.

=Lieutenant:= I think the two men sent to the crossroads should have
been started out before sending anyone to the Mills house as this was
a more important point. The Field Service Regulations state that
outguards do not patrol to the front, but what you did was entirely
correct. You were securing yourself in your position and should be
familiar with your immediate surroundings. You should have told the
crossroads patrol to determine how much of an obstacle Sandy Creek
was. I suppose you assumed the swamp was impassable.

The sentinel in this case is, I suppose, across the lane from the
outguard about ten or fifteen yards in advance. After dark the double
sentinel post should be posted on the pike about thirty yards in
advance of the outguard.

Very frequently it would not be wise to put up your shelter tents on
outguard. But here, considering the rain and the protection the trees
and wall furnish, it was wise to do so.

The noncommissioned officer in charge of an outguard should be very
precise in giving his orders and in making his arrangements, details,
etc. The discipline must be strict; that is, the men must be kept
under absolute control, so that in case of sudden attack there will be
no chance of confusion and the outguard commander will have his men
absolutely in hand and not permit any independent action on their
part. This is often not the case, owing to the familiar relations that
usually exist in our army between a corporal and the members of his
squad.

We will not have time to go into the arrangements for Outguard No. 2
other than to say that the conditions there are somewhat different
from those Corporal Baker has had to deal with. The outguard should be
posted on the west bank of Sandy Creek and the sentinel at the
southeastern end of the trestle. A skirmish trench should be dug down
the western slope of the fill west of the creek, and extended across
the track by throwing up a parapet about two and one-half feet high,
slightly bent back towards the northeast so as to furnish cover from
fire from the east bank of the creek, north of the trestle. The
shelter tents could be pitched as "lean tos" against the western slope
of the fill, and hidden by bushes and branches of trees.

(Note: The details of commanding this outguard, its action in case of
attack, what should be done with a passing countryman, etc., can be
profitably worked out in great detail.)

Problem No. 2

=1078. Lieutenant (to six squads):= We will take the same situation as
we had in Problem 1, with squad outguards as before.

Sergeant Adams, you have command of the platoon and have sent out the
two outguards. Explain your arrangements for the support.

=Sergeant Adams:= I have the men fall out by squads and rest on the
side of the road while I look the ground over. I then tell Sergeant
Barnes, "You will have immediate charge of the guard, cooking,
visiting patrols, etc., here at the support. Detail three men from
Corporal Evan's squad as first, second and third relief for the
sentinel over the support Post your sentinel at the road fork and give
him the necessary instructions as to the outguards, the adjacent
support which is on this road (pointing west) on top of that ridge,
etc. I will give you further instructions later." I then fall in the
remainder of the support (one sergeant, one cook, four corporals and
twenty-seven privates, three squads being intact and one man on duty
as sentinel) and have shelter tents pitched under cover of the orchard
and Mason house. While this is being completed I select a line for a
trench, about thirty-five yards long, behind the fence on the east and
west road and extending east of the Chester Pike about fifteen yards,
slightly bent back towards the northeast. No trench in the road. I
then say to Sergeant Foss, "Take Graves' squad and construct a shelter
trench along this line (indicating) having the parapet concealed. Cut
the fences so as to furnish easy access."

I then say to Corporal Evans, "Take three men from your squad and, as
a reconnoitering patrol, cross the trestle there (pointing), and
follow that road (pointing to the Boling-Salem road) into Salem,
reconnoitering that village. Then take up a position on that ridge
(pointing to Sandy Ridge) and remain out until dusk. Send me a message
from Sandy Ridge with a sketch and description of the country."

I assume that Corporal Evans is familiar with the information about
the enemy, the location of our outguards, etc.

Selecting five men from Corporal Geary's squad and the remaining man
of Corporal Evans' squad (three having been detailed for sentinel
duty, and three sent out on patrol duty with Corporal Evans), I turn
them over to Sergeant Barnes, saying, "Here are six men to furnish
three reliefs for a visiting patrol of two men. Have this patrol visit
Outguard No. 2 and cross the trestle, going south down the east bank
of the creek; thence recross the creek at the road bridge, visiting
Outguard No. 1; thence across to the adjacent outguard of the support
on our left, which is somewhere on that ridge (pointing to the Twin
Hills-Lone Hill Ridge); and thence to the starting point. Have them
locate that support on their first trip. You can reverse the route
and make such minor changes from time to time as you think best.
Report to me after they have completed the first round. Make
arrangements for sending supper to the outguards. Take two men from
Corporal Jackson's squad to carry it out. Be careful that the cook
fire is not visible. I am going out to visit Outguard No. 1 and then
No. 2. You will have charge until I return."

The men have stacked arms in front of the tents and have removed all
equipment but their belts.

I would now visit the outguards, taking a man with me, and see if they
are properly located. I would instruct the outguard commanders as to
what to do in case of attack, in case strangers approach, point out
their line of retreat in case of necessity, etc. I would make a sketch
of the position and send it, with a description of my dispositions, to
the commander of the outpost.

=Lieutenant:= Your arrangements and dispositions appear satisfactory.
You should have been more prompt in sending Corporal Evans out with
his patrol. Why didn't you send a patrol towards York, or south along
the Chester Pike?

=Sergeant Adams:= I considered that the support on my right would
cover that ridge (Twin Hills-Lone Hill), and that the route I laid out
for Corporal Evans would cover the Chester Pike and the country east
of Sandy Creek at the same time, thus avoiding the necessity for two
patrols.

=Lieutenant:= That seems reasonable, but you should have given some
specific orders about reporting on the width, depth, etc., of Sandy
Creek, which might prove a very valuable or dangerous obstacle. You
can readily see how quickly a command becomes broken up and depleted
in strength, and how important it is to make only such detachments as
are necessary. It looks as if your outguards might have been made
smaller considering the size of your platoon (6 squads), but I think
the squad outpost is so much better than one not composed of a
complete unit, that it is correct in this case. With Corporal Evans'
patrol of three men, the visiting patrol requiring six men, the
sentinel post requiring three men, Sergeant Barnes, and the two
outguards, you have thirty men actually on duty or detailed for duty,
out of fifty-one. Of course, the men constituting the outguards, the
man detailed for the visiting patrol and support sentinel, have
approximately two hours on duty and four hours off duty, so they get
some rest. Furthermore, you should have a three-man patrol watching
the crossroads at Salem during the night, Corporal Evans' patrol
having returned. This patrol should be relieved once during the night,
at a previously stated hour, which means six more men who do not get a
complete night's rest.

=Sergeant Adams:= Isn't Salem rather far to the front to send a patrol
at night?

=Lieutenant:= Yes, it is, but unless you touch the crossroads there
you would have to have two patrols out, one near Maxey's farm and one
on the Chester Pike. As it is you are leaving the road from York to
the crossroads in front of Outguard No. 1 uncovered, but you should
find that this is covered by a patrol from the adjacent support. The
cross roads in front of Outguard No. 1 is the natural place for a
stationary, night patrol, but it is so close to the outguard that the
benefit derived from a patrol there would be too small to justify the
effort.

(Note: Further details of the duties of this support can be gone into.
The messages should be written, and patrols carried through their tour
of duty with the resulting situations to be dealt with; the sentinels
tested as to their knowledge of their duties, etc. Also note carefully
the manner in which the support commander uses his noncommissioned
officers for carrying out his intentions, and thus avoids the most
objectionable and inefficient practice of dealing directly with the
privates.)

Problem No. 3 (Infantry)

=1079.= (See Fort Leavenworth map in pocket at back of book.)

=Situation:=

A Blue force, Companies A and B, 1st Infantry, under Captain A, in
hostile country, is covering the Rock Island Bridge and camped for the
night, April 20-21, on the south slope of Devin ridge (rm'). The enemy
is moving northward from Kansas City (30 miles south of Leavenworth).
At 3:30 P. M. Captain A receives a message from Colonel X at Beverly
(2 miles east of Rock Island Bridge, (qo')), stating that two or three
companies of hostile infantry are reported five miles south of
Leavenworth at 2:30 P. M. No enemy is west of Leavenworth. Captain A
decides to place one platoon on outpost.

=Required, 1.= Captain A's order.

=Answer.= Verbally: "Two or three Red companies were five miles south
of Leavenworth at 2:30 P. M. today. No enemy is west of Leavenworth.
We will camp here. 1st Platoon, 'A' company, under Sergeant A, will
form the outpost, relieving the advance guard (2d Platoon Co. A). The
line, Pope Hill (sm')--Rabbit Point (tn') will be held. Detached posts
will be placed on Hill 880, west of Merritt Hill (rl'), and on
Engineer Hill (ql'). In case of attack the outpost line will be held.

"The baggage will be at the main camp.

"Messages will reach me on Devin Ridge (rm')."

Issued verbally to officers and Sergeant A.

=Required, 2.= Give verbatim (word for word) the order issued by
Sergeant A.

=Answer.= "Two companies of the enemy were five miles south of
Leavenworth at 2:30 P. M. today. Our camp is to be here. This platoon
will be the outpost on the line, Rabbit Point (im')--Pope Hill (sm').

"The right support, 1st section, less 1 squad, under Sergeant B, will
take position north of Pope Hill and cover the following front: the
ravine (XIX--Merritt Hill) west of Grant avenue to the ravine about
midway between Grant Avenue and Rabbit Point (tn').

"The left support, 2d section, less 1 squad under Sergeant H, will
take position on north slope of Rabbit Point and will cover the
following front: The ravine midway between Grant Avenue and Rabbit
Point to Missouri River.

"Corporal D, you will take the eight men of your squad and form a
detached post on Engineer Hill (qk').

"Corporal E, take your squad and form a detached post on Hill 880 west
of Merritt Hill (rl').

"If attacked hold your front. Each support and detached post will
entrench.

"Send messages to me at right support."

The outpost moves out, each support and detached post separately,
without throwing out covering patrols, because the advance guard is
now holding the front. There is no reserve.

=Required, 3.= What does Sergeant A do now?

=Required, 4.= What does Sergeant B do as soon as he reaches Pope
Hill?

(Note: During the remainder of the afternoon one man up in a tree on
Grant Avenue will be the only observing post necessary for this
support. At night an outguard would be placed on Grant Avenue with
continuous patrols along the front, because the open ground furnishes
easy approach to the enemy. A post of four men might also be placed on
the bridge over Corral Creek (um').)

=Required, 5.= The location of supports and the main body of detached
post on Engineer Hill.

=Required, 6.= What patrolling would be done from the left support?

CHAPTER VI

THE COMPANY ON OUTPOST

(Establishing the Outpost)

=1080.= We will now apply some of the general principles of outposts
(see Par. 1051) to a company taking up its position on the line of
outposts.

Let us suppose that our battalion has been detailed for outpost duty.

In order to understand more fully the duties and functions of the
company commander, we will first consider what the major does. To
begin with, he and the battalion will have been detailed for outpost
duty before the march was completed, and he will have been told,
amongst other things, what is known of the enemy and also what is
known of other bodies of our own troops, where the main body will
halt, the general position to be occupied by the outpost, and what the
commander intends doing in case of attack.

The major verbally designates, say, two companies, as the reserve, and
the other two companies, including our own, as the support. He places
the senior officer of the reserve companies in command of the reserve
and tells him where he is to go, and he indicates the general line the
outpost is to occupy and assigns the amount of front each of the other
companies is to cover. The limits of the sector so assigned should be
marked by some distinctive features, such as trees, buildings, woods,
streams, etc., as it is important that each company should know the
exact limits of its frontage. He tells the company commanders what he
knows of the enemy and of our own troops so far as they affect the
outposts, he indicates the line of resistance and how much resistance
is to be afforded in case of attack, states whether intrenchments and
obstacles are to be constructed, gives instructions about lighting
fires and cooking, and states where he can be found.

Upon receiving his orders from the major, the company commander, _with
a proper covering detachment_, moves to the locality allotted him and
as he arrives upon the ground he is to occupy, he sends out, as
temporary security, patrols or skirmishers, or both, a short distance
in front of the general position the outguards will occupy, holding
the rest of the company back under cover. If practicable, the company
commander should precede the company and make a rapid examination of
the ground. He then sends out _observation groups_, varying in size
from four men to a platoon, generally a squad, to watch the country in
the direction of the enemy. These groups constitute the _outguards_,
and are just sufficient in number to cover the front of the supports,
and to connect where necessary with the outguards of adjoining
supports.

The company commander next selects a defensive position on the general
line of resistance, from which not only can he command the approaches,
but where he can also give assistance to the adjoining supports; he
then gives instructions in regard to the intrenchments and obstacles,
after which he makes a more careful reconnaissance of the section
assigned him; corrects the position, of the outguards, if necessary;
gives them instructions as to their duties in case of attack or when
strangers approach their posts; tells them the number (if any) of
their post, the number of the outguard and support and the numbers of
the adjoining outguards and supports; points out lines of retreat in
case they are compelled to fall back to the support, cautioning the
men not to mask the fire of the support; he tells them the names of
all villages, rivers, etc., in view, and the places to which the wagon
roads and the railroads lead; selects, if necessary, places for
additional posts to be occupied at night and during fog; sees that
suitable connections are made between him and the adjoining outguards,
and between his support and the adjoining supports; and questions
subordinate commanders to test their grasp of the situation and
knowledge of their duties, and on returning to the support he sends a
report with a _sketch_ to the outpost commander, showing the
dispositions made.

After the line of observation has been established, the support stacks
arms and the men are permitted to remove their equipments, except
cartridge belts. One or more sentinels are posted over these supports,
and they guard the property and watch for signals from the outguards.
Fires are concealed as much as possible and the messing is done by
reliefs. Mounted messengers ordinarily do not unsaddle; they rest,
water and feed as directed.

After the major has received reports from both company commanders, he
will himself visit the outguards and supports and make such changes as
he may deem necessary, immediately after which he will submit to the
commander of the troops a written report, accompanied by a combined
sketch showing the positions of the different parts of the outpost.
The major might begin his inspection of the line of outguards before
receiving the reports of the company commanders.

In training and instructing the company in outpost work, it is always
best to send out a few patrols and scouts an hour or two in advance,
with definite instructions as to what they are to do, and have them
operate against the company as hostile scouts and patrols. If the rest
of the company know that patrols and scouts are operating in their
front, and will try to work their way through the outpost line, they
will naturally take a keener interest in their work. Exercises of this
kind create a feeling of rivalry between the scouts and patrols, who,
on the one hand, are trying to work their way through the line of
outposts, and the outguards and patrols, who, on the other hand, are
trying to prevent them from so doing. It makes the work much more
_human_.

CHAPTER VII

THE COMPANY IN SCOUTING[13] AND PATROLLING

=1081.= The general principles of patrolling are explained in Par.
959; so we need not repeat them here.

Many of the principles of scouting are, in reality, nothing but the
fundamentals of patrolling, and the main function of scouting,
_reconnoitering_, is also the function of a certain class of patrols.
So, we see that scouting and patrolling are inseparably connected, and
the importance of training the members of the company in the
principles of scouting is, therefore, evident.

=1082. Requisites of a good Scout.= A man, to make a good scout,
should possess the following qualifications:--

Have good eyesight and hearing;
Be active, intelligent and resourceful;
Be confident and plucky;
Be healthy and strong;
Be able to swim, signal, read a map, make a rough sketch, and,
of course, read and write.

=1083. Eyesight and Hearing.= To be able to use the eye and the ear
quickly and accurately is one of the first principles of successful
scouting. Quickness and accuracy of sight and hearing are to a great
extent a matter of training and practice. The savage, for instance,
almost invariably has quick eyesight and good hearing, simply from
continual practice.

Get into the habit of seeing, _observing_, things--your eyesight must
never be resting, but must be continually glancing around, in every
direction, and _seeing_ different objects. As you walk along through
the country get into the habit of noticing hoof-prints, wheel-ruts,
etc., and observing the trees, houses, streams, animals, men, etc.,
that you pass.

Practice looking at distant objects and discovering objects in the
distance. On seeing distant signs, do not jump at a conclusion as to
what they are, but watch and study them carefully first.

Get into the habit of listening for sounds and of distinguishing by
what different sounds are made.

=1084. Finding your Way in a strange Country.= The principal means of
finding one's way in a strange country are by map reading, asking the
way, the points of the compass and landmarks.

_Map Reading._ This, of course, presupposes the possession of a map.
The subject of map reading is explained in Pars. 1859 to 1877.

_Asking the Way._ In civilized countries one has no trouble in finding
his way by asking, provided, of course, he speaks the language. If in
a foreign country, learn as soon as you can the equivalent of such
expressions as "What is the way to ----?" "Where is ----?" "What is
the name of this place?," and a few other phrases of a similar nature.
Remember, however, that the natives may sometimes deceive you in their
answers.

_Points of the Compass._ A compass is, of course, the best, quickest
and simplest way of determining the directions, except in localities
where there is much iron, in which case it becomes very unreliable.

For determining the points of the compass by means of the North Star
and the face of a watch, see Par. 1096.

The points of the compass can also be ascertained by facing the sun in
the morning and spreading out your arms straight from the body. Before
you is east; behind you, west; to your right, south; to your left,
north.

[Illustration]

The points of the compass can be determined by noting the limbs and
bark of trees. The bark on the north side of trees is thicker and
rougher than that on the south side, and moss is most generally found
near the roots on the north side. The limbs and branches are generally
longer on the south side of the trees, while the branches on the north
are usually knotty, twisted and drooped. The tops of pine trees dip or
trend to the north.

=1085. Lost.= In connection with finding your way through strange
country, it may be said, should you find you have lost your way, do
not lose your head. Keep cool--try not to let your brains get into
your feet. By this we mean don't run around and make things worse, and
play yourself out. First of all, sit down and think; cool off. Then
climb a tree, or hill, and endeavor to locate some familiar object you
passed, so as to retrace your steps. If it gets dark and you are not
in hostile territory, build a good big fire. The chances are you have
been missed by your comrades and if they see the fire, they will
conclude you are there and will send out for you. Also, if not in
hostile territory, distress signals may be given by firing your rifle,
but don't waste all your ammunition.

If you find a stream, follow it; it will generally lead
somewhere--where civilization exists.

The tendency of people who are lost is to travel in a circle
uselessly.

Remember this important rule: _Always notice the direction of the
compass when you start out, and what changes of direction you make
afterwards._

=1086. Landmarks.= Landmarks or prominent features of any kind are a
great assistance in finding one's way in a strange country. In
starting out, always notice the hills, conspicuous trees, high
buildings, towers, rivers, etc. For example, if starting out on a
reconnaissance you see directly to the north of you a mountain, it
will act as a guide without your having to refer to your compass or
the sun. If you should start from near a church, the steeple will
serve as a guide or landmark when you start to make your way back.

When you pass a conspicuous object, like a broken gate, a strangely
shaped rock, etc., try to remember it, so that should you desire to
return that way, you can do so by following the chain of landmarks. On
passing such landmarks always see what they look like from the other
side; for, that will be the side from which you will first see them
upon the return, trip.

_The secret of never getting lost is to note carefully the original
direction in which you start, and after that to note carefully all
landmarks._ Get in the habit of doing this in time of peace--it will
then become second nature for you to do it in time of war.

It may sometimes be necessary, especially in difficult country, such
as when traveling through a forest, and over broken mountains and
ravines, for you to make your own landmarks for finding your way back
by "blazing" (cutting pieces of bark from the trees), breaking small
branches off bushes, piling up stones, making a line across a
crossroad or path you did not follow, etc.

=1087. Concealment and Dodging.= Both in scouting and patrolling it
must be remembered not only that it is important you should get
information, but it is also fully as important that the enemy should
not know you have the information--hence, the necessity of hiding
yourself. And remember, too, if you keep yourself hidden, not only
will you probably be able to see twice as much of what the enemy is
doing, but it may also save you from being captured, wounded or
killed.

Should you find the enemy has seen you, it is often advisable to
pretend that you have not seen him, or that you have other men with
you by signaling to imaginary comrades.

As far as possible, keep under cover by traveling along hedges, banks,
low ground, etc. If moving over open country, make your way as quickly
as possible from one clump of trees or bushes to another; or, from
rocks, hollows or such other cover as may exist, to other cover. As
soon as you reach new cover, look around and examine your surroundings
carefully.

Do not have about you anything that glistens, and at night be careful
not to wear anything that jingles or rattles. And remember that at
night a lighted match can be seen as far as 900 yards and a lighted
cigarette nearly 300 yards. In looking through a bush or over the top
of a hill, break off a leafy branch and hold it in front of your face.

In selecting a tree, tower or top of a house or other lookout place
from which to observe the enemy from concealment, always plan
beforehand how you would make your escape, if discovered and pursued.
A place with more than one avenue of escape should be selected, so
that if cut off in one direction you can escape from the other. For
example, should the enemy reach the foot of a tower in which you are,
you would be completely cut off, while if he reached a house on whose
roof you happened to be, you would have several avenues of escape.

Although trees make excellent lookout places, they must, for the same
reasons as towers, be used with caution. In this connection it may be
remarked unless one sees foot marks leading to a tree, men are apt not
to look up in trees for the enemy--hence, be careful not to leave foot
marks. When in a tree, either stand close against the trunk, or lie
along a large branch, so that your body will look like a part of the
trunk or branch.

In using a hill as a lookout place, do not make the common mistake of
showing yourself on the skyline. Reach the top of the hill slowly and
gradually by crouching down and crawling, and raise your head above
the crest by inches. In leaving, lower your head gradually and crawl
away by degrees, as any quick or sudden movement on the skyline is
likely to attract attention. And, remember, just because you don't
happen to see the enemy that is no sign that he is not about. At
maneuvers and in exercises soldiers continually make the mistake of
exposing themselves on the skyline.

At night confine yourself as much as possible to low ground, ditches,
etc. This will keep you down in the dark and will enable you, in turn,
to see outlined against the higher ground any enemy that may approach
you.

At night especially, but also during the day, the enemy will expect
you along roads and paths, as it is easier to travel along roads and
paths than across country and they also serve as good guides in
finding your way. As a rule, it is best to use the road until it
brings you near the enemy and then leave it and travel across country.
You will thus be able better to avoid the outposts and patrols that
will surely be watching the roads.

Practice in time of peace the art of concealing yourself and observing
passers-by. Conceal yourself near some frequented road and imagine the
people traveling over it are enemies whose numbers you wish to count
and whose conversation you wish to overhear. Select a spot where they
are not likely to look for you, and which has one or more avenues of
escape; choose a position with a background that matches your clothes
in color; keep quiet, skin your eyes; stretch your ears.

A mounted scout should always have wire cutters when operating in a
country where there are wire fences.

=1088. Tracking.= By "tracking" we mean following up footmarks. The
same as the huntsman tracks his game so should we learn how to track
the enemy. One of the first things to learn in tracking is the pace at
which the man or horse was traveling when the track was made.

A horse walking makes pairs of footmarks, each hind foot being close
to the impression of the forefoot. At a trot the tracks are similar,
but the pairs of footmarks are farther apart and deeper, the toe
especially being more deeply indented than at the walk. At a canter
there are two single footmarks and then a pair. At a gallop the
footmarks are single and deeply indented. As a rule, the hind feet are
longer and narrower than the forefeet.

In case of a man walking, the whole flat of the foot comes equally on
the ground, the footmarks usually about 30 inches apart. If running,
the toes are more deeply indented in the ground, and the footmarks are
considerably farther apart than when walking. Note the difference
between footmarks made by soldier's shoes and civilian's shoes, and
those made by men and those made by women and children.

Study the difference between the tracks by a gun, a carriage, an
escort wagon, an automobile, a bicycle, etc., and the direction in
which they were going.

In addition to being able to determine the pace of tracks, it is most
important that you should be able to tell how old they are. However,
ability to do this with any degree of accuracy, requires a vast amount
of practice. A great deal depends on the kind and the state of the
ground and the weather. For example, if on a dry, windy day you follow
a certain track over varying ground, you will find that on light sandy
soil, for instance, it will look old in a very short time, because any
damp earth that may have been kicked up from under the surface will
dry very quickly to the same color as the rest of the surface, and the
edge of the footmark will soon be rounded off by the breeze blowing
over the dry dust. The same track in damp ground will look much
fresher, and in damp clay, in the shade of trees, a track which may be
a day old will look quite fresh.

The following are clues to the age of tracks: Spots of rain having
fallen on them since they were made, if, of course, you know when the
rain fell; the crossing of other tracks over the original ones; the
freshness or coldness of the droppings of horses and other animals
(due allowance being made for the effect of the sun, rain, etc.), and,
in the case of grass that has been trodden down, the extent to which
it has since dried or withered.

Having learned to distinguish the pace and age of tracks, the next
think to do is to learn how to follow them over all kinds of ground.
This is a most difficult accomplishment and one that requires a vast
amount of practice to attain even fair proficiency.

In tracking where it is difficult to see the track, such as on hard
ground, or in the grass, note the direction of the last foot-print
that you can see, then look on ahead of you a few yards, say, 20 or
30, in the same direction, and, in grass, you will probably see the
blades bent or trodden, and, on ground, you will probably see stones
displaced or scratched--or some other small sign which otherwise would
not be noticed. These indistinct signs, seen one behind the other,
give a track that can be followed with comparative ease.

If you should lose the track, try to find it again by placing your
handkerchief, hat, or other object on the last footmark you noticed,
and then work around it in a wide circle, with a radius of, say, 30,
50, or 100 yards, choosing the most favorable ground, soft ground, if
possible. If with a patrol, only one or two men should try to find the
onward track; for, if everyone starts in to find it, the chances are
the track will be obliterated with their footmarks. In trying to find
the continuation of a track this way, always place yourself in the
enemy's position, look around the country, imagine what you would have
done, and then move out in that direction and look for his tracks in
soft ground.

PRACTICE

In order to learn the appearance of tracks, get a suitable piece of
soft ground, and across this have a man walk and then run, and have a
horse walk, trot, canter and gallop. The next day make similar tracks
alongside the first ones and then notice the difference between the
two. Also, make tracks on ordinary ground, grass, sand, etc., and
practice following them up. Finally, practice tracking men sent out
for the purpose. The work will probably be very difficult, even
disheartening at first, but you will gradually improve, if you
persevere.

Above all things, get into the habit of seeing any tracks that may be
on the ground. When out walking, when going through exercises at
maneuvers, and at other times, always notice what tracks are on the
ground before you, and study them.

The following exercises in scouting and patrolling afford excellent
practice and training:

=1089. The Mouse and Cat Contest.= 1. A section of country three or
four miles square, with well-defined limits, is selected. The
boundaries are made known to all contestants and anyone going outside
of them will be disqualified.

2. Two patrols of eight men each are sent out as "mice." They occupy
any positions they may wish within the boundaries named, and conceal
themselves to watch for hostile patrols.

3. Half an hour later two other squads, wearing white bands around
their hats, or having other distinguishing marks, are sent out as
"cats" to locate, if possible, and report upon the position of the
"mice."

4. An hour is fixed when the exercise shall end, and if within the
given time the "cats" have not discovered the "mice," the "mice" win.

5. The "cats" will write reports of any "mice" patrols they may see.

_Rules_

1. An umpire (officer or noncommissioned officer) goes with each
patrol and his decisions as to capture and other matters are the
orders of the company commander. The umpires must take every possible
precaution to conceal themselves so as not to reveal the position of
the patrols with which they are.

Each umpire will carry a watch, all watches being set with that of the
company commander before the exercise commences.

2. Any "cat" patrol coming within 50 yards of a "mouse" patrol,
without seeing the "mice," is considered captured.

3. When the time is up, the umpires will bring in the patrols and
report to the company commander.

=1090. Flag-Stealing Contest.= 1. A section of country of suitable
size, with well-defined limits, is selected, the boundaries being made
known to the contestants.

2. The contestants are divided into two forces of about 20 men each,
and each side will establish three Cossack posts along a general line
designated by the company commander, the two positions being selected
facing each other and being a suitable distance apart. The men not
forming part of the Cossack posts will be used as reconnoitering
patrols.

3. About three quarters of a mile in rear of the center of each line
of outposts four flags will be planted, in line, about 30 yards apart.

4. The scouts and patrols of each force will try to locate the
outposts of the other force, and then to work their way around or
between them, steal the flags and bring them back to their own side.
They will endeavor to prevent the enemy from doing the same.

5. One scout or patrol will not carry away more than one flag at a
time, and will have to return to their side safely with the flag
before they can come back and capture another.

6. Scouts may work singly or in pairs. Any scout or patrol coming
within 80 yards of a stronger hostile party, or Cossack post, will be
considered as captured, if seen by the enemy, and if carrying a
captured flag at the time, the flag will not count as having been
captured. Of course, if a scout or patrol can pass within 80 yards of
the enemy without being discovered, it may do so.

7. An umpire (officer or noncommissioned officer) will be with each
Cossack post, each patrol, and at the position of the flags.

8. The hour when the exercise ends will be designated in advance and
at that hour the umpires will bring in the Cossack posts and patrols.
The same requirements regarding watches obtains as in the Mouse and
Cat Contest.

9. At the conclusion of the contest the commander of each side will
hand in to the company commander all sketches and reports made by his
men.

10. Points will be awarded as follows:

Each flag captured, 5.

For each sketch and hostile report of the position of a Cossack
post, 3.

For each report of movements of a hostile patrol, 2.

The side getting the greatest number of points will win.

11. Umpires may penalize the contestants for a violation of the rules.

The same contest may be carried out at night, substituting lighted
Japanese lanterns for the flags.

FOOTNOTES:

[13] The best book on scouting that the author has ever seen, is
Baden-Powell's "Aids to Scouting," which was consulted in the
preparation of this chapter.

CHAPTER VIII

NIGHT OPERATIONS

=1091. Importance.= Because of the long range and great accuracy of
modern fire arms, there has been in recent years a marked increase in
the practice of night operations, such operations being of common
occurrence not only for massing troops under cover of darkness in
favorable positions for further action, but also for actually
assaulting positions.

Read carefully pars. 464, 496, 498, 523, 524, 580-590.

TRAINING OF THE COMPANY

=1092.= Night movements are amongst the most difficult operations of
war, and, therefore require the most careful, painstaking and thorough
training and instruction of troops in all matters pertaining thereto.
The history of night fighting shows that in most cases defeat is due
to disorganization through panic. It is said that in daylight the
moral is to the physical as three is to one. That being the case, it
is hard to say what the ratio is at night, when a general atmosphere
of mystery, uncertainty and fear of surprise envelops the operations,
and, of necessity affects the nerves of the men. The vital importance,
therefore, of accustoming troops as much as we can in peace to the
conditions that will obtain in night fighting, cannot be
overestimated. The following outline shows the subjects in which
individual and collective instruction and training should be given:

INDIVIDUAL TRAINING

=1093. General.= The first thing to be done is to accustom the soldier
to darkness and to teach him to overcome the nervousness which is
natural to the average man in darkness.

The best way to do this is to begin by training him in the use of his
powers of vision and hearing under conditions of darkness, which are
strange to him. The company should be divided into squads for this
instruction.

=1094. Vision.= Take several men to ground with which they are
familiar. Have them notice the different appearance which objects
present at night; when viewed in different degrees of light and shade;
the comparative visibility of men under different conditions of dress,
background, etc.; the ease with which bright objects are seen; the
difference between the visibility of men standing on a skyline and
those standing on a slope. Post the men in pairs at intervals along a
line which the instructors will endeavor to cross without being seen.
The instructors should cross from both sides, so as to compel
observation in both directions. Have a man (later, several) walk away
from the rest of the men and when he is about to disappear from view,
halt him, and estimate the distance. Send a man (later, several)
outside the field of vision, to advance on the rest of the men. Halt
him when he enters the field of vision and estimate the distance. Send
a number of men outside the limit of vision and then let them advance
on the rest of the men, using cover and seeing how near they can
approach unobserved.

=1095. Hearing.= Place a number of men a few yards apart and make them
guess what a noise is caused by, and its approximate position. The
rattle of a meat can, the movement of a patrol, the working of the
bolt of a rifle, the throwing down of accouterments, low talking,
etc., may be utilized. Take special pains to impress upon the men the
penetrating power of the human voice, and the necessity of preserving
absolute silence in night operations. Have blank cartridges fired and
teach the men to judge their direction and approximate distance away.

=1096. Finding Bearings.= Show the men how to determine the points of
the compass from the North Star. The Big Dipper constellation looks
like this:

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

The North Star is on the prolongation of a line joining the two
"pointing" stars, and at above five times the distance between the two
stars. At another time have those same men individually locate the
North Star. Using this star as a guide, practice the men moving in
different directions, by such commands as, "Smith, move southeast."
"Jones, move northwest," etc.

To test a man's ability to keep a given direction when moving in the
darkness, choose a spot from which no prominent landmarks are visible,
advance toward it accompanied by a man, from a distance not less than
200 paces. While advancing the soldier must take his bearings. On
arriving at the spot chosen the instructor will turn the soldier
around rapidly two or three times and then have him continue to
advance in the same direction as before. No prominent landmarks should
be visible from the starting point.

=1097. Moving in the Dark.= Form four or five men in line with about
one pace interval, the instructor being on one of the flanks. Place
some clearly visible mark, such as a lantern, for the instructor to
march on. Impress upon the men the importance of lifting their feet up
high and bringing them to the ground quietly and firmly, and of
keeping in touch with the guide and conforming to his movements
without sound or signal. The pace should be slow and frequent halts
should be made to test the promptness of the men in halting and
advancing together. As the line advances, each man will in turn take
his place on the flank and act as guide. The light on which the men
are marching should be hidden from view at intervals, in order to test
the ability of the men to maintain the original direction. Later on,
the number of men in a line may be increased considerably. The rougher
the ground, the darker the night and the longer the line, the slower
must the pace be and the more frequent the halts. After passing an
obstacle men instinctively line up parallel to it, and consequently if
the obstacle does not lie at right angles to the line of advance, the
direction will be lost; so, be sure to guard against this.

=1098. Night Fencing.= Practice the men in charging in the dark
against a white cloth or the dummy figure of a man. In the beginning
have the figure in a fixed place, but later have the soldier charge
seeking the figure, and not knowing just exactly where it is
beforehand.

=1099. Night Entrenching.= It is frequently necessary in time of war
to dig trenches at night in front of the enemy, and while this work is
easy in the moonlight, it is very difficult in the dark. Bear in mind
the following points:

1. The tendency is to make the trench too narrow; hence, guard against
this.

2. Be careful not to throw the earth too far or too near.

3. Do not strike your neighbor's tools in working.

4. Do not use the pick unless necessary, because it makes considerable
noise.

5. Do not scrape the tools together in order to get off the dirt; use
a chip of wood or the toe of the shoe.

6. Make as little noise as possible in digging and handling your
tools.

7. If discovered by the enemy's searchlights, do not become excited or
confused; simply lie down.

8. If attacked by the enemy, do not get rattled and throw your tools
away--put them in some fixed place where they can be found again.

=1100. Equipment.= At first the men should be taken out without arms,
but later on they should be trained to work in full equipment. Teach
every man what parts of his equipment are likely to make a noise under
special circumstances, such as lying down, rising, crossing obstacles,
etc., and instruct him how to guard against it. Bayonets should always
be fixed, but in order to avoid accidents the scabbard should be left
on them.

From the beginning of the training continually impress upon the men
that it is absolutely criminal to fire without orders during a night
operation and that the bayonet is the only weapon he can use with
advantage to himself and safety to his comrades.

=1101. Night Firing.= As a rule men fire too high in the dark. They
must, therefore, be cautioned not to raise the rifle above the
horizontal, or incline the upper part of the body to the rear. When
the firing is stopped be sure to turn on the safety-lock. Experience
during the Russo-Japanese War taught the Japanese the kneeling
position is the most suitable for horizontal firing. The following
method, to be conducted in daytime, may be employed in training the
soldier to hold his rifle parallel to the ground while firing in the
dark:--Have each soldier, kneeling, close his eyes and bring his rifle
to the position of aim, barrel parallel to the ground. With the rifle
in this position, let him open his eyes and examine it. Then have this
done by squad, by command. When they become proficient in this
movement, have them close their eyes and while the eyes are closed,
put up a target and have them practice horizontal firing, opening
their eyes each time after pulling the trigger and then examining the
position of the piece.

COLLECTIVE TRAINING

At first practice squads, then the platoons and later the company in
simple movements, such as squads right and left, right and left
oblique, etc., gradually leading up to more complicated ones in close
and extended order, such as right and left front into line, advancing
in platoon and squad columns, charging the enemy, etc. As far as
possible the movements should be executed by simple prearranged
signals from the unit commanders. The signals, which must not be
visible to the enemy, may be made with a white handkerchief or a white
flag, if the night be not too dark; with an electric flashlight, a
dark lantern or luminous disk. The light of the flashlight or lantern
must be screened, so it cannot be seen by the enemy. The following
signals are suggested:

To advance: Raise vertically the lantern or other object with which
the signal is made.

To halt: Lower and raise the object several times.

To lie down: Bring the object down near the ground.

To form squad columns: Move the object several times to the right and
left.

To form platoon columns: Describe several circles.

As skirmishers: Move the object front to rear several times.

=1102. Night Marches.= In acting as an advance guard to a column, the
company would send out a point a few yards ahead, which would be
followed by the rest of the company. Three or four scouts should be
sent out a hundred yards or so ahead of the point. They should advance
at a quick pace, keeping in the shadow on the side of the road, being
constantly on the alert, using their ears even more than their eyes.
They will halt to listen at crossroads and suspicious places, and move
on again when they hear the company approaching. Should the enemy be
discovered, one of the scouts will return to warn the advance
guard--the others will conceal themselves and watch. Under no
circumstances must the scouts ever fire, unless it be for the purpose
of warning the company and there is no other way of doing so. The
diagram on the opposite page is suggested as a good formation for a
company acting as advance guard at night. A company marching alone
would move in the same formation as when acting as advance guard,
except that it would protect its rear with a few scouts. Of course,
the nature of the country and proximity and activity of the enemy,
will determine the best formation to be used, but whatever the
formation may be, always remember to cover well your front, rear and
flanks, with scouts, whose distance away will vary with the light and
nature of the country. _Don't forget that protection in rear is very
important._

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

The men must be warned against firing, smoking, talking, striking
matches, making noise, etc. They should also be informed of the object
in view, direction of the enemy, etc.

In night marches the rests should not exceed five minutes; otherwise,
many men will fall asleep.

OUTPOSTS

Careful training in outpost duty at night is very harassing, but, in
view of its importance, should not be neglected. This instruction
should be given with the greatest thoroughness, strictness and
attention to detail.

=1103. Sentries Challenging.= In challenging sentries must be careful
to avoid any noise that would disclose their position. In fact,
challenging by voice should be reduced to a minimum by arranging a
system of signals by which the officers of the day, patrols, etc., can
be recognized. The following signals, any one of which may be decided
upon, which would be made first by the sentry and then answered by the
approaching party, are suggested: Clap the hands together twice;
strike the ground twice with the butt of the rifle; strike the butt of
the rifle twice with the hand; whistle softly twice. The replying
signal would be the same as the sentry's signal, except that in case
of the use of the butt of the rifle, an officer would reply by
striking twice on his revolver holster. After repeating the signal
once, if it is not answered, the sentry will challenge with the voice,
but no louder than is necessary. In case of a patrol only one man will
advance to be recognized after the signal has been answered. The
sentry must always allow persons to approach fairly near before
challenging.

=1104. Sentries Firing.= Anyone who has been through a campaign knows
how nervous green sentries are, and how quick they are about firing.
During the beginning of the Philippine Campaign the author heard of
several cases where sentries fired on fire-flies several hundred
yards away. Never fire unless it be absolutely necessary to give an
alarm, or unless you can clearly distinguish the enemy and are fairly
certain of hitting him. In the French Army in Algeria, there is a rule
that any sentry who fires at night must produce a corpse, or be able
to show by blood marks that he hit the person fired at. If he can do
neither, he is punished for giving a false alarm.

=1105. Marking of Route from Outguards to Supports.= The route from
the support to the outguards, and from pickets to their sentries,
should, if necessary, be clearly marked with scraps of paper, green
sticks with the bark peeled off, or in any other suitable way.

=1106. Readiness for Action.= The supports should always be ready for
action. The men must sleep with their rifles beside them and in such
places that they will be able to fall in promptly in case of attack.
Some men have a way of sleeping with their blankets over their heads.
This should not be allowed--the ears must always be uncovered. The
commander, or the second in command, with several men, should remain
awake. When the commander lies down he should do so near the sentry,
which is always posted over the support.

GENERAL

=1107. Connections.= It is of the greatest importance that proper
connection be maintained between the different parts of a command
engaged in night operations. It is astonishing with what facility
units go astray and how difficult it is for them to find their way
back where they belong.

=1108. Preparation.= It matters not what the nature of the night
operation may be, the most careful preparation is necessary. Success
often depends upon the care and thoroughness with which the plans are
made.

All possible eventualities should be thought of and provided for as
far as praticable. The first thing to do is to get as much information
as possible about the ground to be covered and the position of the
enemy, and care must be taken to see that the information is accurate.
Reconnaissance must be made by night as well as by day; for, ground
looks very different at night from what it does during the day.

CHAPTER IX

FIELD ENGINEERING

=1109.= The following, from the =Engineer Field Manual=, together with
the elements of field engineering covered in Chapter XI, on
=Obstacles=, will give the company officer a good, working knowledge
of those parts of field engineering for which he is most likely to
have need.

Bridges

=1111. Dimensions and guard rail.= A roadway 9 ft. wide in the clear
should be provided to pass infantry in fours, cavalry two abreast, and
military wagons in one direction; a width of 6 ft. will suffice for
infantry in column of twos, cavalry in single file, and field guns
passed over by hand.

The _clear width_ of roadway of an ordinary highway bridge should not
be less than 12 ft. for single track, or 20 ft. for double track.

The _clear head room_ in ordinary military bridges should not be less
than 9 ft. for wagons and cavalry; for highway bridges not less than
14 ft.

Ramps at the ends of a bridge, if intended for artillery, should not
be steeper than 1 on 7. For animals, slopes steeper than 1 on 10 are
inconvenient.

If the bridges are high, hand rails should be provided. A single rope
may suffice, or it may have brush placed upon it to form a screen.

A guard rail should be provided along each side of the roadway, near
the ends of the flooring planks. In hasty bridges it may be secured by
a lashing or lashings through the planking to the stringer underneath.
Otherwise it may be fastened with spikes or bolts.

=1112. Spar bridges.=--This name is applied to bridges built of round
timbers lashed together. Intermediate points of support are provided
by inclined frames acting as struts to transmit weight from the middle
of the bridge to the banks. The single-lock and double-lock bridges
with two and three spans of 15 ft., respectively, are the ones of most
utility.

The first step in constructing a spar bridge is to measure the gap to
be bridged and select the position of the footings on either bank.
Determine the distance from each footing to the middle point of the
roadway if a single-lock, or the two corresponding points of a
double-lock bridge. Next determine and mark on each spar except the
diagonals the places where other spars cross it. The marking may be
done with chalk, or with an ax. If possible a convenient notation
should be adopted. As, for example, in marking with chalk, a ring
around the spar where the edge of the crossing spar will come, and a
diagonal cross on the part which will be hidden by the crossing spar.

A simple way to determine the length of spars is the following: Take
two small lines somewhat longer than the width of the gap, double each
and lash the bights together. Stretch them tightly across the gap so
that the lashing comes at the middle as at _A_, Fig. 8. Release one
end of each and stretch it to the footing on the same side as
indicated by the dotted lines. Mark each line at the footing _C_ or
_C'_, and at the position chosen for the abutment sill, _B_ or _B'_.
Cut the lashing and take each piece of rope to its own side. The
distances _AB_ and _AB'_ are the lengths between the transoms, and
with 2 ft. added give the length of road bearers required. The
distances _AC_ and _AC'_ are the lengths of struts from butt to top of
transom, and with 3 ft added, give the total length of spars required.

For a double lock bridge, a piece of rope of a length equal to the
length of the middle bay replaces the lashing. If the banks are not
parallel, a measurement should be taken on each side of the bridge.

If desired, a section of the gap may be laid down on the ground in
full size and the lengths of spars determined by laying them in place.
This method, though given as standard by all authorities, requires
more time and more handling of material than the other and gives no
better results.

The construction of a frame is shown in Fig. 1, and the system of
marking in Fig. 2. The arrangement of frames to form a single lock
bridge is shown in Figs. 3 and 4, and a double lock bridge in Fig 6.

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

[Illustration: Fig. 6]

[Illustration: Fig. 7]

[Illustration: Fig. 8]

[Illustration: Fig. 9]

=1113. Construction of single-lock bridges=, Figs. 3, 4, and
5.--Suitable for spans of 30 ft. or less. The two frames lock together
at the center of the span; their slope must not be more than 4 on 7.
The bridge can be erected by two or three noncommissioned officers
and 20 men, one-half on each side of the gap. Heavy spars require more
men.

The footings at _A_ and _B_ must be firm, horizontal if possible, and
at right angles to the axis of the bridge. In a masonry pier they may
be cut out. In firm soil a simple trench will suffice. In yielding
soil a plank or sill must be laid in the trench. The frames are made
of such length as to give a slight camber to the bridge, which may be
increased to allow for probable settlement of the footings. The inside
dimension of one frame is made slightly greater than the outside
dimension of the other, so that one frame may fall inside of the other
when hauled into position. For a 9 ft. roadway the standards of the
narrow (inside) frame should be 9 ft. 6 ins. apart at the transom and
10 ft. 6 ins. at the ledger, in the clear, and the other (outside)
frame 1 ft. 6 ins. wider throughout.

A frame is constructed on each bank. The standards are laid on the
ground in prolongation of the bridge, butts toward the bank. The
ledgers are lashed on _above_ and the transoms _beneath_ the standards
at the positions marked. The diagonal braces are lashed to the
standards, two butts and one tip above the latter, and to each other.
Before the braces are lashed the frame must be square by checking the
measurements of the diagonals.

If necessary, pickets for the foot and guy ropes are driven, the
former about 2 paces from the bank and 4 paces on each side of the
axis of the bridge; the latter about 20 paces from the bank and 10
paces on each side of the axis. The foot ropes, _CC_, Fig. 5, are
secured by timber hitches to the butts of the standards and the back
and fore guys, _DD_ and _EE_, to the tips the fore guys are passed
across to the opposite bank. The guys of the _narrow_ frame should be
_inside_ the guys and standards of the wide frame.

The frames are put into position one after the other, or
simultaneously if there are enough men. A man is told off to each foot
rope and one to each back guy to slack off as required, two turns
being taken with each of these ropes around their respective pickets.
The other men raise the frame and launch it forward, assisted by the
men at the fore guys, until the frame is balanced on the edge of the
bank. The frame is then tilted until the butts rest on the footing, by
slacking off the foot ropes and hauling on the fore guys, Fig. 5.
After the head of the frame has been hauled over beyond the
perpendicular, it is lowered nearly into its final position by
slacking off the back guys. When the two frames are in this position
opposite each other, the narrow frame is further lowered until its
standards rest upon the transom of the other. The wider (outer) frame
is then lowered until the two lock into each other, the standards of
each resting upon the transom of the other.

The center or fork transom, Figs. 3 and 4, is then passed from shore
and placed in the fork between the two frames. This forms the central
support to receive a floor system of two bays, built as already
described.

The estimated time for construction of such a bridge is about one hour
if the material is available and in position on both sides of the
stream. The construction of the roadway requires about twenty minutes;
forming footings in masonry about one hour.

=1114. Construction of double-lock bridge=, Fig. 6.--Suitable for
spans not exceeding 45 ft., and consisting of two inclined frames
which lock into a connecting horizontal frame of two or more distance
pieces, with cross transoms, dividing the gap to be bridged into three
equal bays of about 15 ft. The force required is two or three
noncommissioned officers and 25 to 50 men; the time for construction,
except roadway, about two and one-half hours; extra time to be allowed
for difficult footings.

The width of gap is measured, the position of footings determined, and
the length of standards from butt to transom determined and marked as
before.

The inclined frames in this case are built of equal widths, launched
as before, and held by guys just above their final position. Two
stringers are launched out from each bank to the main transom. The
distance pieces, Fig. 6, are put into position inside the standards,
using tackle if necessary, and the road transoms are placed and lashed
to the distance pieces at the places marked. Both frames are now
lowered until they jam.

=1115. Roadway of spar bridge.=--For infantry in fours crowded the
transoms should have a diam. of not less than 9 ins. for a span of 15
ft. Five stringers 2 ft. 3 ins. c. to c., and 6 ins. diam. at the tip
will suffice. If the sticks vary in size, the larger ones should be
notched down on the transom so as to bring the tops in the same plane.
The stringers should be long enough to overlap the transoms, and
should be lashed together at each tip. The floor is held down by side
rails over the outside stringers and lashed to them. If lumber can not
be obtained, a floor may be made, of small spars, the interstices
filled with brush, and the whole covered with loam or clay; Figs. 7
and 9.

Corduroy Roads

=1116. Corduroying= is done by laying logs crosswise of the road and
touching each other. The result will be better if the logs are nearly
of the same size. The butts and tips should alternate. If the logs are
large the spaces may be filled with smaller poles. The bottom tier of
logs should be evenly bedded and should have a firm bearing at the
ends and not ride on the middle. The filling poles, if used, should be
cut and trimmed to lie close, packing them about the ends if
necessary. If the soil is only moderately soft the logs need be no
longer than the width of the road. In soft marsh it may be necessary
to make them longer.

The logs may be utilized as the wearing surface. In fact this is
usually the case. They make a rough surface, uncomfortable for
passengers and hard on wagons and loads, but the resistance to
traction is much less than would be expected, and the roughness and
slightly yielding surface make excellent footing for animals. Surface
corduroy is perishable and can last but a short time. In marshes,
where the logs can be placed below the ground-water level, they are
preserved from decay, and if any suitable material can be found, to
put a thin embankment over them, a good permanent road may be made.

Any tough, fibrous material may be used to temporarily harden the
surface of a road. Hay or straw, tall weeds, corn and cane stalks
have been used to good advantage. Such materials should be laid with
the fibers crosswise of the road, and covered with a thin layer of
earth, thrown on from the sides; except in sand, when it is better to
dig a shallow trench across the road, fill it with the material and
then dig another trench just in front of and in contact with the first
and throw the sand from it back onto the material in the first trench,
etc.

Brush work

=1117. A fascine= is a cylindrical bundle of brush, closely bound. The
usual length is 18 ft. and the diam. 9 ins. when compressed. Lengths
of 9 and 6 ft., which are sometimes used, are most conveniently
obtained by sawing a standard fascine into 2 or 3 pieces. The weight
of a fascine of partially seasoned material will average 140 lbs.

Fascines are made in a =cradle= which consists of five trestles. A
=trestle= is made of two sticks about 6-1/2 ft. long and 3 ins. in
diam, driven into the ground and lashed at the intersection as shown
in Fig. 10. In making a cradle, plant the end trestles 16 ft. apart
and parallel. Stretch a line from one to the other over the
intersection, place the others 4 ft. apart and lash them so that each
intersection comes fairly to the line.

=To build a fascine=, straight pieces of brush, 1 or 2 ins. at the
butt, are laid on, the butts projecting at the end 1 ft. beyond the
trestle. Leaves should be stripped and unruly branches cut off, or
partially cut through, so that they will lie close. The larger
straighter brush should be laid on the outside, butts alternating in
direction, and smaller stuff in the center. The general object is to
so dispose the brush as to make the fascine of uniform size, strength,
and stiffness from end to end.

When the cradle is nearly filled, the fascine is compressed or
=choked= by the =fascine choker=, Fig. 11, which consists of 2 bars 4
ft. long, joined at 18 ins. from the ends by a chain 4 ft. long. The
chain is marked at 14 ins. each way from the middle by inserting a
ring or special link. To use, two men standing on opposite sides pass
the chain under the brush, place the short ends of the handles on top
and pass the bars, short end first, across to each other. They then
bear down on the long ends until the marks on the chain come together.
Chokers may be improvised from sticks and rope or wire.

=Binding= will be done with a double turn of wire or tarred rope. It
should be done in 12 places, 18 ins. apart, the end binders 3 ins.
outside the end trestles. To bind a fascine will require 66 ft. of
wire.

Improvised binders may be made from rods of live brush, hickory or
hazel is the best. Place the butt under the foot and twist the rod to
partially separate the fibers and make it flexible. A rod so prepared
is called a =withe=. To use a withe, make a half turn and twist at the
smaller end, Fig. 12; pass the withe around the brush and the large
end through the eye. Draw taut and double the large end back, taking 2
half-hitches over its own standing part, Fig. 13.

When the fascine is choked and bound, saw the ends off square, 9 ins.
outside the end binders. After a cradle is made, 4 men can make 1
fascine per hour, with wire binding. Withes require 1 man more.

=A fascine revetment= is made by placing the fascines as shown in Fig.
14. The use of headers and anchors is absolutely necessary in loose
soils only, but they greatly strengthen the revetment in any case. A
fascine revetment =must always be crowned= with sods or bags.

[Illustration: Fig. 10]

[Illustration: Fig. 11]

[Illustration: Fig. 12]

[Illustration: Fig. 13]

[Illustration: Fig. 14]

[Illustration: Fig. 15]

=1118.= In all brush weaving the following terms have been adopted and
are convenient to use:

=Randing.=--Weaving a single rod in and out between pickets.

=Slewing.=--Weaving two or more rods together in the same way.

=Pairing.=--Carrying two rods together, crossing each other in and out
at each picket.

=Wattling.=--A general term applied to the woven part of brush
construction.

=1119. A hurdle= is a basket work made of brushwood. If made in
pieces, the usual size is 2 ft. 9 ins. by 6 ft., though the width may
be varied so that it will cover the desired height of slope.

A hurdle is made by describing on the ground an arc of a circle of 8
ft. radius and on the arc driving 10 pickets, 8 ins. apart, covering 6
ft. out to out, Fig. 15. Brush is then woven in and out and well
compacted. The concave side of a hurdle should be placed next the
earth. It wraps less than if made flat.

=In weaving the hurdle=, begin randing at the middle space at the
bottom. Reaching the end, twist the rod as described for a withe, but
at one point only, bend it around the end picket and work back. Start
a second rod before the first one is quite out, slewing the two for a
short distance. Hammer the wattling down snug on the pickets with a
block of wood and continue until the top is reached. It improves the
hurdle to finish the edges with two selected rods paired, Fig. 16. A
pairing may be introduced in the middle, if desired, to give the
hurdle extra endurance if it is to be used as a pavement or floor. If
the hurdle is not to be used at once, or if it is to be transported,
it must be sewed. The sewing is done with wire, twine, or withes at
each end and in the middle, with stitches about 6 ins. long, as shown
in Fig. 16. About 40 ft. of wire is required to sew one hurdle. No. 14
is about the right size, and a coil of 100 lbs. will sew 40 hurdles.
Three men should make a hurdle in 2 hours, 2 wattling and the third
preparing the rods.

=1120. Continuous hurdle.=--If conditions permit the revetment to be
built in place, the hurdle is made continuous for considerable
lengths. The pickets may be larger; they are driven farther apart, 12
or 18 ins., and the brush may be heavier. The construction is more
rapid. The pickets are driven with a little more slant than is
intended and must be anchored to the parapet. A line of poles with
wire attached at intervals of 2 or 3 pickets will answer. The wires
should be made fast to the pickets after the wattling is done. They
will interfere with the wearing if fastened sooner. Two men should
make 4 yds. of continuous hurdle of ordinary height in one hour.

=1121. Brush revetment.=--Pickets may be set as above described and
the brush laid inside of them without weaving, being held in place by
bringing the earth up with it. In this case the anchors must be
fastened before the brush laying begins. The wires are not much in the
way in this operation.

=1122. Gabion making.--A gabion= is a cylindrical basket with open
ends, made of brush woven on pickets or stakes as described for
hurdles. The usual size is 2 ft. outside diam. and 2 ft. 9 ins. height
of wattling. On account of the sharp curvature somewhat better brush
is required for gabions than will do for hurdles.

=The gabion form=, Fig. 17, is of wood, 21 ins. diam., with
equidistant notches around the circumference, equal in number to the
number of pickets to be used, usually 8 to 14, less if the brush is
large and stiff, more if it is small and pliable. The notches should
be of such depth that the pickets will project to 1 in. outside the
circle. The pickets should be 1-1/4 to 1-3/4 ins. diam., 3 ft. 6 ins.
long and sharpened, half at the small and half at the large end.

=To make a gabion=, the form is placed on the ground, level or nearly
so, and the pickets are driven vertically in the notches, large and
small ends down, alternately. The form is then raised a foot and held
by placing a lashing around outside the pickets, tightened with a rack
stick, Fig. 18. The wattling is randed or slewed from the form up. The
form is then dropped down, the gabion inverted and the wattling
completed. If the brush is small, uniform, and pliable, pairing will
make a better wattling than randing. If not for immediate use, the
gabion must be sewed as described for hurdles, the same quantity of
wire being required.

[Illustration: Fig. 16]

[Illustration: Fig. 17]

[Illustration: Fig. 18]

[Illustration: Fig. 19]

[Illustration: Fig. 20]

[Illustration: Fig. 21]

The gabion, when wattled and sewed, is completed by cutting off the
tops of the pickets 1 in. from the web, the bottom 3 ins., the latter
sharpened after cutting, and driving a carrying picket through the
middle of its length and a little on side of the axis. See that the
middle of this picket is smooth. Three men should make a gabion in an
hour.

Gabions may be made without the forms, but the work is slower and not
so good. The circle is struck on the ground and the pickets driven at
the proper points. The weaving is done from the ground up and the
entire time of one man is required to keep the pickets in proper
position.

=If brush is scarce=, gabions may be made with 6 ins. of wattling at
each end, the middle left open. In filling, the open part may be lined
with straw, grass, brush cuttings, or grain sacks, to keep the earth
from running out.

=1123. Gabion revetment.=--The use of gabions in revetments is
illustrated in Fig. 20. If more than two tiers are used, the
separating fascines should be anchored back. Gabion revetments should
be crowned with sods or bags.

The advantages of the gabion revetment are very great. It can be put
in place without extra labor and faster and with less exposure than
any other. It is self-supporting and gives cover from view and partial
cover from fire quicker than any other form.

Several forms of gabions of other material than brush have been used.
Sheet iron and iron and paper hoops are some of them. The iron
splinters badly, is heavy, and has not given satisfaction. If any
special materials are supplied the method of using them will, in view
of the foregoing explanation, be obvious.

=1124. Timber or pole revetment.=--Poles too large for use in any
other way may be cut to length and stood on end to form a revetment.
The lower ends should be in a small trench and have a waling piece in
front of them. There must also be a waling piece or cap at or near the
top, anchored back. Fig. 21 shows this form.

=1125. Miscellaneous revetments.=--Any receptacles for earth which
will make a stable, compact pile, as =boxes=, =baskets=, =oil or other
cans=, may be used for a revetment. =Barrels= may be used for gabions.
=Canvas= stretched behind pickets is well thought of in a foreign
service. If the soil will make =adobe=, or sun-dried bricks, an
excellent revetment may be made of them, but it will not stand wet
weather.

Knots

=1126.= =Square= or =reef knot=, Fig. 22, commonly used for joining
two ropes of the same size. The standing and running parts of each
rope must pass through the loop of the other in the same direction, i.
e., from above down ward or vice versa; otherwise a _granny_, is made,
which is a useless knot that will not hold. The reef knot can be upset
by taking one end of the rope and its standing part and pulling them
in opposite directions. With dry rope a reef knot is as strong as the
rope; with wet rope it slips before the rope breaks, while a double
sheet bend is found to hold.

[Illustration: Fig. 22

_Square or Reef_]

=1127. Two half hitches=, Fig. 23, especially useful for belaying, or
making fast the end of a rope round its own standing part. The end may
be lashed down or seized to the standing part with a piece of spun
yarn; this adds to its security and prevents slipping.

This knot should never be used for hoisting a spar.

[Illustration: Fig. 23

_Two half hitches_]

=1128. Clove hitch=, Fig. 24, generally used for fastening a rope at
right angles to a spar or at the commencement of a lashing. If the end
of the spar is free, the hitch is made by first forming two loops, as
in Fig. 26, placing the right-hand loop over the other one and
slipping the double loop (Fig. 27) over the end of the spar. If this
can not be done, pass the end of the rope round the spar, bring it up
to the right of the standing part, cross over the latter, make
another turn round the spar, and bring up the end between the spar,
the last turn, and the standing part, Fig. 25. When used for securing
guys to sheer legs, etc., the knot should be made with a long end,
which is formed into two half hitches round the standing part and
secured to it with spun yarn.

[Illustration: Fig. 24

_Clove hitch_]

[Illustration: Fig. 25]

[Illustration: Fig. 26]

[Illustration: Fig. 27]

=1129. Timber hitch=, Fig. 28, used for hauling and lifting spars. It
can easily be loosed when the strain is taken off, but will not slip
under a pull. When used for hauling spars, a half hitch is added near
the end of the spar, Fig. 29.

[Illustration: Fig. 28

_Timber hitch_]

[Illustration: Fig. 29

_Timber hitch and half hitch_]

=1130. Bowline=, Fig. 30, forms a loop that will not slip. Make loop
with the standing part of the rope underneath, pass the end from below
through the loop, over the part round the standing part of the rope,
and then down through the loop _c_. The length of bight depends upon
the purpose for which the knot is required.

[Illustration: Fig. 30

_Bowline_]

=1131. Bowline on a bight=, Fig. 31. The first part is made like the
above, with the double part of a rope; then the bight _a_ is pulled
through sufficiently to allow it to be bent past _d_ and come up in
the position shown. It makes a more comfortable sling for a man than a
single bight.

[Illustration: Fig. 31

_Bowline on a Bight_]

=1132. Sheep shank=, Fig. 32, used for shortening a rope or to pass by
a weak spot; a half hitch is taken with the standing parts around the
bights.

[Illustration: Fig. 32

_Sheep shank_]

=1133. Short splice.= To make a _short splice_, Figs. 33, 34, 35,
unlay the strands of each rope for a convenient length. Bring the rope
ends together so that each strand of one rope lies between the two
consecutive strands of the other rope. Draw the strands of the first
rope along the second and grasp with one hand. Then work a free strand
of the second rope over the nearest strand of the first rope and under
the second strand, working in a direction opposite to the twist of the
rope. The same operation applied to all the strands will give the
result shown by Fig. 34. The splicing may be continued in the same
manner to any extent (Fig. 35) and the free ends of the strands may be
cut off when desired. The splice may be neatly tapered by cutting out
a few fibers from each strand each time it is passed through the rope.
Rolling under a board or the foot will make the splice compact.

[Illustration: Fig. 33

_Short splice_]

[Illustration: Fig. 34]

[Illustration: Fig. 35]

=1134. Long splice= (Figs. 36, 37).--Unlay the strands of each rope
for a convenient length and bring together as for a short splice.
Unlay to any desired length a strand, _d_, of one rope, laying in its
place the nearest strand, _a_, of the other rope. Repeat the operation
in the opposite direction with two other strands, _c_ and _f_. Fig. 37
shows strands _c_ and _f_ secured by tying together. Strands b and e
are shown secured by unlaying half of each for a suitable length and
laying half of the other in place of the unlayed portions, the loose
ends being passed through the rope. This splice is used when the rope
is to run through a block. The diameter of the rope is not enlarged at
the splice. The ends of the strands should not be trimmed off close
until the splice has been thoroughly stretched by work.

[Illustration: Fig. 36

_Long splice_]

[Illustration: Fig. 37]

=1135. Eye splice= (Figs. 38, 39, 40, 41).--Unlay a convenient length
of rope. Pass one loose strand, _a_, under one strand of the rope, as
shown in fig. 38, forming an eye of the proper size. Pass a second
loose strand, _b_, under the strand of the rope next to the strand
which secures _a_, Fig. 39. Pass the third strand, _c_, under the
strand next to that which secures _b_, fig. 40. Draw all taut and
continue and complete as for a short splice.

[Illustration: Fig. 38

_Eye splice_]

[Illustration: Fig. 39]

[Illustration: Fig. 40]

[Illustration: Fig. 41]

Lashings

=1136. To lash a transom to an upright spar=, Fig. 42, transom in
front of upright.--A clove hitch is made round the upright a few
inches below the transom. The lashing is brought under the transom, up
in front of it, horizontally behind the upright, down in front of the
transom, and back behind the upright at the level of the bottom of the
transom and above the clove hitch. The following turns are kept
outside the previous ones on one spar and inside on the other, not
riding over the turns already made. Four turns or more are required. A
couple of frapping turns are then taken between the spars, around the
lashing, and the lashing is finished off either round one of the spars
or any part of the lashing through which the rope can be passed. The
final clove hitch should never be made around the spar on the side
toward which the stress is to come, as it may jam and be difficult to
remove. The lashing must be well beaten with handspike or pick handle
to tighten it up. This is called a square shears are laid alongside of
each other with their butts on the ground, lashing.

[Illustration: Fig. 42]

=1137. Lashing for a pair of shears=, Fig. 43.--The two spars for the
points below where the lashing is to be resting on a skid. A clove
hitch is made round one spar and the lashing taken loosely eight or
nine times about the two spars above it without riding. A couple of
frapping turns are then taken between the spars and the lashing is
finished off with a clove hitch above the turns on one of the spars.
The butts of the spars are then opened out and a sling passed over the
fork, to which the block is hooked or lashed, and fore and back guys
are made fast with clove hitches to the bottom and top spars,
respectively, just above the each spar the distance from the butt to
the center of the lashing. Lay two of the spars parallel to each other
with an interval a little greater fork, Fig. 44.

[Illustration: Fig. 43]

[Illustration: Fig. 44]

=1138. To lash three spars together as for a gin or tripod.=--Mark on
than the diameter. Rest their tips on a skid and lay the third spar
between them with its butt in the opposite direction so that the marks
on the three spars will be in line. Make a clove hitch on one of the
outer spars below the lashing and take eight or nine loose turns
around the three, as shown in Fig. 45. Take a couple of frapping turns
between each pair of spars in succession and finish with a clove hitch
on the central spar above the lashing. Pass a sling over the lashing
and the tripod is ready for raising.

[Illustration: Fig. 45]

=1139. Holdfasts.=--To prepare a fastening in the ground for the
attachment of guys or purchases, stout pickets are driven into the
ground one behind the other, in the line of pull. The head of each
picket except the last is secured by a lashing to the foot of the
picket next behind, Fig. 46. The lashings are tightened by rack
sticks, the points of which are driven into the ground to hold them in
position. The distance between the stakes should be several times the
height of the stake above the ground.

[Illustration: Fig. 46]

Another form requiring more labor but having much greater strength is
called a "_deadman_," and consists of a log laid in a transverse
trench with an inclined trench intersecting it at its middle point.
The cable is passed down the inclined trench, takes several round
turns on the log, and is fastened to it by half hitches and marlin
stopping, Figs. 47, 48, 49. If the cable is to lead horizontally or
inclined downward, it should pass over a log at the outlet of the
inclined trench, Fig. 48. If the cable is to lead upward, this log is
not necessary, but the anchor log must be buried deeper.

[Illustration: Fig. 47]

[Illustration: Fig. 48]

[Illustration: Fig. 49]

CHAPTER X

FIELD FORTIFICATIONS

=1140. Object.= The object of field fortifications is two-fold.

1. To increase the fighting power of troops by enabling the soldier to
use his weapons with the greatest possible effect.

2. To protect the soldier against the enemy's fire.

=1141. How these objects are accomplished.=

These objects are accomplished:

1. By means of shelters--trenches, redoubts, splinterproofs, etc.,
which protect the soldier from the enemy's fire.

2. By means of obstacles--wire entanglements, abatis, pits, etc.,
which delay the advance of the enemy.

=1142. Classification.= Field fortifications are usually divided into
three classes, =hasty intrenchments=, =deliberate intrenchments= and
=siege works=.

=Nomenclature of the Trench.= The following illustration shows the
names of the various parts of the trench.

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

=1143. Hasty intrenchments= include trenches dug by troops upon the
battlefield to increase their fighting power. They are usually
constructed in the presence of the enemy and in haste and embrace
three forms viz:--the =lying trench=, the =kneeling trench=, and the
=standing trench=.

=1144. Lying trench.= (Fig. 2.) This trench gives cover to a man lying
down. When intrenching under fire the rifle trench can be constructed
by a man lying down. He can mask himself from view in about 10 to 12
minutes and can complete the trench in 40 to 45 minutes. A good method
is to dig a trench 18 inches wide back to his knees, roll into it and
dig 12 inches wide alongside of it and down to the feet, then roll
into the second cut and extend the first one back. Conditions may
require men to work in pairs, one firing while the other uses his
intrenching tool. Duties are exchanged from time to time until the
trench is completed.

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

[Illustration: Fig. 2a

_Intrenching under fire_]

The height of the parapet should not exceed 1 foot. This trench
affords limited protection against rifle fire and less against
shrapnel.

=1145. Kneeling trench.= (Fig. 3.) Time permitting the lying trench
may be enlarged and deepened until the kneeling trench has been
constructed. The width of the bottom should be 2-1/2 feet--preferably
3 feet--and the relief (distance from bottom of trench to top of
parapet) is 3 feet--the proper height for firing over in a kneeling
position.

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

=1146. Standing trench= (Fig. 4) has a bottom width of 3 to 3-1/2 feet
and a relief of 4-1/2 feet which is the proper firing height for men
of average stature. As this trench does not give complete cover to men
standing in it a passage way should be constructed in rear of it not
less than 6 feet below the interior crest. This forms the complete
trench (Fig. 5). Figures 6-7-8 show simple standing trenches used in
the European War.

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

[Illustration: Fig. 6

Simple Standing Trench, Parapet Suppressed]

[Illustration: Fig. 7

Simple Standing Trench, Rocky Ground]

[Illustration: Fig. 8

Narrow Firing Trench with Parados]

=1147. Deliberate intrenchments= comprise trenches and works
constructed by troops not in line of battle and are usually intended
to enable a small force to resist a much larger one. It frequently
happens that hasty intrenchments are developed into deliberate
intrenchments and from this stage pass into the domain of siege works.

=1148. Fire trenches=,--the trenches which shelter the firing
line,--are of different types. No fixed type can be prescribed. The
type must be selected with due regard to the terrain, enemy, time,
tools, soil, etc., but all should conform to the requirements of a
good field of fire, and protection for the troops behind a vertical
wall, preferably with some head or over head cover.

The simplest form of fire trench is deep and narrow and has a flat
concealed parapet (Fig. 9). When time will permit the simple trench
should be planned with a view to developing it into a more complete
form (Figs. 10 and 11). In all trenches as soon as practicable a
passage way--2 feet wide at the bottom--should be provided, in rear of
the firing step, for the men carrying supplies, ammunition, etc., and
for the removal of the wounded.

[Illustration: Fig. 9]

[Illustration: Fig. 10]

[Illustration: Fig. 11]

When the excavated earth is easily removed a fire trench without
parapet may be the one best suited to the soil and other conditions
affecting the conditions of profile (Fig. 12). The enemy's infantry as
well as artillery will generally have great difficulty in seeing this
trench. Fig. 13 shows a squad trench. Fig. 14 shows a fire trench
provided with protection against shrapnel. This trench is used in the
European War.

[Illustration: Fig. 12]

[Illustration: Fig. 13]

[Illustration: Fig. 14

Protection against Shrapnel]

In the European War the aim in constructing fire trenches seems to be
to minimize and localize artillery effect as far as possible. The main
excavation along the front is a continuous, very deep, communication,
not in itself prepared for active defense. The actual firing is done
from banquettes or firing steps just to the front of the passage or
from trenches dug as far as 5 or 10 feet in front of the main
excavation and reached by short passages. Figs 15 and 16 show the type
of this construction. Fig. 17 shows a fire trench with parades and
shelter.

[Illustration: Fig. 15

Two Methods for Communication Trenches in rear of Firing Trenches]

[Illustration: Fig. 16

Communication Trenches in rear of Firing Trenches

Recessed and Traversed Firing Trench]

[Illustration: Fig. 17

Trench Shelter]

=1149. Traverses.= Fire trenches are divided into sections or bays by
means of traverses which intercept side or enfilade fire and limit the
effect of shells, bombs or grenades, which burst inside of the trench.
The traverses should be wide enough to screen the full width of the
trench with a little to spare. The thickness of the traverse varies
from 3 to 6 feet or more. Six feet is the dimension generally found in
the traverses in the trenches on the European battle fronts.

=1150. Trench recesses; sortie steps.= It will be noted that in some
of the diagrams of the trenches now being used in the European War the
berm has been eliminated entirely. The object being to bring the firer
closer to the vertical wall thus giving him better protection from
shrapnel fire. There have also been added to the trench, recesses for
hand grenades. These recesses are similar to recesses dug in the front
wall of the trench for ammunition. One form of recess is shown in
(Fig. 18). In order to provide facilities for rapidly mounting from
the trench to charge, sortie steps and stakes have been provided in
some trenches as shown in (Fig. 16).

[Illustration: Fig. 18

_Store Recesses for Water, Hand-Grenades, Reserve Ammunition, Machine
Guns, Range Finders, Blankets, etc._ (From _Field
Entrenchments_--Solano.)]

=1151. Parados.= Instead of shrapnel, explosive shell is most
frequently used in the European War. This necessitates the addition of
a parados to the fire trench to protect against the back blast of high
explosives. This is shown in (Figs. 8 and 17).

An interesting development in cover for the firing line is shown in
dugouts constructed in the fire trenches in the European war. These
dugouts are deep underground and shelter from 3 to 8 men each (Fig.
19). These dugouts will be discussed more in length under cover
trenches.

[Illustration: Fig. 19]

=1152. Head cover= is the term applied to any horizontal cover which
may be provided above the plane of fire. It is obtained by notching or
loop-holing the top of the parapet so that the bottoms of the notches
or loopholes are in the desired plane of fire. The extra height of
parapet may be 12 to 18 inches and the loopholes may be 3 to 3-1/2
feet center to center.

Head cover is of limited utility. It increases the visibility of the
parapet and restricts the field of fire. At close range the loopholes
serve as aiming points to steady the enemy's fire and may do more harm
than good at longer ranges. This is especially the case if the enemy
can see any light through the loophole. He waits for the light to be
obscured, when he fires, knowing there is a man's head behind the
loophole. A background must be provided or a removable screen arranged
so that there will be no difference in the appearance of the loophole
whether a man is looking through it or not. Head cover is advantageous
only when the conditions of the foreground are such that the enemy can
not get close up.

=1153. Notches and loopholes=, Figs. 20-22, are alike in all respects,
except that the latter have a roof or top and the former have not. The
bottom, also called =floor= or =sole=, is a part of the original
superior slope. The sides, sometimes called =cheeks=, are vertical or
nearly so. The plan depends upon local conditions. There is always a
narrow part, called the =throat=, which is just large enough to take
the rifle and permit sighting. From the throat the sides diverge at an
angle, called the =splay=, which depends upon the field of fire
necessary.

[Illustration: Fig. 20]

[Illustration: Fig. 21]

[Illustration: Fig. 22]

The position of the throat may vary. If on the outside, it is less
conspicuous but more easily obstructed by injury to the parapet and
more difficult to use, since in changing aim laterally the man must
move around a pivot in the plane of the throat. If the material of
which the loophole is constructed presents hard surfaces, the throat
should be outside, notwithstanding the disadvantages of that position,
or else the sides must be stepped as in Fig. 22. In some cases it may
be best to adopt a compromise position and put the throat in the
middle, Fig. 22. Figs. 23 to 26 show details and dimensions of a
loophole of sand bags.

[Illustration: Fig. 23]

[Illustration: Fig. 24]

[Illustration: Fig. 25]

[Illustration: Fig. 26]

A serviceable form of loophole consists of a pyramidal box of plank
with a steel plate spiked across the small end and pierced for fire.
Fig. 27 shows a section of such a construction. It is commonly known
as the =hopper loophole=. The plate should be 3/8 in. thick, if of
special steel; or 1/2 in., if ordinary metal. Fig. 28 shows the
opening used by the Japanese in Manchuria and Fig. 29 that used by the
Russians.

[Illustration: Fig. 27]

[Illustration: Fig. 28]

[Illustration: Fig. 29]

The construction of a notch requires only the introduction of some
available rigid material to form the sides; by adding a cover the
notch becomes a loophole. Where the fire involves a wide lateral and
small vertical angle, loopholes may take the form of a long slit. Such
a form will result from laying logs or fascines lengthwise on the
parapet, supported at intervals by sods or other material, Fig. 31, or
small poles covered with earth may be used, Fig. 30.

[Illustration: Fig. 30]

[Illustration: Fig. 31]

=1154. Overhead cover.= This usually consists of a raised platform of
some kind covered with earth. It is frequently combined with
horizontal cover in a single structure, which protects the top and
exposed side. The supporting platform will almost always be of wood
and may vary from brushwood or light poles to heavy timbers and plank.
It is better, especially with brush or poles, to place a layer of
sods, grass down, or straw, or grain sacks over the platform before
putting on the earth, to prevent the latter from sifting through.

[Illustration: Fig. 32]

[Illustration: Fig. 33]

[Illustration: Fig. 34]

[Illustration: Fig. 35]

=The thickness of overhead cover= depends upon the class of fire
against which protection is desired, and is sometimes limited by the
vertical space available, since it must afford headroom beneath, and
generally should not project above the nearest natural or artificial
horizontal cover. For splinter proofs a layer of earth 6 to 8 ins.
thick on a support of brush or poles strong enough to hold it up will
suffice if the structure is horizontal. If the front is higher than
the rear, less thickness is necessary; if the rear is higher than the
front, more is required. For bombproofs a minimum thickness of 6 ins.
of timber and 3 ft. of earth is necessary against field and siege
guns, or 12 ins. timber and 6 ft. of earth against the howitzers and
mortars of a heavy siege train, not exceeding 6 inches in caliber.

In determining the area of overhead cover to be provided, allow 6 sq.
ft. per man for occupancy while on duty only, or 12 sq. ft. per man
for continuous occupancy not of long duration. For long occupation 18
to 20 sq. ft. per man should be provided.

It is not practicable to give complete cover to rifle positions that
will successfully withstand the heavy artillery of today. The use of
overhead cover is usually limited to that sufficient for protection
against rifle fire, machine gun fire, and shrapnel.

=1155. Cover trenches= are constructed to provide safe cover for the
supports or reinforcements of the fire trenches or to provide cooking
and resting facilities for the garrison of the neighboring fire
trenches. The important point in cover trenches is safety. They vary
in design from the simple rectangular trenches to elaborately
constructed trenches having overhead cover, kitchens, shelters,
latrines, dressing stations, etc. Cover trenches must not be mistaken
for a secondary position, they are cover for the firing line, supports
and reserves until they are required in the fire trenches. The cover
trench requires a depth of at least 6 feet to protect men standing.
Greater depths may be used when necessary. Fig. 36 is a section of an
open cover trench and Fig. 37 of a closed one. This section may be
used for a communicating trench. Fig. 38 shows a cover trench close to
a fire trench. The character of overhead cover for trenches is shown
in the diagrams under overhead cover. The distance of the cover
trenches varies with the situation. The experience of the European war
places the cover trenches from 15 to 50 yards in rear of the fire
trenches. These trenches furnish shelter for at least 2/3 of the
firing line and supports.

[Illustration: Fig. 36]

[Illustration: Fig. 37]

[Illustration: Fig. 38]

The reserves are furnished yet more elaborate shelter, with plenty of
room for the men to lie down and rest and when practicable, bathing
facilities are provided.

=1156. Dugouts.= An elaborate system of dugouts has developed along
the lines occupied by the troops in the European war. These dugouts
are located from 14 to 40 feet below the ground and are reached by
stairs in timbered passage ways. At the foot of the stairs a tunnel or
corridor runs forward and on either side or at the end, rooms have
been dug out varying in size. Most of these rooms have been timbered
and lined. Many are electrically lighted. In some of these underground
shelters, accommodations for several hundred men have been prepared
with all of the necessary facilities for making them comfortable. It
must be understood that such elaborate preparations can only be made
when troops face each other in trenches where operations have
developed into practically a siege.

=1157. Communicating trenches.= These trenches as the name implies are
for the purpose of providing safe communication between the cover and
fire trenches. They may be also constructed just in rear of a series
of fire trenches to provide a means of communication from one to the
other. Communicating trenches also extend to the rear of the cover
trenches and provide safe passage to fresh troops or supplies. These
trenches are usually laid out in zig zag or curved lines (Fig. 39), to
prevent enfilade fire from sweeping them. As a general rule excavated
earth is placed on both sides of the trench to afford protection, the
depth is usually from 6 to 7 feet. (Fig. 15) shows a typical
communicating trench.

[Illustration: Fig. 39

_Typical Passage Trench from Supports to Firing Line._

(From _Field Entrenchments_--Solano)]

=1158. Lookouts.= To enable the garrison of a trench to get the
greatest amount of comfort and rest, a _lookout_ should be constructed
and a sentinel stationed therein.

The simplest form would consist of two sandbags placed on the parapet
and splayed so as to give the required view, and carefully concealed.

Better forms may be constructed, with one side resting on the berm by
using short uprights with overhead cover, a slit on all sides being
provided for observation.

At night, lookouts are usually posted at listening points located in
or beyond the line of obstacles. These will be discussed under
obstacles.

=1159. Supporting Points.= In some cases small supporting points may
have to be established close behind the general line of trenches for
the purpose of breaking up a successful attack on the trenches and to
aid in delivering a counter attack. These points are strongly
entrenched and have all around wire entanglements and are garrisoned
by from 20 to 40 picked men or by larger forces if the situation
demand it. In some cases machine guns are added to the force in the
supporting point.

=1160. Example of trench system.= Having discussed trenches and
obstacles somewhat in detail, let us take a combination of the whole
showing a complete system such as is used today. (Fig. 40) is a good
example.

[Illustration: Fig. 40

FIRST LINE FIRING TRENCH]

Beginning at the front we have the line of wire entanglements or
obstacles with their listening posts X, for guarding them. Connecting
the listening posts to the fire trenches are the communicating
trenches. The fire trenches are shown by the heavy black line running
about 60 feet in rear of the obstacles. Note the many traverses shown
by the indentations in the line. Points marked M with arrows
projecting to the flanks are machine guns, so located as to sweep the
front of the position with a cross fire. Points marked S are
underground shelters for from 3 to 6 men. Points marked S' are
shelters for 30 men. In rear of the firing trenches at a distance
varying from 100 to 200 feet is the line of cover trenches. This line
is connected with the fire trenches by the zig zagged line of
communicating trenches. Note that the latrines (L) and first aid
stations (F) are just off from the communicating trenches, while the
larger shelter for men (S') are near the cover trenches. As the note
on the diagram shows, the trench requires 250 men to occupy it with
double that number in support. The trench has 108 loopholes with
spaces between provided with a higher banquette so that the whole
parapet may be manned for firing.

On the battlefields of Europe today there are generally three lines of
fire trenches. This permits the defender to fall back to a 2nd or 3rd
prepared position in case he is driven out of his first trench. On a
hill we find a fire trench near the foot of the slope, one just
forward of the military crest, and the third on the reverse slope of
the hill.

In many instances the first line trenches consist of as many as four
or five lines of trenches running in a general lateral direction and
connected by deep narrow communicating trenches. The depth between the
first and last of these trenches is, in some instances, not over a
hundred yards. Sign boards are necessary at short intervals to prevent
the soldiers from getting lost. The effect of having so many
alternative firing trenches is to make it extremely difficult for an
enemy to advance from, or even to hold one of them, even when he gains
a footing, as he would be swept by fire from the supporting trenches
in rear and also by flanking fire from the adjacent trenches.

=1161. Location.= There are two things to be considered in locating
trenches: (1) The tactical situation, and (2) the nature of the
ground. The first consideration requires that the trenches be so
located as to give the best field of fire. Locating near the base of
hills possesses the advantage of horizontal fire, but, as a rule, it
is difficult to support trenches so located and to retreat therefrom
in case of necessity. While location near the crest of hills--on the
"military crest"--does not possess the advantage of horizontal fire,
it is easier to support trenches so located and to retreat therefrom.
Depending upon circumstances, there are times when it will be better
to intrench near the base of hills and there are other times when it
will be better to intrench on the "military crest," which is always in
front of the natural crest. The construction of trenches along the
"military crest" does not give any "dead space"--that is, any space to
the front that can not be reached by the fire of the men in the
trenches.

Whether we should construct our trenches on high or low ground is a
matter that should always be carefully considered under the particular
conditions that happen to exist at that particular time, and the
matter may be summarized as follows:

The advantages of the high ground are:--

1. We can generally see better what is going on to our front and
flanks; and the men have a feeling of security that they do not enjoy
on low ground.

2. We can usually reënforce the firing line better and the dead and
wounded can be removed more easily.

3. The line of retreat is better.

The disadvantages are:--

1. The plunging fire of a high position is not as effective as a
sweeping fire of a low one.

2. It is not as easy to conceal our position.

The advantages of low ground, are:--

1. The low, sweeping fire that we get, especially when the ground in
front is fairly flat and the view over the greater part of it is
uninterrupted, is the most effective kind of fire.

2. As a rule it is easier to conceal trenches on low ground,
especially from artillery fire.

3. If our trenches are on low ground, our artillery will be able to
find good positions on the hill behind us without interfering with the
infantry defense.

The disadvantages are:--

1. As a rule it will be more difficult to reënforce the firing line
and to remove the dead and wounded from the trenches.

2. On a low position there will usually be an increase of dead space
in our front.

3. The average soldier acting on the defensive dreads that the enemy
may turn his flank, and this feeling is much more pronounced on low
ground than on high ground. Should the enemy succeed in getting a
footing on our flank with our trenches on top of the hill, it would be
bad enough, but it would certainly be far worse if he got a footing on
top of the hill, on the flank and rear, with our company on low ground
in front. We, therefore, see there are things to be said for and
against both high and low ground, and the most that can be said
without examining a particular piece of ground is: Our natural
inclination is to select high ground, but, as a rule, this choice will
reduce our fire effect, and if there is a covered approach to our fire
trenches and very little dead ground in front of it, with an extensive
field of fire, there is no doubt the lower ground is better. However,
if these conditions do not exist to a considerable degree, the moral
advantage of the higher ground must be given great weight, especially
in a close country.

The experience of the European war emphasizes the fact that the
location of rifle trenches is today, just as much as ever, a matter of
compromise to be determined by sound judgment on the part of the
responsible officers. The siting of trenches so that they are not
under artillery observation is a matter of great importance, but, it
has yet to be proven that this requirement is more important than an
extensive field of fire. There are many instances where to escape
observation and fire from the artillery, trenches were located on the
reverse slopes, giving only a limited field of fire. This restricted
field of fire permitted the enemy to approach within a few hundred
yards of the trench and robbed them of the concealment they had hoped
to gain. The choice between a site in front, and one in rear of a
crest, is influenced by local conditions which govern the
effectiveness of our own and the enemy's fire. In general, the best
location for effective fire trenches, lies between the military crest
of rising ground and the lowest line from which the foreground is
visible. If the position on the military crest is conspicuous, it is
inadvisable.

With regard to the nature of the ground, trenches should, if
practicable, be so located as to avoid stony ground, because of the
difficult work entailed and of the danger of flying fragments, should
the parapet be struck by an artillery projectile.

To locate the trace of the trenches, lie on the ground at intervals
and select the best field of fire consistent with the requirements of
the situation.

Trenches should be laid out in company lengths, if possible, and
adjoining trenches should afford each other mutual support. The flanks
and important gaps in the line should be protected by fire trenches
echeloned in rear.

=1162. Concealment of trenches.= Owing to the facilities for
observation that the aeroplanes and other air craft afford, and to the
accuracy and effect of modern artillery fire, every possible means
should be taken to conceal trenches, gun implacements, and other
works. The aim should be to alter the natural surface of the ground as
little as possible and to present a target of the smallest possible
dimensions. Covering the parapet with brush or grass will afford
temporary concealment. If the new earth can be sodded it aids greatly
in concealing the trench. In some cases troops have gone to the extent
of painting canvas to resemble the ground and have placed it over
trenches, guns, etc. Straw and grass placed in the bottom of trenches
make them less conspicuous to air scouts. When trenches are dug on a
fairly steep slope care must be used to conceal the back of the
trench, which, being higher than the parapet, will stand out as a scar
on the hillside. Grass or brush may be used to conceal the back of the
trench.

=1163. Dummy trenches.= May be constructed which attract the enemy's
attention and draw his fire, or at least a part of it. The extent to
which this method may be used may include the construction of dummy
obstacles and guns, and even hats may be placed on the parapets.

=1164. Length of trench.= The usual minimum allowance of trench space
is one yard per man, although in some tests, two feet was found
sufficient for men to fire satisfactorily. Ordinarily one squad will
occupy the space between two traverses which experience has shown
should be about 15 feet apart.

=1165. Preparation of the foreground.= One of the first principles in
improving the foreground is that an enemy attacking the trenches shall
be continually exposed to fire especially in the last 400 or 500
yards. This requires a clearing of the foreground and a filling in of
depressions or leveling of cover. Dead space may be swept by fire of
trenches specially located for that purpose. Those features of the
ground which obstruct the field of fire, restrict the view, or favor
or the enemy's approach, should be removed as far as possible. On the
other hand, features which favor the concealment of the trenches or
increase the difficulty of the attack would better be left standing,
especially when it is possible to fire through or over them.

=1166. Revetments.= By a revetment we mean a facing placed against the
front or back wall of a trench to keep the earth in place.

When trenches are to be occupied for any length of time, they must be
revetted. There are many forms of revetments. Sod revetments, stakes
with brush behind them, stakes with planks, boards, or poles behind
them and a common form seen in the trenches in Europe chicken wire
with brush or canvas behind it.

=1167. Drainage.= All trenches should be dug so as to drain in case of
rain. In favorable locations the trench may be constructed to drain
automatically, by constructing it with an incline to one end. Under
ordinary circumstances dry standing has to be provided in trenches by
raising the foot level by the use of brush, boards, poles, etc.
Bailing will have to be resorted to in most cases to drain the trench.

=1168. Water Supply.= At least 1/2 a gallon of water per man per day
should be supplied. The supply is almost invariably liable to be
contaminated, therefore, it should be sterilized by boiling or by
treating. These are usually located just off from the communicating
trenches. Some form of receptacle should be used and all deposits
covered with chemicals.

=1169. Latrines.= Numerous latrines must be constructed in the
trenches' earth. These receptacles are removed from time to time and
emptied in pits dug for that purpose. Urinal cans must also be
provided and cared for in a similar manner.

=1170. Illumination of the Foreground.= Battlefield illumination is a
necessity where night attacks may be expected, and also as a
protection to the line of obstacles. Portable searchlights have become
an accepted part of every army. In addition to these, trenches must be
supplied with reflector lights, star bombs, rockets and flares,
arranged so that they can be put into action instantaneously when the
enemy approaches.

The foreground should be entirely illuminated, leaving the defenders
in the shadow. If the light is too close to the defenders parapet,
they are illuminated and become a good target. Some flares will burn
for 20 minutes and may be thrown to the front as grenades, fired as
rockets, shot from small mortars, or placed well to the front to be
set off by trip wires close to the ground. The best light devised is
one that can be fired well to the front from a small mortar and then
hung suspended from an open parachute above the enemy. Bonfires can be
laid ready for lighting when no other means is at hand. Whatever form
of illumination is adopted, it should withstand bad weather conditions
and prolonged bombardment.

=1171. Telephones.= When armies have been forced to trench warfare and
time has permitted an elaborate system of trenches to be constructed,
telephone communication is established as soon as possible. The
central station, with the switch-board is located in a shelter in rear
of the cover trenches and lines are run to all trenches, lookout
stations and listening points.

=1172. Siege works.= Comprise devices used by besiegers and besieged
in attack and defense of strong fortifications and especially those
devices enable troops to advance under continuous cover.

CHAPTER XI

OBSTACLES

=1173. Object.= The main objects in placing obstacles in front of the
trenches are, to protect them from surprise, and to stop the enemy's
advance or to delay him while under the defender's fire.

=1174. Necessity for obstacles.= It is evident that the present
tendency is to reduce the number of men assigned to constant occupancy
of the first line trenches. This is due to the effectiveness of rifle
fire at close range, the destructive effect of shell and shrapnel, the
infrequency of daylight attack on intrenched positions, and the severe
strain on the men. The aim seems to be the placing here and there of a
lookout or trench guards, who, when necessity demands can call help
from the near by splinterproofs, dugouts, etc., before the enemy can
make his way through the obstacles. It has been found from experience
in the European war that as long as shells are directed at the
trenches no danger of attack is feared but, when the shells are
concentrated against the obstacles the trenches are manned and
preparations are made to resist an assault.

=1175. Location.= Obstacles must be so located that they will be
exposed to the defenders' fire, and should be sheltered as far as
possible from the enemy's artillery fire. They should be difficult to
remove or destroy, should afford no cover for the enemy, and should
not obstruct counter attacks. No obstacle should be more than 100
yards from the defender's trench. Care must be taken not to place them
so close to the trench that hand grenades can be thrown into the
trench from beyond the obstacle. Obstacles may be placed in one, two
or three lines. As far as possible they should be concealed so that
they will not betray the location of the trench.

=1176. Kinds of Obstacles.= The following are the most common kinds of
obstacles:--

=Abatis= consisting of trees lying parallel to each other with the
branches pointing in the general direction of approach and interlaced.
All leaves and small twigs should be removed and the stiff ends of
branches pointed.

Abatis on open ground is most conveniently made of branches about 15
feet long. The branches are staked or tied down and the butts anchored
by covering them with earth. Barbed wire may be interlaced among the
branches. Successive rows are placed, the branches of one extending
over the trunks of the one in front, so as to make the abatis 5 feet
high and as wide as desired. It is better to place the abatis in a
natural depression or a ditch, for concealment and protection from
fire. If exposed to artillery, an abatis must be protected either as
above or else by raising a glacis in front of it. Fig. 1 shows a
typical form of abatis with a glacis in front. An abatis formed by
felling trees toward the enemy, leaving the butt hanging to the stump,
the branches prepared as before, is called =a slashing=, Fig. 2. It
gives cover, and should be well flanked.

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

=1177. A palisade= is a man-tight fence of posts. Round poles 4 to 6
inches in diameter at the large end are best. If the sticks run 5 to 8
inches, they may be split. If defended from the rear, palisades give
some shelter from fire and the openings should be made as large as
possible without letting men through. If defended from the flank, they
may be closer, say 3 to 4 inches apart. The top should be pointed. A
strand or two of barbed wire run along the top and stapled to each
post is a valuable addition.

Palisading is best made up in panels of 6 or 8 feet length, connected
by a waling piece, preferably of plank, otherwise of split stuff. If
the tops are free, two wales should be used, both underground. If the
tops are connected by wires, one will do.

Palisades should be planted to incline slightly to the front. As
little earth should be disturbed in digging as possible, and one side
of the trench should be kept in the desired plane of the palisade. If
stones can be had to fit between the posts and the top of the trench,
they will increase the stiffness of the structure and save time in
ramming, or a small log may be laid in the trench along the outside of
the posts. Figs. 3 and 4 show the construction and placing of
palisades.

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

=1178. A fraise= is a palisade horizontal, or nearly so, projecting
from the scarp or counterscarp. A modern and better form consists of
supports at 3 or 4 feet interval, connected by barbed wire, forming a
horizontal wire fence. Fig. 5.

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

=1179. Cheveaux de frise= are obstacles of the form shown in Fig. 6.
They are usually made in sections of manageable length chained
together at the ends. They are most useful in closing roads or other
narrow passages, as they can be quickly opened for friendly troops.
The lances may be of iron instead of wood and rectangular instead of
round; the axial beam may be solid or composite. Figs. 8 and 9 show
methods of constructing cheveaux de frise with dimension stuff.

[Illustration: Fig. 6]

[Illustration: Fig. 7]

[Illustration: Fig. 8]

[Illustration: Fig. 9]

=1180. A formidable obstacle against cavalry= consists of railroad
ties planted at intervals of 10 feet with the tops 4-1/2 feet above
the ground, and connected by a line of rails spiked securely to each,
Fig. 7. The rail ends should be connected by fish plates and bolted,
with the ends of the bolts riveted down on the ends.

Figs. 10 and 11 show forms of heavy obstacles employed in Manchuria by
the Russians and Japanese, respectively. The former is composed of
timber trestles, made in rear and carried out at night. The latter
appears to have been planted in place.

[Illustration: Fig. 10]

[Illustration: Fig. 11]

=1181. A wire entanglement= is composed of stakes driven in the ground
and connected by wire, barbed is the best, passing horizontally or
diagonally, or both. The stakes are roughly in rectangular or quincunx
order, but slight irregularities, both of position and height should
be introduced.

In the =high entanglement= the stakes average 4 feet from the ground,
and the wiring is horizontal and diagonal, Fig. 12.

[Illustration: Fig. 12

_High wire entanglement showing method of linking posts head to foot
and foot to head. Wire, plain or barbed, then festooned with barbed
wire. Bind wires where they cross. Use broken bottles, crows feet,
planks with spikes or fishhooks in conjunction with this
entanglement._ (From _Knowledge of War_--Lake.)]

=The low wire entanglement= has stakes averaging 18 inches above the
ground and the wire is horizontal only. This form is especially
effective if concealed in high grass. In both kinds the wires should
be wound around the stakes and stapled and passed loosely from one
stake to the next. When two or more wires cross they should be tied
together. Barbed wire is more difficult to string but better when
done. The most practicable form results from the use of barbed wire
for the horizontal strands and smooth wire for the rest.

This is the most generally, useful of all obstacles because of the
rapidity of construction, the difficulty of removal, the comparatively
slight injury from artillery fire, and its independence of local
material supplies.

=1182. Time and materials.= One man can make 10 sq. yds. of low and 3
sq. yds. of high entanglement per hour. The low form requires 10 feet
of wire per sq. yd. and the high 30 feet. No. 14 is a suitable size.
The smooth wire runs 58.9 ft. to the lb. A 100-lb. coil will make 600
sq. yds. of low or 200 sq. yds. of high entanglement. If barbed wire
is used, the weight will be about 2-1/2 times as much.

=1183. Wire fence.= An ordinary barbed-wire fence is a considerable
obstacle if well swept by fire. It becomes more formidable if a ditch
is dug on one or both sides to obstruct the passage of wheels after
the fence has been cut. The fence is much more difficult to get
through if provided with an apron on one or both sides, inclined at an
angle of about 45°, as indicated in Figs. 13 and 14. This form was
much used in South Africa for connecting lines between blockhouses.
When used in this way the lines of fence may be 300 to 600 yds. long,
in plan like a worm fence, with the blockhouse at the reëntrant
angles. Fixed rests for rifles, giving them the proper aim to enfilade
the fence, were prepared at the blockhouses for use at night.

[Illustration: Fig. 13]

[Illustration: Fig. 14]

Such a fence may be arranged in many ways to give an automatic alarm
either mechanically or electrically. The mechanical forms mostly
depend on one or more single wires which are smooth, and are tightly
stretched through staples on the posts which hold them loosely,
permitting them to slip when cut and drop a counterweight at the
blockhouse, which in falling explodes a cap or pulls the trigger of a
rifle.

=1184. Military pits= or =trous de loup= are excavations in the shape
of an inverted cone or pyramid, with a pointed stake in the bottom.
They should not be so deep as to afford cover to the skirmisher. Two
and one-half feet or less is a suitable depth. Fig. 15 shows a plan
and section of such pits.

[Illustration: Fig. 15]

They are usually dug in 3 or 5 rows and the earth thrown to the front
to form a glacis. The rear row is dug first and then the next in
front, and so on, so that no earth is cast over the finished pits.

An excellent arrangement is to dig the pits in a checkerboard plan,
leaving alternate squares and placing a stake in each of them to form
a wire entanglement, Fig. 16. One man can make 5 pits on a 2-hour
relief.

[Illustration: Fig. 16]

=1185. Miscellaneous barricades.= Anything rigid in form and movable
may be used to give cover from view and fire and to obstruct the
advance of an assailant. Boxes, bales and sacks of goods, furniture,
books, etc., have been so used. The principles above stated for other
obstacles should be followed, so far as the character of the materials
will permit. The rest ingenuity must supply. Such devices are usually
called barricades and are useful in blocking the streets of towns and
cities.

=1186. Inundations.= Backing up the water of a stream so that it
overflows a considerable area forms a good obstacle even though of
fordable depth. If shallow, the difficulty of fording may be increased
by irregular holes or ditches dug before the water comes up or by
driving stakes or making entanglements. Fords have frequently been
obstructed by ordinary harrows laid on the bottom with the teeth up.

The unusual natural conditions necessary to a successful inundation
and the extent and character of the work required to construct the
dams make this defense of exceptional use. It may be attempted with
advantage when the drainage of a considerable flat area passes through
a restricted opening, as a natural gorge, a culvert, or a bridge.

Open cribs filled with stones, or tighter ones with gravel or earth
may form the basis of the obstruction to the flow of water. The usual
method of tightening cracks or spaces between cribs is by throwing in
earth or alternate layers of straw, hay, grass, earth, or sacks of
clay. Unless the flow is enough to allow considerable leakage, the
operation will not be practicable with field resources.

When the local conditions permit water to be run into the ditch of a
parapet it should always be done.

=1187. Obstacles in front of outguards= should be low so they cannot
be seen at night. A very simple and effective obstacle can be made by
fastening a single strand of wire to the top of stout stakes about a
foot high, and then placing another wire a little higher and parallel
to, and about one yard in rear of, the first. The wires must be drawn
tight, and securely fastened, and the stakes fairly close together, so
that if the wire is cut between any two stakes the remainder will not
be cut loose. Any one approaching the enemy will trip over the first
wire, and before he can recover himself he will be brought down by the
second. In the absence of wire, small sapplings may be used instead.
Of course, they are not as good as wire, but it does not take much to
trip up a man in the dark.

[Illustration: Fig. 17]

Lessons from the European War

What follows is based on reports from the battle fronts in Europe.

=1188. Wire entanglements.= The war in Europe has proven that the wire
entanglements are the most important and effective obstacle yet
devised. Owing to the intensity of the opposing fire and in many
cases to the short distance between the opposing trenches, it has
become necessary to construct all forms of obstacles in portable
sections which are carried or rolled quickly into place, either by
soldiers rushing out in day light and quickly staking the obstacles
down or by placing the obstacles quietly at night.

For placing wire entanglements at night, an iron post has been devised
about 1/4 of an inch in diameter, with eyelets for attaching the wire.
The lower 18 inches is made as an auger, so that the posts can be
quietly screwed into the ground at night and the wire attached.
Another method of placing wire entanglements is to make them in
sections and roll them up. These sections are usually about 20 feet
long, the wire firmly fastened to the sharpened stakes. At a favorable
moment the soldiers rush out, unrolling the sections as they go and
with mauls quickly drive the stakes. Loose ends of wire enable the
sections to be bound together as placed.

Another form of wire entanglement is shown in (Fig. 18). Triangular
pyramids 3 feet 6 inches high are made of poles or timber. The
pyramids are usually arranged in pairs with the wire on three faces so
that, no matter if the obstacle is rolled over, a wire fence is
presented. These obstacles are carried out and placed so as to break
joints and are staked down as soon as possible.

[Illustration: Fig. 18

Substitute for Posts.]

The wire used for entanglements is found more convenient to handle
when wound on a stake a yard in length, in a sort of figure eight
winding. Special barbed wire of heavier material and barbs placed
close together has been found much more effective than the commercial
barbed wire.

In some localities electrified wire has been used. In such cases the
obstacle is charged in sections, so that, if one section is grounded
it will not affect the others.

=1189. Wire cheveaux de frise.= Two forms of this obstacle have
appeared. Both are portable. They consist of two or more wooden
crosses fastened at their centers to a long pole and connected with
each other by barbed wire. This obstacle retains its effectiveness
when rolled over. (Figs. 19 and 20) give an idea of their
construction. The form shown in (Fig. 19) is often made small enough
for individuals to carry. These are prepared in the trenches and used
for throwing into one's own entanglements to make them more complex or
may be carried when making an assault and thrown into the enemy's
trenches to prevent movements from one part of the trench to another.
The long stick projects out of the end to be used as a handle.

[Illustration: Fig. 19

Wire Cheveaux de Frise]

[Illustration: Fig. 20

Wire Cheveaux de Frise]

=1190. Guarding obstacles.= It has been found necessary to keep a
constant watch over obstacles after they have been placed.

=1191. Listening posts.= One of the best methods is to post one or
more men in listening posts in or beyond the line of obstacles. These
listening posts are rifle pits with over head cover, fully protected
from fire from the rear as well as front, and loop holes for
observation and fire. They are connected with the fire trenches by
means of a covered communication or even tunnels in some cases and are
provided with some form of prompt communication with the firing
trenches by telephone, bell or other means. The communicating trench
or tunnel is provided with a strong door which may be closed to
prevent an enemy from securing access to the fire trench, in case the
lookout is surprised. Pits with trap doors are also used to prevent an
enemy from creeping up the tunnel to the fire trench.

These lookouts can give early warning of the approach of an enemy,
either for the purpose of assault or cutting through the obstacles. In
many instances they have detected mining operations of the enemy by
hearing the blows of picks under ground.

=1192. Automatic alarms.= Many automatic alarms have been used to give
warning of attack on the obstacles. These vary from the simple setting
of a pistol or rifle, which is fired when the enemy attempts to cut
through the entanglement, to intricate electrical alarms.

=1193. Searchlights.= Searchlights have been provided so that, the
instant an alarm is given the obstacles are flooded by a brilliant
light and the enemy exposed to fire.

CHAPTER XII

TRENCH AND MINE WARFARE[14]

=1194. Asphyxiating gases.= The asphyxiating gases employed may be
divided into three general classes, viz:

_Suffocating gases_, the most common of which are carbonic and
nitrogen.

_Poisonous gases_, under which head come carbon monoxide and cyanogen.

_Gases which affect the throat and bronchial tubes_, such as chlorine
and bromine. The latter class is most commonly employed.

The methods usually employed for liberating these gases are to have a
plant some distance in rear of the trenches where the gas is stored
under pressure and carried to the trenches through pipes, where it can
be liberated towards the enemy's trenches when there is a favorable
wind to carry it along; or, the gas may be carried in cylinders or
other containers and liberated at the desired points. Hand grenades or
bombs are also employed which, upon bursting, liberate the gas or in
some cases scatter acids or caustic soda. Some of these bombs contain
a chemical which when liberated affects the eyes, causing impaired
vision. The Germans employ several kinds of shell containing gases of
different densities, one of heavy gas fired as a curtain to the rear
to permit reinforcement of the trenches and another of lighter gas to
demolish the trenches and destroy the firing line. As a general rule
these gases are employed when the fire trenches of the opposing forces
are close together though the shell containers may be used at long
ranges. All of these gases being heavier than air lie close to the
ground and flow over and down into the trenches.

=1195. Protection against gases.= The best protection against these
gases, is a mask of some kind. The commonest form employed is a
flexible mask that conforms to the head, is fitted with glass for
seeing through, and has an arrangement of tubes and valves which
require the wearer to inhale through his nose and exhale through his
mouth.

These masks have an absorbent composed of hyposulphite of sodium or of
72 per cent of the nitrous thiosulphate and 28 per cent of bicarbonate
of soda. This absorbent placed so that air must be breathed through
it, neutralizes the acids in the gases. Soldiers are provided with
these masks, sometimes with two of them, and are required to have them
renewed every three months.

Trench sprays may be used to spray neutralizing liquid in the trenches
to kill the gases.

The _favorable conditions_ for the employment of gases are wind
blowing toward the enemy's trenches and warm weather. _Unfavorable
conditions_ are rain, cold, and adverse winds.

In some localities weather vanes placed in the direction of the
enemy's trenches and arranged so that they may be watched at night
give an indication of favorable winds and enable the defender to
prepare for a gas attack.

Before the masks were provided bonfires were prepared of oil soaked
materials which; when ignited, produced an intense heat and the
resulting column of air diverted the gas clouds.

=1196. Liquid fire.= By use of hand or motor driven pumps, and a light
grade of petroleum, columns of liquid fire may be squirted into the
opposing trenches. If the oil should fail to remain lighted it may be
fired by bursting hand grenades or throwing fire balls into the
trenches. This means of attack is employed when opposing trenches are
close together.

As a defense measure ditches may be dug in front of the trenches and
filled with a porous material which is then soaked with oil. Heavy
oils, being hard to ignite, are not dangerous to the defense, and will
remain with little loss for a long time. To make sure of prompt
ignition gas lines are laid in the ditches. When turned on the gas
readily ignites and the resulting fire produces great heat. Wire or
barbed wire looped in the ditches and staked down makes this a
formidable obstacle.

=1197. Grenades and bombs= are containers, designed to be thrown by
hand, by a sling, fired as a rocket or from specially constructed
mortars, or dropped from aerial craft. They burst by time or
percussion fuses and may be improvised in a variety of forms and are
most useful in close attack or defense. Their effect is local but they
are very demoralizing to men's nerves.

=1198. Hand grenades= are designed to be thrown by the hand and vary
greatly in construction. In general, however, they consist of a
container filled with bullets or pieces of iron or other metal in the
center of which is a charge of high explosive which scatters the
bullets or fragments with deadly effect. The three methods of
discharging a hand grenade are:

_By time fuse_ which is lighted by hand. About 5 to 9 seconds is the
time from ignition until the grenade bursts. This does not give the
defender time to pick up the bomb and throw it out of the trench.

_By friction primer and fuse._ In this form of hand grenade a strap on
the wrist with a short line attached with a hook on the end of it
serves, when the hook is engaged in the ring of the grenade, to jerk
the primer when the grenade is thrown. This automatically ignites the
fuse which bursts the grenade in from 4 to 5 seconds.

_By percussion._ In this form of grenade the charge is fired when the
grenade strikes the ground or object at which it is thrown. In this
form of grenade a safety pin holds the plunger from the cap. When the
grenade is to be thrown the safety pin is withdrawn.

As a general rule fuse burns at the rate of 1 inch in 1 and 1/4
seconds; however each lot of fuse should be tested.

Figs. 1 and 2 show two forms of improvised grenades. Common cans, such
as preserved fruits and vegetables are shipped in commercially, make
good containers. The usual weight of a hand grenade is about 1-1/2
pounds.

[Illustration: Fig. 1

Hair Brush Bomb]

[Illustration: Fig. 2

Hand Grenade]

=1199. Other methods of throwing grenades.= Many grenades have been
designed to be fired from the ordinary rifle. This grenade has a rod
which is inserted in the barrel of the rifle. A special charge of
powder is used in the cartridge from which the bullet has been
withdrawn.

Common slings, catapults, and other devises have been frequently used.

=1200. Aerial mines.= (Fig. 3.) This form of grenade is very heavy,
often weighing 200 pounds and is fired from a trench mortar.

[Illustration: Fig. 3

_Aerial Mine_]

=1201. Winged torpedo.= (Fig. 4.) This projectile is fitted with three
winged vanes which steady its flight and greatly increase the
accuracy. A rod fitted into its base enables it to be fired from a
comparatively small trench, mortar. The torpedo weighs about 40 pounds
and the mortar 200 pounds. The mortar, being light, can be carried
from one part of the trench to another by two men.

[Illustration: Fig. 4

_Winged Torpedo_]

The aerial mine and winged torpedo may be used effectively to beat
down the enemy's defenses, destroying his sand bags and trenches, and
cutting away wire entanglements and other obstacles. The winged
torpedo having a greater range (500 yards) and being more accurate, is
the more effective.

=1202. Bombs from air-craft= are some form of high explosive bomb
which burst on striking. Another type of bomb used by aeroplanes
consists of a container filled with steel darts. The bursting charge
is fired by a fuse. The operator usually cuts the fuse so that the
bomb will burst at a considerable altitude. The steel darts are
scattered in all directions and have sufficient velocity to pass
through a man or horse.

=1203. Protection against hand grenades.= (Fig. 5.) For protection
against hand grenades and bombs a screen of wire netting may be
erected in front of the trenches and arranged at such a slope that
most of the grenades passing over the screen will clear the trench
while those striking the netting will roll away from the trench. This
protection is very satisfactory for communications, machine gun
emplacements, etc., but, is of doubtful value in fire trenches as it
does not permit an easy offensive by the defenders.

[Illustration: Fig. 5

_Bomb Screen_]

=1204. Tanks.= The so-called "tanks," first used by the British armies
in the battle of the Somme in September, 1916, are in reality armored
caterpillar tractors carrying machine guns and capable of traversing
rough ground, smashing down trees and entanglements, and passing
across the ground between the opposing trenches over the shell holes
made by the opposing artillery.

The machinery, guns and crew are contained in an armored body and the
two tractor belts extend to full length on either side, being so
arranged that the tank can climb a steep slope. From the meager data
obtainable it would appear that the tanks carry from 4 to 6 machine
guns in armored projections built out from the sides. These are
provided with revolving shields permitting two guns to fire in any
direction at one time.

The principle of the tractor is similar to that of those manufactured
in the United States and used commercially in reclamation work. The
addition of the armored body and guns makes the "military tank."

These "tanks" have proven of great value in village fighting, by
smashing down barricades and driving machine guns from their positions
in cellars and houses. They have also been used with some success in
destroying obstacles.

The power of these new engines may be judged from their ability to
smash down trees six inches in diameter and by means of cables to
uproot trees as large as 15 inches in diameter.

These "tanks" are proof against rifle and machine gun fire, but are
unable to withstand even light artillery.

=1205. Helmets.= Steel helmets made their appearance in the European
war in 1915, as a protection to the soldier's head against rifle,
machine gun and shrapnel fire. So successful were they that they are
being furnished to all troops on the battlefield. Already several
millions have been supplied. Where heretofore head wounds accounted
for over 20 per cent of the casualties in trench warfare, the
percentage has been reduced by the wearing of helmets to about one
half per cent. While the helmet does not afford complete protection
against rifle and shrapnel fire, it has been found that hits result
only in severe concussion, where before fatal wound resulted. These
helmets are painted khaki color.

=1206. Masks.= Steel masks for sentinels and snipers have been adopted
by the Germans. This mask covers the head and face with curved
surfaces which deflect bullets. Small eye holes permit a clear view of
the target and a small section is omitted in the lower right side to
permit bringing the rifle against the cheek in firing.

=1207. Periscopes.= Periscopes have been universally adopted in trench
warfare for observing the enemy while keeping completely under cover.
It is a simple arrangement of two mirrors in a vertical tube. The
upper reflects the image of the object to the lower mirror which in
turn reflects it to the eye of the observer. By raising the top of the
periscope above the parapet the soldier can watch the foreground while
at the same time remaining completely concealed himself.

A more elaborate periscope for the control of artillery fire has a
collapsible tube which may be extended and elevated to a height of 75
feet.

=1208. Sniperscope.= This is a combination of the periscope and rifle
by means of which a soldier can aim and fire his piece at an object
without exposing himself above the parapet.

=1209. Aids to firing.= Rifles laid in notched boards placed in the
parapet may be sighted and prepared for night firing, or a wire
stretched just outside of the loophole on which the barrel of the
rifle can rest when in the proper firing position to cover certain
points, enables the soldier to fire effectively at night when it is
too dark to aim.

=1210. Mining.= Military mining consists of digging communications and
chambers underground and placing therein charges of explosives and
firing such charges. Mining is slow and restricted in its application
and therefore this method of attack is used against very strong points
of the enemy's line,--a salient, a building, or other point,--held in
great force. The aim in mine warfare is to make a sudden breach in the
enemy's trench, destroy the flanking supports which could be used to
stop this breach and then to take the trench by assault and organize
it for defense before the enemy's forces, disorganized from the
explosion, can recover.

Sometimes mines are placed in front of the trenches and exploded
electrically when the enemy reaches them in attempting an assault.

=1211. Countermining.= The enemy, when mining operations are
suspected, runs out tunnels to meet the opposing mine. Sometimes
listening galleries are driven underground and men posted to detect
the sound of mining operations. Once the direction of the opposing
tunnel is discovered a charge of explosive is laid across its approach
and fired at a moment when it will cause the most damage.

FOOTNOTES:

[14] To those desiring to go into the subject of trench warfare in
detail, the author would recommend "Trench Warfare," by himself.
George Banta Publishing Co., Menasha, Wis.; $1.25.

CHAPTER XIII

MARCHES

(Based on Infantry Drill Regulations and Field Service Regulations)

=1212. Marching principal occupation of troops in campaign.= Marching
constitutes the principal occupation of troops in campaign and is one
of the causes of heaviest loss. This loss, however, may be materially
reduced by proper training and by carrying out strictly the rules
regulating the conduct of marches, especially the rules of march
discipline.

=1213. Physical training; hardening new troops.= By systematic and
progressive physical exercises and actual marching, Infantry can be
accustomed to the fatigue of bearing arms and equipment.

With new or untrained troops, the process of hardening the men to this
work must be gradual. It should begin with ten-minute periods of
vigorous setting-up exercises three times a day to loosen and develop
the muscles. One march should be made each day with full equipment,
beginning with a distance of 2 or 3 miles and increasing the distance
daily as the troops become hardened, until a full day's march under
full equipment may be made without exhaustion.

=1214. Long march not to be made with untrained troops.= A long march
should not be made with untrained troops. If a long distance must be
covered in a few days, the first march should be short, the length
being increased each succeeding day.

=1215. A successful march.= A successful march, whether in peace or
war, is one that places the troops at their destination at the proper
time and _in the best possible physical condition_. Therefore, every
possible effort, by exercising care and judgment, and by enforcing
march discipline, must be made by all officers and noncommissioned
officers to have the troops reach their destination in good physical
condition,--"ready for business."

Preparation

=1216. The commander.= The commander must give such instructions as
will insure that the necessary preparations are made,--that the men
and animals are in fit condition and that the men are properly
equipped; that provision has been made for rations and ammunition;
that the wagons are properly loaded; that the necessary arrangements
have been made for caring for the sick, etc.

=1217. Organization commanders.= Every organization commander is
responsible that such of the above requirements as apply to his
organization are complied with.

=1218. Filling canteens.= It is an invariable rule that all canteens
must be filled before the march begins.

Starting

=1219. Time to start.= When practicable, marches begin in the morning,
ample time being allowed for the men to breakfast, animals to feed,
and the wagons or animals to be packed.

The time for reveille, if different from the usual hour, should be
announced the evening before.

The exact hour for the start depends, of course, upon circumstances.
However, as a rule, foot troops do not start before broad daylight;
mounted troops, when practicable, about an hour after broad daylight.

In order to avoid intense heat, especially in the tropics, and also,
in the case of long marches, to avoid reaching destination after dark,
an earlier start than usual must be made.

Both men and animals rest well in the early morning hours, and should
not, therefore, have this rest interrupted unless there is some real
necessity for it.

Starting at night or at an hour that will cause a part of the march to
be made at night, should, if possible, be avoided, because of the
difficulties and disadvantages of night marching.

Conduct of the march

=1220. The rate of march.= The rate of march varies with the length of
march, kind of troops, equipment carried, size of command, condition
of troops, state of the weather, condition of roads, and other
circumstances. However, whatever the rate may be it should be
_uniform_, that is most important, as there is nothing that will
irritate and tire a command more than a varying, un-uniform rate of
march.

The rate of march is regulated by the commander of the leading company
or some one designated by him, who should give the matter special
attention, _the rate being checked from time to time by a watch_.

On a march of several days' duration the position of companies is
ordinarily changed daily, so that each in turn leads.

With trained troops, in commands of a regiment or less, marching over
average roads, the rate should be from 2-3/4 to 3 miles per hour. With
larger commands carrying full equipment, the rate will be from 2 to
2-1/2 miles per hour.

Assuming that the length of step of the average man is 30 inches, the
following rate-of-march table is deduced:

+------------------------+-------+
| | Miles |
| Steps per minute | per |
| | hour |
+------------------------+-------+
| 35 (1/5) | 1 |
| 70 | 2 |
| 88 (in practice, 90) | 2-1/2 |
| 97 (in practice, 100) | 2-3/4 |
| 106 (in practice, 110) | 3 |
+------------------------+-------+

[Note. By remembering that 35 (1/5) steps per minute gives 1 mile per
hour, the number of steps per minute necessary to give a rate of 2,
2-1/2, 2-3/4 and 3 miles per hour, is quickly and easily obtained by
multiplying 35 (1/5) by these numbers.]

In hot, sultry weather, with the men carrying the full pack, the rate
of march would naturally be considerably less than on a cool day, with
the command not carrying the pack. It is most important that these and
other considerations affecting the rate of march be constantly borne
in mind by the officer in command of the column, who should indicate
to the commander of the leading company the number of steps to be
taken per minute. In indicating the number of steps to be taken per
minute, it should be considered whether the men at the head of the
leading company are the average, above the average, or below the
average in height. A short man, for example, would probably have to
take 100 steps a minute to keep up with a tall man walking at the rate
of 90 steps per minute.

=1221. Marching capacity.= The average marching capacity of Infantry
is about 15 miles a day, but in extensive operations, involving large
bodies of troops, the average is about 12 miles a day. Small commands
of seasoned Infantry marching on good roads in cool weather can
average about 20 miles a day.

=1222. Halts.= A halt of 15 minutes should be made after the first
half or three quarters of an hour of marching to enable the men to
attend to the calls of nature and adjust their clothing. Judgment must
be exercised in selecting the place for this halt; it should not be
made in a village or other place where its object would be defeated.

After the first halt a halt of 10 minutes is made in each hour, that
is, the troops march 50 minutes and then halt 10. Of course, the
number and length of halts should be varied according to the weather,
condition of the roads and the equipment carried by the men. In the
tropics the best results are often obtained by marching 45 minutes and
halting 15.

When the day's march will run well into the afternoon, a halt of about
one hour should be made at noon and the men allowed to eat.

Places for long halts should be selected with care; woods, water and
shade are desirable features. Arms are stacked and equipments removed.

Halts should not be made in or near towns or villages unless to
procure water or supplies, and when so made, the men remain in column,
details being sent for whatever is necessary.

In hot weather, especially in the tropics, it may be advisable in the
case of long marches to halt for three or four hours during the
hottest part of the day and finish the march in the late afternoon or
early evening. As a general proposition, however, it is inadvisable to
arrive at a strange place after nightfall or even late in the
afternoon.

=1223. Crossing bridges and fords.= When a cause of delay,--for
example, a damaged bridge,--is encountered, the troops in rear are
notified of the minimum length of the delay; they then conduct
themselves as at regular halts.

In ascending or descending slopes, crossing streams or other
obstacles, or passing through defiles requiring a reduction of front,
every precaution is taken to prevent interruption of the march of the
troops in rear. If the distances are not sufficient to prevent check,
units are allowed to overlap; if necessary, streams are crossed at two
or more places at the same time; in passing through short defiles the
pace is accelerated and the exit cleared at once.

If a company unit is delayed while crossing an obstacle, the head
slackens the pace or halts until all of that unit has passed; it then
resumes its place in the column, increasing the pace, if necessary.

Before attempting to cross with bodies of troops, careful examination
is made of fords, boggy places, bridges of doubtful character, ice,
etc., as the case may be.

Troops must never cross a bridge in cadence,--that is, the men must
not be in step.

In fording a deep stream with a swift current, the men cross on as
broad a front as possible, marching abreast and holding hands. They
should not look at the water, but at the opposite shore. If the ford
is wide enough, mounted troops may cross at the same time on the
upstream side, thus breaking the force of the current.

Fords that are at all difficult delay long columns unless the troops
cross at several places at once.

=1224. Straggling and elongation of column.= The marching efficiency
of an organization is judged by the amount of straggling and
elongation of the column and the condition of the men at the end of
the march.

An officer of each company marches in its rear to prevent undue
elongation and straggling. If there be only one officer with a
company, the first sergeant performs this duty.

No man should leave the ranks without permission. If necessary for a
man to fall out on account of sickness, he should be given a permit to
do so by the company commander or the officer at the rear of the
company. This permit is presented to the surgeon, who will admit him
to the ambulance, have him wait for the trains, or follow and rejoin
his company at the first halt.

It is the duty of all officers and noncommissioned officers to prevent
straggling and elongation of the column.

MISCELLANEOUS

=1225. Forced marches.= A forced march may be said to be a march of
more than average length.

Forced marches seriously impair the fighting power of even the best
troops, and should be undertaken only in cases of necessity.

Such marches are generally made by increasing the number of marching
hours. For large columns of Infantry marching long distances, increase
of pace is seldom of value.

=1226. Night marches.= While night marches are some times made in very
hot weather to avoid the heat of the day, they are generally made for
the purpose of surprising the enemy, escaping observation by
aeroplane, or for securing a favorable position from which to attack
the enemy at dawn.

Moonlight and good roads are favorable for night marches.

Precaution must be taken that the proper road is followed and that
contact between units is maintained, men being stationed, if
necessary, to mark changes of direction. If necessary, guides are
secured and charged with the duty of following the right road. When,
due to unfavorable conditions, units cannot be kept well closed, men
will be placed at forks and crossings of roads, especially on very
dark nights.

When in hostile territory, silence is maintained; articles of
equipment are secured to prevent rattling, and smoking and talking are
not permitted. Also, under certain conditions villages and farmhouses
are avoided on account of warning given by dogs.

Night marches impair the efficiency of a command and are never
undertaken without good reason.

=1227. Compliments.= As a rule, troops on the march pay no
compliments; individuals salute when they address, or are addressed
by, a superior officer.

=1228. Protection on the march.= Protection on the march is furnished
by covering detachments known as advance guards, rear guards and flank
guards.

=1229. Fitting of shoes and care of feet.= In view of the fact that
the greater part of the Infantry soldier's occupation in the field
consists of marching, too much stress cannot be laid upon the
importance of his paying special attention to the fitting of his shoes
and the care of his feet.

An Infantryman with sore feet is like a lame duck trying to keep up
with the rest of the flock.

Keep your feet clean. Dirty feet invite blisters. An excellent
preventative against sore feet is to wash them every night in hot
(preferably salt) water and then dry them thoroughly. If this is not
practicable, then mop them every evening with a wet towel and
invigorate the skin with a good rubbing.

Keep the nails cut close.

Rubbing the feet with hard soap, grease, or oil of any kind, and
putting ordinary talcum powder in the shoes before starting on a
march, are very good to prevent sore feet.

Blisters should be pricked and the water let out, but the skin must
never be removed. Adhesive plaster on top of the blister will prevent
the skin from being pulled off.

In case of sore or blistered feet, considerable relief can be obtained
by rubbing them with tallow from a lighted candle and a little whiskey
or alcohol in some other form, and putting the socks on at once.

A little alum in warm water is excellent for tender feet.

The old soldier has learned from long experience in marching, to turn
his socks inside out before putting them on thus putting the smooth
side next to his skin and possible seams or lumps next to the shoe.
The thickness of the sock protects the skin and helps prevent
blisters.

_Under no circumstances should a soldier ever start on a march with a
pair of new shoes._

Each soldier should have on hand at all times two pair of serviceable
shoes well broken in.

Remember that it is much better to prevent sore feet by taking the
precautions outlined above, than it is to have to treat your feet
after they have become sore.

CHAPTER XIV

CAMPS

=1230. Principles governing selection of camp sites.= The following
basic principles govern in the selection of camp sites:

(a) The water supply should be sufficient, pure, and accessible.

(b) The ground should accommodate the command with as little crowding
as possible, be easily drained, and have no stagnant water within 300
yards.

(d) Camp sites should be so selected that troops of one unit need not
pass through the camp grounds of another to reach their own camp.

(e) Wood, grass, forage, and supplies must be at hand or obtainable.

(f) In campaign, tactical considerations come first in the selection
of camp sites, capability of defense being especially considered, and,
as a result, troops may have to camp many nights on objectionable
ground.

(g) However, sanitary considerations must always be given all the
weight possible consistent with the tactical requirements. Through no
fault of their own, troops occupying an unsanitary site may suffer
greater losses than in the battles of a long campaign.

=1231. Desirable camp sites.= The following conditions are desirable
for camp sites:

(a) Porous soil, covered with stout turf and underlaid by a sandy or
gravelly subsoil.

(b) High banks of rivers, provided no marshes are near.

(d) In warm weather, an exposure toward the prevailing winds, with
site moderately shaded by trees.

=1232. Undesirable camp sites.= The following conditions are
undesirable for camp sites:

(a) Clay soil, or where the ground water approaches the surface, such
sites being damp and unhealthful.

(b) Alluvial, marshy ground, and ground near the base of hills, or
near thick woods or dense vegetation are also damp.

(d) Proximity to marshes or stagnant water is usually damp, and has
mosquitoes, which transmit malaria, dengue fever and yellow fever.

(e) Old camp sites are dangerous, as they are often permeated by
elements of disease which persist for considerable periods.

(f) Dry beds of streams are subject to sudden freshets.

(g) In the tropics troops should not camp nearer than 500 yards to
native huts or villages because of danger from malarial infection.

=1233. Form and dimensions of camps.= The form and dimensions of camps
depend upon the tactical situation and the amount and nature of ground
available. However, in general, the form and dimensions of a
regimental or battalion camp should conform as nearly as practicable
to the diagram on the opposite page, and camps of all sizes should, as
far as possible, conform to the principles, regarding arrangement,
underlying the diagram given on the opposite page, which gives the
general form, dimensions, and interior arrangements of a camp for a
regiment of Infantry at war strength. In certain cases, particularly
in one-night halts in the presence of the enemy, camps must of
necessity be contracted, while in other cases, where a more extended
halt is contemplated and where tactical reasons will permit, better
camp sanitation may be secured, and a more comfortable arrangement
made by the expansion of camp areas.

=1234. Making camp.= The command should be preceded by the commanding
officer or a staff officer, who selects the camp site, and designates,
by planting stakes, the lines of tents, the positions of the sinks,
guard tent, kitchens, picket line, etc.

After the companies are marched to their proper positions and arms are
stacked, the details for guard and to bring wood, water, dig sinks,
pitch tents, handle rations, etc., should be made before ranks are
broken.

Immediately upon reaching camp and before the men are allowed to go
around, patrolling sentinels should be established to prevent men from
polluting the camp site or adjoining ground before the sinks are
constructed.

Sentinels should be posted over the water supply without delay.

As soon as the tents have been pitched and the sinks dug, the camp
should be inspected and all unnecessary sentinels relieved.

The tents should be pitched and the sinks dug simultaneously.

Should the troops reach camp before the wagons, the companies may be
divided into squads and set to work clearing the ground, gathering
fire wood, collecting leaves, grass, etc., for beds, etc.

The moment a command reaches camp its officers and men usually want to
go here and there under all sorts of pretexts. No one should be
allowed to leave camp until all necessary instructions have been
given.

Enlisted men should not be permitted to leave camp without permission
of their company commanders.

Sick call should be held as soon as practicable after the tents have
been pitched.

[Illustration: Fig. 1

CAMP OF A REGIMENT OF INFANTRY, WAR STRENGTH]

MISCELLANEOUS

=1235. Retreat.= In camp retreat formation should always be under
arms, an officer being present with each company and inspecting the
arms.

=1236. Parade ground.= In front of every camp of permanent nature,
there should be a parade ground for drills and ceremonies.

=1237. Camping on fordable stream.= In camping for the night on a
fordable stream that is to be crossed, cross before going into camp,
unless there is some tactical reason for not doing so; for a sudden
rise, or the appearance of the enemy, might prevent the crossing the
next morning.

=1238. Windstorms.= Whenever windstorms are expected, the tent pegs
should be secured and additional guy ropes attached to the tents.

Tents may be prevented from blowing down by being made fast at the
corners to posts firmly driven into the ground, or by passing ropes
over the ridge poles and fastening them to pegs firmly set into the
ground.

=1239. Making tent poles and pegs fast in loose soil.= If the soil be
loose or sandy, stones or other hard material should be placed under
the tent poles to prevent their working into the soil, thus leaving
the tent slack and unsteady. When the soil is so loose that the pegs
will not hold at all, fasten the guy ropes to brush, wood or rocks
buried in the ground.

=1240. Trees sometimes dangerous.= While trees add very much to the
comfort of a camp, care should be exercised not to pitch tents near
trees whose branches or trunks might fall.

CHAPTER XV

CAMP SANITATION

=1241. Definition.= By "Camp Sanitation" is meant the adoption of
measures to keep the camp in a healthy condition. These measures
comprise:

(a) The disposal, so as to render them harmless and prevent pollution,
of all wastes, refuse and excreta from men and animals in suitable
places provided therefor;

(b) The care exercised in handling, preparing and serving food;

(d) The maintenance of proper drainage;

(e) The supply of water for bathing and washing, and the maintenance
of a pure supply for drinking.

=1242. Camp expedients.= "Camp-expedients" is the name given the
mechanical means used to put into effect some of the measures, named
above, connected with camp sanitation, and usually consist of
latrines, kitchen sinks, urinal tubs, rock or earth incinerators, and
drainage ditches.

=1243. Latrines.= The latrines must be dug immediately upon reaching
camp--their construction must not be delayed until the camps have been
pitched and other duties performed. The exact location of the latrines
should be determined by the commanding officer, or by some officer
designated by him, the following considerations being observed:

1. They should be so located as not to contaminate the water supply.

2. They should not be placed where they can be flooded by rain water
from higher ground, nor should they be so placed that they can pollute
the camp by overflow in case of heavy rains.

3. They should be as far from the tents as is compatible with
convenience--if too near, they will be a source of annoyance; if too
far, some men, especially at night, and particularly if affected with
diarrhoea, will defecate before reaching the latrine. Under ordinary
circumstances, a distance of about 50 yards is considered sufficient.

Latrines for the men are always located on the opposite side of the
camp from the kitchens, generally one for each company unit and one
for the officers of a battalion or squadron. They are so placed that
the drainage or overflow can not pollute the water supply or camp
grounds.

When the camp is for one night only, straddle trenches suffice. In
camp of longer duration, and when it is not possible to provide
latrine boxes, as for permanent camps, deeper trenches should be dug.
These may be used as straddle trenches or a seat improvised. When open
trenches are used the excrement must be kept covered at all times with
a layer of earth. In more permanent camps the trenches should be 2
feet wide, 6 feet deep, and 15 feet long, and suitably screened. Seats
with lids are provided and covered to the ground to keep flies from
reaching the deposits; urinal troughs discharging into trenches are
provided. Each day the latrine boxes are thoroughly cleaned, outside
by scrubbing and inside by applying, when necessary, a coat of oil or
whitewash. The pit is burned out daily with approximately 1 gallon oil
and 15 pounds straw. When filled to within 2 feet of the surface, such
latrines are discarded, filled with earth, and their position marked.
All latrines and kitchen pits are filled in before the march is
resumed. In permanent camps and cantonments, urine tubs may be placed
in the company streets at night and emptied after reveille.

All latrines must be filled before marching. The following
illustration shows a very simple and excellent latrine seat which can
be made and kept in the company permanently for use in camps on the
march:

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

Urinal troughs, made of muslin and coated with oil or paint, should
discharge into the trenches.

=1244. Urinal tubs.= When obtainable, urinal tubs or cans should be
placed in the company streets at night, their location being indicated
by lighted lanterns, the tubs or cans being removed at reveille.

=1245. Kitchens.= Camp kettles can be hung on a support consisting of
a green pole lying in the crotches of two upright posts of the same
character. A narrow trench for the fire, about 1 foot deep, dug under
the pole, not only protects the fire from the wind but saves fuel.

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

A still greater economy of fuel can be effected by digging a similar
trench in the direction of the wind and slightly narrower than the
diameter of the kettles. The kettles are then placed on the trench and
the space between the kettles filled in with stones, clay, etc.,
leaving the flue running beneath the kettles. The draft can be
improved by building a chimney of stones, clay, etc., at the leeward
end of the flue.

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

Four such trenches radiating from a common central chimney will give
one flue for use whatever may be the direction of the wind.

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

A slight slope of the flue, from the chimney down, provides for
drainage and improves the draft.

The lack of portable ovens can be met by ovens constructed of stone
and covered with earth to better retain the heat. If no stone is
available, an empty barrel, with one head out, is laid on its side,
covered with wet clay to a depth of 6 or more inches and then with a
layer of dry earth equally thick. A flue is constructed with the clay
above the closed end of the barrel, which is then burned out with a
hot fire. This leaves a baked clay covering for the oven.

A recess can be similarly constructed with boards or even brushwood,
supported on a horizontal pole resting on upright posts, covered and
burnt out as in the case of the barrel.

When clay banks are available, an oven may be excavated therein and
used at once.

To bake in such ovens, first heat them and then close flues and ends.

Food must be protected from flies, dust, and sun. Facilities must be
provided for cleaning and scalding the mess equipment of the men.
Kitchens and the ground around them must be kept scrupulously clean.

Solid refuse should be promptly burned, either in the kitchen fire or
in an improvised crematory.

In temporary camps, if the soil is porous, liquid refuse from the
kitchens may be strained through gunny sacking into seepage pits dug
near the kitchen. Flies must not have access to these pits. Boards or
poles, covered with brush or grass and a layer of earth may be used
for this purpose. The strainers should also be protected from flies.
Pits of this kind, dug in clayey soil, will not operate successfully.
All pits should be filled with earth before marching.

As a precautionary measure against setting the camp on fire, all dry
grass, underbrush, etc., in the immediate vicinity of the kitchen
should be cut down.

In case of a fire in camp, underbrush, spades, shovels, blankets,
etc., are used to beat it out.

Gunny sacks dipped in water are the best fire fighters.

Burning away dried grass and underbrush around exterior of camp is a
great protection against fire from outside.

=1246. Kitchen pits.= Pits of convenient size should be constructed
for the liquid refuse from the kitchens. Solid refuse should be burned
either in the kitchen fire or at some designated place, depending upon
whether the camp is of a temporary or permanent nature. Unless the
camp be of a very temporary nature, the pits should be covered with
boards or other material in order to exclude the flies.

All pits should be filled in with earth before breaking camp.

=1247. Incinerators.= The incineration pit shown in the following
diagram, affords an excellent, simple and economical way of disposing
of camp waste and offal, tin cans and dish-water included:

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

=Description:=

The pit is about 4-1/2 feet long, 1-1/2 feet wide and 2 feet deep at
one end and 2-1/2 at the other. It is partially filled with stones,
the larger ones on the bottom and the smaller on the top. At one end
of the pit the stones extend a little above the surface, and slope
gradually toward the other end until the fire pit is reached ten
inches below the surface of the trench. Over the fire pit, about five
inches above the ground, is placed a crab or a piece of boiler iron,
on which is boiled all the water for washing dishes, etc. The fire pit
is only about one-half of the stone surface, as the radiated heat
keeps the rest of the stones hot, causing all dish and slop water to
evaporate quickly.

Any tin cans that may be thrown into the fire pit are removed after a
short exposure to the heat and placed in a trench especially dug for
the purpose.

The company incinerator shown below was used with great success by
some of our troops at Texas City, Texas. The rocks should not be too
large. The men should be instructed to drop all liquid on the sides
of the incinerator and throw all solid matter on the fire--the liquids
will thus be evaporated and the solids burned. Until the men learn how
to use the incinerator properly, a noncommissioned officer should be
detailed to supervise its use.

[Illustration: Fig. 6]

=1248. Drainage.= When camp is established for an indefinite period,
drainage should be attended to at once. Each tent should have a
shallow trench dug around it and the company and other streets ditched
on both sides, all the trenches and ditches connecting with a ditch
that carries the water from the camp. All surface drainage from higher
ground should be intercepted and turned aside.

=1249. Avoiding old camp sites.= The occupation of old camp sites is
dangerous, since these are often permeated by elements of disease
which persist for considerable periods.

=1250. Changing camp sites.= Camp sites must be changed promptly when
there is evidence of soil pollution or when epidemic disease
threatens. Also, a change of camp site is often desirable in order to
secure a change of surroundings and to abandon areas that have become
dusty and cut up.

=1251. Bunks.= Place a number of small poles about seven feet long
close together, the upper ends resting on a cross pole about six
inches in diameter and the lower ends resting on the ground; or, the
poles may be raised entirely off the ground by being placed on cross
poles supported by forked stakes at the corners; on the poles place
grass, leaves, etc.

=1252. Wood.= The firewood should be collected, cut and piled near the
kitchen. Dry wood is usually found under logs or roots of trees.

If wagons are not heavily loaded it is sometimes a good plan to bring
a few sticks of dry wood from the preceding camp, or to pick up good
wood en route.

=1253. Water.= Precautionary measures should always be taken to
prevent the contamination of the water, and a guard from the first
troops reaching camp should at once be placed over the water supply.

If the water is obtained from a stream, places should be designated as
follows for getting water:

(1) For drinking and cooking;
(2) For watering animals;
(3) For bathing and for washing clothing.

The first designated place should be farthest up the stream; the
others, in the order named, downstream.

Where two bodies of troops are to camp on the same stream one must not
pollute the water to be used by the other. This can be arranged by the
commanders agreeing upon a point where both commands will obtain their
drinking water, upon a second point where animals will be watered,
etc.

If the stream be small, the water supply may be increased by building
a dam.

Small springs may be dug out and each lined with a gabion, or a barrel
or box with both ends removed, or with stones, the space between the
lining and the earth being filled with puddled clay. A rim of clay
should be built to keep out surface drainage. The same method may be
used near swamps, streams, or lakes to increase or clarify the water
supply.

Water that is not known to be pure should be boiled 20 minutes; it
should then be cooled and aerated by being poured repeatedly from one
clean container to another, or it may be purified by apparatus
supplied for the purpose.

Arrangements should be made for men to draw water from the authorized
receptacles by means of a spigot or other similar arrangement. The
dipping of water from the receptacles, or the use of a common drinking
cup, should be prohibited.

In the field it is sometimes necessary to sterilize or filter water.
The easiest and surest way of sterilizing water is by boiling. Boiled
water should be aerated by being poured from one receptacle to another
or by being filtered through charcoal or clean gravel. Unless boiled
water be thus aerated it is very unpalatable and it is with difficulty
that troops can be made to drink it.

Filtration merely clarifies--it does not purify. The following are
simple methods of filtration:

1. Dig a hole near the source of supply so that the water may
percolate through the soil before being used.

2. Sink a barrel or box into the ground, the water entering therein
through a wooden trough packed with clean sand, gravel or charcoal.

3. Place a box or barrel in another box or barrel of larger size,
filling the space between with clean sand, gravel, moss or charcoal,
and piercing holes near the bottom of the outer barrel and near the
top of the inner. The filter thus constructed is partly submerged in
the water to be filtered.

4. Bore a small hole in the bottom of a barrel or other suitable
receptacle, which is partly filled with layers of sand, gravel, and,
if available, charcoal and moss. The water is poured in at the top and
is collected as it emerges from the aperture below.

The amount of water used by troops is usually computed at the rate of
five gallons for each man and ten gallons for each animal per day.

=1254. Rules of sanitation.= The following rules of sanitation are to
be observed:

Men should not lie on damp ground. In temporary camps and in bivouac
they raise their beds if suitable material, such as straw, leaves, or
boughs can be obtained, or use their ponchos or slickers. In cold
weather and when fuel is plentiful the ground may be warmed by fires,
the men making their beds after raking away the ashes.

When troops are to remain in camp for some time all underbrush is
cleared away and the camp made as comfortable as possible. Watering
troughs, shelter in cold weather, and shade in hot, are provided for
the animals, if practicable.

The camp is policed daily after breakfast and all refuse matter
burned.

Tent walls are raised and the bedding and clothing aired daily,
weather permitting.

Tents must be kept clean and in order.

The company street and the ground around the tents must be kept clean.

Food, slop water, rags, paper, empty tin cans, and other trash and
refuse must not be thrown on the ground, but should be put in the box,
can or other receptacle provided for the purpose or thrown into the
incinerator.

The food must be protected from flies, dust and sun.

Under no circumstances must the company street or any other part of
the camp grounds be defiled by urinating or deficating thereon. The
urinal tub and the latrine must invariably be used.

When an open trench is used as a sink, each individual must always
cover his excrement with dirt.

If the sink is inclosed by a box with stool-covers, the covers must
always be put down as soon as one is through using them so as to keep
out the flies. However it is found in practice that men will not do
this therefore it is a good plan to construct the covers so that they
will close automatically when a man rises from the seat.

Kitchen garbage must be burned in a pit or incinerator, or put into
_covered_ cans and hauled away. _The covers must be kept on the cans
at all times_, so as to keep out the flies.

Horses are not to be ridden through camp except on the roadways.

As soon as a tent is pitched it should be ditched.

When it rains the guy ropes must be loosened to prevent the tent pegs
from pulling out and the tent falling down.

The body and the clothes should be cleaned daily as thoroughly as the
means at hand will permit.

In the morning wash the face and neck and don't fail to use your tooth
brush afterward.

In the continued absence of opportunity for bathing it is well to take
an air bath and a moist or dry rub before getting into fresh
underclothes.

If the lack of opportunity to wash clothes continues for any length of
time, soiled clothes and bedding must be frequently exposed to the sun
and air. Sunshine is a good germ killer.

If there are mosquitoes in camp, mosquito bars must be used by men
when asleep, and headnets by men on guard and other duty. Also, if in
a malarial country, about five grains of quinine should be taken
daily, preferably just before supper. In localities where a pernicious
form of malaria prevails, daily doses of ten grains of quinine should
be given.

In the tropics troops are require to camp at least 500 yards away from
all native huts or villages as a preventative measure against malaria.
Men are also prohibited from visiting these places at night for the
same reason.

Clean your mess kit thoroughly after every meal, if practicable,
washing same with soap and boiling water.

The company cooks must keep everything in the kitchen and mess tent
clean with hot water and soap. Boil the utensils and dish rags, and be
sure to throw all slops and garbage into the kitchen incinerator.

Rest and sleep are most important to preserve the health, so, keep the
body rested by plenty of sleep. Do not join idle parties going to walk
the streets of the nearest town at nights, nor sit up late playing
cards.

Observe in camp even with greater care than when in barracks the rules
of health and personal hygiene. (See pars. 1451-1477.)

=1255. Your camp, your home.= A soldier should always look upon his
camp as his home, which it is for the time being. Your tent is your
bedroom; the company street, your sitting-room; the latrine, your
toilet; the mess tent, your dining-room; the camp kitchen, your
kitchen; the bathing facilities, your bathroom. And as you are careful
about keeping your bedroom and the other rooms of your home in a clean
and orderly condition, so should you do your share to keep your tent
and the other parts of camp in a clean, sanitary condition.

CHAPTER XVI

INDIVIDUAL COOKING

=1256. Importance of individual cooking.= It often happens in campaign
that it is impossible to have the field ranges and cooking utensils
accompany the troops, and in such case each man must cook his own food
in his mess kit. Also, it frequently happens that detachments
operating away from their companies must do individual cooking.

All food we eat should be properly cooked, if not, stomach or
intestinal trouble will result. Hence, the importance of every soldier
learning how to cook in his mess kit the main components of the
ration.

=1257. Fire.= Remember that the best fire for cooking is a small,
clear one, or better yet, a few brisk coals. Dig a hole in the ground
with your bayonet and make your fire in it with dry wood, starting it
with paper, shavings, dry leaves or dry grass.

If preferred the fire may be made between two small flat stones or
bricks, care being taken to so place the stones that the draft will
pass between them. The mess pan can be placed on the stones, across
the fire, and the cup for boiling the coffee at the end away from the
draft where it will get the most heat.

This method will, as a rule, be necessary on rocky or stony ground.

=1258. Recipes.= The following recipes, which are based on the War
Department publication, "Manual for Army Cooks," require the use of
only the soldier's mess kit,--knife, fork, spoon, cup, and mess pan:

Meats

=1259. Bacon.= Cut side of bacon in half lengthwise. Then cut slices
about five to the inch, three of which should generally be sufficient
for one man for one meal. Place in a mesa pan with about one-half inch
of cold water. Let come to a boil and then pour the water off. Fry
over a brisk fire, turning the bacon once and quickly browning it.
Remove the bacon to lid of mess pan, leaving the grease for frying
potatoes, onions, rice flapjacks, etc., according to recipe.

=1260. Fresh meat.= _To fry._--To fry, a small amount of grease (1 to
2 spoonfuls) is necessary. Put grease in mess pan and let come to a
smoking temperature, then drop in the steak and, if about one-half
inch thick, let fry for about one minute before turning--depending
upon whether it is desired it shall be rare, medium, or well done.
Then turn and fry briskly as before. Salt and pepper to taste.

Applies to beef, veal, pork, mutton, venison, etc.

=1261. Fresh meat.= _To broil._--Cut in slices about 1 inch thick,
from half as large as the hand to four times that size. Sharpen a
stick or branch of convenient length, say from 2 to 4 feet long, and
weave the point of the stick through the steak several times so that
it may be readily turned over a few brisk coals or on the windward
side of a small fire. Allow to brown nicely, turning frequently. Salt
and pepper to taste. Meat with considerable fat is preferred, though
any meat may be broiled in this manner.

=1262. Fresh meat.= _To stew._--Cut into chunks from one-half inch to
1 inch cubes. Fill cup about one-third full of meat and cover with
about 1 inch of water. Let boil or simmer about one hour or until
tender. Add such fibrous vegetables as carrots, turnips, or cabbage,
cut into small chunks, soon after the meat is put on to boil, and
potatoes, onions, or other tender vegetables when the meat is about
half done. Amount of vegetables to be added, about the same as meat,
depending upon supply and taste. Salt and pepper to taste. Applies to
all fresh meats and fowls. The proportion of meat and vegetables used
varies with their abundance and fixed quantities can not be adhered
to. Fresh fish can be handled as above, except that it is cooked much
quicker, and potatoes, onions, and canned corn are the only vegetables
generally used with it, thus making a chowder. A slice of bacon would
greatly improve the flavor. May be conveniently cooked in mess pan or
tin cup.

Fresh Vegetables

=1263. Potatoes, fried.= Take two medium-sized potatoes or one large
one (about one-half pound), peel and cut into slices about one-fourth
inch thick and scatter well in the mess pan in which the grease
remains after frying the bacon. Add sufficient water to half cover the
potatoes, cover with the lid to keep the moisture in, and let come to
a boil from fifteen to twenty minutes. Remove the cover and dry as
desired. Salt and pepper to taste. During the cooking the bacon
already prepared may be kept on the cover, which is most conveniently
placed bottom side up over the cooking vegetables.

=1264. Onions, fried.= Same as potatoes.

=1265. Potatoes, boiled.= Peel two medium-sized potatoes or one large
one (about one-half pound), and cut in coarse chunks of about the same
size--say 1-1/2-inch cubes. Place in mess pan and three-fourths fill
with water. Cover with lid and let boil or simmer for fifteen or
twenty minutes. They are done when easily penetrated with a sharp
stick. Pour off the water and let dry out for one or two minutes over
hot ashes or light coals.

=1266. Potatoes, baked.= Take two medium-sized potatoes or one large
one cut in half (about one-half pound.) Lay in a bed of light coals,
cover with same and smother with ashes. Do not disturb for thirty or
forty minutes, when they should be done.

=1267. Rice.= Take two-thirds of a cup of water and bring to a boil.
Add 4 spoonfuls of rice and boil until soft, that is, until it can be
mashed by the fingers with but little resistance. This will require
about 15 minutes. Add 2 pinches of salt and, after stirring, pour off
the water and empty the rice out on the lid of the mess pan.

=1268. Canned Tomatoes.= One 2-pound can is generally sufficient for
five men.

_Stew._ Pour into the mess pan one man's allowance of tomatoes, add
about two large hardtacks broken into small pieces, and let come to a
boil. Add salt and pepper to taste, or add a pinch of salt and
one-fourth spoonful of sugar.

_Or_, having fried bacon, pour the tomatoes into the mess pan, the
grease remaining, and add, if desired, two broken hardtacks. Set over
a brisk fire and let come to a boil.

_Or_, heat the tomatoes just as they come from the can, adding two
pinches of salt and one-half spoonful of sugar if desired.

_Or_, especially in hot weather, eaten cold with hard bread they are
very palatable.

Hot Breads

=1269. Flapjack.= Take 6 spoonfuls of flour and one-third spoonful of
baking powder and mix thoroughly (or dry mix in a large pan before
issue, at the rate of 25 pounds of flour and three half-pound cans of
baking powder for 100 men). Add sufficient cold water to make a batter
that will drip freely from the spoon, adding a pinch of salt. Pour
into the mess pan, which should contain the grease from fried bacon,
or a spoonful of butter or fat, and place over medium hot coals
sufficient to bake so that in from five to seven minutes the flapjack
may be turned over by a quick toss of the pan. Fry from five to seven
minutes longer or until, by examination, it is found to be done.

=1270. Hoecake.= Hoecake is made exactly the same as a flapjack by
substituting _corn meal_ for _flour_.

Drinks

=1271. Coffee.= Fill cup about two-thirds full of water and when it
boils add, 1 heaping spoonful of coffee, and let boil 5 minutes. Stir
grains well when adding. Add 1 spoonful of sugar, if desired. Let
simmer ten minutes after boiling. Settle with a dash of cold water or
let stand for a few minutes.

=1272. Tea.= Fill cup about two-thirds full of water and when it boils
add 1/2 spoonful of tea, and let boil 5 minutes. Add 1 spoonful of
sugar, if desired. Let stand or "draw" 8 minutes. If allowed to stand
longer, the tea will get bitter, unless separated from the grounds.

=1273. Cocoa.= Fill cup about two-thirds full of water and when it
boils add 1 heaping spoonful of cocoa and let boil 5 minutes. Stir
when adding until dissolved. Add 1-1/2 spoonful of sugar, if desired.
Let cool. (If available, milk should be used instead of water, and
should be kept somewhat below the boiling point. A 1-pound can of
evaporated milk with 3-1/2 quarts of water will make 1 gallon of milk
of the proper consistency for making cocoa or chocolate.)

=1274. Chocolate.= Same as cocoa, using 1 cubic inch of chocolate.

Emergency Ration

=1275. Emergency Rations.= Detailed instructions as to the manner of
preparing the emergency ration are found on the label with each can.
Remember that even a very limited amount of bacon or hard bread, or
both, taken with the emergency ration makes it far more palatable, and
greatly extends the period during which it can be consumed with
relish. For this reason it would be better to husband the supply of
hard bread and bacon to use with the emergency ration when it becomes
evident that the latter must be consumed, rather than to retain the
emergency ration to the last extremity to be used exclusively for a
longer period than two or three days.

CHAPTER XVII

CARE AND PRESERVATION OF CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT

=1276. General.= A soldier's clothing and equipment are issued to him
by his government for certain purposes, and he has, therefore, no
right to be in any way careless or neglectful of them.

The importance that the Government attaches to the proper care and
preservation of the soldier's clothing and equipment, is shown by the
fact that the matter is made the subject of one of the Articles of
War, the 84th, which prescribes that any soldier who, through neglect,
loses or spoils his arms, clothing or accouterments shall suffer such
punishment as a court-martial may direct.

Clothing

=1277.= Every article of clothing in your hands should receive as much
care and attention as you give your person.

Not only will your clothes last longer if properly cared for, but you
will look neater and better dressed, which will add much to your
military appearance.

Every soldier should have an A-1 whisk broom and no article of
clothing should ever be worn without first being thoroughly brushed.

=1278. Pressing.= Occasional pressing helps to preserve and freshen
clothes,--it puts new life into the cloth.

Blue clothing and woolen olive drab when worn regularly should be
pressed about once a week.

In a company where there is an iron for general use there is no reason
why every soldier should not press his own clothes.

=1279. Chevrons and stripes= can be cleaned by moistening a clean
woolen rag with gasoline and rubbing the parts and then pressing with
a hot iron.

=1280. Leggins.= When soiled, leggins must be washed. If the leggins
are allowed to dry without being rung out, they will look better.

=1281. Service hat and the caps= require nothing but brushing.

Shirts, underwear, socks, etc., should be carefully folded and put
away neatly.

=1282. A special suit of clothing for inspections, parades, etc.= Set
aside your best suit of clothes for inspections, parades and other
ceremonies. The uniform worn at these formations should not be worn
around in the barracks,--every man has sufficient "second best"
garments for barrack use.

=1283. Putting away.= Uniforms should be dried thoroughly, brushed and
properly folded before being put away. The number of folds should be
reduced to a minimum.

Before uniforms are put away they should be carefully examined and any
missing buttons, tears or stains should be attended to at once.

Lockers and other places in which clothing is kept must be free from
dust. They should be wiped off occasionally with a cloth wrung out of
soap suds.

=1284. Stains.= Tailors usually remove stains with a rubber made by
rolling tightly a piece of woolen cloth of some kind, about 2 inches
wide, until the roll is about an inch in diameter.

Rings in removing stains may be avoided by rubbing until very nearly
dry.

=1285. Grease spots.= Ordinarily benzine is a good stain remover in
case of grease spots, but its use is more or less dangerous. It should
be used in an open room or out of doors and never near a fire or
lights.

"Carbona," which can be purchased in almost any drug store, is
excellent for removing stains and it is perfectly safe.

Carbon tetrachloride (Merck's) is much cheaper than "Carbona" and
about equally as good. It retails at 45c a pint at nearly all drug
stores.

Grease spots can also be removed by placing a piece of brown paper,
newspaper, blotting paper or other absorbent paper over the stain, and
pressing with a hot iron.

=1286. Rust or ink stains= can be removed with a solution of oxalic
acid. Apply rapidly and rinse at once with plenty of fresh water; this
is most important--otherwise it will probably discolor the material.

=1287. Sweat stains= can not be removed. However, the color can be
partially restored and the material cleaned with a solution of ammonia
and water--1/3 liquid ammonia, 2/3 water.

=1288. The shine= that is sometimes left from pressing is caused by
leaving the iron on too long or using an iron that is too hot.

This shine, if the cloth is not scorched, can be removed by
"sponging," i. e., by placing a piece of damp muslin cloth on the
material and then applying the iron only long enough to steam the
surface of the garment.

=1289. Grease and oil stains= on white trouser stripes can be removed
with benzine, naptha or gasoline, applied with a stiff nail brush.
Stains of rust and ink can be removed by means of oxalic acid (2
ounces of oxalic acid to 1 pint of water--dissolves quickest in warm
water) applied with cloth or brush, then rinsed thoroughly with plain
water and sponge. After the stripes have dried, apply English
pipe-clay, rubbing with the cake itself; then rub in uniformly with
woolen cloth rubber--rub vigorously--then brush off surplus pipe-clay.

=1290. Paint spots.= Turpentine will take out paint spots.

=1291. Gilt ornaments and gilt buttons= should be polished as often as
necessary in order to keep them fresh and bright. Use a button stick
in cleaning buttons, so as not to soil the cloth.

Shoes

(_Instructions issued by the Quartermaster General's Office, June 16,
1899._)

=1292. General care.= Shoes should at all times be kept polished. By
being so kept they are made more pliable and wear longer.

Shoes must withstand harder service than any other article worn, and
more shoes are ruined through neglect than by wear in actual service.

Proper care should be taken in selecting shoes to secure a proper fit,
and by giving shoes occasional attention much discomfort and complaint
will be avoided.

=1293. Selection.= A shoe should always have ample length, as the foot
will always work forward fully a half a size in the shoe when walking,
and sufficient allowance for this should be made. More feet are
crippled and distorted by shoes that are too short than for any other
reason. A shoe should fit snug yet be comfortable over ball and
instep, and when first worn should not lace close together over the
instep. Leather always stretches and loosens at instep and can be
taken up by lacing. The foot should always be held firmly, but not too
tightly in proper position. If shoes are too loose, they allow the
foot to slip around, causing the foot to chafe; corns, bunions, and
enlarged joints are the result.

=1294. Repairs.= At the first sign of break, shoes should be repaired,
if possible. Always keep the heels in good condition. If the heel is
allowed to run down at the side, it is bad for the shoe and worse for
the foot; it also weakens the ankle and subjects the shoe to an uneven
strain, which makes it more liable to give out. Shoes, if kept in
repair, will give double the service and comfort.

=1295. Shoe dressing.= The leather must not be permitted to become
hard and stiff. If it is impossible to procure a good shoe
dressing[15], neat's-foot oil or tallow are the best substitutes;
either will soften the leather and preserve its pliability. Leather
requires oil to preserve its pliability, and if not supplied will
become brittle, crack, and break easily under strain. Inferior
dressings are always harmful, and no dressing should be used which
contains acid or varnish. Acid burns the leather as it would the skin,
and polish containing varnish forms a false skin which soon peels off,
spoiling the appearance of the shoe and causing the leather to crack.
Paste polish containing turpentine should also be avoided.

=1296. Perspiration.= Shoe becoming damp from perspiration should be
dried naturally by evaporation. It is dangerous to dry leather by
artificial heat. Perspiration contains acid which is harmful to
leather, and shoes should be dried out as frequently as possible.

=1297. Wet shoes.= Wet or damp shoes should be dried with great care.
When leather is subjected to heat, a chemical change takes place,
although no change in appearance may be noted at the time. Leather
when burnt becomes dry and parched and will soon crack through like
pasteboard when strained. This applies to leather both in soles and
uppers. When dried the leather should always be treated with dressing
to restore its pliability. Many shoes are burned while on the feet
without the knowledge of the wearer by being placed while wet on the
rail of a stove or near a steam pipe. Care should be taken while shoes
are being worn never to place the foot where there is danger of their
being burned.

(Note. To dry wet shoes, the last thing at night take a few handfuls
of dry clean pebbles, heat them in meat can, kettle or campfire until
very hot; place them in the shoes,--they will dry them out thoroughly
in a few hours,--shake once in awhile. Oats or corn may also be used,
but they are not available always and pebbles usually are. Now is an
excellent time to grease or oil the shoes.--Author.)

=1298. Keep shoes clean.= An occasional application of soap and water
will remove the accumulation of old dressings and allow fresh dressing
to accomplish its purpose.

=1299. Directions for polishing.= Russet leather should be treated
with great care. Neither acid, lemon juice, nor banana peel should be
used for cleaning purposes. Only the best liquid dressing should be
used and shoes should not be rubbed while wet.

=1300. Liquid dressing.= Care should be taken in using liquid
dressing. Apply only a light coat and _allow this to dry into the
leather before rubbing_ with a cloth. Too much dressing is wasteful.

EQUIPMENT

(_Instructions issued by the Ordnance Department in Pamphlet No. 1965,
July 12, 1915._)

Cloth Equipment

=1301. General.= All cloth equipment should be brushed frequently with
a stiff bristle brush. A dry scrub brush may be used.

It should be washed only under the direction and supervision of an
officer.

During ordinary garrison duty it should rarely be necessary to wash
the equipment.

When the equipment becomes soiled a light local washing will
frequently be sufficient, but when dirty it should unhesitatingly be
given a good thorough washing,--otherwise it may be expected that it
will become unsanitary and rot.

During field service it is to be expected that the equipment will
become soiled much more rapidly. Always on return to garrison from
field service and as opportunity offers in the field, equipment should
be thoroughly washed.

=1302. Instructions for washing cloth equipment.=

(a) _Preparation of soap solution._ Dissolve in nine cups of hot water
one cake of H. & H. soap or a substitute which is issued by the
Ordnance Department.

One cup of this solution is sufficient to clean the entire cloth and
web equipment of one man. One cake per squad is a liberal allowance.

The H. & H. soap issued by the Ordnance Department is made especially
for washing cloth fabrics liable to fade. If for any reason this soap
is not obtainable, a good laundry soap (Ivory or equal) may be used,
but in no case should the yellow soap issued by the Quartermaster
Corps be used.

(b) _Brushing._ Brush the equipment thoroughly to remove all dust and
mud before washing.

(c) _Washing._ Spread the belt, haversack, etc., on a clean board or
rock and apply the soap solution with a scrub brush. When a good
lather appears, wash off with clear water.

In the case of a bad grease spot the direct application of soap to the
brush will ordinarily be sufficient to remove it.

(d) _Drying. Always dry washed equipment in the shade._ The sun will
bleach the fabric.

On return from a march in the rain, dry the equipment in the shade, if
practicable.

=1303. Shelter tent.= The shelter tent is cleaned and cared for as
prescribed above for the cloth equipment.

When practicable always dry your shelter tent before folding and
packing it. (Author.)

Mess Outfit

=1304. Knife.= The knife blade is made of tempered steel, and when put
away for a long period should be covered with a light coating of oil
to prevent rust.

Keep your knife clean by washing in soap and water after every meal.

Do not use the blade as a pry.

If the point is broken, grind the blade down to a new point.

=1305. Fork.= Keep your fork clean by washing with hot water and soap
after every meal.

Never use the prongs of your fork for prying open tops of cans,
extracting corks, etc.

Don't permit your knife, fork or spoon to remain in vinegar or other
foodstuffs for a long period, as verdigris will form. This corrodes
the metal and is poisonous.

=1306. Spoon.= Keep your spoon clean by washing with soap and water
after every meal.

=1307. Meat can.= Do not carry meat of any kind or other greasy
substance in the meat can for a long period, as it will corrode the
aluminum.

If the rivets securing the hinge to the meat can become loose, a few
blows with a hammer or hand ax on the outside ends of the rivets, the
heads of the rivets being backed up on a piece of metal, will tighten
them.

If the hinge pin becomes loose, a nail can be used to replace it, the
nail being cut with a service wire cutter and the ends of the nail
headed over slightly with a few blows of a hammer.

=1308 Bacon can.= The interior of the bacon can should always be kept
clean and free from hardened grease or dirt by frequent washings with
soar and water.

If the cover becomes loose on the body of the can, the upper half of
the body may be bent out until the cover is again tight.

If the cover is too tight, a slight amount of flattening with a hammer
on the edge of the cover, resting on a wooden block, will usually
extend the cover sufficiently.

=1309. Condiment can.= When not in use, always remove the contents.
Many cans have been ruined by neglecting to do this.

See that the threaded ends do not become rusty.

The can should be disassembled at all inspections, so that the
inspecting officer may see that no rust is present.

=1310. Cup.= The cup is made of aluminum and excessive heat damages
aluminum.

In using the cup for cooking never allow the contents to evaporate
entirely. In other words, never hold an empty cup over a fire.

Keep your cup clean with hot water and soap,--preferably H & H soap.

=1311. Canteen.= Although as a rule, only soap and water should be
used in cleaning aluminum, a little sand can be used to advantage in
cleaning the canteen.

Particular attention must be taken to see that canteens are properly
cleaned after they have been filled with coffee, milk or any other
fluid containing organic matter.

Being made of aluminum the canteen is easily dented, and care must be
taken to prevent this.

When not actually in use the canteen should habitually be emptied and
the cup left off to dry.

Intrenching Tools

=1312. Pick mattock.= If the blade of the mattock is deformed, it
should be straightened in a vise.

In the field, cracked handles of pick mattocks, shovels, and hand axes
should be wrapped with cord.

=1313. Shovel.= Do not use the side edges of the shovel blade as a
mattock, for this will deform the blade.

If the blade becomes bent, straighten it with a hammer on a block of
wood.

Keep your intrenching tool free from rust, being especially careful
that no rust gets into the sockets.

Leather Equipment

=1314. General.= Because of the value of leather equipment and its
rapid deterioration if neglected, the proper care of leather is most
important.

=1315. Materials.= Two agents are necessary to the proper cleaning of
leather,--a _cleaning agent_ and an _oiling agent_.

The _cleaning agent_ issued by the Ordnance Department is castile
soap; the _oiling agents_ are neat's-foot oil and harness soap.[16]

The soap cleans the surface of the leather, and removes from the
surface pores of the leather, dirt, sweat, and other foreign matter,
so that the oil can more readily penetrate the pores and saturate the
fibers, thus making the leather pliable and elastic.

=1316. Cleaning.= Daily, or as often as used, leather equipment should
be wiped off with a cloth slightly dampened in water, merely to remove
mud, dust or other foreign substances.

This daily care will do much to maintain the appearance of the
equipment, but it is, however, insufficient of itself to properly
preserve it.

Leather should never be cleaned by immersing in water or holding under
a hydrant.

At intervals of from one to four weeks, depending upon the
circumstances, it is essential that the equipment be thoroughly
cleaned in accordance with the following instructions:

(a) Separate all parts, unbuckle straps, remove all buckles, loops,
etc., where possible.

(b) Wipe off all surface dust and mud with a damp (not wet) sponge.
After rinsing out the sponge, a lather is made by moistening the
sponge in clear water, squeezing it out until nearly dry, and rubbing
it vigorously upon castile soap. When a thick, creamy lather is
obtained, thoroughly clean each piece of the equipment without
neglecting any portion. Each strap should be drawn its entire length
through the lathered sponge so as to actually remove the salt, sweat,
and dirt from each leather piece.

(c) After again rinsing the sponge make a thick lather as described
above with the saddle soap. Go over each separate piece, thoroughly
working the lather well into every part of the equipment, remembering
that its action is that of a dressing.

(d) After the leather has been allowed to become partially dry, it
should be rubbed vigorously with a soft cloth to give it the neat,
healthy appearance that is desired.

=1317. Oiling.= If the foregoing instructions have been carefully
followed, the appearance should now be perfect, and if the leather is
soft and pliable nothing further is required. It will be found,
however, that it will be necessary from time to time to apply a little
oil. It is not practicable, owing to different conditions of climate
and service, to prescribe definitely the frequency of oiling. It has
been found that during the first few months of use a set of new
equipment should be given at least two applications of oil per month.
Thereafter it is entirely a matter of judgment, as indicated by the
appearance and pliability of the leather. Frequent, light applications
are of more value than infrequent heavy applications.

=1318. New equipment.= Before using, perfectly new equipment should in
all cases be given a light application of neat's-foot oil; soap is
unnecessary because the leather is clean. The application of oil is
important because leather equipment frequently remains a considerable
time in an arsenal or depot and in spite of periodical inspections and
dubbing it is probably too dry for severe service.

=1319. How to apply oil.= The quantity of oil to be used can not be
definitely prescribed. If not enough oil is used, the leather will be
stiff and brittle; if too much is used, it will soil the clothing and
accumulate dirt. The leather should, therefore, be saturated with
sufficient oil to be soft and pliable without excess sufficient to
cause it to exude.

In applying the oil the following general instructions should govern:

(a) The oil should be applied to the flesh side of the equipment where
practicable when the leather is clean and still damp after washing
(about half dry), because it penetrates more uniformly when applied
from the flesh side, and when the leather is damp. If the leather is
dry it will absorb the oil like blotting paper, preventing proper
distribution.

(b) The oil should be applied with an oiled rag or cotton waste by
long, light, quick strokes--light strokes, so that the pressure
applied may not squeeze out an excess of oil; quick strokes, so that
the leather may not absorb an undue amount of oil. The endeavor should
be to obtain a light, even distribution.

(c) After applying the oil the leather equipment should be allowed to
stand for 24 hours, if practicable, in a warm dry place. It should
then be rubbed with a dry cloth to remove any unabsorbed oil.

Points to Be Remembered

=1320.= Therefore, from what has been said, the following points must
be remembered:

(a) Keep leather clean.

(b) Keep leather pliable by frequent applications of oil.

(d) _Dry all leather wet from whatever cause, in the shade_; never in
the sun or close to a steam radiator, furnace, or boiler.

(e) Leather should habitually be stored in a cool, dry place, _without
artificial heat_.

FOOTNOTES:

[15] "Viscol" is the best oil for softening all kinds of leather that
the author knows of. It is made by The Viscol Co, East Cambridge,
Mass., and can be obtained from the post exchange.

[16] Propert's Harness Soap is excellent. However, since the European
War its issue has been discontinued by the Ordnance Department.
"Viscol," obtainable from the post exchange, is the best oil for
softening all kinds of leather that the author knows of.

CHAPTER XVIII

CARE AND DESCRIPTION OF THE RIFLE

Care

=1321. Importance.= The care of his rifle should be the soldier's
first thought; for, if he would have it take care of him in time of
danger, he must take care of it at all times.

_It is a generally recognized fact that more rifles become inaccurate
and unserviceable by the lack of care than by firing._

The instructions for taking care of the rifle are few and simple.
Learn them well and _apply them constantly_--it only requires a little
care and patience. You will be well repaid for it. It may some day
save your life.

=1322. Care of bore requires work.= The bore of the rifle is
manufactured with the greatest care in order that a high degree of
accuracy may be obtained, and it should, therefore, be properly cared
for.

The proper care of the bore requires conscientious, careful work, but
it pays well in reduced labor of cleaning and in prolonged accuracy
life of the rifle, and better results in target practice.

=1323. How to clean the bore.= With the cleaning rod the bore must
always be cleaned from the breech--never from the muzzle. Cleaning
from the muzzle is liable to wear and otherwise injure the mouth of
the barrel, which is easily injured and thus the piece rendered
inaccurate.

First, remove the bolt from the rifle, place the muzzle on the floor,
a board, or piece of canvas, and do not remove it therefrom while the
cleaning rod is in the bore. Never place the muzzle on the bare
ground, lest dirt should get into it. (Note. Of course, if a rack is
provided for cleaning rifles, it should be used instead of placing the
muzzle on the floor.)

To clean the bore use patches of rag, preferably canton flannel,
cutting them into squares of such size that they may easily run
through the barrel.

=1324. What care of the bore consists of.= Briefly stated, the care of
the bore consists of removing the fouling resulting from firing to
obtain a chemically clean surface, and then coating this surface with
a film of oil to prevent rusting.

=1325. Kinds of fouling.= The fouling which results from firing is of
two kinds--the _powder fouling_, from the burning of the powder; and
the _metal fouling_, from the nickel scraped off the bullet as it
passes through the bore.

The _powder fouling_ is highly corrosive, that is, it causes rust and
eats into the metal, and it must, therefore, be removed as soon as
possible.

The _metal fouling_ itself will not cause rust, but it may cover the
powder fouling and thus prevent the cleaning material from getting at
the powder fouling, which, as stated before, will eat into the metal.
When metal fouling accumulates in noticeable quantities it reduces the
accuracy of the rifle.

=1326. How to remove powder fouling.= Powder fouling may be readily
removed by scrubbing the bore with the soda solution (hot) furnished
by the Ordnance Department, but this solution has no effect on the
metal fouling.

It is, therefore, necessary to remove all metal fouling before we are
sure that all powder fouling has been removed and that the bore may be
safely oiled.

Ordinarily, after firing a barrel in good condition, the metal fouling
is so slight as to be hardly perceptible, and is easily removed by
solvents.

However, due to the accumulation of metal fouling, pitting (little
hollows in the metal) or the presence of dust, or other abrasives
(substances that cause the metal to wear away by rubbing), the fouling
may occur in clearly visible flakes or patches and be much more
difficult to remove.

=1327. How to remove metal fouling.= After scrubbing out the bore with
the soda solution, plug it from the breech with a cork at the front
end of the chamber or where the rifling begins.

Slip one of the 2-inch sections of rubber hose over the muzzle down to
the sight and fill with the standard Ordnance Department solution to
at least one-half inch above the muzzle of the barrel.

Let it stand for 30 minutes, then pour out the solution, remove the
hose and breech plug, and swab out thoroughly with soda solution to
neutralize and remove all trace of ammonia and powder fouling.

Wipe the barrel clean, dry, and oil.

With few exceptions, one application is sufficient, but if all fouling
is not removed, repeat the operation.

Hoppe's Nitro Solvent No. 9 will accomplish the same result even
better and quicker and with much less labor.

=1328. How to proceed in cleaning the bore.=

To clean the bore after firing, proceed as follows:

Swab out the bore with soda solution to remove powder fouling. A
convenient way to do this is to insert the muzzle of the rifle into
the can containing the solution and with the cleaning rod inserted
from the breech, pump the barrel full a few times.

Remove and dry with a couple of patches of cloth. Examine to see
whether any patches of metal fouling are in evidence, and if so, then
remove same as explained above. If no metal fouling is in evidence,
then swab out with the swabbing solution. The amount of swabbing
required with the swabbing solution can be determined only by
experience assisted by the color of the patches of cloth. Ordinarily a
couple of minutes' work is sufficient. Dry thoroughly, and oil with
3-in-One.

As a measure of safety a patch should _always_ be run through the bore
on the next day and the bore examined to insure that cleaning has been
properly done. The bore should then be oiled again with 3-in-One.

=1329. Necessity for preventing formation of pits.= It is a fact
recognized by all that a highly polished steel surface rusts much less
easily than one which is roughened; also that a barrel which is
pitted fouls much more rapidly than one which is smooth. Every effort,
therefore, should be made to prevent the formation of pits, which are
merely enlarged rust spots, and which not only affect the accuracy of
the piece but also increase the labor of cleaning.

=If swabbing solution or standard metal fouling solution is not
available=, the barrel should be scrubbed as already described, with
the soda solution, dried, and oiled with a light oil. At the end of 24
hours it should again be cleaned, when it will usually be found to
have "sweated." Usually a second cleaning is sufficient, but to insure
safety it should be again examined at the end of a few days, before
final oiling.

Of course, the swabbing solution should always be used, if available,
for it must be remembered that =each "puff" when the bore "sweats" is
an incipient rust pit=.

What has just been said contemplates the use of the solutions
furnished by the Ordnance Department. However, the same result will be
obtained with less labor by using Hoppe's Nitro Powder Solvent No. 9,
which is sold by all post and camp exchanges, and which the Author, as
the result of experience, highly recommends.

=1330. How to oil a barrel.= The proper method of oiling a barrel is
as follows:

Wipe the cleaning rod dry; select a clean patch of cloth and smear it
well with sperm or warmed cosmic oil, being sure that the cosmic has
soaked into the patch well; scrub the bore with patch, finally drawing
the patch smoothly from the muzzle to the breech, allowing the
cleaning rod to turn with the rifling. The bore will be found now to
be smooth and bright so that any subsequent rust or "sweating" can be
easily detected by inspection. (By "sweating" is meant, rust having
formed under the coating of metal fouling where powder fouling was
present, the surface is puffed up.)

=1331. Care of the chamber.= The chamber of the rifle is often
neglected because it is not readily inspected. Care should be taken to
see that it is cleaned as thoroughly as the bore. A roughened chamber
delays greatly the rapidity of fire, and not infrequently causes
shells to stick.

=1332. The bolt.= To clean the bolt, remove; clean all parts
thoroughly with an oily rag; dry, and before assembling _lightly_ oil
the firing pin, the barrel of the sleeve, the striker, the well of the
bolt, and all cams.

=1333. The sights.= Both the front and rear sights should be cared for
just as you would care for the works of your watch. If the sights are
injured, the rifle will not shoot as aimed.

The front sight cover issued by the Ordnance Department protects the
front sight.

=1334. The magazine.= The magazine should be kept clean and covered
with a thin coat of oil.

=1335. The stock.= The stock should receive a light coat of raw
linseed oil once a month, or after any wetting from rain, dew, etc.
The oil should be thoroughly rubbed in with the hand.

=1336. Care of the mechanism.= When the rifle has been wet or exposed
to unfavorable climatic conditions, the bolt should be withdrawn and
all working parts carefully wiped with a dry cloth, and then gone
over with an oily rag.

The same thing should be done after firing.

All working parts should habitually be _lightly_ oiled with a
thin-bodied oil, such as "3-in-One."

=1337. The care of all metal parts.= All metal parts of the rifle
should be kept clean and free from rust.

=1338. Cams and bearings.= All cams and bearings must be kept
constantly oiled.

=1339. How to apply oil.= Do not pour or squirt oil on the rifle.

Put a few drops on a piece of clean cloth, preferably cotton, and rub
with the cloth, thereby avoiding the use of an unnecessary amount.

Cams and bearings can be oiled this way. However, if the oiler is used
instead because of greater ease in reaching them, oil them _lightly_.
To soak with oil accomplishes no more than to cover with a light
coating--it merely results in excessive, undesirable smearing and a
waste of oil.

Remember

=1340.= 1. It is easier to prevent than to remove rust.

2. To remove rust, apply oil with a rag, and let it stand for a while
so as to soften the rust; then wipe with a dry rag.

3. Emery paper or a burnisher must never be used in removing rust, for
it also removes the bluing.

However, an ordinary rubber eraser will be found very serviceable for
removing rust.

4. To prevent rust and dirt in the bore, run a rag through at least
once each day.

5. Never, under any circumstances, put away a rifle that has been
fired or exposed to bad weather, without first cleaning it.

6. Never lay your rifle flat on the ground. Not only is there danger
of dirt or other foreign matter getting into the bore, but a vehicle
may run over it, or some one may step on the sight. Always rest it up
_securely_ against something. On the target range it is well for every
soldier to have a short wood or metal fork, on which to rest his
rifle.

7. In coming to the order from any position, always bring the rifle to
the ground _gently_.

Army Regulations Regarding the Rifle

=1341.= _Are enlisted men allowed to take their arms apart?_

No; not unless they have the permission of a commissioned officer, and
even then only under proper supervision and in the manner prescribed
in the descriptive pamphlet issued by the Ordnance Department. (A. R.
292.)

(Except when repairs are needed, the following named parts should
never be dismounted by the soldier, and whenever they are taken apart
they should be removed only by the company mechanic, or someone else
familiar with the handling of tools and delicate mechanism: Bolt stop,
cut off, safety lock, sleeve lock, front sight, front sight movable
stud, lower band, upper band, and stacking swivel screws.)

(Unless the screw driver is handled carefully and with some skill the
screws are sure to be injured either at the head or thread. The
soldier may dismount the bolt and magazine mechanism for the purpose
of cleaning them, but he is not permitted to do any further
dismounting without the authority of a commissioned officer.)

_Is the polishing of blued and browned parts permitted?_

No, and rebluing, rebrowning, putting any portion of an arm in fire,
removing a receiver from a barrel, mutilating any part by fire or
otherwise, and attempting to beautify or change the finish, are
prohibited. However, the prohibition of attempts to beautify or change
the finish of arms is not construed as forbidding the application of
raw linseed oil to the wood parts of arms. This oil is considered
necessary for the preservation of the wood, and it may be used for
such polishing as can be given when rubbing in one or more coats when
necessary. The use of raw linseed oil only is allowed for redressing
and the application for such purpose of any kind of wax or varnish,
including heelball, is strictly prohibited. (Army Regulations 292.)

_Is the use of tompions[17] in small arms permitted?_

No, it is prohibited by regulations. (Army Regulations 292.)

_Should pieces be unloaded before being taken to quarters or tents?_

Yes, unless it is otherwise ordered. They should also be unloaded as
soon as the men using them are relieved from duty. (Army Regulations
292.)

_Should a loaded or unloaded rifle or revolver ever be pointed at
anyone in play?_

No, under no circumstances whatsoever. _A soldier should never point a
rifle or revolver at a person unless he intends to shoot him._

Description

=1342. Nomenclature of the rifle.= The illustrations on this page and
those on the two following pages give the nomenclature of the rifles,
with which every soldier should be familiar.

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

The bolt (Fig. 2) consists of the _handle_, A; _sleeve_, B; _safety
lock_, C; _Cocking piece_, D; _safety lug_, E; _extractor_, F;
_extractor collar_, G; _locking lugs_, H; _extractor tongue groove_,
I; and _gas escape hole_, J.

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

=1343. Rear-sight leaf; drift slide; wind gauge.= The illustration on
the opposite page shows the _rear sight leaf_ (raised), the _drift
slide_ (E), and the _wind gauge_ (F, L.). It is most important that
the soldier be thoroughly familiar with the use of these parts, for
otherwise it is impossible for him to sight correctly and use his
rifle properly.

The leaf is graduated from 100 to 2850 yards. The lines that extend
the whole way across the two branches of the leaf, mark 100 yard
divisions; those that extend about half way across, mark 50 yard
divisions, and the shorter lines mark 25 yard divisions.

The _even_ numbers (4, 6, 8, etc.) on the _left_ branch of the leaf,
indicate 400, 600, 800, etc, yards.

The _odd_ numbered hundreds of yards (300, 500, 700, etc.) are on the
_right_ branch of the leaf.

_The numbers rest on top of the lines to which they refer._

So, if you want to fire at a target 800 yards away, set the rear sight
at 8; 1,000 yards, at 10; 1,200 yards, at 12, etc.

With the fly leaf up, ranges from 100 to 2350 yards can be obtained
through the _peep hole_, K; from 100 to 2450 through the lower _peep
notch_, J; and from 1400 to 2750 yards through the upper _peep notch_,
G.

There is a horizontal line on the drift slide, across the _peep hole_,
K. If the _peep hole_ sight is used the sight is set by this
horizontal line, which is set opposite the proper graduation (line
across branch of leaf).

If the _peep notch_, J, is used, the sight is set by the short
horizontal line--that is, on a line with the top of the notch.

If the _peep notch_, G, is used, the sight is set by the top of the
_slide_, C, which is set on the proper graduation.

Care must be taken not to use one of the _peep notches_ when the sight
has been set for the _peep hole_, or not to do the reverse, without
first changing the sight.

The _sighting notch_, A, used when the range is 2850 yards, is hardly
ever used, because the rifle is very, very seldom, if ever, fired at
that range.

By _battle sight_ we mean the position of the rear sight with the leaf
down, and it corresponds to a sight setting of 530 yards. The notch,
H, that is used when the leaf is down is called the _battle sight
notch_. The battle sight is the only one used in _rapid fire_. In
unexpected, close encounters the side that first opens a rapid and
accurate fire has a great advantage over the other.

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

FOOTNOTES:

[17] Wooden stoppers or plugs that are put into the muzzles of rifles
and other arms to keep out dirt and water.

PART IV

RIFLE TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION

(Based on Small-Arms Firing Manual)

=1344. Object of system of instruction.= The object of the system of
rifle training and instruction employed in our Army is two-fold:

1. _To make of INDIVIDUALS, shots who in battle will make hits
instead of misses._

2. _To make of ORGANIZATIONS, pliable, manageable MACHINES,
capable of delivering in battle a volume of EFFECTIVE fire._

=1345. To make of INDIVIDUALS shots who in battle will make hits
instead of misses.= This is accomplished by INDIVIDUAL training and
instruction whereby the skill of the soldier as a rifleman is so
developed as to be up to the capabilities of his rifle, which is
probably the best and most accurate rifle in the world,--that is to
say--

_Effort is made to so develop the shooting skill of the soldier
that he will be able to make his rifle do the things that it is
capable of doing._

To accomplish this end the soldier is put through a course of
individual instruction that divides itself into three main phases or
stages, viz:--

1. _Preliminary drills._ By means of preliminary drills in the
form of sighting drills; position and aiming drills; and
deflection and correction elevation drills, he is taught the
theoretical, fundamental principles of shooting.

2. _Gallery practice._ Having been taught the theoretical,
fundamental principles of shooting by means of the preliminary
drills mentioned in the proceeding paragraph, the soldier is then
shown how to apply them in a simple, elementary way by being put
through a course of gallery practice with the .22 Cal. Gallery
Practice Rifle, using reduced charges. This practice may be called
the _transitory_ phase or period of individual instruction, during
which The soldier passes from his acquisition of the theoretical,
fundamental principles of shooting to their application to actual
firing, on the target range, with the regulation Army rifle.

3. _Range practice._ Having gone through the course in gallery
practice, the soldier then fires on the target range, applying and
putting into practice, with the regulation Army rifle; the
theoretical principles of shooting taught him during the
preliminary drills, and in the application and practice of which
he was also instructed during the gallery practice.

=1346. Other Instruction.= While the above phases embody the principal
subjects in which a soldier is trained and instructed in developing
his skill in shooting, he is also instructed in other matters that
are necessary to round out and complete his skill in
marksmanship,--for example, the care of the rifle, estimating
distances, the effect of light, wind, and temperature, etc.

=1347. To make of ORGANIZATIONS pliable, manageable MACHINES, capable
of delivering in battle a volume of EFFECTIVE fire.= This is
accomplished by _collective_ training and instruction, in which a
number of soldiers (for example, a squad, platoon, or company), under
command of a leader, fire, under assumed tactical situations, at
targets which simulate the appearance of an enemy under conditions
approaching those found in war. This kind of training and instruction
is called, "Combat practice."

In combat practice the individual is trained in firing as part of a
tactical unit,--that is to say, in coöperation with others,--and the
commanders of the tactical units are taught how to direct and control
the fire of their units,[18] obtaining the maximum efficiency of fire
by coördination of the skill and efforts of all the individuals of the
unit.

PROGRAM OF INSTRUCTION

=1348.= The following outline of the program of instruction gives a
sort of bird's-eye view of the system:

1. INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

{ (a) Theory of sighting. (The trajectory;
{ The line of sight; Sighting or aiming.)
1. Sights and Sighting. { (b) Kinds of sights. (Open; Peep; Battle.)
{ (c) Kinds of sight. (That is, amount of
{ front sight taken.) (Normal; Fine; Full.)

{ (a) Sighting drills. (Importance and purpose;
{ Point of aim; Triangle of sighting.)
{ (Verifying the triangle; causes of errors.)
{ (b) Position and aiming drills. (Objects
2. Preliminary drills. { [3]; Position exercise; Aiming exercise;
{ Trigger-squeeze exercise; Rapid-fire exercise;
{ Kneeling, sitting down, and prone.)
{ (c) Deflection and elevation correction
{ drills.

3. Gallery practice. (Object and importance.)

4. Range practice. (Instruction practice; Range practice.)

5. Other Instruction. (Use of sling; Designation of winds; Zero
of rifle; Estimating distances [with the eye, by trial shots, and by
trial volleys]; Wind; Temperature; Light; Mirage; Care of rifle, etc.)

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION

Sights and Sighting

_Theory of Sighting_

=1349. The trajectory.= As the bullet passes through the air it makes
a curved line something like this:

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

This curved line is called the _trajectory_.

The resistance of the air and the force of gravity (the force that
pulls all bodies toward the earth) are the two things that make the
path of the bullet a curved line, just the same as they make the path
of the baseball thrown by the player a curved line.

The resistance of the air holds the bullet back and the force of
gravity pulls it down, so that the two acting together make the
bullet's path curved.

The longer the range the more will the path of the bullet (the
trajectory) be curved, as shown by the following drawing:

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

=1350. Sighting or aiming.= Now, on the rifle there are two
"sights,"--the _front sight_ and the _rear sight_,--which enable the
rifleman to regulate the path of the bullet, as the ball player
regulates the path of the ball.

If the ball player wants distance, he throws the ball high (raises the
path, the trajectory), using his eye and guesswork, and likewise if
the rifleman wants to shoot at a distant target, he, too, shoots the
bullet high (that is, he raises the muzzle of his rifle), but he
doesn't have to depend upon guesswork. It is all worked out for him by
experts and all he need do is to set the _rear sight_ for the proper
range,--that is, for the distance the object is from him.

Aiming or sighting a rifle consists in bringing into line three
objects: _The target_, A, _the front sight_, B, and _the rear sight_,
C.

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

The rifle is so made and the sights placed on it in such a way that
when the piece is held in such a position that the _target_, the
_front sight_ and the _rear sight_ are in line, and the trigger is
pulled (squeezed) the bullet will strike the _target_.

You raise the muzzle of the piece by raising the rear sight,--that is,
raising the rear sight has the effect of raising the muzzle, for the
higher you raise the rear sight the higher must you raise the muzzle
in order to see the front sight and get it in line with the object
aimed at and the rear sight.

This is shown in the following illustrations:

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

[Illustration: Fig. 4a]

The rear sight, C, the front sight, B, and the bull's eye, A, are all
on a line with the eye, D, the rear sight being set for 200 yards.

Suppose we wanted to shoot at 2000 instead of 200 yards. We would
raise the slide up to 20 (2000 yards) on the sight leaf.

In order to see the bull's eye through the notch sight at 2000, we
must raise the eye to the position, D. We now have the rear sight, the
bull's eye and the eye in line, but we must bring the front sight in
line with them, which is done by raising the muzzle of the piece,
giving the result shown in Fig. 4a.

=1351. Line of sight.= With the open sight the line of sight is
determined by a point on the middle line of the notch of the rear
sight and the top of the front sight.

With the peep sight, the line of sight is determined by the _center_
of the peep and the top of the front sight.

Kinds of sights

=1352.= (See Fig. 3, par. 1343, giving rear sight leaf in detail.)

The different kinds of sights are as follows:

(a) =Open sight.= By _open sight_ is meant the use of any one of the
_sighting notches_.

To use the open sight:

1. Look through the sighting notch at the target. (Fig. 5.)

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

[Illustration: Fig. 6]

2. Bring the top of the front sight _on a line with the top and in the
center_ of the sight notch, _the top of the front sight being just
under the bull's eye_.

Because of its wide field of view and its readiness in getting a quick
aim with it, the open sight is the one that is generally used in the
later stages of battle, or when fire is to start immediately.

(b) =Peep Sight.= By _peep sight_ is meant the use of the _peep hole_
in the drift slide.

To use the peep sight:

1. Look through the peep hole at the target. (Fig. 7.)

[Illustration: Fig. 7]

2. Bring the top of the front sight to the _center_ of the peep hole,
_the top of the front sight being just under the bull's eye_. (Fig. 8)

[Illustration: Fig. 8

_Correct_]

_Be sure to get the top of front sight_, as in Fig. 8, _and not the
bull's eye_, as in Fig. 9, _in center of the peep hole_.

[Illustration: Fig. 9

_Incorrect_]

=Advantage of the peep sight.= The advantage of the peep sight over
the open sight is due to the fact that it is easier to center the top
of the front sight in the peep hole and thus get the same amount of
front sight each time.

For example you know at once, without measuring, that the dots in the
circles, Fig. 10, are not centered, and that the one in the circle in
Fig. 11, is.

[Illustration: Fig. 10]

[Illustration: Fig. 11]

After a little practice, in looking through the peep hole the eye
almost automatically centers the top of the front sight.

=Disadvantage of the peep sight.= The disadvantage of the peep sight
is that its limited field of view and lack of readiness in getting a
quick aim with it limit its use to those stages of the combat when
comparative deliberation will be possible.

(c) =Battle sight.= By _battle sight_ we mean the position of the rear
sight with the leaf down. There is a sighting notch on the top of the
leaf, or rather on top of the leaf slide which works up and down the
leaf.

The battle sight is the only sight used in _rapid fire_. In
unexpected, close encounters the side that first opens a rapid and
accurate fire has a great advantage over the other. Again, a soldier
on patrol generally has no time to set his sight, if suddenly attacked
at close range. The battle sight, may, therefore be called the
_emergency sight_,--the _handy_, _quick sight_. The soldier should,
therefore, become thoroughly familiar with the use of this sight.

[Illustration: Fig. 12

_Battle sight_]

The _sighting notch_ in the slide with the rear sight leaf down, is
the same height as is the sighting in the drift slide when the rear
sight leaf is raised and set at 530 yards.

That is to say, _battle sight_ is equivalent to a sight setting of 530
yards. Therefore, in shooting with battle sight at objects nearer than
530 yards you must aim lower.

Kinds of Sight

=1353.= (Amount of front sight taken)

(a) =Normal sight.= The amount of front sight taken in Figs. 6 and 8,
is called the _normal_ sight and is the one that the soldier should
always use, either with the open notch or peep sight, as it is the
only sight which assures the taking of the same amount of front sight
every time. In other words it assumes a greater degree of _uniformity_
in sighting, which is one of the most important factors in shooting.
By uniformity in sighting is meant taking the same amount of sight
each time.

If you take _less_ than the amount of front sight used in the normal
sight, it will, of course, have the effect of _lowering_ the muzzle of
the piece, and consequently you will hit a point _lower_ than if you
had used the normal sight.

On the other hand, if you take _more_ than the amount of front sight
used in the normal sight, it will, of course, have the effect of
raising the muzzle and consequently you will hit a point _higher_ than
if you had used the normal sight.

(b) =Fine sight.= Although occasionally a man will be found who can
get good results by using the fine sight, the average man cannot, and
this form of sighting is, therefore, to be avoided.

[Illustration: Fig. 13

_Fine sight_]

(c) =Full sight.= The so-called _full sight_ must be avoided under all
circumstances. It is merely mentioned and shown here to point out a
fault that must be carefully avoided.

The objections to its use are the same as in the case of the fine
sight,--that is, lack of uniformity in the amount of sight taken.

[Illustration: Fig. 14

_Full sight_]

=1354. What the rifleman looks at when he fires.= The eye can be
focused accurately upon objects at only one distance at a time; all
other objects we see will be more or less blurred and fuzzy looking,
depending upon their distance from the object upon which our eye is
focused.

The rifleman who attains proficiency _focuses his eye on the target
while aiming_, but he glances at one sight and then the other to see
that they are aligned properly, then back at the target, and at the
instant of discharge _his eye is on the target_.

Preliminary Drills

=1355. Sighting, Position and Aiming Drills.= The importance of the
following sighting, position and aiming drills cannot be
overestimated. If they are carefully practiced, before firing a single
shot at a target, you will have learned how to aim your piece
correctly, hold your rifle steadily, squeeze the trigger properly,
assume that position best adapted to the particular conformation of
your body, and you will also have acquired the quickness and manual
skill required for handling the piece in rapid fire.

The sighting, position and aiming drills teach the fundamental
principles of shooting, which are the foundation upon which
marksmanship is built.

_Do not confine yourself to going through these drills only during
drill hours, but go through them frequently at other times. The extent
to which it will improve your shooting will more than repay you for
your trouble._

Sighting Drills

=1356. Object.= The objects of the sighting drill are:

1. To show how to bring the rear sight, the front sight and the target
into the same line,--that is, to show how to sight properly.

2. To discover and point out errors in sighting.--in other words, to
discover the errors you make in sighting and show the reasons for
same, so that you may be able to correct them properly.

3. To teach uniformity in sighting,--that is, to teach you how to take
the same amount of sight each time,--to see every time the same amount
of front sight when you look through the rear sight.

=Sighting rest for rifle.= A good sighting rest for a rifle may be
made by removing the top from an empty pistol ammunition box, or a
similar box, and then cutting notches in the ends of the box to fit
the rifle closely. (Fig. 15.)

[Illustration: Fig. 15]

[Illustration: Fig. 16]

Place the rifle in these notches with the trigger guard close to and
outside one end.

At a convenient distance above the ground fasten a blank sheet of
paper on a wall or on a plank nailed to a stake driven into the
ground.

Three legs are fastened to the rest (or it may be placed on the ground
without any legs), which is placed 20 or 30 feet from the blank sheet
of paper.

[Illustration: Fig. 17]

Make sure that the piece is canted neither to the right nor left, and
without touching the rifle or rest, sight the rifle near the center of
the blank sheet of paper (Fig. 17.)

Changes in the line of sight are made by changing the elevation and
windage.

A soldier acting as marker is provided with a pencil and a small rod
bearing at one end a small piece of white cardboard, with a black
bull's eye pierced in the center with a hole just large enough to
admit the point of a lead pencil.

[Illustration: Fig. 18]

The soldier sighting directs the marker to move the disk to the right,
left, higher, or lower, until the line of aim is established when he
commands, "Mark," or "Hold."

At the command "Mark," being careful not to move the disk, the marker
records through the hole in the center the position of the disk and
then withdraws it.

At the command "Hold," the marker holds the disk carefully in place
without marking, until the position is verified by the instructor, and
the disk is not withdrawn until so directed.

=1357. Point of Aim.= Always be sure to aim at a point just below the
black bull's-eye,--that is, aim so that there will be a fine line of
light between the bottom of the bull's-eye and the-top of the front
sight (Fig. 19). This is important to insure uniformity in
sighting,--that is, in order to make sure that you aim at the same
place on the target each time. If the top of the front sight touches
the bottom of the bull's-eye it is impossible to say just how much of
the front sight is seen, and how far up into the bull's-eye you are.

[Illustration: Fig. 19]

First Sighting Exercise

=1358.= Using the sighting rest for the rifle (Fig. 17) require each
man to direct the marker to move the disk until the rifle is directed
on the bull's-eye with the _normal_ sight and command, "Hold." If
aiming correctly the rear sight, the front sight and the bull's-eye
will look as shown in Fig. 19, above.

The instructor then verifies this line of sight. Errors, if any, will
be pointed out to the soldier and another trial made. If he is still
unable to sight correctly, he will be given as many more trials as may
be necessary.

Sometimes a man does not know how to place the eye in the line of
sight; he will look over or along one side of the notch of the rear
sight and believe that he is aiming through the notch because he sees
it at the same time that he does the front sight. Again some men in
sighting will look at the front sight and not at the object.

Repeat the above exercise, using the _peep_ sight. If aiming
correctly, the rear sight, the front sight and the bull's-eye will
look as shown in Fig. 20.

[Illustration: Fig. 20]

Second Sighting Exercise

=1359. The triangle of sighting.= Using the sighting rest for the
rifle as before (Fig. 17), direct the marker to move the disk until
the rifle is directed on the bull's-eye with the _normal_ sight and
command "Mark," whereupon the marker, being careful not to move the
disk, records through the hole in its center, the position of the
disk, and withdraws it. Then, being careful not to move the rifle or
sights repeat the operation until three marks have been made.

Join the three points by straight lines. The shape and size of the
triangle will indicate the nature of the variations made in sighting.

[Illustration: Fig. 21]

For example, if you have taken the same aim each time, you will get a
very small triangle something like this: [Illustration: triangle]
which resulted from taking each time this aim, for instance:

[Illustration: Fig. 22]

A triangle like Fig. 22 results from not taking the same amount of
front sight each time, as shown in Fig. 23.

[Illustration: Fig. 23]

[Illustration: Fig. 24]

A triangle like Fig. 24 shows that the front sight was not in the
middle of the notch each time, as shown in Fig. 25.

[Illustration: Fig. 25]

A triangle like Fig. 26 results from a combination of the two errors
mentioned above,--that is, not taking the same amount of front sight
each time and not having the front sight in the middle of the notch
each time, as shown in Fig. 27.

[Illustration: Fig. 26]

[Illustration: Fig. 27]

If any one of the sides of the triangle is longer than one-half inch,
the exercise is repeated, each sight being verified by the instructor,
who will call the soldier's attention to his errors, if any.

The smaller the triangle, the better the sighting.

=1360. Verifying the triangle.= If the sides of the triangle are so
small that they indicate regularity in sighting, mark the center of
the triangle and then place the center of the bull's-eye on this mark.
The instructor then examines the position of the bull's-eye with
reference to the line of sight. If the bull's-eye is properly placed
with reference to the line of sight, the soldier aims correctly and
with uniformity.

If the bull's-eye is not properly placed with reference to the line of
sight, the soldier aims in a regular manner but with a constant error.

=1361. Causes of errors.= If the bull's-eye is directly above its
proper position, the soldier has aimed high,--that is, he has taken
too little front sight.

If the bull's-eye is directly below its proper position, the soldier
has aimed low,--that is, he has taken too much front sight.

If the bull's-eye is directly to the right or left of its proper
position, the soldier has not sighted through the center of the rear
notch and over the top of the front sight. If to the _right_, the
soldier has either sighted along the _left_ of the rear sight notch or
the _right_ side of the front sight, or has committed both of these
errors.

If the bull's-eye is to the _left_ of its proper place, the soldier
has probably-sighted along the _right_ of the rear sight notch, or to
the _left_ of the front sight, or has committed both of these errors.

If the bull's eye is diagonally above and to the right, the soldier
has probably combined the errors which placed it too high and too far
to the right.

Any other diagonal position would be produced by a similar combination
of vertical and horizontal errors.

After the above instruction has been given to one man, the line of
sight will be slightly changed by moving the sighting rest or by
changing the elevation and windage, and the exercises similarly
repeated with other men.

Repeat the exercise, using the _peep_ sight.

Third Sighting Exercise

=1362.= This exercise shows the effect of canting the piece.

It is most important that in aiming the sights be kept vertical and
the piece not be canted,--that is, that the barrel be not tilted over
to the right or left.

If the piece is canted to the right, the sights are lowered to the
right and consequently the bullet will strike to the right and below
the point aimed at, even though the rifle be otherwise correctly aimed
and the sights correctly set.

Similarly if the piece is canted to the left the sights are lowered to
the left, and consequently the bullet will strike to the left and low.

This effect of canting the piece may be shown as follows: Use the
sighting rest with the rifle firmly held in the notches, the bolt
removed.

Paste a black paster near the center of the bottom line of the target.
Sight the rifle on this mark, using about 2000 yards' elevation. Then,
being careful not to move the rifle, look through the bore and direct
the marker to move the disk until the bull's-eye is in the center of
the field of view and command, "Mark."

Next, turn the rest (with the rifle) over 90° to the right, on its
side, and with the same elevation, sight on the same paster as above.
Then, being careful not to move the rifle, look through the bore and
again direct the marker to move the disk until the bull's-eye is in
the center of the field of view and command, "Mark."

Not considering the fall of the bullet, the first mark represents the
point struck with the sight vertical, the second mark represents the
point struck, low and to the right, using the same elevation and the
same point of aim, when the piece is canted 90° to the right.

Different degrees of canting the piece can be represented by drawing
an arc of a circle through the two marks with the paster as a center.
The second mark will be at a point on this arc corresponding to the
degree of canting the piece.

It is important to know that this effect of canting increases with the
distance from the target.

Fourth Sighting Exercise

=1363.= This exercise is to show the advantage of blackened sights.

In strong sunlight, make a triangle of sighting, using a rifle having
sights worn bright. Then, being careful not to move the rifle, blacken
the sights and make another triangle.

Use dotted lines for the triangle with bright sights and full lines
for the triangle made with blackened sights.

The position and size of the two triangles will plainly show the
advantage of using blackened sights.

Fifth Sighting Exercise

=1364.= This exercise is to illustrate the importance of knowing the
effects of varying degrees of light.

In strong sunlight make a triangle of sighting. Then, being careful
not to move the piece, make another triangle, the target and the man
sighting having first been shaded.

The relative positions of the triangles will show the importance of
knowing the effects of varying degrees of light.

Position and Aiming Drills

=1365. Object.= The object of the position and aiming drills are:

1. To so educate the muscles of the arm and body that the piece,
during the act of aiming, shall be held without restraint, and during
the operation of firing shall not be deflected from the target by any
convulsive or improper movement of the trigger finger or of the body,
arms, or hands.

2. They also establish between the hand and eye such prompt and
intimate connection as will insure that the finger shall act upon the
trigger, giving the final pressure at the exact moment when the top of
the front sight is seen to be directed upon the mark.

3. If at the moment the piece is discharged, it is properly supported
and correctly aimed, the mark will surely be hit.

Since any fairly intelligent man can be taught to aim correctly and to
hold the sights aligned upon the mark with a fair amount of
steadiness, it follows that bad shooting must necessarily arise from
causes other than bad aiming. The chief of these causes is known to be
the deflection given to the rifle when it is discharged, due to the
fact that the soldier, at the moment of firing, instead of SQUEEZING
the trigger, _jerks_ it. This convulsive action is largely due to lack
of familiarity with the methods of firing and to a constrained
position of the muscles of the body, arm, and hands, which constrained
position it is the object of the position and aiming drills to
correct.

=1366. General.= In order to correct any tendency to cant the piece,
the rear sight is raised in all the exercises.

Place a black paster at which to aim on the wall opposite each man.

The squad being formed in single rank, with an interval of one yard
between files, the instructor directs the men to take the position of
"Ready," except that the position of the feet is such as to insure the
greatest firmness and steadiness of the body.

The instructor then cautions, "Position and aiming drill."

The exercise which is being taught should be repeated frequently and
made continuous. The instructor prefaces the preparatory command by,
"Continue the motion," or "At will," and gives the command "Halt" at
the conclusion of the exercise, when the soldier returns to the
position of "Ready." Or the soldier may be made to repeat the first
and second motions by the command "One," "Two," the exercise
concluding with the command "Halt."

Care must be taken by the instructor not to make the position and
aiming drills tedious. Thirty minutes daily should be spent in this
practice during the period of preliminary instruction. After gallery
practice is taken up, however, five or ten minutes daily should be
sufficient for these exercises.

In order that the instructor may readily detect and correct errors the
squads for these drills should not consist of more than eight men.

The instructor should avoid holding the squad in tiresome positions
while making explanations or corrections.

Position Exercise

=1367.= The instructor commands: =1. Position, 2. EXERCISE.= At the
command, "_Exercise_" without moving the body or eyes, raise the rifle
smartly to the front of the right shoulder to the full extent of the
left arm, elbow inclined downward, the barrel nearly horizontal,
muzzle slightly depressed, heel of the butt on a line with the top of
the shoulder. (Fig. 28.)

[Illustration: Fig. 28]

(Two.) Bring the piece smartly against the hollow of the shoulder,
without permitting the shoulder to give way, and press the rifle
against it, mainly with the right hand, only slightly with the left,
the forefinger of the right hand resting lightly against the trigger,
the rifle inclined neither to the right nor left.

(Three.) Resume the position of ready. (Fig. 30.)

[Illustration: Fig. 29]

=Remarks.= The instructor should especially notice the position of
each soldier in this exercise, endeavoring to give to each man an
easy and natural position. He should see that the men avoid drawing in
the stomach, raising the breast, or bending the small of the back. The
butt of the piece must be pressed firmly, but not too tightly, into
the hollow of the shoulder and not against the muscles of the upper
arm. If held too tightly, the pulsations of the body will be
communicated to the piece; if too loosely, the recoil will bruise the
shoulder. If only the heel or toe touches the hollow of the shoulder,
the recoil may throw the muzzle down or up, affecting the position of
the hit. While both arms are used to press the piece to the shoulder,
the left arm should be used to direct the piece and the right
forefinger must be left free to squeeze the trigger.

[Illustration: Fig. 30]

Aiming Exercise

=1368.= The instructor will first direct the sights to be adjusted for
the lowest elevation and subsequently for the different longer ranges.

The instructor commands: =1. Aiming. 2. EXERCISE.= At the last command
execute the first and second motion of the position exercise.

(Two.) Bend the head a little to the right, the cheek resting against
the stock, the left eye closed, the right eye looking through the
notch of the rear sight at a point slightly below the mark. (Fig. 31.)

[Illustration: Fig. 31]

(Three.) Draw a moderately long breath, let a portion of it escape,
then, with the lungs in a state of rest, slowly raise the rifle with
the left hand, being careful not to incline the sight to either side,
until the line of sight is directly on the mark; hold the rifle
steadily directed on the mark for a moment; then, without command and
just before the power to hold the rifle steadily is lost, drop the
rifle to the position of "Ready" and resume the breathing.

=1369. Remarks.= Some riflemen prefer to extend the left arm. Such a
position gives greater control over the rifle when firing in a strong
wind or at moving objects. It also possesses advantages when a rapid
as well as accurate delivery of fire is desired. Whatever the
position, whether standing, kneeling, sitting, or prone, the piece
should rest on the palm of the left hand, never on the tips of the
fingers, and should be firmly grasped by all the fingers and the
thumb.

The eye may be brought to the line of sight either by lowering the
head or by raising the shoulder; it is best to combine somewhat these
methods; the shoulder to be well raised by raising the right elbow and
holding it well to the front and at right angles to the body.

If the shoulder is not raised, it will be necessary for the soldier to
lower the head to the front in order to bring the eye into the line of
sight. Lowering the head too far to the front brings it near the right
hand, which grasps the stock. When the piece is discharged, this hand
is carried by the recoil to the rear and, when the head is in this
position, may strike against the nose or mouth. This often happens in
practice, and as a result of this blow often repeated many men become
gun-shy, or flinch, or close their eyes at the moment of firing. Much
bad shooting, ascribed to other causes, is really due to this fault.
Raising the right elbow at right angles to the body elevates the right
shoulder, and lifts the piece so that it is no longer necessary to
incline the head materially to the front in order to look along the
sights.

As the length of the soldier's neck determines greatly the exact
method of taking the proper position, the instructor will be careful
to see that the position is taken without restraint.

As changes in the elevation of the rear sight will necessitate a
corresponding change in the position of the soldier's head when
aiming, the exercise should not be held with the sight adjusted for
the longer ranges until the men have been practiced with the sights as
the latter would generally be employed for offhand firing.

The soldier must be cautioned that while raising the line of sight to
the mark he must fix his eyes on the mark and not on the front sight;
the latter can then be readily brought into the line joining the
rear-sight notch and mark. If this plan be not followed, when firing
is held on the range at long distances the mark will generally appear
blurred and indistinct. The front sight will always be plainly seen,
even though the eye is not directed particularly upon it.

The rifle must be raised slowly, without jerk, and its motion stopped
gradually. In retaining it directed at the mark, care must be taken
not to continue the aim after steadiness is lost; this period will
probably be found to be short at first, but will quickly lengthen with
practice. No effort should be made to prolong it beyond the time that
breathing can be easily restrained. Each soldier will determine for
himself the proper time for discontinuing the aim.

The men must be cautioned not to hold the breath too long, as a
trembling of the body will result in many cases.

Some riflemen prefer, in aiming, to keep both eyes open but, unless
the habit is fixed, the soldier should be instructed to close the left
eye.

Trigger-Squeeze Exercise

=1370.= The instructor commands: =1. Trigger squeeze. 2. EXERCISE.= At
the command =Exercise=, the soldier executes the first motion of the
aiming exercise.

(Two.) The second motion of the aiming exercise.

(Three.) Draw a moderately long breath, let a portion of it escape,
hold the breath and slowly raise the rifle with the left hand until
the line of sight is on the mark, being careful not to incline the
sights to either side. Contract the trigger finger gradually, slowly
and steadily increasing the pressure on the trigger, while the aim is
being perfected; continue the gradual increase of pressure so that
when the aim has become exact the additional pressure required to
release the point of the sear can be given almost insensibly and
without causing any deflection of the rifle. Continue the aim a moment
after the release of the firing pin, observe if any change has been
made in the direction of the line of sight, and then resume the
position of "Ready," cocking the piece by raising and lowering the
bolt handle.

=Remarks.= Poor shooting is often the result of lack of proper
coördination of holding the breath, the maximum steadiness of aim, and
the squeeze of the trigger. By frequent practice in this exercise,
each man may come to know the exact instant his firing pin will be
released. He must be taught to hold the breath, bring the sights to
bear upon the mark, and squeeze the trigger all at the same time.

=1371. The Trigger Squeeze.= The trigger should be _squeezed_, not
pulled, the hand being closed upon itself as a sponge is squeezed, the
forefinger sharing in this movement. The forefinger should be placed
as far around the trigger as to _press_ it with the second joint. By
practice the soldier becomes familiar with the trigger _squeeze_ of
his rifle, and knowing this, he is able to judge at any time, within
limits, what additional _pressure_ is required for its discharge. By
constant repetition of this exercise he should be able finally to
_squeeze_ the trigger to a certain point beyond which the slightest
movement will release the sear. Having _squeezed_ the trigger to this
point, the aim is corrected and, when true, the additional pressure is
applied and the discharge follows.

[Illustration: Fig. 32]

Rapid-Fire Exercise

=1372. Object.= The object of this exercise is to teach the soldier to
aim quickly and at the same time accurately in all the positions he
will be called upon to assume in range practice.

The instructor commands: =1. Rapid-fire exercise. 2. COMMENCE FIRING.=
At the first command the first and second motions of the
trigger-squeeze exercise are performed. At the second command, the
soldier performs the third motion of the trigger-squeeze exercise,
squeezing the trigger without disturbing the aim or the position of
the piece, but at the same time without undue deliberation. He then
without removing the rifle from the shoulder, holding the piece in
position with the left hand, grasps the handle of the bolt with the
right hand, rapidly draws back the bolt, closes the chamber, aims, and
again squeezes the trigger. This movement is repeated until the
trigger has been squeezed five times, when, without command, the piece
is brought back to the position of "Ready."

When the soldier has acquired some facility in this exercise, he will
be required to repeat the movement ten times, and finally, by using
dummy cartridges, he may, by degrees, gain the necessary quickness and
dexterity for the execution of the rapid fire required in range
firing.

=1373 Methods.= The methods of taking position, of aiming, and of
squeezing the trigger, taught in the preceding exercises, should be
carried out in the rapid-fire exercises, with due attention to all
details taught therein; the details being carried out as prescribed
except that greater promptness is necessary. In order that any
tendency on the part of the recruit to slight the movements of aiming
and of trigger squeeze shall be avoided, the rapid-fire exercises will
not be taught until the recruit is thoroughly drilled and familiar
with the preceding exercises. The recruit will be instructed that with
practice in this class of fire the trigger can be squeezed promptly
without deranging the piece.

=1374. Repetition.= If the recruit seems to execute the exercise
hurriedly or carelessly, the instructor will require him to repeat it
at a slower rate.

=1375. Manipulation of the Breech Mechanism.= To hold the piece to the
position of the left hand should not be changed, but the left forearm
with the proper facility, are learned only after much practice. Some
riflemen, especially men who shoot from the left shoulder, find it
easier, in rapid firing, to drop the piece to the position of load
after each shot. While at first trial this method may seem easier, it
is believed that, with practice, the advantage of the former method
will be apparent.

Position and Aiming Drill, Kneeling

=1376.= These exercises will be repeated in the kneeling position by
causing the squad to kneel by the commands prescribed in the Drill
Regulations. The exercises will be executed as prescribed for
standing, except that the command "Two" in the position exercise, the
soldier will rest the left elbow on the left knee, the point of the
elbow in front of the kneecap. The pasters for the kneeling exercise
should be at 2-1/2 feet from the floor or ground.

=Remarks.= Frequent rests will be given during practice in these
exercises kneeling, as the position, if long continued, becomes
constrained and fatigues the soldier unnecessarily.

In raising the rifle to the mark in the second and third exercises,
the position of the left hand should not be changed, but the left
forearm should be brought toward the body and at the same time the
body bent slightly to the rear.

When aiming kneeling there is, from the nature of the position, a
tendency to press the butt of the rifle against the upper arm instead
of against the hollow of the shoulder; this will necessitate inclining
the head considerably to the right to get the line of sight, and by
bringing the rifle so far to the rear will, if the thumb is placed
across the stock, cause it to give by the recoil a blow upon the nose
or mouth.

These difficulties may be avoided by advancing the right elbow well to
the front, at the same time raising it so that the arm is about
parallel with the ground. The hollow of the shoulder will then be the
natural place for the rifle butt, and the right thumb will be brought
too far from the face to strike it in the recoil.

Some riflemen prefer, by bending the ankle, to rest the instep flat on
the ground, the weight of the body coming more on the upper part of
the heel; this obviates any tendency of the right knee to slip; or, by
resting the right side of the foot on the ground, toe pointing to the
front, to bring the weight of the body on the left side of the foot.
These positions are authorized.

=1377. Choice of Position.= In firing kneeling, the steadiness
obtained depends greatly upon the position adopted. The peculiarities
of conformation of the individual soldier exert when firing kneeling a
greater influence than when firing either standing, sitting, or prone;
the instructor should, therefore, carefully endeavor, noticing the
build of each soldier, to place him in the position for which he is
best adapted and which will exert the least tension or strain upon the
muscles and nerves. It should be remembered, however, that without the
rest of the left elbow on the knee this position possesses no
advantage of steadiness over the standing position.

=1378. Kneeling Position; When Taken.= The kneeling position can be
taken more quickly than either the sitting or the prone position. It
is, therefore, the position naturally assumed when a soldier, who is
standing or advancing, has to make a quick shot at a moving or
disappearing object and desires more steadiness than can be obtained
standing.

Position and Aiming Drill, Sitting Down

=1379.= In many cases the men, while able to kneel and hold the piece
moderately steady, can obtain in a sitting position much better
results. All should, therefore, be instructed in aiming sitting down
as well as kneeling.

To practice the soldier in the preceding exercises in a sitting
position, the squad being formed in a single rank, with an interval of
one pace between files, the rifle should first be brought to "Order
arms"; the instructor then commands: _Sit down._

At this command make a half face to the right and, assisted by the
left hand on the ground, sit down, facing slightly to the right, the
left leg directed toward the front, right leg inclined toward the
right, both heels, but not necessarily the bottoms of the feet, on the
ground, the right knee slightly higher than the left; body erect and
carried naturally from the hips; at the same time drop the muzzle of
the piece to the front, and to the position of the first motion of
load, right hand upon the thigh, just in front of the body, the left
hand slightly above, but not resting upon, the left leg.

The exercise will be executed as heretofore prescribed, except that at
the command "Two" (position exercise) the soldier will rest the left
elbow on the left knee, the point of the elbow in front of the
kneecap, and the right elbow against the left or inside of the right
knee, at the same time inclining the body from the hips slightly
forward.

For the aiming and trigger-squeeze exercises the pasters, used as
aiming points, will be 2-1/2 feet from the floor or the ground.

To afford the men rest or on the completion of the kneeling or sitting
down exercises the instructor will command _Rise_, when the men rise,
face to the front, and resume the "Order arms."

=Remarks.= If the preceding position is carefully practiced,
steadiness is quickly attained. The right leg should not be carried so
far to the right as not to afford a good support or brace for the
right elbow.

This position may be modified, but, in general, not without impairing
the steadiness of the man, by crossing the legs at the ankle, the
outside of each foot resting upon the ground, body more erect, and the
knees slightly more raised than in the previous position.

Position and Aiming Drill, Prone

=1380.= From the nature of the position it is not practicable to
execute these exercises according to the method followed when standing
or kneeling. Instruction will, however, always be given with reference
to the position, to the manner of assuming it, and to aiming and
squeezing the trigger.

For this purpose the squad being formed as specified above, in the
position and aiming drill, sitting down (the black plasters therein
mentioned being about 12 inches from the ground), the squad will be
brought to "Order arms."

Then (the squad either standing or kneeling), the instructor commands:
_Lie down_, which will be executed as prescribed in the Drill
Regulations; the legs may be spread apart and the toes turned out if
found to give a steadier position.

After the squad has taken the position as prescribed above, the legs
should be inclined well to the left, and either crossed or separated
as the soldier prefers or as his particular conformation appears to
render most desirable, and the body at the same time inclined slightly
to the right.

With care and practice the soldier may acquire an easy position which
he is able to assume with great facility.

=1381.= Being at "Ready," the instructor then commands: =1. Trigger
squeeze. 2. EXERCISE.=

At the latter command carry the left elbow to the front and slightly
to the right, the left hand under the barrel at the balance, weight of
the body mainly supported by the left elbow, the right resting lightly
on the floor or ground.

(Two.) Slide the rifle with the right hand through the left hand to
the front until the left hand is a little in front of the trigger
guard; at the same time raise the rifle with both hands and press it
against the hollow of the shoulder.

(Three.) Direct the rifle upon the mark and carry out the further
details of aiming and squeezing the trigger as prescribed in the
trigger-squeeze exercise.

Then resume the position, lying down.

As soon as the men have acquired with accuracy the details of the
position, they will be practiced, without the numbers, in aiming and
squeezing the trigger at will; after which the rapid-fire exercise in
the prone position will be practiced, the necessary skill and
dexterity being acquired by degrees.

To afford the men rest, or on completion of the exercise, the
instructor will command: _Rise_, which is executed as prescribed in
the Drill Regulations.

=1382. Remarks.= The preceding position for firing lying down
possesses in a greater degree than any other position the merit of
adaptability to the configuration of the ground; it enables the
soldier to deliver fire over low parapets or improvised shelters, thus
making the best use of cover. The importance of training the soldier
in firing from the other positions should not, however, be lost sight
of, since from the prone position it will frequently be impossible to
see the objective.

Back positions are not authorized.

In the prone position, when aiming, the left elbow should be well
under the barrel, the other elbow somewhat to the right, but not so
far as to induce any tendency to slip on the floor or ground.

The greater changes in elevation required in first directing the rifle
on the object should be given by altering the position of the left
hand under the barrel, the slighter changes only by advancing or
withdrawing the shoulder.

As the body does not yield to the recoil, as when firing standing or
kneeling, the force of recoil, if the rifle is not properly held, may
severely bruise the soldier. It is one of the objects of this exercise
to so teach him that this will be prevented by assuming a correct
position. Care must be exercised that the butt is not brought against
the collar bone. By moving the shoulder slightly to the front or rear,
and by moving the right elbow from the body or toward it, each soldier
may determine the position in which the shoulder gives to the butt of
the rifle the easiest rest. This will probably be the one in which the
force of the recoil will be least felt.

The soldier should persist in this exercise until he obtains a
position in which he feels no constraint, which will not subject him
to bruises from recoil, and from which the mark appears plainly
through the sights. Having secured such a position, he must not change
it when firing, as a variation in the points of support of the rifle,
the distance of the eye from the rear sight, or the tension of the
hold has a decided effect, especially at the longer ranges, upon the
location of the point struck.

=Important.= The soldier should be encouraged to go through these
exercises frequently at other than drill hours, care being taken that,
in the aiming and trigger-squeeze exercises, he always has some
definite object for a mark.

Deflection and Elevation Correction Drills

(Sight-Setting Drills)

=1383. Sight Correction.= You may find when firing at a target that
the first shot has missed the bull's-eye or figure. Now, one of two
things may be done in order to cause the second shot to hit the
bull's-eye or figure: (1) The point of aim may be changed, or (2) the
sights may be moved and the same point as before aimed at.

In order to do accurate shooting it is necessary to have a
well-defined mark at which to aim; consequently, except for very
slight corrections, the method of moving the sights, involving changes
in elevation and windage, is the one to be used.

=Exercises.= In order to give the soldier practice in making
corrections in elevation and deflection (windage),--that is, in
sight-setting,--proceed as follows:

Take an "A" target and rule it off with red vertical lines to
represent range and black or blue horizontal lines to represent
windage deviations, as in Fig. 33. Tell the men to set their sights
(either peep or open) for 200 yards, no windage. Examine the sights
(assisted by the lieutenants, noncommissioned officers and expert
riflemen).

[Illustration: Fig. 33]

Then say, for example, "You have fired a shot at 200 yards with your
sights set as you now have them. The shot was marked here (pointing to
'P,' Fig. 33). Change your sights so as to move the next shot into the
bull's-eye,--considering that you take the same hold as you did the
last time."

(Note. In this case the sight should be lowered 75 yards and 2 points
of left windage should be taken.)

Repeat with different positions for "P" until the men all understand
the method and the reasons. Do same for 300 yards, 500 yards, and 600
yards. See Figs. 34, 35, and 36.

[Illustration: Fig. 34]

[Illustration: Fig. 35]

[Illustration: Fig. 36]

Explain that in firing no change in sights should be made until the
man is sure that his hold was good, and then change without hesitancy.

The correct use of sights and their proper adjustment can thus be
taught without firing a shot. This exercise will save much time and
work on the range.

=Elevation.= As previously explained, raising the rear sight increases
the range of the bullet and lowering it decreases the range.

The amount of change which a given amount of elevation will cause in
the point struck varies with the range and with the rifle and with the
ammunition used.

For example, generally and approximately, in order, at a range of 500
yards, to change the point struck 1 foot, the rear sight must be
changed 48 yards, while to change the point struck 1 foot at 1000
yards it must be changed 12 yards. That is to say, if you fired a shot
at 300 yards, and then with the same aim, hold and other conditions as
before, you _raised_ your rear sight 48 yards, the next shot would
strike the target 1 foot _above_ the first one, and if you _lowered_
the rear sight 48 yards, the bullet would then strike the target 1
foot _below_ the first one. If firing at 1000 yards, _raising_ the
rear sight 12 yards would cause the bullet to strike the target 1 foot
_higher_ and _lowering_ the rear sight 12 yards would cause it to
strike 1 foot _lower_.

The following table gives the approximate changes in the rear sight to
move the point struck 1 foot at ranges from 100 to 1000 yards:

+-----------------------------------+
| | Correction in elevation |
| Range | necessary to change the |
| | point struck 1 foot |
+---------+-------------------------+
| 100 | 415 |
| 200 | 185 |
| 300 | 105 |
| 400 | 70 |
| 500 | 48 |
| 600 | 35 |
| 700 | 25 |
| 800 | 20 |
| 900 | 15 |
| 1,000 | 12 |
+---------+-------------------------+

The score-books issued by the Ordnance Department contain elevation
charts and all you have to do is to consult the chart of your
score-book in order to get the amount of elevation necessary at any
particular range in order to raise or lower your shots any desired
distance.

=1384. Deflection (windage).= Corrections in the deflection (side
movement) of the bullet are made by means of the windage screw that
moves the movable base, each division of the graduations on the rear
end of the movable base being called a "point of windage."

_One point of windage moves the point struck 4 inches for each 100
yards of range._

That is to say, at 100 yards, 1 point of windage moves the point
struck 4 inches; at 200 yards, 8 inches (2 × 4); at 300 yards, 12
inches (3 × 4), etc.

Consequently, if at 100 yards the wind were carrying your bullets 8
inches to the side, you would take two points of windage to get the
bull's-eye, and if the wind were carrying your bullets 20 inches to
the side, you would take 5 points of windage, irrespective of the rate
at which the wind was blowing.

Again, if at 200 yards the wind were carrying your bullets 8 inches to
the side, you would take 1 point of windage, and if it were carrying
your bullets 20 inches to the side, you would take 2-1/2 points,
irrespective of the rate at which the wind was blowing.

In using the wind gauge remember _windage is always taken in the
direction from which the wind is coming (into the wind) and the bullet
moves in the same direction that the rear sight moves,--that is, if
the wind is coming from the right, you take right windage and the
bullet will strike to the right. Likewise if you move the rear sight
to the left (take left windage), the bullet will strike to the left_.

GALLERY PRACTICE

=1385. Object and importance.= After the soldier has been thoroughly
instructed in sighting, and in the position, aiming, deflection, and
elevation correction drills, he is exercised in firing at short ranges
(50 and 75 feet) with the gallery practice rifle (.22 caliber).

Notwithstanding the value of the position and aiming drills, it is
impossible to keep up the soldier's interest if these exercises are
unduly prolonged. By gallery practice, however, the interest is easily
maintained and further progress, especially in teaching the trigger
squeeze, is made. Many of the external influences, which on the range
affect the firing, being absent, the soldier is not puzzled by results
for which, at this stage of his education, he could not account were
he advanced to firing with full charges. Furthermore, as there is no
recoil to induce nervousness or flinching, the soldier soon finds that
he can make good scores, and this success is the surest stimulus to
interest.

Not only to the beginner is gallery practice of value; to the good
shot it is a means of keeping, to a certain extent, in practice, and
practice in shooting, as much as in anything else, is essential. Since
it can be carried on throughout the year, gallery practice is of much
value in fixing in the men the _habit of aimed fire_, than which
nothing in his training is of more importance.

RANGE PRACTICE

=1386.= Having completed the gallery practice course, the soldier is
then advanced to known-distance firing on the target range where he
uses the service rifle, with service ammunition.

This known-distance practice is divided into certain regular courses
and special courses.

The regular courses and Special Course A are for troops of the Regular
Army.

There is also a special course for the Organized Militia and
Volunteers and one for Volunteer recruits.

All the various courses are described in detail in the Small-Arms
Firing Manual and anyone having occasion to use any of them should
familiarize himself thoroughly therewith.

OTHER INSTRUCTION

=1387. Use of sling.= After the soldier has been drilled in the proper
standing, kneeling, sitting, and prone positions in the foregoing
exercises, the use of the sling will be taught. Adjustments and their
advantages will be taught with the idea of noninterference with
quickness and freedom of action. The trigger squeeze exercises will
then be continued in the different positions, using the sling.

=1388.= _Description and adjustment._ The sling is made up of four
parts: the long strap, A, forming the arm loop; the short strap, B;
and the two keepers, C and D. At one end of each of the straps there
is a metal claw, used for adjusting the straps. At the other end of
the short straps there is a metal loop through which the longer strap
is passed, thus connecting the two straps.

[Illustration: Fig. 37]

To adjust the sling for firing, the claw of the short strap is
disengaged and reëngaged in the proper holes of the short strap, such
adjustment as may be necessary being also made in the long strap (the
arm loop).

=1389.= _What the sling does._ It does two things: (1) It steadies the
rifle, and (2) helps to take up the recoil,--that is, to reduce the
"kick."

_Its use._ There are a number of different methods of using the sling.
Experiment with different ones until you find and decide upon the
method best suited to you.

The sling should be used in all firing,--combat practice as well as at
target practice.

Always adjust the sling so that it will be tight.

Have the arm loop no longer than is necessary to reach the middle of
the small of the stock. When on the arm, have the lower end of the arm
loop well up near the arm pit, with the keeper well pressed down so as
to hold the loop fast.

Note the proper adjustments of the sling for the different firing
positions,--that is, standing, sitting, kneeling, and prone, and mark
the adjustments on the inside of the arm loop, "St" (standing), "Si"
(Sitting), "K" (kneeling), and "P" (prone).

It is sometimes advisable to sew a piece of rope to your shirt sleeve
to keep the sling from slipping down.

=1390. To put on the sling.= 1. Put your left hand in the loop,
twisting the sling to the left, A, Fig. 38, and holding the rifle with
the right hand as shown in the figure. Twisting the sling to the left
causes a flat surface instead of the cutting edge of the sling to rest
against the wrist.

[Illustration: Fig. 38]

2. Extend the arm on through the loop, (Fig. 39), bringing the loop
well up near the pit of the arm, grasping the piece with the left
hand, and pressing down keeper, A.

[Illustration: Fig. 39]

3. Place left hand between the sling and piece, (Fig. 40), the hand
being pressed well forward toward the upper sling swivel, A. Notice
how the back of the hand is resting against the flat of the sling.

[Illustration: Fig. 40]

4. Come to the position of aim, Fig. 41. Pressure is applied to the
sling by pressing forward the left hand, and holding the rifle to the
shoulder with the right hand. Remember that whatever pressure you
apply must be the same for each shot.

[Illustration: Fig. 41

_Right side view_]

Notice (Figs. 41 and 42) how well forward the left hand is, and how
the flat of the sling is resting against the wrist and back of hand.
See how the short strap, C, (Fig. 41), of the sling is correctly
loose.

The thumb should be held along the stock as shown (A) in Fig. 42.

[Illustration: Fig. 42

_Left side view_]

=1391. Designation of winds.= Winds are designated as "12 o'clock," "1
o'clock," "2 o'clock," etc., winds, depending on the direction _from_
which they come.

Imagine the firing point to be in the middle of the face of a clock
and the target to be at 12 o'clock; 3 o'clock will be on your right, 9
o'clock on your left, 6 o'clock in your rear and 12 in your front.

A wind blowing _from_ your right to your left is called a 3 o'clock
wind; one blowing _from_ your rear is called a 6 o'clock wind; one
from your front, 12 o'clock wind, etc.

[Illustration: Fig. 43]

The score-books issued by the Ordnance Department have windage charts
that have been carefully worked out and all you have to do is this:
Estimate the force of the wind in miles per hour, and determine the
direction from which it comes (whether a 9 o'clock wind, a 2 o'clock
wind, etc.). Then look at the windage chart and see just how much
windage you must take.

The simplest and best rule for the beginner is for him to make his
estimate and then ask an experienced shot what windage to use,
checking this up with what he found on the windage chart. In this way
he soon learns to estimate for himself.

Practice estimating the wind. Ask a man who has been making 5's and
4's what windage _he_ used and check up with your own estimate.

You can find out the direction of the wind by watching smoke, grass or
the limbs of trees.

Throw up some small straws and watch which way they are blown, or wet
your finger and hold it up. The wind cools the side it strikes.

A 12 o'clock wind slows up the bullet and a 6 o'clock wind helps it
along,--so, in the first case you would need more elevation and in the
second less elevation.

=1392. The zero of a rifle.= The twist of the bullet given by the
rifling of the barrel causes the bullet to move to right, which
movement, called "the drift," is compensated by having the slot in the
rear sight for the drift slide, slope to the left. However, in some
rifles the compensation is too great and in others it is not enough.

That reading of the wind gauge necessary to overcome the drift of a
rifle at a particular range is called the "zero" of that rifle for
that range, and all allowances for wind should be calculated from this
reading.

The "zero" of a rifle is found by shooting it on a perfectly calm day.

=1393. Estimating distance.= Ability to estimate distances correctly
is an important part of a soldier's education.

While it is true that fire on the battlefield will usually be by
groups and the ranges will be given by officers, the battlefield is
reached only after a long series of experiences in scouting,
patrolling, and outpost duty, in which the soldier is frequently
placed in positions where it is necessary that he shall determine for
himself the range to be used in order that his fire may be effective.

There are different methods of estimating the range (for example, by
sound, trial shots, range-finding instruments, etc.), but the only
ones that the average soldier need know are those of estimating
distance by the eye and by trial shots.

To estimate distance by the eye with accuracy, it is necessary to be
familiar with the appearance, as to length, of a unit of measure which
can be compared mentally with the distance which is to be estimated.
The most convenient unit of length is 100 yards. To impress upon the
soldier the extent of a stretch of 100 yards two posts 100 yards
apart, with short stakes between to mark each 25 yards, should be
placed near the barracks, or on the drill ground, and the soldier
required to pace off the marked distance several times, counting his
steps. He will thus learn how many of his steps make 100 yards and
will become familiar with the appearance of the whole distance and of
its fractional parts.

Next a distance of more than 100 yards will be shown him and he will
be required to compare this distance with the 100-yard unit and to
estimate it. Having made his estimate, he will be required to verify
its accuracy by pacing the distance.

A few minutes each day should be spent in this practice, the soldier
often being required to make his estimate by raising his rear-sight
leaf and showing it to the instructor. After the first drills the
soldier should be required to pace the distance only when the estimate
is unusually inaccurate.

The soldier should be taught that, in judging the distance from the
enemy, his estimate may be corrected by a careful observation of the
clearness with which details of dress, the movements of limbs or of
the files in a line may be seen. In order to derive the benefit of
this method, the soldier will be required to observe closely all the
details noted above in single men or squads of men posted at varying
distances, which will be measured and announced.

Although the standing and kneeling silhouettes used in field practice
afford good objects upon which to estimate distances, the instructor
should make frequent use of living figures and natural objects, as
this is the class of targets from which the soldier will be compelled
to estimate his range in active service.

=1394. Methods of estimating long distances by the eye.= The following
methods are found useful:

(_a_) The soldier may decide that the object cannot be more than a
certain distance away nor less than a certain distance; his estimates
must be kept within the closest possible limits and the mean of the
two taken as the range.

(_b_) The soldier selects a point which he considers the middle point
of the whole distance, estimates this half distance and doubles it, or
he similarly divides the distance into a certain number of lengths
which are familiar to him.

(_c_) The soldier estimates the distance along a parallel line, as a
road on one side, having on it well-defined objects.

(_d_) The soldier takes the mean of several estimates made by
different persons. This method is not applicable to instruction.

=1395. Determination of distance by trial shots or volleys.= If the
ground is so dry or dusty that the fall of the bullets is visible to
the naked eye or through a field glass, distance may be determined by
using a number of trial shots or volleys.

In the case of individual trial shots, the soldier sets his sight at
the estimated range, watching to see where the bullet strikes,--or
some other man, with or without field glasses, may watch to see where
it strikes. If the bullet strikes beyond the target, the estimated
sight setting is decreased; if it falls short, the sight setting is
increased.

In case of volleys, the sights are set at the estimated range and a
volley is fired. If it appears to strike a little short of the mark,
an increase in elevation of 100 yards is used for the next volley.
When we have the target inclosed between two volleys, we take the mean
of the estimated ranges for the correct range. For example, if the
first estimated range were 1000 and the second 1100, the correct range
would be 1050.

=1396. Appearance of objects: How modified by varying conditions of
light; difference of level, etc.= During instruction the men should be
taught the effect of varying conditions of light and terrain upon the
apparent distance of an object.

_Objects seem nearer_--

(_a_) When the object is in a bright light.

(_b_) When the color of the object contrasts sharply with the color of
the background.

(_c_) When looking over water, snow, or a uniform surface like a wheat
field.

(_d_) When looking from a height downward.

(_e_) In the clear atmosphere of high altitudes.

_Objects seem more distant_--

(_a_) When looking over a depression in the ground.

(_b_) When there is a poor light or a fog.

(_c_) When only a small part of the object can be seen.

(_d_) When looking from low ground upward toward higher ground.

=1397. Effect of heat and cold.= Heat causes shots to strike high, and
cold causes them to strike low.

Therefore, if you shot on a warm day and made 5's, and recorded
temperature and other conditions in your score-book, you would know on
looking at your score sheets that you should raise your elevation, if
you were firing on a cold day.

=1398. Effect of moisture.= Dampness causes shots to strike high and
dryness causes them to strike low. Therefore, on damp days take lower
elevations than on dry days.

=1399. Effect of light.= Light affects the aiming without the beginner
knowing it. It does not, however, affect the travel of the bullet.

A dark target causes a tendency to aim farther below the bull's-eye
than if the target were bright. Therefore, use higher elevations with
dark targets. As it gets darker, higher elevations should be used.

If you _always aim carefully and correctly_ the light will have little
effect on your aiming,--that is, if your eyesight is good.

If you are shooting in a dull light and a bright sun comes out, say on
your right, there is a tendency to move the front sight to the
opposite (left) side of the rear sight notch, since the near (right)
edge is shaded and obscured somewhat. Therefore 1/4 to 1/2 windage
into the sun (right in this case) should be taken to overcome this.

In using battle sight, hold higher for a bright light.

We also raise our sights if a strong sun comes out. Therefore, we have
this rule: _Move your rear sight into the sun, just as you do for a
wind,--and raise your elevation._

=1400. Mirage= gives a wavering appearance to the target. It is heated
air that is moving. It is sometimes called "heat waves."

With the wind between 2 and 14 miles an hour on clear, hot days the
waves can be seen moving across the target.

When there is no wind or a light six o'clock wind, the waves go
straight up, or "boil." _Never fire when the mirage is boiling_,--wait
for it to move from one side to the other and then take windage to
correct for it.

=1401. Summary of temperature, light and moisture effects:=

_Raise elevation for_--

Dull target
Shooting in the sun
Hot gun
Dirty gun
Cold day
Bright or shining sight
Cloudy day
12 o'clock wind

_Lower elevation for_--

Bright target
Target in sun
Cold gun
Clean gun
Hot day
Moist day
Full sights
6 o'clock wind

=1402. Firing with bayonet fixed.= In firing with bayonet fixed
usually a lower point on the target will be struck, corresponding to a
reduction of about 50 yards in the range.

=1403. Care of rifle.= Since the accuracy of a soldier's rifle has a
most important bearing on his shooting, and since the proper care of a
rifle affects its accuracy, the care of the rifle is an important
subject in which every soldier should be thoroughly instructed. The
subject is fully covered in the preceding chapter. (Chapter XV, Part
I).

COLLECTIVE INSTRUCTION

(Combat practice)

=1404. General scheme.= While individual instruction is most
important, it is not everything. The maximum effect of fire in battle
is obtained when a command, as a whole, is a pliable, manageable,
effective instrument in the hands of a commander who can use it
intelligently and efficiently. Therefore, the two objects to be
obtained are:

1. To make the command a pliable, manageable, effective instrument in
the hands of its commander.

2. To train and instruct the commander so that he will know how to use
this instrument in an intelligent and efficient manner.

=1405. To make the fire unit a pliable, manageable, efficient
instrument.= In order that a unit may be a pliable, manageable,
efficient instrument in the hands of its commander, he must be able to
control the unit absolutely,--that is to say, not only must the
individuals composing the unit be so trained that they will respond at
once, even in the din and confusion of battle, to the will of the
commander, as expressed by his orders, but they must also be so
instructed and disciplined that they can, as individual parts of the
unit, perform their functions efficiently. This is accomplished by
_fire discipline_.

=1406. Fire discipline.= By _fire discipline_ is meant a habit of
obedience, a control of the rifle, and a display of intelligence, all
the result of training, which will enable the soldier in action to
make hits instead of misses. It embraces taking advantage of the
ground; care in setting the sight and delivery of fire, including
proper fire distribution; constant attention to the orders of the
leaders and careful observation of the enemy; an increase of fire when
the target is favorable, and a cessation of fire when the enemy
disappears; economy of ammunition.

=1407. To train and instruct the commander to use the unit with
intelligence and efficiency.= In order to handle the unit with
intelligence and efficiency, utilizing to the greatest extent possible
the power of all the rifles under his command, not only must the
commander be able to control the unit, having it respond at once to
his every command, but he must also know tactics, and be thoroughly
familiar with the technical principles of infantry fire.

=1408. Combat exercises.= A combat exercise consists of the
application of tactical principles to certain assumed battle
situation, in the execution of which are employed the appropriate
formations and movements of close and extended order drill, and in
which, as a rule, ball cartridges are used in firing at the targets.

By means of combat exercises, the unit commanders are trained and
instructed in applying tactical principles, in controlling and
directing the fire of their units and the men are trained and
instructed in fire discipline.

The tactical principles applicable to combat exercises are covered in
the Infantry Drill Regulations, under the headings of "_Fire_" and
"_Combat_."

=1409. Technical principles of firing.= The technical principles of
firing are given in detail in the Small-Arms Firing Manual, a summary
of which is given below under the headings of, _The Effect of Fire_,
_The Influence of the Ground_, and _The Adjustment of Fire_.

The Effect of Fire

=1410. Ballistic qualities of the rifle.= The accuracy of a rifle, the
flatness of its trajectory, and its disabling power,--that is, the
power it has to disable the enemy,--are called its _ballistic
qualities_.

The accuracy of the U. S. Springfield rifle, caliber .30, model of
1903, is very high,--probably superior to that of any other military
rifle.

The flatness of trajectory is dependent upon the muzzle velocity, and,
to some extent, upon the form of the bullet. Our bullet is pointed and
the muzzle velocity is 2700 feet per second, which is a very high
muzzle velocity.

Two rifles of different type may be equally accurate, but the accuracy
of the one having the flatter trajectory will, naturally, be less
affected by slight errors in sight setting.

Again, another advantage of the rifle with the flatter trajectory is
that it holds more ground under its fire. For example, take our
service rifle: At a range of 500 yards, the bullet, at the highest
point in its trajectory or line of flight, is 2 feet above the line of
sight. It is, therefore, apparent that if the bottom of an object 2
feet or greater, is aimed at, it would be struck if it were anywhere
under 500 yards. Now, take a rifle with a very curved trajectory, say
one whose bullet, at the highest point of the trajectory corresponding
to a range of 500 yards, is 10 feet above the line of sight. There
will be a large extent of ground between the target and the rifle that
is not danger space for a target 2 feet above the line of sight.
Hence, we see that the rifle with the flatter trajectory is better.

The continuous danger space afforded by the flat trajectory of our
service rifle enables us to adopt a universal sight for all ranges up
to 500 yards,--that is, the battle sight, which is the rear sight
ready for use when the sight leaf is laid down.

=1411. Cone of fire or cone of dispersion.= If a body of soldiers fire
at the same target the bullets will not, of course, follow the same
path, but will be scattered. This is due to differences in sights,
parts of the rifle, ammunition, and to a greater extent, to the
individual errors of the soldiers in aiming and firing.

The trajectories or paths of the bullets considered together form a
horn-shaped figure or cone, called the _Cone of fire_ or cone of
dispersion. (See Fig. 44.)

[Illustration: Fig. 44]

=1412. Shot group and center of impact.= If the _cone of fire_ be
intercepted by a target (for example, A O, Fig. 44) at right angles to
the axis of the cone, the shot holes will make a pattern or group
called the _shot group_, the holes being the thickest approximately in
the center of the group, called the _center of impact_. From this
point in all directions the density of the grouping decreases
progressively,--at first gradually, then more rapidly, out to the
limits of the group.

Naturally, the size of the cone of fire and of the shot group vary
with the skill of those firing, good shots making a small cone and
small group, and poor shots a large cone and large group.

=1413. Beaten zone.= The intersection of the cone of dispersion with
the surface of the ground is called the _beaten zone_.

If the surface of the ground is horizontal, the form of the _beaten
zone_ is that of an ellipse with its longer axis in the direction of
the line of fire, as shown in Fig. 45.

[Illustration: Fig. 45]

In view of the fact that at the long ranges the angle of fall of the
bullets is much greater than at short ranges, it follows that at
short ranges the elliptical figure (beaten zone) is much more
elongated than at long ranges. In other words, the longer the range,
the shorter is the depth of the beaten zone. This is shown in Fig. 45.

=1414. Uncertainty and ineffectiveness of long-range fire.= It follows
from what has been said, that as the range increases the length of the
beaten zone decreases,--that is, a less depth of ground is held under
fire. That being the case, if an error is made in sight setting due,
for example, to an incorrect estimate of the range, the proportionate
loss of fire effect due to misplacement of the center of impact will
be greater as the beaten zone is less,--that is, as the range is
greater.

Furthermore, the difficulty of exact range determination increases
with the distance, the two influences combining to make long-range
fire uncertain and usually ineffective.

=1415. Zone of effective fire.= That portion of the ground which
contains the best 75 per cent of the shots in the beaten zone, is
called the _zone of effective fire_.

Effectiveness of Fire

=1416. Factors involved.= The effectiveness of fire depends upon these
three factors:

(1) The percentage of hits made;
(2) The number of targets hit;
(3) The time of execution.

That is to say, the effectiveness of fire is determined by the number
of enemies disabled or targets hit in a given time.

=1417. Percentage of hits.= By the percentage of hits is meant the
proportion of all the bullets fired that hit the targets. For example,
if 1000 bullets are fired and 750 hit the targets, then the percentage
of hits is 75.

The percentage of hits depends upon the dispersion, and this is
influenced by the precision of the arm, the range, the visibility of
the target, the atmospheric conditions, the training and instruction
of the troops, and upon their physical and moral state at the time. In
addition, the percentage of hits also depends upon the character of
the ground as favoring ricochet hits, upon the correct estimation of
the range and the proper designation of the target.

=1418. Number of targets hit.= The number of targets hit,--that is,
the distribution of fire,--may be affected by varying degrees of
visibility, as men instinctively choose the more conspicuous marks as
aiming points. Under any circumstances, a poor distribution of the
hits made will be due to an absence of proper instructions from the
leaders; or, in other words, to poor control, or else to a want of
understanding or lack of obedience on the part of the men.

=1419. Time of execution.= The time of execution is important in that
the gaining of fire superiority is dependent less upon obtaining high
percentages of hits than upon making an absolutely large number of
hits in a unit of time. There is necessarily a limit to the rapidity
of fire which, if exceeded, will result in some loss of accuracy. With
targets of a fair degree of visibility, the following may be taken as
standard rates of fire for troops who have been given suitable
training in target practice:

200 yards }
300 yards } 10 shots per minute.
400 yards }

500 yards }
600 yards } 7.5 shots per minute.
700 yards }

800 yards }
900 yards } 5 shots per minute.
1,000 yards }

Greater ranges, 3 shots per minute.

The rates given should not exclude higher rates of fire in the case of
large and conspicuous targets. On the other hand, when objectives, or
marks used as aiming points, are very indistinct, the requirement of
correct aiming imposes rates of fire somewhat lower than the standard
rates given even for well-instructed men.

With imperfectly trained men who have not fully acquired the habit of
using aimed fire only, and who are lacking in the manual dexterity
required for executing the standard rates of fire, the maximum rate
can not well exceed six shots per minute without incurring the danger
of lapsing into unaimed fire.

Fatigue and exhaustion, the results of marches or prolonged firing,
have a detrimental influence and tend to lower the rates of effective
fire.

Influence of Ground

=1420. Defilade.= If we will consider a bullet just grazing the top of
an impenetrable obstacle (like "A," Fig. 46), the space from the top
of such obstacle to where the bullet strikes the ground (space B E,
Fig. 46) will be protected from fire. Such space is called,
"_defiladed space_." Its extent will, of course, depend on the height
of the obstacle, the curvature of the trajectory and the slope of the
ground in rear of the obstacles.

[Illustration: Fig. 46]

Between B and D, a soldier standing would be completely protected;
between D and E, he would be only partially protected. To obtain
complete protection between D and E the soldier would have to assume
the kneeling or prone position, depending on how far away from D he
was.

By cover is meant effective defilade from the enemy's fire.

By concealment is meant screening from view but not necessarily
protection from fire.

=1421. Rising and falling ground.= The influence of the ground upon
the effect of fire is at once seen by studying Fig. 44.

If the ground rises, as shown by B O and A O, the depth of the beaten
zone (and consequently the effect of fire) decreases. On the other
hand, if the ground falls (up to a certain point), the depth of the
beaten zone (and consequently the effect of fire) increases.

=1422. Depth of beaten zone affects only targets having depth.= It
should be remembered that depth of beaten zone can affect only targets
which have depth.

On a target in the form of a line,--a line of skirmishers, for
example,--the depth of the beaten zone has no effect one way or the
other. If such a target, however, is backed up by supports and
reserves, the depth of the beaten zone may have a decided effect on
them, depending upon their distance in rear of the line forming the
target and the slope of the ground in rear of such target.

In this connection, attention is invited to Fig. 47, which shows how
in the case of a fire delivered from a height at a target on a
horizontal plane beneath, the beaten zone is shortened and
consequently the fire effect decreased.

[Illustration: Fig. 47]

An example of increasing the depth of beaten zone is seen in Fig. 48,
which shows a fire delivered from low ground at a target on the edge
of a plateau or crest of a ridge from which the ground slopes to the
rear.

[Illustration: Fig. 48]

=1423. Grazing fire.= Shots which pass over a crest with an angle of
fall conforming, or nearly conforming, to the slope of the ground
beyond the edge of the crest (as shown in Fig. 48), are called
_grazing shots_ and fire so delivered is called _grazing fire_.

=1424. Diminution or increase in fire effect due to rising and falling
ground.= In connection with the diminution or increase in fire effect
due to rising and falling ground, attention is invited to the
following:

1. If the ground slopes upward to the rear from a firing line, the
supports may be placed closer without increasing the danger from fire
aimed at the firing line.

2. When the ground slopes down and to the rear from the firing line
forming the target, the supports must be posted at a greater distance
in rear, unless the slope is so much greater than the angle of fall of
the hostile bullets that a defiladed space is created in which no
bullets strike, in which case the supports may be brought up close to
the crest.

3. On ground rising with respect to the line of sight, column targets
(i. e., having depth) will suffer greater losses than lineal targets.

4. On ground falling with respect to the line of sight, the reverse
slope of hills or the level grounds of plateaus, line targets will
suffer the greater losses.

=1425. Ricochet shots.= When a bullet strikes any surface and is
deflected it is called a _ricochet shot_.

Not only do bullets that ricochet usually tumble after striking, but
they are also mutilated, so that wounds inflicted by ricochet hits are
usually severe.

The most favorable ground for ricochets is a smooth, hard, horizontal
surface, the aim being low, the chance of ricochets in sand is very
slight.

=1426. Occupation of ground.= The question of the occupation of ground
presents these two aspects:

1. What firing positions may be chosen which will tend to increase the
losses of the enemy?

2. What positions may be chosen and formations adopted to minimize our
own losses?

The selection of a defensive position presents this question: _Shall
it be near the crest or well down the slope?_

A position well down the slope

_Advantages:_

1. The depth of the beaten zone for fire delivered from the position
is increased and the upper portion of the cone of fire will include
the supports and reserves advancing to reënforce the hostile firing
line. That is to say, the fire will be a _grazing fire_.

2. It eliminates dead spaces that might otherwise exist at the bottom
of the slope.

3. The hostile fire being directed against a point well down the
slope, the high ground in rear will interpose as a defilade and
intercept the upper portion of the cone of fire which might otherwise
take effect on the supports and reserves behind the crest.

_Disadvantages:_

1. It makes withdrawal difficult in case it becomes necessary to fall
back.

2. It is difficult to reënforce the firing line.

A position near the crest

_Advantages:_

1. It favors observation of the enemy.

2. It makes withdrawal easy in case it becomes necessary to fall back.

3. It is easy to reënforce the firing line by the supports advancing
from behind the crest.

_Disadvantages:_

1. The depth of the beaten zone is decreased and consequently the cone
of fire will probably not include the supports and reserves advancing
to reënforce the hostile firing fire. In other words, the fire will be
a _plunging fire_.

2. It is likely to result in dead spaces at the bottom of the slope.

3. It affords a good target for the hostile artillery.

Whether or not a position near the crest or a position down the slope
should be chosen, depends, in each case, upon circumstances.

For instance in a rear guard action, where a determined stand is not
contemplated, a position near the crest would be occupied. On the
other hand, if a determined stand were contemplated, the terrain
offered good opportunity for the delivery of an effective grazing
fire, and we had reason to believe that we were going to be subjected
to heavy artillery fire, a position at the foot of the slope would be
selected.

However, it may be said that, in general, a defensive position should
be near the bottom of the slope.

=1427. Gentle reverse slopes.= From the point of view of avoiding
losses, all gentle reverse slopes are dangerous and are to be avoided
when possible.

When necessary to traverse or to occupy such ground, precautions must
be taken to protect the reserves or other bodies of troops by placing
them on the flanks; by disposing them in formations with a narrow
front; by causing them to lie down; by the construction of suitable
shelter, and by avoiding useless movements.

Adjustment of Fire

=1428. Fire at stationary targets.= The correct adjustment of fire is
attained by causing the center of impact to fall on the center of the
target. This is the problem constantly presented in combat firing.

The two important elements entering into this problem are, (1) the
commander and (2) the troops. When a body of troops has aimed
correctly at the target indicated, with the elevation ordered and has
fired with steadiness, it has done all that can be expected of it, but
that is not sufficient; for, if the commander, by giving the wrong
sight-setting, for example, has failed to cause the center of impact
to fall on the center, of the target, the result may be nothing.
Hence the vital importance of knowing and announcing the correct
range.

It is known that good shots make a small group and poor shots a large
group, average shots making a group of intermediate size.

It is frequently stated that troops composed of good shots are not so
effective in collective firing as poorer shots. How is this possible?
The explanation is simple. The shot group of the good shots is small
and if misplaced by an error in range estimation few hits result while
the shot group of poorer shots, being larger, is not so much affected
by the same error in range estimation, will cover the ground, and
probably hit more figures. This, of course, is _only true_ when a
considerable error has been made in estimating the range.

As battle targets are mostly line targets, a displacement to the right
or left does not amount to much, but an error in depth (range), as
stated before, is serious. Thus we, see that the _correct
determination of the range_ is very important.

=1429. Determination of range.= The range may be determined, with only
a small error, by a range finder. There are several other methods, as,
for instance, by trial shots,--the dust thrown up by the bullet
showing whether the range is too short or too great,--by sound, by the
appearance of objects, etc., but except in deliberately prepared
defensive positions, estimating by eye will be the most practicable
method of estimating the range. For all practical purposes a very
satisfactory result will be obtained by taking the average estimates
of several trained men.

In observing the effect of the fire the ground may be wet, or covered
with turf, sod or brush in which no signs of striking shots can be
seen. By careful use of good field glasses some indication of the
place where the shots are going, may be obtained. The actions of the
enemy may often indicate whether the fire is effective or not.

=1430. Combined sights.= All other means failing, _combined sights_
may be resorted to. By this is meant firing part of the troops with
sights set at one range and part with a range greater or less by 100
yards or more. This increases the beaten zone and will generally
assure a certain amount of fire effect. This method is seldom used
under 500 yards.

=1431. Auxiliary aiming points.= It frequently happens that the target
is so well concealed that it is invisible. In this case some well
defined object in front or behind it must be used as an _aiming
target_, and the range given so that the beaten zone will include the
actual target at its center.

=1432. Fire at moving targets.= In firing at a moving enemy, a beaten
zone must be established immediately in front, his forward movement
into this zone completing the adjustment of fire. Due to the chance of
overestimating the range, a sight-setting must be taken _well under_
the estimated range (usually about 200 yards against advancing
infantry).

When the fire becomes effective, as may be judged by the actions and
movements of the enemy, the rate of fire should be quickened in order
to increase the effect of the fire.

Frequent changes of sight not only cause a loss of time, but they also
multiply chances of error in sight-setting. Changes in sight-setting
against advancing infantry should not be less than 200 yards at a
time, that is to say, when the enemy has passed through the zone of
effective fire, the sight should be lowered 200 yards and the
operation repeated until the battle-sight zone is reached, when the
rear-sight leaf is thrown down and no other sight manipulation is
made.

Against skirmish lines advancing by rushes, the sight-setting should
not be changed during a rush, but it should be done at the halts, so
that the greater vulnerability of the targets presented during the
rush may be taken advantage of.

Against retreating infantry, use the estimated range, and when the
target appears to have passed beyond the zone of effective fire, add
200 yards to the sight-setting.

Against attacking cavalry, due to the rapidity of the advance, there
will not usually be time for sight manipulation other than throwing
down the rear-sight leaf, so that the battle should be resorted to at
all ranges.

In firing at a target moving across the line of fire it is desirable,
on account of the confusion caused thereby, to hit the head of the
column. It is necessary, therefore, to hold to the front a distance
sufficient to allow for the time of flight and the rate of march. This
will be accomplished by the observance of the following rough rules:

1. Against infantry, hold against the head of the marching column;

2. Against cavalry at a trot, hold to the front 1 yard for every 100
yards of range; and at a gallop, 2 yards for every 100 yards of range.

=1433. Night firing.= In night firing it is almost impossible to
adjust the fire by ordinary means.

In night attacks the purpose of the offensive is to gain rapidly and
quietly a position where the issue may be decided in a hand to hand
encounter, or a position from which the superiority of fire may be
gained at daylight. For the offensive, therefore, fire action is a
subordinate consideration.

On the defensive, when a night attack is apprehended, preparations
should be made to sweep with fire the ground immediately in front over
which the assailant must advance.

Special arrangements may sometimes be made for resting rifles on the
parapet, so that the ground in front will be suitably covered. A solid
support is necessary for maintaining the proper direction of the
pieces during firing. For this purpose notched boards or timbers are
convenient. The arrangements should be such that the operations of
loading and firing may be performed without removing the rifles from
the support.

Searchlight illumination may reveal the position and movements of the
enemy sufficiently well to permit the use of the sights. In night
operations of small parties fire may be well directed when a bright,
well-defined light, such as a camp fire, is presented as an aiming
point. In such a case a slight illumination of the front sight is
required.

Fire Direction and Control

=1434. General.= As stated before in substance, the maximum effect of
fire can be gotten only by instructed and disciplined troops under a
commander capable of directing and controlling their fire properly.

The fire of a company may be likened to spraying water from a hose,
and as the fireman can shift his stream of water from one point to the
other with certainty, being able to direct and control it with
promptness and accuracy, so should the company commander be able to
switch the cone of fire of his company from one target to another,
having it at all times under direction and control. In other words, as
the pliable, manageable hose responds to the will of the fireman, so
should the company be so trained and instructed that it will respond
to the will of the company commander on the firing line, in the midst
of the noise and confusion of battle. No one except a man who has been
in battle can realize how great are the noise and confusion, and how
necessary and important are coöperation, team-work, discipline, and
communication, in order for a company commander to control and direct
the fire of the company--there must be absolute coöperation,
team-work, and communication between all parts of the company--between
the captain and the platoon leaders, the platoon leaders and the squad
leaders, and the squad leaders and the members of their squads. Each
and every man must know and do his part and endeavor all he can to
keep in touch with and help the others. Now, the foundation of
team-work and coöperation, is communication--communication between the
company commander and the men on the firing line--the means by which,
the medium _through_ which he will make known his will to the men on
the firing line. As stated before, because of the noise and confusion
on the firing line this is no easy matter. The ideal way would be for
the company commander to control the company by communicating direct
with every man on the firing line, as graphically shown on the
following page:

[Illustration: Fig. 49]

However, in the noise and confusion of battle it would be utterly
impossible for all the men to hear the captain's voice. Experience
shows that from 20 to 35 rifles are as many as one leader can control.
The captain, must, therefore, control the company through the platoon
commanders--that is to say, he _actually directs_ the fire and the
platoon commanders, assisted by the squad leaders, _actually control_
it. In other words, the captain communicates with the men on the
firing line, he makes his will known to them, through his platoon
commanders, as graphically shown in this diagram:

[Illustration: Fig. 50]

However, in order for our system of communication to be successful,
each and every man, as stated above, must know and do his part and
endeavor all he can to help the others. If this is done, then the
different parts and elements of the company will dove-tail and fit
into one another, resulting in a complete, homogeneous whole, in the
form of an efficient, pliable, manageable instrument in the hands of
the company commander. And this is the object, the result, sought by
practice and instruction in field firing, and which will be obtained
if the captain, the platoon leaders, the squad leaders, the file
closers, the musicians, and the privates, will perform the following
duties and functions:

=1435. The Captain.= (_Fire direction._)

The captain _directs_ the fire of the company or of designated
platoons. He designates the target, and, when practicable, allots a
part of the target to each platoon. Before beginning the fire action
he determines the range, announces the sight setting, and indicates
the class of fire to be employed, and the time to open fire.
Thereafter, he observes the fire effect, corrects material errors in
sight setting, prevents exhaustion of the ammunition supply, and
causes the distribution of such extra ammunition as may be received
from the rear. (I. D. R. 249.)

Having indicated clearly what he desires the platoon leaders to do,
the captain avoids interfering, except to correct serious errors or
omissions. (I. D. R. 240.)

=1436. The Platoon Leaders.= (_Fire direction._)

In combat the platoon is the _fire unit_. (I. D. R. 250.)

Each platoon leader puts into execution the commands or directions of
the captain, having first taken such precautions to insure correct
sight setting and clear description of the target or aiming point as
the situation permits or requires; thereafter, he gives such
additional commands or directions as are necessary to exact compliance
with the captain's will. He corrects the sight setting when necessary.
He designates an aiming point when the target cannot be seen with the
naked eye.

In general, _platoon leaders_ observe the target and the effect of
their fire and are on the alert for the captain's commands or signals;
they observe and regulate the rate of fire. (I. D. R. 252.)

=1437. The Guides= watch the firing line and check every breach of
fire discipline.

=1438. The Squad Leaders= transmit commands and signals when
necessary, observe the conduct of their squads and abate excitement,
assist in enforcing fire discipline and participate in the firing.

Every squad leader should place himself just a little in advance of
the rest of his squad and by occasionally glancing to the right and
left, observe how the men of their squads are doing--whether they are
firing at the proper objective, if the sights are apparently properly
adjusted, if they are firing too rapidly, etc. After each shot the
squad leader should look toward his platoon leader, and then glance to
his right and left to observe his men, and then load and fire again.

=1439. The Musicians= assist the captain by observing the enemy, the
target, and the fire effect, by transmitting commands or signals, and
by watching for signals. (I. D. R. 235.)

=1440. The Privates= will take advantage of cover, exercise care in
setting the sights and delivering fire; be on the constant lookout for
orders from their leaders; always aim deliberately; observe the enemy
carefully, increasing the fire when the target is favorable and
ceasing firing when the enemy disappears; not neglect a target because
it is indistinct; not waste ammunition, but be economical with it; if
firing without a leader to retain their presence of mind and direct an
efficient fire upon the proper target.

=1441. Distribution of Fire.= The distribution of fire over the entire
target is of the greatest importance; for, a section of the target not
covered by fire represents a number of the enemy permitted to fire
coolly and effectively. So, remember that all parts of the target are
equally important, and care must be taken that the men do not neglect
its less visible parts.

The captain allots a part of the target to each platoon, or each
platoon leader takes as his target that part which corresponds to his
position in the company. Every man is so instructed that he will fire
on that part of the target which is directly opposite him.

If the target cannot be seen with the naked eye, platoon leaders
select an object in front of or behind it, designate this as the
aiming point, and direct a sight-setting which will carry the fire
into the target. The men aim at the good aiming point or line, but
with such an increased or decreased sight-setting, as the case may be,
that the bullets will fall on the target instead of on the aiming
point.

Distribution of fire is assured by dividing the whole target assigned
the company into definite parts or sectors, and allotting these parts
or sectors to the various platoons. And, of course, the whole of the
target must be kept under fire while the company is advancing. This
may be accomplished by one of two methods:

=1442. Overlapping Method.= In this method each sector (target) is
covered by more than one fire unit. For example, in a company of four
platoons the entire company sector would be divided in two parts, the
right part being covered by the first and second platoons and the left
part by the third and fourth platoons. When the first platoon ceases
fire to advance, the second platoon would replace the lost rifles by
firing faster. With three platoons the company sector would be divided
into two parts, one being assigned to each flank platoon and the whole
company sector to the center platoon. When the first platoon advanced,
the center platoon would cover its target, both the center and third
platoons increasing their rate of fire. With two platoons, each would
cover the whole company sector.

=1443. Switch Method.= The company is divided into a number of parts,
one less than the number of platoons in the company. One platoon is
designated as the "switch," and swings into fire automatically into
that sector from which the fire of its assigned unit is withdrawn. For
example, with four platoons, and platoon rushes to start from the
right, the company sector is divided into three parts assigned to the
first, second and third platoons, the fourth being the "switch." When
number 1 ceases fire to advance, No. 4 fires at No. 1's target; when
No. 2 ceases to fire, No. 4 fires at No. 2's target, then at No. 3's
target, and finally No. 4 advances.

=1444. Individual instruction in fire distribution.= Every man should
be thoroughly drilled, instructed and trained always to _fire at that
part of the hostile target which corresponds to the position he
occupies in his platoon_. That is to say, if on the right of his
platoon, he fires at the right (as he faces it) of the hostile target;
if in the right center of his platoon, he fires at the right center
(as he faces it) of the target, and so on. This is represented by the
following diagram, the points A', B', C', etc., representing the parts
of the hostile target at which the men occupying the positions A, B,
C, etc., in their platoon, would fire:

[Illustration: Fig. 51]

=1445. Designation of target.= It is very important that the
commanders should be able to describe the objectives to be attacked
and the sectors[19] to be defended, and that individual soldiers
should be able to understand and transmit to other soldiers such
descriptions. Within the squad, target designation implies ability on
the part of the squad leader to understand and transmit to his squad
the target designation received from his platoon leader, and also
ability on his own part to designate a target intelligently; within
the platoon, target designation implies ability on the part of the
platoon leader to understand the company commander's designation of
the target and to transmit that designation to his platoon in such
manner as to insure an equal distribution of its fire within the
sector assigned to it; within the company, target designation implies
ability on the part of the company commander to designate the targets
into which the company sector is divided in such manner that the
platoon leaders will have no trouble in understanding him. It also
implies ability on the part of the company commander to change the
objectives or sectors of his platoons, and his ability to cover the
whole target of the company during a forward movement of a part of the
company, by the so-called "switch" or the "overlapping" method, or by
any other method which is practicable and accomplishes the desired
end. Targets should be designated in a concise, prompt, unmistakable
manner, but, as we all know, it is not always an easy matter to
describe the location of an object, especially if the object be not
conspicuous or readily recognized. This is due to two reasons: First,
the unit commander is likely to indulge in vague talk instead of
accurate description, and, second, even if correct terms are used, it
is more than likely that all members of the firing line will not be
able to grasp the idea, because the commander will be using
expressions which, although understood by himself (in some cases
perhaps due to the fact that he is looking at the objective), they
will not be clear to the men. The secret of prompt, accurate and
concise designation of a target lies in the use of simple words and
terms with which both the unit commander and the men on the firing
line are thoroughly familiar.

Of course, if the target be distinct and clearly defined, it can
easily be designated by name, as for example, "That battery on the
hill just in front of us," "Cavalry to our right front," etc.

Generally the designation of a target, if not conspicuous nor readily
recognized, will include:

1. A statement of what the target is, or its appearance (shape, color,
size, etc.)

2. Where the target is with reference to some easily recognized
reference point.

3. How wide the company sector is.

The following systems of target designation are used at the School of
Musketry. Each has its limitations, defects and advantages, under
various conditions of ground, etc. A wise selection of one or a
combination of two or more, is a material factor in efficiency.

=1446. Horizontal Clock Face System.= (Used with visible, distinct
targets.)

SYSTEM EXAMPLE

1. Announce direction. "At one o'clock."

2. Announce range. "Range 1000."

3. Announce objective. "A troop of cavalry dismounted."

[Illustration: Fig. 52]

PROCEDURE:

1. All look along the line pointing toward one o'clock of a horizontal
clock face whose center is at the firing point, and whose 12 o'clock
mark is directly perpendicular to the front of the firing line.

2. All look at a point about 1000 yards away on the one o'clock line,
and

3. At 1000 yards on the one o'clock line find the objective.

=1447. Vertical Clock Face System.= (Used with small or indistinct
targets.)

SYSTEM EXAMPLE

1. Announce the general direction "To our right front" (or "At two
of the reference point. o'clock").

2. Designate as a reference point "A stone house with two chimneys."
the most prominent object in the
zone indicated.

3. Announce the position of the "At three o'clock."
target with respect to the
reference point.

4. Announce the range. "Range 1000."

5. Announce the objective. "A hostile patrol of four men."

[Illustration: Fig. 53]

PROCEDURE:

1. All men look to their right front (or along the two o'clock line).

2. The reference point (stone house) is found in the indicated
direction.

3. A clock face (vertical) is imagined centered on the reference
point, and the men look along the line leading from the clock center
through three o'clock, and

4. 1000 yards from the firing point.

5. Find the hostile patrol.

=1447a. Finger System.= (Used with indistinct or invisible targets and
to define sectors.)

(By one "Finger" we mean the amount of frontage that one finger,
held vertically, will cover, the arm being extended horizontally
to its full length. In the average case this amount of frontage
covered is about 1/20 of the range. For instance, at a range of
1000 yards, one "Finger" will cover fifty yards of the sector The
same result will be obtained by using the rear-sight leaf in the
position of aiming.)

[Illustration: Fig. 54]

SYSTEM EXAMPLE

1. Announce direction to "To our right front, at 1000 yards."
reference point as in the
vertical clock face system.

2. Announce reference point. "A stone house with two chimneys."

3. Announce angular distance and "Four o'clock, three fingers."
direction from the reference
point to the target.

4. Announce range. "Range 1000."

5. Announce objective. "A skirmish line alongside of the
fence, length about two fingers,
right at the dark bush."

[Illustration: Fig. 55]

PROCEDURE:

The reference point is found as explained, and the vertical o'clock
line upon which the target will be found. The soldiers who do not see
the target will extend the aim to its _full extent_ palm of the hand
upward, finger held vertically with one side of the hand "against" the
reference point. The target will be found on the four o'clock line,
and touching the third finger, at 1000 yards distance, its right flank
at the bush and its left flank about 100 yards farther to the right.

The following case will illustrate more concretely the use of the
"Finger" system:

There is a red house about 3/4 mile to our front, and to the right of
this house and a hundred yards or so to its rear, there is a line of
trenches that can be seen with the aid of field glasses, but the
trenches are difficult to locate with the unaided eye. There is no
prominent landmark in the direction of this line of trenches, or on
either flank, except the red house mentioned. The company commander
locates the flanks of the line of trenches through his field glasses;
he then extends his arm forward horizontally its full length, palm up,
raises the fingers of his hand and, sighting on the line of trenches,
finds that the trench line has a length of four "finger widths," and
that the flank of the line nearest the red house is three "finger
widths" from it. He decides to divide the line into two sections of
two "fingers" each, and assign one section to each of his two
platoons. He then calls his platoon leaders (and range finders, if
necessary), and says, for instance: "Center of objective, five to the
right of that red house, First Platoon, two fingers; Second Platoon,
two fingers." The two platoon leaders then estimate the range and give
the company commander their estimates independently. The company
commander also estimates the range, and taking the average, then
announces the range, say 1300 yards, after which the platoon leaders
return to their platoons, and give, for instance, these instructions:
"The target is a line of trenches four 'fingers' long, and about 1300
yards away; the center of the target is five 'fingers' to the right of
that red house, at about 10 o'clock. We are to fire at the two fingers
on the right of the center and the Second Platoon will look after the
two fingers on the left of the center." (The leader of the Second
Platoon gives similar instructions.)

Every man in the platoon figures out the platoon objective and
endeavors to fix it with respect to some features of the ground so
that he will be able to pick it up promptly after his platoon starts
to advance. After fixing well in his mind the platoon objective, he
figures out what part of it belongs to his squad, and then selects
that portion of the squad objective corresponding to his position in
the squad. If during the advance, his particular portion of the target
should become hidden from view, he will fire on the nearest portion of
the trench line, returning to his own part as soon as it becomes
visible.

=1447b. Communication.= After the company has been committed to the
fire fight, verbal commands cannot be heard, and it is well nigh
impossible even to secure attention to signals. It is, therefore, most
important that we should train and practice the company as much as
possible during time of peace in the rapid and accurate transmission
of orders and signals along the firing line.

Matter upon which a commander would need to communicate with his
subordinates, in addition to tactical orders, would generally be
confined to:

(a) Changes of elevation and deflection.

(b) Changes in the apportionment of the target among the subdivisions.

(d) Changes in the rate of fire.

(e) And rarely change of target from one within to one without the
limits of the objective or sector.

=1448. Procedure.= The following is given merely as a concrete example
of the procedure that might be followed in certain ring exercises--it
will not, of course, apply to all cases; it is merely given as a
concrete illustration of what might actually be done under certain
conditions.

_Company Commander._ On receiving his instructions from the officer in
charge of the exercise, the company commander returns to his company,
keeping track of the changing aspect of his target as he does so.
Arriving at the center of his company, he is met by his platoon
leaders, and range finders, who have assembled in his absence. The
company commander says:

"The target is a line of skirmishers, visible in part. It may be seen
between us and that long line of green bushes which begins one finger
to the right of that red water tower at 11 o'clock and it extends well
beyond the bushes both to the right and to the left."

(At this point the range finders begin their estimation and the
captain pauses until the senior range finder, or other designated
person automatically announces the average estimate of the range,
saying for example, "range 1100.")

The captain then resumes, saying:

"The sector assigned to this company is three fingers long and extends
from that group one finger to the right of the water tower, to a point
four fingers to the right of the tower. Each platoon will cover the
entire company sector. Range ten-fifty and eleven-fifty. Fire at will
at my signal. Posts."

_Platoon Leaders._ The platoon leaders then hasten to the center of
their platoons and "put into execution the commands and directions of
the captain, having first taken such precautions to insure a correct
sight-setting and clear description of the aiming point as the
situation permits or requires" (Par. 251 I. D. R.), by saying:

_Target:_ The target is a line of skirmishers about 1100 yards to our
front, only parts of which are visible.

_Reference point:_ That long line of bushes about 1300 yards to our
left front. The company sector is three fingers long and lies between
us and that reference point, extending one-half finger beyond each end
of the bushes.

_Aiming point:_ The bottom of the line of bushes.

_Range:_ 1050 and 1150.

As soon as the range is announced each front rank man sets his sight
at 1050 and each rear rank man at 1150. Squad leaders assure
themselves that sights are set and that the men of their squads
understand the aiming point and sector and then raise their hand as a
signal that all are ready. Similarly, the platoon leaders raise their
hands to show that all of the squads are ready, and when the captain
sees that all of his platoons are ready, he signals to begin firing.
At the captain's signal, each platoon leader commands: "_Fire at
Will._"

Firing then begins at a rate of about 3 shots per minute (Par. 14, I.
D. R.).

=1449. Points To Be Borne in Mind.= Bear in mind the following points
in the solution of field firing problems:

1. Combine sights should, as a rule, be used where the estimated range
is 1000 yards or more, the two ranges being 50 yards on each side of
the estimated range, the even numbers firing at one range, the odd
numbers at the other.

2. When aiming points are chosen they should be clearly described.
Bushes, bunches of lines of grass, fence posts, etc., should not be
designated as aiming points when clear and more definite aiming points
are available. The choice of the best of several possible aiming
points is of great importance.

3. Have some system of simple signals whereby you may know when all
your men are ready to begin firing. Otherwise, you may begin the
firing before some of your men have their sights set and before they
understand the sector and point of aim. For example, let each squad
leader raise his right hand when his squad is ready, and each platoon
leader his right hand when his platoon is ready.

4. Platoon leaders must always be sure to designate a definite aiming
point. Remember that in the case of an indistinct target, the company
commander describes the TARGET to the platoon leaders, and they in
turn announce the AIMING POINT. Having seen and located the target,
the platoon leader must examine the terrain at, in front of and behind
the target, and choose the aiming point for his men. He must then
determine the proper sight-setting for that particular aiming point.
He then announces both aiming point and range.

5. Instead of describing a sector as, for example, extending so many
yards (or so many "fingers") north from the reference point, it is
better to describe it as extending from the reference point northward
for a definite distance, as "To that tall red house."

The last method is the best, because it leaves no room for guessing on
the part of subordinates. So, remember it is always best, when
possible, to define the limits of sectors physically, as, extending,
for example, from "That house to that windmill," etc.

6. When acting as part of the battalion, always be sure to designate
someone (usually one of the musicians) to watch for signals from the
battalion commander, and don't fail to repeat back all signals.

[Illustration: Fig. 56]

7. In advancing by rushes, always allow sufficient time between rushes
to recover the loss in fire caused by the cessation of fire. In other
words, the next rear unit should not start forward until the one that
has just advanced has resumed an effective fire.

8. Remember that in all field firing problems the distribution of hits
has big weight. Consequently, it should be definitely understood
beforehand, that, in the absence of any target designation by the
company commander, each platoon leader will look after the sector
corresponding to his front, and that each man will fire at the part of
the sector corresponding to his front. Should the targets in a given
sector disappear, then the platoon leader covering that sector will at
once switch his fire to the adjoining sector until the reappearance of
the targets in his own sector. For example, let us suppose the company
sector, A-B (the company being on the defense and not advancing) is
divided into four parts A-B, B-C, C-D and D-E. Platoon No. 1 would
look after everything that appeared in D-E; No. 2, after everything
that appeared in C-D; No. 3, everything that appeared in B-C; and No.
4, after everything that appeared in A-B.

Should the target suddenly disappear from D-E, then No. 1 would switch
his fire over to C-D, and keep it there until the target reappeared in
D-E, and if the targets disappeared from C-D, before reappearing in
D-E, then both No. 1, and No. 2, would switch their fire cones to A-C.

=1450. Exercises.= The following exercises for the elementary training
of individuals and squads were used with success by the troops
mobilized on the Texas border:

TARGETS

1. The target will be represented by individual soldiers.

2. With reference to their visibility, the battlefield will present
three classes of targets:

(a) Those which are visible throughout.

(b) Those which are visible in part.

Targets will be arranged to simulate one of the classes enumerated.
Instruction will begin with simple exercises in which the target
presented is plainly visible, and represents only the objective of the
unit undergoing instruction. It should progress to the more difficult
exercises in which the target is invisible and the line of figures is
prolonged to include the objective of units on the right or left.

3. The limits of indistinct targets may be shown to unit commanders by
the use of company flags. These flags, however, will be withdrawn from
sight before a description of the target or estimate of the range is
attempted, and before anyone but the commander of the unit undergoing
instruction sees their location.

4. At the conclusion of each exercise in which flags are used to mark
the limits of the target or its subdivisions, they should be
displayed, in order that any existing errors may be readily pointed
out.

5. To determine proficiency in target designation, the instructor will
provide a sufficient number of rifles, placed on sand bags or other
suitable rests, and require those charged with fire direction and
control to sight them at the limits of their objective. An inspection
by the instructor will at once detect errors. Similarly, in those
exercises in which all the members of the firing unit participate, the
percentage of rifles aimed at the correct target may be determined.

6. In these exercises no method of communication will be permitted
that could not be used under the conditions assumed in the problem.

EXERCISE NO. 1--RANGING

Object: To train the individual to set his sight quickly and
accurately for the announced range and windage; and to accustom
leaders to the giving of windage data.

Situation: The company is formed in single rank at the ready with rear
sight set at zero and the slide screw normally tight.

Action: The range and windage are announced, sights are set accurately
in accordance therewith and as rapidly as may be, each man coming to
port arms immediately upon completing the operation.

Time: Time is taken from the last word of the command.

Standard: Sights should be correctly set within 15 seconds.

Note: Of the two elements, time and accuracy, accuracy is the more
important.

Par. 411, I. D. R., implies complete use of the rear sight, that is,
utilization of the wind gauge, and sight setting to the least reading
of the rear sight leaf, i. e., 25 yards. Sight setting therefore in
this exercise should include, more often than not, "fractional ranges"
and windage data.

EXERCISE NO. 2--RANGING

Object: To familiarize officers and noncommissioned officers in the
use of an auxiliary aiming point.

Situation: Two men with the company flags are stationed to mark the
enemy's invisible position. This position should be suitably located
with reference to a practicable aiming point.

Action: The markers are signaled to display their flags. An officer or
noncommissioned officer is called up and the enemy's position is
pointed out. The flags are then withdrawn and the officer or
noncommissioned officer selects an auxiliary aiming point and gives
his commands for firing at that point.

EXERCISE NO. 3--TARGET DESIGNATION

Object: To train the individual soldier to locate a target, from a
description solely. To do so quickly and accurately and fire thereon
with effect, and to train officers and noncommissioned officers in
concise, accurate and clear description of targets.

Situation: The men are so placed as not to be able to see to the
target. The instructor places himself so as to see the objective.

Action: The instructor, to one man at a time, describes the objective,
and directs him to fire one simulated round. The man immediately moves
so as to see the target, locates it, estimates the range and fires one
simulated shot.

Standard: For ranges within battle sight, time 20 seconds; beyond
battle sight, time 30 seconds. Not more than 15% error in the
estimation of the range. Objective correctly located.

Note: Arrangements made so that the description of the target is heard
by only the man about to fire. After firing the man will not mingle
with those waiting to fire.

EXERCISE NO. 4--TARGET DESIGNATION

Object: To train the squad leader in promptly bringing the fire of his
squad to bear effectively upon the target presented. To train the
individuals of a squad to fire effectively from orders of the squad
leader and automatically to obtain effective dispersion.

Situation: The squad is deployed, the squad leader being in the firing
line. Position prone. A sighting rest is provided for each rifle.

Action: Upon the appearance of the target the squad leader gives the
necessary orders for delivering an effective fire. The men under these
orders sight their rifles and then rise. The instructor then examines
the position and sighting of each rifle.

Time: Time is taken from the appearance of the target until the last
man has risen.

Target: A squad of men to outline a partially concealed enemy emerges
from cover, advances a short distance and lies down.

Standard: 90% of the rifles should be sighted in conformity with the
orders of the squad leader and should evenly cover the whole front of
the objective. The squad leader's estimate of the range should not be
in error over 15%.

Note: The squad leader should not, in general, be allowed to divide
the target into sectors but to obtain distribution by training the men
to fire at that portion of the objective directly related to the
position they occupy in their own line. The exercise should be
repeated with the squad leader in rear of the squad and not firing. As
to this, it is to be noted that Musketry School experiments prove that
in small groups the directed fire of say seven (7) rifles is more
effective than the partially undirected fire of eight rifles obtained
when the group leader is himself firing.

EXERCISE NO. 5--COMMUNICATION

Object: To teach prompt and accurate transmission of firing data
without cessation of fire, and also to teach automatic readjustment of
fire distribution.

Situation: A squad deployed in the prone position and with sighting
rests, is firing at a designated target.

Action: A squad with sights set at zero is deployed and brought up at
the double time into the intervals of the firing line and halted. The
firing data is transmitted to them without cessation of fire. At the
command =Rise=, given 20 seconds after the command =Halt=, the first
squad rises and retires a short distance to the rear. At the same
time, the supports cease fire and adjust their rifles in the rests so
as to be aimed at the target as they understand it. They then rise
and their rifles are examined by the instructor for range and
direction.

Standard: 80% of the rifles should be sighted according to the
transmitted data and aimed according to the principles of fire
distribution.

Target: One target equal to a squad front, which is increased to two
squads prior to the arrival of the supports in the firing line.

Note: This exercise should be repeated with the supporting squad
reënforcing on a flank. To determine whether the original squad is
able to keep its assigned sector during an advance, this exercise
should be repeated, the supports being thrown in after a series of
short advances by the original squad. Care should be exercised to
prevent the transmission of firing data in a manner under which
service conditions would be impracticable. (See Exercise No. 6.)

EXERCISE NO. 6--COMMUNICATION

Object: To train the squad leader in receiving and transmitting
instructions by visual signals alone.

Situation: A squad with its leader in the firing line is deployed in
the prone position firing at will.

Action: The instructor, without sound or other cautionary means,
signals (visually) to the squad leader at various intervals to,

First: Change elevation.
Swing the fire to the right or left.
Suspend the firing.
Etc., etc.

The squad leader, upon receiving a signal, causes his squad to execute
it without verbal command, or exposing himself.

Time: No specified time limit.

Standard: The squad leader should fire with his squad, but after each
shot should look towards his platoon leader for any signal, then
observe the fire and conduct of his men, then, after glancing again at
his platoon leader, fire again. This the squad leader should do
without exposing himself. By lying about a head's length ahead of his
men he can see his squad front. In transmitting orders he can
accomplish it by nudging the men on his right and left and signaling
to them with his hand.

Note: This exercise is essential to prepare men for the deafening
noise of a heavy action when speech or sound signals are largely
futile.

EXERCISE NO. 7--FIRE DISCIPLINE

Object: To train men to carry out strictly the fire orders given them,
and to refrain from starting, repeating or accepting any change
therefrom without direct orders from a superior.

Situation: A squad deployed in the prone position.

Action: While the squad is firing at an indistinct but specified
target, another and clearly visible target appears in the vicinity of
the first target but not in the same sector. Upon the appearance of
this second target, the instructor sees that the men continue firing
at the assigned target. The corporal should check any breach of fire
discipline.

Note: Variations of this exercise should be given to test the fire
discipline of the men in other phases, such as rate of fire (Par. 147,
I. D. R.), etc.

FOOTNOTES:

[18] The subjects of fire control and fire direction are coveted in
pars. 285-290; 1434-1436.

[19] In attack the target is called "objective"; in the defense,
"sector."

PART V

CARE OF HEALTH AND KINDRED SUBJECTS

CHAPTER I

CARE OF THE HEALTH

=1451. Importance of good health.= Good health is just as necessary to
an army as rifles and ammunition. Not only does every sick man take
away one rifle from the firing line, but in addition he becomes a care
and a burden on the hands of the army. Indeed, it is fully as
important for a soldier to take care of his health as it is for him to
take care of his rifle and ammunition. The importance of doing
everything possible to look after one's health is shown by the fact
that in every war so far, many more men have died from disease than
were killed in battle or died from wounds. In our Civil War, for
instance, for every man on the Union side who was killed in battle or
died from wounds, two died from disease. In the Spanish American War
the proportion was 1 to 5-1/2.

To do all that he can to keep in good health is a duty that the
soldier owes his country.

=1452. Germs.= Diseases are caused by little, tiny live animals or
plants called _germs_. They are so small that you require a magnifying
glass to see them.

The following illustrations show the typhoid and malarial germs as
seen through a magnifying glass:

[Illustration: Fig. 1

_Typhoid germs_

_Malarial germs_]

The Different Ways of Catching Disease

=1453. Five ways of catching disease.= There are only five ways to
catch disease:

1. By breathing in the live germs.
2. By swallowing the live germs.
3. By touching the live germs.
4. By having the live germs stuck into the skin by insects that bite.
5. By inheritance from parents.

Diseases Caught by Breathing in the Germs

=1454. The more common diseases.= The following are some of the more
common diseases caught by breathing in the germs: Colds, diphtheria,
tonsilitis, grippe, scarlet fever, pneumonia, and consumption.

The germs that cause these diseases grow well in the dark, warm, moist
lining of the nose, throat, windpipe and lungs, and they are coughed
or sneezed out or blown out and float in tiny bubbles in the air or
fall to dry into dust which is blown about with the wind, and so are
breathed in, or they may be transferred directly by kissing invalids
and sick children.

=1455. How to avoid breathing in sickness.= Do not visit sick people
or a house where the children are sick.

Do not let other people cough or sneeze over your food or in your
face.

Do not allow others to spit on the floor of your squadron or tent.

Do not do these things yourself.

Blow your nose into a handkerchief that can be boiled or into a piece
of paper that can be burned.

[Illustration: Fig. 2

_Distributing sickness_]

Put your hand before your face when you cough or sneeze.

Rinse out the nose with hot, weak salt water at night and especially
if you have been inhaling dust.

Brush the teeth after each meal and before going to bed.

Do not pick the nose with the finger nails; it makes sore spots in
which germs grow.

On dusty hikes tie a handkerchief across the nose and mouth.

Never sweep the floor with a dry broom. Use a damp mop and so pick the
germs up and carry them out instead of driving them up in the air as
dust.

Diseases Caught by Swallowing the Germs

=1456. The more common diseases.= The following are some of the more
common diseases caught by swallowing the germs: Typhoid fever,
dysentery, cholera, and ptomaine poisoning.

=1457. Water as a distributer of disease.= Impure water is one of the
most common distributers of disease that there is. Therefore, water
from sources unknown or soiled by sewage, should be avoided as deadly
and should not be used, _unless boiled_, for drinking, brushing the
teeth or rinsing mess kits.

You can not always tell polluted water by its appearance, smell or
taste. Unless from a sewer or drain, it may look clear and sparkling,
with no smell and have a pleasant taste, so, water that is not known
to be pure should not be drunk.

=1458. Vegetables as a distributer of disease.= In some localities the
inhabitants use the streams for all purposes; drinking, washing
clothes, bathing, washing vegetables and table utensils and as a
sewer. When kitchen gardens are irrigated with such water the germs
are to be found on the cabbages, beets, etc.

=1459. Food, fruit, cigarettes, and drinking cups as distributers of
disease.= Germs may be smeared on the hands and thus transferred to
articles of food, fruit, cigarettes, or drinking cups, especially in
public places, so that he who buys at the public stands may have
disease handed to him with his purchase.

=1460. The fly as a disease carrier.= The ordinary fly is one of the
worst and filthiest transmitters of disease in existence.

Flies carry germs from privies, latrines, spitoons, and sick rooms to
the food on your table, by means of their smeared feet, in their spit
or in their specks.

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

=1461. The dog as a distributer of disease.= Dogs are often
distributers of disease. They use their tongues for toilet paper and
afterwards lick their coat or the hands of their friends. Petting dogs
or letting them lick your hand is dangerous.

[Illustration: Fig. 4

'_Nice doggie_'

(And "nice doggie" may be giving him some disease)]

=1462. How to avoid swallowing disease.= Do not drink water that is
not known to be safe. If you have no one to ask and are traveling, it
is safer to drink tea or coffee, because they have been made from
boiled water, or to drink bottled mineral waters. In the field boil
your drinking water. Boiled germs are dead and will not grow. They
are, therefore, harmless.

[Illustration: Fig. 5

_Boiling water to kill germs_]

Beware of water from wells, farm pumps ponds, cisterns, water coolers
and barrels, especially in railroad cars, stations, and ferry boats.

Do not drink lemonade, soft drinks, or milk from peddlers.

Beware of the public drinking cup.

[Illustration: Fig. 6

_Next!_

(What germs will he leave on the cup?)]

Always wash your hands before going to meals and before putting things
into your mouth, especially after going to the toilet or handling
animals.

Do not adopt strange dogs and do not pet dogs.

Before eating fruit or raw vegetables, wash and peel them unless
picked from the tree by yourself.

Do not eat food that is spoiled, smells or tastes badly or is flyblown
or maggoty or full of bugs.

Do not eat food which is not sufficiently cooked. All smoked, dried or
salt meats or fish, such as ham, bacon, sausage, dried beef, bloaters,
salt mackerel or codfish, must be well cooked, as they may contain
"Measles" or other worm eggs. Cooking kills the egg.

Do not eat food exposed on public stands to dust, flies, dirty hands,
dirty water, dirty cans, or dirty glasses and buckets.

Do not allow flies to breed in dirt or other filth around the house,
nor allow them to walk on your food. This is possible by burning,
burying or otherwise removing the dirt or filth, and by using fly
traps, "swatters" and fly paper.

Do not wet lead pencils with your spit.

[Illustration: Fig. 7

_Swallowing sickness_]

Do not wet your fingers with spit when you deal cards or turn over
pages of books or magazines.

Keep the teeth brushed and the mouth clean. Have decayed teeth
repaired at once. Decayed teeth drop out and they cause abscesses,
which may destroy the jaw bone or cause brain fever. Old snags give
the stomach the germs of rotting, which cause dyspepsia.

Diseases Caught by Touching the Germs

=1463. The more common diseases.= The following are some of the more
common diseases caught by touching the germs: Ringworm, mange,
barber's itch, sore eyes, boils, carbuncles, lockjaw, small pox,
chancroid, syphilis, and gonorrhoea (clap).

=1464. Ringworm, mange, and barber's itch.= These diseases are carried
from person to person by finger nails and hands and from dirty water
to those who bathe in it or have their underwear washed in it.

=1465. Lockjaw.= The germs of lockjaw are found in manure and in soil
fertilized with it; hence, a bullet which passes through such soil
before wounding carries these germs into the wound. Any wound soiled
with such dirt will be infected. Also, wounds made by toy pistols and
fire-crackers often contain lockjaw germs.

=1466. Chancroid, syphilis, and gonorrhoea (clap).= These are diseases
whose germs are usually caught from prostitutes and whores, or from
husbands who have caught the germs from prostitutes and whores. They
are called "Venereal diseases," after Venus, the Roman goddess of
lustful love, but they are very often caught in other ways than in
sexual intercourse, and by innocent persons.

=The chancroid plant= causes a very nasty sore, the _chancroid_, which
often destroys much flesh and causes buboes. The germ can be carried
on the fingers to any part of the body. When the chancroid is healed
and the bubo becomes a scar the disease is cured.

The _syphilis_ germ will grow first where it is rubbed in, causing a
hard ulcer, called a chancre, and after that it travels through the
entire body. No place is sacred to its destructive power and it lives
as long as the patient does. It is the cause of much insanity, palsy,
apoplexy, deafness, blindness and early death. In mothers it causes
miscarriages and in children it causes stillbirths, freaks,
deformities, feeble minds and idiots; also, deaf and dumb, palsied,
stunted, sickly and criminal conditions.

A syphilitic person is always dangerous although apparently well. He
often has a sore mouth and his spit is as dangerous as that of a mad
dog. The bite of such a man will develop a chancre and any pipe, cup,
or tooth pick which he uses, or his kiss, will give syphilis. A
syphilitic tattooer who wets his needles and his India ink with spit
will put a chancre into the skin with the picture.

The instruments of cheap advertising dentists and of quack doctors or
ignorant nurses can carry these germs from one person to another. So
can the razors and caustic stick of barbers who are careless.

=The clap plant= likes to grow in the linings of the openings of the
body where it is dark and warm and moist where it causes a catarrhal
discharge called _clap_, which is easily smeared on hands, towels,
handkerchiefs or by actual contact.

It grows well in the eyelids, causing great damage and often
blindness. Many babies get the clap plant into the eyes during birth,
from the mother, and unless treated within a few minutes after birth,
have sore eyes and go blind,--a terrible calamity to the child and the
family. If you have clap the germs can be carried on your hands to
your eyes.

The clap plant also grows well in the cavities of the joints, causing
rheumatism and crippling; it grows in the heart, causing valvular
heart disease, which is incurable, and also in the generative organs
of men and women, causing self-made eunuchs and childless wives. It
is the cause of most of the severe abdominal diseases of women
requiring the use of the knife to cut out the diseased part.

The venereal diseases cause more misery than any others and most of
the doctors would have to go into other professions to earn their
living if these diseases did not exist.

When a young man is "sowing his wild oats" he is really planting in
his own body the syphilis and clap plants, and the harvest will be
greater than any other crop. He will reap it in days of bedridden
misery, and possible sudden death. He will reap it in bitter hours by
the bedside through the illness and death of his wife or in her long
years of ill health. He will reap it in little white coffins, idiot
babies; blind, deaf and dumb, sickly and stunted children. And it will
cost him lost wages and hospital and doctor fees.

Yes, the wild oats crop is a bumper crop. King Solomon was wise when
he warned his son against the harlot, "for her end is bitter."

The best way to avoid venereal diseases is to keep away from lewd
women, and live a clean moral life. It is said by medical authorities
that sexual intercourse is not necessary to preserve health and manly
vigor, and that the natural sexual impulse can be kept under control
by avoiding associations, conversations, and thoughts of a lewd
character. However, persons who will not exercise self-control in this
matter can greatly lessen the risks of indulgence by the prompt use,
immediately upon return to camp or garrison, of the prophylaxis
prescribed by War Department orders and which all soldiers are
required to take after exposing themselves to the danger of venereal
infection. Men who immediately after intercourse urinate and wash the
private parts thoroughly with soap and water will lessen the chances
of infection. Drunkenness greatly increases the risk of infection.

Should one be so unfortunate as to contract venereal disease, he
should see a first-class, reputable physician AT ONCE, the sooner the
better. It is a fatal mistake to try to conceal venereal disease by
not seeing a doctor, he who does so is taking a most dangerous chance
of ruining himself physically for life.

=1467. How to avoid diseases caught by touching the germs.= Keep your
skin clean with soap and water.

Do not bathe or wash your clothes in dirty water, have them boiled
when laundered.

Do not go barefoot, even in barracks.

Do not use towels or toilet articles of other people, especially in
public wash-rooms unless they furnish a fresh towel for you. Do not
sleep in houses left empty by the enemy unless ordered to do so.

Do not sleep in native shacks in the tropics.

Do not rub the eyes with dirty hands. When dirt gets in have a doctor
get it out.

If you have clap, do not rub your eyes with your hands, and wash your
hands well with soap and water after taking treatment or passing
water.

Do not handle dogs or cats, especially strange or sickly ones.

Do not clean the ears with sticks or straws,--have a doctor do it for
you.

Do not have cheap, advertising dentists fix your teeth. Have the army
dentist fix them and see him at least once every six months,--or see a
good civilian dentist.

Do not have pictures tattooed on your skin.

Do not smoke other men's pipes.

Do not handle or touch wounds with anything but a first aid package.

Beware of chipped drinking glasses in cafés, restaurants and other
places. The slightest cut from such a glass whoso clipped part has
been in contact with the mouth of a syphilitic person will give you
syphilis.

Seek good companions like your mother and sister. Keep away from John
Barleycorn. He always wants to turn you over to a harlot.

Whores and prostitutes are all diseased and will give you germs that
will live to give diseases to you, your wife and your children, forty
years from now. Keep away from them.

Diseases Caught from Biting Insects

=1468. The more common diseases.= The following are some of the more
common diseases caught from the bites of certain insects: Malaria,
yellow fever, and dengue fever.

The germs of malaria, yellow fever and dengue fever live in the blood,
and are sucked up into the blood by mosquitoes when they bite.

Malaria germs, however, will develop only in the mosquito called,
_Anopheles_.

Yellow fever germs will develop only in the mosquito called,
_Stegomyia_.

Dengue fever germs will develop in the mosquito called _Culex_ and in
_Anopheles_.

After a period of development in these mosquitoes the germs will find
their way to the spit glands, and are injected into the person whom
the mosquito bites. (Note. Male mosquitoes cannot bite.)

_Absolutely the only way that malaria, yellow and dengue fevers can
possibly be caught is from mosquitoes._

[Illustration: Fig. 8

_The malaria mosquito_

(She stands on her head)]

[Illustration: Fig. 9

_Culex the mosquito_

(She is humpbacked)]

=1469. How to avoid malaria, yellow and dengue fevers.= To avoid these
diseases, which are carried by mosquitoes, we screen all houses with
fine wire screens and use mosquito nets on the beds. Also, under
certain conditions we take daily doses of quinine in malarious
regions.

We kill the mosquitoes.

To do this we must know their habits.

Mosquitoes all lay eggs in water. These hatch out as _wigglers_ or
_larvae_, which have to come to the top frequently to breathe. In
about twelve days or longer they turn into _tumblers_ or _pupas_,
which in a few days longer come to the top when their backs split open
and the mosquito comes out and flies away.

[Illustration: Fig. 10

_The eggs_

_The larvae_

_The pupa_

_The mosquito leaving the pupa skin_]

_The malaria mosquito_ is domestic like the chicken and lives around
in houses hiding in the grass, bushes or dark corners and comes out to
bite at night. When a settlement is abandoned the malaria mosquito
moves away also. She rarely flies far from home and is not found much
beyond 500 yards from a house. She lays her eggs in running clear
water preferably, but she will accept water in hollow trees, between
the leaves of lilies or air plants or in vases of flowers, or in
cisterns and water butts.

[Illustration: Fig. 11

_Catching malaria_]

[Illustration: Fig. 12

_On Guard_

(No mosquito bites for him)]

_The yellow fever mosquito_ is domestic like the house cat. She hangs
around the house and rarely flies as far as the next house even,
preferring to travel on a visitor's coat. She will bite in the day
time and will lay her eggs in any little collection of water in the
house, the eaves trough, the water barrel, old tin cans or bottles,
pitchers, vases or the refrigerator drip.

_The dengue_ mosquito is a marsh and town mosquito. She flies far and
well and will breed in any sort of water, even brackish.

_To kill mosquitoes_--

Catch them in the house; empty all water from tin cans, old barrels,
etc; cover with wire all cisterns and water barrels; fill in all
puddles and drain off marshes; put oil on all pools and streams to
choke the wrigglers; cut down grass and bushes around houses.

CHAPTER II

PERSONAL HYGIENE

=1470.= The knowledge of taking care of the body is called _Personal
Hygiene_, the principal rules of which are as follows:

1. KEEP THE SKIN CLEAN.
2. KEEP THE BODY PROPERLY PROTECTED AGAINST THE WEATHER.
3. KEEP THE BODY PROPERLY FED.
4. KEEP THE BODY SUPPLIED WITH FRESH AIR.
5. KEEP THE BODY WELL EXERCISED WITHOUT EXHAUSTION.
6. KEEP THE BODY RESTED BY SUFFICIENT SLEEP.
7. KEEP THE BODY FREE OF WASTES.

Sanitation is the practice of the laws of Hygiene.

=1471. RULE 1. Keep the Skin clean.= A dirty body invites sickness.
Small troubles such as chafing, sore feet, saddle boils, sore eyes,
felons, whitlows, earache, toothache, carbuncles, fleas, lice and
ringworms, are all caused by lack of cleanliness, and they put men on
sick report.

Owing to excessive perspiration a daily bath with soap is desirable in
summer and in the tropics, the year around. At least a weekly bath
should always be taken when possible. When not possible to bathe, take
a good rub daily with a dry towel.

Keep your feet clean with soap and water and put on dry socks before
sleeping at night. Soiled socks should be washed and hung up to dry
over night.

Keep your finger nails trimmed short with scissors or knife. Never
bite them off. Keep them cleaned and keep your hands washed,
especially at meal times.

Underwear must be washed in clean water, hot when possible and when
soiled change as soon as possible.

Do not bathe or wash your clothes in dirty water. Bathing in water
containing much alkali (hard water) or fine sand or mud will make the
skin smart or chafe easily and cause sore eyes.

The hair of the head should be kept well-trimmed.

=1472. RULE 2. Keep the body properly protected from the weather.=
Clothing of the soldier is worn as a protection. Too much causes
sweating and exhaustion on the march and too little causes chills and
frost bite.

Be careful to rebutton the clothing in winter time after attending to
Nature's calls. Cold fingers may make you careless, but the cold is
merciless and may cause a bad frost bite.

The first feeling of frost bite is numbness and the first sign is a
marble whiteness. Frost attacks first the nose, ears, cheeks, fingers
and toes.

Sun glare and snow blindness may be prevented by colored goggles or a
handkerchief tied across the face with a small slit for the eyes or by
greasing the face and eyelids and rubbing in charcoal around the eyes.

=1473. RULE 3. Keep the body properly fed.= Your company mess is
sufficient for your needs and is wholesome, provided it is well
chewed. Large lumps of food take a longer time to digest than small
particles do, and so they tire the stomach and also cause
constipation, gas and indigestion with headache.

Do not eat food left behind in strange houses or by the enemy, nor
food that smells or looks badly.

If haversack rations are issued to you, do not eat them all at the
first meal, but make a division for each meal. Stuffing will make you
sick on a hike and later, hunger will drive you to eat things you
would not touch at other times.

Before starting on the day's hike drink all the water you can and fill
your canteen with water only.

Be sure your canteen does not leak.

After starting, do not drink anything until the end of the hike.

Do not eat ice or snow to quench thirst. It will make you more
thirsty. Do not drink large quantities of cold spring water when
heated,--it will give you a very bad bellyache.

Do not drink whiskey or beer, especially in the field. It will weaken
you and favor heat exhaustion, sunstroke, frost bite and other serious
troubles.

Alcohol muddles the mind and clouds thoughts, and so causes a feeling
of carelessness and silliness that may ruin some military plan, or
give the whole thing away to the enemy and with it the lives of
yourself and your comrades.

The soldier who drinks alcohol will be among the first to fall out
exhausted.

If you use tobacco, do not chew or smoke while marching. Tobacco is
only a dope and increases the work of the heart.

A cup of hot coffee is a good stimulant.

=1474. RULE 4. Keep the body supplied with fresh air.= The brain,
kidneys and other internal organs require oxygen (a part of the air)
continually, and if deprived of it for five minutes, the body will
die. Therefore, it is easy to see that we must continually get plenty
of fresh air into the lungs to supply the blood which carries the
oxygen throughout the body. Except in winter time when steam-heated
barracks are filled with sleeping men, it is not, as a rule, difficult
to get all the fresh air we need. The air in a dormitory should smell
sweet and clean, even though warm. Fresh air should be continually
admitted in a way that will not throw a draft on any of the sleepers.

It is much better to sleep in a cold room with fresh air than in a hot
stuffy one.

Fresh air not only prevents consumption, but it will cure mild cases
of consumption without other medicines.

=1475. RULE 5. Keep the body well exercised without exhaustion.=
Exercise is absolutely necessary to good health. Lack of exercise of
any set of muscles will cause them to grow flabby and weak. Outdoor
sports are the best form of exercise, because they use all the body
muscles, and are in the open clear air.

Exhaustion, on the other hand, not only weakens the muscles of the
body, but it also lessens the vital forces and powers to resist germs.

=1476. RULE 6. Keep the body rested by sufficient sleep.= Give the
body enough sleep. Eight hours of uninterrupted sleep are enough for
the average man, and you should always have that much in every
twenty-four hours. Remember your comrades need it also; so, if you
come in after taps, do not make a racket with slamming doors, heavy
tramping, talking or whistling. And in camp be careful not to fall
over tent ropes or step on other sleepers. Do not drink coffee at
night,--it will keep you awake and rob your body of needed rest.

When on the march take advantage of every halt to rest your body. As
soon as the command is given to fall out, select, if possible, a dry
place on the side of the road to sit or lie on. If carrying the pack,
loosen it and rest back on it, in a sitting or lying position. If the
march has been a long one, lie flat on your back and raise the feet in
the air. This is a quick way to remove the heavy dragged feeling of
the feet and legs and to rest the heart, because the blood runs out of
the legs into the body.

=1477. RULE 7. Keep the body free of wastes. Get into the habit of
emptying the bowels at a certain hour each day.= Immediately after
breakfast is a good time. This is a habit that can be cultivated just
like any other habit. Cultivate it. It will do much to keep you in
good health.

Always empty the bowels and bladder, especially the bowels, whenever
you have the least desire to do so. Do not allow a little personal
inconvenience or laziness to prevent you from doing this. The wastes
from the bowels and bladder, especially the bowels, are poisons that
should always be expelled from the body just as soon as possible.

The free drinking of water flushes the bladder and helps to loosen the
bowels. A glass of hot water soon after reveille will not only help to
loosen the bowels, but it will also benefit the stomach and flush out
the bladder. Some people drink a big glass of water, either hot or
cold, every morning before breakfast.

Proper physical exercise and eating ripe or cooked fruits will also do
much to keep the bowels open.

Pressing and rubbing _downward_ with the left hand on the lower _left_
side of the belly will do much to induce a movement of the bowels.

Most constipation comes from swallowing food in large chunks, drinking
large quantities of cold liquids with the meals and eating heavy
articles of diet, such as beans, fried pork, hot bread.

Do not get into the habit of using laxatives to keep the bowels open.
Their continued use is injurious. Use the natural means suggested
above.

The constant moderate use of alcohol injures the kidneys and when they
become too weak to work and throw off the waste, a deadly disease,
called "Bright's Disease," results.

CHAPTER III

FIRST AID TO THE SICK AND INJURED

=1478. Object of teaching first aid.= The object of teaching first
aid, or early assistance of the injured or sick, is not only to enable
one person to help another, but also in some measure to help himself,
until a surgeon or other thoroughly trained person can be seen.

It is a mistake to think you must know many things to be helpful, it
is only necessary to know a few simple things, _but you must
understand them clearly and be able to do them well_.

=1479. Asphyxiation (suffocation) by Gas.= Asphyxiation by gas is
treated the same as in the case of drowning, omitting, of course, the
operation of getting the water out of the body.

=1480. Bite of dog.= } Either requires immediate and heroic treatment.
=Bite of snake.= }
_Lose no time._

1. Prevent the poison from traveling toward the heart and brain by
putting on at once a tourniquet between the wound and the heart.

2. Suck the wound and be sure to spit out the poison and rinse the
mouth afterward. It is safe, if you have no cuts or sores on the lips
or in the mouth.

3. Enlarge the wound with a knife (in the direction of the bone, not
across) to make it bleed more freely, and again suck the wound.

4. Apply to the wound any strong acid or caustic, such as carbolic
acid, lime, wood ashes or tincture of iodine, or burn it with a hot
iron. Telegraph wire will do.

5. Wash out the wound with hot water and pack with equal parts of
baking soda and salt, and apply a bandage.

6. Then, in the case of a snake bite, loosen the tourniquet little by
little, taking about half an hour so as to permit any poison that may
remain in the wound to be _gradually_ absorbed by the blood. In the
case of a dog bite, the tourniquet is loosened at once.

After the tourniquet has been removed, the patient must rest quietly
for several hours. If he feel faint, he may have a
stimulant,--alcohol, coffee or tea,--_but do not give the stimulant
before the poison has been removed from the wound_, because stimulants
increase the heart beats and thereby hurry the poison into the blood.

If the dog is not mad (rabid), the wound does not need treatment
different from any other kind of a wound.

When bitten by a snake, kill it, if possible, and have it shown to a
doctor for examination.

=1481. Bleeding.= The following comparison between the blood and the
water in a city will enable you to understand easily the question of
bleeding:

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

The {water } flows from a pump called {waterworks} through
{_blood_} {_heart_ }
{rigid pipes } called {watermains}. When there is {a leak }
{_elastic tubes_} {_arteries_} {_bleeding_}
the {plumber } stops the flow of the {water } by
{_doctor_} {_blood_}
{turning a key valve } between the {waterworks} and the
{_pressing the blood tube shut_} {_heart_ }

{leak } and then proceeds to repair the leak
{_bleeding cut_}
{by soldering }. He then turns on the {water } by
{_by sewing or by bandaging_} {_blood_}
{opening the valve in the water main }.
{_removing pressure on the blood tube_}

Fig. 2 shows where pressure with the thumb will squeeze the blood tube
between the thumb and the bone.

[Illustration: Fig. 2

_Pressure with thumb at 1 checks bleeding of left side of chin cheek
and jaw._

_Pressure at 2 stops bleeding from big blood tube on left side of head
and neck and face._

_Pressure at 3 controls bleeding in arm pit and shoulder._

_Pressure at 4 checks bleeding in arm pit and anywhere down the arm
and hand._

_Pressure at 5 stops bleeding of arm and hand._

_Pressure at 6, on either leg, stops bleeding of leg and foot._]

In addition to the pressure raise the leg or arm or head above the
heart. This will slow the flow of the blood and lessen leakage.

However, one cannot hold the thumb forever on the blood tube, so we
make an artificial thumb, called a _tourniquet_, which is a pebble or
other hard object wrapped in some soft material (to prevent injury to
flesh), which is pressed down on the blood tube and held in place by a
strip of any material which can be tied so as to keep up the pressure.

A tourniquet, therefore, is like the valve in a water main.

[Illustration: Fig. 3

_The pebble_

_The pebble wrapped to protect the flesh_

_The bandage tied around over the pebble_

_The bandage twisted tightly by means of a windlass (stick) which is
held by another bandage_

_This shows pressure applied by tourniquet (also called Spanish
windlass) instead of the hand and by direct pressure of the First Aid
Packet_]

The above diagrams show how a tourniquet is applied.

[Illustration: Fig. 4

_Bandage to stop bleeding in arm_]

[Illustration: Fig. 5

_Bandage to stop bleeding in foot_]

When no one is around to assist you, sometimes it will be possible to
plug the wound in your own body with the first aid packet or with your
thumb or handkerchief.

When the bleeding is slight, or is from the scalp or palm of the hand,
or sole of the foot, direct pressure upon the wound itself with the
pad of the first aid package will often be sufficient to stop the
leak.

Nature when left alone stops the leaks with her own solder, called
blood-clot, which forms in the cut ends of blood tubes and corks them
or seals them up until a scar forms a permanent seal.

[Illustration: Fig. 6

_Arm blown off at elbow_

NOTICE:

1. Bandage on stump.

2. Tourniquet below to check bleeding.

3. Arm held upright to lessen bleeding.

4. Strap supports arm and also acts as a tourniquet.]

=1482.= The dangers from a tourniquet are:

1. Gangrene,--that is, the death of a limb caused by the lack of
blood, which has been cut off by the tourniquet. By watching the toes
and finger tips and loosening the tourniquet if they are becoming blue
black and remain white when pinched, gangrene may be prevented.
However, the wound should be plugged before loosening the tourniquet.

2. Injury to nerves from pressure which may cause palsy (paralysis).
However, that will generally pass off in a few days.

=1483. Broken Bones (Fractures).= A broken bone or fracture is known
by pain in a particular place that hurts on movement or when touched.
Also, by a deformity or a movable lump, caused by the broken end of
the bone.

[Illustration: Fig. 7

_Compound fracture_]

A broken bone should be handled with the greatest possible care.
Careless handling may cause the broken ends to pierce the flesh and
stick out through the skin. This is called a =compound= fracture, and
is serious, because it adds fuel to the fire by making a doorway for
germs to enter, which may cause death or the loss of the limb.
Furthermore, careless handling may make the bones grow together in a
bad position, causing a deformity.

[Illustration: Fig. 8

_Break of UPPER arm bone. Pulling the broken bones out of flesh and
into place_

_Treatment for break of upper arm bone_

1. Padding of grass.

2. Splints put on FRONT and BACK.

3. Splints extend beyond elbow joint.

4. Arm is supported by a sling.

_Treatment for break of both bones of lower arm_

1. Plenty of grass padding to protect the flesh.

2. The splints are put FRONT and BACK and bound snugly. The hand is
included.

3. The whole dressing is held up by a sling.]

The best way to treat a broken leg or arm bone is as follows: (Fig.
8.)

Pull until the ends come together. You can tell this by the relief the
patient feels and by the limb assuming its proper length,--that is,
the same length as the other side.

=1484.= To keep the ends of the bones in place, fasten to the limb two
boards or any other substance that will not bend. Such boards or other
substance are called splints. They act as artificial bones. All
splints should be well padded with some soft material like raw cotton
waste, grass (be sure the grass contains no biting insects), leaves,
hay or excelsior, to prevent pressure of the soft flesh on the ends of
the bones.

[Illustration: Fig. 9

_Points to note:_

Plenty of grass between the legs.

Plenty of grass between injured leg and splint.

Splint extends from arm pit to foot.

The other leg is used for a splint.

Plenty of strapping to keep leg quiet.]

When the thigh bone is broken, put a splint from the arm to the ankle
and use the other leg as a splint. Fasten them by bandages, belts, gun
sling, etc., passed around the chest, waist, hips, knees and ankle.

When an arm is put in a splint, hang the hand and forearm in a sling.
It will give much relief.

When the jaw is broken, the upper jaw makes a good splint.

When the collar bone is broken this makes a good treatment: Fig. 10.

[Illustration: Fig. 10

_Broken collar bone_

The left collar bone is broken. Therefore, pull BOTH shoulders
backward away from the breast bone (same action as for broken arm
bone) and hold in position with bandage or straps.

_Broken collar bone (left side)_

When the shoulders are pulled back then the hand is bound close to the
chest high up. This prevents it from flopping and so twisting the
broken ends of the collar bone.]

A broken rib is treated by putting a wide strap or bandage around the
chest and drawing it tight while all the air is breathed out.

[Illustration: Fig. 11

_Treatment for broken ribs, left side_

The patient breathes all the air out of the chest and at that moment
the strap is buckled tightly. This prevents the broken ends of the
ribs from tearing the flesh or the lungs. Notice the roll of shirt
which acts as a pad.]

This keeps the rib quiet and the man will breathe with his belly
instead of his chest.

A broken skull usually makes a man unconscious and may cause death. It
is recognized by a wound or swelling of the scalp and a dent in the
skull. A doctor should be called at once. Always examine an
unconscious man for injury to the head.

=1485. Burns.= If clothing sticks to the burn, do not try to remove
it, but cut around it. Prick blisters at both ends with a perfectly
clean needle, and remove the water by gentle pressure, being careful
not to break the skin.

A good application for a burn is carbolic acid dissolved in water (a
teaspoonful in a pint of water), or tincture of iodine dissolved in
water (one teaspoonful in a pint of water, to which is added as much
salt as will cover a dime), or olive oil, vaseline or butter.

Lacking the remedies named above, ordinary _baking_ soda or flour may
be dusted on the unbroken skin, or a cloth dampened with salt water
that has been boiled, to which may be added the same amount of whiskey
or brandy as there is water.

Another application for burns recommended by some, is the scraping of
a raw potato, renewed when it feels hot.

Different burns should be treated as follows:

=Sunburn=,--treat with olive oil, vaseline or butter, or with a
glycerine or witchhazel, applying with a dampened cloth.

=Quicklime or lye=,--treat with vinegar.

=Carbolic acid=,--treat with alcohol.

=Other acids=,--treat with baking powder or lime water.

=1486. Burning clothes=, particularly those of women and children, has
been the unnecessary cause of many horrible deaths, either from
ignorance of the proper means of extinguishing the flames, or from
lack of presence of mind to apply them. A person whose clothing is
blazing should (1) immediately be made to lie down--be thrown if
necessary. The tendency of flames is upward, and when the patient is
lying down, they have not only less to feed upon, but the danger of
their reaching the face, with the possibility of choking and of
ultimate deformity is greatly diminished. (2) The person should then
be quickly wrapped up in a coat, shawl, rug, blanket or any similar
article, preferably woolen, and never cotton, and the fire completely
smothered by pressing and patting upon the burning points from the
outside of the envelope.

The flames having been controlled in this way, when the wrap is
removed, great care should be taken to have the slightest sign of a
blaze immediately and completely stifled. This is best done by
pinching it but water may be used. Any burns and any prostration by
shock should be treated in the manner prescribed for them.

=1487. Bruises.= The best treatment for a bruise is heat.

A hot brick or a bottle of hot water wrapped in cloth, towels wrung
out of hot water, or even an electric light bulb, will give much
relief.

However, always remember this: Never put the hot object on the bare
skin--always wrap the source of heat in a thick cloth to hold the heat
in and at the same time protect the skin. If not practicable to do
this wrap the source of heat, then spread a towel over the skin before
applying the hot object.

If you use an electric bulb, watch it closely, as it will char and
possibly set things on fire.

The above treatment is also excellent for lumbago, stiff neck, and
stiff muscles.

A tub bath as hot as you can stand it is fine for refreshing tired,
stiff muscles. It is also good for lumbago.

=1488. Chiggers.= Apply kerosene oil. Bacon is also excellent, and so
is butter or lard with salt.

=1489. Choking. Foreign body in the throat.= The common practice of
slapping the back often helps the act of coughing to dislodge foreign
bodies in the windpipe.

If this does not succeed, have the patient lie over a chair with his
head down low or hold him as in the first step to revive a drowning
person and have him cough. When in either of these positions have some
one slap him on the back so as to induce coughing.

The above failing, give him a large amount of warm water with a little
salt, mustard or baking soda in it, and then have him put his finger
in his throat so as to induce vomiting which will often bring up the
obstruction.

In children, and even in adults, the expulsion of the body may be
facilitated by lifting a patient up by the heels and slapping his back
in this position.

If none of the methods above described are successful, summon a
physician, taking care to send him information as to the character of
the accident, so that he may bring with him the instruments needed for
removing the obstruction.

=1490. Cuts.= Small cuts should be treated with tincture of iodine or
washed with alcohol (bay rum or listerine will do) and bandage up.
Large wounds may be similarly cleaned and then closed by adhesive
plaster.

=1491. Diarrhoea.= Apply warm bandages to the belly. Some woodsmen
recommend the following: Fire brown a little flour to which two
teaspoonfuls of vinegar and one teaspoonful of salt are added; mix and
drink. They claim this is a cure nine cases out of ten. A
tablespoonful of warm vinegar and teaspoonful of salt will cure most
severe cases. Also, hot ginger ale or hot water containing a
teaspoonful of witch hazel is good. Repeat any of the above drinks
about every hour.

Take a purgative, which will usually expel the offending cause,
generally too much undigested food.

=1492. Dislocations.= The place where two bones come together is
called a joint.

When two bones forming a joint are knocked apart, it is called a
_dislocation_, and the bones are said to be _out of joint_.

The first sign of a dislocation is the accident.

The second sign is immediate interference with the motion of the joint
and awkwardness in using the limb.

The third sign is deformity of the joint,--it looks queer when
compared with the same joint on the other side.

If you are unsuccessful after trying several times to replace a
dislocation, get a doctor.

If no doctor is available, make the man sick by having him drink some
warm salt water and then put his finger in his throat.

When he vomits the muscles and ligaments (tissue connecting the
joints) will relax and you may be able to get the bone back in place.

After replacing the bones put the joint at rest with a large compress
and bandage.

When uncertain as to whether you have to deal with a broken bone or a
dislocated joint, give treatment for a broken bone, because rest and
quiet for the injured part are good in either case.

The following diagrams show the usual methods of replacing
dislocations:

[Illustration: Fig. 12

_To put the arm bone back into the shoulder socket_

1ST MOVE

_Rest your weight at elbow, pulling downward, until the muscles at the
shoulder are tired and will stretch._

2ND MOVE

_Swing the elbow across, close to the chest, and place the hand on
other shoulder._

3RD MOVE

_Keep the elbow close to the chest and bring the hand forward as if
held out for a penny._

_This should twist the bone into the socket._

_Relocating the jaw_

_When the jaw bone is out of place, the man cannot shut his mouth._

_Put both thumbs (protected by a handkerchief) on the lower teeth and
with the forefingers at the angles of the lower jaw push down in the
back of the jaw._

_Relocating thumb_

_When the thumb bone is dislocated it must be PUSHED into place--not
pulled._

_Relocating finger_

_Pull the finger bone back into place._]

=1493. Drowning.= _Rescuing._ Approach the drowning man from behind,
seizing him by the coat collar, or a woman by the back hair, and tow
at arms length to boat or shore. Do not let him cling around your neck
or arms to endanger you. Duck him until unconscious if necessary to
break a dangerous hold upon you; but do not strike to stun him.

A drowning person _does not_ come to the top three times before giving
up.

_Reviving._ When a person is apparently drowned he is unconscious and
not breathing because his lungs are full of water and his skin is blue
and cold because no air is getting into his blood to redden it and
warm it; _remember_ the heart does not stop until some time after the
breathing stops. If we can get air into the blood and start breathing
again before the heart stops we can save the patient's life. If we
cannot get the breath started in time the heart stops and the patient
is then dead.

Our problem then is this:

1. To get the water out of the lungs.

2. To get the air into the lungs and start the man breathing before
the heart stops.

Emptying the lungs is precisely similar to emptying a bottle.

The lungs are the bottle, the windpipe is the neck of the bottle and
the cork of the bottle may be the tongue turned back in the throat or
mud and leaves from bottom of the pool and bloody froth in the
nostrils. We therefore--

1. { Pull out the cork.
{ =Remove mud, mucus, etc., and pull the tongue forward.=

[Illustration: Fig. 13

_Pulling out the cork_]

2. { Turn the bottle neck down to pour out the contents.
{ =Place the patient's head lower than his chest so the water
{ will run out.=

[Illustration: Fig. 14]

Then lay the patient on a blanket, if possible, and on his stomach,
arms extended from his body beyond his head, face turned to one side
so that the mouth and nose do not touch the ground. This position
causes the tongue to fall forward of its own weight and so prevents it
from falling back into the air passages. Turning the head to one side
prevents the face coming into contact with mud or water during the
operation.

Kneel and straddle the patient's hips, facing his head.

[Illustration: Fig. 15]

Roll up or rip off the clothing so as to get at the bare back.

Locate the lowest rib, and with your thumbs extending in about the
same direction as your fingers, place your spread hands so that your
little finger curls over the lowest rib. _Be sure to get the hands
well away from the back bone_,--the nearer the ends of the ribs the
hands are placed without sliding off, the better it is.

Then with your arms _held straight_, press down SLOWLY AND STEADILY on
the ribs, bringing the weight of your body straight from your
shoulders. _Do not bend your elbows and shove in from the side._

Release the pressure suddenly, removing the hands from the body
entirely, and thus allowing the chest to fill with air.

Wait a couple of seconds, so as to give the air time to get into the
blood. This is most important.

Repeat the pressure and continue doing so, slowly and steadily,
pressing down at the rate of ordinary breathing. That is to say,
_pressure and release of pressure (one complete respiration)_ should
occupy about five seconds. Guide yourself by your own deep, regular
breathing, or by counting.

Keep up for at least one hour the effort to revive the patient; and
much longer if there is any sign of revival by way of speaking,
breathing, coughing, sneezing or gurgling sounds.

Do not stop working at the first signs of life, but keep it up until
the patient is breathing well and is conscious. If you stop too soon
he may stop breathing and die.

Persons have been revived after two hours of steady work, but most
cases revive within about thirty minutes.

If you are a heavy man, be careful not to bring too much force on the
ribs, as you might break one of them.

In the case of women or thin persons place a roll of clothing under
them at the waist line before beginning the pressure.

If you happen to be of light build and the patient is a large, heavy
person, you will be able to apply the pressure better by raising your
knees from the ground, and supporting yourself entirely on your toes
and the heels of your hands, properly placed on the floating ribs of
the patient.

Do not attempt to give liquids of any kind to the patient while he is
unconscious, for he cannot swallow them. They will merely run into his
windpipe and choke him, and furthermore, it will take up valuable
time.

However, after the patient has regained consciousness you may give him
hot coffee or hot whiskey, punch or aromatic spirits of ammonia (a
teaspoonful in water).

Then wrap up the patient warmly in hot blankets with hot water
bottles, and take him to the nearest hospital or put him to bed and
send for a doctor. Why? Because the dirty water in the lungs has
damaged the lining and the patient is in danger of lung fever and
needs care and nursing.

Aromatic spirits of ammonia may be poured on a handkerchief and held
continuously within about three inches of the face and nose. If other
ammonia preparations are used, they should be diluted or held farther
away. Try it on your own nose first.

The above method of artificial respiration is also applicable in cases
of electric shock, suffocation by gas and smoke.

=1494. Earache.= Put a teaspoonful of salt into a quart of water and
add 6 teaspoonfuls of tea. Boil it. As soon as it is cool enough to
stand the finger, drip some into the nostrils until it falls into the
throat. Clear out the nose and throat by sniffing,--_do not blow_ the
nose.--and then gargle with the rest of the remedy as hot as can be
taken, holding each mouthful well back in the throat. This will often
open up the tubes running from the ears to the throat, and relieve the
pressure against the ear drum. In addition, a little hot oil may be
dropped into the ear. Repeat the treatment in one-half an hour if not
successful first time.

=1495. Ear, foreign body in.= Lay the head over, with the affected ear
up, and pour in some warm oil or soap suds. This will float the thing
up, unless it be a vegetable such as a grain of corn or a bean.
Turning the affected ear down and then jumping, jerking the head, or
pounding it gently, may dislodge it.

A little peroxide of hydrogen poured into the ear will often dislodge
the substance, especially if it be wax.

In case of an insect, a bright light held near the ear will often
cause it to leave the ear to go to the light.

=1496. Electric Shock.= Failure of respiration following an electric
shock by lightning or live wire is treated the same as in the case of
drowning, omitting, of course, the operation of removing the water out
of the lungs.

Do not try to pull a man away from a live wire until you have put on
rubber overshoes or gotten a _wooden_ stick with which to get the wire
away from him. Otherwise you will yourself get a shock.

=1497. Eye, foreign body in.= Close the eye for a few moments and
allow the tears to fill the eye; upon opening it, the body may be
washed out by them.

Never rub the eye.

The foreign body can often be removed by keeping the eye open with one
hand and splashing water into it with the other, or by dipping the eye
into clean water while holding the eyelid open with the hand.

If the body lies under the lower lid, make the patient look up, and at
the same time press down upon the lid; the inner surface of the lid
will be exposed, and the foreign body may be brushed off with the
corner of a handkerchief.

If the body lies under lid, (1) grasp the lashes of the upper lid and
pull it down over the lower, which should at the same time, with the
other hand, be pushed up under the upper. Upon repeating this two or
three times, the foreign body will often be brushed out on the lower
lid.

[Illustration: Fig. 16]

(2) If this fails, the upper lid should be turned up; make the patient
shut his eye and look down; then with a pencil or some similar article
press gently upon the lid at about the middle, and grasping the lashes
with the other hand, turn the lid up over the pencil, when its inner
surface will be seen, and the foreign body may readily be brushed off.

[Illustration: Fig. 17]

If the body is firmly stuck in the surface of the eye, a careful
attempt may be made to lift it out with the point of a needle. If not
at once successful, do not try again, as you may injure the sight.

Lime, plaster or whitewash in the eye should be washed out with a very
weak mixture of vinegar and water. Acids in the eye may be washed with
baking soda in water. Olive oil will also afford relief.

After the removal of a foreign body from the eye, a sensation as if of
its presence often remains. People not infrequently complain of a
foreign body when it has already been removed by natural means.
Sometimes the body has excited a little irritation, which feels like a
foreign body. If this sensation remains over night, the eye needs
attention, and a surgeon should be consulted; for, it should have
passed away, if no irritating body is present.

After the removal of an irritating foreign body from the eye, salt
water should be poured into it, then butter, lard or olive oil may be
used for a salve.

=1498. Fainting.= Fainting is caused by the blood leaving the head.
Therefore, we must get the blood back into the head, which is done by
placing the patient on his back, with the head lower than the rest of
the body. If necessary, make, by digging, a slight depression in the
ground for the head, neck and upper part of shoulders. Also, the head
may be placed lower than the rest of the body by putting a couple of
folded blankets, or a few folded coats or any other suitable article
under the body: also, by raising the feet by hand or otherwise. The
clothing should be loosened by unbuttoning and the patient fanned.
Give him as much fresh air as possible,--so, do not let people crowd
around him. Mop the face and forehead with a handkerchief soaked in
cold water.

=1499. Fish hook.= If a fish hook gets caught in the flesh, push it on
through and when the end sticks out, break off the hook and pull it
out the other way. Put tincture of iodine on the wound and bandage.

=1500. Fits.= The man falls over suddenly unconscious in a convulsion,
which continues until he is blue in the face, when he gradually quiets
down and regains consciousness. He is liable to injure himself by the
fall and by biting his tongue. Put a stick or cork between his teeth
and let him lie quietly undisturbed. Don't try to hold him down or
make him sit up. He will come to no harm on the floor and you cannot
stop the fit. Ammonia on a handkerchief held under the nose to smell
will assist reviving consciousness. Put him in the hospital at once.

=1501. Fracture.= See, "Broken Bones."

=1502. Freezing.= If a man is overcome by the cold, do not take him
into a warm room, or heated tent. Put him into a cool room without
draughts and get a doctor at once. Meanwhile loosen his clothing and
rub arms and legs towards the heart with cold water and a towel or
sponge, using pressure.

When he revives give him hot drinks and wrap him up well in hot
blankets and put him in the hospital.

When freezing to death a man feels overcome with sleepiness and
stupor. Take a switch or stick and beat him unmercifully. Remember
that falling to sleep means death.

=1503. Frost-bite.= The best way to get frost-bitten is to have on
damp clothing, such as wet shoes and socks or mittens. The first
feeling of frost bite is numbness, and the first sign is marble
whiteness.

_Treatment._ Rub the frozen part briskly with snow or ice cold water,
if the frost-bite has just occurred. If it has been frozen more than
fifteen minutes, _rub very gently_ with snow, cold water or coal oil
(kerosene). If you rub hard, it will break the frozen flesh.

Returning pinkness is a sign of thawing; if the parts turn a dark
color, see a surgeon at once, for it means gangrene (death of the
flesh).

When thawed out apply plenty of oil, tallow or vaseline.

If gangrene has set in and no doctor is available, then treat as a
burn.

By all means keep away from heat. To toast frost-bitten fingers or
toes before a fire is liable to result in chilblains.

=1504. Headache.= Among troops headache is usually due to intestinal
indigestion, combined with a congestion of the stomach. Take a
tablespoonful of Worcestershire sauce or 5 drops of tobasco sauce in a
tumbler of hot water as a drink and put a small piece of soap up into
the bowel to cause a movement.

=1505. Heat exhaustion.= The man falls out in a faint while marching,
or on fatigue or parade. He looks pale, his body is clammy and cold,
his breathing is sighing and heart fluttering. _What is the matter?_
His heart is weak from poisons in the blood, usually alcohol, but
often too much carbonic gas and too little oxygen. This occurs when
men are soft-muscled: so, young soldiers, recruits and fat soldiers
and especially those who drink alcohol, use drugs or smoke or chew
tobacco while hiking, are the first to have it.

_Treatment._ Loosen the man's clothing, remove his pack, lay him on
his back in the shade, with head and shoulders lower than his hips and
raise his feet in the air. This will make the blood flow to the heart
and brain. If he has fainted, slap the bare chest with the hand or a
wet towel and briskly rub the arms towards the heart. If he does not
revive, apply hot bottles, or bricks to the chest and abdomen, and
ammonia to the nose, as a smelling salt. Do not give stimulants until
he is conscious. He should ride in the ambulance, or go to the
hospital.

=1506. Lightning.= A man struck by lightning is treated the same as in
the case of drowning, omitting, of course, the operation of getting
the water out of the lungs.

=1507. Nose, foreign body in.= If it cannot be sneezed out, lean the
head back and pour a little oil into the nostril. Then snift and blow
the nose alternately. If this is not successful, take a lead pencil
and try to push the object straight back into the throat. This must be
done very gently.

=1508. Poison.= When poison has been swallowed, cause the patient to
take a large quantity of luke-warm water and make him vomit by putting
his finger in his throat. Repeat this and then have him swallow the
white of two eggs or some milk into which raw flour or corn-starch has
been stirred.

If you know he took bichloride of mercury, you may increase the amount
of eggs and give one-half glass of weak lime water.

If you know he took carbolic acid, give him alcohol (pure alcohol or
in the form of gin or whiskey) and plenty of it in order to neutralize
the acid.

Get a doctor as soon as possible, and save the vomit and poison not
taken, for him to see.

=1509. Scalds.= Apply at once common baking soda or olive oil and
cover with a bandage. To sprinkle with flour is also good.

=1510. Scratches of cats and other animals.= Apply tincture of iodine
or wash with soap and water.

=1511. Shock.= In case of collapse following an accident, treat the
accident; then treat as for fainting. Apply hot plates, stones or
bottles of hot water, or an electric light wrapped in towels over the
stomach. Wrap up warmly. Keep the patient quiet, in the dark, and send
for a doctor.

=1512. Snow or sun blindness.= Smear the nose and face about the eyes
with charcoal, and wear a cloth over the face with small holes for the
eyes.

=1513. Sore throat.= Gargling with hot strong tea or hot water and
salt is often effective.

Listerine diluted in water and used as a gargle is also good.

Peroxide of hydrogen is a good gargle.

=1514. Spider bite.= Apply a cloth dampened with alcohol or weak
ammonia and water.

=1515. Suffocation by gas.= See "Asphyxiation by gas."

=1516. Sprains.= The regular medical treatment is to plunge a sprained
ankle, wrist or finger, into water as hot as can be borne at the
start, and to raise the heat gradually thereafter to the limit of
endurance. Continue for half an hour, then put the joint in a hot wet
bandage, reheat from time to time, and support the limb in an elevated
position,--the leg on a chair or stool; the arm carried in a sling. In
a day or two begin gently moving and kneading the joint, and rub with
liniment, oil or vaseline.

As a soothing application for sprains, bruises, etc., the virtues of
witch hazel are well known.

=1517. Stings.= Stings of bees, jelly fish and other stinging animals
are treated with a very weak solution of ammonia in water applied as a
lotion. Or apply a very weak solution of carbolic acid in water, a
strong solution of baking powder, a slice of crushed raw onion, a
moist quid of tobacco, witch hazel, listerine, or a paste of clay.

Before applying any of these remedies, extract the sting, if left in
the wound. Also, work out as much of the poison as possible by
massaging and sucking the wound.

=1518. Sunburn.= Treat with witch hazel or listerine or vinegar well
diluted with water.

=1519. Sunstroke.= In sunstroke the man has a blazing red face, dry,
burning hot skin; agitated heart; snoring breathing; a high fever, and
is unconscious and delirious. _What is the matter?_ The part of the
brain which regulates the heat of the body is overcome by the heat and
loses control,--the man is entirely too hot all the way through.

_Treatment._ First of all remove the pack and shoes and loosen the
clothing. Then souse the man, clothing and all, with water. Lay him in
the shade and fan him, keeping him covered and wet. This will cool him
off without chilling too much. If possible, rub the chest and legs,
but not the belly, with ice.

=1520. Wounds.= Wounds may be made in every degree of size, from the
jab of a splinter to the loss of a part of the body from shrapnel.

No matter what form of the wound or the cause, we know the following
fact to be of the utmost importance: A wound without germs in it will
heal rapidly without pain, redness, heat, or pus and the patient will
have no fever. He will eat his regular meals and act as though well.

Such wounds we see made by surgeons when operating. On the other hand,
wounds infected with germs are painful, hot, angry, red, and swollen
and form large quantities of pus or matter.

Pus is a mixture of germs, blood and the flesh that they have
destroyed. This pus prevents wounds from healing and often burrows
under the skin, forming abcesses which cause fever and chills, and the
pus enters the blood causing delirium and death.

Our one aim in treating wounds is to keep out germs, and we accomplish
this by means of the first aid packet.

=1521. The first aid packet= consists of two gauze compresses sewed to
two cotton bandages. They are sealed in wax paper. There are also two
safety pins wrapped in wax paper. These articles are placed in an
airtight metal case which protects them from contamination.

Now, the one important fact about this first aid packet is that the
bandage compresses and safety pins have been _sterilized_,--that is,
they contain no living germs of any kind. It is, therefore, perfectly
safe to put on a wound, _provided the pad touches the wound before it
touches anything else and provided that the wound has not been
handled_. Therefore, do not wash a fresh clean wound.

[Illustration: Fig. 18

_First Aid Packet_

After the removal of packet from tin can, open the wax paper and hold
the package as shown.

1. Left hand holds the wax paper.

2. Right hand holds the bandage.]

[Illustration: Fig. 19

_First Aid Packet_

Shake out packet with right hand so that the pad (or compress) does
not touch anything until placed on the wound.]

CAUTION. Have the wound ready before you open the packet. Do not touch
the gauze pad with ANYTHING. Do not breathe on it, and be especially
careful not to cough or sneeze over it. These things put germs on it
which will grow in the wound.

By observing these instructions you may save a man's life. By not
observing them, you may cause his death, or cause him much pain and
suffering.

The life of a wounded man is often in the hands of the first one who
attends him.

It is said that since the adoption of the first aid packet by armies,
it has done more than everything else to save the lives of those
wounded in battle by preventing the infection of wounds.

In an emergency a pad from any kind of cloth may be boiled for ten
minutes to kill the germs, the water drained off to allow it to cool,
and then placed on the wound. Or, the pad may be held over a clear
fire until it is fairly scorched; then let it cool. A little charring
of the surface will do no harm. Any kind of bandage may then be used
to hold it in place.

When a bullet strikes a man first, the wound is clean cut and germ
free and it will heal rapidly. If, however, it strikes something
first, and bounces off (ricochets) and then strikes a man, it will be
knocked into an irregular shape and, therefore, cause a ragged wound
with much bruising. What is more important, such a bullet will carry
germs into the wound from the object struck, and almost surely some
shreds of clothing.

When a wound is infected it is extremely difficult to kill the germs
(disinfect). Such a wound, before applying the first aid dressing
should be painted with a tincture of iodine, or alcohol or be well
washed with boiled salt water.

=1522.= The illustrations below show improvised litters.

[Illustration: Fig. 20

_Litter made of one-half shelter tent, three shelter tent pins and one
tent or other pole_

_Litter made of two poles, two coats and one belt. The coats are
buttoned and the sleeves turned inside out, the poles being run
through the sleeves. The belt is used as a head rest_

_The coat litter in use_]

PART VI

MILITARY COURTESY AND KINDRED SUBJECTS

CHAPTER I

MILITARY DEPORTMENT AND APPEARANCE--PERSONAL CLEANLINESS--FORMS OF
SPEECH--DELIVERY OF MESSAGES, ETC.

=1523. Military Deportment and Appearance.= The enlisted man is no
longer a civilian but a soldier. He is, however, still a citizen of
the United States and by becoming a soldier also he is in no way
relieved of the responsibilities of a citizen; he has merely assumed
in addition thereto the responsibilities of a soldier. For instance,
if he should visit an adjoining town and become drunk and disorderly
while in uniform, not only could he be arrested and tried by the civil
authorities, but he could also be tried by the summary court at his
post for conduct to the prejudice of good order and military
discipline. Indeed, his uniform is in no way whatsoever a license for
him to do anything contrary to law and be protected by the government.

Being a soldier, he must conduct himself as such at all times, that he
may be looked upon not only by his superior officers as a soldier, but
also by the public as a man in every way worthy of the uniform of the
American soldier.

Whether on or off duty, he should always look neat and clean, ever
remembering that in bearing and in conversation he should be every
inch a soldier--shoes must be clean and polished at all times; no
chewing, spitting, gazing about, or raising of hands in ranks--he
should know his drill, his orders and his duties--he should always be
ready and willing to learn all he can about his profession--he should
never debase himself with drink.

A soldier's uniform is more than a mere suit of clothes that is worn
to hide nakedness and protect the body. The uniform of an army
symbolizes its respectability, its honor, its traditions, and its
achievements, just as the flag of a nation symbolizes its honor,
dignity and history. Always remember this, and remember, too, that the
soldier who brings reproach upon his uniform is in the same class as
the priest who brings dishonor upon his robes.

It is not given to every man to wear the uniform of his Country's
army,--it is an honor and a privilege to do so, and no individual has
a right to abuse this honor and privilege by bringing the uniform into
disrepute through misbehavior.

It should be remembered that the soldiers of a command can make the
uniform carry distinction and respect, or they can make it a thing to
be derided.

The soldier should take pride in his uniform.

A soldier should be soldierly in dress, soldierly in carriage,
soldierly in courtesies.

A civilian owes it to himself to be neat in dress. A soldier owes it
to more than himself--he owes it to his comrades, to his company--he
owes it to his country, for just so far as a soldier is slack so far
does his company suffer; his shabbiness reflects first upon himself,
then upon his company and finally upon the entire Army.

It is a fact known to students of human nature that just in proportion
as a man is neatly and trimly dressed is he apt to conduct himself
with like decency. The worst vagabonds in our communities are the
tramps, with their dirty bodies and dirty clothes; the most brutal
deeds in all history were those of the ragged, motley mobs of Paris in
the days of the French Revolution; the first act of the mutineer has
ever been to debase and deride his uniform.

The man who misbehaves himself in uniform in public creates a bad
impression of the whole command, as a result of which his comrades
must suffer. Remember that a man in the uniform of a soldier is
conspicuous,--much more so than a civilian,--and consequently any
misconduct on his part is more noticeable than if done in civilian
clothes. The man who deliberately besmirches the uniform of his
Country's army by appearing in public drunk or by other misconduct,
not only fouls his own nest, but he also dishonors the uniform worn by
his self-respecting comrades.

It is a well known fact that laxity in dress and negligence in
military courtesy run hand in hand with laxity and negligence in
almost everything else, and that is why we can always look for certain
infallible symptoms in the individual dress, carriage and courtesies
of soldiers.

_Should a soldier give care and attention to his dress?_

Yes; not only should a soldier be always neatly dressed, but he should
also be properly dressed--that is, he should be dressed as required by
regulations. A soldier should always be neat and trim, precise in
dress and carriage and punctilious in salute. Under no circumstances
should the blouse or overcoat be worn unbuttoned, or the cap back or
on the side of the head. His hair should be kept properly trimmed, his
face clean shaven or beard trimmed and his shoes polished, his
trousers pressed, the garrison belt accurately fitted to the waist so
that it does not sag, his leggins cleaned, his brass letters, numbers
and crossed rifles polished, and his white gloves immaculate.

_Should a man ever be allowed to leave the post on pass if not
properly dressed?_

No; never. The Army Regulations require that chiefs of squads shall
see that such members of their squads as have passes leave the post in
proper dress.

_Should a soldier ever stand or walk with his hands in his pockets?_

No; never. There is nothing more unmilitary than to see a soldier
standing or walking with his hands in his pockets.

The real soldier always stands erect. He never slouches.

_Is it permissible, while in uniform, to wear picture buttons, chains,
watch charms, etc., exposed to view?_

No; it is not.

_May the campaign hat or any other parts of the uniform be worn with
civilian dress?_

No; this is prohibited by the Uniform Regulations, which especially
states that when the civilian dress is worn it will not be accompanied
by any mark or part of the uniform.

_May a mixed uniform be worn--for example, a cotton olive drab at and
woolen olive drab breeches?_

No; under no circumstances.

When the company commander or any other officer sends for a soldier to
report to him in the company office or any other place, the soldier
must report in proper uniform.

=1524. Obedience.= _What is Obedience?_ It is compliance with
everything that is required by authority--it is the mainspring, the
very soul and essence of all military duty. It is said a famous
general once remarked every soldier should know three things--"First,
_obedience_; second, _obedience_; third, _obedience_."

Cheerful, earnest and loyal obedience must be paid by all subordinates
to the orders of their superiors.

_A soldier should obey first and if aggrieved complain afterward._

All duty should be performed cheerfully and willingly. Soldiers are
sometimes required to perform duties that are not pleasant--for
instance, doing guard duty on a cold, rainy night, when tired and
sleepy; digging ditches or cleaning up dirt and filth that have
accumulated around the barracks, kitchens, quarters, etc., scrubbing
floors, polishing stoves, cleaning knives, forks, pots, etc. However,
by doing everything required of him in a cheerful manner, a soldier
will soon earn the respect of his comrades and the commendation of his
officers.

=1525. Respect and Obedience to Noncommissioned Officers.= In the
orders and directions that they give, company noncommissioned officers
represent the company commander, and they must be obeyed and respected
at all times and under all circumstances.

Orders and regulations require that men respect and obey their
noncommissioned officers, and discipline makes it imperative that they
do so.

It is not for a private to question in any way the fairness, justice,
propriety or wisdom of an order received from a noncommissioned
officer. When ordered by a noncommissioned officer to do a thing,
whatever it may be, do it promptly and thoroughly, and then if you
feel that you have been injured in any way, report the matter to your
company commander, who will see that you receive justice. If the
noncommissioned officer made a mistake, exceeded his authority, or
treated you unfairly, he will be punished by the company commander.
The company commander, and not the privates of the company, is to
judge the conduct of his noncommissioned officers, who are directly
responsible to him for every act of theirs.

If every subordinate were to question the fairness, justice, propriety
or wisdom of orders received from noncommissioned officers or other
superiors, there would be no discipline, and the Army would soon
degenerate into a mob.

Remember, a soldier is supposed to obey _first_, and, if aggrieved,
complain _afterward_.

And remember, too, that the authority of noncommissioned officers is
not confined to the drill ground, the barracks and the post or camp.
Whether you are on pass, in a theatre, in a streetcar, on a train on
the street or anywhere else, if you receive an order from a
noncommissioned officer you are to obey it just the same as if it were
given you at drill or in barracks.

=1526. Forms of Speech.= In speaking to an officer it is not proper
for a soldier to say, "You, etc.," but the third person should always
be used, as, for example, "_Does the captain want his horse this
morning?_"--do not say, "Do you want your horse this morning?" "The
lieutenant is wanted on the 'phone,"--not "You are wanted on the
'phone."

In beginning a conversation with an officer, a soldier should use the
third person in referring to himself instead of the pronouns "I" and
"me." However, after the conversation has commenced, it is perfectly
proper, and usual, for the soldier to use the pronouns "I" and "me,"
but an officer is _always_ addressed in the third person and never as
"you."

In speaking to an officer, an enlisted man should refer to another
enlisted man by proper title, as, "_Sergeant Richards_," "_Corporal
Smith_," "_Private Wilson_."

Privates and others should always address noncommissioned officers by
their titles. For example, "_Sergeant Smith_," "_Corporal Jones_,"
etc., and not "_Smith_," "_Jones_," etc.

When asked his name, a soldier should answer, for instance, "_Private
Jones, Sir_."

When given an order or instructions of any kind by an officer, or
noncommissioned officer, a soldier should always say, "_Yes, sir_,"
thus letting the officer or noncommissioned officer know that the
soldier understands the order or instructions. Don't say, "Very well,
sir," or "All right, sir"; say, "_Yes, sir_," it's the direct,
military way of answering.

Short direct answers should be made in the form of, "_No, sir_,"
"_Yes, sir_," "_I don't know, sir_," "_I will try, sir_," etc.

Do not use slang in speaking to an officer.

Never interrupt an officer while he is speaking. Always wait until he
is through talking before you begin to speak.

After a soldier has finished a thing that he was ordered to do, he
should always report to the officer who gave him the order. For
example, "The captain's message to Lieutenant Smith has been
delivered."

If ordered to report to an officer for any purpose, do not go away
without first ascertaining if the officer is through with you, as it
often happens he has something else he would like to have you do.
After having finished the work given in the beginning, report, for
instance, "_Sir, is the captain through with me?_"

When an officer calls a soldier who is some distance away, the soldier
should immediately salute, and say, "_Yes, sir_," and, if necessary,
approach the officer with a quickened step. If the officer is waiting
on the soldier, the latter should take up the double time.

Always salute an officer when he leaves you after a conversation or at
any other time. And always salute just as soon as the officer makes
the first move to leave. Don't wait until he has moved away several
feet before saluting.

Miscellaneous

=1527. How to Enter an Office.= In entering an office a soldier should
give two or three knocks at the door (whether it be open or closed);
when told to come in, enter, taking off the hat (if unarmed), close
the door (if it was closed before you entered) and remain just inside
the door until asked what is wanted; then go within a short distance
of the officer, stand at attention, salute, and make known your
request in as few words as possible. On completion, salute, face
toward the door, and go out, being careful to close the door if it was
closed when you entered. If it was not closed, leave it open.

=1528. Complaints to the Captain.= Complaints must never be made
directly to the captain unless the soldier has the captain's
permission to do so, or the first sergeant refuses to have the matter
reported. If dissatisfied with his food, clothing, duties, or
treatment, the facts should be reported to the first sergeant, with
the request, if necessary, to see the captain.

It is also customary for soldiers who wish to speak to the captain
about anything to see the first sergeant first, and when speaking to
the captain to inform him that they have the first sergeant's
permission to do so. Thus: "Private Smith has the first sergeant's
permission to speak to the captain," etc.

=1529. How the Soldier is Paid.= When your name is called, answer
"Here," step forward and halt directly in front of the paymaster, who
will be directly behind the table; salute him. When he spreads out
your pay on the table in front of you, count it quickly, take it up
with your ungloved hand, execute a left or right face and leave the
room and building, unless you wish to deposit, in which case, you will
remain in the hall outside the payroom, until the company has been
paid, when you enter the payroom. Men wishing to deposit money with
the paymaster, will always notify the first sergeant before the
company is marched to the pay table.

=1530. Delivery of Messages.= When an enlisted man receives a message,
verbal or written, from an officer for delivery, he will, in case he
does not understand his instructions, ask the officer to repeat them,
saying, for instance, "Sir, Private Smith does not understand; will
the captain please repeat?" When he has received his instructions, and
understands them, he will salute, and say: "Yes, sir," execute an
about face, and proceed immediately to the officer for whom the
message is intended. He will halt three or four paces directly in
front of the officer and _if the officer be junior to the officer
sending the message_, he will say, "Sir, Captain Smith presents his
compliments," etc., and then deliver the message, or "The commanding
officer presents his compliments to Lieutenant Smith and would like to
see him at headquarters." He will salute immediately before he begins
to address the officer and will hold his hand at the position of
salute while he says, "Sir, Captain Smith presents his compliments,"
or "The commanding officer presents his compliments to Lieutenant
Smith." If the officer sending the message be junior to the one
receiving it, the soldier will not present his compliments, but will
say, for instance, "Sir, Lieutenant Smith directed me to hand this
letter to the captain," or "Sir, Lieutenant Smith directed me to say
to the captain," etc. As soon as the message has been delivered, the
soldier will salute, execute an about face, and proceed at once to the
officer who sent the message, and will similarly report to him, "Sir,
the lieutenant's message to Captain Smith has been delivered," and
leave.

Before leaving an officer to whom you deliver a message always
ascertain whether there is an answer.

The compliments of a junior are never presented to a senior. For
instance, never say to a captain that a lieutenant presents his
compliments to him.

=1531. Appearance as Witness.= The uniform is that prescribed. Proceed
to the courtroom and remain outside. When you are notified that you
are wanted enter the room. Then take off your cap and right hand
glove, and raise your right hand above your head, palm to the front,
to be sworn. After the judge-advocate reads the oath, say, "I do" or
"So help me God." Then sit down in the chair indicated by the
judge-advocate. Do not cross your legs, but sit upright. When asked,
"Do you know the accused? If, so, state who he is," answer, "I do;
Corporal John Jones, Co. 'B' 1st Infantry." Be sure you thoroughly
understand every question before you start to reply, answering them
all promptly, in a loud, distinct, deliberate voice, and confining
your answers strictly to the questions asked and telling all you know.

When the judge-advocate says, "That is all," arise, salute him,
execute an about face, and leave the room.

CHAPTER II

MILITARY COURTESY

=1532. Its importance.= Some soldiers do not see the necessity for
saluting, standing at attention, and other forms of courtesy, because
they do not understand their significance--their object. It is a
well-known fact that military courtesy is a very important part of the
education of the soldier, and there are good reasons for it.

General Orders No. 183, Division of the Philippines, 1901, says: "In
all armies the manner in which military courtesies are observed and
rendered by officers and soldiers, is the index to the manner in which
other duties are performed."

The Army Regulations tells us, "Courtesy among military men is
indispensable to discipline; respect to superiors will not be confined
to obedience on duty, but will be extended on all occasions."

[Illustration]

THE NATURE OF SALUTES AND THEIR ORIGIN

The Civilian Salute

=1533.= When a gentleman raises his hat to a lady he is but continuing
a custom that had its beginning in the days of knighthood, when every
knight wore his helmet as a protection against foes. However, when
coming among friends, especially ladies, the knight would remove his
helmet as a mark of confidence and trust in his friends. In those days
failure to remove the helmet in the presence of ladies signified
distrust and want of confidence--today it signifies impoliteness and a
want of good breeding.

The Military Salute

=1534.= From time immemorial subordinates have always uncovered before
superiors, and equals have always acknowledged each other's presence
by some courtesy--this seems to be one of the natural, nobler
instincts of man. It was not so many years ago when a sentinel saluted
not only with his gun but by taking off his hat also. However, when
complicated headgear like the bearskin and the helmet came into use,
they could not be readily removed and the act of removing the hat was
finally conventionalized into the present salute--into the movement of
the hand to the visor as if the hat were going to be removed.

Every once in a while a man is found who has the mistaken idea that he
smothers the American spirit of freedom, that he sacrifices his
independence, by saluting his officers. Of course, no one but an
anarchist or a man with a small, shrivelled-up mind can have such
ideas.

Manly deference to superiors, which in military life is merely
recognition of constituted authority, does not imply admission of
inferiority any more than respect for law implies cowardice.

The recruit should at once rid himself of the idea that saluting and
other forms of military courtesy are un-American. The salute is the
soldier's claim from the very highest in the land to instant
recognition as a soldier. The raw recruit by his simple act of
saluting, commands like honor from the ranking general of the
Army--aye, from even the President of the United States.

While the personal element naturally enters into the salute to a
certain extent, when a soldier salutes an officer he is really
saluting the office rather than the officer personally--the salute is
rendered as a mark of respect to the rank, the position that the
officer holds, to the authority with which he is vested. A man with
the true soldierly instinct never misses an opportunity to salute his
officers.

As a matter of fact, military courtesy is just simply an application
of common, every-day courtesy and common sense. In common, every-day
courtesy no man with the instincts of a gentleman ever thinks about
taking advantage of this thing and that thing in order to avoid paying
to his fellow-man the ordinary, conventional courtesies of life, and
if there is ever any doubt about the matter, he takes no chances but
extends the courtesy. And this is just exactly what the man who has
the instincts of a real soldier does in the case of military courtesy.
The thought of "Should I salute or should I not salute" never enters
the mind of a soldier just because he happens to be in a wagon, in a
postoffice, etc.

In all armies of the world, all officers and soldiers are required to
salute each other whenever they meet or pass, the subordinate saluting
first. The salute on the part of the subordinate is not intended in
any way as an act of degradation or a mark of inferiority, but is
simply a military courtesy that is as binding on the officer as it is
on the private, and just as the enlisted man is required to salute the
officer first, so is the officer required to salute his superiors
first. It is a bond uniting all in a common profession, marking the
fact that above them there is an authority that both recognize and
obey--the Country! Indeed, by custom and regulations, it is as
obligatory for the ranking general of the Army to return the salute of
the recruit, as it is for the latter to give it.

Let it be remembered that the military salute is a form of greeting
that belongs exclusively to the Government--to the soldier, the
sailor, the marine--it is the mark and prerogative of the military man
and he should be proud of having the privilege of using that form of
salutation--a form of salutation that marks him as a member of the
Profession of Arms--the profession of Napoleon, Wellington, Grant,
Lee, Sherman, Jackson and scores of others of the greatest and most
famous men the world has ever known. The military salute is ours, it
is ours only. Moreover, it belongs only to the soldier who is in good
standing, the prisoner under guard, for instance, not being allowed to
salute. Ours is a grand fraternity of men-at-arms, banded together for
national defense, for the maintenance of law and order--we are bound
together by the love and respect we bear the flag--we are pledged to
loyalty, to one God, one country--our lives are dedicated to the
defense of our country's flag--the officer and the private belong to a
brotherhood whose regalia is the uniform of the American soldier, and
they are known to one another and to all men, by an honored sign and
symbol of knighthood that has come down to us from the ages--THE
MILITARY SALUTE!

WHOM TO SALUTE

=1535. Army officers.= All Army officers are saluted by their juniors
and by enlisted men.

=1536. Navy, Marine Corps, Volunteer and National Guard officers.=
Soldiers at all times and in all situations salute officers of the
Navy, Marine Corps, and National Guard the same as they salute
officers of the Regular Army.

=1537. Reserve Corps officers.= Although the subject is not at present
(March, 1917) covered by orders or regulations, it goes without saying
that soldiers would salute members of the Officers' Reserve Corps _on
active duty_ the same as they salute their own officers.

=1538. Foreign naval and military officers.= The Manual of Interior
Guard Duty requires sentinels to salute foreign naval and military
officers, but there are no instructions about other enlisted men
saluting them. However, as an act of international courtesy, they
should be saluted the same as our own officers.

WHEN AND HOW TO SALUTE

=1539. General rule.= Day or night, covered or uncovered, whether
either or both are in uniform or civilian clothes, salutes shall be
exchanged between officers and enlisted men not in a military
formation, nor at drill, work, games or mess, on every occasion of
their meeting, passing near or being addressed, the junior in rank or
the enlisted man saluting first.

=1540. Saluting when making and receiving reports.= When making or
receiving official reports, or on meeting out of doors, all officers
will salute.

=1541. Saluting distance.= Saluting distance is that within which
recognition is easy. In general, it does not exceed 30 paces.

As to the distance at which the salute should be made, the following
is what has been the practice in the Army:

In approaching or passing each other within saluting distance,
individuals or bodies of troops exchange salutes when at a distance of
about 6 paces. If they do not approach each other that closely, the
salute is exchanged at the point of nearest approach. For instance, if
the officer and soldier are approaching each other on the same
sidewalk, the hand is brought up to the headdress when about 6 paces
from the officer. If they are on opposite sides of the street, the
hand is brought up when about ten paces in advance of the officer. If
the officer and soldier are not going in opposite directions and the
officer does not approach within six paces, the salute is rendered
when the officer reaches the nearest point to the soldier. If a
soldier passes an officer from the rear, the hand is raised as he
reaches the officer; if an officer passes a soldier from the rear, the
soldier salutes just as the officer is about to pass him.

=1542. Officer entering room occupied by soldiers.= When an officer
enters a room where there are several enlisted men, the word
"attention" is given by someone who perceives him, when all rise,
uncover, and remain standing at attention until the officer leaves the
room or directs otherwise.

=1543. At meals.= Enlisted men at meals stop eating and remain seated
at attention when an officer enters the room.

=1544. When seated.= An enlisted man, if seated, rises on the approach
of an officer, faces toward him, stands at attention, and salutes.
Standing he faces an officer for the same purpose. If the parties
remain in the same place or on the same ground, such compliments need
not be repeated.

=1545. Soldier indoors.= Indoors, an unarmed enlisted man uncovers and
stands at attention upon the approach of an officer. If armed with
rifle, he renders the rifle salute at the order or trail.

(Note. According to custom, the term "indoors" is interpreted as
meaning military offices barracks, quarters and similar places,--it
does not mean such public places as stores, storehouses, riding halls,
stables, post exchange buildings, hotels, places of amusement, and
railway and steamboat stations. In such places an unarmed soldier
renders the right hand salute.)

=1546. Officers approaching number of soldiers in open.= When an
officer approaches a number of enlisted men out of doors, the word
"attention" should be given by someone who perceives him, when all
stand at attention and all salute. It is customary for all to salute
at or about the same instant, taking the time from the soldier nearest
the officer, and who salutes when the officer is six paces from him.

=1547. At work.= Soldiers actually at work do not cease work to salute
an officer unless addressed by him.

=1548. Riding in wagon.= A soldier riding in a wagon should salute
officers that he passes. He would salute without rising. Likewise, a
soldier driving a wagon should salute, unless both hands are occupied.

=1549. Passing officer on staircase.= It is customary for a soldier
who is passed by an officer on a staircase to come to a halt and stand
at attention.

=1550. Addressing or being addressed by an officer.= Before addressing
an officer, or when addressed by an officer, an enlisted man makes
the prescribed salute with the weapon with which he is armed; or, if
unarmed, with the right hand. He also makes the same salute after
receiving a reply.

=1551. How salutes are rendered in uniform.= In uniform, covered or
uncovered, but not in formation, officers and enlisted men salute
military persons as follows: With arms in hand, the salute prescribed
for that arm (sentinels on interior guard duty excepted); without
arms, the right-hand salute.

=1552. Rifle salute.= Enlisted men out of doors and armed with the
rifle, salute with the piece at the right shoulder; if indoors, the
rifle salute is rendered at the order or trail.

=1553. Saber salute.= An enlisted man armed with the saber renders the
saber salute, if the saber is drawn; otherwise he salutes with the
hand.

=1554. Sentinels on post.= A soldier salutes with the "present arms"
only when actually on post as a sentinel doing interior guard duty. At
all other times when armed with the rifle he salutes with the
prescribed rifle salute.

The general rules and principles of saluting apply to sentinels on
post doing interior guard duty, except, as just stated, they salute by
presenting arms when armed with the rifle. However, they do not salute
if it interferes with the proper performance of their duties.

=1555. How salutes are rendered in civilian dress.= In civilian dress,
covered or uncovered, officers and enlisted men salute military
persons with the right-hand salute.

=1556. Saluting in military manner.= Officers and enlisted men will
render the prescribed salutes in a military manner.

=1557. Several officers together.= When several officers in company
are saluted, all entitled to the salute shall return it.

=1558. Dismounting before addressing superior not mounted.= Except in
the field under campaign or simulated campaign conditions, a mounted
officer or soldier dismounts before addressing a superior officer not
mounted.

=1559. Man addressed in formation.= A man in formation shall not
salute when directly addressed, but shall come to attention if at rest
or at ease.

=1560. In public places and conveyances.= In public conveyances, such
as railway trains and street cars, and in public places, such as
theaters, honors and personal salutes may be omitted when palpably
inappropriate or apt to disturb or annoy civilians present.

For instance, as a rule, it may be said that an enlisted man riding in
a street car, or in the act of purchasing goods in a store, or eating
in a restaurant, would not salute unless addressed by an officer.
However, in case of a soldier occupying a seat in a crowded street or
railway car, if he recognized a person standing to be an officer, it
would be but an act of courtesy for him to raise, salute and offer the
officer his seat.

=1561. Salutes by commanders of detachments or other commands.=
Commanders of detachments or other commands will salute officers of
grades higher than the person commanding the unit, by first bringing
the unit to attention and then saluting as prescribed,--that is, with
arms in hand, the salute prescribed for that arm; without arms in
hand, the right-hand salute.

=1562. Officer passing in rear of troops.= When an officer entitled to
the salute passes in rear of a body of troops, the troops are brought
to attention when he is opposite the post of the commander.

=1563. Bringing command to present arms or sabers before commander
salutes.= If the command is in line at a halt (not in the field) and
armed with the rifle, or with sabers drawn, it shall be brought to
_present arms_ or _present sabers_ before its commander salutes in the
following cases: When the National Anthem is played, or when _to the
color_ or _to the standard_ is sounded during ceremonies, or when a
person is saluted who is its immediate or higher commander or a
general officer, or when the national or regimental color is saluted.

=1564. No compliments paid at drill, on march, etc.= Salutes and
honors, as a rule, are not paid by troops actually engaged in drill,
on the march, or in the field under campaign or simulated campaign
conditions. Troops on the service of security pay no compliments
whatever.

=1565. No saluting at double time, trot or gallop.= Salutes are not
rendered when marching in double time or at the trot or gallop. The
soldier must first come to quick time or walk before saluting.

The question of gait applies to the person saluting and not to the one
saluted,--so, a soldier would salute an officer passing in double time
or at a trot or gallop.

MISCELLANEOUS

=1566. Soldier walking with officer.= A soldier accompanying an
officer walks on the officer's left and about one pace to his rear.

=1567. Prisoners do not salute.= Prisoners do not salute officers.
They merely stand at attention. In some commands it is customary for
paroled prisoners and others who are not under the immediate charge of
sentinels, to fold their arms when passing or addressing officers.

=1568. Unmilitary salutes.= It is very unmilitary to salute with the
coat unbuttoned or with the hand in the pocket, or a cigarette, cigar
or pipe in the mouth.

=1569. Headdress not raised in saluting.= The headdress must not be
raised to ladies, but they must be given the military salute.

(War Dept. decision. August, 1913.)

=1570. Caution.= In saluting, the hand or weapon is held in the
position of salute until the salute has been acknowledged or until the
officer has passed or has been passed.

USUAL MISTAKES IN SALUTING

=1571.= The following are the mistakes usually made by soldiers in
rendering salutes:

1. They do not begin the salute soon enough; often they do not raise
the hand to the headdress until they are only a pace or two from the
officer--the salute should always begin when at least six paces from
the officer.

2. They do not turn the head and eyes toward the officer who is
saluted--the head and eyes should always be turned toward the officer
saluted and kept turned as long as the hand is raised.

3. The hand is not kept to the headdress until the salute is
acknowledged by the officer--the hand should always be kept raised
until the salute has been acknowledged, or it is evident the officer
has not seen the saluter.

4. The salute is often rendered in an indifferent, lax manner--the
salute should always be rendered with life, snap and vim; the soldier
should always render a salute as if he _meant it_.

RESPECT TO BE PAID THE NATIONAL ANTHEM, THE COLORS AND STANDARDS

=1572. The National Anthem.= Whenever the National Anthem is played at
any place when persons belonging to the military service are present,
all officers and enlisted men not in formation shall stand at
attention facing toward the music (except at retreat when they shall
face toward the flag). If in uniform, covered or uncovered, or in
civilian clothes, uncovered, they shall salute at the first note of
the Anthem, retaining the position of salute until the last note of
the Anthem. If not in uniform and covered, they shall uncover at the
first note of the Anthem, holding the headdress opposite the left
shoulder and so remain until its close, except that in inclement
weather the headdress may be held slightly raised.

The same rules apply when "To the Color" or "To the Standard" is
sounded as when the National Anthem is played.

=1573. National anthems of other nations.= The same marks of respect
prescribed for observance during the playing of the National Anthem of
the United States shall be shown toward the national anthem of any
other country when played upon official occasions.

=1574. At retreat.= The flag will be lowered at the sounding of the
last note of the retreat, and while the flag is being lowered the band
will play the National Anthem, or, if there be no band present, the
field music will sound "To the Color." When "To the Color" is sounded
by the field music while the flag is being lowered the same respect
will be observed as when the National Anthem is played by the band,
and in either case officers and enlisted men out of ranks will face
toward the flag, stand at attention, and render the prescribed salute.

=1575. Colors and standards.= Officers and enlisted men passing the
uncased color (or standard) will render honors as follows: If in
uniform they will salute as described in par. 1551; if in civilian
dress and covered, they will uncover, holding the headdress opposite
the left shoulder with the right hand; if uncovered, they will salute
with the right-hand salute.

By "Colors" and "Standards" is meant the national flags and the
regimental flags that are carried by regiments and separate
battalions. The national flag may be of either silk or bunting; the
regimental flag is always of silk. In the Army Regulations the word
"Color" is used in referring to regiments of Infantry, the Coast
Artillery and battalions of Philippine Scouts, while "Standard" is
used in reference to regiments of Cavalry and Field Artillery.

By _uncased_ colors and standards are meant colors and standards when
not in their waterproof cases.

By Flag is meant the national emblem that waves from flag staffs and
other stationary poles. They are always of bunting.

PART VII

GUARD DUTY

(To include Changes No. 1, February 24, 1915.)

(The numbers following the paragraphs are those of the _Manual of
Interior Guard Duty_.)

=1576. Importance.= Guard duty is one of the soldier's most important
duties, and in all armies of the world the manner in which it is
performed is an index to the discipline of the command and the manner
in which other duties are performed.

Upon the guard's vigilance and readiness for action depend not only
the enforcement of military law and orders, but also the safety and
protection of the post and the quelling of sudden disorder, perhaps
even mutiny.

The importance of guard duty is increased during times of war, when
the very safety of the army depends upon the vigilance of the
sentinels, who are required to watch that others may sleep and thus
refresh themselves from the labors of the day. The sentinels are the
guardians of the repose, quiet and safety of the camp.

=1577. Respect for Sentinels.= Respect for the person and office of a
sentinel is as strictly enjoined by military law as that required to
be paid to an officer. As it is expressed in the _Manual of Guard
Duty_, "All persons of whatever rank in the service are required to
observe respect toward sentinels." Invested as the private soldier
frequently is, while on his post, with a grave responsibility, it is
proper that he should be fully protected in the discharge of his duty.
To permit anyone, of whatever rank, to molest or interfere with him
while thus employed, without becoming liable to severe penalty, would
clearly establish a precedent highly prejudicial to the interests of
the service. (_Davis' Military Law_).

=1578. Duty of sentinels.= A sentinel, in respect to the duties with
which he is charged, represents the superior military authority of the
command to which he belongs, and whose orders he is required to
enforce on or in the vicinity of his post. As such he is entitled to
the respect and obedience of all persons who come within the scope of
operation of the orders, which he is required to carry into effect.
Over military persons the authority of the sentinel is absolute, and
disobedience of his orders on the part of such persons constitutes a
most serious military offence and is prejudicial in the highest degree
to the interests of discipline. (_Davis' Military Law_).--Author.

INTRODUCTION

=1579.= Guards may be divided into four classes: Exterior guards,
interior guards, military police, and provost guards. (1)

=1580.= Exterior guards are used only in time of war. They belong to
the domain of tactics and are treated of in the _Field Service
Regulations_ and in the drill regulations of the different arms of the
service.

The purpose of exterior guards is to prevent surprise, to delay
attack, and otherwise to provide for the security of the main body.

On the march they take the form of advance guards, rear guards, and
flank guards. At a halt they consist of outposts. (2)

=1581.= Interior guards are used in camp or garrison to preserve
order, protect property, and to enforce police regulations. In time of
war such sentinels of an interior guard as may be necessary are placed
close in or about a camp, and normally there is an exterior guard
further out consisting of outposts. In time of peace the interior
guard is the only guard in a camp or garrison. (3)

=1582.= Military police differ somewhat from either of these classes.
(See _Field Service Regulations_.) They are used in time of war to
guard prisoners, to arrest stragglers and deserters, and to maintain
order and enforce police regulations in the rear of armies, along
lines of communication, and in the vicinity of large camps. (4)

=1583.= Provost guards are used in the absence of military police,
generally in conjunction with the civil authorities at or near large
posts or encampments, to preserve order among soldiers beyond the
interior guard. (5)

INTERIOR GUARD

Classification

=1584.= The various elements of an interior guard classified according
to their particular purposes and the manner in which they perform
their duties are as follows:

(=a=) The main guard.

(=b=) Special guards: Stable guards, park guards, prisoner guards,
herd guards, train guards, boat guards, watchmen, etc. (6)

Details and Rosters

=1585.= At every military post, and in every regiment or separate
command in the field, an interior guard will be detailed and duly
mounted.

It will consist of such number of officers and enlisted men as the
commanding officer may deem necessary, and will be commanded by the
senior officer or noncommissioned officer therewith, under the
supervision of the officer of the day or other officer detailed by the
commanding officer. (7)

=1586.= The system of sentinels on fixed posts is of value in
discipline and training because of the direct individual
responsibility which is imposed and required to be discharged in a
definite and precise manner. In order, however, that guard duty may
not be needlessly irksome and interfere with tactical instruction, the
number of men detailed for guard will be the smallest possible.

Commanding officers are specifically charged with this matter, and,
without entirely dispensing with the system of sentinels on fixed
posts will, as far as practicable in time of peace, replace such
sentinels with watchmen. (See Par. 1781.) (8)

=1587.= At posts where there are less than three companies the main
guard and special guards may all be furnished by one company or by
detail from each company.

Where there are three or more companies, the main guard will, if
practicable, be furnished by a single company, and, as far as
practicable, the same organization will supply all details for that
day for special guard, overseer, and fatigue duty. In this case the
officer of the day, and the officers of the guard, if there are any,
will, if practicable, be from the company furnishing the guard. (9)

=1588.= There will be an officer of the day with each guard, unless in
the opinion of the commanding officer the guard is so small that his
services are not needed. In this case an officer will be detailed to
supervise the command and instruction of the guard for such period as
the commanding officer may direct. (16)

=1589.= The detail of officers of the guard will be limited to the
necessities of the service and efficient instruction; inexperienced
officers may be detailed as supernumerary officers of the guard for
purposes of instruction. (18).

=1590.= The strength of guards and the number of consecutive days for
which an organization furnishes the guard will be so regulated as to
insure privates of the main guard an interval of not less than five
days between tours.

The Commanding Officer

=1591.= The commanding officer will exact a faithful, vigilant, and
correct performance of guard duty in all of its details, giving his
orders to the officer of the day, or causing them to be communicated
to him with the least practicable delay. He will prescribe the
strength of the guard, and the necessary regulations for guard,
police, and fatigue duty. (27)

=1592.= The commanding officer receives the reports of the officers of
the day immediately after guard mounting, at his office, or at some
other place previously designated; carefully examines the guard report
and remarks thereon (questioning the old officer of the day, if
necessary, concerning his tour of duty), relieves the old officer of
the day and gives the new officer of the day such instructions as may
be necessary. (28)

The Officer of the Day

=1593.= The officer of the day is responsible for the proper
performance of duty by the guard with which he marches on and for the
enforcement of all police regulations. He is charged with the
execution of all orders of the commanding officer relating to the
safety and good order of the post or camp. His actual tour begins when
he receives the instructions of the commanding officer after guard
mounting, and ceases when he has been relieved by the commanding
officer. In case of emergency during the interval between guard
mounting and reporting to the commanding officer, the senior officer
of the day will give the necessary instructions for both guards. (29)

=1594.= In the absence of special instructions from the commanding
officer, the officer of the day will inspect the guard and sentinels
during the day and at night at such times as he may deem necessary. He
will visit them at least once between 12 o'clock midnight and
daylight. (30)

He may prescribe patrols (Par. 1778) and visits of inspection to be
made by officers and noncommissioned officers of the guard whenever he
deems it necessary. (31)

=1595.= He will see that the commander of the guard is furnished with
the parole and countersign before retreat in case they are to be used,
and will inform him of the presence in post or camp of any person
entitled to the compliment. (32)

=1596.= In case of alarm of any kind he will at once take such steps
as may be necessary to insure the safety of life and public property
and to preserve order in the command, disposing his guard so as best
to accomplish this result. (33)

=1597.= In the performance of his duties as officer of the day he is
subject to the orders of the commanding officer only, except that in
case of an alarm of any kind, and at a time of great danger, the
senior line officer present is competent to give necessary orders to
the officer of the day for the employment of the guard. (34)

=1598.= At the inspection and musters prescribed in _Army
Regulations_, the officer of the day will be present at the post of
the guard, but all commands to the guard will be given by the
commander of the guard. (35)

Both officers of the day together verify the prisoners and inspect the
guardhouse and premises. (36)

=1599.= In the absence of special instructions, the old officer of the
day will, at guard mounting, release all garrison prisoners whose
sentences expire that day. If there are any prisoners with no record
of charges against them, the old officer of the day will report that
fact to the commanding officer who will give the necessary
instructions. (37)

=1600.= The old officer of the day signs the report of the commander
of the guard. He also enters on it such remarks as may be necessary.
(38)

=1601.= The officers of the day then report to the commanding officer.

On presenting themselves, both salute with the right hand, remaining
covered. The old officer of the day, standing on the right of the new,
then says: "=Sir, I report as old officer of the day=," and presents
the guard report. As soon as the commanding officer notifies the old
officer of the day that he is relieved, the old officer of the day
salutes the commanding officer and retires. The new officer of the day
again salutes and says: "=Sir, I report as new officer of the day=,"
and then receives his instructions. (39)

=1602.= The officer of the day will always keep the guard informed as
to where he may be found at all hours of the day and night. (40)

Commander of the Guard

=1603.= The commander of the guard is responsible for the instruction
and discipline of the guard. He will see that all of its members are
correctly instructed in their orders and duties, and that they
understand and properly perform them. He will visit each relief at
least once while it is on post, and at least one of these visits will
be made between 12 o'clock midnight and daylight. (41)

=1604.= He receives and obeys the orders of the commanding officer and
the officer of the day, and reports to the latter without delay all
orders to the guard not received from the officer of the day; he
transmits to his successor all material instructions and information
relating to his duties. (42)

=1605.= He is responsible under the officer of the day for the general
safety of the post or camp as soon as the old guard marches away from
the guardhouse. In case of emergency while both guards are at the
guardhouse, the senior commander of the two guards will be responsible
that the proper action is taken. (43)

=1606.= Officers of the guard will remain constantly with their
guards, except while visiting patrols or necessarily engaged elsewhere
in the performance of their duties. The commanding officer will allow
a reasonable time for meals. (44)

=1607.= A commander of a guard leaving his post for any purpose will
inform the next in command of his destination and probable time of
return. (45)

=1608.= Except in emergencies, the commander of the guard may divide
the night with the next in command, but retains his responsibility;
the one on watch must be constantly on the alert. (46)

=1609.= When any alarm is raised in camp or garrison, the guard will
be formed immediately. (Par. 1793.) If the case be serious, the proper
call will be sounded, and the commander of the guard will cause the
commanding officer and the officer of the day to be at once notified.
(47)

=1610.= If a sentinel calls: "=The Guard=," the commander of the guard
will at once send a patrol to the sentinel's post. If the danger be
great, in which case the sentinel will discharge his piece, the patrol
will be as strong as possible. (48)

=1611.= When practicable, there should always be an officer or
noncommissioned officer and two privates of the guard at the
guardhouse, in addition to the sentinels there on post. (49)

=1612.= Between reveille and retreat, when the guard had been turned
out for any person entitled to the compliment (See Pars. 1782 and
1784), the commander of the guard, if an officer, will receive the
report of the sergeant, returning the salute of the later with the
right hand. He will then draw his saber, and place himself two paces
in front of the center of the guard. When the person for whom the
guard has been turned out approaches, he faces his guard and commands:
=1. Present, 2. ARMS=; faces to the front and salutes. When his salute
is acknowledged he resumes the carry, faces about, and commands: =1.
Order, 2. ARMS=; and faces to the front.

If it be an officer entitled to inspect the guard, after saluting and
before bringing his guard to an order, the officer of the guard
reports: "=Sir, all present or accounted for="; or, "=Sir, (so and so)
is absent="; or, if the roll call has been omitted: "=Sir, the guard
is formed=," except that at guard mounting the commanders of the
guards present their guards and salute without making any report.

Between retreat and reveille, the commander of the guard salutes and
reports, but does not bring the guard to a present. (50)

=1613.= To those entitled to have the guard turned out but not
entitled to inspect it, no report will be made; nor will a report be
made to any officer, unless he halts in front of the guard. (51)

=1614.= When a guard commanded by a noncommissioned officer is turned
out as a compliment or for inspection, the noncommissioned officer,
standing at a right shoulder on the right of the right guide,
commands: =1. Present, 2. ARMS.= He then executes the rifle salute. If
a report be also required, he will, after saluting, and before
bringing his guard to an order, report as prescribed for the officer
of the guard. (Par. 1612.) (52)

=1615.= When a guard is in line, not under inspection, and commanded
by an officer, the commander of the guard salutes his regimental,
battalion, and company commander, by bringing the guard to attention
and saluting in person.

For all other officers, excepting those entitled to the compliment
from a guard (Par. 1784), the commander of the guard salutes in
person, but does not bring the guard to attention.

When commanded by a noncommissioned officer the guard is brought to
attention in either case, and the noncommissioned officer salutes.

The commander of a guard exchanges salutes with the commanders of all
other bodies of troops; the guard is brought to attention during the
exchange.

"=Present arms=" is executed by a guard only when it has turned out
for inspection or as a compliment, and at the ceremonies of guard
mounting and relieving the old guard. (53)

=1616.= In marching a guard or a detachment of a guard the principles
of paragraph 1615 apply. "=Eyes right=" is executed only in the
ceremonies of guard mounting and relieving the old guard. (54)

=1617.= If a person entitled to the compliment, or the regimental,
battalion, or company commander, passes in rear of a guard, neither
the compliment nor the salute is given, but the guard is brought to
attention while such person is opposite the post of the commander.

After any person has received or declined the compliment, or received
the salute from the commander of the guard, official recognition of
his presence thereafter while he remains in the vicinity will be taken
by bringing the guard to attention. (55)

=1618.= The commander of the guard will inspect the guard at reveille
and retreat, and at such other times as may be necessary, to assure
himself that the men are in proper condition to perform their duties
and that their arms and equipments are in proper condition. For
inspection by other officers, he prepares the guard in each case as
directed by the inspecting officer. (56)

=1619.= The guard will not be paraded during ceremonies unless
directed by the commanding officer. (57)

=1620.= At all formations members of the guard or reliefs will execute
inspection arms as prescribed in the drill regulations of their arm.
(58)

=1621.= The commander of the guard will see that all sentinels are
habitually relieved every two hours, unless the weather or other cause
makes it necessary that it be done at shorter or longer intervals, as
directed by the commanding officer. (59)

=1622.= He will question his noncommissioned officers and sentinels
relative to the instructions they may have received from the old
guard; he will see that patrols and visits of inspection are made as
directed by the officer of the day. (60)

=1623.= He will see that the special orders for each post and member
of the guard, either written or printed, are posted in the guardhouse,
and, if practicable, in the sentry box or other sheltered place to
which the member of the guard has constant access. (61)

=1624.= He will see that the proper calls are sounded at the hours
appointed by the commanding officer. (62)

=1625.= Should a member of the guard be taken sick, or be arrested, or
desert, or leave his guard, he will at once notify the officer of the
day. (63)

=1626.= He will, when the countersign is used (Pars. 1770 to 1776),
communicate it to the noncommissioned officers of the guard and see
that it is duly communicated to the sentinels before the hour for
challenging; the countersign will not be given to sentinels posted at
the guardhouse. (64)

=1627.= He will have the details for hoisting the flag at reveille,
and lowering it at retreat, and for firing the reveille and retreat
gun, made in time for the proper performance of these duties. (See
Pars. 1834, 1835, 1836, 1837). He will see that the flags are kept in
the best condition possible, and that they are never handled except in
the proper performance of duty. (65)

=1628.= He may permit members of the guard while at the guardhouse to
remove their headdress, overcoats, and gloves; if they leave the
guardhouse for any purpose whatever he will require that they be
properly equipped and armed according to the character of the service
in which engaged, or as directed by the commanding officer. (66)

=1629.= He will enter in the guard report a report of his tour of
duty, and, on the completion of his tour, will present it to the
officer of the day. He will transmit with his report all passes turned
in at the post of the guard. (67)

=1630.= Whenever a prisoner is sent to the guardhouse or guard tent
for confinement, he will cause him to be searched, and will, without
unnecessary delay, report the case to the officer of the day. (68)

=1631.= Under war conditions, if anyone is to be passed out of camp at
night, he will be sent to the commander of the guard, who will have
him passed beyond the sentinels. (69)

=1632.= The commander of the guard will detain at the guardhouse all
suspicious characters or parties attempting to pass a sentinel's post
without authority, reporting his action to the officer of the day, to
whom persons so arrested will be sent, if necessary. (70)

=1633.= He will inspect the guard rooms and cells, and the irons of
such prisoners as may be ironed, at least once during his tour, and at
such other times as he may deem necessary. (71)

=1634.= He will cause the corporals of the old and new reliefs to
verify together, immediately before each relief goes on post, the
number of prisoners who should then properly be at the guardhouse.
(72)

=1635.= He will see that the sentences of prisoners under his charge
are executed strictly in accordance with the action of the reviewing
authority. (73)

=1636.= When no special prisoner guard has been detailed (Par. 1798),
he will, as far as practicable, assign as guards over working parties
of prisoners sentinels from posts guarded at night only. (74)

=1637.= The commander of the guard will inspect all meals sent to the
guardhouse and see that the quantity and quality of food are in
accordance with regulations. (75)

=1638.= At guard mounting he will report to the old officer of the day
all cases of prisoners whose terms of sentence expire on that day, and
also all cases of prisoners concerning whom no statement of charges
has been received. (76)

=1639.= The commander of the guard is responsible for the security of
the prisoners under the charge of his guard; he becomes responsible
for them after their number has been verified and they have been
turned over to the custody of his guard by the old guard or by the
prisoner guard or overseers. (77)

=1640.= The prisoners will be verified and turned over to the new
guard without parading them, unless the commanding officer or the
officer of the day shall direct otherwise. (78)

=1641.= To receive the prisoners at the guardhouse when they have been
paraded and after they have been verified by the officers of the day,
the commander of the new guard directs his sergeant to form his guard
with an interval, and commands: =1. Prisoners, 2. Right, 3. FACE, 4.
Forward, 5. MARCH.= The prisoners having arrived opposite the interval
in the new guard, he commands: =1. Prisoners, 2. HALT, 3. Left, 4.
FACE, 5. Right (or left), 6. DRESS, 7. FRONT.=

The prisoners dress on the line of the new guard. (79)

Sergeant of the Guard

=1642.= The senior noncommissioned officer of the guard always acts as
sergeant of the guard, and if there be no officer of the guard, will
perform the duties prescribed for the commander of the guard. (80)

=1643.= The sergeant of the guard has general supervision over the
other noncommissioned officers and the musicians and privates of the
guard, and must be thoroughly familiar with all of their orders and
duties. (81)

=1644.= He is directly responsible for the property under charge of
the guard, and will see that it is properly cared for. He will make
lists of articles taken out by working parties, and see that all such
articles are duly returned. If they are not, he will immediately
report the fact to the commander of the guard. (82)

=1645.= Immediately after guard mounting he will prepare duplicate
lists of the names of all noncommissioned officers, musicians, and
privates of the guard, showing the relief and post or duties of each.
One list will be handed as soon as possible to the commander of the
guard; the other will be retained by the sergeant. (83)

=1646.= He will see that all reliefs are turned out at the proper
time, and that the corporals thoroughly understand, and are prompt and
efficient in, the discharge of their duties. (84)

=1647.= During the temporary absence from the guardhouse of the
sergeant of the guard, the next in rank of the noncommissioned
officers will perform his duties. (85)

=1648.= Should the corporal whose relief is on post be called away
from the guardhouse, the sergeant of the guard will designate a
noncommissioned officer to take the corporal's place until his return.
(86)

=1649.= The sergeant of the guard is responsible at all times for the
proper police of the guardhouse or guard tent, including the ground
about them and the prison cells. (87)

=1650.= At "=first sergeant's call=" he will proceed to the adjutant's
office and obtain the guard report book. (88)

=1651.= When the national or regimental colors are taken from the
stacks of the color line, the color bearer and guard, or the sergeant
of the guard, unarmed, and two armed privates as a guard, will escort
the colors to the colonel's quarters, as prescribed for the color
guard in the drill regulations of the arm of the service to which the
guard belongs. (89)

=1652.= He will report to the commander of the guard any suspicious or
unusual occurrence that comes under his notice, will warn him of the
approach of any armed body, and will send to him all persons arrested
by the guard. (90)

=1653.= When the guard is turned out, its formation will be as
follows: The senior noncommissioned officer, if commander of the
guard, is on the right of the right guide; if not commander of the
guard, he is in the line of file closers, in rear of the right four of
the guard; the next in rank is right guide; the next left guide; the
others in the line of file closers, usually, each in rear of his
relief; the field music, with its left three paces to the right of the
right guide. The reliefs form in the same order as when the guard was
first divided, except that if the guard consists of dismounted cavalry
and infantry, the cavalry forms on the left. (91)

=1654.= The sergeant forms the guard, calls the roll, and, if not in
command of the guard, reports to the commander of the guard as
prescribed in drill regulations for a first sergeant forming a troop
or company; the guard is not divided into platoons or sections, and,
except when the whole guard is formed prior to marching off, fours are
not counted. (92)

=1655.= The sergeant reports as follows: "=Sir, all present or
accounted for=," or "=Sir, (so-and-so) is absent="; or if the roll
call has been omitted, "=Sir, the guard, is formed=." Only men absent
without proper authority are reported absent. He then takes his place,
without command. (93)

=1656.= At night, the roll may be called by reliefs and numbers
instead of names; thus, the first relief being on post: =Second
relief; No. 1; No. 2=, etc.; =Third relief, Corporal; No. 1=, etc.
(94)

=1657.= Calling the roll will be dispensed with in forming the guard
when it is turned out as a compliment, on the approach of an armed
body, or in any sudden emergency; but in such cases the roll may be
called before dismissing the guard. If the guard be turned out for an
officer entitled to inspect it, the roll will, unless he directs
otherwise, always be called before a report is made. (95)

=1658.= The sergeant of the guard has direct charge of the prisoners,
except during such time as they may be under the charge of the
prisoner guard or overseers, and is responsible to the commander of
the guard for their security. (96)

=1659.= He will carry the keys of the guardroom and cells, and will
not suffer them to leave his personal possession while he is at the
guardhouse, except as hereinafter provided. (Par. 1661.) Should he
leave the guardhouse for any purpose, he will turn the keys over to
the noncommissioned officer who takes his place. (Par. 1647.) (97)

=1660.= He will count the knives, forks, etc., given to the prisoners
with their food, and see that none of these articles remain in their
possession. He will see that no forbidden articles of any kind are
conveyed to the prisoners. (98)

=1661.= Prisoners when paraded with the guard, are placed in line in
its center. The sergeant, immediately before forming the guard, will
turn over his keys to the noncommissioned officer at the guardhouse.
Having formed the guard, he will divide it into two nearly equal
parts. Indicating the point of division with his hand, he commands:

=1. Right (or left), 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH, 5. Guard, 6. HALT,
7. Left (or right), 8. FACE.=

If the first command be =right face=, the right half of the guard only
will execute the movements: if =left face=, the left half only will
execute them. The command =halt= is given when sufficient interval is
obtained to admit the prisoners. The doors of the guardroom and cells
are then opened by the noncommissioned officer having the keys. The
prisoners will file out under the supervision of the sergeant, the
noncommissioned officer, and sentinel on duty at the guardhouse, and
such other sentinels as may be necessary; they will form in line in
the interval between the two parts of the guard. (99)

=1662.= To return the prisoners to the guardroom and cells, the
sergeant commands:

=1. Prisoners, 2. Right (or left), 3. FACE, 4. Column right (or left),
5. MARCH.=

The prisoners, under the same supervision as before, return to their
proper rooms or cells. (100)

=1663.= To close the guard, the sergeant commands:

=1. Left (or right), 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH, 5. Guard, 6. HALT,
7. Right (or left), 8. FACE.=

The left or right half only of the guard as indicated, executes the
movement. (101)

=1664.= If there be but few prisoners, the sergeant may indicate the
point of division as above, and form the necessary interval by the
commands:

=1. Right (or left) step, 2. MARCH, 3. Guard, 4. HALT=, and close the
intervals by the commands:

=1. Left (or right) step, 2. MARCH, 3. Guard, 4. HALT.= (102)

=1665.= If sentinels are numerous, reliefs may, at the discretion of
the commanding officer, be posted in detachments, and sergeants, as
well as corporals, required to relieve and post them. (103)

Corporal of the Guard

=1666.= A corporal of the guard receives and obeys orders from none
but noncommissioned officers of the guard senior to himself, the
officers of the guard, the officer of the day, and the commanding
officer. (104)

=1667.= It is the duty of the corporal of the guard to post and
relieve sentinels, and to instruct the members of his relief in their
orders and duties. (105)

=1668.= Immediately after the division of the guard into reliefs the
corporals will assign the members of their respective reliefs to posts
by number, and a soldier so assigned to his post will not be changed
to another during the same tour of guard duty, unless by direction of
the commander of the guard or higher authority. Usually, experienced
soldiers are placed over the arms of the guard, and at remote and
responsible posts. (106)

=1669.= Each corporal will then make a list of the members of his
relief including himself. This list will contain the number of the
relief, the name, the company, and the regiment of every member
thereof, and the post to which each is assigned. The list will be made
in duplicate, one copy to be given to the sergeant of the guard as
soon as completed, the other to be retained by the corporal. (107)

=1670.= When directed by the commander of the guard, the corporal of
the first relief forms his relief, and then commands: =CALL OFF.=

Commencing on the right, the men call off alternately =rear= and
=front= rank, "=one=," "=two=," "=three=," "=four=," and so on; if in
single rank, they call off from right to left. The corporal then
commands:

=1. Right, 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH.=

The corporal marches on the left, and near the rear file, in order to
observe the march. The corporal of the old guard marches on the right
of the leading file, and takes command when the last one of the old
sentinels is relieved, changing places with the corporal of the new
guard. (108)

=1671.= When the relief arrives at six paces from a sentinel (See Par.
1729), the corporal halts it and commands, according to the number of
the post: =No. (--).=

Both sentinels execute port arms or saber; the new sentinel approaches
the old, halting about one pace from him. (See Par. 1733.) (109)

=1672.= The corporals advance and place themselves, facing each other,
a little in advance of the new sentinel, the old corporal on his
right, the new corporal on his left, both at a right shoulder, and
observe that the old sentinel transmits correctly his instructions.

The following diagram will illustrate the positions taken:

[Illustration]

R is the relief; A, the new corporal; B, the old; C, the new sentinel:
D, the old. (110)

=1673.= The instructions relative to the post having been
communicated, the new corporal commands, =Post=; both sentinels then
resume the right shoulder, face toward the new corporal and step back
so as to allow the relief to pass in front of them. The new corporal
then commands, =1. Forward, 2. MARCH=; the old sentinel takes his
place in rear of the relief as it passes him, his piece in the same
position as those of the relief. The new sentinel stands fast at a
right shoulder until the relief has passed six paces beyond him, when
he walks his post. The corporals take their places as the relief
passes them. (111)

=1674.= Mounted sentinels are posted and relieved in accordance with
the same principles. (112)

=1675.= On the return of the old relief, the corporal of the new guard
falls out when the relief halts; the corporal of the old guard forms
his relief on the left of the old guard, salutes, and reports to the
commander of his guard: "=Sir, the relief is present="; or "=Sir, (so
and so) is absent=," and takes his place in the guard. (113)

=1676.= To post a relief other than that which is posted when the old
guard is relieved, its corporal commands:

=1. (Such) relief, 2. FALL IN=; and if arms are stacked, they are
taken at the proper commands.

The relief is formed facing to the front, with arms at an =order=; the
men place themselves according to the numbers of their respective
posts, viz., =two=, =four=, =six=, and so on, in the =front rank=, and
=one=, =three=, =five=, and so on, in the =rear rank=. The corporal,
standing about two paces in front of the center of his relief, then
commands: =Call off.=

The men call off as prescribed. The corporal then commands: =1.
Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Order, 4. ARMS=; faces the commander of the
guard, executes the rifle salute, reports: "=Sir, the relief is
present=," or "=Sir, (so and so) is absent="; he then takes his place
on the right at order arms. (114)

=1677.= When the commander of the guard directs the corporal: "=Post
your relief=," the corporal salutes and posts his relief as prescribed
(Pars. 108 to 111); the corporal of the relief on post does not go
with the new relief, except when necessary to show the way. (115)

=1678.= To dismiss the old relief, it is halted and faced to the front
at the guardhouse by the corporal of the new relief, who then falls
out; the corporal of the old relief then steps in front of the relief
and dismisses it by the proper commands. (116)

=1679.= Should the pieces have been loaded before the relief was
posted, the corporal will, before dismissing the relief, see that no
cartridges are left in the chambers or magazines. The same rule
applies to sentinels over prisoners. (117)

=1680.= Each corporal will thoroughly acquaint himself with all the
special orders of every sentinel on his relief, and see that each
understands and correctly transmits such orders =in detail= to his
successor. (118)

=1681.= There should be at least one noncommissioned officer
constantly on the alert at the guardhouse, usually the corporal whose
relief is on post. This noncommissioned officer takes post near the
entrance of the guardhouse, and does not fall in with the guard when
it is formed. He will have his rifle constantly with him. (119)

=1682.= Whenever it becomes necessary for the corporal to leave his
post near the entrance of the guardhouse, he will notify the sergeant
of the guard, who will at once take his place, or designate another
noncommissioned officer to do so. (120)

=1683.= He will see that no person enters the guardhouse, or guard
tent, or crosses the posts of the sentinels there posted without
proper authority. (121)

=1684.= Should any sentinel call for the corporal of the guard, the
corporal will, in every case, at once and quickly proceed to such
sentinel. He will notify the sergeant of the guard before leaving the
guardhouse. (122)

=1685.= He will at once report to the commander of the guard any
violation of regulations or any unusual occurrence which is reported
to him by a sentinel, or which comes to his notice in any other way.
(123)

=1686.= Should a sentinel call: "=The Guard=," the corporal will
promptly notify the commander of the guard. (124)

=1687.= Should a sentinel call: "=Relief=," the corporal will at once
proceed to the post of such sentinel, taking with him the man next for
duty on that post. If the sentinel is relieved for a short time only,
the corporal will again post him as soon as the necessity for his
relief ceases. (125)

=1688.= When the countersign is used, the corporal at the posting of
the relief during whose tour challenging is to begin gives the
countersign to the members of the relief, excepting those posted at
the guardhouse. (126)

=1689.= He will wake the corporal whose relief is next on post in time
for the latter to verify the prisoners, form his relief, and post it
at the proper hour. (127)

=1690.= Should the guard be turned out, each corporal will call his
own relief, and cause its members to fall in promptly. (128)

=1691.= Tents or bunks in the same vicinity will be designated for the
reliefs so that all the members of each relief may, if necessary, be
found and turned out by the corporal in the least time and with the
least confusion. (129)

=1692.= When challenged by a sentinel while posting his relief, the
corporal commands: =1. Relief, 2. HALT=; to the sentinel's challenge
he answers "=Relief=," and at the order of the sentinel he advances
alone to give the countersign, or to be recognized. When the sentinel
says, "=Advance relief=," the corporal commands: =1. Forward, 2.
MARCH.=

If to be relieved, the sentinel is then relieved as prescribed. (130)

=1693.= Between retreat and reveille, the corporal of the guard will
challenge all suspicious looking persons or parties he may observe,
first halting his patrol or relief, if either be with him. He will
advance them in the same manner that sentinels on post advance like
parties (Pars. 1751 to 1757), but if the route of a patrol is on a
continuous chain of sentinels, he should not challenge persons coming
near him unless he has reason to believe that they have eluded the
vigilance of sentinels. (131)

=1694.= Between retreat and reveille, whenever so ordered by an
officer entitled to inspect the guard, the corporal will call: "=Turn
out the guard=," announcing the title of the officer, and then, if not
otherwise ordered he will salute and return to his post. (132)

=1695.= As a general rule he will advance parties approaching the
guard at night in the same manner that sentinels on post advance like
parties. Thus, the sentinel at the guardhouse challenges and repeats
the answer to the corporal, as prescribed hereafter (Par. 1760); the
corporal, advancing at "=port arms=," says: "=Advance (so and so) with
the countersign=," or "=to be recognized=," if there be no countersign
used; the countersign being correctly given, or the party being duly
recognized, the corporal says: "=Advance (so and so)="; repeating the
answer to the challenge of the sentinel. (133)

=1696.= When officers of different rank approach the guardhouse from
different directions at the same time, the senior will be advanced
first, and will not be made to wait for his junior. (134)

=1697.= Out of ranks and under arms, the corporal salutes with the
rifle salute. He will salute all officers whether by day or night.
(135)

=1698.= The corporal will examine parties halted and detained by
sentinels, and if he has reason to believe the parties have no
authority to cross sentinel's posts, will conduct them to the
commander of the guard. (136)

=1699.= The corporal of the guard will arrest all suspicious looking
characters prowling about the post or camp, all persons of a
disorderly character disturbing the peace, and all persons taken in
the act of committing crime against the Government on a military
reservation or post. All persons arrested by corporals of the guard,
or by sentinels, will at once be conducted to the commander of the
guard by the corporal. (137)

Musicians of the Guard

=1700.= The musicians of the guard will sound call as prescribed by
the commanding officer. (138)

=1701.= Should the guard be turned out for national or regimental
colors or standards, uncased, the field music of the guard will, when
the guard present arms, sound, "=To the color=" or "=To the
standard="; or, if for any person entitled thereto, the march,
flourishes, or ruffles, prescribed in paragraphs 375, 376, and 377, A.
R. (139)

Orderlies and Color Sentinels

=1702.= When so directed by the commanding officer, the officer who
inspects the guard at guard mounting will select from the members of
the new guard an orderly for the commanding officer and such number of
other orderlies and color sentinels as may be required. (140)

For these positions the soldiers will be chosen who are most correct
in the performance of duty and in military bearing, neatest in person
and clothing, and whose arms and accouterments are in the best
condition. Clothing, arms, and equipments must conform to regulations.
If there is any doubt as to the relative qualifications of two or more
soldiers, the inspecting officer will cause them to fall out at the
guardhouse and to form in line in single rank. He will then, by
testing them in drill regulations, select the most proficient. The
commander of the guard will be notified of the selection. (141)

=1703.= When directed by the commander of the guard to fall out and
report, an orderly will give his name, company, and regiment to the
sergeant of the guard, and, leaving his rifle in the arm rack in his
company quarters, will proceed at once to the officer to whom he is
assigned, reporting: "=Sir, Private ----, Company ----, reports as
orderly.=" (142)

=1704.= If the orderly selected be a cavalryman, he will leave his
rifle in the arm rack of his troop quarters, and report with his belt
on, but without side arms unless specially otherwise ordered. (143)

=1705.= Orderlies, while on duty as such, are subject only to the
orders of the commanding officer and of the officers to whom they are
ordered to report. (144)

=1706.= When an orderly is ordered to carry a message, he will be
careful to deliver it exactly as it was given to him. (145)

=1707.= His tour of duty ends when he is relieved by the orderly
selected from the guard relieving his own. (146)

=1708.= Orderlies are members of the guard, and their name, company,
and regiment are entered on the guard report and lists of the guard.
(147)

=1709.= If a color line is established, sufficient sentinels are
placed on the color line to guard the colors and stacks. (148)

=1710.= Color sentinels are posted only so long as the stacks are
formed. The commander of the guard will divide the time equally among
them. (149)

=1711.= When stacks are broken, the color sentinels may be permitted
to return to their respective companies. They are required to report
in person to the commander of the guard at reveille and retreat. They
will fall in with the guard, under arms, at guard mounting. (150)

=1712.= Color sentinels are not placed on the regular reliefs, nor are
their posts numbered. In calling for the corporal of the guard, they
call: "=Corporal of the guard. Color line.=" (151)

=1713.= Officers or enlisted men passing the uncased colors will
render the prescribed salute. If the colors are on the stacks, the
salute will be made on crossing the color line or on passing the
colors. (152)

=1714.= A sentinel placed over the colors will not permit them to be
moved, except in the presence of an armed escort. Unless otherwise
ordered by the commanding officer, he will allow no one to touch them
but the color bearer.

He will not permit any soldier to take arms from the stacks, or to
touch them, except by order of an officer or noncommissioned officer
of the guard.

If any person passing the colors or crossing the color line fails to
salute the colors, the sentinel will caution him to do so, and if the
caution be not heeded he will call the corporal of the guard and
report the facts. (153)

Privates of the Guard

=1715.= Privates are assigned to reliefs by the commander of the
guard, and to posts, usually, by the corporal of their relief. They
will not change from one relief or post to another during the same
tour of guard duty unless by proper authority. (154)

Orders for Sentinels

=1716.= Orders for sentinels are of two classes: General orders and
special orders. General orders apply to all sentinels. Special orders
relate to particular posts and duties. (155)

=1717.= Sentinels will be required to memorize the following:

My general orders are:

=1. To take charge of this post and all Government property in view.=

=2. To walk my post in a military manner, keeping always on the alert
and observing everything that takes place within sight or hearing.=

=3. To report all violations of orders I am instructed to enforce.=

=4. To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the guardhouse
than my own.=

=5. To quit my post only when properly relieved.=

=6. To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves me all
orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day, and officers
and noncommissioned officers of the guard only.=

=7. To talk to no one except in line of duty.=

=8. In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm.=

=9. To allow no one to commit a nuisance on or near my post.=

=10. In any case not covered by instructions to call the corporal of
the guard.=

=11. To salute all officers, and all colors and standards not cased.=

=12. To be especially watchful at night, and, during the time for
challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my post, and to allow
no one to pass without proper authority.= (156)

Regulations Relating to the General Orders for Sentinels

=1718.= No. 1: =To take charge of this post and all Government
property in view.=

All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are required to observe
respect toward sentinels and members of the guard when such are in the
performance of their duties. (157)

=1719.= A sentinel will at once report to the corporal of the guard
every unusual or suspicious occurrence noted. (158)

=1720.= He will arrest suspicious persons prowling about the post or
camp at any time, all parties to a disorder occurring on or near his
post, and all, except authorized persons, who attempt to enter the
camp at night, and will turn over to the corporal of the guard all
persons arrested. (159)

=1721.= The number, limits, and extent of his post will invariably
constitute part of the special orders of a sentinel on post. The
limits of his post should be so defined as to include every place to
which he is required to go in the performance of his duties.

No. 2: =To walk my post in a military manner, keeping always on the
alert and observing everything that takes place within sight or
hearing.= (160)

=1722.= A sentinel is not required to halt and change the position of
his rifle on arriving at the end of his post, nor to execute =to the
rear, march=, precisely as prescribed in the drill regulations, but
faces about while walking, in the manner most convenient to him, and
at any part of his post as may be best suited to the proper
performance of his duties. He carries his rifle on either shoulder,
and in wet or severe weather, when not in a sentry box, may carry it
at a secure. (161)

=1723.= Sentinels when in sentry boxes stand at ease. Sentry boxes
will be used in wet weather only, or at other times when specially
authorized by the commanding officer. (162)

=1724.= In very hot weather, sentinels may be authorized to stand at
ease on their posts, provided they can effectively discharge their
duties in this position, but they will take advantage of this
privilege only on the express authority of the officer of the day or
the commander of the guard. (163)

=1725.= A mounted sentinel may dismount occasionally and lead his
horse but will not relax his vigilance.

No. 3: =To report all violations of orders I am instructed to
enforce.= (164)

=1726.= A sentinel will ordinarily report a violation of orders when
he is inspected or relieved, but if the case be urgent he will call
the corporal of the guard, and also, if necessary, will arrest the
offender.

No. 4: =To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the
guardhouse than my own.= (165)

=1727.= To call the corporal, or the guard, for any purpose other than
relief, fire, or disorder (Pars. 1728 and 1734), a sentinel will call,
"=Corporal of the guard, No. (--)=," adding the number of his post. In
no case will any sentinel call, "=Never mind the corporal="; nor will
the corporal heed such call if given.

No. 5: =To quit my post only when properly relieved.= (166)

=1728.= If relief becomes necessary, by reason of sickness or other
cause, a sentinel will call, "=Corporal of the guard, No. (--),
Relief=," giving the number of his post. (167)

=1729.= Whenever a sentinel is to be relieved, he will halt, and with
arms at a right shoulder, will face toward the relief when it is
thirty paces from him. He will come to a port arms with the new
sentinel, and in a low tone will transmit to him all the special
orders relating to the post, and any other information which will
assist him to better perform his duties.

No. 6: =To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves me,
all orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day, and
officers and noncommissioned officers of the guard only.= (168)

=1730.= During this tour of duty a soldier is subject to the orders of
the commanding officer, officer of the day, and officers and
noncommissioned officers of the guard only; but any officer is
competent to investigate apparent violations of regulations by members
of the guard. (169)

=1731.= A sentinel will quit his piece on an explicit order from any
person from whom he lawfully receives orders while on post; under no
circumstances will he yield it to any other person. Unless necessity
therefor exists, no person will require a sentinel to quit his piece,
even to allow it to be inspected. (170)

=1732.= A sentinel will not divulge the countersign (Pars. 1769 to
1777) to anyone except the sentinel who relieves him, or to a person
from whom he properly receives orders, on such person's verbal order
given personally. Privates of the guard will not use the countersign
except in the performance of their duties while posted as sentinels.

No. 7: =To talk to no one except in line of duty.= (171)

=1733.= When calling for any purpose, challenging, or holding
communication with any person, a dismounted sentinel, armed with a
rifle or saber, will take the position of "port" arms or saber. At
night a dismounted sentinel, armed with a pistol, takes the position
of raise pistol in challenging or holding communication. A mounted
sentinel does not ordinarily draw his weapon in the daytime when
challenging or holding conversation; but if drawn, he holds it at
advance rifle, raise pistol, or port saber, according as he is armed
with a rifle, pistol, or saber. At night, in challenging and holding
conversation, his weapon is drawn and held as just prescribed,
depending on whether he is armed with a rifle, pistol, or saber.

No. 8: =In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm.= (172)

=1734.= In case of fire, a sentinel will call, "=Fire No. (--)=,"
adding the number of his post; if possible, he will extinguish the
fire himself. In case of disorder, he will call: "=The Guard, No.
(--)=," adding the number of his post. If the danger be great, he
will, in either case, discharge his piece before calling.

No. 11: =To salute all officers and all colors and standards not
cased.= (173)

=1735.= When not engaged in the performance of a specific duty, the
proper execution of which would prevent it, a member of the guard will
salute all officers who pass him. This rule applies at all hours of
the day or night, except in the case of mounted sentinels armed with a
rifle or pistol, or dismounted sentinels armed with a pistol, after
challenging. (See Par. 1742.) (174)

=1736.= Sentinels will salute as follows: A dismounted sentinel armed
with a rifle or saber, salutes by presenting arms; if otherwise armed,
he salutes with the right hand.

A mounted sentinel, if armed with a saber and the saber be drawn,
salutes by presenting saber; otherwise he salutes in all cases with
the right hand. (175)

=1737.= To salute, a dismounted sentinel, with piece at a right
shoulder or saber at a carry, halts and faces toward the person to be
saluted when the latter arrives within thirty paces.

The limit within which individuals and insignia of rank can be readily
recognized is assumed to be about 30 paces, and, therefore, at this
distance cognizance is taken of the person or party to be saluted.
(176)

=1738.= The salute is rendered at 6 paces; if the person to be saluted
does not arrive within that distance, then when he is nearest. (177)

=1739.= A sentinel in a sentry box, armed with a rifle, stands at
attention in the doorway on the approach of a person or party entitled
to salute, and salutes by presenting arms according to the forgoing
rules.

If armed with a saber, he stands at a carry and salutes as before.
(178)

=1740.= A mounted sentinel on a regular post halts, faces, and salutes
in accordance with the foregoing rules. If doing patrol duty, he
salutes, but does not halt unless spoken to. (179)

=1741.= Sentinels salute, in accordance with the foregoing rules, all
persons and parties entitled to compliments from the guard (Pars.
1787, and 1788): officers of the Army, Navy, and Marine Corps;
military and naval officers of foreign powers; officers of volunteers,
and militia officers when in uniform. (180)

=1742.= A sentinel salutes as just prescribed when an officer comes on
his post; if the officer holds communication with the sentinel, the
sentinel again salutes when the officer leaves him.

During the hours when challenging is prescribed, the first salute is
given as soon as the officer has been duly recognized and advanced. A
mounted sentinel armed with a rifle or pistol, or a dismounted
sentinel armed with a pistol, does not salute after challenging.

He stands at advance rifle or raise pistol until the officer passes.
(181)

=1743.= In case of the approach of an armed party of the guard, the
sentinel will halt when it is about 30 paces from him, facing toward
the party with his piece at the right shoulder. If not himself
relieved, he will, as the party passes, place himself so that the
party will pass in front of him; he resumes walking his post when the
party has reached 6 paces beyond him. (182)

An officer is entitled to the compliments prescribed, whether in
uniform or not. (183)

=1744.= A sentinel in communication with an officer will not interrupt
the conversation to salute. In the case of seniors the officer will
salute, whereupon the sentinel will salute. (184)

=1745.= When the flag is being lowered at retreat, a sentinel on post
and in view of the flag will face the flag, and, at the first note of
the "Star Spangled Banner" or to the color will come to a present
arms. At the sounding of the last note he will resume walking his
post.

No. 12: =To be especially watchful at night and during the time for
challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my post, and to allow
no one to pass without proper authority.= (185)

=1746.= During challenging hours, if a sentinel sees any person or
party on or near his post, he will advance rapidly along his post
toward such person or party and when within about 30 yards will
challenge sharply, "=HALT. Who is there?=" He will place himself in
the best possible position to receive or, if necessary, to arrest the
person or party. (186)

=1747.= In case a mounted party be challenged, the sentinel will call,
"=HALT. DISMOUNT. Who is there?=" (187)

=1748.= The sentinel will permit only one of any party to approach him
for the purpose of giving the countersign (Pars. 1769 to 1777), or if
no countersign be used, of being duly recognized. When this is done
the whole party is advanced, i. e., allowed to pass. (188)

=1749.= In all cases the sentinel must satisfy himself beyond a
reasonable doubt that the parties are what they represent themselves
to be and have a right to pass. If he is not satisfied, he must cause
them to stand and call the corporal of the guard. So, likewise, if he
have no authority to pass persons with the countersign, or when the
party has not the countersign, or gives an incorrect one. (189)

=1750.= A sentinel will not permit any person to approach so close as
to prevent the proper use of his own weapon before recognizing the
person or receiving the countersign. (190)

=1751.= When two or more persons approach in one party, the sentinel
on receiving an answer that indicates that someone in the party has
the countersign, will say, "=Advance one with the countersign=," and,
if the countersign is given correctly, will then say, "=Advance (So
and so)=," repeating the answer to his challenge. Thus, if the answer
be, "=Relief (friends with the countersign, patrol, etc.)=," the
sentinel will say, "=Advance one with the countersign="; then,
"=Advance relief (friends, patrol, etc.)=." (191)

=1752.= If a person having the countersign approach alone, he is
advanced to give the countersign. Thus, if the answer be, "=Friend
with the countersign (or officer of the day, or etc.)=," the sentinel
will say, "=Advance, friend (or officer of the day, or etc.), with the
countersign="; then, "=Advance, friend (or officer of the day, or
etc.)=." (192)

=1753.= If two or more persons approach a sentinel's post from
different directions at the same time, all such persons are challenged
in turn and required to halt and to remain halted until advanced.

The senior is first advanced, in accordance with the foregoing rules.
(193)

=1754.= If a party is already advanced and in communication with a
sentinel, the latter will challenge any other party that may approach;
if the party challenged be senior to the one already on his post, the
sentinel will advance the new party at once. The senior may allow him
to advance any or all of the other parties; otherwise, the sentinel
will not advance any of them until the senior leaves him. He will then
advance the senior only of the remaining parties, and so on. (194)

=1755.= The following order of rank will govern a sentinel in
advancing different persons or parties approaching his post:
Commanding officer, officer of the day, officer of the guard,
officers, patrols, reliefs, noncommissioned officers of the guard in
order of rank, friends. (195)

=1756.= A sentinel will never allow himself to be surprised, nor
permit two parties to advance upon him at the same time. (196)

=1757.= If no countersign be used, the rules for challenging are the
same. The rules for advancing parties are modified only as follows:
Instead of saying "=Advance (so and so) with the countersign=," the
sentinel will say, "=Advance (so and so) to be recognized=." Upon
recognition he will say, "=Advance (so and so)=." (197)

=1758.= Answers to a sentinel's challenge intended to confuse or
mislead him are prohibited, but the use of such an answer as "=Friends
with the countersign=," is not to be understood as misleading, but as
the usual answer made by officers, patrols, etc., when the purpose of
their visit makes it desirable that their official capacity should not
be announced. (198)

Special Orders For Sentinels at the Post of the Guard

=1759.= Sentinels posted at the guard will be required to memorize the
following:

=Between reveille and retreat to turn out the guard for all persons
designated by the commanding officer, for all colors or standards not
cased, and in time of war for all armed parties approaching my post,
except troops at drill and reliefs and detachments of the guard.=

=At night, after challenging any person or party, to advance no one
but call the corporal of the guard, repeating the answer to the
challenge.= (199)

=1760.= After receiving an answer to his challenge, the sentinel
calls, "=Corporal of the guard (So and so)=," repeating the answer to
the challenge.

He does not in such cases repeat the number of his post. (200)

=1761.= He remains in the position assumed in challenging until the
corporal has recognized or advanced the person or party challenged,
when he resumes walking his post, or, if the person or party be
entitled thereto, he salutes and, as soon as the salute has been
acknowledged, resumes walking his post. (201)

=1762.= The sentinel at the post of the guard will be notified by
direction of the commanding officer of the presence in camp or
garrison of persons entitled to the compliment (Par. 1784.) (202)

=1763.= The following examples illustrate the manner in which the
sentinel at the post of the guard will turn out the guard upon the
approach of persons or parties entitled to the compliment (Pars. 1784,
1787, and 1788): "=Turn out the guard, Commanding Officer="; "=Turn
out the guard, Governor of a Territory="; "=Turn out the guard,
national colors="; "=Turn out the guard, armed party="; etc.

At the approach of the new guard at guard mounting the sentinel will
call "=Turn out the guard, armed party=." (203)

=1764.= Should the person named by the sentinel not desire the guard
formed, he will salute, whereupon the sentinel will call "=Never mind
the guard=." (204)

=1765.= After having called "=Turn out the guard=," the sentinel will
never call "=Never mind the guard=," on the approach of an armed
party. (205)

=1766.= Though the guard be already formed he will not fail to call
"=Turn out the guard=," as required in his special orders, except that
the guard will not be turned out for any person while his senior is at
or coming to the post of the guard. (206)

=1767.= The sentinels at the post of the guard will warn the commander
of the approach of any armed body and of the presence in the vicinity
of all suspicious or disorderly persons. (207)

=1768.= In case of fire or disorder in sight or hearing, the sentinel
at the guardhouse will call the corporal of the guard and report the
facts to him. (208)

Countersigns and Paroles

=1769. Seventy-seventh Article of War.= Any person subject to military
law makes known the parole or countersign to any person not entitled
to receive it according to the rules and discipline of war, or gives a
parole or countersign different from that which he received, shall, if
the offense be committed in time of war, suffer death or such other
punishment as a court-martial may direct. (See Par. 1732.) (209)

=1770.= The =countersign= is a word given daily from the principal
headquarters of a command to aid guards and sentinels in identifying
persons who may be authorized to pass at night.

It is given to such persons as may be authorized to pass and repass
sentinels' posts during the night, and to officers, noncommissioned
officers, and sentinels of the guard. (210)

=1771.= The =parole= is a word used as a check on the countersign in
order to obtain more accurate identification of persons. It is
imparted only to those who are entitled to inspect guards and to
commanders of guards.

The parole or countersign, or both, are sent sealed in the form of an
order to those entitled to them. (211)

=1772.= When the commander of the guard demands the parole, he will
advance and receive it as the corporal receives the countersign. (See
Par. 1695.) (212)

=1773.= As the communications containing the parole and countersign
must at times be distributed by many orderlies, the parole intrusted
to many officers, and the countersign and parole to many officers and
sentinels, and as both the countersign and parole must, for large
commands, be prepared several days in advance, there is always danger
of their being lost or becoming known to persons who would make
improper use of them; moreover, a sentinel is too apt to take it for
granted that any person who gives the right countersign is what he
represents himself to be; hence for outpost duty there is greater
security in omitting the use of the countersign and parole, or in
using them with great caution. The chief reliance should be upon
personal recognition or identification of all persons claiming
authority to pass.

Persons whose sole means of identification is the countersign, or
concerning whose authority to pass there is a reasonable doubt, should
not be allowed to pass without the authority of the corporal of the
guard after proper investigation; the corporal will take to his next
superior any person about whom he is not competent to decide. (213)

=1774.= The =countersign= is usually the name of a battle; the
=parole=, that of a general or other distinguished person. (214)

=1775.= When they can not be communicated daily, a series of words for
some days in advance may be sent to posts or detachments that are to
use the same parole or countersign as the main body. (215)

=1776.= If the countersign be lost, or if a member of the guard desert
with it, the commander on the spot will substitute another for it and
report the case at once to headquarters. (216)

=1777.= In addition to the countersign, use may be made of
preconcerted signals, such as striking the rifle with the hand or
striking the hands together a certain number of times, as agreed upon.
Such signals may be used only by guards that occupy exposed points.

They are used before the countersign is given, and must not be
communicated to anyone not entitled to know the countersign. Their use
is intended to prevent the surprise of a sentinel.

In the daytime signals such as raising a cap or a handkerchief in a
prearranged manner may be used by sentinels to communicate with the
guard or with each other. (217)

Guard Patrols

=1778.= A guard patrol consists of one or more men detailed for the
performance of some special service connected with guard duty. (218)

=1779.= If the patrol be required to go beyond the chain of sentinels,
the officer or noncommissioned officer in charge will be furnished
with the countersign, and the outposts and sentinels warned. (219)

=1780.= If challenged by a sentinel, the patrol is halted by its
commander, and the noncommissioned officer accompanying it advances
alone and gives the countersign. (220)

Watchmen

=1781.= Enlisted men may be detailed as watchmen or as overseers over
prisoners, and as such will receive their orders and perform their
duties as the commanding officer may direct. (221)

Compliments From Guards

=1782.= The compliment from a guard consists in the guard turning out
and presenting arms. (See Par. 1612.) No compliments will be paid
between retreat and reveille except as provided in paragraphs 361 and
362, nor will any person other than those named in paragraph 224
receive the compliment. (222)

=1783.= Though a guard does not turn out between retreat and reveille
as a matter of compliment, it may be turned out for inspection at any
time by a person entitled to inspect it. (223)

=1784.= Between reveille and retreat the following persons are
entitled to the compliment: The President, sovereign or chief
magistrate of a foreign country, and members of a royal family;
Vice-President; President and President pro tempore of the Senate;
American and foreign ambassadors; members of the Cabinet; Chief
Justice; Speaker of the House of Representatives; committees of
Congress officially visiting a military post; governors within their
respective States and Territories; governors general[20]; Assistant
Secretary of War officially visiting a military post; all general
officers of the Army; general officers of foreign services visiting a
post; naval, marine, volunteer, and militia officers in the service of
the United States and holding the rank of general officer; American or
foreign envoys or ministers; ministers accredited to the United
states: chargés d'affaires accredited to the United States; consuls
general accredited to the United States; commanding officer of a coast
artillery district, coast defense command, post, fort or camp; officer
of the day. (224) (C. M. I. G. D., No. 1, Feb. 24, 1915.)

=1785.= The relative rank between officers of the Army and Navy is as
follows: General with admiral, lieutenant general with the vice
admiral, major general with rear admiral, brigadier general with
commodore,[21] colonel with captain, lieutenant colonel with
commander, major with lieutenant commander, captain with lieutenant,
first lieutenant with lieutenant (junior grade), second lieutenant
with ensign. (A. R. 12.) (225)

=1786.= Sentinels will not be required to memorize paragraph 1784, and
except in the cases of general officers of the Army, the commanding
officer, and the officer of the day, they will be advised in each case
of the presence in camp or garrison of persons entitled to the
compliment. (226)

=1787.= Guards will turn out and present arms when the national or
regimental colors or standards, not cased, are carried past by a guard
or an armed party. This rule also applies when the party carrying the
colors is at drill. If the drill is conducted in the vicinity of the
guardhouse, the guard will be turned out when the colors first pass,
and not thereafter. (227)

=1788.= In case the remains of a deceased officer or soldier are
carried past, the guard will turn out and present arms. (228)

=1789.= In time of war all guards will turn out under arms when armed
parties, except troops at drill and reliefs or detachments of the
guard, approach their post. (See Par. 1615.) (229)

=1790.= The commander of the guard will be notified of the presence in
camp or garrison of all persons entitled to the compliment, except
general officers of the Army, the commanding officer, and the officer
of the day. Members of the guard will salute all persons entitled to
the compliment and all officers in the military or naval service of
foreign powers, officers of the Army, Navy and Marine Corps, officers
of volunteers, and officers of militia when in uniform. (230)

General Rules Concerning Guard Duty

=1791. Eighty-sixth Article of War.= Any sentinel who is found drunk
or sleeping upon his post, or who leaves it before he is regularly
relieved, shall, if the offense be committed in time of war, suffer
death or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct; and if
the offense be committed in time of peace, he shall suffer any
punishment, except death, that a court-martial may direct. (232)

=1792.= All material instructions given to a member of the guard by an
officer having authority will be promptly communicated to the
commander of the guard by the officer giving them. (233)

=1793.= Should the guard be formed, soldiers will fall in ranks under
arms. At roll call, each man, as his name or number and relief are
called, will answer "Here," and come to an =order arms=. (234)

=1794.= Whenever the guard or a relief is dismissed, each member not
at once required for duty will place his rifle in the arms racks, if
they be provided, and will not remove it therefrom unless he requires
it in the performance of some duty. (235)

=1795.= Without permission from the commander of the guard, members of
the main guard, except orderlies, will not leave the immediate
vicinity of the guard house. Permission to leave will not be granted
except in cases of necessity. (236)

=1796.= Members of the main guard, except orderlies, will not remove
their accouterments or clothing without permission from the commander
of the guard. (Par. 1628.) (237)

Guarding Prisoners

=1797.= The sentinel at the post of the guard has charge of the
prisoners except when they have been turned over to the prisoner guard
or overseers. (Par. 1798 to 1802 and 300 to 304.)

(a) =He will allow none to escape.=

(b) =He will allow none to cross his post leaving the guardhouse
except when passed by an officer or noncommissioned officer of the
guard.=

(d) =He will promptly report to the corporal of the guard any
suspicious noise made by the prisoners.=

(e) =He will be prepared to tell whenever asked how many prisoners are
in the guardhouse and how many are out at work or elsewhere.=

Whenever prisoners are brought to his post returning from work or
elsewhere, he will halt them and call the corporal of the guard,
notifying him of the number of prisoners returning. Thus: "=Corporal
of the guard, (so many) prisoners.="

He will not allow prisoners to pass into the guardhouse until the
corporal of the guard has responded to the call and ordered him to do
so. (299)

=1798.= Whenever practicable special guards will be detailed for the
particular duty of guarding working parties composed of such prisoners
as cannot be placed under overseers. (300)

=1799.= The prisoner guard and overseers will be commanded by the
police officer; if there be no police officer, then by the officer of
the day. (301)

=1800.= The provost sergeant is sergeant of the prisoner guard and
overseers, and as such receives orders from the commanding officer and
the commander of the prisoner guard only. (302)

=1801.= Details for prisoner guard are marched to the guardhouse and
mounted by being inspected by the commander of the main guard, who
determines whether all of the men are in proper condition to perform
their duties and whether their arms and equipments are in proper
condition, and rejects any men found unfit. (303)

=1802.= When prisoners have been turned over to the prisoner guard or
overseers, such guards or overseers are responsible for them under
their commander, and all responsibility and control of the main guard
ceases until they are returned to the main guard. (Par. 1804.) (304)

=1803.= If a prisoner attempts to escape, the sentinel will call
"=Halt=." If he fails to halt when the sentinel has once repeated his
call, and if there be no other possible means of preventing his
escape, the sentinel will fire upon him.

=1804.= On approaching the post of the sentinel at the guardhouse, a
sentinel of the prisoner guard or an overseer in charge of prisoners
will halt them and call, "=No. 1, (so many prisoners.)=" He will not
allow them to cross the post of the sentinel until so directed by the
Corporal of the guard. (306)

=1805.= Members of the prisoner guard and overseers placed over
prisoners for work will receive specific and explicit instructions
covering the required work; they will be held strictly responsible
that the prisoners under their charge properly and satisfactorily
perform the designated work. (307)

Stable Guards

=1806.= Under the head of stable guards will be included guards for
cavalry stables, artillery stables and parks, mounted infantry
stables, machine-gun organization stables and parks, and quartermaster
stables and parks. Where the words "troop" and "cavalry" are used they
will be held to include all of these organizations. (308)

=1807.= When troop stable guards are mounted they will guard the
stables of the cavalry. When no stable guards are mounted, the stables
will be guarded by sentinels posted from the main guard, under the
control of the officer of the day.

The instructions given for troop stable guard will be observed as far
as applicable by the noncommissioned officers and sentinels of the
main guard when in charge of the stables. (309)

Troop Stable Guards

=1808.= Troops stable guards will not be used except in the field, or
when it is impracticable to guard the stables by sentinels from the
main guard. (310)

=1809.= Troop stable guards will be under the immediate control of
their respective troop commanders; they will be posted in each cavalry
stable, or near the picket line, and will consist of not less than one
noncommissioned officer and three privates.

Stable guards are for the protection of the horses, stables, forage,
equipments, and public property generally. They will in addition
enforce the special regulations in regard to stables, horses, and
parks. (311)

=1810.= Sentinels of stable guards will be posted at the stables or at
the picket lines when the horses are kept outside. The troop stable
guard may be used as a herd guard during the day time or when grazing
is practicable. (312)

=1811.= The troop stable guard, when authorized by the post commander,
will be mounted under the supervision of the troop commander. It will
be armed, at the discretion of the troop commander, with either rifle
or pistol. (313)

=1812.= The tour continues for 24 hours, or until the guard is
relieved by a new guard. (314)

=1813.= The employment of stable guards for police and fatigue duties
at the stables is forbidden; but this will not prohibit them from
being required to assist in feeding grain before reveille. (315)

The troop stable guard will attend stables with the rest of the troop
and groom their own horses, the sentinels being taken off post for the
purpose. (316)

=1814.= Neither the noncommissioned officer nor the members of the
stable guard will absent themselves from the immediate vicinity of the
stables except in case of urgent necessity, and then for no longer
time than is absolutely necessary. No member of the guard will leave
for any purpose without the authority of the noncommissioned officer
of the guard. (317)

=1815.= The noncommissioned officer and one member of the stable guard
will go for meals at the proper hour; upon their return the other
members of the guard will be directed to go by the noncommissioned
officer. (318)

=1816.= When the horses are herded each troop will furnish its own
herd guard. (319)

=1817.= Smoking in the stables or their immediate vicinity is
prohibited. No fire or light, other than electric light or stable
lanterns, will be permitted in the stables. A special place will be
designated for trimming, filling, and lighting lanterns. (320)

Noncommissioned Officer of the Troop Stable Guard

=1818.= The noncommissioned officer receives his orders from his troop
commander, to whom he will report immediately after posting his first
relief, and when relieved will turn over all his orders to his
successor. He instructs his sentinels in their general and special
duties; exercises general supervision over his entire guard; exacts
order and cleanliness about the guardroom; prevents the introduction
of intoxicants into the guardhouse and stables; receives, by count,
from his predecessor, the animals, horse equipments, and all property
(both private and public) pertaining thereto; examines, before
relieving his predecessor, all locks, windows, and doors, and should
any be found insecure he will report the fact to his troop commander
when he reports for orders. He will personally post and relieve each
sentinel, taking care to verify the property responsibility of the
sentinel who comes off post, and see that the sentinel who goes on
post is aware of the property responsibility that he assumes. (321)

=1819.= That the noncommissioned officer may be more thoroughly
informed of his responsibility, =all= horses returning, except those
from a regular formation, will be reported to him. He will then notify
the sentinel on post, and, in the absence of the stable sergeant, will
see that the horses are promptly cared for.

In case of abuse, he will promptly report to the troop commander.
Should the horse be the private property of an officer, he will report
such abuse to the owner. (322)

=1820.= The noncommissioned officer will report any unusual occurrence
during his tour direct to his troop commander. (323)

=1821.= Horses and other property for which the noncommissioned
officer is responsible will not be taken from the stables without the
authority of the post or troop commander. (324)

=1822.= The noncommissioned officer must answer the sentinel's calls
promptly. (325)

=1823.= In case of fire, the noncommissioned officer will see that the
requirements of paragraph 1831 are promptly carried out. (326)

=1824.= Whenever it becomes necessary for the noncommissioned officer
to leave his guard, he will designate a member of it to take charge
and assume his responsibility during his absence. (327)

Sentinels of the Troop Stable Guard

=1825.= The sentinel in the discharge of his duties will be governed
by the regulations for sentinels of the main guard whenever they are
applicable--such as courtesies to officers, walking post in a
soldierly manner, challenging, etc.; he will not turn out the guard
except when ordered by proper authority. (328)

=1826.= The sentinel will receive orders from the commanding officer,
the troop commander, and the noncommissioned officers of the stable
guard only, except when the commanding officer directs the officer of
the day to inspect the stable guard. (329)

=1827.= In the field and elsewhere when directed by the commanding
officer the sentinel when posted will verify the number of horses for
which he is responsible, and when relieved will give the number to his
successor. (330)

=1828.= The sentinel will not permit any horse or equipments to be
taken from the stables, except in the presence of the noncommissioned
officer. (331)

=1829.= Should a horse get loose, the sentinel will catch him and tie
him up. If he be unable to catch the horse, the noncommissioned
officer will at once be notified. In case a horse be cast, or in any
way entangled, he will relieve him, if possible; if unable to relieve
him, he will call the noncommissioned officer. Sentinels are forbidden
to punish or maltreat a horse. (332)

=1830.= When a horse is taken sick, the sentinel will notify the
noncommissioned officer, who in turn will call the farrier, and see
that the horse is properly attended to. (333)

=1831.= In case of fire the sentinel will give the alarm by stepping
outside the stable and firing his pistol or piece repeatedly, and
calling out at the same time, "=Fire, stables, Troop (----)=."

As soon as the guard is alarmed, he will take the necessary
precautions in opening or closing the doors so as to prevent the
spreading of the fire and make it possible to remove the horses; he
will drop the chains and bars, and, with the other members of the
guard, proceed to lead out the horses and secure them at the picket
line or such other place as may have been previously designated. (334)

=1832.= Sentinels over horses, or in charge of prisoners, receive
orders from the stable sergeant, so far as the care of the horses and
the labor of prisoners are concerned. (335)

=1833.= In field artillery and machine-gun organizations, the guard
for the stables has charge of the guns, caissons, etc., with their
ammunition and stores, as well as the horses, harness, and forage.
(336)

The Flag

=1834.= The lowering of the flag will be regulated as to be completed
at the last note of "The Star Spangled Banner" or "to the color."
(338)

=1835.= When practicable, a detail consisting of a noncommissioned
officer and two privates of the guard will raise or lower the flag.
This detail wears side arms or, if the special equipments do not
include side arms, then belts only.

The noncommissioned officer, carrying the flag, forms the detail in
line, takes his post in the center, and marches it to the staff. The
flag is then securely attached to the halyards and rapidly hoisted.
The halyards are then securely fastened to the cleat on the staff and
the detail marched to the guardhouse. (344)

=1836.= When the flag is to be lowered, the halyards are loosened from
the staff and made perfectly free. At retreat the flag is lowered at
the last note of retreat. It is then neatly folded and the halyards
made fast. The detail is then reformed and marched to the guardhouse,
where the flag is turned over to the commander of the guard.

The flag should never be allowed to touch the ground and should always
be hoisted or lowered from the leeward side of the staff, the halyards
being held by two persons. (345)

Reveille and Retreat Gun

=1837.= The morning and evening gun will be fired by a detachment of
the guard, consisting, when practicable, of a corporal and two
privates. The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or,
if marches be played before the reveille, it is fired at the beginning
of the first march The retreat gun is fired at the last note of
retreat.

The corporal marches the detachment to and from the piece, which is
fired, sponged out, and secured under his direction. (346)

Guard Mounting

=1838.= Guard mounting will be formal or informal as the commanding
officer may direct. It will be held as prescribed in the drill
regulations of the arm of the service to which the guard belongs; if
none is prescribed, then as for infantry. In case the guard is
composed wholly of mounted organizations, guard mounting may be held
mounted. (347)

=1839.= When infantry and mounted troops dismounted are united for
guard mounting, all details form as prescribed for infantry. (348)

Formal Guard Mounting for Infantry

=1840.= Formal guard mounting will ordinarily be held only in posts or
camps where a band is present. (349)

=1841.= At the =assembly=, the men designated for the guard fall in on
their company parade grounds as prescribed in paragraph 106. I. D. R.
The first sergeant then verifies the detail, inspects it, replaces any
man unfit to go on guard, turns the detail over to the senior
noncommissioned officer, and retires. The band takes its place on the
parade ground so that the left of its front rank shall be 12 paces to
the right of the front rank of the guard when the latter is formed.
(350)

=1842.= At =adjutant's call=, the adjutant, dismounted, and the
sergeant-major on his left, marches to the parade ground. The adjutant
halts and takes post so as to be 12 paces in front of and facing the
center of the guard when formed; the sergeant-major continues on,
moves by the left flank, and takes post, facing to the left, 12 paces
to the left of the front rank of the band; the band plays in quick or
double time; the details are marched to the parade ground by the
senior noncommissioned officers; the detail that arrives first is
marched to the line so that, upon halting, the breast of the
front-rank man shall be near to and opposite the left arm of the
sergeant-major; the commander of the detail halts his detail, places
himself in front of and facing the sergeant-major, at a distance equal
to or a little greater than the front of his detail, and commands: =1.
Right, 2. DRESS.= The detail dresses up to the line of the
sergeant-major and its commander, the right front-rank man placing his
breast against the left arm of the sergeant-major; the noncommissioned
officers take post two paces in rear of the rear rank of the detail.
The detail aligned, the commander of the detail commands: =FRONT=,
salutes, and then reports: "=The detail is correct=;" or "=So many
sergeants, corporals, or privates are absent=;" the sergeant-major
returns the salute with the right hand after the report is made; the
commander then passes by the right of the guard and takes post in the
line of noncommissioned officers in rear of the right file or his
detail.

Should there be more than one detail, it is formed in like manner on
the left of the one preceding; the privates, noncommissioned officers,
and commander of each detail dress on those of the preceding details
in the same rank or line; each detail commander closes the rear rank
to the right and fills blank files, as far as practicable, with the
men from his front rank.

Should the guard from a company not include a noncommissioned officer,
one will be detailed to perform the duties of commander of the detail.
In this case the commander of the detail, after reporting to the
sergeant-major, passes around the right flank between the guard and
the band and retires. (351)

=1843.= When the last detail has formed, the sergeant-major takes a
side step to the right, draws sword, verifies the detail, takes post
two paces to the right and two paces to the front of the guard, facing
to the left, causes the guard to count off, completes the left squad,
if necessary, as in the school of the company, and if there be more
than three squads, divides the guard into two platoons, again takes
post as described above and commands: =1. Open ranks, 2. MARCH.=

At the command march, the rear rank and file closers march backward
four steps, halt, and dress to the right. The sergeant major aligns
the ranks and file closers and again, taking post as described above,
commands: =FRONT=, moves parallel to the front rank until opposite the
center, turns to the right, halts midway to the adjutant, salutes,
and reports: "=Sir, the details are correct=;" or, "=Sir, (so many)
sergeants, corporals, or privates are absent=;" the adjutant returns
the salute, directs the sergeant-major: =Take your post=, and then
draws saber; the sergeant-major faces about, approaches to within two
paces of the center of the front rank, turns to the right, moves three
paces beyond the left of the front rank, turns to the left, halts on
the line of the front rank, faces about, and brings his sword to the
order. When the sergeant-major has reported, the officer of the guard
takes post, facing to the front, three paces in front of the center of
the guard, and draws saber.

The adjutant then commands: =1. Officer (or officers) and
noncommissioned officers, 2. Front and Center, 3. MARCH.=

At the command =center=, the officers carry saber. At the command
=march=, the officer advances and halts three paces from the adjutant,
remaining at the carry; the noncommissioned officers pass by the
flanks, along the front, and form in order of rank from right to left,
three paces in rear of the officer, remaining at the right shoulder;
if there is no officer of the guard the noncommissioned officers halt
on a line three paces from the adjutant; the adjutant then assigns the
officers and noncommissioned officers according to rank, as follows:
=Commander of the guard, leader of first platoon, leader of second
platoon, right guide of first platoon, left guide of second platoon,
left guide of first platoon, right guide of second platoon=, and =file
closers=, or, if the guard is not divided into platoons: =Commander of
the guard, right guide, left guide=, and =file closers=.

The adjutant then commands: =1. Officer (or officers) and
noncommissioned officers, 2. POSTS, 3. MARCH.=

At the command =posts=, all, except the officer commanding the guard,
face about. At the command =march=, they take the posts prescribed in
the school of the company with open ranks. The adjutant directs:
=Inspect your guard, sir=; at which the officer commanding the guard
faces about, commands: =Prepare for inspection=, returns saber, and
inspects the guard.

During the inspection, the band plays; the adjutant returns saber,
observes the general condition of the guard, and falls out any man who
is unfit for guard duty or does not present a creditable appearance.
Substitutes will report to the commander of the guard at the
guardhouse. (352)

=1844.= The adjutant, when so directed, selects orderlies and color
sentinels, as prescribed in paragraphs 140 and 141, and notifies the
commander of the guard of his selection. (353)

If there be a junior officer of the guard he takes post at the same
time as the senior, facing to the front, 3 paces in front of the
center of the first platoon; in going to the front and center he
follows and takes position on the left of the senior and is assigned
as leader of the first platoon; he may be directed by the commander of
the guard to assist in inspecting the guard.

If there be no officer of the guard, the adjutant inspects the guard.
A noncommissioned officer commanding the guard takes post on the right
of the right guide, when the guard is in line; and takes the post of
the officer of the guard, when in column or passing in review. (354)

=1845.= The inspection ended, the adjutant places himself about 30
paces in front of and facing the center of the guard, and draws saber;
the new officer of the day takes post in front of and facing the
guard, about 30 paces from the adjutant; the old officer of the day
takes post 3 paces to the right of and 1 pace to the rear of the new
officer of the day; the officer of the guard takes post 3 paces in
front of its center, draws saber with the adjutant and comes to the
order; thereafter he takes the same relative positions as a captain of
a company.

The adjutant then commands: =1. Parade, 2. REST, 3. SOUND OFF=, and
comes to the order and parade rest.

The band, playing, passes in front of the officer of the guard to the
left of the line, and back to its post on the right, when it ceases
playing.

The adjutant then comes to attention, carries saber, and commands: =1.
Guard, 2. ATTENTION, 3. Close ranks, 4. MARCH.=

The ranks are opened and closed as in paragraph 745, I. D. R.

The adjutant then commands: =1. Present, 2. ARMS=, faces toward the
new officer of the day, salutes, and then reports: =Sir, the guard is
formed.= The new officer of the day, after the adjutant has reported,
returns the salute with the hand and directs the adjutant: =March the
guard in review, sir.=

The adjutant carries saber, faces about, brings the guard to an order,
and commands: =1. At trail, platoons (or guard) right, 2. MARCH, 3.
Guard, 4. HALT.=

The platoons execute the movements; the band turns to the right and
places itself 12 paces in front of the first platoon.

The adjutant places himself 6 paces from the flank and abreast of the
commander of the guard; the sergeant major, 6 paces from the left
flank of the second platoon.

The adjutant then commands: =1. Pass in review, 2. FORWARD, 3. MARCH.=

The guard marches in quick time past the officer of the day, according
to the principles of review, and is brought to =eyes right= at the
proper time by the commander of the guard; the adjutant, commander of
the guard, leaders of platoons, sergeant-major, and drum major salute.

The band, having passed the officer of the day, turns to the left out
of the column, places itself opposite and facing him, and continues to
play until the guard leaves the parade ground. The field music
detaches itself from the band when the latter turns out of the column,
and, remaining in front of the guard, commences to play when the band
ceases.

Having passed 12 paces beyond the officer of the day, the adjutant
halts; the sergeant-major halts abreast of the adjutant and 1 pace to
his left; they then return saber, salute, and retire; the commander of
the guard then commands: =1. Platoons, right by squads, 2. MARCH=, and
marches the guard to its post.

The officers of the day face toward each other and salute; the old
officer of the day turns over the orders to the new officer of the
day.

When the band is sounding off, and while the guard is marching in
review, the officers of the day stand at parade rest with arms folded.
They take this position when the adjutant comes to parade rest, resume
the attention with him, again take the parade rest at the first note
of the march in review, and resume attention as the head of the column
approaches.

The new officer of the day returns the salute of the commander of the
guard and the adjutant, making one salute with the hand. (355)

=1846.= If the guard be not divided into platoons, the adjutant
commands: =1. At trail, guard right, 2. MARCH, 3. Guard, 4. HALT=, and
it passes in review as above; the commander of the guard is 3 paces in
front of its center; the adjutant places himself 6 paces from the left
flank and abreast of the commander of the guard; the sergeant covers
the adjutant on a line with the front rank. (356)

Informal Guard Mounting for Infantry

=1847.= Informal guard mounting will be held on the parade ground of
the organization from which the guard is detailed. If it is detailed
from more than one organization, then at such place as the commanding
officer may direct. (357)

=1848. At assembly=, the detail for guard falls in on the company
parade ground. The first sergeant verifies the detail, inspects their
dress and general appearance, and replaces any man unfit to march on
guard. He then turns the detail over to the commander of the guard and
retires. (358)

=1849. At adjutant's call=, the officer of the day takes his place 15
paces in front of the center of the guard and commands: =1. Officer
(or officers) and noncommissioned officers, 2. Front and center, 3.
MARCH=; whereupon the officers and noncommissioned officers take their
positions, are assigned and sent to their posts as prescribed in
formal guard mounting. (Par. 1843.)

The officer of the day will then inspect the guard with especial
reference for its fitness for the duty for which it is detailed, and
will select as prescribed in paragraphs 1702, the necessary orderlies
and color sentinels. The men found unfit for guard will be returned to
quarters and will be replaced by others found to be suitable, if
available in the company. If none are available in the company, the
fact will be reported to the adjutant immediately after guard
mounting.

When the inspection shall have been completed, the officer of the day
resumes his position and directs the commander of the guard to march
the guard to its post. (359)

Relieving the Old Guard

=1850.= As the new guard approaches the guardhouse, the old guard is
formed in line, with its field music 3 paces to its right; and when
the field music at the head of the new guard arrives opposite its
left, the commander of the new guard commands: =1. Eyes, 2. RIGHT=;
the commander of the old guard commands: =1. Present, 2. ARMS=;
commanders of both guards salute. The new guard marches in quick time
past the old guard.

When the commander of the new guard is opposite the field music of the
old guard, he commands: =FRONT=; the commander of the old guard
commands: =1. Order, 2. ARMS=, as soon as the new guard shall have
cleared the old guard.

The field music having marched 3 paces beyond the field music of the
old guard, changes direction to the right, and, followed by the guard,
changes direction to the left when on a line with the old guard; the
changes of direction are without command. The commander of the guard
halts on the line of the front rank of the old guard, allows his guard
to march past him, and when its rear approaches forms it in line to
the left, establishes the left guide 3 paces to the right of the field
music of the old guard, and on a line with the front rank, and then
dresses his guard to the left; the field music of the new guard is 3
paces to the right of its front rank. (360)

=1851.= The new guard being dressed, the commander of each guard, in
front of and facing its center, commands: =1. Present, 2. ARMS=,
resumes his front, salutes, carries saber, faces his guard and
commands: =1. Order, 2. ARMS.=

Should a guard be commanded by a noncommissioned officer, he stands on
the right or left of the front rank, according as he commands the old
or new guard, and executes the rifle salute. (361)

=1852.= After the new guard arrives at its post, and has saluted the
old guard, each guard is presented by its commander to its officer of
the day; if there be but one officer of the day present, or if one
officer acts in the capacity of old and new officer of the day, each
guard is presented to him by its commander. (362)

=1853.= If other persons entitled to a salute approach, each commander
of the guard will bring his own guard to attention if not already at
attention. The senior commander of the two guards will then command
"=1. Old and new guards, 2. Present, 3. ARMS.="

The junior will salute at the command "=Present Arms=" given by the
senior. After the salute has been acknowledged, the senior brings both
guards to the order. (363)

=1854.= After the salutes have been acknowledged by the officers of
the day, each guard is brought to an order by its commander; the
commander of the new guard then directs the orderly or orderlies to
fall out and report, and causes bayonets to be fixed if so ordered by
the commanding officer; bayonets will not then be unfixed during the
tour except in route marches while the guard is actually marching, or
when specially directed by the commanding officer.

The commander of the new guard then falls out members of the guard for
detached posts, placing them under charge of the proper
noncommissioned officers, divides the guard into three reliefs,
=first=, =second=, and =third=, from right to left, and directs a list
of the guard to be made by reliefs. When the guard consists of troops
of different arms combined, the men are assigned to reliefs so as to
insure a fair division of duty, under rules prescribed by the
commanding officer. (364)

=1855.= The sentinels and detachments of the old guard are at once
relieved by members of the new guard; the two guards standing at ease
or at rest while these changes are being made. The commander of the
old transmits to the commander of the new guard all his orders,
instructions, and information concerning the guard and its duties. The
commander of the new guard then takes possession of the guardhouse and
verifies the articles in charge of the guard. (365)

=1856.= If considerable time is required to bring in that portion of
the old guard still on post, the commanding officer may direct that as
soon as the orders and property are turned over to the new guard, the
portion of the old guard at the guardhouse may be marched off and
dismissed. In such a case, the remaining detachment or detachments of
the old guard will be inspected by the commander of the new guard when
they reach the guardhouse. He will direct the senior noncommissioned
officer present to march these detachments off and dismiss them in the
prescribed manner. (366)

=1857.= In bad weather, at night, after long marches, or when the
guard is very small, the field music may be dispensed with. (367)

FOOTNOTES:

[20] The term "governors general" shall be taken to mean
administrative officers under whom officers with the title of governor
are acting.

[21] The grade of commodore ceased to exist as a grade on the active
list of the Navy of the United States on Mar. 3, 1899. By section 7 of
the act of Mar. 3, 1899, the nine junior rear admirals are authorized
to receive the pay and allowances of a brigadier general of the Army.

PART VIII

MILITARY ORGANIZATION

=1858.= The tabulations that follow are based on the National Defense
Act of June 3, 1916, and on the Tables of Organization.

Composition of Infantry Units

=Transportation, orderlies, etc.= To Hdqrs. Co., 27 riding horses; to
Machine Gun Co., 6 riding horses and 8 pack mules; to Supply Co., 3
riding horses; to each Battalion Hdqrs., 6 riding horses, 1 wagon, 4
draft mules, and 2 mounted orderlies; to Regtl. Hdqrs., 5 riding
horses.

Composition of Cavalry Units

=Transportation, orderlies, etc.= To each Squadron Hdqrs., 6 or 7
riding horses and 2 orderlies; to each squadron; 292 riding horses, 1
wagon and 4 draft mules.

Composition of Field Artillery Units

------------------------+------------------------+-----------------------
| Battalion | Battery
Regiment | (Gun or Howitzer) | (Gun or Howitzer)
------------------------+------------------------+-----------------------
Each | Each | Each
------------------------+------------------------+-----------------------
1 Colonel | 1 Major | 1 Captain
1 Lt. Colonel | 1 Captain | 2 1st Lieuts.
1 Captain | -- | 2 2nd Lieuts.
-- | 2 | --
3 | -- | 5
-- | | --
| Batteries as follows: |
1 Hdqrs. Co., | | 1 1st Sergt.
1 Supply Co., | Mountain artillery | 1 Supply Sergt.
| battalions and light | 1 Stable Sergt.
And such number of | artillery gun or | 1 Mess Sergt.
guns and howitzer as | howitzer battalions | 6 Sergts.
the President may | serving with the field | 13 Corpls.
direct. | artillery or Infantry | 1 Chief Mechanic
| divisions shall contain| 1 Saddler
_Attached_ | three batteries; horse | 2 Horseshoers
| artillery battalions | 1 Mechanic
1 Major, Med. Dept. | and heavy field | 2 Buglers
3 Capts. or 1st | artillery gun or | 3 Cooks
Lieuts., Med. Dept. | howitzer battalions | 22 Pvts., 1st Class
1 Chaplain | shall contain two | 71 Pvts.
| batteries. | ---
| | 125
| | ---
| |
| | When no enlisted men
| | of the Quartermaster
| | Corps are attached for
| | such positions there
| | shall be added to each
| | battery of mountain
| | artillery:
| |
| | 1 Packmaster Sergt.,
| | 1st Class
| | 1 Asst. Packmaster
| | Sergt.
| | 1 Cargador, Corpl.
| |
| | (The President may add
| | 3 Sergts., 7 Corpls.,
| | 1 Horseshoer, 2
| | Mechanics, 1 Bugler,
| | 13 Pvts. 1st Class, 37
| | Pvts.--total, 64)
------------------------+------------------------+-----------------------

=Transportation, orderlies, etc.= To Battery Hdqrs., 8 riding horses;
to each Battery, 24 riding horses, 88 draft horses, 1 Battery wagon, 1
Store wagon, 8 Caissons and 4 Guns.

PART IX

MAP READING AND MILITARY SKETCHING

CHAPTER I

MAP READING

=1859. Definition of map.= A map is a representation on paper of a
certain portion of the earth's surface.

A military map is one that shows the things which are of military
importance, such as roads, streams, bridges, houses, depressions, and
hills.

=1860. Map reading.= By map reading is meant the ability to get a
clear idea of the ground represented by the map,--of being able to
_visualize_ the ground so represented.

For some unknown reason, military map reading is generally considered
a very difficult matter to master, and the beginner, starting out with
this idea, seemingly tries to find it difficult.

However, as a matter of fact, map reading is not difficult, if one
goes about learning it in the right way,--that is, by first becoming
familiar with scales, contours, conventional signs, and other things
that go to make up map making.

Practice is most important in acquiring ability in map reading.
Practice looking at maps and then _visualizing_ the actual country
represented on the map.

=1861. Scales.= In order that you may be able to tell the distance
between any two points on a map, the map must be drawn to scale,--that
is, it must be so drawn that a certain distance on the map, say, one
inch, represents a certain distance on the ground, say, one mile. On
such a map, then, two inches would represent two miles on the ground;
three inches, three miles, and so on. Therefore, we may say--

_The scale of a map is the ratio between actual distances on the
ground and those between the same points as represented on the map._

=1862. Methods of representing scales.= There are three ways in which
the scale of a map may be represented:

1st. By words and figures, as 3 inches = 1 mile; 1 inch = 200 feet.

2d. By Representative Fraction (abbreviated R. F.), which is a
fraction whose numerator represents units of distance on the map and
whose denominator, units of distance on the ground.

For example, R. F. = 1 inch (on map)/1 mile (on ground) which is
equivalent to R. F. = 1/63360, since 1 mile = 63,360 inches. So the
expression, "R. F. 1/63360" on a map merely means that 1 inch on the
map represents 63,360 inches (or 1 mile) on the ground. This fraction
is usually written with a numerator 1, as above, no definite unit of
inches or miles being specified in either the numerator or
denominator. In this case the expression means that one unit of
distance on the map equals as many of the same units on the ground as
are in the denominator. Thus, 1/63360 means that 1 inch on the map =
63,360 inches on the ground, 1 foot on the map = 63,360 feet on the
ground; 1 yard on the map = 63,360 yards on the ground, etc.

3d. By Graphical Scale, that is, a drawn scale. A graphical scale is a
line drawn on the map, divided into equal parts, each part being
marked not with its actual length, but with the distance which it
represents on the ground. Thus:

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

For example, the distance from 0 to 50 represents fifty yards on the
ground; the distance from 0 to 100, one hundred yards on the ground,
etc.

If the above scale were applied to the road running from A to B in
Fig. 2, it would show that the length of the road is 675 yards.

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

=1863. Construction of Scales.= The following are the most usual
problems that arise in connection with the construction of scales:

1. Having given the R. F. on a map, to find how many miles on the
ground are represented by one inch on the map. Let us suppose that the
R. F. is 1/21120.

Solution

Now, as previously explained, 1/21120 simply means that one inch on
the map represents 21,120 inches on the ground. There are 63,360
inches in one mile. 21,120 goes into 63,360 three times--that is to
say, 21,120 is 1/3 of 63,360, and we, therefore, see from this that
one inch on the map represents 1/3 of a mile on the ground, and
consequently it would take three inches on the map to represent one
whole mile on the ground. So, we have this general rule: To find out
how many miles one inch on the map represents on the ground, divide
the denominator of the R. F. by 63,360.

2. Being given the R. F. to construct a graphical scale to read yards.
Let us assume that 1/21120 is the R. F. given--that is to say, one
inch on the map represents 21,120 inches on the ground, but, as there
are 36 inches in one yard, 21,120 inches = 21,120/36 yds. = 586.66
yds.--that is, one inch on the map represents 586.66 yds. on the
ground. Now, suppose about a 6-inch scale is desired. Since one inch
on the map = 586.66 yards on the ground, 6 inches (map) = 586.66 × 6 =
3,519.96 yards (ground). In order to get as nearly a 6-inch scale as
possible to represent even hundreds of yards, let us assume 3,500
yards to be the total number to be represented by the scale. The
question then resolves itself into this: How many inches on the map
are necessary to represent 3,500 yards on the ground. Since, as we
have seen, one inch (map) = 586.66 yards (ground), as many inches are
necessary to show 3,500 yards as 586.66 is contained in 3,500; or
3500/586.66 = 5.96 inches.

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

Now lay off with a scale of equal parts the distance A-I (Figure 3) =
5.96 inches (about 5 and 9-1/2 tenths), and divided it into 7 equal
parts by the construction shown in figure, as follows: Draw a line
A-H, making any convenient angle with A-I, and lay off 7 equal
convenient lengths (A-B, B-C, C-D, etc.), so as to bring H about
opposite to I. Join H and I and draw the intermediate lines through B,
C, etc., parallel to H-I. These lines divide A-I into 7 equal parts,
each 500 yards long. The left part, called the Extension, is similarly
divided into 5 equal parts, each representing 100 yards.

=3. To construct a scale for a map with no scale.= In this case,
measure the distance between any two definite points on the ground
represented, by pacing or otherwise, and scale off the corresponding
map distance. Then see how the distance thus measured corresponds with
the distance on the map between the two points. For example, let us
suppose that the distance on the ground between two given points is
one mile and that the distance between the corresponding points on the
map is 3/4 inch. We would, therefore, see that 3/4 inch on the map =
one mile on the ground. Hence 1/4 inch would represent 1/3 of a mile,
and 4-4, or one inch, would represent 4 × 1/3 = 4/3 = 1-1/3 miles.

The R. F. is found as follows:

R. F. 1 inch/(1-1/3 mile) = 1 inch/(63,360 × 1-1/3 inches) = 1/84480.

From this a scale of yards is constructed as above (2).

4. To construct a graphical scale from a scale expressed in unfamiliar
units. There remains one more problem, which occurs when there is a
scale on the map in words and figures, but it is expressed in
unfamiliar units, such as the meter (= 39.37 inches), strides of a man
or horse, rate of travel of column, etc. If a noncommissioned officer
should come into possession of such a map, it would be impossible for
him to have a correct idea of the distances on the map. If the scale
were in inches to miles or yards, he would estimate the distance
between any two points on the map to be so many inches and at once
know the corresponding distance on the ground in miles or yards. But
suppose the scale found on the map to be one inch = 100 strides
(ground), then estimates could not be intelligently made by one
unfamiliar with the length of the stride used. However, suppose the
stride was 60 inches long; we would then have this: Since 1 stride =
60 inches, 100 strides = 6,000 inches. But according to our
supposition, 1 inch on the map = 100 strides on the ground; hence 1
inch on the map = 6,000 inches on the ground, and we have as our R.
F., 1 inch (map)/6,000 inches (ground) = 1/6000. A graphical scale can
now be constructed as in (2).

Problems in Scales

=1864.= The following problems should be solved to become familiar
with the construction of scales:

=Problem No. 1.= The R. F. of a map is 1/1000. Required: 1. The
distance in miles shown by one inch on the map; 2. To construct a
graphical scale of yards; also one to read miles.

=Problem No. 2.= A map has a graphical scale on which 1.5 inches reads
500 strides. 1. What is the R. F. of the map? 2. How many miles are
represented by 1 inch?

=Problem No. 3.= The Leavenworth map in back of this book has a
graphical scale and a measured distance of 1.25 inches reads 1,100
yards. Required: 1. The R. F. of the map; 2. Number of miles shown by
1 inch on the map.

=Problem No. 4.= 1. Construct a scale to read yards for a map of R. F.
= 1/21120. 2. How many inches represent 1 mile?

=1865. Scaling distances from a map.= There are four methods of
scaling distances from maps:

1. Apply a piece of straight edged paper to the distance between any
two points, A and B, for instance, and mark the distance on the paper.
Now, apply the paper to the graphical scale, (Fig. 2, Par. 1862), and
read the number of yards on the main scale and add the number
indicated on the extension. For example: 600 + 75 = 675 yards.

2. By taking the distance off with a pair of dividers and applying the
dividers thus set to the graphical scale, the distance is read.

3. By use of an instrument called a map measurer, Fig. 4, set the hand
on the face to read zero, roll the small wheel over the distance; now
roll the wheel in an opposite direction along the graphical scale,
noting the number of yards passed over. Or, having rolled over the
distance, note the number of inches on the dial and multiply this by
the number of miles or other units per inch. A map measurer is
valuable for use in solving map problems in patrolling, advance guard,
outpost, etc.

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

4. Apply a scale of inches to the line to be measured, and multiply
this distance by the number of miles per inch shown by the map.

=1866. Contours.= In order to show on a map a correct representation
of ground, the depressions and elevations,--that is, the
undulations,--must be represented. This is usually done by
_contours_.

Conversationally speaking, a _contour_ is the outline of a figure or
body, or the line or lines representing such an outline.

In connection with maps, the word _contour_ is used in these two
senses:

1. It is a projection on a horizontal (level) plane (that is, a map)
of the line in which a horizontal plane cuts the surface of the
ground. In other words, it is a line on a map which shows the route
one might follow on the ground and walk on the absolute level. If, for
example, you went half way up the side of a hill and, starting there,
walked entirely around the hill, neither going up any higher nor down
any lower, and you drew a line of the route you had followed, this
line would be a _contour line_ and its projection on a horizontal
plane (map) would be a _contour_.

By imagining the surface of the ground being cut by a number of
horizontal planes _that are the same distance apart_, and then
projecting (shooting) on a horizontal plane (map) the lines so cut,
the elevations and depressions on the ground are represented on the
map.

It is important to remember that the imaginary horizontal planes
cutting the surface of the ground must be the same distance apart. The
distance between the planes is called the _contour interval_.

2. The word _contour_ is also used in referring to _contour
line_,--that is to say, it is used in referring to the line itself in
which a horizontal plane cuts the surface of the ground as well as in
referring to the projection of such line on a horizontal plane.

An excellent idea of what is meant by contours and contour-lines can
be gotten from Figs. 5 and 6. Let us suppose that formerly the island
represented in Figure 5 was entirely under water and that by a sudden
disturbance the water of the lake fell until the island stood twenty
feet above the water, and that later several other sudden falls of the
water, twenty feet each time, occurred, until now the island stands
100 feet out of the lake, and at each of the twenty feet elevations a
distinct water line is left. These water lines are perfect
contour-lines measured from the surface of the lake as a reference (or
datum) plane. Figure 6 shows the contour-lines in Figure 5 projected,
or shot down, on a horizontal (level) surface. It will be observed
that on the gentle slopes, such as F-H (Fig. 5), the contours (20, 40)
are far apart. But on the steep slopes, as R-O, the contours (20, 40,
60, 80, 100) are close together. Hence, it is seen that contours far
apart on a map indicate gentle slopes, and contours close together,
steep slopes. It is also seen that the shape of the contours gives an
accurate idea of the form of the island. The contours in Fig. 6 give
an exact representation not only of the general form of the island,
the two peaks, O and B, the stream, M-N, the Saddle, M, the water shed
from F to H, and steep bluff at K, but they also give the slopes of
the ground at all points. From this we see that the slopes are
directly proportional to the nearness of the contours--that is, the
nearer the contours on a map are to one another, the steeper is the
slope, and the farther the contours on a map are from one another, the
gentler is the slope. A wide space between contours, therefore,
represents level ground.

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

[Illustration: Fig. 6]

The contours on maps are always numbered, the number of each showing
its height above some plane called a datum plane. Thus in Fig. 6 the
contours are numbered from 0 to 100 using the surface of the lake as
the datum plane.

The numbering shows at once the height of any point on a given contour
and in addition shows the contour interval--in this case 20 feet.

Generally only every fifth contour is numbered.

The datum plane generally used in maps is mean sea level, hence the
elevations indicated would be the heights above mean sea level.

The contours of a cone (Fig. 7) are circles of different sizes, one
within another, and the same distance apart, because the slope of a
cone is at all points the same.

[Illustration: Fig. 7]

The contours of a half sphere (Fig. 8), are a series of circles, far
apart near the center (top), and near together at the outside
(bottom), showing that the slope of a hemisphere varies at all points,
being nearly flat on top and increasing in steepness toward the
bottom.

[Illustration: Fig. 8]

The contours of a concave (hollowed out) cone (Fig. 9) are close
together at the center (top) and far apart at the outside (bottom).

[Illustration: Fig. 9]

The following additional points about contours should be remembered:

(a) A Water Shed or Spur, along with rain water divides, flowing away
from it on both sides, is indicated by the higher contours bulging out
toward the lower ones (F-H, Fig. 6).

(b) A Water Course or Valley, along which rain falling on both sides
of it joins in one stream, is indicated by the lower contours curving
in toward the higher ones (M-N, Fig. 6).

(d) Two contours which cross each other represent an overhanging
cliff.

(e) A closed contour without another contour in it, represents either
in elevation or a depression, depending on whether its reference
number is greater or smaller than that of the outer contour. A hilltop
is shown when the closed contour is higher than the contour next to
it; a depression is shown when the closed contour is lower than the
one next to it.

If the student will first examine the drainage system, as shown by the
courses of the streams on the map, he can readily locate all the
valleys, as the streams must flow through valleys. Knowing the
valleys, the ridges or hills can easily be placed, even without
reference to the numbers on the contours.

=For example:= On the Elementary Map, Woods Creek flows north and York
Creek flows south. They rise very close to each other, and the ground
between the points at which they rise must be higher ground, sloping
north on one side and south on the other, as the streams flow north
and south, respectively (see the ridge running west from Twin Hills).

The course of Sandy Creek indicates a long valley, extending almost
the entire length of the map. Meadow Creek follows another valley, and
Deep Run another. When these streams happen to join other streams, the
valleys must open into each other.

=1867. Map Distances (or horizontal equivalents).= The horizontal
distance between contours on a map (called map distance, or M. D.; or
horizontal equivalents or H. E.) is inversely proportional to the
slope of the ground represented--that it to say, the greater the slope
of the ground, the less is the horizontal distance between the
contours; the less the slope of the ground represented, the greater is
the horizontal distance between the contours.

[Illustration: Fig. 10]

+-----------+--------+--------------+
| Slope | Rise | Horizontal |
| (degrees) | (feet) | Distance |
| | | (inches) |
+-----------+--------+--------------+
| 1 deg. | 1 | 688 |
| 2 deg. | 1 | 688/2 = 344 |
| 3 deg. | 1 | 688/3 = 229 |
| 4 deg. | 1 | 688/4 = 172 |
| 5 deg. | 1 | 688/5 = 138 |
+-----------+--------+--------------+

It is a fact that 688 inches horizontally on a 1 degree slope gives a
vertical rise of one foot; 1376 inches, two feet, 2064 inches, three
feet, etc., from which we see that on a slope of 1 degree, 688 inches
multiplied by vertical rises of 1 foot, 2 feet, 3 feet, etc., gives us
the corresponding horizontal distance in inches. For example, if the
contour interval (Vertical Interval, V. I.) of a map is 10 feet, then
688 inches × 10 equals 6880 inches, gives the horizontal ground
distance corresponding to a rise of 10 feet on a 1 degree slope. To
reduce this horizontal ground distance to horizontal map distance, we
would, for example, proceed as follows:

Let us assume the R. F. to be 1/15840--that is to say, 15,840 inches
on the ground equals 1 inch on the map, consequently, 6880 inches on
the ground equals 6880/15840, equals .44 inch on the map. And in the
case of 2 degrees, 3 degrees, etc., we would have:

M. D. for 2° = 6880/(15840 × 2) = .22 inch;

M. D. for 3° = 6880/(15840 × 3) = .15 inch, etc.

From the above, we have this rule:

To construct a scale of M. D. for a map, multiply 688 by the contour
interval (in feet) and the R. F. of the map, and divide the results by
1, 2, 3, 4, etc., and then lay off these distances as shown in Fig.
11, Par. 1867a.

FORMULA

M. D. (inches) = (688 × V. I. (feet) × R. F.) /
(Degrees (1, 2, 3, 4, etc.))

=1867a. Scale of Map Distances (or, Scale of Slopes).= On the
Elementary Map, below the scale of miles and scale of yards, is a
scale similar to the following one:

[Illustration: Fig. 11]

The left-hand division is marked 1/2°; the next division (one-half as
long) 1°; the next division (one-half the length of the 1° division)
2°, and so on. The 1/2° division means that where adjacent contours on
the map are just that distance apart, the ground has a slope of 1/2 a
degree between these two contours, and slopes up toward the contour
with the higher reference number; a space between adjacent contours
equal to the 1° space shown on the scale means a 1° slope, and so on.

What is a slope of 1°? By a slope of 1° we mean that the surface of
the ground makes an angle of 1° with the horizontal (a level surface.
See Fig. 10, Par. 1867). The student should find out the slope of some
hill or street and thus get a concrete idea of what the different
degrees of slope mean. A road having a 5° slope is very steep.

By means of this scale of M. D.'s on the map, the map reader can
determine the slope of any portion of the ground represented, that is,
as steep as 1/2° or steeper. Ground having a slope of less than 1/2°
is practically level.

=1868. Slopes.= Slopes are usually given in one of three ways: 1st, in
degrees; 2d, in percentages; 3d, in gradients (grades).

1st. A one degree slope means that the angle between the horizontal
and the given line is 1 degree (1°). See Fig. 10, Par. 1867.

2d. A slope is said to be 1, 2, 3, etc., per cent, when 100 units
horizontally correspond to a rise of 1, 2, 3, etc., units vertically.

[Illustration: Fig. 12]

3d. A slope is said to be one on one (1/1), two on three, (2/3), etc.,
when one unit horizontal corresponds to 1 vertical; three horizontal
correspond to two vertical, etc. The numerator usually refers to the
vertical distance, and the denominator to the horizontal distance.

[Illustration: Fig. 13]

Degrees of slope are usually used in military matters; percentages are
often used for roads, almost always of railroads; gradients are used
of steep slopes, and usually of dimensions of trenches.

=1869. Effect of Slope on Movements=

60 degrees or 7/4 inaccessible for infantry;
45 degrees or 1/1 difficult for infantry;
30 degrees or 4/7 inaccessible for cavalry;
15 degrees or 1/4 inaccessible for artillery;
5 degrees or 1/12 accessible for wagons.

The normal system of scales prescribed for U. S. Army field sketches
is as follows: For road sketches, 3 inches = 1 mile, vertical
interval between contours (V. I.) = 20 ft.; for position sketches, 6
inches = 1 mile, V. I. = 10 ft.; for fortification sketches, 12 inches
= 1 mile, V. I. = 5 ft. On this system any given length of M. D.
corresponds to the same slope on each of the scales. For instance, .15
inch between contours represents a 5° slope on the 3-inch, 6-inch and
12-inch maps of the normal system. Figure 11, Par. 1867a, gives the
normal scale of M. D.'s for slopes up to 8 degrees. A scale of M. D.'s
is usually printed on the margin of maps, near the geographical scale.

=1870. Meridians.= If you look along the upper left hand border of the
Elementary Map (back of Manual), you will see two arrows, as shown in
Fig. 14, pointing towards the top of the map.

[Illustration: Fig. 14]

They are pointing in the direction that is north on the map. The arrow
with a full barb points toward the north pole (the True North Pole) of
the earth, and is called the True Meridian.

The arrow with but half a barb points toward what is known as the
Magnetic Pole of the earth, and is called the Magnetic Meridian.

The Magnetic Pole is a point up in the arctic regions, near the
geographical or True North Pole, which, on account of its magnetic
qualities, attracts one end of all compass needles and causes them to
point towards it, and as it is near the True North Pole, this serves
to indicate the direction of north to a person using a compass.

Of course, the angle which the Magnetic needle makes with the True
Meridian (called the Magnetic Declination) varies at different points
on the earth. In some places it points east of the True Meridian and
in others it points west of it.

It is important to know this relation because maps usually show the
True Meridian and an observer is generally supplied with a magnetic
compass. Fig. 15 shows the usual type of Box Compass. It has 4
cardinal points, N, E, S and W marked, as well as a circle graduated
in degrees from zero to 360°, clockwise around the circle. To read the
magnetic angle (called magnetic azimuth) of any point from the
observer's position the north point of the compass circle is pointed
toward the object and the angle indicated by the north end of the
needle is read.

[Illustration: Fig. 15]

You now know from the meridians, for example, in going from York to
Oxford (see Elementary Map) that you travel north; from Boling to
Salem you must travel south; going from Salem to York requires you to
travel west; and from York to Salem you travel east. Suppose you are
in command of a patrol at York and are told to go to Salem by the most
direct line across country. You look at your map and see that Salem is
exactly east of York. Next you take out your field compass (Figure 15,
Par. 1870), raise the lid, hold the box level, allow the needle to
settle and see in what direction the north end of the needle points
(it would point toward Oxford). You then know the direction of north
from York, and you can turn your right and go due east towards Salem.

Having once discovered the direction of north on the ground, you can
go to any point shown on your map without other assistance. If you
stand at York, facing north and refer to your map, you need no guide
to tell you that Salem lies directly to your right; Oxford straight in
front of you; Boling in a direction about halfway between the
directions of Salem and Oxford, and so on.

=1871. Determination of positions of points on map.= If the distance,
height and direction of a point on a map are known with respect to any
other point, then the position of the first point is fully determined.

The scale of the map enables us to determine the distance; the
contours, the height; and the time meridian, the direction.

Thus (see map in pocket at back of book), Pope Hill (sm') is 800 yards
from Grant Hill (um') (using graphical scale), and it is 30 feet
higher than Grant Hill, since it is on contour 870 and Grant Hill is
on contour 840; Pope Hill is also due north of Grant Hill, that is,
the north and south line through Grant Hill passes through Pope Hill.
Therefore, the position of Pope Hill is fully determined with respect
to Grant Hill.

Orientation

=1872.= In order that directions on the map and on the ground shall
correspond, it is necessary for the map to be oriented, that is, the
true meridian of the map must lie in the same direction as the true
meridian through the observer's position on the ground, which is only
another way of saying that the lines that run north and south on the
map must run in the same direction as the lines north and south on the
ground. Every road, stream or other feature on the map will then run
in the same direction as the road, stream or other feature itself on
the ground, and all the objects shown on the map can be quickly
identified and picked out on the ground.

Methods of Orienting a Map

1st. By magnetic needle: If the map has a magnetic meridian marked on
it as is on the Leavenworth map (in pocket at back of book), place the
sighting line, a-b, of the compass (Fig. 15) on the magnetic meridian
of the map and move the map around horizontally until the north end of
the needle points toward the north of its circle, whereupon the map is
oriented. If there is a true meridian on the map, but not a magnetic
meridian, one may be constructed as follows, if the magnetic
declination is known:

(Figure 16): Place the true meridian of the map directly under the
magnetic needle of the compass and then move the compass box until
the needle reads an angle equal to the magnetic declination. A line in
extension of the sighting line a'-b' will be the magnetic-meridian. If
the magnetic declination of the observer's position is not more than
4° or 5°, the orientation will be given closely enough for ordinary
purposes by taking the true and magnetic meridians to be identical.

2d. If neither the magnetic nor the true meridian is on the map, but
the observer's position on the ground is known: Move the map
horizontally until the direction of some definite point on the ground
is the same as its direction on the map; the map is then oriented. For
example, suppose you are standing on the ground at 8, q k' (Fort
Leaven worth Map), and can see the U. S. penitentiary off to the
south. Hold the map in front of you and face toward the U. S.
penitentiary, moving the map until the line joining 8 and the U. S.
penitentiary (on the map) lies in the same direction as the line
joining those two points on the ground. The map is now oriented.

[Illustration: Fig. 16]

Having learned to orient a map and to locate his position on the map,
one should then practice moving over the ground and at the same time
keeping his map oriented and noting each ground feature on the map as
it is passed. This practice is of the greatest value in learning to
read a map accurately and to estimate distances, directions and slopes
correctly.

True Meridian

=1873.= The position of the true meridian may be found as follows
(Fig. 17): Point the hour hand of a watch toward the sun; the line
joining the pivot and the point midway between the hour hand and XII
on the dial, will point toward the south; that is to say, if the
observer stands so as to face the sun and the XII on the dial, he will
be looking south. To point the hour hand exactly at the sun, stick a
pin as at (a) Fig. 17 and bring the hour hand into the shadow. At
night, a line drawn toward the north star from the observer's position
is approximately a true meridian.

[Illustration: Fig. 17]

The line joining the "pointers" of the Great Bear or Dipper, prolonged
about five times its length passes nearly through the North Star,
which can be recognized by its brilliancy.

[Illustration: Fig. 18]

=1874. Conventional Signs.= In order that the person using a map may
be able to tell what are roads, houses, woods, etc., each of these
features are represented by particular signs, called conventional
signs. In other words, conventional signs are certain marks or symbols
shown on a map to designate physical features of the terrain. (See
diagram, Par. 1875 Plate I and II.) On the Elementary Map the
conventional signs are all labeled with the name of what they
represent. By examining this map the student can quickly learn to
distinguish the conventional signs of most of the ordinary features
shown on maps. These conventional signs are usually graphical
representations of the ground features they represent, and, therefore,
can usually be recognized without explanation.

For example, the roads on the Elementary Map can be easily
distinguished. They are represented by parallel lines (======). The
student should be able to trace out the route of the Valley Pike, the
Chester Pike, the County Road, and the direct road from Salem to
Boling.

Private or farm lanes, and unimproved roads are represented by broken
lines (= = = =). Such a road or lane can be seen running from the
Barton farm to the Chester Pike. Another lane runs from the Mills farm
to the same Pike. The small crossmarks on the road lines indicate
barbed wire fences; the round circles indicate smooth wire; the small,
connected ovals (as shown around the cemetery) indicate stone walls,
and the zigzag lines (as shown one mile south of Boling) represent
wooden fences.

Near the center of the map, by the Chester Pike, is an orchard. The
small circles, regularly placed, give the idea of trees planted in
regular rows. Each circle does not indicate a tree, but the area
covered by the small circles does indicate accurately the area covered
by the orchard on the ground.

Just southwest of Boling a large woods (Boling Woods) is shown. Other
clumps of woods, of varying extent, are indicated on the map.

The course of Sandy Creek can be readily traced, and the arrows placed
along it, indicate the direction in which it flows. Its steep banks
are indicated by successive dashes, termed _hachures_. A few trees are
shown strung along its banks. Baker's Pond receives its water from the
little creek which rises in the small clump of timber just south of
the pond, and the hachures along the northern end represent the steep
banks of a dam. Meadow Creek flows northeast from the dam and then
northwest toward Oxford, joining Woods Creek just south of that town.
York Creek rises in the woods 1-1/4 miles north of York, and flows
south through York. It has a west branch which rises in the valleys
south of Twin Hills.

A railroad is shown running southeast from Oxford to Salem. The
hachures, unconnected at their outer extremities, indicate the fills
or embankments over which the track runs. Notice the fills or
embankments on which the railroad runs just northwest of Salem; near
the crossing of Sandy Creek; north of Baker's Pond; and where it
approaches the outskirts of Oxford. The hachures, connected along
their outer extremities, represent the cut through which the railroad
passes. There is only one railroad cut shown on the Elementary
Map--about one-quarter of a mile northeast of Baker's Pond--where it
cuts through the northern extremity of the long range of hills,
starting just east of York. The wagon roads pass through numerous
cuts--west of Twin Hills, northern end of Sandy Ridge, southeastern
end of Long Ridge, and so on. The small T's along the railroad and
some of the wagon roads, indicate telegraph or telephone lines.

The conventional sign for a bridge is shown where the railroad crosses
Sandy Creek on a trestle. Other bridges are shown at the points the
wagon roads cross this creek. Houses or buildings are shown in Oxford,
Salem, York and Boling. They are also shown in the case of a number of
farms represented--Barton farm, Wells farm, Mason's, Brown's, Baker's
and others. The houses shown in solid black are substantial structures
of brick or stone; the buildings indicated by rectangular outlines are
"out buildings," barns, sheds, etc.

Plates I and II give the Conventional Signs used on military maps and
they should be thoroughly learned.

[Illustration: Plate I]

[Illustration: Plate II]

In hasty sketching, in order to save time, instead of using the
regulation Conventional Signs, very often simply the outline of the
object, such as a wood, a vineyard, a lake, etc., is indicated, with
the name of the object written within the outline, thus:

[Illustration: Fig. 19]

Such means are used very frequently in rapid sketching, on account of
the time that they save.

By reference to the map of Fort Leavenworth, the meaning of all its
symbols is at once evident from the names printed thereon; for
example, that of a city, woods, roads, streams, railroad, etc.; where
no Conventional Sign is used on any area, it is to be understood that
any growths thereon are not high enough to furnish any cover. As an
exercise, pick out from the map the following conventional signs:
Unimproved road, cemetery, railroad track, hedge, wire fence, orchard,
streams, lake. The numbers on the various road crossings have no
equivalent on the ground, but are placed on the maps to facilitate
description of routes, etc. Often the numbers at road crossings on
other maps denote the elevation of these points.

Visibility

=1875.= The problem of visibility is based on the relations of
contours and map distances previously discussed, and includes such
matters as the determination of whether a point can or can not be seen
from another; whether a certain line of march is concealed from the
enemy; whether a particular area is seen from a given point.

On account of the necessary inaccuracy of all maps it is impossible to
determine exactly how much ground is visible from any given
point--that is, if a correct reading of the map shows a certain point
to be just barely visible, then it would be unsafe to say positively
that on the ground this point could be seen or could not be seen. It
is, however, of great importance for one to be able to determine at a
glance, within about one contour interval, whether or not such and
such a point is visible; or whether a given road is generally visible
to a certain scout, etc. For this reason no effort is made to give an
exact mathematical solution of problems in visibility further than
would be useful in practical work with a map in the solution of map
problems in patrolling.

In the solution of visibility problems, it is necessary that one
should thoroughly understand the meaning of profiles and their
construction. A profile is the line supposed to be cut from the
surface of the earth by an imaginary vertical (up and down) plane.
(See Fig. 21.) The representation of this line to scale on a sheet of
paper is also called a profile. Figure 21 shows a profile on the line
D--y (Figure 20) in which the horizontal scale is the same as that of
the map (Figure 20) and the vertical scale is 1 inch = 40 feet. It is
customary to draw a profile with a greater vertical than horizontal
scale in order to make the slopes on the profile appear to the eye as
they exist on the ground. Consequently, always note especially the
vertical scale in examining any profile; the horizontal scale is
usually that of the map from which the profile is taken.

[Illustration: Fig. 20]

[Illustration: Fig. 21]

A profile is constructed as follows: (Fig. 21): Draw a line D'--y'
equal in length to D--y on the map. Lay off on this line from D'
distances equal to the distances of the successive contours from D on
the map. At each of these contour points erect a perpendicular equal
to the elevation of this particular contour, as shown by the vertical
scale (960, 940, 920, etc.) on the left. Join successively these
verticals by a smooth curve, which is the required profile. Cross
section paper with lines printed 1/10 inch apart horizontally and
vertically simplifies the work of construction, by avoiding the
necessity of laying off each individual distance.

=1876. Visibility Problem.= To determine whether an observer with his
eye at D can see the bridge at XX (Figure 20). By examining the
profile it is seen that an observer, with his eye at D, looking along
the line D--XX, can see the ground as far as (a) from (a) to (b), is
hidden from view by the ridge at (a); (b) to (c) is visible; (c) to
(d) is hidden by the ridge at (c). By thus drawing the profiles, the
visibility of any point from a given point may be determined. The work
may be much shortened by drawing the profile of only the observer's
position (D) of the point in question, and of the probable obstructing
points (a) and (c). It is evidently unnecessary to construct the
profile from D to x, because the slope being concave shows that it
does not form an obstruction.

The above method of determining visibility by means of a profile is
valuable practice for learning slopes of ground, and the forms of the
ground corresponding to different contour spacings.

Visibility of Areas

=1877.= To determine the area visible from a given point the same
method is used. First mark off as invisible all areas hidden by woods,
buildings, high hills, and then test the doubtful points along lines
such as D--XX, Figure 20. With practice the noncommissioned officer
can soon decide by inspection all except the very close cases.

This method is a rapid approximation of the solution shown in the
profile. In general it will not be practicable to determine the
visibility of a point by this method closer than to say the line of
sight pierces the ground between two adjoining contours.

CHAPTER II

MILITARY SKETCHING

(While this chapter presents the principal features of military
sketching in a simple, clear manner, attention is invited to the
fact that the only way that any one who has never done any
sketching can follow properly the statements made, is to do so
with the instruments and the sketching material mentioned at hand.
In fact, the only way to learn how to sketch is to _sketch_.)

=1878.= A military sketch is a rough map showing the features of the
ground that are of military value.

Military sketching is the art of making such a military sketch.

Military sketches are of three kinds:

Position sketches, Fig. 1;

Outpost sketches;

Road sketches.

All kinds of military sketches are intended to give a military
commander detailed information of the ground to be operated over, when
this is not given by the existing maps, or when there are no maps of
the area.

The general methods of sketching are:

(1) The location of points by intersection.

(2) The location of points by resection.

=1879. Location of points by intersection.= To locate a point by
intersection proceed as follows: Set up, level and orient the
sketching board (Par. 1872), at A, Fig. 1. The board is said to be
oriented when the needle is parallel to the sides of the compass
trough of the drawing board, Fig 2. (At every station the needle must
have this position, so that every line on the sketch will be parallel
to the corresponding line or direction on the ground.) Assume a point
(A) on the paper, Fig. 1 Y, in such a position that the ground to be
sketched will fall on the sheet. Lay the ruler on the board and point
it to the desired point (C), all the while keeping the edge of the
ruler on the point (A), Fig. 1 Y. Draw an indefinite line along the
edge. Now move to (B), Fig. 1 X, plotted on the map in (b), Fig. 1 X,
and having set up, leveled and oriented as at (A), Fig. 1 Y, sight
toward (C) as before. The intersection (crossing) of the two lines
locates (C) on the sketch at (c), Fig. 1 X.

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

=1880. Locating points by resection.= A sketcher at an unknown point
may locate himself from two visible known points by setting up and
orienting his sketching board. He then places his alidade (ruler) so
that it points at one of the known points, keeping the edge of the
alidade touching the corresponding point on the sketch. He then draws
a ray (line) from the point toward his eye. He repeats the performance
with the other visible known point and its location on the map. The
point where the rays intersect is his location. This method is called
_resection_. However, local attractions for the compass greatly affect
this method.

=1881. The location of points by traversing.= To locate a point by
traversing is done as follows: With the board set up, leveled and
oriented at A, Fig. 1 Y, as above, draw a line in the direction of the
desired point B, Fig. 1 X, and then move to B, counting strides,
keeping record of them with a tally register, Fig. 3, if one is
available. Set up the board at B, Fig. 1 X, and orient it by laying
the ruler along the line (a)-(b), Fig. 1 X, and moving the board until
the ruler is directed toward A, Fig. 1 Y, on the ground; or else
orient by the needle as at A. With the scale of the sketcher's strides
on the ruler, lay off the number of strides found from A, Fig. 1 Y, to
B, Fig. 1 X, and mark the point (b), Fig. 1 X. Other points, such as
C, D, etc., would be located in the same way.

=1882. The determination of the heights of hills, shapes of the
ground, etc., by contours.= To draw in contours on a sketch, the
following steps are necessary:

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

(a) From the known or assumed elevation of a located station as A,
Fig. 1 Y, (elevation 890), the elevations of all hill tops, stream
junctures, stream sources, etc, are determined.

(b) Having found the elevations of these critical points the contours
are put in by spacing them so as to show the slope of the ground along
each line such as (a)-(b), (a)-(c), etc., Fig. 1 Y, as these slopes
actually are on the ground.

[Illustration: (Tally Register)--Fig. 3]

[Illustration: (Clinometer)--Fig. 4]

To find the elevation of any point, say C (shown on sketch as c),
proceed as follows:

Read the vertical angle with slope board, Fig. 2, or with a
clinometer, Fig. 4. Suppose this is found to be 2 degrees; lay the
scale of M. D.[22] (ruler, Fig. 2) along (a)-(c), Fig. 1 Y, and note
the number of divisions of -2 degrees (minus 2°) between (a) and (c).
Suppose there are found to be 5-1/2 divisions; then, since each
division is 10 feet, the total height of A above C is 55 feet (5-1/2 ×
10). C is therefore 835 ft. elev. which is written at (c), Fig. 1 Y.
Now looking at the ground along A-C, suppose you find it to be a very
decided concave (hollowed out) slope, nearly flat at the bottom and
steep at the top. There are to be placed in this space (a)-(c), Fig. 1
Y, contours 890, 880, 870, 860 and 850, and they would be spaced close
at the top and far apart near (c), Fig. 1 Y, to give a true idea of
the slope.

The above is the entire principle of contouring in making sketches and
if thoroughly learned by careful repetition under different
conditions, will enable the student to soon be able to carry the
contours with the horizontal locations.

=1883.= In all maps that are to be contoured some plane, called the
_datum plane_, must be used to which all contours are referred. This
plane is usually mean sea level and the contours are numbered from
this plane upward, all heights being elevations above mean sea level.

In a particular locality that is to be sketched there is generally
some point the elevation of which is known. These points may be bench
marks of a survey, elevation of a railroad station above sea level,
etc. By using such points as the reference point for contours the
proper elevations above sea level will be shown.

In case no point of known elevation is at hand the elevation of some
point will have to be assumed and the contours referred to it.

Skill in contouring comes only with practice but by the use of
expedients a fairly accurate contoured map can be made. In contouring
an area the stream lines and ravines form a framework or skeleton on
which the contours are hung more or less like a cobweb. These lines
are accurately mapped and their slopes determined and the contours are
then sketched in.

If the sketcher desires he may omit determining the slopes of the
stream lines and instead determine the elevations of a number of
critical points (points where the slope changes) in the area and then
draw in the contours remembering that contours bulge downward on
slopes and upward on streams lines and ravines.

If time permits both the slopes of the stream lines and the elevation
of the critical points may be determined and the resulting sketch will
gain in accuracy.

Figs. 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9 show these methods of determining and
sketching in contours.

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

[Illustration: Fig. 6]

[Illustration: Fig. 7]

[Illustration: Fig. 8]

[Illustration: Fig. 9]

=1884. Form lines.= It frequently happens that a sketch must be made
very hastily and time will not permit of contouring. In this case form
lines are used. These lines are exactly like contours except that the
elevations and forms of the hills and depressions which they represent
are estimated and the sketcher draws the form lines in to indicate the
varying forms of the ground as he sees it.

=1885. Scales.= The Army Regulations prescribe a uniform system of
scales and contour intervals for military maps, as follows:

Road sketches and extended positions; scale 3 inches to a mile,
vertical (or contour) interval, 20 feet.

Position or outpost sketches; scale 6 inches to a mile, vertical (or
contour) interval, 10 feet.

This uniform system is a great help in sketching as a given map
distance, Par. 1867a, represents the same degree of slope for both the
3 inch to the mile or the 6 inch to the mile scale. The map distances
once learned can be applied to a map of either scale and this is of
great value in sketching.

Construction of Working Scales

=1886. Working scale.= A _working scale_ is a scale used in making a
map. It may be a scale for paces or strides or revolutions of a wheel.

=1887. Length of pace.= The length of a man's pace at a natural walk
is about 30 inches, varying somewhat in different men. Each man must
determine his own length of pace by walking several times over a known
distance. In doing this be sure to take a natural pace. When you know
your length of pace you merely count your paces in going over a
distance and a simple multiplication of paces by length of pace gives
your distance in inches.

In going up and down slopes one's pace varies. On level ground careful
pacing will give you distances correct to within 3% or less.

The following tables give length of pace on slopes of 5 degrees to 30
degrees, corresponding to a normal pace on a level of 30.4 inches:

+-------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
|Slopes | 0°| 5°| 10°| 15°| 20°| 25°| 30°|
+-------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
|Length of step ascending | 30.4| 27.6| 24.4| 22.1| 19.7| 17.8| 15.0|
|Length of step descending| 30.4| 29.2| 28.3| 27.6| 26.4| 23.6| 19.7|
+-------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

For the same person, the length of step decreases as he becomes tired.
To overcome this, ascertain the length of pace when fresh and when
tired and use the first scale in the morning and the latter in the
afternoon.

The result of the shortening of the pace due to fatigue or going over
a slope, is to make the map larger than it should be for a given
scale. This is apparent when we consider that we take more paces in
covering a given distance than we would were it on a horizontal plane
and we were taking our normal pace.

In going up or down a slope of 3 or 4 we actually walk 5 units, but
cover only 4 in a horizontal direction. Therefore, we must make
allowance when pacing slopes.

In counting paces count each foot as it strikes. In counting strides
count only 1 foot as it strikes. A stride is two paces.

In practice it has been found that the scale of strides is far more
satisfactory than a scale of paces.

=1888. How to make a scale of paces.= Having determined the length of
our pace, any one of the following three methods may be used in making
a working scale:

_1st method._ The so-called "One thousand unit rule" method is as
follows:

Multiply the R. F. (representative fraction) by the number of inches
in the unit of measure multiplied by 1000; the result will be the
length of line in inches necessary to show 1000 units.

For example, let us suppose that we desire a graphic scale showing
1000 yards, the scale of the map being 3 inches equal 1 mile:

Multiply 1/21120 (R. F.) by 36 (36 inches in 1 yard, the unit of
measure) by 1000,--that is,

(1/21120) × 36 × 1000 = 36000/21120 = 1.7046 inches.

Therefore, a line or graphic scale 1.7 inches in length will represent
1000 yards.

If we desire a working scale of paces at 3 inches to the mile, and we
have determined that our pace is 31 inches long, we would have
(1/21120) × 31 × 1000 = 31000/21120 = 1.467 inches.

We can now lay off this distance and divide it into ten equal parts,
and each will give us a 100-pace division.

_2nd method._ Lay off 100 yards; ascertain how many of your paces are
necessary to cover this distance; multiply R. F. by 7,200,000, and
divide by the number of paces you take in going 100 yards. The result
will be the length of line in inches which will show 2000 of your
paces.

_3rd method._ Construct a scale of convenient length, about 6 inches,
as described in Par. 1863, to read in the units you intend to measure
your distance with (your stride, pace, stride of a horse, etc.), to
the scale on which you intend to make your sketch.

For example, suppose your stride is 66 inches long (33 inch pace) and
you wish to make a sketch on a scale of 3 inches = 1 mile. The R. F.
of this scale is 3 inches/1 mile = 3 inches/63360 inches = 1/21120.
That is 1 inch on your sketch is to represent 21120 inches on the
ground. As you intend to measure your ground distances by counting
your strides of 66 inches length, 1 inch on the sketch will represent
as many of your strides on the ground as 66 is contained into 21120 =
320 strides. For convenience in sketching you wish to make your scale
about 6 inches long. Since 1 inch represents 320 strides, 6 inches
will represent 6 × 320 = 1,920 strides. As this is an odd number,
difficult to divide into convenient subdivisions of hundreds, fifties,
etc., construct your scale to represent 2,000 strides, which will give
it a length slightly in excess of 6 inches--6.25. Lay off this length
and divide it into ten main divisions of 200 strides each, and
subdivide these into 50 stride divisions as explained in Par. 1862.

=1889. Position sketching.= The following are the instruments used in
position sketching:

1. Drawing board with attached compass (Fig. 2);

2. Loose ruler, on board (Fig. 2);

3. Rough tripod or camera tripod;

4. Scale of M. D.'s (shown on ruler, Fig. 2);

5. Scale of sketchers, strides or paces (at six inches to one mile),
on ruler;

6. Clinometer (not necessary if board has slope board, Fig. 6);

7. Scale of hundreds of yards shown on ruler;

8. Scale of paces.

Methods to be used

(1) Select a base line,--that is, a central line 1/4 to 1/2 mile long
in the area to be sketched. It should have at its ends some plainly
marked objects, such as telegraph poles, trees, corners of buildings,
etc., and from its ends, and intermediate points, a good view of the
area should be possible. The base line selected should be capable of
being measured.

(2) Set up, level and orient the drawing board at one end of the base
(A), Fig. 1, Y, for example. Draw a meridian on the sheet parallel to
the position of the magnetic needle. Assume a point (A), Fig. 1, Y,
corresponding to the ground point (A), 890, on the sheet, in such a
position that the area to be sketched will lie on the sheet.

(3) Sight at hilltops, stream junctures, stream heads, etc., to begin
the locations of these points by intersection, labelling each ray so
as to be able to identify it later.

(4) Traverse to (b) and complete the locations by intersection as
previously explained. If the base line is not accurately measured, the
map will be correct within itself in all of its proportions, but its
scale will not necessarily be the scale desired.

(5) Draw the details of the country between A and B and in the
vicinity of this line, using the conventional signs for roads, houses,
etc.

(6) The lines from station (b), Fig. 1, X, to any of the other located
points may now be used as a new base line to carry the work over
additional area.

(7) In case parts of the area are not visible from a base line, these
parts are located by traversing as before explained.

(8) Having learned by several repetitions the above steps, the
sketcher will then combine contouring with his horizontal locations.

=1890. Outpost sketching.= The same instruments are used as in
position sketching, and so are the methods the same, except that the
sketcher cannot advance beyond the outpost line, toward the supposed
position of the enemy. It is often possible to select a measurable
base line well in rear of the line of observation,--for instance,
along the line of resistance. Secondary base lines may then be taken
on or near the line of observation, from the extremities of which
additional base lines may be selected, if necessary, and points toward
the enemy's position located by intersection. Details are sketched in
as in position sketching. For obvious reasons, no traversing should be
done along the line of observation.

=1891. Road sketching.= The following are the instruments used in road
sketching:

1. Drawing board or sketching case;

2. Loose ruler;

3. Scale of strides, or paces, if made dismounted; scale of time
trotting or walking, if mounted;

4. Scale of hundreds of yards, at three inches to 1 mile;

5. Scale of M. D.'s;

6. Slope board (if clinometer is not available).

Methods to be used

(1) At station 1, Fig. 10, orient the board as described in par. 1872,
holding the board in the hands, in front of the body of the sketcher,
who faces toward station 2.

[Illustration: Fig. 10]

(2) Important points in the vicinity, such as the railroad bridge, the
stream juncture, hilltops, are sighted for intersections, lines drawn
as shown and the sketcher traverses to station 2.

(3) At station 2 he locates and draws in all details between station 1
and 2, to include about 300 yards on each side of the road.

(4) The traverse is then continued forward as described for 1 and 2.

(5) After some practice of horizontal sketching, as just described,
the sketcher will be able to take up contouring in combination. The
methods are as described in the paragraph on contouring.

(6) When the traverse runs off the paper as at A, Fig. 10, the
following method is followed: Reorient the board so that the road
forward will lie across the long dimensions of the paper; draw a
meridian parallel to the compass needle and assume a point on the new
sheet corresponding to the last point (A) plotted on the first sheet.

(7) On completion of the sketch various sections will be pasted
together, so that all the meridians are parallel.

=1892. Combined sketching.= Let us suppose that we have the rectangle
W, X, Y, Z, Fig. 11, assigned to us to map and that we have been given
four sketching parties, and that the locations and elevations of A and
B have been previously determined by triangulation and are plotted to
scale on our rectangle.

A logical step would be to carefully plot the line a' b', and then the
lines c' c" and c" d.

If the area is densely wooded we run "line of level" by using the
slope board or clinometer and by taking elevations at points
arbitrarily selected. Our lines will look something like this:

[Illustration: Fig. 11]

Each party will be given its rectangle with the traverses sketched in.
They will each then run similar traverses over the other two sides of
their area and then fill in. In this manner the whole work is tied up
to the original lines.

Another method

The line A B, Fig. 12, is carefully plotted. Each of the four
sketching parties has two sketching groups. One group of party No. 1
traverses line a' Y; then the other group of the party traverses the
line a" y'. The first group of party of No. 2 accompanies them. The
second group of party No. 2 traverses the line c" d, accompanied by
the first group of party No. 3; the second group of party No. 3, and
the first group of party No. 4 traverse b" z', and the second group of
party No. 4 traverses b' Z. When the first group of party No. 1
arrives at Y, it traverses Y y'. The second group of party No. 1,
arriving at y', cuts the sheet along traverse and gives the first
group of party No. 2 the part which shows their area; and then
traverses toward Y from y'. Upon meeting the first group of party No.
1, they join forces and proceed to fill in their area.

[Illustration: Fig. 12]

In the same manner areas W X a' b' are filled in.

[Illustration: Fig. 13]

The method described above is useful in working over country which is
densely wooded, and in which a general view cannot be obtained, for
example, in mapping jungles.

An additional article of the sketcher's equipment is a holder for his
pencils, alidade, eraser, knife, pins, etc. This consists of a series
of small pockets sewed on to a piece of canvas about 7 inches by 4
inches. This can be attached to the left breast of the sketcher's coat
or shirt by means of two pins. In addition to keeping all of his
implements in a handy place the holder prevents the loss of the
several articles. Nothing is so discouraging to the sketcher as to
look for his pencil, eraser, knife or even alidade and find that he
has left it several hundred yards back where he sat down last to
sketch in details. By using the holder the sketcher gets into the
habit of replacing articles after they are used and consequently
always has them with him when needed. These holders ready made can be
obtained from the Secretary, Army Service Schools at Fort Leavenworth,
Kansas.

In sketching a good quality of paper should always be used as erasures
will be frequent. A specially prepared paper that has the appearance
of oiled paper can be obtained commercially and is excellent for
sketching in damp weather. It has considerable resistance to rain.
Sheets of celluloid prepared for sketching are invaluable in sketching
in the rain. These are a part of the equipment of the case of
sketching instruments supplied battalions in the regular army. These
sheets may be procured at most any dealers.

Points for Beginners to Remember

=1893.= 1. Always keep your pencils sharpened and have an eraser
handy. No one but an expert can sketch with a dull pencil.

2. Use hard pencils when learning to sketch--4H to 6H--and go over
your work afterwards with a softer pencil--2H.

3. Do not try to put down on your sketch a mass of small details that
are too small to be shown on the scale at which you are sketching. For
example, if you are making a sketch on a scale of 3 inches = 1 mile,
do not try to show each house in a row of houses; simply indicate that
there is a row of houses, by putting down several distinct
conventional signs for houses in a row; nor should you try to show
every little "cut" through which the road may run. Only use about one
sign to the inch of telegraph or telephone lines, for wire fences,
etc.

4. When first practicing sketching only plot the route over which you
walk, indicating it by a single line. When you can do this with
facility, go back over one of these plotted routes and fill in the
woods, houses, streams and the other large features.

5. The beginner should sketch the same ground several times over--at
least three or four times. Practice alone will make perfect.

6. Always try to compare your finished sketch with an accurate map of
the ground, if one is obtainable. Try to practice on ground of which
you can obtain a map.

7. Make each course (the distance you go between points where the
direction of your route changes) as long as possible.

8. Do not try to contour until you are expert at making a sketch
showing all the flat details (roads, streams, woods, houses, etc.).

9. Never try to "sketch in" the contours until you have plotted the
stream lines or the direction of the valleys, ravines, etc. The
contours are fitted to or sketched around the drainage system; not the
drainage system to the contours.

10. Always "size up" ground before you sketch it; that is, take a
general view of it, noticing the drainage system (the direction in
which the streams flow or ravines run), the prominent hills and
ridges, the direction the roads run, etc.

11. Above all things, DON'T FAKE ANY PART OF YOUR MAP.

If the man using your map happens to strike the faked portion, he
immediately condemns your whole map as incorrect. Every other part may
be highly accurate, but your whole map is discredited because the user
strikes the bad part first. You will naturally put little faith in the
man who has told you something you know to be untrue. You will always
suspect him. So it is with maps. Don't put down anything that you
don't know to be correct. If any guess work is to be done, let the man
using the map do it,--he knows that he is guessing and will be
governed accordingly, but if you do the guessing, he doesn't know
where the guessing begins and the accurate work leaves off. Don't
fudge. Your name is on the map,--_don't have any questionable work
hitched up to your name_.

FOOTNOTES:

[22] Sheets of working scales reading in paces, strides, minutes, etc,
at a scale of 3 and 6 inches to the mile can be obtained at little
cost from the Secretary, Army Service Schools, Fort Leavenworth,
Kansas

INDEX

(The numbers refer to paragraphs)

A Par. No.

Abatis 1176

About face, how executed 105

1. About, 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH 229

About, turning by mounted officer 74

Abstract of clothing 905

Abstract record of memorandum receipts 901

Adjustment of fire 1428

Adjutant, formation of battalion 307; 308

Adjutant of general officer, post of 73

Adjutant's call 616; 693

Advance by crawling, etc. 261

ADVANCE BY RUSHES:
Commands 259
Company as whole led by captain 260
Position, fire 293
When impossible for company to advance as a whole 258

ADVANCE GUARD:
Commander with 542
Connecting files 584
Machine guns 553
Meeting engagement 542; 543

ADVANCE OF:
Battalion acting as part of firing line 343
Company into an engagement 249-257
Firing line 346

ADVANCING:
Improvised formations for 257
In succession of thin lines 255; 256
The attack 467; 471

Aerial mines 1200

Aides, post of 73

Aim, commands for 189

Aiming and sighting 1350

Aiming exercise 1368

Aiming point 1357

AIMING POINT:
Announced before or after range 181
Designations, practice in repeating 201
Once designated not changed unless ordered 182
Use 284

ALIGNMENT:
Battalion, rectifying 310; 312
Command of captains in battalion drill at command guide
right (left) 301
Company 218
Definition 24
Deployed lines preserve general alignment 240
Dressing companies in formation of battalion in line 308
Placing left hand on hip 70
Position of captain and platoon leaders in prolongation 218
Position of captains in dressing companies in battalion
drill 302
Preservation while marching 155
Rules for guides in close order 210; 211
Squad 154

AMMUNITION:
Bandoleers 573
Combat train and major's responsibility for ammunition
in belts 572
Destination of combat wagons when refilled 571
Expenditure of 432; 433
For company, husbanding and distribution 286
Issue before deployment of battalion 269
Issue upon deployment of battalion 331
Men not to be sent back from firing line for ammunition 574
Of dead and wounded 572
Rendezvous for each brigade 570
Replenishment of ammunition after engagement 575
Sent forward with reinforcements 574
Supply 360; 569-575
Thirty rounds in right pocket section 573

Amusement room 879

Appearance of objects in firing 1396

Appendices, Infantry Drill Regulations 696-710
and pp. 192 a b c d

Arm, disengaged, position at double time 121 (eighth)

Arm signals 92; 401

Arrangement of companies in battalion formation 297

Art of instruction on varied ground 933

Art of leadership 372

Art of war, definition 943

ARTILLERY:
Action of infantry in case enemy has powerful artillery 418
Change of target by infantry warranted in case of flanking
fire against artillery 424
Communication with firing line 402
Covering deployment of artillery in meeting engagement 541
Deployment of troops when exposed to hostile artillery 463
Effect on deployed infantry usually unimportant 345
Infantry against 597-600
Infantry passing through deployed artillery 470
In pursuit 494
In withdrawal from action 546
Part played in pursuit 491; 494
Supported by infantry 434-437
Use against machine guns 555
Use in delaying action 533
Withdrawal of attacking troops covered by artillery 489

ARTILLERY SUPPORTS:
Charged only with protection of artillery 605
Detailing of supports 602
Formation and location in action 604
Formation on march 603
Purpose 601

Asphyxiating gases 1194

Asphyxiation, first aid 1478

ASSEMBLE FROM:
Deployment
Battalion 326
Company 248
Squad 173
Distances 159
Intervals 157
Platoon or squad columns 254

Assembled skirmishers not while marching to rear 173

ASSEMBLY:
Arm signals 92
Call 693
Point indicated by company flag 95

AS SKIRMISHERS:
Action of squad leaders at preparatory command 237
Deployment squad 170
Deployment in oblique direction 245
Deployment to flank or rear 246
From a column of twos or files 244
From platoon or squad column 253
Guide right (left or center) (being in column of squads) 244
Guide right (left or center) (being in line) 243
Rules for deployment 236-247
To increase or decrease intervals 172

'As you were' 64

AT EASE:
Applicable to any marching formation 233
Extended order executed at ease 55 (b)
How executed 100
To march 233
With arms, executed as without arms 121 (fifth)

Athletic apparatus, company 880

ATTACK:
Advancing 467-471
Battalion in 342-356
Company in 249-294
Deployment for 463-466
Enveloping 461; 462
Feint 502
Fire attack 258-261; 414-438
Flank 459-462
Fortifications 495-498
Frontal 457; 462
General principles 456-502
Holding attack 499-502
Machine guns 555
Opening fire 417
Pursuit 490-494
Range 344; 426
The charge 478-489
Unit, the battalion 342

ATTENTION:
Command for 82
Drills at are disciplinary exercises 55 (a)
Forced at first word of command note of bugle or whistle 82
From parade rest 138
From rest and at ease resumed at order 121 (fifth)
From route step or at ease 233
Position of 99

At trail (command) 121 (sixth)

At will fire 190

Automatic alarms trenches 1192

Auxiliary aiming points 1431

Back Step (backward march) 115

Bacon can, care of 1308

Balance position of left hand 122 (first)

Ballistic qualities of rifle 1410

BAND:
In reviews 623; 624
Post of 71; 72; 299

Bandoleers ammunition in to be used first 573

Barricades 1185

Base company in advancing by rushes 348

Base, definition 25

Base squad in deployment 236-329; 243-245

BATTALION:
Adjutant, formation of battalion 307; 308
Advance close in on enemy as much as possible before
opening fire 344
Advance when part of firing line 343
Advance of firing line 346
Alignment rectifying 310; 311
Ammunition issue upon deployment 331
Arrangement of companies in battalion 297
Assembly from deployment 326
Attack principles 342-356
Attack unit, the 342
Base company in attack 329
Battalion a tactical unit 295
Battalion right (left) 318
Bayonets order to fix given by major 355; 361
Charge, the 356
Close on first (fourth) company 320
Close order drill 300-326
Column rectifying 312
Column of companies, first company squads right (left) 315
Column of squads first company, squads right (left) 316
Column of squads first (fourth) company, squads right
(left) (from close column) 323
Column of squads first (fourth) company forward (from
close line) 324
Column right (left) 317; 319
Combat principles 327-363
Command for guides repeated by captain 301
Commands repeated by captains 300
Consolidation to provide war strength organizations 55 (d)
Counter attack 363
Covering fire rushes made under 349
Defense 371
Defense opening fire 360
Deployment
Avoidance of premature 332
Companies and detachments taking their places 334
Depth of 334
Designation of base company 329
Designation of companies 298
Dismissing 309
Division of battalion into support and firing line 335
Dressing battalion 310; 311
Dressing companies, action of guides 302
Dressing companies, position of captains 302
Extend on first (fourth) company 321
File closers, post in route marches 325
Fire, delayed opening as long as possible 344
Fire fight, where and when to begin, indicated by major 341
Fire to be directed against hostile infantry 345
Firing line:
Advance 346
Companies to be kept closed in on center 354
Placing entire battalion or regiments into 339
Fix bayonets, ordered by major 355
Flanks, protection 330
Flank units to begin rush 348
Formations 307; 308
Front occupied by 334-339
Guides, action when companies are dressed 302
Guides, command for, repeated by captains 301
Hostile infantry target 345
Inspection 650-654
Intervals between battalions on firing line 465
Largest unit executing movement at command of the commander 88
Loading and firing 306
Mass formations 320
Major:
Apportions target 340
Duties and responsibilities 295
Gives orders to charge 356
Gives order to fix bayonet 355; 361
His order making disposition of battalion for combat 329
Indicates where or when fire fight begins 341
Locates trenches and obstacles 358
Post during attack 352
Post in route march 325
Reënforces firing line (See "Battalion Commander") 359
Movements executed as in school of the company 325
Movements executed as in school of soldier, squad and
company 303; 304
Movements explained for four companies 296
Musicians repeat signals to charge 356
Musicians repeat signal to fix bayonet 355
Muster 655-657
On right (left) into line 313
Opening fire on defense 360
Order of companies 297
Parade 636
Plate showing formations 300
Positions of captains in dressing companies 302
Post of band and other special units 299
Post of major during attack 352
Reconnaissance 330
Rectifying column 312
Reënforcing firing line, two methods 354
Reënforcements size 353
Repetition of command by captains 300
Review 631-633
Right (left) 318
Right (left) (center) dress 310; 311
Right front (left) into line (from column of squads
or companies) 314
Right front into line (from close column) 322
Rushes:
Advance made under covering fire 349
Begin by flank company 348
Prearranged methods prohibited 351
Subsequent to advancing 350
Rushing units, size 346; 347
School of 295
Simultaneous movements by companies or platoons 305
Size of reënforcements 353
Staff officers 579
Support:
Battalion acting alone in defense 362
None at beginning 339
Position 337
Size 336
To cover withdrawal 362
Tactical unit best suited for defense 357
Target, apportioned by major 340
Target, hostile infantry 345
Trenches located by major 358
Withdrawal covered by support 362

BATTALION COMMANDERS:
Duty regarding reconnaissance 412-413
Equipped with different tone of whistle 83
Responsibility regarding ammunition 570
Signal to rear when ready to charge 480
See "Major" under "Battalion"

Battalion drill 300-363

Battalion inspection 650-654

Battalion parade 636

Battalion staff officers, training in patrolling and
reconnaissance 579

BATTLE:
Integrity of squads in 151
Separated officers and others placing themselves under
order of nearest higher commander 390; 391

Battlefields, bugle signals used on 90

Battle order 392

Battle sight 26; 1352 (c)

BAYONET:
Charge in combat 356
Confidence in 485
Fixing 142
Habitually not fixed 121 (fourth)
Order to fix in combat given by major 355-361
Position at charge 144
Unfixing 143
When fixed in combat 355; 361; 590

Beaten zone 1413

Bite of dog 1480

Bite of snake 1480

Blank cartridges, use 273

Bleeding, first aid 1481

Books and records, company 887-909

Bombs and grenades 1197-1199

Bombs from air craft 1202

Bore of rifle, care 1322-1324; 1328; 1330

Bridges 1111-1125

BRIGADE:
Commander, action in deployment 440
Review 628; 629

Broken bones 1483

Bruises, first aid 1487

Brush work, field engineering 1117

Bugle calls, explanation 692-695

BUGLE SIGNALS:
Communication between firing line and rear 401
Those used on and off battlefields 90

Bunks, camping 1251

Burning clothes 1486

Burns, first aid 1485

By platoon (squad, etc.), from right (left) rush 259

"By the numbers" 122 (fifth)

By the right (left) flank, how executed 117

By the right (left) flank in forming skirmish line 237

CADENCE OF:
Manual of arms 122 (fourth)
Marching 108

CALLS:
Alarm 694
Formation 693
Service 695
Warning 692

CAMPS:
Camping on fordable stream 1237
Desirable sites 1231
Form and dimensions of camps 1233
Making camp 1234
Making tent poles and pegs fast in loose soil 1239
Parade ground 1236
Retreat in camp 1235
Sanitation. See "Camp Sanitation"
Selection of site 1230
Trees in camp 1240
Undesirable sites 1232
Windstorms 1238
See "Camp Sanitation"

CAMP SANITATION:
Avoiding old camp sites 1249
Bunks 1251
Camp expedients 1242
Canteen, care 1311
Changing camp site 1250
Definition 1241
Drainage 1248
Incinerators 1247
Kitchens 1245
Kitchen pits 1246
Latrines 1243
Rules of sanitation 1254
Urinal tubs 1244
Water 1253
Wood 1252
Your camp, your home 1255

CAPTAIN:
Directs the fire 285; 286
Duties, etc. 868; 871
Indicates point on which base squad marches in deployment 238
Leads depleted company as platoon 209
Leads company as whole in rushes 260
Position at alignment 218; 302
Post during firings 269; 306
Responsible for instruction 202

CARE OF:
Clothing 1277
Equipment 1276
Feet 1229
Rifle 1321
Shoes 1292

Cartridges not to be carried in piece 121 (first)

Cased colors, defined 659

Cat and mouse contest 1089

CAVALRY:
Infantry against 591-596
In pursuit 494
In withdrawal from action 546
Patrols 411

CEASE FIRING:
Bugle signal for 90
How executed 194
Krag rifle 705

Center company, defined 298

Center, definition 27

Center of impact 1412

CEREMONIES:
Battalion parade 636
Battalion review 631
Escorts of--
Funeral 640-645
Honor 639
The Color 637-639
Formation of battalion 308
General rules 614-616
Mounted enlisted men formed into detachment 76
Parades, general rules 634; 635
Post of dismounted noncommissioned staff officers 77
Reviews, general rules 617-630

Ceremonies and drills at attention teach precision, etc. 55 (a)

CHALLENGING ON:
Guard 1746
Outpost 1103

Chancroid 1466

Change elevation; signal for 92

CHANGE OF DIRECTION:
Battalion 317-319
Company 219; 223; 224
Partial 67
Squad 164; 165

Change step, how executed 119

CHARGE, THE:
Additional force for pursuit 483
Avoiding too dense a mass 481
Battalion commanders signal commanders of line when
ready to charge 480
Bayonet, confidence in ability to use 485
Charging without authority from rear 484
Counter attack, preparations to meet 487
Fire superiority, what it accomplishes 478
Line to be strengthened by prolongations 482
Not to be made without sufficient troops 481
Premature charges to be avoided 484
Psychological moment for charge determined by tactical
instinct 478
Pursuing fire 486
Pursuing troops 487
Pursuit, disordered units not to participate in 486
Reorganization of charging line 487
Reserves give impetus to charge 481
Steps to be taken in case of temporary set back 488
Steps to be taken if attack is abandoned 489
Strength of charging line 449
To be made simultaneously 480
To be made with approval of commander of attacking line 480
When and distance over which charge should be made 479
Without fire preparation 497

Charge bayonet 144

Charges, preferring 882

Cheerfulness, factor in training 930

Cheveaux de frise 1179; 1189

Chiggers 1488

Choking, first aid 1489

"Chop-chop" signal 863

Clap 1466

Classes of firing 278-280

Clearness in instruction 922

CLIP FIRE:
How executed 192
Krag rifle 704
Use 280

Clock system of target designation 1446; 1447

Clock system of wind designation 1391

Close on first (fourth) company 320

CLOSE ORDER:
Advantage of formation 539
Battalion 300; 326
Company 210
Double rank, habitual formation 70
Firings in 269
Necessity for 379

Close packs 648

Close range 275

Close ranks 648

Cloth equipment, care 1301

Clothing, care of 1277

Cohesion and order in combat 376

Cold, effect on shooting 1397

COLOR:
Escort of 637; 638
Manual of 670
Receiving 667-669
Regimental saluting 622
Saluting in reviews 618
With reserve in battle 665
See "The Color"

COLOR COMPANY:
Defined 663
Receiving the colors 668

COLOR GUARD:
Carrying of color 661
Composition 661
Escorting color to office or quarters of colonel 670
Formation and marching 662
In battle joins reserve 665
Loadings and firings 666
Manual of the color 670
Manual of arms 660
Movements executed 666
Post in various formations 664
Receiving the color 667-669
Remains with color company 663

Colors and standards 1575

Column, definition 28

Column half right (left) 67

Columns of companies to form successively to right or left 315

Column of squads, first (fourth) company forward (from
close line) 324

Column of squads, first (fourth) company, squads right (from
close column) 323

Column of squads, first company, squads right (left) 316

Column of squads, habitual column of route 233; 276

Column of subdivisions, full distance defined 69

Column, rectifying (battalion) 312

Column, right (left) (battalion) 317; 319

Column, right (company) 224

COMBAT EXERCISES:
Definition 55 (d)
Effective method of conducting 371
Explained 1408
To be conducted under assumed tactical situations 370
To be followed by brief drill at attention 55 (d)

Combat, modern, demands upon infantry 365

Combats offering no chance of valuable results to be avoided 374

Combat patrols to protect flanks of company acting alone 268

Combat practice 1404

COMBAT PRINCIPLES:
Battalion 327
Summary 550

Combat reconnaissance 403

Combat tactics, general 364

Combined sights 1430

Combined sketching 1892

Commander of the guard 1603

Commanding officer accountable for training 51

Commanding officer, guard duty 1591

COMMANDS:
Battalion and higher commanders repeat commands of
superiors 88
Battalion largest unit executing movement at command of
its commander 88
Definition 86
Facing troops and avoiding indifference when giving
commands 89
For guides, repeated by captains at battalion drill 301
How given 86; 89
Loading and firing 179
Of executions 87
Preparatory 57; 87
Repetition by:
Battalion and higher commanders 88
Captains at battalion drill 300
Leaders of subdivisions when necessary 83
Platoon leaders and platoon drill 214
Use in battalion combat 328
When used 80

Commander's post in fight 383

Commence firing, bugle signal for 90

Common tents 688; 690

Communication between firing line and reserve 96

Communicating trenches 1157

Communication, how maintained, etc. 398-402

Communication in fire control and direction 1447 (b)

COMPANY:
Abstract of clothing 905
Abstract record of memorandum receipts 901
Acting alone 267; 268
Arrangement in battalion formation 297; 614
Arrangement of men according to height 203
Athletic apparatus 880
Base 329-348
Books and records 887-909
Captain, duties etc. 868; 871
Center 298
Certain movements executed by company and platoons as
prescribed in school of the Soldier and the squad 208
Close order drill 210
Column right (being in column of squads) 224
Companies to be consolidated to provide war strength
organizations 55 (a)
Company attention, from route step or at ease 233
Company fund book 892
Company return 908
Company musicians carry company flags 402
Company right 219
Complete equipment carried into action 382
Completion of task, rejoining command after 390
Contentment and harmony 877
Correspondence book 893
Delinquency record 895
Depleted company led as platoon 209
Deployment as skirmishers 241; 243; 244
Deployment in oblique direction 245
Descriptive card of animals 898
Descriptive list 897
Designation in battalion formation 297
Devolution of work and responsibility 869
Division into platoons 204
Division into squads 205
Document file 894
Dressing 218
Drill 202
Duty roster 890
Establishing outpost 1080
Extended order drill 236
Files of orders 891
First Sergeant duties 873
First sergeant's report when company is formed 215
Flags 94; 95; 401
Formations in single rank 216
Formed in double rank 203
Forms of company punishment 883
Half right 67; 219
Inspection 646-649
Inspections, object of 88
Instruction. See "Training and instruction"
In support 262-266
Largest unit executing extended order 55 (b); 328
Library and amusement room 879
Lieutenants, duties, etc. 870; 871
Lieutenants taking post when company is formed 215
Memorandum receipts 900
Mess 878
Morning report 888
Muster 655-657
Noncommissioned officers 874
Noncommissioned officers confining enlisted men 875
Paperwork 887
Platoons, assignment 206
Platoons, designation 205
Property responsibility 886; 896
Protection against surprise 268
Punishment 882
Ration return 909
Record of rifles 902
Record of size of clothing 906
Reduction and resignation of noncommissioned officers 876
Retained copies of rolls, etc. 899
Rewards and privileges 881
Right 219
School of 210-294
Sick report 889
Squads designation 205
Statement of clothing charged to enlisted men 904
Summary Court records 903
Target records 907
To be kept closed in on center on firing line 354
To dismiss 217
To form 215-216
Training. See "Training and instruction"
Treatment of soldiers 872
Trials by court martial 882
Withholding privileges 884

Compass, points of 1084

Complaints to captain 1528

COMPLICATED MANEUVERS:
Impracticable 365
To be avoided 375

Compliments from guards 1782

Compliments not paid on marches 1227

Composition of infantry and other units 1858

Comradeship, factor in training 931

Concealment and dodging, training in 1087

Condiment can, care 1309

Cone of fire or dispersion 1411

Conical wall tent 689

Connecting Files at night 584

Consolidation of organizations to provide war strength 55 (d)

Contentment and harmony in company 877

Contentment, factor in training 931

Contours 1882; 1866

Cooking individual 1256

Contract 249; 403-413

Conventional signs 1874

Coöperation between frontal and enveloping attacks 462

Coöperation of subordinates 387

Corduroying 1116

Corporal is squad leader 150

Corporal of the Guard 1666

Correction of errors, staying of execution of movements for 63-64

Correspondence book 893

COUNTER ATTACK:
Battalion 363
General principles 525-530
Preparations 487

Countermining 1211

Countersigns and paroles 1769

Counting, indicating cadence 108

Counting off 153; 203

Courage 927

COVER:
Skirmishers take advantage of, on halting 240
Use 195-199; 420
Training in use of 939

Covering fire, rushes made under 349

Cover trenches 1155

Crawling, advance of firing line 261

Cup, care 1310

"Cut off" habitually turned off 218 (third)

Cuts, first aid, 1490

Courtesy. See "Military courtesy"

Daily sick report 889

Datum plane 1883

Decreasing intervals 247

DEFENSE:
Action when target disappears 294
Active defense 527
Battalion on 357
Counter attack:
Communicating and cover trenches head cover, etc.,
construction 505
Cover, utilization 504
Importance of counter-attack 527
Manner of making 529
Minor 530
Post of troops 528
Delaying action:
Important considerations 531
Purposes of support and reserve 532
Thin firing line to be used 532
Value of artillery 533
Deployment:
Advance posts and other dispersion to be avoided 520
Assignment of front to units 516
Battalions to be kept intact 518
Dead space to be covered by adjoining section or
machine guns 519
Density 509; 510
Division of positions into sections 517
Fire alone unable to stop attack; use of bayonet 522
Night attack, steps to be taken if expected 523
Position not to be fully occupied until infantry
attack begins 521
Reserve, detaching part of, to protect opposite flank 515
Reserve posts 513; 514
Sections, divisions of positions into 517
Size of units occupying sections 518
Short range fire and bayonet in night attack 524
Strength in rear to be increased when change from
defensive to offensive is contemplated 511
Supports, post and cover 512
Dummy trenches 506
Field works:
Construction 504
Location, extent, garrison, etc. 507
Machine guns 556; 566
Obstacles, construction 504
Opening fire 360; 418
Passive 525
Position and intrenchments 503-508
Requisites of defensive position 503
Trenches, outlining trace in combat exercises 508

Defilade 1420

Deflection 1384

Deflection and elevation connection drills 1383

Deliberate intrenchments 1147

Delinquency record 895

Delivery of messages 958; 1530

Density of firing line 446-453; 532

Deploy, definition 29

Deployed line, faces to front and takes advantage of
cover on halting 239

Deployed lines, alignment 239

Deployed troops, leading difficult 379

DEPLOYMENT:
Action of brigade and regimental commanders in deployment
of division 440
As skirmishes 65; 92; 170; 239-246
Battalion, depth of 334
Battalions furnish firing lines and support 455
Company, rules for 236
Companies and detachments taking their places 334
Dense, well directed and controlled fire gives fire
superiority 446
Density of charging line 449
Density of one man per yard 447
Density of whole deployment varies with size of command 451
Division of battle line into battle districts 452
Each commander to guard his command against surprise 442
Extent of front occupied by unit depends upon security
of flanks 453
For attack:
Distance for hostile position at which deployment is made 463
Each unit to deploy on its own direction line 463
Foreground to be cleared of hostile detachments before
deployment 463
Intervals between battalions 465
Moving well forward and deploying at night 464
Post of reserve 466
Reserve charged with flank protection 466
Formations of troops before and during 439
In defense. See "Deployment" under "Defense"
In oblique direction 245
Length of firing line employed by whole force 449
Mechanism taught by extended order 55 (b)
Occupation of only sections of long lines 447
Of squads when company is deployed 239
On wrong lines, avoided by reconnaissance 403
Orders for 392
Personal reconnaissance before deployment 441
Premature to be avoided 332; 443
Rectification of deployments in wrong direction 444
Reserves, how employed 455
Reserves furnished by units larger than battalion 441
Rules for 236-242
Side by side of regiments, battalions and companies 454
Strength of support and reserves 449; 450
Supports furnished by battalion 455
To flank or rear 246
Troops deployed vary from 1 to 10 men per yard 450
Use of thin firing lines 448
When made 463

Deportment, military 1523

Depth, definition 30

Descriptive card of animals 898

Descriptive list 897

DESIGNATION OF:
Companies in battalion formation 298
Squads and platoons 205

Designation of targets 1445-1147 a

Designation of winds 1391

Details and roster of guards 1585

Details to be left to subordinates 384; 385

Determination, factor in warfare 924

Deviation from orders 388

Devolution of work and responsibility 869

Diarrhoea 1491

Diminish intervals 172

Directions given subordinates through immediate superiors 397

DISCIPLINE:
Definition 910
General principles 916
Importance 912
Methods of attaining good discipline 911; 914
Punishment 915
Sound system 913

Disciplinary exercises--drills at attention and ceremonies 55 a

Discipline and training necessary 379

Discipline, fire 291; 430; 431

Dislocations, first aid 1492

DISMISSING:
Battalion 309
Company 217
Squad 147

Dismounted noncommissioned staff officers, posts 77; 78

Dismounting, before addressing dismounted superior 1558

Dismounting before saluting dismounted senior 75

DISTANCE:
Between firing line and support 338
Between front and rear rank 153
Between units in column of subdivisions 69
Definition 31
Plates showing distances:
Battalion near, 300
Company near, 207
Taken by file closers in "take distance" and
"take interval" 213

DISTANCE TAKING:
Action of guides 213
How executed 158

Distant range 275

Distance to target, determination of 276

Distribution of fire 1441-1444

Distribution of fire and target 282; 283; 427

Division of battalion into firing line and support 335

Document file 894

Dog's bite 1480

Do something 386

DOUBLE RANK:
Company to be formed in 203
Habitual close order formation 70
Kneeling and lying down in 178
Rear rank loading and firing 179

Double sleeping bag 686

DOUBLE TIME:
Adding preparatory command 109
Any movement executed in, unless excepted 60
Cadence 108
Command for 111
Command for precedes command of execution 60
Dropping hands by side upon halting 116
Half step, length 113
In successive movements, base unit marches in quick time 61
Position of disengaged hand 111; 121
To hasten movements begun in quick time 177
To the rear 118

Drainage, camping, 1248

Drainage of trenches 1167

Draw saber 671

Dress, appearance 1523

DRESSING:
Battalion 310; 311
Company 218
Companies, position of captain 218; 302
Deployed lines 240
Drill at attention after combat exercises 55 (d)
Squad (right or left) 154
Verify both ranks 154

DRILL:
Battalion 295-363
Company 202-294
Squad 148-202

Drills at attention and ceremonies designed to teach
precision, etc. 55 (a)

Drill regulations furnished as guide, providing principles
for training, etc. 53

Drill regulations, interpretation of 53

Drowning 1493

Drum major at battalion inspection 650

Dugouts, trenches 1156

Dummy trenches 1163

Duties of infantry, many and difficult 366

Duties of officers and noncommissioned officers in battle 389

Duty roster 890

Earache 1494

Ear, foreign body in 1495

Echelon definition 49

Effect of fire 1410

Effect of heat, light, etc. 1397-1403

Effectiveness of fire 1416

Effective range 275

Efficiency dependent upon thorough and uniform training 51

Elastic formations essential to correct battle training 52

Electric shock 1496

Element, definition 32

Elevation, change of 92

Encroachment upon functions of subordinates 396

Endurance, limit of, exacted 380

Enemy--imaginary outlined and represented 56; 370

Entrenching at night 1099

ENVELOPING ATTACK:
Advantages 459; 461
Resulting in local frontal attack 461
To be started at considerable distance from enemy 462

Envelopment of both flanks, when allowable 460

EQUIPMENT:
Carried into action 382
Display for inspection 682

EQUIPMENT, CARE OF:
Cloth equipment:
General instructions 1301
Intrenching tools 1312
Shelter tent 1303
Washing 1302
Clothing:
Grease spots 1285; 1289
Ink stains 1287
Leggins 1280
Paint spots 1290
Rust 1286
Stains 1284
Importance 1276
Leather equipment:
Cleaning 1316
Cleaning materials 1315
New equipment 1318
Oiling 1317; 1319
Points to be remembered 1320
Mess outfit:
Bacon can 1308
Canteen 1311
Condiment can 1309
Cup 1310
Fork 1305
Knife 1304
Meat can 1307
Spoon 1306
Rifle 1321
Shoes:
Care 1292
Polishing 1295; 1299; 1300
Repairing 1294
Selection 1293
Wet shoes 1297

Equipment. See "Care and preservation"

Errors staying execution of movement, for correction of 63; 64

ESCORTS OF:
Funeral 640-645
Honor 639
The Color 637; 638

Establishing outpost by company 1080

Estimate of situation 950

Estimating distance 1393-1395

Estimating distances, training in 201

Estimators of ranges 278

Exercises in fire control and direction 1450

EXTENDED ORDER:
Certain movements executed as in close order 241
Company 236-268
Company largest unit executing 55 (b)
Company largest unit to execute movements by prescribed
commands 328
Exercises to be in nature of combat exercise 370
Purpose 55 (b)
Squad 170
To be executed at ease 55 (b)

Extended on first (fourth) company 321

Eye, foreign body in 1497

Eyes left, when post of reviewing officer is on left of
column 626

EYES RIGHT:
How executed 103
Battalion review 631; 632

Eyesight in scouting 1083

Eyes, use of 200

Facings 104

Facing about to give commands, staff stands fast 74

Facing about, mounted officer turns to left 74

Facing troops when giving commands 89

Fainting, first aid 1498

"Fall in" 100; 153

"Fall in" executed at order 121 (fifth)

"Fall out" 100

"Fall out" executed as without arms 121 (fifth)

Falling in with hands on hips 70

Fascines 1117; 1118

Faster, command for increasing rate of fire 191

Fear 926

Feet, care of 1229

Feint attacks 502

Field efficiency of organization 51

FIELD ENGINEERING:
Bridges:
Double lock 1114
Roadway of spar 1115
Single lock 1113
Spar 1112
Brush work 1117
Corduroying 1116
Fascines 1117; 1118
Gabions 1121-1123
Hurdles 1119
Knots:
Bowline 1130
Clove hitch 1128
Eye splice 1135
Long splice 1134
Sheep shank 1132
Short splice 1133
Square or reef 1126
Timber hitch 1129
Two-half hitches 1127
Lashings 1136-1139
Revetments 1124; 1125

Field exercises, definition 55 (c); 56

FIELD FORTIFICATIONS:
Classification 1142
Communicating trenches 1157
Concealment of trenches 1162
Cover trenches 1155
Deliberate intrenchments 1147
Drainage 1167
Dugouts 1156
Dummy trenches 1163
Example of trench system 1160
Fire trenches 1148
Hasty intrenchments 1143
Head cover 1152
Illumination of foreground 1170
Kneeling trench 1145
Latrines 1169
Length of trench 1164
Location of trenches 1161
Lookouts 1158
Loopholes and notches 1153
Lying trench 1144
Notches and loopholes 1153
Object 1140
Overhead cover 1154
Parados 1151
Preparation of foreground 1165
Revetments 1166
Siege works 1172
Sortie steps 1150
Standing trench 1146
Supporting points 1159
Telephones 1171
Traverses 1149
Trench recesses 1150
Water supply 1168

Field officers, habitually mounted 73

File definition 33

FILE CLOSER:
Darting through column of squads 221
Execution of loadings and manual of arms 212
On the right (left) flank 211
Post in column of squads 221
Post in route marches 325
To correct mistakes 71

Files, advancing by 255

Files of orders, company 891

Fill magazine 702

Finding way in strange country 1084

Fine sight 1353 (b)

Finger system of target designation 1447 (a)

FIRE:
By volley 189; 278
Classes of 179; 194; 278-280
Clip 192; 280
Commands for 179; 189; 194
Delay opening as long as possible 344
In deployment controlled by platoon leaders 269
Long range, when effective 416
Observation of 428; 429
Opening in attack 344; 417
Opening in defense 417
Purpose and nature 414; 415
Rate of 191; 292
To be directed against hostile infantry 345

Fire action 269

FIRE ATTACK:
Fire superiority sought at first firing position and to
be maintained until charging point is reached 472
Futility of advancing without fire superiority 473
General principles 258; 472
Intrenching 475
Retiring under fire suicidal 475
Signs that fire superiority has been gained 474
Size of rushing units 472
Supports and reserves occupying trenches vacated by
firing line to improve same 476

FIRE AT WILL:
How executed 190
Use 279

Fire control, company 287-290

Fire direction, company 285; 286

FIRE CONTROL AND DIRECTION:
General considerations 416
Signals 431

Fire direction and control 1434-1440

Fire discipline 291; 430; 431

Fire discipline, definition 1406

Fire distribution 427; 1441-1444

Fire fight, where and when to begin, indicated by major 341

FIRE OF POSITION:
Use of machine guns 555
When used 438

FIRE SUPERIORITY:
Futility of advancing without 473
Purpose and nature 414
Signs that it has been gained 474
Sought at first firing position 472
To be maintained until charging point is reached 472
What it accomplishes 478

Fire trenches 1148

Fire unit, platoon 287

Firing at night 1101

Firing at stationary targets 1428

Firing by sentries at night 1104

Firing, classes of 278-280

FIRING LINE:
Advance 258-261; 346
Advance as far as possible before opening fire 467
Advanced elements not to open fire on main position 471
Companies to be kept closed in on center 354
Control by signals 55 (d)
Controlled by commander when whole line has been absorbed 383
Density 446-453
Furnished by battalion 455
Placing entire battalion or regiment into 339
Premature formation to be avoided 443
Reënforcement by major 359
To advance as far as possible before opening fire 467

Firing line and support, division of battalion 335

Firings in close order 269

Firings and loadings, see "Loadings and firings"

First aid packet 1521

First aid to sick and injured 1478

FIRST SERGEANT:
Accompanies captain when company is deployed 207
Assists in fire control in case of depleted company 209
Duties 873
Never assigned as guide 207
Post 207
Report when company is formed 215

Fish hook, first aid 1499

Fits, first aid 1500

Fix bayonets, how executed 142

Fix bayonet order, given by major 355

Fixed forms covering all cases impossible 369

FIXED PIVOT, TURN ON:
Company 219-221
Squad 165
When used 66

FLAG:
Company signal carried by company musicians (now buglers) 401
Defined 1575
Of general officers, post of 73; 618
Respect paid to 1574; 1575
Signals 94; 400; 401
Signaling to artillery 437
To outline enemy 371

Flag-stealing contest 1090

FLANK:
By the right, how executed 117
Definition 35; 54
Deployment as skirmishers 246
Movements executed towards either, explained toward but
one flank 58
Unit to begin rush 348

FLOURISHES AT:
Funeral 641
Review 624

Fly, disease carrier 1460

Folding tents 691

FOLLOW ME:
In forming skirmish line 237
In rushes 259
To follow corporal 169

Footmarks, following 1088

Forced marches 1225

Fork, care 1305

FORM:
Column of companies 315
Column of squads 316
For shelter tents 181

Formation calls 693

Formation definition 36

FORMATIONS FOR:
Advancing improvised 257
Support 262

FORMATION OF:
Battalion 307; 308
Company 215
Squad 153

Form lines 1884

Forms of speech 1526

Fortifications, attack 495-498

FORWARD MARCH:
From half step, halt and mark time 113
From halt 110
From oblique 163
Pieces brought to right shoulder from order, at
command 121 (sixth)

Fractures 1483

Fraise 1178

Freezing, first aid 1502

Front, definition 37

Front, extent of in deployment 446-453

FRONT OF:
Deployed battalion 334-337
Deployed squad 171

Frontal attacks, when they may be successful 457

FRONT INTO LINE:
Battalion 314
Company 231

Frost-bite, first aid 1503

Full distance, definition 69

Full sight 1353 (c)

Full step, length and cadence 108

Funeral escort 640-645

Gabions 1121-1123

Gallery practice 1385

Gangrene 1482

Gases, asphyxiating 1194

GENERAL COMMON SENSE PRINCIPLES OF APPLIED MINOR TACTICS:
Art of war, definition 943
Estimating the situation 950
Maneuvers 947; 949
Map problems 945; 949
Mission, defined 950
Noncommissioned officers, responsibilities in time of war 944
Orders, tactical, preparation 952
Terrain exercises 945; 949
War game 946; 949

General officers habitually mounted 73

General plan to be furthered by subordinates 386

GENERAL RULES FOR:
Ceremonies 614-616
Drills and formations 57-79
Parades 634; 635
Reviews 617-630

Gentle reverse slopes 1427

Germs 1452

Gonorrhoea 1466

Grazing fire 1423

Grease spots, how removed 1285; 1289

Grenades and bombs 1197-1199

Ground, use of 420; 421

GUARD DUTY:
Challenging 1746
Classification of guards 1584
Commander of the guard 1603
Commanding officer 1591
Compliments from guard 1782
Corporal of the guard 1666
Countersigns and paroles 1769
Details and roster 1585
Duty of sentinels 1578
General rules concerning guard duty 1792
Guarding prisoners 1797
Guard mounting:
Formal 1840
Informal 1847
Guard patrols 1778
Importance 1576
Musicians of the guard 1700
Officer of the day 1593
Orderlies and color sentinels 1702
Orders for sentinels 1716
Paroles and countersigns 1769
Privates of the guard 1715
Relieving old guard 1850
Respect for sentinels 1577
Reveille and retreat gun 1837
Sentinels of troops stable guard 1825
Sentinels' orders 1716
Sergeant of the guard 1642
Special orders for sentinels at post of guard 1759
Stable guards 1806
Troop stable guards 1808
Watchmen 1781

GUARD MOUNTING:
Formal 1840
Informal 1847

Guard patrols 1778

Guarding prisoners 1797

GUIDE:
Announcing before executing platoons right (left) 220
Definition 38
In deployment 236
In successive formations 65
Right (left) 155
What it is, unless otherwise announced 65
When given in connection with movement, follows command of
execution 65

GUIDES:
Alignment of battalion 311
Assignment to platoons 206
Battalion formed in line 308
Battalion marching in column of companies or platoons 325
Battalion parade 636
Close on first (fourth) company 320
Column of companies, first company, squads right 315
Column right (left) battalion 317
Dressing company when battalion is in line 302
Duties in battle 389
Duties in fire fight 289
Equipped with whistles 83
Execution of loading and manual of arms as file closers 212
First Sergeant never assigned as 207
Guide 65
Guide of leading subdivision charged with step and
direction in column of subdivisions 69
In successive formation guide is toward base 65
Manual of arms, execution by file closers 212
Partial changes of direction 67
Platoon guides 210
Platoon guides accompany leader when platoon is deployed 206
Positions shown in plates of company and battalion 166
Post in column of squads 211
Post of file closers in route marches 325
Rectifying column (battalion) 313
Repeating signals 83
Taking intervals and distances 213
Taking place in front rank at command about face 229
To change guides to opposite flank 211

Guide center designate left guide of center company 301

Guide right (left) command 155

Half step (command) 113

HALT:
Any movement executed from, unless otherwise prescribed 59
Firing executed at 179
From half step and mark time 113
How executed 116
Piece brought to the order 121 (seventh)

Halting, skirmishers face to the front and take advantage
of cover 240

Halts on marches 1222

HAND:
Disengaged, position at double time 111; 121 (Eighth)
Left, position at balance 122 (First)
On hip falling in with 70
Salute 106

Hand grenades 1198

Harmony and contentment in company 877

Hasty intrenchments 1143

Head, definition 39

Headache 1504

Head cover, trenches 1152

HEALTH, CARE OF:
Chancroid 1466
Clap 1466
Five ways of catching disease 1453
Fly, disease carrier 1460
Germs 1452
Gonorrhoea 1466
Importance 1451
Malaria fever 1469
Mosquito, carrier of disease 1469
Syphilis 1466
Vegetables, distributer of disease 1458
Venereal disease 1466
Water, distributer of disease 1457
Yellow fever 1469

Hearing at night 1095

Hearing in scouting 1083

Heat, effect on shooting 1397

Heat exhaustion 1505

Height, men to fall in according to 203

Heliographing 864

Helmets, steel 1205

Hits, percentage 1417

Holding attack 499-502

Horizontal clock face system of target designation 1446

Horizontal equivalents 1867

Hostile Infantry, target 345

Human element in training and instruction 925

Hurdles 1119

Hygiene. See "Personal hygiene"

Illumination of foreground of trenches 1170

Imaginary enemy, definition 56; 370

Improvised formations for advancing 257

Incinerators, camp 1247

"Incline to the right (left)" 67

INCREASING INTERVALS:
Company 247
Squad 172

INDIVIDUAL COOKING:
Fire, how to make 1257
Importance 1256
Recipes 1258-1275

Individual intelligence, factor in warfare 924

INFANTRY:
Against artillery:
Action against artillery limbering or coming into action 600
Action against guns out of ammunition 599
Flank attack 598
Frontal attack usually futile 597
Machine guns 597
Wheel horses best targets 600
Against Cavalry:
Cavalry charge against infantry usually futile 591
Infantry attacking dismounted cavalry 596
Measures to check charges from front and flanks 592
Meeting of cavalry charge by infantry in column 595
Rifle fire main dependence of infantry 594
Standing position, best to meet charge 593
Demands upon it by modern combat 365
Duties many and difficult 366
Good Infantry can defeat superior troops of poor quality 368
Modern war requires good infantry 366
Moving to attack, passing through deployed artillery 470
Requisites of good infantry 368
Trained to bear heaviest burdens 368

Infantry Drill Regulations 24

Influence of ground 1420

Initial combat order 394

Initiative in warfare 923

Initiative of subordinates not to be hampered 384; 385; 386

Ink stains, how removed 1287

"In place halt" 63

INSPECTION:
Band 650; 653
Battalion 650; 654
Company 646-649
Display of equipment 682
Equipment 648
Of pieces when troop are formed and when dismissed 121 (Second)
Pistol 646
Prepare for 646; 649-651; 653
Quarters 647; 654
Saber 646; 680
Seniority at 630; 650

Inspection and port arms when dismissing squad 147

Inspection arms from order 145

Inspection arms, Krag rifle 698

Inspections, object of 885

INSTRUCTION:
Captain's responsibility for 202
Commanding officers accountable for 51
In use of signals 81
Of battalion, major responsible for 295
Of recruits 97-98 (a); 120
Without arms 98 (a)

Instruction given subordinates through immediate superiors 397

Instruction. See "Training and instruction"

Integrity of squads in battle 151

Intelligence, factor in warfare 924

Interest in training and instruction 922

Intermingling of units in firing line 389

Interpretations of Drill Regulations, spirit to govern 53

INTERVAL:
Action of guides in taking 213
Battalion in deployment 454; 465
Between companies in deployment 354; 447
Between files obtained by placing hands on hip 70
Between platoon columns 252
Between regiments in deployment 454
Between skirmishers 171
Definition 40
Increasing or decreasing between skirmishers 172; 247
Of file closers in column of squads 221
Plates showing intervals:
Battalion near, 300
Company near, 207
To take 156

Intrenching tools, care 1312

INTRENCHMENTS:
Construction in action 475
Order of importance of operations in construction 606
Intrenchments. See "Field Fortifications"

Introduction 50-79; 364-371

Inundations, trenches 1186

Invisibility best protection while advancing 468

"Jab," bayonet 824 (d)

Kitchen pits, camping 1246

Kitchens, camp 1245

KNEEL:
From lying down 177
From standing 174
Position of piece 185
To aim 189
Use of position 178

Kneeling trench 1145

Knife, care of 1304

Knots 1126-1135

Knowledge of subordinates 378

Krag rifle (Infantry Drill Regulations) 696

Landmarks, observing 1086

Largest unit executing extended order 55 (b); 328

Lashings 1136

Latitude allowed subordinates 384; 385

Latrines, camping 1243

Latrines in trenches 1169

LEADERSHIP:
General consideration 372-384
Necessary to success in battle 365

LEADING:
Company 209; 260
Platoon 250; 251; 259
Rush 260
Squad 150; 169; 237; 259; 289

LEATHER EQUIPMENT:
Cleaning 1316
Cleaning materials 1315
Oiling 1317; 1319

Left arm, position when piece is "diagonally across
the body" 122 (Second)

Left, definition 41

Left foot, stepping off with 107

Left hand, position at balance 122 (First)

LEFT SHOULDER FROM:
Order 136
Port 136
Present 136
Right shoulder 136

Leggins, how cleaned 1280

Length of steps 107-115

Library, company 879

LIEUTENANTS:
Assisting captain in fire control of depleted company 209
Assignment of platoons to 206
Duties, etc., 870; 871
Fire control 270; 287-289
Intermingling of units in firing line 389
Leading in charges 356
Posts of 71
Rushes by platoons 259; 293
Suspending fire when target disappears 294
Taking post when company is formed 215
Training 369

LIEUTENANT COLONEL:
Salute in ceremonies 615

Light, effect on shooting 1399

Lightning, struck by 1507

Line, definition 42

Line of platoons, companies, etc., definition 68

Line of skirmishers 169-172; 236-247

Lines of information 398-402

Liquid fire 1196

Listening posts, trenches 1191

Litters, improvised 1522

Loaded pieces not to be carried 121 (First)

Loading pieces before deployment 269

Loading, with Krag rifle 701

LOADINGS AND FIRINGS:
Aiming point:
Announced before or after range 181
Once designated, not changed unless ordered 182
By battalion 306
Cease firing 194
Clip fire 192
Color guard does not execute 666
Commands 179; 185-194
Continuing the fire (command) 189
Execution by file closers 212
Fire at will 190
Fire faster (slower) 191
Firing:
Executed in line and skirmish line only 179
Instruction in, preceded by command to load 179
Rear rank kneeling or lying down 179
Firings executed at halt 179
Instruction in firing to be preceded by command for loading 179
Load:
Command 185
Position of, when taken 183
Rear rank, kneeling or lying down 179
Target:
Announced before or after range 181
Once designated, not changed unless ordered 182
Loadings executed in line and skirmish line only 179
Long whistle blast 193
Pieces once loaded, so kept until command to unload 180
Position of load, when taken 183
Range and command announcing 188
Sight setting, aiming point announced before or after 181
Simulate load (command) 186
Single loader, use of piece as 186
Sling, use when deployed 184
Suspend firing 193; 194

Local successes necessary to general success 367

Location of trenches 1426

Lock pieces 700

Long blast of whistle 193; 271

Long range 275

Long-range fire 1414

Long-range fire, when effective 416

Lookouts in trenches 1158

Loopholes and notches 1153

Loose pieces 161

Lost, what to do 1085

Lying down 175; 185; 189

Lying down position, use 178

Lying trench 1144

MACHINE GUNS:
Concealment 564
Covering dead spaces on defensive 519
Covering withdrawal 546; 557
Effectiveness against skirmish line 559
Fire of position 438; 555
In attack 555
In defense 555
In infantry attack against artillery 597
In meeting engagements 553
Lessons of European war 561-568
Location on defense 566
Methods of transportation 563
Not to form part of firing line of attack 558
Silencing of machine guns by infantry 560
To be used for short periods 552
Use in villages 565
Weapons of emergency 551
With advance guard 553
With rear guard 554
With reserve 557

MACHINE GUN COMPANY:
Post in formations 71; 72
Post when attached to battalion 299

MAJOR:
Apportions target 340
Controls support 263
Duties and responsibilities as battalion commander 295
Duty regarding protection of flanks 412; 413
Gives order to charge 356
Gives order to fix bayonets 355
Indicates where or when fire fight begins 341
Locates trenches and obstacles 358
Order making disposition of battalion for combat 329
Orders bayonets fixed on defense 361
Post during attack 352
Post in route march 325
Reënforces firing line 359
Responsibility regarding ammunition 570
See "Battalion commander"

Malarial fever 1469

Maneuvers 947; 949

Maneuvers effective method of conducting 371

MANUAL OF:
Arms:
"By the numbers" 122 (Fifth)
Cadence 122 (Fourth)
Carrying rifle in any position 122 (Sixth)
Executed by color guard 666
General principles and the manual 120-147
Regular positions assume without regard to
previous ones 122 (Sixth)
"Without the numbers" 122 (Fifth)
Bugle 692-695
Color 658-670
Saber 671-680
Tent pitching 681-691
The color 670

MANUAL OF BAYONET:
Bayonet combat 760
Combined movements 802
Fencing at will 807
Fencing exercises 772
General remarks 711
Guard 725
Hints for instructors 823
Instruction with rifle 734
Instruction without bayonet 755
Instruction without rifle 723
Jab 824 (d)
Lessons of European war 824
Nomenclature 721
Short point 824 (d)

Map, definition 1859

Map distances 1867

Map problems 945; 949

Map problems, instruction in 954

MAP READING:
Contours 1866
Conventional signs 1874
Definition of map 1859
Determination of positions of points on map 1871
Horizontal equivalents 1867
Map distances 1867
Meaning of map reading 1860
Meridians 1870
North star 1873
Orientation 1872
Problems in scales 1864
Scale of map distances 1867 (a)
Scales 1861-1863
Scaling distances from map 1865
Slopes 1868
True meridian 1873
Visibility problem 1875

Map sketching. See "Military map sketching"

MARCH:
At funeral 641
Played as honor 624

MARCHES:
A successful march 1215
At night 1102
Care of feet and fitting of shoes 1229
Compliments not paid on marches 1227
Conduct on march 1220
Crossing bridges and fords 1223
Elongation of column 1224
Fitting shoes and care of feet 1229
Forced matches 1225
Halts 1222
Hardening new troops 1213
Long march not to be made with new troops 1214
Marching capacity 1221
Marching, principal occupation of troops in campaign 1212
Night marches 1226
No compliments paid on 1564
Physical training 1213
Preparation for march 1216-1218
Protection on march 1228
Rate of march 1220
Starting on march 1219
Straggling 1224

Marching, any movement executed when, unless otherwise
prescribed 59

Marching to rear, skirmishes, not assembled 173

Marchings and steps 107-119

MARK TIME:
Executed from half step, halt and mark time 113
How executed 112
While obliquing 163

Masks, protection against gases 1206

Mass formation, battalion 320

Meat can, care 1307

Mechanism of deployment taught by extended order 55 (b)

Meeting engagements:
Action of advance guard prior to receipt of order 543
Action of column 542
Action of the leading troops 541
Advantage accrues to side deploying the faster 539
Afford ideal opportunity to certain commanders 537
Boldness and determination of commander 536
Characteristics of 534
First troops deploying have advantage 539
Function of advance guard 542
General action 535
Machine guns, use 552
Main body not to be put into action piece meal 544
Meagerness of information 536
Mission determines method of attack 538
Post of commander 542

Memorandum receipts, company 900

Meridians 1870

Mess, company 878

Mess outfit care 1304

Messages, delivery 1530

Messages, instruction in delivering 958

Metal fouling, removing from bore 1327

Method in training and instruction 918

Military appearance and deportment 1523

MILITARY COURTESY:
Colors and standards 1575
Headdress not raised in saluting 1569
National anthem 1572
National anthems of other nations 1573
Nature and origin of salutes 1533; 1534
Prisoners do not salute 1567
Soldier walking with officer 1566
Unmilitary salutes 1568
Usual mistakes in saluting 1571
When and how to salute:
At meals 1543
At work 1547
Bringing command to present before commander salutes 1563
Commanders of detachments or other commands 1561
Dismounting before addressing, superior not mounted 1558
General rule 1539
How to salute in uniform 1551
Indoors 1545
In public places and conveyances 1560
Man addressed in formation 1559
No compliments paid at drill, on march, etc. 1564
No saluting at double time, trot or gallop 1565
Officer approaching number of soldiers in open 1546
Officer entering room occupied by soldiers 1542
Officer passing in rear of troops 1562
Passing officer on staircase 1549
Riding in wagon 1548
Rifle salute 1552
Saber salute 1553
Saluting distance 1541
Saluting in civilian dress 1555
Saluting in military manner 1556
Sentinels on post 1554
Several officers together 1557
Soldier addressing or being addressed by officer 1550
When making and receiving reports 1540
When seated 1544
Whom to salute:
Army officers 1535
Foreign, naval and military attaches 1538
Navy, Marine Corps, Volunteer and National Guard
officers 1536
Reserve Corps officers 1537

MILITARY MAP SKETCHING:
Combined sketching 1892
Contours 1882
Datum plane 1883
Different methods of sketching 1878
Form lines 1884
Kinds of military sketches 1878
Location of points by intersection 1879
Location of points by resection 1880
Location of points by traversing 1881
Outpost sketching 1890
Points for beginners to remember 1893
Position sketching 1889
Road sketching 1891
Scales 1885; 1888

Military organization 1858

Military pits 1184

Military training object of 50

Mine warfare. See, "Trench and mine warfare"

MINOR WARFARE:
Camp or bivouac protection 612
Dividing marching column into two or more detachments 611
Formations in close country 610
Formation in open country 609
Irregular operations 607
March and bivouac formations to admit of rapid action in
any direction 608
Night operations frequently advisable 613
Regular operations 606
Selection of site for camp or bivouac 612
What it embraces 606

Mirage 1400

Mission, defined 950

Mistakes, staying execution of movement for correction of 63; 64

Modern combat, demands upon infantry 365

Modern war requires good infantry 366

Moisture, effect on shooting 1398

Morning report 888

Morse code 866

Mosquito, carrier of disease 1469

Mounted enlisted men formed into a detachment for ceremonies 76

Mounted officer in making about face, turns to left 74

MOUNTED SCOUTS:
Battalion staff officers, training in patrolling and
reconnaissance 579
Dismounted patrolling 578
How used 576
Post when attached to battalion 299
To be trained in patrolling and reconnaissance 576
Use for reconnoitering 577; 578

Mouse and cat contest 1089

Movement, any executed in double time unless excepted 60

MOVEMENTS:
Begun in quick time, hastened by command, "Double time" 62
Executed toward either flank, explained toward but one
flank 58
General rules 57; 63
May be executed from halt or when marching 59

MOVING PIVOT, TURNING ON:
Company 222; 227
Squad 164
When used 66

Moving targets, firing at 1432

MUSICIANS: (now buglers)
Duties during firing 272
Equipped with whistles and repeating signals 83
Join their companies at battalion inspection 650
Post 207
To carry signal flags 94; 401
To repeat signal to fix bayonet and charge 355; 356

Musicians (now buglers) of the Guard 1700

Muster 655-657

NATIONAL AIR:
At funeral 641
Playing as honor at review 624

National Anthem 1572

National color does not salute 660

Next to last motion in resuming order from any
position 122 (Third)

Night firing 1433

Night marches 1226

NIGHT OPERATIONS:
Advance and rear guards 584
Approaching charging point under cover of darkness 496
Attack, time of making 588
Bayonet use 583; 586; 589
Challenging 1103
Connections 1107
Defense, measures taken to resist night attacks 590
Deployment at night 464
Equipment 1100
Finding bearings 1096
Fire action to be avoided 583
Fire not effective beyond 50 yards 590
Formations 581; 586; 589
Hearing 1095
Importance 1091
Individual training 1093
Marches 1102
Marking route outguards to supports 1105
Moving in dark 1097
Night advance followed by attack by day 585
Night entrenching 1099
Night fencing 1098
Night firing 1101
Night matches 584
Outposts 1103
Practice in offensive and defensive operations 581
Preparation 1108
Purposes 580
Readiness for action 1106
Reconnaissance 587
Secrecy 583
Sentries firing 1104
Surprise 587
Trained troops necessary 586
Training of company 1092
Unfriendly guides 583
Vision 1094
White rag, tying around muzzle of rifle 590

Nomenclature of rifle 1342

Noncommissioned officer commanding platoon or company
carrying of piece and taking of post 79

Noncommissioned officers, post of 71

Noncommissioned officers to be obeyed and respected 1525

Noncommissioned officers, company, duties 874

Noncommissioned officers confining men 875

Noncommissioned officers; instructions in map problems 954

Noncommissioned officers; reduction and resignation 876

Noncommissioned officers; responsibilities in time of war 944

"Normal" forms covering all cases impossible 369

Normal sight 1353 (a)

North star 1873

Nose, foreign body in 1507

Notches and loopholes 1153

Number of troops to be deployed in beginning 445

"Numbers, by the" 122 (fifth)

Obedience 1524

Object of military training 150

OBJECTIVE--
Announced before or after range 181
Once designated not changed unless ordered 182

Oblique deployment as skirmishers 245

Oblique march 162-163

Observation 200-201

Observation of target and fire 428-429

OBSTACLES:
Abatis 1176
Against cavalry 1180
Automatic alarms 1192
Barricades 1185
Cheveaux de frise 1179; 1189
Fraise 1178
Guarding obstacles 1190
In front of outguards 1187
Inundations 1186
Kinds 1176
Lessons from European War 1188
Listening posts 1191
Location 1175
Military pits 1184
Necessity for 1174
Object 1173
Palisade 1177
Search lights 1193
Trous de loup 1184
Wire entanglements 1181; 1182; 1188
Wire fence 1183

Obstacles located by Major 358

Occupation of ground 1426

Offensive necessary for decisive results 367

Office, how to enter 1527

Officer of the Day 1593

OFFICERS:
Posts of 71
To be true leaders 377
To comply with spirit of orders 377

Oil, use on rifle 1330; 1339

ON RIGHT (LEFT) INTO LINE:
Battalion 313
Company 230

Open packs 648

Open ranks 646

Open sight 1352 (a)

Opening fire on defense 360

ORDER:
Assumed in resuming attention from rest or at ease 121 (fifth)
Piece brought to, upon halting 121 (seventh)
Piece striking ground gently 122 (third)
Position in next to last motion 122 (third)
Position of piece at 123

Order and cohesion in combat 376

Order, close, definition 43

Order, extended, definition 44

ORDER FROM:
Inspection 146
Left shoulder 136
Port 128
Present 128
Right shoulder 130
Trail 140

ORDERLIES:
Carrying signal flags 400
Do not change position when commander faces about to give
command 74
Posts of 73; 78

ORDERS:
Battle 392
Brigade and division, usually written 392
Compliance with spirit of 377
Composition of combat order 395
Definition 85
Deployment 392
Deviation from 388
Encroaching upon functions of subordinates, prohibited 396
Given subordinates through immediate superiors 397
Reconnaissance to precede issuing of initial combat orders 394
Regiment, usually verbal 393
Repetition of 83
To be definite 396
Use in battalion combat 328
Verbal 393
When used 80; 85

Orders, files of, company 891

Orders for sentinels 1716

Orders, tactical preparation 952

Organization, military 1858

Orientation 1872

Outlined enemy 56; 273; 370; 371

Outpost, establishing by company 1080

Outpost sketching 1890

Outposts at night 1103

Overhead cover, trenches 1154

Pace, definition 45

PACK:
Close 648
Display of contents for inspection 682
Laid aside in action 382
Open 648

Packs, unslinging, old equipment 706

Paint spots, how removed 1290

Palisade 1177

Paperwork, company 887

PARADE REST:
With arms 137
Without arms 101

PARADES:
Battalion 636
General rules 634; 635
Post of color guard 663; 664

Parados 1151

Paroles and countersigns 1769

Partial changes of direction, commander of 67

Patrolling. See, "Scouting and patrolling"

Payment of soldier 1529

Peep sight 1352 (b)

Percentage of hits 1417

Periscopes 1207

Personal hygiene 1470

PERSONAL RECONNAISSANCE:
Deployment 441
Formation of plan 394

PHYSICAL TRAINING:
Commands 826
Double timing 846
Methods 825
Rifle exercises 847
Setting up exercises 826; 837
Starting positions 834
Walking and marching 845

PIECE:
Carrying in any position 122 (Sixth)
"Diagonally across the body" 122 (Second)
Loading before deployment 269
Not to be carried loaded 121 (First)
Once loaded, so kept until command to unload 180
Rules governing carrying 121
To strike ground gently in coming to order 122 (Third)
Use as single loader 186

Pitching tents 684

PLAN:
Of battle preceded by personal reconnaissance 394
Of combat, adherence to original 373

PLATES:
Battalion near, 300
Company near, 207
Equipment near, 646

PLATOON COLUMN:
Assembly from 254
Deployment 253
How executed 250
Use in advancing 249-252

PLATOON DRILL:
Assembling from deployment 248
Column right (left) (company being in column of platoon) 223
Extended order 242
On right into line (being in column of platoons) 230
Platoons column right (left) (company being in column of
squad) 225
Platoon light (left) 220
Platoons right (left) by squads (being in line) 227
Platoons right (left) front into line 232
Squads right about (being in line of platoons) 228
Squads right (left), platoons column right (left) (being
in line) 227

PLATOON GUIDES:
Close order drill 210
Duties in fire fight 289

PLATOON LEADER:
Allotment of target to 282
Control the fire in deployment 270
Duties on fire fight 288; 289
Equipped with whistles 83
Of flank platoons when company acts alone 268
Positions in verifying alignments 218
Repeating commands 214

Platoon, the fire unit of 287

PLATOONS:
Advance into an engagement 249
Assignment 206
Designation 205
Division of company into 204

Point of aim 1357

Point of rest, definition 46

Point on which base squad marches in deployment 238

Points of compass 1084

Poison, first aid 1508

PORT ARMS FROM:
Inspection 146
Left shoulder 136
Order 125
Present 126
Right shoulder 132
Position and aiming drills 1365

POSITION FIRE:
Advance by rushes 293
When used 438

POSITION OF:
Captain in dressing company 302
Load, when taken 183
Piece at order 123
Piece "diagonally across the body" 122 (Second)
The soldier 99
Position sketching 1889

POST OF:
Band 71; 299
Commander in fight 383
Color 637; 638; 650; 664; 665
File closers in column of squads 221
Major during attack 352
Major in route order 325
Mounted enlisted men 73; 76; 78
Noncommissioned officer in command of troops 79
Noncommissioned staff officers 77; 78
Officers, noncommissioned officers and special units
(band and machine gun company) shown in plates 71; 72
Reviewing officer 617
Special units 71; 72; 299
Staff officers 73

Powder fouling, removing from bore 1327

Practical instruction, purpose 369

Precision taught by drill at attention 55 (a)

Preliminary drills 1355

PREPARATORY COMMAND:
Arrangements of elements 57
To revoke 64
What it indicates 87

PRESENT ARMS FROM:
Left shoulder 136
Order 124
Port 127
Right shoulder 133

Present saber 673

Principles of combat, extent to which treated in Part I 54

Prisoners do not salute 1567

Privates of the Guard 1715

Privileges, awarding 881

Privileges, withholding 884

Program of training 919

Progression in training and instruction 917

Property, responsibility, company 886; 896

PROTECTION:
By reconnaissance 410; 412
When battalion is acting alone 330
When company is acting alone 268

Protection against surprise when company is acting alone 268

PUNISHMENT:
Awarding 915
Company 882; 883

PURSUIT:
Additional force for 483
General principles 490; 494
Pursuing fire 486
Troops used for 487

Quartermaster sergeant (now supply sergeant) assignment
at drill 207

Quibbling, avoiding, in interpreting drill regulations 53

QUICK TIME:
Cadence 108
From double time 111
Movements habitually executed in 109

RANGE:
Classification 275-277
Command announcing 188
Determining of 276; 277; 426
Finders 277
Importance of correct sight setting 425
In attack 344; 426
In defense 426
Signal for announcing 92

Range, how determined 1429

Range practice 1386

Ranging volleys 278

Rank, definition 47

Rapid fire exercises 1372

RATE OF:
Fire 191; 292; 415; 1419
Quick and double time 108

Ration return 909

Ready 189

Reality in training 922

Rear guard, use of machines guns as part of 554

Rear marching, skirmishers, not assembled 173

Rear rank not loading nor firing kneeling or lying down 179

Rear sight, description 1343

Rear, to the, how to execute 118

RECONNAISSANCE:
Battalion acting alone 330
Combat 403-413
Company acting alone 268
Company advancing into an engagement 249
Each commander to guard against surprise 442
Meeting engagement 534; 538
Minor warfare 608
Night operations 587
Personal before deployment 441
To precede formation of plan 394

Record of rifles 902

Record of size of clothing 906

Records, company 887-909

Recruits, instruction 97-98; 120; 152-156

Rectifying column, (battalion) 312

Red bugs 1488

Reduction and resignation of noncommissioned officers 876

Reënforcement of firing line by major 359

Reënforcements, size 353

Reënforcing firing line 263-366; 354

REGIMENT:
Interval in deployment 454
Lines of communication established by 400
Muster 655-657

REGIMENTAL COLOR:
Salutes by 660
Saluting reviewing officer 622

REGIMENTAL COMMANDER:
Action in deployment of division 440
Decide equipment carried into action 382

Rejoining command after completion of task 390

REPETITION OF:
Command for guides, by captains at battalion drill 301
Commands by captains at battalion drill 300
Orders, commands and signals 83; 88

Report, first sergeant's when company is formed 215

Reports, saluting when making or receiving 75

Represented enemy, definition 56

Requisites of good scout 1031

RESERVE:
Captured position strengthened by reserves 492
Commander of troops in action habitually with reserve 383
Covering withdrawal of attacking troops 489
Deployment to enable withdrawal of faulty firing line 444
Enveloping attack 461; 462
Fire of position in decisive action 438
Furnished by units larger than battalion 455
Gives impetus to charge 481
How used 455
In attack charged with flank protection 466
In withdrawal from action 547
Machine guns as part of 557
Occupying trenches vacated by firing line to improve same 476
Of firing line, strength 449; 450
Part played by, in pursuit 491
Post and strength in holding attack 500
Post of, in attack 466
Post of, in defense 513
Post of, in delaying action 532
Reduction of reserve in case of protected flanks 452
Regimental:
Ammunition sent from 574
Use of, in case of victory 383

Respect, factor in training 929

Respect for sentinels 1577

Respect to noncommissioned officers 1525

Responsibility, devolution of 869

Responsibility for proper training 921

Rest, executed as without arms 121 (Fifth)

Rests, the 100; 101; 121

"1. Resume 2. March" 63

Retained copies of rolls, etc., company 899

Retiring under fire 475

Return saber 679

Reveille and retreat gun 1837

Reverse slopes 1427

Revetments 1124; 1125; 1166

REVIEWS:
Band 623; 624
Battalion 631-633
Battalions, after passing reviewing officer 628
Brigades, or larger commands 628; 629
Cadence at which troops pass in review 627
Commander faces command 614
Flank to pass 12 paces from reviewing officer 617
Flourishes 624
Formation of companies, battalions and regiments 616
General rules 617-630
March, played as honor 624
National air, playing as honor 624
Order in which troops are arranged 614
Passing around line 618; 631
Points where column changes direction 617
Post of reviewing officer on left of column 626
Post of reviewing officer and others 617
Reviewing officer returns only salute of commanding officer 618
Reviewing officer, post 617
Reviewing officer junior to commanding officer 630
Riding around troops 618
Ruffles 524
Salute by regimental color 622
Salute returned by reviewing officer 618
Salute by lieutenant colonel 615
Saluting by staff 615; 619
Saluting the color 618
Standing "at ease" etc., in case of brigade or larger
command 629
Subordinates face to front 614
To the color 624
Turning out of column by commanding officer of troops 620; 621

Revoking preparatory command 64

Rewards and privileges, company 881

Ricochet shots 1425

RIFLE, care and description:
Army regulations 1341
Bore 1322-1324; 1328
Description 1342
Importance 1321
Kinds of fouling 1325
Oil, how to apply 1339
Oiling barrel 1330
Rear-sight leaf 1343
Removing metal fouling 1327
Removing powder fouling. See "Piece" 1326

Rifle exercises 847

RIFLE SALUTE AT:
Order or trail 141
Right shoulder 140

RIFLE TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION:
Adjustment of fire 1428
Aiming exercise 1368
Aiming point 1357
Aiming and sighting 1350
Appearance of objects 1396
Auxiliary aiming points 1431
Ballistic qualities of rifle 1410
Battle sight 1352 (c)
Beaten zone 1413
Center of impact 1412
Clock system of target designation 1446; 1447
Clock system of wind designation 1391
Cold, effect on shooting 1397
Collective instruction 1404
Combat exercises 1408
Combat practice 1404
Combined sights 1430
Communication in fire control and direction 1447 (b)
Cone of fire or dispersion 1411
Defilade 1420
Deflection 1384
Deflection and elevation correction drills 1383
Designation of targets 1445-1447 (a)
Designation of winds 1391
Distribution of fire 1441-1444
Effect of fire 1410
Effect of heat, light, etc. 1397; 1403
Effectiveness of fire 1416
Estimating distance 1393-1395
Exercises in fire control and direction 1450
Finger system of target designation 1447 (a)
Fine sight 1353 (b)
Fire direction and control 1434-1440
Fire discipline, definition 1406
Fire distribution 1441-1444
Firing at stationary targets 1428
Full sight 1353 (c)
Gallery practice 1385
Gentle reverse slopes 1427
Grazing fire 1423
Heat, effect on shooting 1397
Hits, percentage 1417
Horizontal clock face system of target designation 1446
Individual instruction 1349
Influence of ground 1420
Light, effect on shooting 1399
Location of trenches 1426
Long range fire 1414
Mirage 1400
Moisture, effect on shooting 1398
Moving targets, firing at 1432
Night firing 1433
Normal sight 1353 (a)
Object of system 1344
Occupation of ground 1426
Open sight 1352 (a)
Peep sight 1352 (b)
Percentage of hits 1417
Point of aim 1357
Position and aiming drills 1365
Preliminary drills 1355
Program of instruction 1348
Range, how determined 1429
Range practice 1386
Rapid fire exercise 1372
Rate of fire 1419
Reverse slopes 1427
Ricochet shots 1425
Sighting and aiming 1350
Shot group 1412
Sighting drills 1356; 1383
Sights, kinds of 1352
Sling, use 1387
Slopes gentle reverse 1427
Stationary targets firing at 1428
Target designation 1445-1447 (a)
Targets, number hit 1418
Technical principles of firing 1409
Trajectory 1349
Trial shots, determination of range 1395
Triangle of sighting 1359
Trigger squeeze exercise 1370
Vertical clock face system of target designation 1447
Volleys, determination of range 1395
Windage 1384
Zero of rifle 1392
Zone of effective fire 1415

Right (left) about, squad 167

RIGHT (LEFT) BY:
File 235
Squads 226
Two's 234; 235

Right, definition 48

Right (left, center) dress 154; 310; 311

Right face 104

RIGHT (LEFT) FRONT INTO LINE FROM:
Close column 322
Column of platoons or squads (company) 231
Column of squads or companies 314
Column of two's 235

Right half face 104

RIGHT (LEFT) HALF TURN:
Command 67
Squad 164

Right (left) oblique 163

RIGHT SHOULDER FROM:
Inspection 146
Left shoulder 136
Order 129
Port 131
Present 134
Right shoulder, pieces brought to, from order at
command "March" 121 (Sixth)

Right (left) step, how executed 114

RIGHT (LEFT) TURN:
Company 222
Squad 164

Rise, how executed 176

Road sketching 1891

Route march, post of major and file closers 325

Route step 233

RUFFLES AT:
Funeral 641
Review 624

RULES FOR:
Carrying piece 121 (First)
Ceremonies 614-616
Close order (battalion) 300-306
Close order, company 210-214
Deployment 236-242
Drills and formations 57-79
Execution of manual 122
Parades 634; 635
Reviews 617-630
Salutes 75
Steps and marchings 107-119

RUSHES:
Advances made under covering fire 349
Begun by flank company 348
Command for 259
Company as whole led by captain 260
Prearranged methods prohibited 351
Size of rushing units 346; 347
Subsequent advancing 350
Use of position fire 293
When impossible for company to advance as a whole 258

Rust, how removed 1286

Saber, manual of 671-680

Safety lock 121; 185

SALUTES:
Hand 106
Returned by reviewing officer 618
Rifle 141
Saber 75; 673
With color 660
See "Honors and salutes" also "Military Courtesy"

SALUTING:
By lieutenant colonel in ceremonies 615
By staffs in ceremonies 619
Mounted junior to dismount before saluting dismounted
senior 75
On marches 1227
Regimental color 622
The color in reviews 618
When making or receiving reports 75

Saluting volleys fired in close order 269

Sapping, advancing to charging point 498

Scalds, first aid 1509

Scale of map distances 1867 (a)

Scales 1861-1869

Scales of maps 1885-1888

Scaling distances from map 1865

SCHOOL OF THE:
Battalion 295-363
Company 202-294
Soldier 97-147
Squad 148-201

SCOUTING AND PATROLLING:
Eyesight and hearing 1083
Cat and mouse contest 1089
Concealment and dodging 1087
Finding way in strange country 1084
Flag stealing contest 1090
Footmarks, following 1088
Landmarks, observing 1086
Lost, what to do 1085
Mouse and cat contest 1089
Points of compass 1084
Requisites of good scouts 1031
"Tracking" 1088

Scouts; See, "Mounted Scouts"

Scratches, first aid 1510

Search lights, trench warfare 1193

Seeing at night 1094

Semaphore signaling 863

Semi-blindness 1512

Sentinel's orders 1716

Sentinels, respect for 1517

Sentries firing at night 1104

Separated officers and others placing themselves under
order of nearest higher commander 390; 391

Sergeant of the guard 1642

Service calls 695

SERVICE OF INFORMATION:
Bridges, facts to be obtained about 1000
Bridges, reconnoitering of 992
Buildings, reconnoitering of 996
Camp noises 985
Camps, abandoned 986
Canals, facts to be obtained about 1003
Cross roads, how reconnoitered 989
Defiles, facts to be obtained about 1006
Defiles, reconnoitering of 991
Demolitions 1011
Enclosures, reconnoitering of 994
Facts to be obtained about various objects 998
Fords, reconnoitering of 992
Heights, facts to be obtained about 1010
Heights, reconnoitering of 990
Houses, reconnoitering of 996
Indications to be noticed by patrols 983
Marches, facts to be obtained about 1007
Patrolling:
Facts to be obtained about various objects by patrols 998
Civilians 970
Flames and smoke 987
Messages 979; 980
Model reports 1016
Night work 975
Patrol fighting 977
Principles of patrolling 967
Patrols:
Acting upon meeting hostile patrols 971
By whom furnished 962
Coördination before departure 966
Definition 959
Formation 968
Guarding against being cut off 974
Halts 970
Inspection before departure 961
Leaders 961
Orders and instructions 963
Preparation for starting 965
Prisoners to be captured 984
Problems 1017-1019
Rate of march 969
Report on return 1015
Returning by different route 973
Scattered patrols 972
Signals 978
Size 960
Ponds, facts to be obtained about 1007
Positions, reconnoitering of 995
Railroads:
Demolitions 1013
Facts to be obtained about 999
Reconnaissance of positions 989
Rivers, facts to be obtained about 1001
Roads, facts to be obtained about 998
Signs to be noticed by patrols 983
Springs, facts to be obtained about 1008
Suggestions for gaining information about the enemy 983
Suggestions for reconnaissance of positions 989
Telegraph line, demolition 1012
Telegraphs, facts to be obtained about 1004
Valleys, facts to be obtained about 1009
Villages, facts to be obtained about 1005
Villages, reconnoitering of 997
Vision limits of 988
Wagon roads, demolition 1014
Woods, facts to be obtained about 1002
Woods, reconnoitering of 993

SERVICE OF SECURITY:
Advance guard, general principles 1021-1024
Advance guard order 1025-1026
Advance guard problems 1033-1046
General principles 1020
Outposts:
Advance cavalry 1056
Cavalry outpost 1071
Changes for the night 1075
Communication between subdivision 1074
Composition 1053
Concealment 1068
Cossack post 1061
Definition and duties 1051-1052
Detached posts 1069
Distances between subdivisions 1055
Entrenchments 1067
Establishing the outpost 1073
Examining posts 1070
Flags of truce 1066
Formation 1054
Intercommunication 1074
Obstacles 1067
Outguards 1058
Outpost order 1073
Patrols 1064-1065
Pickets 1059
Problems 1077; 1078; 1079
Relieving outpost 1076
Reserves 1063
Sentinels 1062
Sentry squad 1060
Subdivisions 1054
Supports 1057
Problems, advance guards 1033-1046
Rear guard, general principles 1047-1050

Setting-up exercises 826; 837

SHELTER TENT:
Care of 1303
Pitching:
New model 682
Old model 707-710
Striking 687

Shock, first aid 1511

SHOES:
Care 1292
On marches 1229
Polishing 1295; 1299; 1300
Repair 1294
Selection 1293

"Short point" 824 (d)

Shot group 1412

Shots grazing enemy have approximate value of hits 291

Sick report 889

Side step 114

Siege operations 496

Siege works 1172

Sight rear, description 1343

SIGHT SETTING:
Command 188
Importance 425

Sighting and aiming 1350

Sighting drills 1356; 1383

Sights, kinds of 1352

Signal Corps, establishment of lines of communication 399

SIGNAL FLAGS:
Carried by musician (now bugler) 94; 401
Carried by orderlies 400
Description 94
Use 95

SIGNALING:
"Chop chop" signal 863
General service code 861
Heliograph, flash lantern, searchlight 864
Morse code 866
Semaphore code 863
Sound signals 865
Wigwag 862

SIGNALS:
Arm 92
Attention fixed at first motion 82
Bugle used on and off the battlefield 90
Captain of supporting company to look out for major's
signals 263
Cease firing 90
Change elevation 92
Commence firing 90
Communication between firing line and reserve 96
Flag 94; 96
For "Platoon" and "Squad," use of 93
Instruction in use of 81
Limitation of 84
Long blast of whistle:
Signifies suspension of firing 193
To be avoided as signal for cease firing in rushes 234
Movement commences when signal is understood 82
Range, to announce 92
Repetition of 83
Special prearranged 84
Training in use of, to control firing line 55 (d)
Use during firing 271
Use on firing line 431
Use of saber, rifle, or headdress in making 81
When used 80
Whistle 91

Simple maneuvers best 375

Simple movements essential to correct battle training 52

Simulate load, how executed 186

Simultaneous movements by companies or platoons in
battalion drill 305

Single loader, use of rifle as 186

Single rank 98 (a); 616

Sitting position used instead of kneeling one 178

Size of clothing, record 906

SKIRMISHERS:
Deployment:
Company 243
General rules 236-244
Squad 170
To rear 246
Face to front and take advantage of cover on halting 240
Interval between 170; 172; 247; 255; 447
Not assembled, marching to rear 173
To form from platoon or squad column 253

Skulking of troops carrying back wounded 381

Sky lines to be avoided 421

Sleeping bag 685; 686

SLING, GUN:
Adjustment and use 1387
Included in grip of piece at balance 122 (First)
Use when deployed 184

Sling packs, old equipment 706

Slopes, gentle reverse 1427

Slopes on maps 1868

Slower, fire 191

Small arms firing. See "Rifle training and instruction"

Smartness taught by drills at attention, etc. 55 (a)

Snake's bites 1480

Sniperscope 1208

Snow blindness 1512

Sore throat 1513

Sortie steps 1150

Sound signals 865

Special units; posts of 71; 72

Spider bites 1514

Spirit of order to be complied with by officers 377

Spirit to govern in interpreting drill regulations 53

Splicing 1133-1135

Splints 1484

Spoon, care 1306

Sprains, first aid 1516

SQUAD:
Base 236; 239
Composition 149
Dressing 154
Front when deployed 171
Integrity in battle 151
Movements executed as prescribed in school of the soldier 152
Right 165
Right (left) about 167
To dismiss 147
To form 153

SQUAD COLUMN:
Deployment 253
How executed 251
To assemble from 254
Use in advancing 249; 252

Squad drill, object 149

SQUAD LEADER:
Action at preparatory command for forming skirmish line 237
Corporal is 150
Duties in fire fight 289
Post 150

SQUADS:
Deployment when company is deployed 239
Designation 205
Division of company into 203
Grouping soldiers into 148
Preservation of integrity in battle 151
Right (left) about 228
Right (left) column right (left) 226
Right (left) front into line 235

Stable guards 1806

Stack arms 160; 161

STAFF:
Does not change position when commander faces about to
give command 74
Draws and returns saber with chief 73
Habitually mounted 73
Post of 73
Saluting by, in review 619
Turning out of column in review 620; 621

Stains, how removed 1284

Standards and colors 1575

Standing trench 1146

"Star Spangled Banner" 1572

"STAR SPANGLED BANNER" PLAYED AT:
Funeral 641
Review 624

Statement of clothing charged to enlisted men 904

Stationary targets, firing at 1428

Step, change, how executed 119

Stepping off with left foot 107

Steps and marchings 107-119

Stings, first aid 1517

Straggling in marches 1224

Strange country, finding way in 1084

Striking tents 687; 690

SUBORDINATES:
Coöperation 387
Latitude allowed and initiative 384; 385; 386

SUCCESS IN BATTLE:
Depends upon leadership, etc. 365
Factors entering into 373; 376
Object of military training 50
Principles for increasing probability of, provided for
in drill regulations 53

SUCCESSION OF THIN LINES:
Command for advancing 255
Use in advancing 249
Use and purpose 256

Successive formations, guide toward point of rest 65

Successive movements in double time, base unit marches in
quick time 61

Suffocation, first aid 1478

Summary court records 903

Summary of combat principles 550

Sunburn, first aid 1485; 1518

Sunstroke 1519

Superiority of fire 414-438

SUPPORT:
Artillery 601-605
Battalion:
Battalion acting alone in defense 357
Distance from firing line 338
Division of battalion into support and firing line 335
Furnished by battalion 455
None at beginning 339
Position 337
Size 336
Company:
Captain to look out for major's signals 363
Control by major 263
Duties of officers and sergeants upon joining firing line 266
Formations for 262
Original platoon divisions to be maintained 266
Promptness in reënforcing firing line 265
Reënforcements joining firing line 264
Occupying trenches vacated by firing line, to improve
same 476
Of firing line, strength 449; 450
Post and strength, in holding attack 500
To cover withdrawal 362

Supporting artillery 434-437

Supreme will, but one in battle 387

SURPRISE:
Each commander to guard his command against 442
Human element 92
Protection against, when company is acting alone 26

Suspend firing 193; 194

Syphilis 146

Tactical exercises, methods of conducting 37

Tactical orders 32

Tactical principles, application of 5

Take arms 16

TAKE INTERVAL:
Actions of guides and file closers 213
How executed 156

TAKING DISTANCE:
Actions of guides and file closers 66
How executed 158

"Tanks" 1204

TARGET:
Action in defense when it disappears 294
Aiming points, use 284
Announced before or after range 181
Allotment to platoon leaders 282
Apportioned by major 340
Assignment by major 281
Change to be avoided 281
Choice of, etc. 422
Designation 201; 1445; 1447 (a)
Determination of distance to 276
Distribution of fire 282; 283; 427
Hostile firing line usual target 281; 345
Observation of 424; 429
Once designated, not changed unless ordered 182

Target practice. See "Rifle training and instruction"

Target records, company 907

Targets, number hit 1418

TEAMWORK:
Developed by thorough and uniform training 51
General principles 385-391

Technical principles of firing 1409

Telegraph code 866

Telephones in trenches 1171

Tent folding 691

TENT PITCHING:
All types except shelter and conical wall 688
Conical wall 689
Shelter 681; 682

Tent striking 687; 690

Terrain exercises 945; 949

THE COLOR:
Cased, defined 659
Meaning of "Color" 658
National, renders no salute 660
Receiving of 669
Salute by regimental 660
Where kept 659

Theoretical instruction, purpose 369

"The Star Spangled Banner," see "Star Spangled Banner"

THIN LINES SUCCESSION OF:
Commands for advancing 255
Use and purpose 256
Use in advancing 249

Thoroughness in training 922

"To the Color" sounded at review 624

To the rear, how executed 118

Tourniquet 1481

"Tracking" 1088

Trail, at, (command) 121 (sixth)

Trail from order 139

TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION:
Art of instruction on varied ground 933
Captain's responsibility for 202
Cheerfulness 930
Clearness 922
Commanding officers accountable for 51
Comradeship 932
Contentment 931
Courage 927
Cover, training in use of 939
Delivery of messages 958
Determination and individual intelligence 924
Fear 926
For battle, simple movements and elastic formations 52
Human element 925
Individual initiative 923
Interest 922
In use of signals to control fire line 55 (d)
Map problems 954
Method and progression 918
Object 50; 917
Of battalions, major responsible for 295
Operating against other troops 941
Practice in commanding mixed squads 940
Principles provided for in Drill Regulations 53
Program 919
Reality 922
Respect 929
Responsibility 921
See, "General Common Sense Principles of Applied Minor
Tactics"
Simultaneous instruction and training 920
Surprise 928
Thoroughness 51; 922
Vanity 922

Trajectory 1349

Traveling in strange country 1084

Traverses 1149

Treatment of soldiers 872

TRENCH AND MINE WARFARE:
Aerial mines 1200
Aids to firing 1209
Asphyxiating gases 1194
Bombs from air-craft 1202
Countermining 1211
Grenades and bombs 1197; 1198; 1199
Helmets 1205
Liquid fire 1196
Masks 1206
Mining 1210
Periscopes 1207
Protection against gases 1195
Protection against hand grenades 1203
Sniperscope 1208
"Tanks" 1204
Winged torpedoes 1201

TRENCHES:
Located by major 351
Occupied by supports and reserves, to be improved 462
See "Field fortifications"

Trial shots, determination of range 1395

Trials by court-martial 882

Triangle of sighting 1359

Trigger-squeeze exercise 1370

Troops stable guards 1808

Trous de loup 1184

True meridian 1873

Turning about, mounted officer 74

Turning movements when allowable 458

TURNING ON FIXED PIVOT:
How executed 164
When used 66

Two's right (left) front into line 235

Umpire 55; 371

UNFIX BAYONET:
Krag rifle 694
Springfield rifle 143

Uniform, dignity of 1523

UNIT:
Attack 342
Fire 287

Units not to be broken up 378

Unload 180; 187

Unload, Krag rifle 703

Unnecessary hardship to be avoided 380

Unsling equipment 648

Unsling packs, old equipment 706

Urinal tubs 1244

Use of cover 195-199

Use of ground 420; 421

Valleys determination of range 1395

Variety in instruction 922

Vegetables, distribution of disease 1458

Venereal disease 1466

Verbal orders 393

Vertical clock face system of target designation 1447

Visibility problem 1875

Vision at night 1094

VOLLEY FIRING:
How executed 189
Use 278

Wall tents 688

War game 946; 949

Warning calls 692

Watchmen 1781

WATER:
Distribution of disease 1457
In camp 1253
In trenches 1168

Whistle, long blast 193

Whistle signals 91

Whistles, by whom carried, different tones, etc. 83

Wigwag 862

Will supreme, but one in battle 387

Windage 1384

Winged torpedoes 1201

Wire entanglements 1181; 1182; 1188

Wire fence, trenches 1183

WITHDRAWAL FROM ACTION:
Action by commander 549
Covered by support 362
Generally effected at heavy cost 545
Part of line to be withdrawn first 548
Rear guard and distance to be placed between enemy and
defeated troops 545
Reserve used to check pursuit 547
Retreating troops to be gotten under control as soon as
possible 548
Selection of rendezvous point 549
Under fire 475
Use of artillery, machine guns and cavalry 546
Use of machine guns 557

With dummy (blank or ball) cartridges, load 185

"Without the numbers" 122 (Fifth)

Witness, appearance as 1531

Wood, camping 1252

Work, devolution of 869

Wounded not to be carried back by fighting troops 381

Wounds, first aid 1520

Yellow fever 1469

Zero of rifle 1392

Zone of effective fire 1415

THE MOSS PUBLICATIONS

OFFICERS' MANUAL $2.50
NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS' MANUAL 1.50
PRIVATES' MANUAL 1.00
MANUAL OF MILITARY TRAINING 2.25
QUESTIONS ON MANUAL OF MILITARY TRAINING .50
APPLIED MINOR TACTICS 1.25
FIELD SERVICE 1.25
INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS SIMPLIFIED .75
SPANISH FOR SOLDIERS 1.00
SELF-HELPS FOR THE CITIZEN-SOLDIER 1.25
RIOT DUTY .50
ARMY CHANGES Single copies, 50c; annual subscription 1.50
ARMY PAPERWORK 2.00
MILITARY TRAINING FOR BOYS .50
PEACE AND WAR DUTIES OF THE ENLISTED MAN .50
TRENCH WARFARE 1.25
QUESTIONS ON INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS .50
COMPANY TRAINING .50
EXTRACTS FROM ARMY REGULATIONS 1.50
COMBINED ARMY PUBLICATIONS 2.25
QUESTIONS ON COMBINED ARMY PUBLICATIONS 1.25
OUR FLAG AND ITS MESSAGE .25
WHAT SAMMY'S DOING .75
ORIGIN AND SIGNIFICANCE OF MILITARY CUSTOMS .50
ARMY MANUAL FOR MILITARY SURGEONS 2.00
A B C'S OF PERSONAL PREPAREDNESS $ .50
Intended to be used with the "Dandy Dummy Gun" .75
----- 1.25
(Plus transportation charges on gun.)

[Illustration]

PUBLISHERS

GEORGE BANTA PUBLISHING COMPANY

MENASHA, WISCONSIN

--> Banta's Complete Catalogue of Military Books will be mailed on
application.

[Illustration]

CORONA

_The Pen of the Army_

Note the ease with which this portable writing machine may be used
under service conditions.

Its parts never work loose or drop off. It has no attachments and does
not take down.

You can carry Corona anywhere for, case and all, it weighs but 9 lbs.
and measures only 10 × 11-1/4 × 4-1/4 ins.

Being built almost entirely of aluminum and steel, Corona is
practically indestructible.

The Corona Folding Stand adds greatly to the convenience of using
Corona in the field. This stand has three telescopic brass legs,
stands 24 ins. high and collapses to 10-3/4 ins. It weighs 2 lbs.

_Price of Corona and case, $50_
_Price of Folding Stand, $5_

Corona Typewriter Co., Inc.

GROTON, NEW YORK

To make your shoes waterproof
To make your shoes soft and comfortable
To make your shoes wear 3 times longer
To keep the harness and saddle in good order

Use Viscol

[Illustration]

Viscol makes the leather soft and pliable and also waterproof.
Viscolized leather remains soft and pliable under continuous hard
service, even when it is worn in salt water or in snow. Viscol is a
solution of a rubber-like material which amalgamates with the leather
substance and is not driven out of the leather by heat or by water,
the way oils are. Its beneficial effect is lasting. Leather that is
treated with Viscol wears several times as long as leather that has
not been thus treated.

Viscol is sold by many of the Post Exchanges and by most shoe dealers.
If you can not procure it at the nearest Post Exchange or from your
shoe dealer, write to

VISCOL COMPANY
East Cambridge Boston, Mass.

TROPHIES AND PRIZES

For Military, Athletic and Sporting Events

Of Quality as Designed and made for the U. S. Army and Navy, West
Point Academy and U. S. Naval Academy

_Catalogues and Information upon Request_

BAILEY, BANKS & BIDDLE CO.

_Diamond Merchants, Jewelers, Silversmiths, Goldsmiths, Heraldists_

PHILADELPHIA

[Illustration]

Eisner
UNIFORMS

For
U. S. ARMY
and
NATIONAL GUARD
Officers and Enlisted Men

UNIFORMS

Independent Military Organizations

UNIFORMS

Military Training Camps

UNIFORMS

Boys Military and Society Clubs

UNIFORMS

Official National Outfitter
Boy Scouts of America

SIGMUND EISNER CO.

Red Bank, N. J.

New York Office, 103 Fifth Avenue

COMFORT YOUR FEET

Keep shoes, puttees and all leather accouterments soft, water proof
and pliable with 3-in-One. Not sticky or greasy. Contains no acid.
After a march or tiresome drill, rub

3-IN-ONE OIL

on your feet--wonderful how it helps take the smart out!

[Illustration]

Use 3-in-One on gun and revolver--prevents rust and keeps them in
order for inspection. Use on bayonet and side arms, too.

3-in-One will make your gun work with out sticking or jamming. Best
shots use and recommend it. Put 3-in-One on your razor strop; also
draw razor blade between thumb and finger moistened with 3-in-One
after shaving. You'll shave easier.

[Illustration]

Sold at Post Exchanges and Ship's Stores: 1-oz. bottle, 10c; 3-oz.,
25c; 8-oz. (1/2 pt.) 50c. Also in HANDY Oil Cans, 3-oz. 25c. _Avoid
substitutes._

FREE a generous sample and Dictionary of uses

THREE-IN-ONE OIL CO., 42 DAL, Broadway, New York

_Outdoor Equipage_

MEYER'S MILITARY SHOPS

[Illustration]

_Riding Breeches and Habits_

TAILORS

F Street, between 13th and 14th Sts. N. W.

WASHINGTON, D. C.

_Complete Outdoor Equipage_

_Ready to Wear_

_For Men, Women, and Children_

RIDING BREECHES, PUTTEE LEGGINS, NORFOLK JACKETS, HUNTING CLOTHES,
BOOTS AND SHOES, MIDDY BLOUSE AND SKIRTS, TENTS AND SLEEPING BAGS,
RIDING SKIRTS AND NORFOLK JACKETS, MOCCASINS

Write for Catalogue

_Visit Our Camp Rooms When in Washington_

RIDABOCK & COMPANY

149-151 West 36th St., New York

_U. S. Army, National Guard Officers' Uniforms and Equipments_

_Military School Uniforms and Equipments_

_Military Training Camp Outfits_

_Military Supplies, Military Textbooks_

Individual Departments and Workshops for the Respective Grades
of Uniforms.

USED BY UNCLE SAM'S EXPERT RIFLEMEN

[Illustration]

Hoppe's
Nitro Powder Solvent No. 9

Trade Mark Registered

For Cleaning High Power (Springfield) Rifles,
Revolvers and Firearms of All Kinds

A compound that will remove the residue of any high-power powder,
including Black Powder. It will neutralize and residue and loosen
metal fouling and leading that may be left in the barrel after
cleaning, and prevent Pitting. No. 9 is the only Rifle cleaning
Solvent that will remove Rust, Metal Fouling and Leading. For cleaning
the .22 cal. Rifles, Revolvers and Automatic Pistols it has no equal.
Nitro Powder Solvent No. 9 is endorsed by the most prominent Riflemen
in America. Used by U. S. Rifle Teams, and at Buenos Ayres, Argentine
Matches. No Rifleman or Quartermaster's Department should be without
it.

Sold by Sporting Goods Dealers and at Post Exchanges

FRANK A. HOPPE, Sole Manufacturer, Station O, Philadelphia, U. S. A.

ESTABLISHED 1854

B. Pasquale Company

115-117 Post St. SAN FRANCISCO, CAL.

_The Only Manufacturers of_

Army and Navy Equipments
and Uniforms on the Pacific Coast

"QUALITY AND FIT GUARANTEED"

(Write for Catalogue)

THE MILITARY HISTORIAN AND ECONOMIST

QUARTERLY

Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass.

_Subscription, $3.00 per annum._

Edited by MAJOR A. L. CONGER, U. S. A., and PROFESSOR R. M. JOHNSTON,
Harvard University. Advisory Board: General J. F. Morrison, U. S. A.,
Colonel J. W. McAndrew, U. S. A., Professors C. J. Bullock, A.
Bushnell Hart, O. M. W. Sprague, and Justin H. Smith, Esq.

Original articles and notes on military history, the Conduct of War,
Strategy, Tactics. Military economics by the best American and foreign
authorities.

CLAUSEWITZ TO DATE

Edited by R. M. JOHNSTON

Synopsis of the views of Clausewitz with selected quotations from the
best military theorists, systematically modernized.

The volume measures only 1-3/4 × 2-1/2 inches.

Field service binding. _Price, postpaid $1.00._

THE MILITARY HISTORIAN AND ECONOMIST

275 Widener Hall CAMBRIDGE, MASSACHUSETTS

+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
| TRANSCRIBER'S NOTE. |
| =================== |
| |
| Irregularities within the original book have been preserved, |
| notably: |
| |
| Part I has appendicies A, B and D. There is no Appendix C. |
| |
| Part I Chapter I contains plates II, III and VI. Plates I, IV |
| and V are not present nor referenced. |
| |
| References to other paragraphs within the text mostly use the |
| book paragraph number. However, there are some cases where the |
| paragraph number relates to the source document paragraph number |
| (in brackets at the end of the paragraph)--these have been left |
| as shown in the book. The link in the html version does, however,|
| point to the intended paragraph. |
| |
| Spelling variants (e. g. reinforce vs reënforce) have been |
| preserved. |
| |
| The 'pointing finger' picture has been transcribed as --> in the |
| text version. |
| |
| Brackets have been added as necessary to equations to aid clarity. |
| |
| For consistency, subheadings which originally appeared next to a |
| paragraph number have been extracted out to the line above (i. e. |
| they do not appear on the same line as the paragraph number in |
| this transcription.) Affected paragraphs are: |
| |
| 817, 818, 826, 828-34, 836-47, 860, 862, 864-6, 1016-9, 1034-45, |
| 1078, 1277, 1320, 1340-1, 1352-3, 1356, 1358-65, 1367-70, 1372, |
| 1376, 1379-80, 1383. |
| |
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+

*** End of this LibraryBlog Digital Book "Manual of Military Training - Second, Revised Edition" ***

Home